CULTURE SUCCESSION in SOUTH EASTERN AUSTRALIA

From LATE PLEISTOCENE 1o rue PRESENT.

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Sours Auvsrratian Museum.

Text Fig. 1-9

CONTENTS.

Page

BUMMNETY Gun Eee ed nid cme dnts® me gts 1

Introduction sn. me ectce «= gd ues 3

The Kartan Culture 9 2 oust tem tees nem ts 5

The Tartangan Culture 2.000 oe tutes oe 9

The-Pirrian:Culture- ceo ae Gm» @= <= Ge He 17

The Mudukian Culture 20000 2, cesses tte ee 23

The Murundian or Present Day ‘Culture a wiht = waite Gletlts 29

Geological Evidence for Antiquity 2000 ete tt 32

Carbon 14 dates 000 aes “es at dum. Bh oF 34

Climatic Changes 220s sess settee mt Hattet 38

The Succession of Industries ..... 2. 0 gy CES we = «OD

Rock Carvings and Culture Succession . wipe Samuels ta Line 39

Physical Types 0.00 we saan Po tio swith tht 40

General Discussion i,t tests nett nent tate 44

Acknowledgements __...... tale we ltew Guinn le telus Sanal: wat 46

References Cited 0.000 nk aeee en em 47

A healthy science is one tn which there is continuous re-evaluation

of problems in the light of present evidence... As humans we think

in terms of labels we put on things. But if the labelling system does

not keep up with thought il is demonstrably a short time before thought

ceases... . Putting the label on ts only half the game; taking it off again

is the other half.

Hauuam L. Movrus, Juntor.

SUMMARY.

This paper summarises work in Adelaide since 1928 to establish the

archaeological culture succession, It gives newly available time data

for the Kartan culture of Late Pleistocene, traces changes through

Tartangan, Pirrian and Mudukian industries to the latest or Murundian

Culture phase.

RECORDS OF THE 8.4. MUSHUM

Geological evidence and Carbon 14 data are compared and co-

ordinated with the succession, the whole sequence being summarised in

a table (fig. 1).

The survival of pirri implements as stone spear tips on the karu

spear in Western Australia is reported, as is also the use of a Tartangan

11000

# and earlier

Fig, 1,

Glaciation to the present time.

CULTURE SEQUENCE AND DATES

IN SOUTH EASTERN AUSTRALIA

—Western Europeans

MURUNDIAN curture

MUDUKIAN cuLturz

PIRRIAN curturz

tm, Pirrian Culture (mid-point) in Devon Downs Cave (4250 £189 BP.

MID-RECENT HIGH (10 ft. terrace )

‘

? ‘

-—Tartangan at type site (6020+ 150 B.P.)

TASMANIAN

KARTAN Tartangan at Lake Meniudee (6570+ 100 B.P. )

CULTURE

ISOLATED

ISOLATED TARTARGAN cuLture Xe

TASMANIA

KANGAROO

Tartangan site at Cape Martin

ISLAND

- {8700 f 120 B,P.) ———;

=END OF PLEISTOCENE GLACIATION — rise of sea wi

KARTAN cuLTURE

Kartan of Fuiham, Uallett Cove, Kangaroo Island and Tasmania.

POR TIAET HONG T TG

Diagram summarising the succession of cultures in South Eastern Australia from the Last

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 3

type of knife called jimari among living people in the North of Western

Australia, and of a hafted chipped-back knife called juan, from Queens-

land.

There is a brief discussion on the types of human beings who may

have devised, developed, transported and used these implements in

Australia and Tasmania.

The earliest date based on geological data ig indicated to be Late

Glacial, prior to 10000 B,P. (Before the Present), for the Kartan Culture

of Hallett Cove and Fulhara, South Australia. This culture is indicated as a

widespread one, cxtending out from Indonesia and South Hastern Asia to

Australia. The succeeding Tartangan culture, at a minimum, embraced the

period between 8700 B.P., based on a C' date at Cape Martin and 6020

B.P. at the type site at Tartanga. A C™ date of 4250 BLP. is available

for a specific horizon (Layer IX) at the type site of the Pirrian Culture,

in Devon Downs Rock Shelter, South Australia,

There is some discussion on climates and the conclusion is reached

that there is no foundation for the existence of a major arid cycle in

the Mid-Holocene Period but that the Mediterranean climate of Southern

Australia in modern times represents the virtual maxinium of an arid

cycle which has been developing over the past two thousand years or more,

CULTURE SUCCESSION IN SOUTH EASTERN AUSTRALIA.

INTRODUCTION,

The idea of a succession behind the array of archaeological imple-

ments discovered in Australia is probably old but little tangible evidence

Was available until a relatively short time azo,

Definite cultural stratification in Australia perhaps was first demon-

strated in 1929, with the spade, by Hale and Tindale (1930) at Tartanga,

and at Devon Downs Rock Shelter, on the River Murray, in South

Australia. This work began as the result of a chance find by a local

collector of fossils, W, P. Roy, who showed a mineralised human pert

cranium to Edgar R. Waite, Director of the South Australian Museum,

in January 1928, a few days before his death at the Australian Association

for the Advancement of Science Congress of that month in Hobart.

Three culture horizons were found to be pregent in the 6 metre (21 ft.)

depth of deposit in the rock shelter at Devon Downs and a still earlier

culture horizon was in a river bank site on Tartanga Island a few

miles away. The strata, in descending arder, were named as Murundian

(the present day culture), Mudukian, Pirrian and Tartangan.

Shortly afterwards Tindale and Maegraith (1931) identified ancther,

and separate industry, on Kangaroo Island. This island was uninhabited

when visited by European explorers in 1802. Some archseological

4 RECORDS OF THE §8.A, MUSEUM

implements had been reported previous to 1931 by W. Howchin but no

details had been given. This Kangaroo Island culture (later to be

named the Kartan) was recognised by Tindale (1937) also to be present

on the mainland cf Australia and in Tasmania, where it was an earlier

stratum in a Tasmanian culture sequence. It was then demonstrated,

on stratigraphic evidence, that implements at Fulham near Adelaide were

older than the Pirrian and, by inferenee were older than the Tartangan;

they occurred on an ancient land surface, now below sea level, which

subsequently had been covered by marine deposits, and then by lacustrine

beds above which were the Pirrian camps.

Tindale (1941) called this very old suite of implements the Kartan

Culture, typically from Kangaroo Island, but present also on the mainland

of Australia and in Tasmania. The industries specifically at Fulham

and at Hallett Cove, South Australia, were thought at the time to be

sufficiently different from the true Kartan Culture to be called the Fulham

Industry simply because they supposedly lacked one specific implement

type, the sumatralith. However it is now clear, at least at Hallett Cove,

that this was due to insufficient collecting, for typical sumatraliths are

known from the site, and the supposed differences can be considered less

important.

The only other culture phase terms proposed for implement suites

in South Eastern Australia are ones by McCarthy (1939) who has referred

to the “Gambierian" in the South East of South Australia and the

“Bondaian” and “Eloueran” on the coast of New South Wales, The

status of the “Bondaian” was discussed by Tindale (1955) and all three

are referred to in a later section of the paper.

The significance of the detailed sections and cultural sequences

revealed by excavation at Devon Downs and Tartanga did not immediately

attract attention in Australia. Thus Shelilshear (1937) spoke of the “lack

of accurate and detailed excavation work in Australia”, A useful summary

of work and opinions on man in Australia up to 1942 was given by

Mahony (1943).

The next phase of study was geological exploration. Keble (1947,

published 1948) had a paper which appeared just after one by Tindale

(1947). These papers independently covered much the same ground in

exploring the geological background of man’s sojourn in Australia. The

approach to the problem of dating Pleistocene and Recent time in Australia

by establishing links with the world-wide phenomena of eustatic shore

lines, foreshadowed by Tindale (1933) was amplified in 1947. The 1933

paper was not noticed by Keble, so that some of his conclusions had been

long anticipated.

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 4

KARTAN CULTURE.

The Kartan Culture is characterised on Kangaroo Island by the

presence of sumatraliths, hammer stones, horse-hoof implements, same

discoidal implements of a type which have come to be known as kurta,

and some poorly worked flakes. Most of the implements are relatively

large and coarsely made, Tindale and Maegraith (1981), Tindale (1937)

and Cooper (1943) have described and figured many examples, and Tindale

(1950, 1951) has reported the discovery of hurta-like implements surviving

in use as the cutting blades of the palaeolithic kadj axe of the people of

South Western Australia.

At the archaeological site of Hallett. Cove (Section 562, Hundred of

Noarlunga) further field work has been done by Mr. H. M. Cooper, This

site was originally found by him ard recorded by Tindale (1937).

Ploughing of the land for agricultural purposes has lately brought to the

surface many more implements, including some very typical sumatraliths.

Cooper has observed that the Karian implements of Hallett Cove

are all made from pebbies derived from the fluvio-glacial deposits and

associated chocolate shales of the Marinoan Series, which occur in

nearby gullies, whence they have been carried up on to the plateau

campsite, There are no implements made from stones derived from

the present pebble beach, which lies at the base of the cliffs some

two hundred feet below the site, although these pebbles were, at Moana

and al other adjoining sites, very much used in a different fashion as raw

material for implements by men of the Pirrian and later cultures..

From this fact an inference is made by the present author that at

the time of occupation of the Kartan site on the crest of the hills, sea level

was lower than at present and hence did not lap the cliffs. The present

pebble beach at Hallett Cove would then have been buried under a talus

slope, and a foreshore plain, such as occurs further to the north as the

Adelaide Plains would have extended out: beyond the hills at Hallett Cove,

It is evident that during the low sea levels of the Last Glaciation the

shoreline was many miles away.

This is consistent with the presence of similar implements on the

land surface below present sea level, at Fulham, a few miles further

north (Tindale 1937, fig. 11).

The occurrence of a relatively large number of sumatraliths, at

Hallett Cove on the mainland, narrows: down the supposed differences

between the Fulham Industry of the South Australian mainland and ike

Kartan Industry from Kangaroo Island. The ratios of sumatraliths ta

horsehoof implements approached 90 per cent on Kangaroo Island whereas

at Hallett Cove sumatraliths are present only to the extent of about 40

6 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

per cent. On Kangaroo Island sites no fewer than 1,221 sumatralith

implements havé been recovered; the Hallett Cove site has to date yiclded

some £0) examples. ‘Two. possible explanations are offered to account for

the different proportions of sumatraliths met with on mainland sites,

If Kartan men were present in Australia at the end of the Pleistocene

Period they witnessed the rise of sea level from the low eustatic terrace

condition which it held during the rigours of the last phase of the Last

Ice Age, At first Kangaroc Island would have been connected with the

mainiand, hence from the point of view of any people then living in

Australia this “island” was merely one of a number of cold, south-facing

coastal areas, With the coming of early Recent Time. about 10000 BP.

Kangaroo Land began to be cut off from the mainland, as it is totay.

Any people living there would have become isolated, and protected from

mainland contacts, It might be safe then to assume that, in their sheltered

territory it would be possible to have a far lesser call to make combat

weapons, hence horsehoof implements, perhaps chiefly used as unhafted

adzes or choppers. in working wood for weapon making, might become

fewer in proportion to the sumuatra implements used evidently in food

gathering. It will be recalled that among’ some living aborigines of coastal

South Queensland, sumatralithtike implements were used in digging out

bracken fern rhizomes for food.

Another possible explanation of the differences should be considered.

Aborigines of all periods were prone to retrieve the materials left on old

campsites by earlier men, converting them to new uses according to their

own ideals of implement making. On the mainland sumatfrus being large

and of selected stone were doubtless good sources of quartzite for micro-

liths and flakes throughout Recent Time. On the island where the Kartan

Culture persisted unchanged tili it became extinct, little such scavenging

of surface sites would occur, hence the proportions of discarded imple-

ments present might not have been altered in this manner on the island.

Mr. H. M. Cooper is at present studying a few implements of later cultures

which hint at sporadic later casual visits to the island.

New sites for the Kartan Culture are constantly being discovered,

At Moana, South Australia, H. Burrows and the writer found a typical

sumatra on the surtace of eroded kunkar limestone at the southern end

of the sand plain, It was coated with lime (specimen A,48749). Mr. J, EB,

Johnson found several excellent sumatraliths at Terrapinna Rockhole on

Mooclawatanna Station in the Flinders Ranges, Seuth Australia (specimens

A.48785).

In August, 1955, on the official excursion to Keilor, Victoria, during

the Science Congress, Mr. EK, R. Hammet picked up and kindly presented

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 7

to the author a large, coarse, flaked implement which he found on the

surface of a ridge in the valley above the left bank of the “Dry Creek”,

at Keilor, within 100 yards of the fossil skull site. This implement seems

undoubtedly to belong with ones of the Kartan Culture, Whatever the

age of Keilor man himself, Kartan implement users were probably once

in this area, The specimen is now A.48061 in the South Australian

Museum.

Dr, A, Gallus more recently has submitted for identification other

large implement flakes found at several places in the Maribyrnong Valley,

Victoria. Four of them prove also to he artefacts of types characteristic

of the Kartan Culture phase. A typical quartzite flaked hand chopper was

af a weight (22 oz.) and general form which might be expected to occur

where tubular pieces of stone replace waterworn oval pebbles as raw

material in the making of sumatraliths. Others of his specimens were

found to be directly comparable with some implements described by Tindale

(1937, p. 50) from the older or Kartan-like Culture phase at St. Helens,

Tasmania. Tindale (1941) reported similar examples from Flinders and

Cape Barren Islands in Rass Strait, where the Newer Tasmanian Industry

is unknown.

Kartan types of implements are now known from many places on the

Australian mainland, notably at Calligillup, six miles east of Mt. Barker

in South Western Australia, at Roebourne in the north of Western Aus-

tralia; and at Yarrie Station on the De Grey River, North Western

Australia, where they were found by J. B, Birdsell and the present author,

the first named locality in 1939, and the others in 1953.

Messrs. B, Main and G. W. A, Bartholomew found a single large flake

which may belong to this culture on a sandhill between Roebourne and

Cossack, in Western Australia. Dr, J. B. Birdsell and the writer found a

horsehoof implement, similar to those of this culture, made from heavy

ironstone, at a place 16 miles East of Flora Valley, in North Western

Australia (Specimen A.45415 in S.A. Museum).

Mr, Lindsay Black has in his collection a typical sumatralith (his

no, 1729) from Bocstra, about 100 miles north of Yancannia near the

border between New South Wales and Queensland; it is made on 4

rather rough-textured pebble of red-stained quartzite.

Mr, Brian Daily, now Palaeontologist in this Museum, several years

ago found a rolled sumatralith (specimen A.46986 in the S.A. Museum)

with the working edge extending alone one side and the end of a rather

elongate ovate pebble; it is not quite typical of Kangaroo Island sumatra-

liths. It was on a ledge of mottled red, white and yellow argillaceous sand

of uncertain age between Late Tertiary and Sub-Recent time, about two

8 RECORDS OF THE 8A, MUSHUM

miles west of Lubra Point on the south coast of Bathurst Island in the

Northern Territory. This ledge protruded fram a sand dune about 70 feet

above high tide mark, He noted that no other implement of this type,

and no further sample of the rock of which it is manufactured was to

be found either on this island or on the adjoining Melville Island, where

he also worked. The specimen is figured by Tindale (1956 (2) p. 119).

Daily found similar types of pebbles in Cretaceous: Beds further east

on Bathurst Island.

The occurrence is useful in indicating the possible extension of the

Kartan Culture to what was part of the mainland of Australia in Pleisto-

cene time,

It ts of interest in another way. The present day inhabitants of

Melville and Bathurst Island are of negritic type only slightly modified

by some possible hybridisation with Australoid stock, This may help to

confirm indications from other quarters that some former link may have

existed between the negritos of Australia and Kartan Culture.

Implements of the same forms as those of the Kartan Culture are

characteristic of many sites in Sonth East Asia and Indonesia. They

are reported as far to the north as in the Bac-son Mountains of Tongking,

being found there and in Malaya, often in the lowest stratified occupational

layers present in caves and rock shelters. Heine-Geldern (1932 pl. 1,

fig. 4-5) figures examples from Bac-son.

Examples from caves called Gua Kerbaui in Perak, and Gua Badsk

in Lénggong, collected by the late P, D. R, Williams-Hunt are in the

South Australian Museum {specimens A.43256-43286).

Saurin (1953) suggests that Hoabinhien Culture sites in Indo-China

are mostly, if not wholly Post-Pleistocene in date. One of the charac-

teristic implements is the sumatralith.

The late date suggested for the Hoabinhien of Indo-China contrasts

with the increasing evidence that in the Australian corridor and in Aus-

tralia the Kartan Culture, which has similar implements, was at latest of

ale Pleistocene times in its main period of dominance. By about 9000

B.P, it had already been supplanted by the Tartangan in South Eastern

Australia, there being local survivals until more recent times only in

peripheral areas, and on islands such as Kangaroo Island. However, if

the Kartan Culture was, in the main, that brought to Australia by people

of negritic stock, then it is probable that it persisted for a long time in

the rain-forested areas along the eastern coast of Australia where negritos

survived. In areas near Brisbane, for example sumatralith-like implements

remained locally in use until modern times as digging stones in. the

gathering of bracken fern roots, for food (Jackson, 1939), McCarthy

(1947) has reported sumatra-like implements from sites he identifics as

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA a

modern on the North Cosst of New South Wales; the one figured is not

very typical of the Kartan Culture ones of Kangaroo Island.

The late date suggested for this type of culiure in a part of Asia

may also reflect the similar fact that negritic populations proved able to

maintain themselves until modern times in many areas of jungle. At

some places their primitive implements probably remained in use for «

long time, until they established sufficientiy cordial contacts with more

advanced peoples to enter into barter with them. It is noteworthy that

in Malaya sumatraliths and archaeological pottery have been reparted

together, and that the Semang negritog today trade forest products with

Malays for their requirements of metal tools, ete.

TARTANGAN CULTURE

This culture was criginally reported from Tartanga Island in tte

Murray River, where there is a series of beds identified as of Pre-10 foot

Terrace Age, with Unto profovitiatus as the principal food shell, and a

suite of piscine, reptilian and mammalian fossils, only oné of which, a

Macropus, may have been of an extinct species. Layer C, an upper horizon

in the Tartangan series, is now dated by Carbon 14 to 6020 = 150 BP,

Areas of Tartangan campsite are known also to be on the plateau near

Swan Reach, a few miles away. At Lake Menindee, Tindale (1955)

reported a Tartangan Culture as contemporary with beds containing a

large assemblage of fossil mammals (Tedford 1955). A hearth in this

Tartangan horizon has now been dated to 6570 + 100 B.P.

At Cape Martin in the South East of South Australia Tindale (1956

(4) and paper in press) reports a still earlier Tartangan horizon, dated to

8700 + 120 B.P. This isa lerra rossa soil on a land surface demonstrably

of Early Recent date. Tartangan sites found at Cape Northumberland,

Kongorong, Symon, and inland from Blackfellow Cave in the South Hast

of South Australia, as also at Cape Bridgewater, in Western Victoria

are also being discussed in the same paper.

The known distribution of the Tartangan, Culture is constantly being

extended, Latest reports of possible sites is by two correspondents,

Messrs. J. E. Johnson and 8, B, Warne who, writing from the Western

Desert near the Western border of South Australia state:—"At Giles Tank

in Western Australia we have found what seems to be a Tartangan Culture

and an undoubted culture of the Tartangan or pre-Tartangan has: turned

up on a Small site 6 miles South of Mt. Harriet, South Australia, where

large, coarsely but sharply percussicn-trimmed, deeply patinated toals of

micro-diorite are found. They are made on blockg and large insolation

flakes and prepared cores, and comprise horsehoofs, block choppers and

large flakes.”

io RECORDE OF THE &3.A. MUSEUM

The area of distribution of the Tartangan as an archaeological culture

thus possibly extends at least from the eastern borders of Western

Australia to Cape Bridgewater in Victoria and from Lake Menindee in

the Western part of New South Wales to the South Coast of Australia.

The Tartangan as revealed at these places resembles so closely the

implement culture of the Tasmanian aborigines of modern times that there

is eyery reason to suspect a link.

The Tasmanian implement types figured and described by Tylor

(1895) for example can all be matched among the general rm of imple-

ments of Tartangan facies to be taken in the coastal regions of the South

East of South Australia. The work of the Tartangan peoples plus the

nature of the flint there has yielded flakes identical in style, though

naturally widely differmg in manner of patination, ete,

Campbell and Noone (1943, p. 384), during their studies of the

implements of the Woakwine Range in the South Kast of South Australia,

sensed the resemblances between their Tartangan finds and those from

Tasmania, even though they were puzzled by the absence cf any imple-

ments of the types now known to belong to the Kartan Culture, It

would seem they had not appreciated that two culture pericds were

involved. They did not use the culture names proposed by Hale and

Tindale (1930),

The newly gained knowledge, that Tartangan folk were at Cape Martin

no more than about one thousand years after the probable time of the

severing of Tasmania from the Australian mainland at the end of the

Last Glaciation, clearly supports the conclusion that there was a direct

relationship and the fact that the Tartangan and Kartan people were not

everywhere contemporaneous expluins the sceming Inconsistency of the

absence of the Kartan types. One would expect that many of the Kartan

campsites along the coast were obliterated by the rise of sea level which

was one of the primary markers of the end of the Pleistocene.

‘The Kartan Culture, being earlier than the Tartangan had already

spread ta beth the Tasmanian and Kangaroo Island areas before the

Tartangans arrived,

We are led ta see that most probably the Tartangan Culture also was

moving inta and had already taken over the occupation of paris of the

Murray Valley and vicinily and of much of the area of Victoria near

the entrance to Tasmania, by the end of the Pleistocene. Both cultures

were shut off in Tasmania by the rise of sea level and we can postulate

perhaps a period of culture clash in Tasmania about the end of

Pieistocene time, leaving the Tasmanian Culture in command until modern

times.

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 11

Although the Tartangan Culture seemingly thus occupied a good part

of South-Hastern Australia by the end of the Pleistocene it probably had

not yet had time to penetrate as far westward as the Mt. Lofty Ranges.

Hence when the Kangaroo Island area was severed from the mainland

by the same rise of sea level as cut off Tasmania, the older Kartan Culture

was the only one represented in the area. It was cut off and persisted

unchanged on this large island until it became extinct, perhaps by the time

of the Mid-Recent High sea level. Despite active search no Kartan imple-

ments have been found on any Post-Mid-Recent coastal area on the island,

In Tasmania, on the contrary, the newer Tartangan implement culture

flourished, either replacing the older Kartan one or absorbing it (we cannot

yet tell which) to become the Newer Tasmanian Culture of yester year.

Certain it is that the Kartan on Kangaroo Island did not show any signs

of change before it became extinct, whereas over much of the mainjand

of South Eastern Australia, in the archaeological succession, Kartan was

superseded by Tartangan, and then by the Pirrian and the still later

cultures which followed.

Sufficient indications now exist to enable us to visualise probable

Early, Middle, and Late phases of the Tarfangan Culture, the whole

ranging in time from about, the last cold phase of the Pleistocene down ta

about 5000 B,P.

Early Tartangan was a large blade culture which possibly spread

to Australia from Asia, but it is not clearly recognised there; isolated

blades have been found in New Guinea which show resemblances, but

not much is known about them; they will be described when more infor-

mation is to hand.

The Tartangan of Cape Martin, at 8700 B,P., can be regarded tenta-

tively as the beginning of Middle Tartangan times. There is a wealth of

cultural material, in flint, from Hoods Drift, Symon and elsewhere on the

Woakwine Range which in part belongs here although much of it may,

when C™ tests are made, prove to belong ta the earlier phase and sa

be better placed with Harly Tartangan.

Late Tartangan times, on the mainland, may have commenced before

6500 B.P. on the Darling River. It typically is the Tartangan of the type

site at Tartangs, on the River Murray. The last namied series comprise

a late suite of implements, in an aia short of good stone for their

manufacture.

The solitary large crescentie implement of dull grey chert, figured

by Hale and Tindale (19830 fig, 229) from Layer TX in Devon Downs Rock

Shelter is like a Tartangsn implemen, and is either 2. very late curvival

Ge is an archaeological specimen picked up and carried there by a Pirtian

man,

12 RECORDS OF THE &5.A. MUSEUM

In its time of development the Tartangan of South Eastern Australia

may have covered that critical period which saw the decline and ultimate

disappearance of most of the population of large mammals.and giant birds

of the Australian Pleistocene.

Gill (1955) has discussed various theories to account for the crash

of the giant mammal assemblages of the Australian Pleistecene but does

not produce any clear cut evidence indicating man as a primary factor

in their extinction,

Although climatic changes are generally blamed for their extinction,

men doubtless had much to do with the final disappearance of these

creatures,

Mr, H. M. Cooper in April 1955 found a hearth on the crest of red

sand dunes at Pert Augusta West, at the head of Spencer Gulf, South

Australia, with burnt bones and teeth of Diprotoden and large flake

tools. These perhaps belonged to an early phase of the Tartangan Culture

or Jate Kartan period. He proposes to publish an account of this site.

From the data in the Lake Menindee area (Tindale 1955), the above

mentioned observation made by Cooper, and also a hint given by the

carvings of tracks of a giant bird (perhaps Genyornis} deseribed by

Hall, McGowan, and Guleksen (1951), at Pimba, South Australia it seems

likely that man hunted and ate the principal Pleistocene species, and that

in the Murray Basin, during the period between about 6500 B.P, and

6060 B.P., he succeeded in virtually eliminating all but a large kangaroo,

Macropus, like the modern species, Procoptodon, and the Devil (Sarca-

philus), which managed to survive in some humbers until Pirrian times,

(Hale and Tindale, 1930, pp. 211 and 215).

It is not yet certain when Tartangan folk disappeared from the

Murray Valley scene. They were definitely absent by 4250 B.P. when

Pirrian folk already were living there. No Tartangan implements have

been fotind on top of the blanket of ash spread by the eruption of Mt.

Gambier, which has been dated to 4710 + 70 B.P., although ones attri-

butable to the Pirrian and Mudukian cultures are present.

We are indebted to Mr. T. A. Rafter for this C™ date, furnished

in a letter addressed to Dr, C. Stephens of the C.S.LR.0., Adelaide, on

29 June 1955,

There are some links between the Tartangan Culture and some people

of the present time. During a visit of the Board for Anthropological

Research Expedition to Yuendumu, Central Australia, in August

1951 (made possible by a grant from the Wenner-Gren Fund) there was

an opportunity for this author to see and film a number of Ngalia men

making stone knives at a factory site near the Government Station. The

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 13

members of this tribe have continued to use the mine because of a demand

for knives to sell to Huropean visitors to the Station. The Ngalia men

whose techniques were studied on this. occasion, were the same as those

met by the author on a previous expedition to Cockatoo Creek in August

1932, when they were still nomadic savages, just being brought under

control, after the murder near Coniston Station of a white man, during

the initial phases of contact.

N.B.T

Fig. 2, a-c. Guim-hafied general purpose knife, af type used by Mangala tribe in desert east of

Tua Grange Bay, Western Australia, aative name [jimari|; specimen was No. 1964 in culleetion of Lindsay

Black, width 5,5m., specimen now A.49903 in S.A, Museum; df knife of jimuri type made by Pintubi

tribeaman at a factory site near Yuendumu while demonstrating stoné knapping methods (specimen

A.42899 in Svuth Australian Museum),

14 RECORDS OF THE §.A4. MUSEUM

The Ngalia type of knife has not changed in the intervening years.

Details of their technique of making Imives, of rather typical Central

Australian type, are reserved for a separate paper.

A man of the Pintubi tribe was present. He was a lately arrived

visitor from. the still nomadic Pintubi folk of the country along the

Western Australian border, south cast of Lake Macdonald, His knives

were entirely different from those of the other workers. Pintubi enes

were made from large flakes struck off from a core, sometimes as a long

oval blade, and at others to make a wide squat one. All his trimming

was done with the aif of a moderate-sized stone, used a3 2 hammer, and

the finished result showed primary, secondary and tertiary trimming,

Whichever flake was obtained initially the secondary work fashioned it inte

an aval knife, trimmed on one long margin of the stone. In cross section

the finished knife had the same rounded silhouette as is familiar in the

large knife blade of the Tartangan Culture of Southern Australia. Fig. 2,

d-f give two views and a diagrammatic section of one made by this Pintubi

man. It was on a rather brittle flake of sugary-textured quartzite con-

taining numerous flaws, The man indicated that the stone was poor, and

claimed that in his own country much better material wag available for

use. Despite the apparent disability imposed by the poor stone his finished

knife flakes were symmetrically and neatly fashioned. In use they were

hafted in Triodia gum but at times could be used without, No attempt

was made to trim that part of the butt which in normal use would be

concealed beneath the gum of the handle.

Just afterwards a similar knife from North Western Australia was scen

in the collection of Mr, Lindsay Black of Leeton, New South Wales, and

a period of six months of field work in North Western Australia in 1953

enabled the data it provided to be followed up among the people from

whom it had come,

Fig. 2, a-c shows two views and a diagrammatic section of this general

purpose Imife, made from a grey opaline silica, on a flake showing white

cortex on the outer face. It is hafted with gum from one of the porcupine

grasses (Triodia). In this specimen the nature of the striking platform

is concealed by the gum haft but other known Mangala tribe examples

show the remains of a striking platform set at about 110° angle from the

inner face of the flake, The example came from east of La Grange Bay,

in the dry sandy desert area behind the Eighty Mile Beach, in North

Western Australia, The coastal region here is occupied by the Karadierl,

inland is the tribal territory of the Mangala people among whom this form

of knife is used and known as [jimari]. The figured specimen is the one

collected by Mr, Lindsay Black and it is listed in his collection under the

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 16

number 1964; through his courtesy it has now come tao the Museum

collection (A.49903). Similar knives, now restricted to special uses, are

known and treasured at least as far south as the Fortescue River, among

the Njangamarda, Njamal, Bailgu, Wanman, and Indjibandi folk. The

people of these tribes have for some year's been in contact with civilisation

and have dropped the general use of stone implements; however they still

need a form of this knife for their initiatory rite of circumcision. Hence

every man who has the prospect, at sonie time or another, of being able

to circumcise a future son-in-law, has in his possession one or more

specimens, of several sizes, cached away in some safe place against that

day. During the 1953 visit to North Western Australia it was possible to

NBT

iel &. Vive views of arabneologiont jgawart knife deom the Tartangaa horizon at Hoods Drift

Section 545, Hundred of Kongerone (enecimen A,d0S60 in BA, Museum).

see numbers of them which were produced for inspection, sometimes from

hiding places in cliff faces; to have a demonstration of the mode of

manufacture, and to receive several as gifts. One of the noted mining

places for the stone is at Pilbara Hill and specimens A.45156 and A.45157

in the S,A. Museum are ones from this factory area. Their specialised

use as instruments during initiation has preserved knowledge of them for

at. least two generations more than otherwise might have been expected.

For the same reason they are not now seen openly in camps where

women folk might discover them. They were often depicted however when

16 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

native drawings were being made by men, They seem, only a short time

ago, to have been the normal form of everyday knife in the Pilbara area

of Australia, as they still are among the less sophisticated Mangala. ‘The

last named people, like the Wanman, who live east of Lake Waukarly-

karly, are a folk so specialised for life in the dry sandy deserts south

of the Fitzroy River that they seldom carry any other implement or

weapons than a knife and a throwing club, and for much of the year

live on lizards, on the heaps of grass grains gathered by ants about their

nests, on small rat kangarocs, and occasionally on other small animals

such as the blind marsupial mole,

The particular significance of this type of general purpose knife, for

the present paper, is the close similarity, amounting to Identity, of its

form, mode and degree of trimming, and perhaps also the nature of its

handle, with the archaeological Tartangan ones in South Hastern Aus-

tralia, Fig. 3 gives several views of an example from the Tartangan

layer at Hoods Drift for comparison with the modern examples.

The contrast between the untrimmed snd unmarred back of the

Mangala knife, which in use is concealed beneath the gum of the handle,

and the superlatively well worked knife edge, with its rounded profile and

curved cutting edge, is very characteristic.

Tartangan implements very generally show this same contrast, sug-

gesting that they probably also were hafted in a similar manner, perhaps

using one or other of the generally available gums and resins known to

later aborigines. These include native pine (Callitris) gum, resin of the

grass tree (Xanfhorrhoca), gum from phyllodes of Acacia aneura, the

exudate from the roots of Leschenaultia divaricata, sandalwood (Santa-

lum) gum, and porcupine grass gum (Triodia), as well as beeswax from

stineless native bees.

The Mangala name [jimari] for this knife is proposed as a general

term for the type, It may be convenient in future to refer to Tartangan

examples as archaeological jimart, defining the typical form as based on

the Mangala version in current use, just in case it is later on proved

that the resemblances between them are somewhat less real than seems

apparent at present. The term tronata in Tasmania, while usually used in

a more general sense, embraces specimens which are similar,

Tindale and Noone (1941) have described flakes from a hoard of 74

newly prepared blades near Eucla on the borders of South and Western

Australia in present day sand dunes. This hoard includes some pieces

closely similar in size and form to jimari and may hint that Tartangan-

like culture survivals extended also to the Eucla district.

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 17

PIRRIAN CULTURE

A specific horizon in the Pirrian Culture, Layer IX in the type section

at Devon Downs Rock Shelter, has been dated to 4250 = 180 BP. by a

C's test of Unio shells picked from a mass sample of the debris of the

layer,

The same horizon possibly represents. the high point in this culture,

At least it chanced to produce a pirri implement (Hale and Tindale, 1930,

fig. 177, and 179) technically so outstanding that it has scarcely been

matched by any from hundreds of other sites and probably is the equal

of any among thousands of pirri implements that have been collected.

This culture was widespread and its users were prolific in the production

of implements, from a great variety of stones. A collector in the Woomera

area of South Australia possesses over two thousand examples picked up

on surface sites in one area alone.

The Pirrian culture probably appeared in the Murray Valley about

or just after the period of the Mid-Recent High Terrace. The earliest

implements discarded on the top of the blanket of ash from the Mt.

Gambier eruption of 4710 = 80 BP. are identified as most probably

Pirrian and no earlier Tartangan ones have been found there.

The Pirrian Culture has now been reported from almost all parts

of Australia excepting only Cape York Peninsula, coastal Queensland

and parts of Eastern New South Wales: in these three places insufficient

collecting has been done to regard their entire absence as established

beyond doubt.

The most characteristic implement, the pirri implement itself, as

indicated in a later paragraph in this paper, was a spear point. It survived

until modern times in a part of Western Australia. There is evidence, to

be elaborated in a later paper, which shows that the pressure-faked biface

blade culture of North Western Australia is likely to have been a direct

development from the Pirrian. Study of the techniques of pressure-

flaking has shown that in one tribe at least 2 rather large-sized, pirri-like,

uniface hammer-dressed blade is made during a preliminary stage of

preparation of the stone for pressure flaked blades.

Indications of the modern survival of the pirrt are of particular

interest. In the South Australian Museum is a spear (A.21356) from the

collection of the late A. Zietz labelled ‘? Interior of Western Australia”.

It was probably collected during the last century. It has a well formed

pirri trimmed on both lateral margins and set. in gum, ag the spear tip,

The shaft is of the so-called composite type, the foreshaft being of hard-

wood, 118 cm. in length, with the junction of gum and hardwood shaft

bound with kangaroo sinew, The length of the pirri and gum support is

Ny)

ADD DDD

HEE?

ill

Pig. 4. Stonce-headad composite spear from Western Australia and archaeological pirri projectile points

from yaricus places. a. Spear of type known as karw by Wanman people, example A.21856 in South

Anstrulimn Museum from collection of A, Ziets, labelled *? Interior of W.A."; totul length 252 cm., of

hardwood shaft 118 em., of reed butt 127 cm. b-e Four views of head; d, is somewhat enlarged. f, 2 views

of pirri. trom Coorong (Section 2, Hundred of Santo, South Australia, 4.49556); 2, Eucla, Western Aus-

tralia, A.41879; b-i Claypan site south of Mt. Davenport, South Australia, A,21490; j-k Buolka Lake, New

South Wales, A.21378 (scale, in centimetres, apples to all figures except a and c),

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 19

7 em. The lower end of the hardwood shaft is inserted into a reed shaft

127 cm. long, and of a diameter of 1.5 em. the union between them being

lashed with sinews; the butt end of the spear shaft has received no

particular preparation but is severed immediately below a knot in the

cane, hence it appears as if prepared for use with a spearthrower. The

spear shows the polish of much use, It is an important piece of evidence

demonstrating one of the primary functions of the pirri. Fig. 4 (a-e)

illustrates the specimen from several aspects. A secondary function for

archaeological pirri was noticed by Hale and Tindale (1930 p. 205).

In the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu, is a similar example

of hafted spear (their B702) from Western Australia (fig. 5). It origi-

nated with the Helms Collection. The specimen was examined at Honolulu

by the writer in 1936. Richard Helms was the anthropologist of the Elder

N.B.T

Fig. 5, Two views of head «a! composite shafled spear of modifled karw type, Western Anatralia,

R, Helms (specimen B702 in B, P_ Bishop Museum, Honolulu),

Exploring Expedition in 1891-1892, but in his published account, although

he described several spears, he made no mention of this specimen as

having been obtained on the journey. He could of course have got it from

elsewhere than in the area traversed by this Expedition. The stone shows

20 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

evidence of possible pressure flaking on both faces, thus resembling the

pseudo-biface pirri implements which haye heen found archaeologically on

the lower parts of the Eyre Petiinsula in South Australia with traces of

flaking on both faces. The general style of spear making ts that of the

Pilbara natives.

During my 1953 visit to the Pilbara area it was noticed that the

aborigines of the Wanman Tribe, who live in the Desert éast of Lake

Waukarlykarly, when depicting spears, made drawings of a stone-headed

type which they called karu, Njangamarda drawings showed a similar

spear, called karo. Both of these were differentiated from the ¢j/nal or

tjinali a pressure-flaked spearhead of the Kimberleys, which occasionally

comes as far south as the Mangala territory in trade in this area and

by a more eastern route reaches to the Warburton Ranges as a rare

traded abject, there to be used as a circumcision knife. It is unfortunate

for anthropologists that the making of spears has heen suppressed in the

Pilbara area and no actual specimens of Karu could be obtained.

The existence of drawings of Karu spears, the descriptions of the

apears given by informants, plus the knowledge that spears with pirri

points have been collected somewhere in this general area all tend to

confirm the conclusion that in parts of the Pilbara and Upper Ashburton

areas pirri tipped spears survived until modern times. It is proposed

that the spear type be known by the Wanman tribe name Aaru; the Zietz

specimen may be regarded as typical.

It is an interesting point to consider whether the survival of the

pirri-pointed-spear among the people of this part of Western Australia

is an indication that some of the peoples of this area are actual modern

descendants of the peoples of the Pirrian Culture or whether we have

here merely the local survival of one element of a Pirrian tradition which

elsewhere has been swamped under a flood of later cultural elements.

Noone (1943) records a few examples of microliths of probable

Mudukian facies from Millstream Station on the Fortescue River in

territory now occupied by the blond-haired Indjibandi.

The real test may come when it is possible to ascertain whether or

not a Mudukian industry dominated all this portion of Western Australia.

No microlith implements were found by us in several months of search

during the spare time between our anthropometric study sessions in the

Marble Bar and Pilgangoora areas. In this connection it is of interest

to note that, implement-wise, a culture reasonably similar to the Mudukian

seems to have existed until modicrn times among the people of South

Western Australia and extended at least as far north as the Lower

Murchison,

TINDALE—OCULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 21

Dr, H, Petri (in a letter) recently mentionéd his finding of an

archaeological campsite with pirri implements near Perth, From his

discovery, which confirms a find made near Newman Rocks, we can

perhaps infer that in South Western Australia a Pirrian culture phase

once existed and may have been superseded by the present day Mudukian-

like Culture.

The present day aborigines at Moolabulla, in North Western Australia,

of the Djaru and Kitja tribes, say pirri points are kanbire or the “claws”

of the “Hagle people’, who existed before they themselves came into

the country from the east. Pirri are commonly found in the sand around

the originally palm-tree-girt spring at the Head Station, a few miles west

of Hall Creek. Their own spear points are pressure-flaked biface blades

with serrated edges which pass through a stage during manufacture when

they are almost indistinguishable from large pirri.

Pirrian implements were found at several other sites in the valley

of the Fitzroy River during the visit to North Western Australia; par-

ticular mention may be made of a site 19 miles west-south west of Louisa

Downs, and ancther 9 miles south west of that Homestead,

At Wave Hill Police Station on the Upper Victoria River in the west

of the Northern Territory, pirri implements occur on an eroded site near

the Station itself whereas on the present camp of the aborigines attached

ta the Station, a few bundred yards further away, the dominant blade

implements are all bifaced pressure-flaked ones as they are among the

living Wandjira people of Inverway Station, who still make them. In

Central Australia, at Tieyon Station Homestead and at Macdonald Downs

Homestead near Lilatara, pirri are found. Other localities worthy of

mention are Lincoln Gap, west of Port Augusta, and Pimba, Louth Bay

and Sleaford Mere on the West Coast of South Australia; some from the

two last-named areas show incipient biface trimming. At Tower Hill, near

South Gap, Nuriootpa, Fulham, Ooldea, and Miller Creek, all in South

Australia, many are found. There is an extensive site 25 miles north of the

Cooper Creek Crossing on the track between Marree and Birdsville.

Specimens referable to the Pirrian Culture were found on sites examined

by the present writer in 1955 around the southern shores of Lake Eyre,

others are known from the Durham Downs, Queensland.

Worms (1950) reported pirrf implements found archaeologically in

the territory of the still active Bard tribe at Cape Leveque, North Western

Australia, associated with worn adze stones. :

Two rather aberrant examples of pirrilike implements have come

from Victoria, one from Lake Lonsdale and the other from Altona, A

rather short squat example which may really be an atypical engraver,

22 RECORDS OF THE §.A, MUSEUM

only resembling a pirri by chance, has come from Port Kembla, New

South Wales.

It should perhaps be mentioned here in passing that the present

author interprets the term pirri in its originally proposed sense as includ-

ing both the developed pirri with secondary trimming and the so-called

butted blades, which however they may be separated by the implement

classifier still represent together with the pirri the whole range of form

of a single type of spear head. Graphed they would yield a curve of

the type characteristic of a continuous random series. They range from

forms with margins entirely free of secondary working, to the most

perfectly bilaterally trimmed examples. This is not to say that as mors

detailed time sequence studies can be made there will not be found higher

and lower degrees of striving for perfect symmetry, by trimming, in the

work of different periods and among the Pirrian peoples of different areas,

There have been many discussions on the status of the Keilor fossil

skull in the Maribyrnong Valley, Victoria and much work has been done

on the physiographic data of the area in attempting a solution of the

problem of its position in time. Little attention has been paid to the

quartzite implement flake found near the skull. This specimen, labelled

as No, 45769 in the National Museum, Melbourne. was shown to the

present author in February, 1949. This flake was labelled “Keilor” and

“Dry Creek skull layer, few inches from skull, found by Dr. E. S. Hills”.

With the Director’s permission freehand sketches were made of it. These

are shown here as retraced in india ink (fig. 6, a-d).

The specimen is a thin blade some 3.9 cm, in length, 2.0 cm. wide

and 0.7 em, in general thickness. There is a small triangular striking

platform with a diffused bulb showing an angle below 100° with respect

to the main axis of the flake, Four flakes had been removed from the

core in preparation for the striking off of this blade,

a S b abn el

Fig. 6. Retracings of freahond sketvhes of the small blude found hy Dr. mr, S. Hills in the Dey

Greek skull layer, 2 few inches from the Keilor skull a. showing foor flake scars on outer face; ). view

of inner face: «. view in plane normal io striking vlatferm; d, créss section at marked position (specined

45769 jn Notional Mugeum, Melbourne, navarol oleae),

SSS

AAC

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 23

By itself this specimen is insufficient to mark positively the culture

period to which it may have belonged but there are strong indications

that the flake was made during one or the other of the two culture periods

with small blade industries, Pirrian or the Mudukian, rather than in a

Tartangan culture phase, in which it would seem very much out of place.

The small, prepared, relatively acute angled striking platform, checked

fiake scars at butt, and long thin blade, appear first in the Pirrian Culture.

By Mudukian times there is a high degree of skill displayed in preparing

the final implement, on the core, before detaching it by a blow struck on

this small face,

It can only be said that a man, probably at earliest of the Pirrian

Culture, lived on the soil of the Dry Creek at Keifor on a horizon “a few

inches from” the place where Keilor skull came to rest and he was

possibly attempting to make a pirri when he struck off this flake.

MUDUKIAN CULTURE

The studies of Campbell and Noone (1943) and of Mitchell (1949)

have made the principal microlith industry of Southern Australia well

known since it was first observed in the séction in Devon Downs Rock

Shelter between the limits of 10 feet and 15 feet down, and named the

Mudukian Culture (Hale and Tindale 1930).

This Mudukian horizon yielded examples of most of the microliths

now known to be typical, but at the time the shelter was being studied

relatively little was known about microlith industries in Australia, and

it probably was only by chance that these tiny implements were picked

out in sufficient numbers to make it clear that this was the period of

dominance of microliths. More emphasis was laid by the writers on the

presence of muduk bones in defining the culture. It is now known that

these bones were fishing toggles similar to those still used in Western

Europe when “sniggling” for eels, In the later Murundian Culture of the

Murray River they have been replaced by a similar toggle, cut in wood

and known to living informants, a type abandoned as soon as the superior

guslities of European metal hooks were known.

Relics of the Mudukian microlith culture are to be found over vast

areas of Australia, in many places forming an upper stratum on Jong

occupied sites, and at other places occurring as ‘pure’ series without

association with relics of any other period of occupation.

On 5 January 1934 a microlith crescent and five other small flints

were found on the Mudukian site at Wimpinmerit, 100 yards west of the

homestead (Specimens A-2115T in 5.A. Museum), A month later Dr.

H. K, Fry and the writer escorted Milerum, last old man of the Tangane-

24 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

kald, over the country from Lake Alexandrina to Kingston and were

shown the sites and given the native names of many of the present day

Murundian camps, and found other microlith sites in places which Milerum

considered useless as camps.

Some further work was done in the area during February 1939, with

J. B. Birdsell, and signs of stratification were observed in several places.

After an intermission during the War the area was visited in 1947,

and again in 1948, the superimposition of the Mudukian and Murundian

Cultures being observed, as well as Mudukian above Tartangan, in company

with E. C. Black, T. D, Campbell, D. Casey, J. B, Cleland, P. S. Hossfeld,

8. Mitchell and G. Walsh. For the present paper it is convenient to draw

particular attention only to the site at Section 541 Hundred of Kongorong,

known to Mitchell (1949, p. 173) as Hoods Drift.

Study of a section (fig, 7) at this place shows that there is a thin

sterile surface layer of wind-blown sand, a fixed dune surface until after

Post-Huropean times, containing roots of sedges, Beneath it there is

a layer of pale red sand, without laterite nodules. Usually it forms a sheet

less than a metre (2-3 ft.) in thickness containing some charcoal, very

sparse signs of hearths, no preserved bone, but has a rich Mudukian

microlith culture of fresh-looking flints including bondi points, woakwine

Post-Mudukian

sterile red sand

with roots of sedges

MUDUKIAN

pale red sand

without laterite

nodules

TARTANGAN

red sandy soil with , *

laterite nodules

Ye ie A? “LZ BD pe ®

Mey Ye N } LE une sand \ Lis of

ikl ty Yy Yai S

Wh Yi Yh \ \ Z

Fig. 7. Section of Hoods Drift, Section 541, Hundred of Kangorong, South Australia.

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 25

points, microlith discoidal adze stones, ségments, triangular microliths

and other characteristic Mudukian implements, Where erosion has not

proceeded down below this layer only a Mudukian suite appears,

The red sand without nodules lies disconformably above a red sandy

soil containing laterite nodules.

The A layer of this lower red soil contains abundantly a Tartangan

industry in red-stained flint with large and characteristic blade implements.

The B horizon of this soil, at a general depth of 0.3 metre has numerous

lime pillars and further down is a variable thickness of sheet limestone

forming a duricrust. The C layer below is of the rather compact dune

of lime-sand of the Woakwine Range. Where erosion has proceeded to

the level of the duricrust sheet both Tartangan and Mudukian implements

are found, dropped together in profusion on to the surface; in places

where the red sandy soil is still intact Tartangan Imives and other flakes

are in silu from the top of the red soil down to levels well below the

summits of the limestone pillars. Mitchell (1949 p. 179) to whom this

section was demonstrated commented on the differences in patination

between the two suites then pointed out, accepted the proposition that

two separate industries existed and were of different ages, but did not

link them with the two industries named by Hale and Tindale (1930), He

correctly deduced that the microlith suite was “Post-Mid-Recent Optimum”

(i.e. after the Mid-Recent High or 10 ft, Terrace of this author), and

that the earlier ones came before the Mid-Recent, as had been already

deduced for Tarianga, and as is in this paper clearly confirmed by C4

dates at several places.

During a visit to the Coorong, Sonth Australia, with Messrs, Anthony

Sturt and H. A. Lindsay in March 1951 a site near Policeman Point, on

Section 2, Hundred of Santo, was found to have microliths of the Mudukian

type, with numerous crescents, small blades and microlith cores. The

flints were fresh and were being eroded from a layer of light red soil

overlaid by a aterile layer of about a foot of newer sand. The site

itself was on and in the A horizon of a red earthy dune with a calcareous

B horizon. The underlying shell lime dune ‘sands form the seaward face

of the same dune range as is called the Woakwine Range in the South

East of South Australia,

The site has been visited since on several occasions and has yielded

a rich microlith suite of implements including a fine stone drill-point,

and the smallest perfectly formed crescent impiement yet found; it

measured only 6 mm. along the cutting edge, The food shells of this site

are Plebidonax deltoides and one specimen of the shell was found which

had been used as a spoke-shave scraper by having a circular hole punched

through the centre of the valve, as used in recent years by Milerum,

26 RECORDS OF THE 8.4. MUSEUM

the last survivor of the Tanganekald tribe. The site seems to have been

concentrated on a point overlooking a little former embayment of the

Coorong waters, Today this is silted up and dry land, situated over one

hundred yards from the Coorong waters. It seems likely that when it

was occupied the waters of the Coorong may have stood a few feet

(perhaps no more than 3-4) higher than they do at present.

The particular significance of this site is that an occupational hearth

may have a purely microlithic Mudukian Culture, including hut circles

and workshops, without signs of any other implement suites, and if small

changes in local physiography cause later inhabitants to prefer some

other dwelling area the place will remain undisturbed. The implications

are important for the historical study of implements since it reiterates what

has been indicated before that the people of at least one interval in

late Recent time used only the microlithic suite of implements we call

Mudukian,

The following table compiled after a visit to the site on 17 November

1955 is useful as indicating the stone materials used at the site.

Material Flint | Quartz | Red jasper) Other

On surface

in situ

The flint is that from the South East of South Australia, the quartz

was of the clear type with glassy fracture from the direction of the Mt.

Lofty Range, while the jasper is of the same type as occurs in the

Mudukian of Deyon Downs Rock Shelter. It probably came down river

from the general direction of Broken Hill. It is clear that the trade

connections of the Mudukian people of Policeman Point were with the

Mt. Gambier district and that they had considerably less to do with

people from the north than did those who were living at Devon Downs

Rock Shelter at the same general time.

The red sandy soil is without enlarged laterite nodules, has a cal-

careous B horizon, and shows evidence of the presence of limey pillars,

all overlying calcareous dune sands. The Policeman Point site seems to

suggest, by its profile, that it was a soil being derived from the dune

sands by leaching and was still forming during the period of occupation

of the site by thesé Mudukian people, no more than say 3000 years ago.

Tindale (1955 p. 292) reported bondi points of the Mudukian Culture

as occurring on sites in the interior of Western Australia, and used the

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA a7

évidence to throw doubt on an idea put forward by McCarthy (1938)

that these implements were confined to coastal areas and that they

were in some manner connected with marine food-getting. The presence

of such along the coast line of New South Wales had been thought by

him to warrant the separation of the undoubtedly well developed Mudukian

Industry of that area, under a different name, as the Bondaian Culture.

Bondaian would appear to be synonymous with the Mudukian Culture.

Messrs, J. E. Johnson and S. B, Warne now report similar Mudukian

implements from two further places in the Interior. They write under

dateline of 24 May 1956 “We have found Muduk|ian) culture sites, with

bondi points at Mount Crombie [in the North West interior of South

Australia] . . . and in the Cavanagh Range, Western Australia.

Woakwine points are found on both sites, oblique trimmed blades,

crescents, trapezes and triangles’, Receipt of these specimens, as this

paper goes to press, confirms their observations, Several implements

were made from meteorite glass, extending the areas in which this

material was used for implements,

This new report should help to remove all doubts that the Mudukian

Culture horizon is very generally distributed over Australia. McCarthy

(1952) perhaps did not appreciate the effects of the local absence of

suitable mines of implement stone, on the somewhat impoverished

Mudukian at the Devon Downs type site. From the study af the many

dozens of other known Mudukian sites around it, including the several

discussed in this paper, it is clear that this was a local and casual

deficiency no more significant than differences of wealth, in our modern

culture, as between one community and another.

The suggestion was made by Tindale (1955) that bondi points

could have been triangular needle points used in piercing skins, when

sewing them together with sinews to make rugs snd skin cloaks. Since

then it has been noticed that Basedow (1925 p, 365) refers to stone points

as being used for this very purpose, using’ the following words;—“In

former days the River Murray and south-eastern tribes used painted

splinters of stone for making holes through the skins of animals they

made up into rugs.”

This apt description of the bond/ point may give added weight to a

conclusion reached before, that modern Mudukian Culture survivals were

still present at the time of European occupation, particularly in peripheral

places in South Australia where the people had not been driven out by

the late-coming Murundian adze culture folk of the Centre, who, in recent

venturies seem to haye been pressing southward and eastward out of the

Desert areas into South Eastern Australia.

2B RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

From Esperance on the south coast of South Western Australia at

least to Geraldton along the west coast, including the country of all the

people of the -up areas, (those characterised by place names such sg

Wonnerup, Tambelup, Nampup etc.) and some of the territory of the -ing

peuple further inland (whose place names have the form Tambeling,

Nyabing etc.) aborigines were still using stone implements of Mudukian

facies when first encountered by men of the Western world.

Not all the implements of the Mudukian Culture are small. Larger

implements similar to the type described as elouera, which first appear

in the Pirrian Culture lately have been found on more than one Mudukian

site. Also in Queensland a knife, made on the same principle as the elouera

but with a knife point is still in use, This type of knife, hafted with

i At

(

Pai

Fig. 8. Present day skin hafted knives of juan type, from coastal Queensland. a, Example from

Bowen, Quecnsland, colleetud by Godefroy, specimen Av26la in Grasti Museum, Leijiz, hatted with

matuinal skin and human hsir string ob, Similar knife trom Queensland, specimen M14 in Museum f

Volkerkunde, Homburg, (Scales. indiouted eentimetres.)

anima] skin bound on while green with the fur side outward, survives

along the eastern coast of Australia, and was known further inland in

Queensland with a gum haft. It possibly also occurred in parts of New

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 29

South Wales, Fig. 8 gives views of two typical examples. It is proposed

to report full details of available specimens in a separate paper, Contrary

to the belief cf Towle (1930) the “chipped” back is not the cutting edge.

Most of the known examples are to be met with in overseas Museums:

they were collected before the days when anthropological collections

were being preserved in Australia, and when it was still possible to

acquire examples of the material culture of the living aborigines of South

Eastern Australia, Among the Ngaun and kindred tribes west of Charters

Towers this knife is known as | juan] and [joan]. It is proposed to call

the type by name of juan,used by the Ngaun tribe.

Microlith sites are found in Victoria and many have been described.

If we are right in assuming that the assemblage of implements at Koroit,

Victoria, for example, represents a developed Mudukian Culture, then the

C™ date of 538 + 200 B.P. reported by Gill (1955) may help to confirm

a conelusion reached, before this date was available, that the living culture

of the coastal Victorian natives at the time of first contact with Europeans

may have been still transitional from the late Mudukian one, a Mudtikian

culture modified principally by the incoming of the edge-ground-stone-axe-

making trait but not materially affected by the spearthrower-with-adze-

stone-using Murundian people who had 30 much earlier appeared at Devon

Downs and whose campsites became widely spread in parts of New South

Wales, in the Murray Basin and over much of Northern South Australia,

Central Australia and eastern parts of the Western Desert in Western.

Australia,

Tt is unfortunate that so far no assessment of the culture phase

represented by the Goose Lagoon Midden date of 1177 + 175 B.P, has

been possible,

MURUNDIAN CULTURE

The change from the Mudukian to the Murundian Culture in the

deposits of the type section in Devon Downs Rock Shelter is abrupt,

Microliths and special bone implements disappear, and only adzestones,

of several modes of manufacture, and usually very worn, persisted, From

the very tentative time scale suggested elsewhere in this paper the change

over might have taken place there as early as 2000 or 2500 years ago,

but the only ayailable time scale is based on an uncertain premise, namely

that the rate of accumulation of ash, ete., in Devon Downs Rock Shelter

was regular (fig. 9), No allowance could be made for possible compac-

tion of the deposits by water seepage, and the compression of lower layers

by weight of overlying beds so that a much later date might be indicated,

Further it is unlikely that this date was the same everywhere in South

Eastern Australia, for as pointed out earlier there is some evidence to

a0 RECORDS OF THE 35.4, MUSEUM

support the idea that Mudukian microlith people in some areas continued

to live relatively unchanged until modern times.

The change over to the Murundian Culture may have been an expres-

sion of an increasing tempo of nomadic life, forced progressively on people

of less favoured parts of Southern Australia by gradually increasing

aridity such as is seemingly suggested by the diagram given elsewhere

in this paper (fig. 9).

Assuming this late phase of desiccation was a Southern Australia-

wide phenomenon, leading to the Mediterranean type of climate enjoyed

here today, the Mudukian aborigines perhaps were under increasing pres-

ure to give up a rather sedentary life of only seasonal migration fram

summer to winter camps in favour of moving more continuously about

their territories, as do today the people af the sixty or more tribes of the

Western Desert and its environs.

Only in a few more favoured areas such as along the Coorong

and around Lake Alexandrina in South Australia, and in parts of coastal

ictoria and New South Wales, etc., could the semi-sedentary way of life

persist in a modified form, until modern times. There must have been

population pressure also from people forced out of the Desert, leading

to displacements even in favoured spots far from the Desert.

Study of the life of the Desert tribes shows that with enforced

nomadism would come problems of transport. One of the solutions was

the abandonment of unessential non-portable properties. From the

mythology of the Ngalea, of the southern part of the Western Desert,

who live today in a belt of maximum aridity we learn for example that

their ancestors used skin rugs, as did the people of more favoured climes

in South and South Western Australia until modern times. The Ngales

could no longer use them in everyday life, although they have preserved

memory of them in their traditions.

In the archaeological record the change from Mudukian to Murundian

was reflected inter alia by the trend towards the disappearance of skin-

piercing stone points, a possible decline in fishing toggles (or in some

areas, if data from living Murray River natives is confirmed, the replace-

ment of bone ones by wooden ones) and by the increasing use of the

readily portable adze-stone, set in gum on the end of the spearthrower.

as a well nigh universal tool, a combination meat cutter, scraper, adze,

chisel, gouge, borer and spear burnisher,

Superimposed on this was the progressive development, in the eastern

half of Australia of edge-ground stone axes. These were most advanced in

type in the north (hammer-dressed-edge-ground ones) and Jess advanced

in the South (flake-trimmed and edge-ground types). The State of South

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 21

Australia being on the western periphery of the areas of axe distribution,

the few edge-ground axes found, as far west as Yorke Peninsula, and in

the vicinity of Adelaide, are ones traded, some from axe factory sites

on Berrimah Station near Chatsworth on the Hopkins River (these are

nsually of a mottled gray igneous rock) and from Mt, William in Central

Victoria (a dark, almost black, fine textured diabase), Other axes which

have penetrated as far south west as the Southern Flinders Kanges

by trade are all from the axe factory site near Cloncurry, Queensland,

An earlier phase of this trade carried flaked, edge-round axes, now

only found archaeologically in the south, while late traded examples,

including the hafted ones of the present day, are of the hammer-dressed

type. Mr, J. H. Johnson has just found the battered remnant of a chipped

and edge-ground fine-grained green diabase axe head at Mt. Moore, in

the castern part of Western Australia.

McCarthy (1947) described an important excavation at a rock shelter

on Lapstone Creek, in Eastern New South Wales. which shows the junction

between an éarlier Mudukian Industry (for which he uses the term

Bondaian) and the later Murundian Culture, with an industry directly

comparable with that in the type shelter at Devon Downs, as amplified

by later studies in Southern Australia.

It is unfortunate that he has seen fit to propose a term “Eloueran”

for this upper industry, which seems merely to add another synonym to

the terminology of the subject and to mask identity with the Murundian

of other places.

The Murundian of northern South Australia is characterised by well

trimmed adze blades made at factory sites and traded over large areas.

In the South East of South Australia it is characterised also by occupation

mounds of the type called myrniong [marniong], which show high con-

centrations of shell food remains, ash, and stones of cooking hearths,

with freshly worked flints. Similar sites are met with in parts of Victoria.

A mound of this type at Cape Northumberland is being described in a

separate paper, Tindale (in press). Concentration of camp debris in sucii

mounds seems to imply the local persistence of the semi-sedentary mode

of living,

In November 1955 several Murundian rock shelters at Section 562

Hundred of Caroline were studied. The sites are on the northern

rim of a circular sink hole or collapsed cave, in Tertiary limestone, 75 ft.

deep and 185 ft. in diameter. The sheltered areas, of which there are

several, are small and possess only 0.5-0.9 m. of ash and camp debris

yielding only bones of animals of living species of the district, and fresh

Murundian flints. A track passing through the main rock shelter leads

32 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

down to a pool of water covering the southern half of the floor of the

collapsed cavern, Implements reeovered confirm the general picture of

the Murundian developed in Deven Downs Rock Shelter and elsewhere

in Southern Australia.

GEOLOGICAL EVIDENCE FOR THE ANTIQUITY OF THE

AUSTRALIAN CULTURE SEQUENCE.

The geological evidence used in the following summary is that

presented before the Melbourne meeting of the A.N.Z,.A.A.S. in August

1955, before the C# dates were available. The two types of evidence thus

were independently derived. The reasonably close degree of correlation

between them may serve as an encouragement to those using either system

of dating.

The earliest geological evidence available implied a late Pleistocene

date, prior to the reinvasion by the sea of the coastal lands of Australia

which was caused by the eustatic rising of sea level at the termination

of the Last cold phase of the Last Glaciation (Tindale, 1933, and 1947). It

has been estimated by several authors that at the cold maximum, a

minimum of 250 feet, and at most 300 feet of water had been abstracted

from the sea as ice and perched on land masses around the North and

South Poles,

The origina] access to Kangaroo Island by the Kartan people probably

was prior to this rise of sea level. The Fulham occurrence of Kartan

implements on a land surface below present sea level also had suggested

a late Glacial time and the indications and deductions at Hallett Cove

described earlier in this paper had supported a similar date.

The latest relics of the Kartan Culture occurred on Kangaroo Island

in silts at Rainy Creek, These were laid down when the 10 ft. Terrace

was the shoreline (Tindale 1937, p. 42). No Kartan implements had been

found seaward from this terrace on areas vacated by the seas of 10 ft.

Terrace times, nor were they present on sand dunes which had been

built up after the 10 ft. Terrace was vacated, A few isolated finds had

hinted at sporadic later visits to the island but no continuing occupation

after 10 ft. Terrace times.

Tartangan deposits along the Murray River were deposited on a

series of silts forming successively higher layers on a bend of the river at

Tartanga. The deposits afterwards were “drowned”, consolidated, and

the bones in them mineralised under water, then re-exposed, The river

is at present bage-levelled, hence the ten or more feet of rise necessary

completely to drown the deposits could only have taken place during the

10 ft. Terrace times of the Mid-Recent, Their deposition thus was a pre-

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 33

Mid-Recent event and the successively higher layering of the successive

Tartangan Beds, A-E, probably indicated a period immediately prior to

that episode, when sea level was rising, Im terms of the C* dates

availabie overseas for the Mid-Recent High this was prior to about 5000

B.P, Tartangan implements had not been found at any sites on the coast

betweén the 10 ft. Terrace level and the present shore. They occurred

on places which were close to the sea but always above the 10 ft, mark

in relation to present sea level, An inference was that any ones nearer

sea Jevel had been either “rolled” in the sea or destroyed by the erosional

effects of 10 ft. Terrace seas. Some evidence at Cape Martin in the South

East of South Australia had indicated however that Tartangan implements

might occur at places now below the 10 ft. level but only where the

beds were inland and at the relevant time had been sufficiently buried

under later sands as to be protected from erosion during the Mid-Recent

High.

At Cape Martin the food shell fauna of a ferra rossa soil horizon

identified as Tartangan (Tindale, in press) indicated that both sandy beach

—and lacustrine—shell faunas were being used as food, whereas a much

later occupational horizon, with a distinct stratigraphic disconformity,

identified as Murundian, showed rock shells, such as Turbo, indicating

that when the second site was in occupation, consolidated sand dune cliffs,

like those being eroded away at present faced the nearby sea. Here again

the evidence indicated a pre-10 ft, Terrace period, before the present rocky

shoreline was being attacked by the sea, for the Tartangan, and a Post-

Mid-Recent date for the Murundian.

Pirrian occupational deposits at the Devon Downs type site had

been laid down without violent disturbance by flood waters, at a nodal

point of the Murray River where it was turning from a sweep against

the left bank to one against the right bank, The rock shelter evidently

had been formed or scoured clear of any earlier debris during 10 ft.

Terrace Time. No signs of scouring were present after the bottom layer

was put down 1.5 metres above present normal water level, although in

the partial mineralisation of the boneg in the lowest levels there was

evidence of intermittent drowning, probably by percolation through the

water table at times of high flood in the river itself. Indications were

that the first Pirrian occupation had come after the retreat of river level

{and sea level) from the 10 ft. Terrace. This on overseas data, signified

a date after about 5000 B.P. At Fulhara the Pirrian camp studied was on

a small bank of sand within the area of swamp land which lay behind

the present dunes, in a situation indicating a Gate after 10 ft, Terrace

times. It was only a few feet above present sea level, but probably was

formed before the large bulk of the present coastal dune system, of white

34 RECORDS OF THE §S.A. MUSEUM

sand, was fully built up along the foreshore of today, Pirrian sites in

general did not occur anywhere in these coastal dunes of the present

shoreline, indicating that they were not being occupied during the latest

period of shoreline development. They occurred at Moana near the sea

but on an older suite of foreshore dunes behind the present ones. Evidence

did not exist to prove the earliest appearance of the Pirrian people and

it was not then possible to say from purely geological evidence whether

they were present or not at any time prior to Mid-Recent times.

The Mudukian Culture phase, when the microlith industries flourished,

had followed directly on the Pirrian Period without more than a minor

break indicated by a hard line of separation in Devon Downs shelter. The

implement. suites were highly characteristic. At some places where

Mudukian implements had been identified they had included ones made

from australite glass. No meteorite glass implements were known from

Pirrian or other horizon earlier, but it was, and still is not clear, whether

this was because the australite shower had not yet fallen or whether the

small sizes of these widely spread glassy meteorites did not suit the

implement making habits of earlier men.

Some climatic data was available for the interval between the

begirining of the Pirrian Period and the present. The indications were

furnished by smal! Molluscan forms present in the shelter deposits at

Devon Downs, They suggested that the climate had undergone a rather

steady deterioration from a wetter climate towards a Mediterranean one.

The signs were a diminution in the numbers of a fresh water species of

Bulinus and a correspondingly slow and lately accelerated increase in a

brackish-water shell (Melania). This had been inferred to indicate local

climatic deterioration over the whole interval represented by the three

Successive pericds, Pirrian, Mudukian and Murundian (Hale and Tindale

1930, fig. 249).

Sites of Murundian Culture had heen found with freshly made imple-

ments and fresh bone in the present day dunes, as at Somerton, South

Australla and in such places as on the tops of cliff paths leading up from

present day beaches, as at Cape Northumberland; (Tindale in press)

which had suggested their late development,

CARBON 14 EVIDENCE

To substantiate this general picture of culture succession some useful

C4 dates are now available for the time since the end of the Pleistocene.

In round figures 10000 B.P. may bé taken as the time of the ending of

the Last phase of the Last Glaciation.

Rise of sea level and flooding of the Pleistocene glacial shorelines may

be presumed to have happened, according to C* data, after 9861 + 500

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 35

B.P. (Late Glacial of Cornwall} and before $483 = 350 B.P., the date

indicated for a Post-Glacial site at Lake Pickermg, Yorkshire (Libby

1954: Clark 1954).

Applying this information to South Australia in the light of the

geological evidence set out earlier it can be inferred that the Fulham

site on the land surface below marine deposits is to be referred to a time

before 10000 B.P. The Hallett Cove Kartan site, which yields the sugges-

tion that it was occupied when sea level was not at the present cliff line

would also belong to a time prior to the year 10000 B,P. when part,

and possibly the whole of the Gulf of St. Vincent was an alluvial plain

with a river system threading its way across it towards the Southern

Ocean.

The C™ tests for the Tartangan of Tartanga were made by Dr. W.

Broecker of the Lamont Geological Observatory at Columbia University,

using shells of the subfossil freshwater shell Unio protaviftatus, which

is a very thick-shelled form of the thin-shelled Unio evansi. Like U. evansi

of the present day it once lived in the shallow waters of Tartanga Lagoon.

Among the shells included in the sample were also a few broken pieces of

Unio ambiguus, a species found principally in the deeper and faster

flowing waters of the main river. U. ambiguus shells of Tartangan times

do not show much difference in shell thickness or form when compared

with modern shells of the same species.

The Tartangan subfossil shell sample was broken out by Dr, J. B.

Birdseli and the writer from the eroding top surface layer of the con-

siderable pavement of consolidated shell in Layer C of the Tartangan beds

at the type site on Tartanga Island (Hale and Tindale 1930, fig, 10),

Specifically it may be considered to date that surface. It was from this

horizon that the body of the youthful individual known as Tartanga iii

Was buried.

When the sample was being gathered the Murray River was in

partial flood so that lower beds, A and B, which have occupational debris

to a depth of at least 1.75 metres below the top layer B, were inaccessible,

The occupation of the site must have commenced some considerable time

hefore the date 6020 + 150 B.P. marking the virtual top of Layer C.

As control several pounds weight of Unio evansi shells were colleeted.

These shells died on the margins of a lagoon, about two miles upstream

from Tartanga, as the flood waters of 1953 subsided. One-half of this

control sample was sent to Columbia University and one-half of the

balance went later on to the Dominion Laboratory in New Zealand for

parallel tests, Concerning this modern control sample (their no, 271F)

Dr. Broecker reported that it was “found to be 1% greater than our

36 RECORDS OF THE S.4. MUSEUM

modern wood standard”. Dr. G. J. Fergusson’s comment on his portion

of the test sample was:—‘“Enrichment of C™ w.r.t. our modern wood

standard = + 1.70 + 0.4%”.

It would appear a fortunate circumstance for archaeological work

in Australia that freshwater Unio shells are likely to provide data so

closely comparable with that derived from wood samples.

The test sample from Layer IX of Pirrian times in Devon Downs

Rock Shelter was made up of shell fragments from a mass of the layer

taken when the rock shelter was being excavated in 1930. When further

opportunities for C“ tests occur, similar samples from the original exca-

vation can be made available for each of the twelve layers in this shelter.

No record is available to indicate at what horizon within the 30 cm,

thickness of Layer IX this sample was collected. It has to be assumed

that the date of 4250 + 180 B.P. is indicative of an indefinite point within

this bed in the Pirrian Culture.

The data sent to Dr, H. L. Movius for the Lamont Laboratory gave

the following prior assessment of possible dates, For the Tartangan

Layer C horizon “the evidence we have at present suggests that the

Tartangan occupational horizons were probably laid down prior to the

10 foot Terrace and hence could be as early as Mid-Recent; a suggestion

to that effect has been published.",

For the Pirrian horizon TX the assessment given in this letter was

“this material should date the mid-point of the Pirrian Culture. ... We

have no mess of dating this layer but have concluded that it was laid

down zfter 10 foot Terrace times. It is tha oldest of the three culture

horizons which we recognised in the shelter and seems to have been laid

down at a time when the climate was moister than at present: at a guess

it might be two to three thousand years old”.

The expected dates were very satisfactorily confirmed.

The three tested Lake Menindee samples were the shells of a fresh-

water Unio kindly collected for us by Mr. L. F. Marcus, of the University

of California. They were identified for us by Mr. B. C. Cotton, Curator

of Shelis at the South Australian Museum, as Alaihyria prefuga Gould

1851.

Two of the samples (L.F.M. no. 186 and 189) were from surface

hearths lying on and above the Mudukian horizon. Both proved to be

modern. The third (L.F.M. 188), which was a food hearth in the top part

of Horizon B gave the C™ date of 6570 = 100 B.P. This date indicates

a horizon very close to the end of the period of deposition of the bed

from on and within which both, fossil mammals and implements of the

Tartangan Culture were recovered.

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 37

The data sent to the Dominion Laboratory with the Lake Menindee

specimens was as follows:-—

LFM No. 188. Blowout I horizon B. Unio shells from Layer B in

area J at Lake Menindee. The field notes of L. F. Marcus state, “There

Were one or two sheils in place in the B horizon and collected matrix

labelled LFM 188—IB with this; and 14 Ib. (approx.) of shells separately

in pieces—all that we could get, They were along about 10 yards in

an E-W direction. There was not sutticient concentration to warrant

digging, though we did a little without luck,” Our statement about thia

was:— ‘The faunal association with Layer B comprises a long list of

extinct genera of late Pleistocene or Early Recent mammals, Aboriginal

implements of this horizon appear to be of the Tartangan Culture which

has been dated as Early Recent (prior to the Mid-Recent Therma!

Maximum), At Tartanga a middle horizon of the culture bears a Carbon

14 date of 6020 + 150 B.P. A few implements found on the site suggest

the Kartan Culture which is probably late Pleistocene, at least at its

beginning.”

LFM No. 186. Blowout 0 horizon B. Unio shells from Layer B in

area Il at Lake Menindee. L. Marcus’ field notes state ‘Again on the

surface at [the marked spot in Blowout TI] in an srea E-W 15 yds.

and 5 yds. N.S. One or two in place as collected. These later broke up

and were separated from the matrix. Four rat kangaroo mandibles and

a maxillary fragment were found on the surface amongst the Unto

fragments of Sample ILB”,

LIM No. 189. Blowout IV horizon O. Unio shells from Layer O in

area IV. L, F. Marcus’ field notes read “Collected a 2 lb, (approx.) sample

of these shells and the matrix below”.

Our statement about the lastnamed sample was:—

“The fauna of Layer O at Lake Menindee comprised only living

species of mammals. The aboriginal implements were all from the Mnudu-

kian Culture. This microlith culture has been shown to be Post-Thermal

Maximum and later than the Pirrian Culture. For Layer IX at Devon

Downs which represents a mid point in the Pirrian Culture we have a

Carbon 14 date of 4250 + 180 B.P. The date of this sample might well

fall between 3000 and 1500 B,P".

Dr. Fergusson’s reply was:—‘Sample No. LFM 189, Unio shells Lake

Menindee, Blowout TV, Horizon O, Age—Modern—w.r.t. modern Unio

shells,

Sample No. LFM 186, Una shells, Lake Menindee, Blowout IT, Horizon

B, Age—modern—w.r.t. modern Unto shells.

Sample No. LFM 188, Unio shells, Lake Menindee, Blowout I, Horizon

B, age w.r.t. modern unio shells = 6,570 = 100 years."

348 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The dates were very acceptable, although the late date for the surface

sites was unexpected. From the notes by L. F. Marcus it seems clear

that the two samples which gave a modern date came from the loose

sand layer forming the modern surface of the dune; rat kangaroo

mandibles are quite common on these late surfaces.

CLIMATIC CHANGES

Fig. 9 is a redrawing of a diagram, first given by Hale and Tindale

(1930). As now set out it uses a tentative time scale based on the supposed

rate of deposition of ash, etc., in Deyon Downs Rock Shelter. Tt emphasises

again an interesting point, first drawn attention to in that paper, that

since the time of the first appearance of the aborigines in this rock

shelter the relative abundance of some microscopic shells of the fauna

of Deyon Downs has been changing. Expressed as a percentage Bulinus,

PIRRI

LEPC

hal 148, oh

Fie. 9. Rating of three small shells in Deron Rock Shelter, indicating thunge from Bulinus

u Froghwater species) to dominanse uf Melanin, ao breckish-water form; Corbiowla, a tolerant species.

a fresh water form has been gradually yielding place to Melania, a

brackish-water-loving form, while Corbicula a more tolerant species, has

remained relatively constant.

On the basis of the occurrence of this change Hale and Tindale had

indicated a probable slow trend of change towards the Mediterranean

semi-srid climate enjoyed in the Murray Valley at present. The diagram

seemed to suggest that conditions at no time were appreciably drier

than those being experienced at the present day.

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 38

The diagram in its original form, without positive indications of

time scale, was ignored by Crocker and Wood (1947) when they postulated

their “Great Arid” Hypothesis and linked it with the supposed climatic

condition of Mid-Recent Time. With the C!* date of 4250 = 180 B.P. to

control the general scale it can now be read, in combination with data

furnished by the 8700 B.P. terminal date for the terra rossa soils of Cape

Martin in the South Hast of South Australia, as removing two of the

main arguments for a supposedly great arid period in Mid-Recent times

us postulated by these authors.

SUCCESSION OF INDUSTRIES

Drawing all the facts of the previous sections of the paper together

and taking into consideration the time data available from Tartanga,

Devon Downs, Lake Menindee and Cape Martin we are in a position to

suggest the outline of culture sequence in South Eastern Ausiralia, since

Late Pleistocene times, as shown in fig. 1, which speaks for itself.

On this diagram we are not yet in a position to define in detail

the times of transition from Pirrian to Mudukian and from Mudukian

to Murundian in the area under consideration. Since probably we are

dealing with culture shifts in terms of tribal displacement as well as

in part changing implement fashions and cultural acquisitions it will

perhaps be correct to assume that the times will prove to vary from

place to place. As mentioned above we can secure some general indications

of the times from data at Devon Downs Kock Shelter, if we use the

convenient, but possibly specious assumption outlined in an earlier para~-

graph, that the rate of accumulation of ashy deposit and debris in the

shelter was relatively constant. For the purposes of the diagram, using

these indications, the Pirrian to Mudukian transition had been drawn as

if it had occurred shortly after 3800 B.P. and the Mudukian to Murundian

culture shift is shown as at about 2700 B.P. in Devon Downs Rock

Shelter; both could be much later and the Mudukian to Murundian shift,

in particular, may have been long delayed in some areas,

ROCK CARVINGS AND CULTURE SEQUENCE

The C4 dates described in the present paper enable some preliminary

indications to be given of the possible cultural associations of the styles

of rock carvings met with in Southern Australia.

The late Murundian style is found on the walls at Devon Downs

and examples were figured by Sheard (1927) and by Hale and Tindale

(1930 fig. 212). Thin linear marks predominate. The same style of

drawing occurs on present day weapons from the Murray River, and

40 RECORDS OF THE 3.4. MUSEUM

others like them were traced on the ground with a stick by an old

aboriginal of the Maraura Tribe, when telling a story to Tindale (1939

fig. 256).

The Mudukian style, which may have extended up into the Early

Murundian, shows designs with much heavier lines, wide curves, and

forms representing animals and objects (Hale and Tindale 1930, fig. 246).

The heavily scored rock carvings of Sydney district possibly belong to

this same Mudukian culture phase.

Tugby (1953) indicates some Victorian rock shelter painting sites

have associated occupational debris indicating a microlith culture. This

perhaps is Mudukian.

Hither the Mudukian or the Pirrian people made many “‘tally” marks

as if keeping count, or “utilitarian” marks, comprising groups of “shar-

pening” marks as if bone points were being fashioned by rubbing on rocks.

Such marks are reported from more than one place in Southern Australia

and may be indicative of this period as in Devon Downs Shelter (Tindale

and Mountford 1926; Hale and Tindale 1930).

A style of rock carvings, with probable tracks of giant birds,

described by Hall and his colleagues (1951) are possibly ones from the

Tartangan period. Egg sheils of these birds have been found, believed

to be food remains, in the horizon identified at Lake Menindee as of

Tartangan times. It must be remembered however that there is some

suggestion of the survival of knowledge of these birds in present-day

traditions of the aborigines so the rock carvings may be later in time

than Tartangan.

However, if these indications are valid the rock carvings found in

South Eastern Australia range at least ever the greater part of the

past 6,500 years, and several changes of style are manifest.

PHYSICAL TYPES

The brief discussion of Australian physical types of man in this

material culture paper is not to be considered an admission that there

is any necessary link between the physical forms of men and the cultures

they enjoy.

Both physical form and culture seem to have had similar broad

histeries of translation from Asia out. towards the Australian continent,

with modifications on the one hand due to possible local genetic changes

and hybridisation, and on the other hand due to possible local inventions

tacked on to what was a considerable legacy from older and widespread

cultural influences from the mother of continents.

So far no evidence has come to light directly linking the Kartan

Culture with any physical relics of man: Potential candidates would

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 41

probably have had to resist decay since late Pleistocene times, ‘The

Aitape frontal bone (Fenner 1941; Hossfeld 1949) might qualify in

point of time but no implements were found with the fossil.

indirect evidence has linked the Kartan Culture with the Barrinean

negrito on the grounds that both are probably the oldest respective

types in Australia. However Fenner (1941) has considered the Aitape

skull fragment might be equated with his “Southern” Australoid type,

the same as that named by Birdsell (1949) from siudy of the living, as

the Murrayian type. The widespread practice reported among present

day negritic peoples of cremations rather than burials, if it is an old

custom, may have removed the greater part of any evidence for the

existence of the negrito. Certain it is that on such places as Kangaroo

Island where over 200 sites of occupation are now known and many

thousands of stone implements have been recovered, no osseous relics

of man ever have turned up. The best series of crania of Australian

negritic aborigines is in the Australian Museum, Sydney. They are

from the bodies of Barrinean natives killed by Native Police in the

Cairns area, Queensland, in the 1890's.

Our specific knowledge of the physical form of Tartangan people

is at present confined to the cranial pieces avid part skeleton, including

one Lolerably complete, though once fragmented cranium from Tartanga,

described by Hale and Tindale (1930). Tindale (1941) considered that

the cranium of the best preserved youthful individual possessed some

Tasmanoid characteristics, notably in the shape of the cranial vault

and in the presence of small third molars, unusual in Southern Australoids,

and usual in Tasmanoids. It is possible that the Tartangan youth shows

closest relationship with the rather large Tasmanian crania found in

Western Tasmania, which Wunderly (1938) has considered to be separate

from the more truly negritic Tasmanians of the rest of Tasmania. Further

work should be done before too much reliance is placed on these

preliminary views. Since the Tartangan youth was buried from a horizon

in bed C, the layer which provided the C™ date of 6020 B.P. this may

be considered to give a reasonable indication of the date when he lived.

Mahony (1943) in writing of the Keilor find dismissed thy Tartangan

remains in one line. “There is no evidence of the age of the Tartanga

bones", an explanation for his omission to compare them with his own find.

The C4 date now available cannot be so readily ignored since it applies

to a site from which several burials and many implement specimens have

been recovered.

Gill (1955) has suggested a C' date of 8500 B.P. for the Keilor

cranium. Unfortunately the date is not based on material specifically

42 RECORDS OF THE 8A. MUSEUM

associated with the fossil and the implement associated with it gives

only an inconclusive lead. He has attempted to show by a wide

physiographic survey that the Keilor skull horizon may be linked with

a diastem in terrace deposits dated to 8500 + 250 B.P. This may well

be so since man was probably an inhabitant of Victoria at all times from

the Late Pleistocene on, but the presence of an implement has to be

accounted for, Could this date refer to the horizon into which the skull

was put by those who buried it, rather than the date of the living man?

Aboriginals today in places as far apart as Arnhem Land and the coastal

areas of North Queensland use skulls separately from the rest of the body

in ceremonies connected with mourning for the dead. The skull as found

showed no signs of “rolling” and it is not weathered as if having laid

on or near the surface after natural burial during some freshet. If it

were not buried by such a flow of water, the odds are high that this

or any other given skull would be one that had been given burial, and

the chance that one with so perfectly preserved a molar dentition could

have been “rolled” into position is possibly rather improbable. Absence

of the front teeth could be accounted for by a period of use as a ritual

object. The painted skulls of Eastern Arnhem Land, for example, in

use, shed the same loose teeth as are missing in the Keilor skull.

If the general indications of a possible Pirrian date afforded by the

implement flake are valid then Keilor man might have belonged to a

period just after Mid-Recent High Terrace time. If the implement flake

must be ignored, the place of Keilor man in the culture succession will

have to be ascertained by indirect means, which can only come after

further collecting is done in the area. However Gill (1953) has shown by

fluorine tests that the Keilor skull belongs to the campsite from which

the implement came so that it seems that a Post-Mid-Recent High date

must be accepted. His first C™ date of 3000 B.P. is possibly nearer the

mark than the revised one of 8500 B.P. (Gill, 1955 p. 52).

Keble (1946) has substantiated that the skull was related to the

campsite, evidence for which was found in the terrace in the form of

a layer of burnt bone, ash and red ochre.

Gill (1955) has reported other C™ dates for aboriginal hearths

but as no human remains or identifiable implement cultures have been

described in association, his reports lack significance for the purpose of

the present paper, indicating as they do only that man lived in Victoria

at the specific dates named.

Best preserved of adult crania which seem to be referable to the

Pirrian period is probably the very robust “Southern” or Murrayian sky!

and jaw numbered as A.15555 in the South Australian Museum which

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 43

was excavated at Fulham in January 1931 from a grave 3 feet deep

in red sand covered by three feet of gray sand.

This skull awaits detailed study, The body was lying in a flexed

position in a pit dug from the surface of the red sand. It Jay on its

right side with the head to the west. With it were Pirrian implements

including two pirri.

A probable Pirrian child bundle burial in the flexed position is the

one found by H, L. Sheard and others (1927) in a rock fissure at Fromm

Landing (specimen A.20616 in S.A, Museum). The preservation is such

that some details of the skin and hands haye been recovered also much

of the fish network and wallaby skin wrappings in which the child was

parceiled up. Its Pirrian date is presumed on the evidence of the presence

in the wrappings of a single pirri spear point (A.20517), which unfor-

tunately was only found after the first publication of the find, when the

Specimen was being prepared for display in the Museum galleries. This

child seems to be of the present day Murrayian type and much like the

infants from the Murundian Layers II and ID in Devon Downs Rock

Shelter.

There is thus some evidence to support the view that by Pirrian times

the people were probably not other than of the Murrayian type of the

present day,

There were two flexed burials at Lake Menindee from horizons

within the Mudukian microlith culture layer. At present these are being

studied at the University of California. They seem to furnish the

suggestion that Mudukian folk were predominently also of the same

Murrayian type as the Pirrians who had preceded them by about a

thousand years. Most of the flexed burials so common in Southern

Australia are of this general type.

The Murrayian is represented by some 500 crania and part skeletons

in the South Australian Museum collection. These are found wherever

Murindian and Mudukian campsites have become exposed by erosion and

all appear to represent people of the same general type. It was from

measurements of living people of the South that Tindale and Birdsell

(1941) recognised and Birdsell (1949) came to define as the Murrayian

type the people of Sotith Eastern Australia, while Fenner (1941) working

entirely independently, on crania, recognised the existence of the same

‘Southern’ type of aboriginal from his cranial remains.

The present day Carpentarian aborigines of North Australia may haye

been the original possessors of the Murundian Culture. In any case they

scem to be responsible for the diffusion of the latest elements which it

contains. The spread of the material culture elements evidently has been

44 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

far more rapid and widespread than has been the southward flow of

Carpentarian genes.

Apropos of this difference hetween gene flow and culture drift,

McCarthy (1939) expressed the opinion that “the hammer dressing

technique which was employed on artefacts throughout north-central and

eastern Australia is an early Neolithic trait in Malaya, and is therefore

a comparatively late introduction to Australia".

GENERAL DISCUSSION

In addition to the points made in previous sections of this paper brief

reference should be made to several other matters.

For many years various biface trimmed implements and cores have

been turning up in various places in Australia.

McCarthy (1938) grouped them together under the term Gambierian,

based on the many examples found in the South East of Sotith Australia,

and presumed them to represent a discrete culture. Tindale (1949)

reported the occurrence of a coup-de-poing like example near Scaddan,

Western Australia and described the use of crude examples like it on

Mornington Island, in the living culture isolated there, as oyster picks.

The evidence for these being all relics of a specific culture phase

has always been unsatisfactory and it still seems desirable to suspend

judgment. It is likely that those found in the Mt. Gambier area belong

to several different culture strata. Some are true flaked axes without

edge grinding, similar in form to ones still made in entirely different

materiai on Melville Island at the opposite end of the continent and

elsewhere between, others are merely tabular pieces from which explora-

tory flakes have been removed to test the flint inside, The aborigines

of the Kitja and Djaru tribes today explore white cherty rock in this

manner and carry away from their mines, for later working into biface

spear blades, blocks indistinguishable in general form from some Gam-

bierian bifaces. Stapleton (1945) gives a good account with figures of

some of these biface implements from the South East of South Australia,

The present writer has no pretensions to knowledge of soils, but

some queries may be raised for soil men to answer. Is the formation of

reddish sandy soil on dunes of predominantly limeshell sand, evidence for

arid conditions, as has been stated, or is it an effect of relatively pluvial

times, possibly with an alternation between winter wet and summer dry

season? If the former idea is correct it must have been arid before and

during the period around 8,700 years ago, at Cape Martin, and again

during and after Mudukian times probably less than 3,000 years ago,

for at both sites limestone pillars have grown up into the A horizon of

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 45

red earths, to levels higher than the occupation levels in which implementa

have come io rest.

Would it not be better to assume that immediately new shell-limesand

is brought ashore from the sea, whether by wind or by exposures of new

areas by retreat of the sea, leaching by percolation of rain water com-

mences, the lime is carried downward, where it helps to consolidate

deeper layers? What is left, the non-calcareous elements in the sand seem

to become the red soil; it is composed for the most part of quartz sand

grains and red earth. If there is a suromer dry period this process seems

to be interrupted, moisture moves upwards for this part of the year, to

the extent that limestone pillars are formed. Presence of such pillars,

projecting upwards into the reddish residual soils might be, not a mark

of arid periods, but on the contrary a happening wherever rainfall is

intermittent and heavy. The longer the process has continued the thicker

will be the mantle of residual reddish soil with included cuartz sand

and the larger will be any lateritic ironstone pebble-like inclusions in this

soil, The Mukudian horizon at Policeman Point is not old and the red

residual scil contains no conspicuous laterite pebbles; the Tartangan

horizon at Hoods Drift is older and it has many lateritie concretions in it,

The implements of the Tasmanian culture were never observed in

use. So far as is known most of those in collections are ones found on

abandoned campsites. Some of the types found, for example the high-

backed scrapers, could well have, once, been hafted, as are the present

day Australian adzes. The tronata (tronafia) blades of the Tasmanian

(Noetling 1909) some of which seem to he the parallel of the jimari

of the Mangala folk in Australia, might well have had a gum haft, since

the back cf these, like jimari knives, seldom are worked, and often show

no signs of being battered. A chance discovery may some day solve this

problem,

It is worthy of comment, in passing, that the Mousterians and

Aurignacians of Europe may well also have used such hafts of gum or

beeswax. It is known that much later in time some of the Epi-palaeolithic

sites of the Swiss lakes show gum, used, with wood, as part of the handles

of hafted knives, For example there is in the Peabody Museum at

Harvard, 2 flint knife, about four inches long, from Bienne Lake Village

in Switzerland, with its blade set into a grooved wooden handle and

still held in place with traces of a resinous subsiance.

In Australia there are marked and fundamental differences in mode

of treatment of the butts of knives depending on whether gum hafting

or raw hide hafting is employed, A study of these might be of considerable

interest to the European archaeologist in the interpretation of functions of

old European implement types.

46 RECORDS OF THE 8.4. MUSHUM

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Many of the observations on which this paper is based were made

on journeys over a period of years made possible by special grants from

the South Australian Government, the Carnegie Corporation of New

York, the Wenner-Gren Fund for Anthropological Research, the University

of Adelaide and the Board of the South Australian Museum,

To Dr. Wallace Broecker of the Lamont Geological Observatory of

Columbia University we are indebted for the C“ determinations for the

Devon Downs and Tartanga sites. These tests were arranged through

Dr, Hallam L. Movius of Harvard University:

Dr. G. T, Fergusson of the Dominion Laboratories, Lower Hutt, New

Zealand, kindly provided C*! dates for the Lake Menindee site as also

for an early Tartangan site at Cape Martin which is being described in

a separate paper (Tindale, in press).

From a wide circle of colleagues and field workers have come many

thousands of specimens from more than 2,000 Australian campsites. The

implement collections at the Museum which have thus been developed

provide the foundations for the observations here recorded. These

specimens have been for many years, under the care of my associate

Mr. H. M. Cooper. His careful observations in the field and his collating

in the cabinets have been of inestimable help, here gratefully acknow-

ledged. It would be impossible to name all contributors to the collections

but particular thanks are due to Henry Balfour, G. W. A. Bartholomew,

H, K. Bartlett, J. B. Birdsell, E. Couper Black, Lindsay Black, T. D.

Campbell, J. B. Cleland, H. K. Fry, F. J. Hall, P. Hossfeld, J. E. Johnson,

W. C. Johnstone, E. L. Lundelius, W. B, MacDougall, P. Stapleton, C, G,

Stephens, R. A. Stirton, R. Tedford, G. Walsh and S. B. Warne for the

making of systematic field records. Thanks are due also to all members

of the Museum staff who have been on field work, and have added material

to the collections.

Some 150 sites in all States were examined, and specimens also

obtained by the present author from living aborigines on several expedi-

tions in company with J. B. Birdsell, as well as during the numerous visits

to Central and Western Australia, and the Northern Territory on expedi-

tions conducted by the Board for Anthropological Research at the

University of Adelaide.

Mr, L. F. Marcus of the University of California made a special trip

to Lake Menindee to fetch samples for C™ analysis, and the recovery of the

early date of 8700 B.P. for a hearth there is due to his work.

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA AT

REFERENCES CITED

Basedow, H. 1925: Australian aboriginals. Adelaide.

Birdsell, J. B. 1949: Racial origin of the extinct Tasmanians. Rec. Qu.

Victoria Museum, Launceston 2, 105-122.

Butler, B. E. 1956: Parna, an aeolian clay. Austr. Journ. Science, Sydney

18, 145-151.

Campbell, T. D. and Noone, H. V. V. 1943: Some aboriginal campsites

in the Woakwine Range region of the South East of South Australia.

Ree. S. Austr. Mus,, Adelaide 7, 371-395.

Clark, J. G. D. 1954. Excavations at Star Carr. Cambridge University

Press.

Cooper, H, M, 1943: Large stone implements from South Australia. Rec.

S. Austr. Mus,, Adelaide 7, pp. 343-369.

Cooper, H. M. 1954: Material culttire of the Australian aboriginals. Rec.

S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 11, 91-103.

Crocker, R. L. and Wood, J. G, 1947: Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Austr., Adelaide

T1, pp. 91-136.

Edge-Partington, J. 1898: Album of the weapons of the natives of the

Pacific Islands, Manchester, series II.

Fenner, F. J. 1941: Fossii human skull fragments of probable Pleistocene

age from Aitape, New Guinea. Kec. 5S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 6,

pp. 335-356.

Gill, H. D. 1953: Fluorine tests relative to the Keilor skull. Amer. Journ.

Phys. Anthrop. Philadelphia 11, ns. 229-231,

Gill, E. D. 1955: Age of Keilor man, Australia. Anthropos, Freiburg.

50, 417 (bibliography).

Gill, E. D. 1955: (ms. letter re Lake Colongulac site).

Gill, E. D. 1955: Radiocarbon dates for Australian archaeological and

geological samples. Austr. Journ. Science, Sydney 18, 49-52.

Hale, H. M. and Tindale, N. B. 1930: Notes on some human remains in

the Lower Murray Valley, South Australia. Rec. 8. Austr. Mus.,

Adelaide 4, pp. 145-218,

Hall, F. J., McGowan, R. G. and Guleksen, G, F. 1951: Aboriginal Rock

carvings: a locality near Pimba, S.A. Rec. 5. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 9,

375-382.

Hossfeld, P. 8S. 1949: Stratigraphy of the Aitape skull and its significance,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide 72, 201-207.

Jackson, G. K. 1939: Aboriginal middens of Point Cartwright district.

Mem. Queensl. Mus., Brisbane 11, 289-295.

Keble, R. A. 1946: Excursion to Keilor. Vict. Naturalist, Melbourne 63, 11.

438 RECORDS OF THE §A. MUSEUM

Keble, R, A. 1947: Notes on Australian quartenary climates and migration.

Mem. Nat. Mus., Victoria 15, pp. 28-81 (published after 20 January

1948}.

Libby, W. F. 1952: Radiocarbon dating. University of Chicago Press.

Mahony, D. J. 1943: Problem of antiquity of man in Australia. Mem. Nat-

Mus. Victoria, Melbourne 13, pp. 7-56 (bibliog.).

Mahony, D. J. 1943: Aust. Journ. Science, Sydney 6, p. 91.

McCarthy, F. D. 1938: Rept. Congr, Prehist. Far East, Singapore.

McCarthy, F. D. 1939: Mankind, Sydney 2, p. 182.

McCarthy, F, D, 1947: Analysis of the large stone implements from five

workshops on the North Coast of New South Wales. Rec. Austr. Mus.,

Sydney 21, 411-430.

McCarthy, F. D, 1949: Lapstone Creek excavation: two culture periods

revealed in Eastern New South Wales. Rec. Austr. Mus., Sydney 22,

1-34.

McCarthy, F. D. 1953: Oceanic and Indonesia affiliations of Australian

aboriginal culture. Journ. Polynesian Soc., Wellington 62, 243-261,

Mitchell, S$. R. 1949: Stone-age craftsmen. Melbourne, Tait Book Co.

Noetling, F. 1909: A peculiar group of tronattas. Papers and Proc,

Roy. Soc. Tas., Hobart, pp. 1-8.

Noone, H, V. V. 1943: Some aboriginal stone implements of Western

Australia. Rec. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 7, 271-280.

Saurin, E. 1953: La Geologie du Quaternaire et les Industries Pre-

historiques en Indo Chine. Abstract and Messages of Fourth Far

Eastern Prehistory Congress and Anthropology Division of the Eighth

Pacific Science Congress. Quezon City, Philippines, pp. 1-118.

Sheard, H. L. 1927: Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Austr., Adelaide 51, 18-19.

Sheard, H. L., Mountford, C. P. and Hackett, C. J. 1927: An unusual

disposal of an aboriginal child's remains from the Lower Murray,

South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide 51, 173-176.

Shellshear, J. 1937: Mankind, Sydney 2, p. 64.

Stapleton, P. de S. 1945: Bifaced stone implements from South Nastern

South Australia, Rec. S, Austr. Mus., Adelaide 8, pp. 281-287.

Tindale, N. B. and Mountford, C. P. 1926: Native markings on rocks at

Morowie, South Australia. Trans, Roy. Soc. 8. Austr,, Adelaide 50,

156-159,

Tindale, N. B. 1928: Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide 52, p. 248.

Tindale, N, B. and Maegraith, B. G. 1931: Traces of an extinct aboriginal

population on Kangaroo Island. Rec. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 4,

pp. 275-289.

TINDALE—CULTURE SUCCESSION IN AUSTRALIA 49

Tindale, N. B, 1937: Relationship of the extinct Kangaroo Island culture

and cultures of Australia, Tasmania and Malaya. Rec. S, Austr. Mus.,

Adelaide 6, pp. 39-60.

Tindale, N. B. 1939: Eagle and crow myths of the Maraura tribe, Lower

Darling River, New South Wales. Rec, S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 6,

pp. 243-261.

Tindale, N. B. and Birdsell, J. B. 1941: Tasmanoid tribes in North Queens-

land. Rec. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 7, pp. 1-9.

Tindale, N. B. 1941: Antiquity of man in Australia. Aust. Journ. Science,

Sydney 3, pp. 144-147.

Tindale, N. B. and Noone, H. V. V. 1941: Analysis cf an Australian

aboriginal’'s hoard of knapped flint. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr.,

Adelaide 65, 116-122.

Tindale, N. B. 1947: Subdivision of Pleistocene time in South Australia.

Rec. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 8, 619-652 (bibliog.) (published 10

December 1947).

Tindale, N. B. 1949: Large biface implements from Mornington Island,

Queensland and from South Western Australia. Rec. 8. Austr, Mus.,

Adelaide 9, 157-166.

Tindale, N. B. 1950: Palaeolithic kodj axe of the aborigines and its

distribution in Australia. Rec. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 9, 257-274,

371-374.

Tindale, N. B, 1953: Tribal and intertribal marriage among the Australian

aborigines. Human Biology 25, 169-190.

Tindale, N. B, 1956 (1): First Australian. Pacific Discovery, San Francisco

9 (5), 6-13.

Tindale, N. B. 1956 (2): Austr. Journ. Science, Sydney 19, 56.

Tindale, N. B. 1956 (3): Peopling South Eastern Australia, Austr. Museum

Magazine, Sydney 12 (4) 115-120.

Tindale, N. B. 1956 (4): Anthropology, in South Australia. Report of

Museum Board 1955-56, 7.

Tindale, N. B. (in press): A dated Tartangan implement site at Cape

Martin, South East of South Australia. Trans. Roy, Soc. 8. Austr.,

Adelaide 80.

Towle, C. C. 1930: Certain stone implements of the scraper family. East-

wood Press, Eastwood, New South Wales.

Tugby, D. J. 1953: Actes du IV Congres International du Quaternaire, p. 5

(quoted from a reprint).

Tylor, E. B. 1895: Journ. Roy. Anthrop. Inst., London 24, 141-152.

Worms, B. A. 1950: Anthropos, Freiburg 45, 641 (footnote).

Wunderly, J. 1938: West coast tribe of Tasmanian aborigines. Man,

London 38 (142), 121-124.

AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL PENGUINS,

with REMARKS on PENGUIN EVOLUTION ano DISTRIBUTION

Bx GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON,

Amwertcan Moszum or Natura History

Fig. 1-6

INTRODUCTION

A fossil penguin bone from Australia was first described by Finlayson

in 1938, Since then three other specimens have been found. Glaessner

(1955) has discussed the stratigraphy and biostratonomy of all four

occurrences and has figured two of the more recently discovered bones.

The four specimens. were then referred to me for morphological and

systematic study, which is the subject of the present paper. The specimens

are the property of the South Australian Museum, and I am much

indebted to the authorities of that Museum and to Dr. M, F. Glaessner

of the University of Adelaide for the opportunity to study them.

The four Australian specimens come from two horizons, late Eocene

and Oligocene. None is surely identifiable to species, but they represent

at least three species. One Eocene specimen is identifiable to genus,

Palaeeudyptes. The other Eocene specimen may be of the same genus

and species. The two Oligocene specimens are certainly of different

species and probably genera, one a palaeeudyptine and the other not

placeable as to subfamily.

Since I reviewed the whole subject in 1946, additional discoveries

of fossil penguing have been made not. only in Australia but also in

New Zealand and Antarctica. Several further studies on penguin

paleontology and evolution have been published, notably the outstanding

work of B. J, Marples (1952, 1953), Another full review is not now called

for, but this occasion is taken to append an up-to-date summary of fossil

penguin distribution and two brief notes on a morphological point and

on a criticism of a theory of penguin origins.

In tables of measurements (Tables 1-3), I have numbered the

dimensions as in Marples (1952, 1953) to facilitate comparisons, Al

measurements are in millimeters.

The accompanying drawings are by Chester Tarka.

52 RECORDS OF THE 5.4. MUSEUM

DESCRIPTIONS OF SPECIMENS

Palaeendyptes cf. antarcticus

Tu» Eocene Humerus

(Fig. 1.)

Specimen. S, A. M. No. P7158, left humerus, nearly complete but

with salient parts of both ends eroded. Collected by W. Burdett.

Locality. Witton Bluff, at the southern end of Christie's Beach,

about 16 miles south of Adelaide.

Horizon and Age. ‘'Transitional Marl" member, which forms the

base of the Blanche Point Maris, late Eocene (Giaessner, 1955).

Previows Publication. This is the specimen summarily described

and figured in external and postaxial aspects by Finlayson (1938). Marples

(1952) compared a cast with New Zealand specimens, but made only a

generalized statement of similarity, without description or figure. Simpson

(1946) discussed the specimen briefly on the basis of Finlayson’'s figures,

and Glaessner (1955) has discussed its occurrence and age.

Description. This is a large, but not maximal, fossil penguin humerus,

Size and proportions are near those of the seven New Zealand humeri

referred to Palaeeudyples antarcticus by Marples (1952), but most dimen-

Sions are at or slightly below the smallest measurements on Marples’ speci-

mens. The proximal part of the shaft is, however, relatively thick (dorse-

ventrally). The shaft tapers from proximal to distal, yery slightly but

still somewhat more than is usual in the New Zealand specimens. See

Table 1. There is no preaxial angle or tubercle.

The distal end is somewhat eroded and crushed or cracked, but seems

to have been about as in Palaeeudyptes antarcticus (Marples, 1952, Fig, 2,

No. 3), The angle between the midline of the shaft and a tangent to

the ulnar and radial condyles was probably between 25° and 30°. This

is a difficult measurement to make consistently, even on perfect bones,

and is consequently open to considerable error here, but the angle is

certainly unusually low. 40° is the smallest angle noted for Palaeeudy ples

by Marples, but on some of his illustrations I obtain values as low as

30° or slightly less, which suggests that our technique differs, In any

ease both this bone and New Zealand Palaecudyptes have low angles and

there is insufficient evidence of significant difference between them.

The head is characteristically palaeeudyptine, without apparently

distinctive characters within that group. The same is true of the

tricipital fossa, which is completely undivided and is small relative to

the bulk of the whole bone (a point ¢eparately discussed later in this

paper). There is no angle or prominence on the preaxial border, a feature

SIMPSON—AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL PENGUINS ag

Fig. 1. Palaeeudyptes cf. antareticus, SAM. Noa, P1358, Ieft humerus, a, ventral aspeet.

b, dorsal aspect. Insertions of peectaralis secrnidyve and lettivintus dorsi ure anarked by heavy Proken lines,

Qrarks in shaft have been omitted and small missing Fregmetita restored, but eroded parts of proximal

and distn! ends have not been restored (xg).

Fiz, 2. Palaetdypter cf. anturctious? S.AM, No. 10862, shaft of tight tibio-tarsus, Proximal

view, shuwitig erdss geelion ut break, and postertine view. Cracks Have heen omiiied and emall

fragments missing from shaft have been restored (x),

constant in recent penguins, absent or slight in New Zealand Palae-

eudyptes, but present in some other palaeeudyptines.

The insertion of the pectoralis secundus is not well defined, but it

is evidently nearly parallel with the shaft and it is well separated from

54 RECORDS OF THE 8,4. MUSEUM

the small Jafissimus dorsi insertion—characters typical of the early

penguins and specifically of Palaeeudyptes antarcticus although some-

what variable in the latter. There is a marked depression or small fossa

between the proximal end of the pectoralis secundus insertion and the lip

of the tricipital fossa (near and proximal to the insertion of the pectoralis

tertius).

The capsular groove is not perfectly preserved or completely freed

from matrix, It may, doubtfully, be a little less sharply defined or

continucus than in New Zealand Palaeeudypies and to that extent more

like recent penguins.

Classification. Finlayson (1938) pointed out the close resemblance

of this bone to Palaeeudyptes antarcticus of New Zealand but did not

make a definite identification. Marples (1952) compared a cast with the

New Zealand specimens and confirmed the resemblance except for the

slightly smaller (‘more slender’) size of the Australian humerus. He

referred to it as Palaeeudyples sp., as I (Simpson, 1946) had previously

done from Finlayson's published data, alone. The bone obviously belongs

to the Palaeeudyptinae (Simpson, 1946, usefully redefined by Marples,

1952 and 1953). It cannot be distinguished generically from Palaecudyptes,

It has slight and somewhat dubious apparent differences from New

Zealand specimens of P. antlarcficus, as noted above, These are no

greater than variations that commonly occur within a single species,

and they do not warrant designation of a new species, Nevertheless the

possible slight morphological diffierences and the markedly different

provenience prevent a fully positive assignment to P. anlarcticus. The

most reasonable identification at present is Palaeeudyptes cf, antarcticus.

Table 1.

Comparative Measurements or Humeri

P7158 P10863 P. antarcficus

(Marples)

1. Extreme length .... .... 154 — 159-172 (2)7**

2. Head to angle at base

of dorsal sesamoid

groove deze ett ae 152 — 153-166 (4)

3. Distal end of insertio

of pectoralis secun-

dus to angle of 2 ..... ca. 100 — 104-1147(6)

4. Head, greatest diameter ca. 45 ca. 53* 46-49 (5)

SIMPSON—AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL PENGUINS 55

5. Pre-postaxial diameter

of shaft 14 distance

from head axe 2814 29 28-35 (7)

6. Same, % distance from

Hea’ oo ee se ore 251% ca. 29 28-35 (6)

7. Dorsoventral diameter

of shaft 14 distance

from head ae 13 14 11¥-13 (6)

8. Same, % distance from

head ok se sew ane 11% ca. 14 12-14 (6)

condyle to longest

distal process .0..0 wu ca, 40 — 45-50 (4)

11. Transverse diameter of

distal end across

ulnar condyle ..... _..... ca, 18 — 18-21 (5)

*47.3 asx preserved, about 514 mm. believed to be eroded.

**Figures in parentheses are numbers of specimens measured by

Marples,

Palaeeudyptes cf. antarcticus ?

Tum Eocens Trisiorarsus

(Fig. 2)

Specimen. 8S. A. M. No, P10862, right tibiotarsus, lacking both ends

and with shaft somewhat broken. Collected by M. F. Glaessner,.

Locality. North of Port Noarlunga jetty, at the base of the cliff

extending southward from Witton Bluff, at high water level.

Horizon and Age. Just below the top of the Banded Marl member

of the Blanche Point marls, about 20-25 feet above the transitional marl

(in which P7158 was found), late Eocene (Glaessner, 1955).

Previous Publication. Listed but not described or figured by Glaess-

ner (1955).

Description. This tibiotarsus is slightly smaller than that referred to

Palaeeudyptes antarcticus by Marples (1952), and hence is from an

animal of the same size as the humerus described above. Few distinctive

characters are preserved, The shaft is flattened dorsoventrally and is

rounded, with a sharp crest only at and below the region of contact

with the fibula. To the extent that they differ from recent penguins,

these characters are common in the older fossil penguins and especially

in the Palaeeudyptinae.

56 RECORDS OF THE 83.A. MUSEUM

Classification. Positive identification is hardly possible, but as far

as it goes the bone is entirely consistent with reference to Palaeeudyptes,

Difference in age from the humerus of Palaeeudyptes cf. antarcticus is

not likely to be significant, and the fact that the two animals were of

almost exactly the same size establishes a certain presumption that they

were of the same species.

Table 2.

Comparative MeasuREMENTS or Trsrorarst

P10862 Palaeeudyptes

antarcticus

(Marples)

2: Pre - postaxial diameter

Y% length from proxi-

mal end oo cee ca, 24 28

3. Same, % length .,. .. . ca, 19 23

4. Dorsoventral diameter

1% length from proxi-

mal end oe seeee ca. 16 16

5. Same, #4 length .. .. ca. 14% 16

Gen. et sp. indet., A

Tue Oxtcocens Humerus

(Fig, 3)

Specimen, §. A.M. P10863, right humerus without distal end and

with proximal end heavily eroded. Collected by M. Pritchard,

Locality. Pritchard Brothers’ building-stone quarry about 714 miles

west-northwest of the town of Mt. Gambier.

Horizon and Age. Gambier limestone, Oligocene (Glaessner, 1955).

Previous Publication. Figured and tooth marks discussed by

Glaessner (1955).

Descriplion, The humerus when complete was at least as large as

Palaeeudyptes antarcticus, but of somewhat different proportions. The

badly eroded head nevertheless indicates that this part was larger than in

P,. antarcticus both absolutely and in proportion to the transverse

diameters of the shaft. The pectoralis secundus insertion is only very

slightly oblique, well separated from the latissimus dorsi attachment, and

the fossa between it and the lip of the tricipital fossa is shallow. There

is. a distinct preaxial tubercle or angle, and the contour of the shaft

proximal to this is concave, making this slightly the narrowest part of

the shaft, which nevertheless has nearly parallel sides and does not seem

SIMPSON—AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL PENGUINS ST

to have been notably sigmoid. The tricipital fossa is narrow and undivided.

Measurements are included in Table 1.

Classification, This specimen is quite surely palaeeudyptine, but it

cannot be referred with assurance to any named genus in which the

humerus is known. The size of the species is probably in the range of

mesa,

———

Fig. 3, Gen. et ap. indet:, A. B.A-M. No, PORE, part Gf right humerus. 4g, ventral aspect.

h, dorsal aspect. Insertions of pectaralix geciindwa and flattwsimus dorsi are marked by heavy broken

lines. Cracks in shaft have been omitted and smull missing fragments restored, but imperfections of

proximal and distal ends are ag shown, Apparent teoth marks on disto-ventral part ara shown (xf),

Fig. 4. Gen. et sp. indet, B. S.A.M. No, Pi0870, imperfect Jef femur, Posterior (or ventral)

aspect, Nu restoration (x).

Palaeeudyptes antarcticus, but it differs from Palaeeudyptes especially

in the relatively larger head and the prominent preaxial tubercle, Pachy-

dyptes has a much stouter, stockier humerus and a smaller tubercle with

the contour convex above it. Plafydyptes and Archaeospheniseus have

the pectoralis secundus insertion more oblique, and the latter genus also

has a smaller tubercle and less concave contour above it. The Seymour

Island Anthropornis is generally rather similar but has a relatively

4a RECORDS OF THE 5,4. MUSEUM

smaller head and stouter shaft and a smaller preaxial tubercle. Eosphae-

niscus, also from Seymour Island, has a heavily accented fossa between

the pectoralis secundus and the tricipital fossa, quite different from the

presevt specimen.

Few and slight as these differences are, they are just such as to

distinguish the humeri of defined genera of palaeetidyptines. It is there-

fore improbable that. this specimen belongs to the same genus as any

previously described humerus. Nevertheless it seems inadvisable to base

a hew generic or specific name on this inadequate type, which might make

difficult or impossible the exact identification of future finds, especially

because the length of the shaft and the important characters of the

distal end are unknown. There are, furthermore, several named palae-

eudyptine genera in which the humerus is unknown and to which, there-

fore, this bone might conceivably belong. It is designated only as gen. et

sp. indet., with the comment that it is not the same as the late Eocene

form described above, and that it is also of a different species, and

doubtless genus, from the contemporaneous femur next described.

Gen. et sp. indet., B

Tae Oxicocens Femur

(Fig. 4)

Specimen. 8. A. M. No. P10870, left femur, lacking the trochanter

and the distal end and with the head badly eroded. Found by D. J.

Leonard,

Locality. Found in a block of building stone, from the vicinity of

Mt. Gambier.

Horizon and Age. Gambier limestone, Oligocene, (Glaessner, 1955),

Previous Publicalion. Figured, without description, by Glaessner,

1955,

Description, The fernur in penguins is not a very distinctive bone,

and this specimen has lost. just those parts that might have been most

characteristic. The shaft is rather stout, although probably no more so

than would be expected in average penguins of this size. Although the

trochanter 1s lacking, the contour of the shaft below it suggests that it

was less. compressed laterally, or displaced medially, than in recent

penguins—a feature common in the Miocene and older penguins.

The shaft is nearly smooth except for a prominent rugosity just

below the head and the usual, not especially prominent, ventral ridges

above the condyles. The animal was slightly below the mean size of the

living Aptenodytes patagonicus. (See Table 3.) Glaessner suggested

that the trochanter had been bitten off, but there are no clear tooth marks.

SIMPSON—AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL PENGUINS 59

Classification. This bone is unidentifiable, even as to stibfamily,

both because it lacks characteristic parts and because most genera and

species of fossil penguins are known from and defined by the tarsome-

tatarsus and the humerus and not the femur. This femur is much too small

to be conspecific with any of the three specimens described above, and

indeed the discrepancy suggests that it is not congeneric with any of them.

All one can say now is that at least two quite distinct penguins, one a

palaeceudyptine and the other of unknown subfamily, are present in the

Gambier limestone.

Table 3.

Measurements or Fumur

P10870

1, Notch between head and

trocanter to notch be- ca. 90-95 (very rough

tween condyles ..... ...... approximation).

2. Greatest proximal width ca, 22

5. Pre-postaxial diameter at

middle of shaft 2... 11¥,

6. Dorsoventral diameter at

middle of shaft... ..... 114%

Nore on Revattve Sizes or tHe Trictritar Fossa

Wiman (1905), Finlayson (1938), and Lowe (1939) stated, or the

basis of New Zealand, Australian, and Seymour Island fossils, that their

tricipital fossae are smaller, relative to the size of the whole humerus,

than in living penguins. I (Simpson, 1946) agreed that this is probably

true of some, at least, of the larger fossil species, but pointed out that

if is not true of smaller Patagonian fossils, notably in the genus

Palavospheniscus.

Marples (1952) made measurements. for five New Zealand fossils,

referred to four genera and species, and for one specimen each of seven

recent species in five genera, The volumes were compared by filling

the fossa with fine sand, the weight (W) of which was taken as directly

proportional to the volume. The size of the humerus was measured as

diameter of the head (D) and length of the whole bone (LL). The indices

100 (W/D) and 100 (W/L) were then calculated and compared. These

figures suggest, and Marples concluded, that the larger hurneri have not

only absolutely but also relatively larger fossae, contrary to the previous

conclusions cited above, The evident further implication is that the

differences depend on size and have no independent taxonomic value,

or no bearing on evolutionary change other than size. It may be noted

60 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

that Marples’ own figures show that the only recent species included in

the comparison that are comparable in size with any of the fossils do,

indeed, have larger fossae than the latter (see last column of Table 4).

He concluded, however, that the species in question, A pfenodytes forsteri

and A. patagonicus, ‘“‘are clearly not typical penguins in this respect”,

A valid index of relative size requires that ‘size’ have the same

number of dimensions in both terms of the comparison. Although less

precisely quantitative, the comparisons involved in the statements about

the tricipital fossa by Wiman, Finlayson, Lowe, and me were valid in that

linear (one-dimensional) measurements of fossa and humerus were com-

pared. The indices 100 (W/D) and 100 (W/L) are invalid because

W is (indirectly) three-dimensional but D and L are one-dimensional. An

index three-dimensional in both terms can be obtained by using the ratios

W/D3 or W/L.

+ Fossil

2 3 4 5 &

L3/106

Fig. 5, Correlation of length of humerus and the index 10° (W/Z) in some recent and foasil

penguins, Wor fuller explanation see text. Kaw data from Marples (1952),

SIMPSON—AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL PENGUINS 61

Use of W to represent volume of the fossa depends on the relationship,

Ww=SY

where W is the weight of sand, V is the volume (three dimensional, of

course) of the fossa, and S is the specific gravity of the sand-air

aggregate, S depends in a complex way on the mineral composition and

the size and shape distributions of the sand used. Its value is unknown

in this case, but since it was kept constant in Marples’ study his compari-

sons are valid in this respect. Use of L? (or of D*) to represent volume

of the bone depends on the relationship

L3=av

in which @ depends in a complex way on the shape of the bone. The value

ef a must vary somewhat from species to species and even from one

individual to another, but in all penguins the shape of the humerus is

sufficiently stereotyped to keep the variation of a within rather narrow

limits. In other words, it is a reasonable premise that L? and V have

a high, positive, rectilinear correlation, The correlation of L and V

cannot be rectilinear.

In order to bring the index into a convenient order of magnitude the

ratio W/1? may be multiplied, not by 10? as in Marples’ index, but by 10°

(ie, 107 cubed). The results from Marples’ raw data are given in the

third column of Table 4, and compared with Marples’ index in the fourth

column. The indicated conclusions differ from those of Marples, Except

for Eudypfula minor, the index for these recent penguins shows no

evident trend with size and rather little variation, Since only single

measurements are involved, the variation shown could be merely sampling

variance around the same mean for the six species, although it is likely

that some differences among species occur. It is Eudyptula, not Apteno-

dyles, that.zppears “clearly not typical... in this respect’. The meaning

of the apparent aberrancy of Eudyptula is not clear. Marples notes

{without further data) that the volume of the fossa is highly variable in

Budyptula and the only specimen available to me seéms to have a fossa

relatively about as large as in other recent penguins.

In the four fossil penguins compared, the relative size pf the fossa

is decidedly smaller than in “normal” recent penguins (all the eompared

species except E. minor), confirming the earlier conclusion rejected by

Marples. The discrepancy is most marked for the three largest fossil

species, all of which have approximately the same index, 0.90-1.06 as

against 2.83-3.59 for recent species other than E. minor. The fossil

Archaeospheniscus lowei is of almost exactly the same size as the living

Aptenodytes forsteri, but the indices are 1.06 and 3.50, respectively, The

62 RECORDS OF THE 8.A MUSEUM

amallest fossil species compared, Platydyptes novaezealandiae, happens

to have a larger index (2.23) than the other fossils. This isolated

observation is insufficient te establish a tendency for smaller fossil species

to have relatively larger fossae, but it is noteworthy that still smaller

species of Palaeospleniscus clearly have relatively large fossae (1). Note

also, however, that if only three or four recent species had been included

they might have suggested a trend that is evidently absent when the

seven species are included. For instance, E. pachyrhynchus, M. anlipodes,

and A, patagonicus would have shown a regular decrease of the index

with increasing size, and E. minor, P. papua, A, patagonicus and A.

forsteri would have shown just the opposite, a regular increase of the

index, (See Fig. 5.)

The data of Table 4 and the graph of Fig. 5 still do not strictly

represent a valid regression or reveal a possible growth pattern, because

the variate L appears (with different dimensions) in both terms of the

comparison: L and 10° (W/L). The valid regression of W on L2/10* (*) is

shown in Fig. 6. The regressions for both the recent and the fossil

penguins measured by Marples clearly tend to follow linear patterns, but

the two regressions are decidedly different. The regression for the recent

specimens does not suggest significant deviation from a straight bine, and

it is somewhere in the neighbourhood of x = 3¥sy—W4. (That line is

merely sketched in freehand and the approximate equation derived from

it; the scanty data do not warrant more elaborate curve fitting.) It is

noteworthy that Hudypfula minor also falls near this line, within the

probable limits of sampling error, and that with this treatment no recent

species seems to be “exceptional”.

The fossil species do suggest that their regression is not straight,

but there are only four individual sets of measurements, and departures

from a straight line could be random. (Neither the fossil nor the recent

regression is straighter on a log graph, and use of the allometric equation

is not indicated.) The regression is somewhere in the general neighbour-

hood of the straight line x =°4 y + 1 (roughly sketched by eye, as for the

recent data). Even with so few data, there can be no serious doubt that

the regressions are very different for the recent and the fossil species

being compared. It is also again clear thet among the larger species

the fossils have decided smaller tricipital fossae than the living forms.

@) Becauss the sperilia gravity (8 of preceding discussion) of Sund-air aggregates mush vary

greatly and is unknown for the sand ased by Marples, it is impossible for anuther worker to produce further

data comparable with bis. Direct, repradumble. and premee comparisons conld be made from mensore-

rents of the vnlume of o liquid that ean he fehl in the fosss ond of the «<tisplacement of liquid by

immersion of the whele bone, but such measurements have oot heen made.

Cy Ag in the index 16°(W/L*), the term 10% is intrnduced only to keep the variates eampared in

the came order of magnitude. The form of the regression would of course be the same if 10" were

omitted.

SIMPSON—AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL PENGUINS 63

E. pachyrhynchus

3.50 ° © A. forsteri

OE. crestatus

3.00 OA. patagonicus

wm 62.50 © Living

> + Fossil

a + Pnovoereaiondiae

2 2.00

1.50

P. ponderosus

1.00 i

Rantarcticus

150 175

LENGTH OF HUMERUS

Fig. 6. Regression of W on L*/10* for some recent and fossil penguins (species as in Fig. 5).

For fuller explantion see text, Raw data from Marples (1952).

However, if an extrapolation of this regression should apply to other late

Eocene to early Miocene penguins—an extrapolation not really warranted

without further information—then the smallest of them would have tri-

cipital fossae about equal to or even larger than those of recent penguins of

the same size. It is suggestive, but no more than suggestive in the absence

of precisely comparable measurements, that L?/10® for the Patagonian

fossil genus Palaeospheniscus (about 0.35-0.50 in various species) is in the

region where the two regressions would intersect. As compared roughly

by linear dimensions, that genus does indeed have tricipital fossae about

as in recent penguins of comparable size.

64 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

Table 4.

Rewarive Size or Tricrprran Fossa in Various Prncuins

(For explanation see text.)

Species: Weightof Lengthof Index Index

sand humerus 106(W/L?) 10°¢W/L)

(Marples) (Marples) (Marples)

Ww L

Fossils:

Pachydyptes ponderosus 4.91 174 0.93 2.8

Palaeeudyptes antarcticus 3.81 162 0.90 2.3

Archaeospheniscus lowei 1.97 123 1.06 1.6

Platydyptes novaezealandiae 1.68 91 2.23 1.8

Living:

A plenodyles forsteri 6.68 124 3.50 5.3

Aptenodytes patagonicus 3.84 109 2.97 3.5

Pygoscelis papua 1.45 80 2.83 1.8

Megadyptes antipodes 1.39 75 3.29 1.8

Eudyptes pachyrhynchus 1.00 65,3 3.59 1.5

Eudyptes creslatus 0.53 55.0 3.19 0.9

Eudyplula minor 0.16 43.5 1.94 0.4

DISTRIBUTION OF FOSSIL PENGUINS

Fossil penguins are known from southern Argentina (Patagonia),

Seymour Island (3), New Zealand, and South Australia. It was formerly

believed that all occurrences were approximately contempcraneous, more

or less early Miocene, Now Marples (1952) and Finlay (1952) have

convincingly demonstrated that this is not true of the New Zealand

specimens, and Glaessner (1955) has done the same for the Australian

specimens. Although I have nothing new to contribute on this score, it

will be convenient to review these newer data on penguin distribution,

along with revised determinations which have not been gathered in any

one publication.

New Zealand. Finlay (1952) identified and discussed microfossils

associated with fossil penguins described by Marples (1952), The pertinent

part of the provincial stage sequence and the ages assigned by Finlay are

as follows:

(!) This weourrence is eonmeanly Gallo FAntnretie’, but Sumter Tsland is net port of Antsecticn

aud it is well north of the Anturetic Cirele, at about O4° 16" south latitude.

SIMPSON—AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL PENGUINS 65

Middle Oligocene Waitakian— P

Duntroonian— P

Early Oligecene

Whaingaroan—?P

Runangan— P

Late Eocene

Kaiatan— P

Middle Eocene Bortonian

Early Hocene Heretaunzan—?P

Penguins are most abundant in the Duntroonian, but occur also in

the other stages marked with P. The scraps thought to be frem the

Heretaungan, unfortunately unidentifiable, are probably the oldest known

fossil penguins. Good identifiable specimens occur from Kaiatan to

Waitakian, late Eocene to middle Oligocene by Finlay’s dating, Although

known occurrences of most of the described species are confined to one

stage or another, there seems to be no evident evolutionary progression

and the single, most abundant species Pulaeeudyples antarcticus is

identified by Marples, on the basis of good specimens, for the whole range

Kaijatan-Waitakian. (See Table 5.) This is a remarkably long span for

a single species. I know of no other species and rather few genera of

vertebrates present in both late Eocene and middle Oligocene. It is

possible that more abundant collections would permit specific separation,

but Marples’ specimens suffice to show that there is, at most, little

difference between earliest and latest occurrences referred to this species.

One must conclude that the rate of evolution for Palaeeudyples had

become effectively nil by late Eocene, that the Kaiatan-Waitakian span was

shorter than Finlay indicates, or that some of the specimens are incor-

rectly dated.

Australia. The two older penguin bones described above are from

the Blanche Point marls, formerly but incorrectly considered Miocene

(Finlayson, 1938), in horizons now placed in or near the late Eocene, The

younger bones are from the Gambier limestone, now placed in the Oligo-

cene without, as yet, closer correlation. The age determinations by

Glaessner (1955) are based mainly on still unpublished studies of

foraminiferal faunas. In themselves the fossil penguins as yet are of no

help in correlation, but the penguins known from the two ages are quite

different, as shown above.

66 RECORDS OF THE 8A. MUSEUM

Patagonia, The stratigraphic position of the Patagonian fossil pen-

guins is exactly known. With three dubious and probably erroneous

claimed exceptions, all are from the base of the Patagonian formation

(*Juliense” member). They are associated with “the richest and best

known of all South American Tertiary faunas” (Feruglio, 1949), with extra-

ordinarily abundant invertebrates as well as numerous sharks and whales.

Despite all this knowledge, the age has been and still is disputed. It has

been placed everywhere from early Eocene through Miocene. Nevertheless

there is now a clear consensus that the age is late Oligocene or early

Miocene, ie., deposition occurred at or around the Oligocene-Miocene

transition. The subject has been fully reviewed by Feruglio (1949).

Seymour Island. The Seymour Island penguins are presumably

associated with a rather poor marine invertebrate fauna. Association tt

stfu was rarely or not observed, but no marked age difference between

the penguins and the invertebrates seems to be indicated. The inverte-

brate fauna has at least one species in common with the Patagonian

formation, and is otherwise composed of distinct but closely allied species

{review and references in Feruglio, 1949). On this basis it is highly

improbable that these penguins are older than late Oligocene or younger

than early Miocene, Marples (1952) pointed out that the Seymour Island

penguins resemble the late Eocene-middle Oligocene forms of New Zealand,

while (most of) the Patagonian penguins seem to he less primitive. He

concluded that the Seymour Island forms may be clder, belonging some-

where in the Oligocene (assuming the Patagonian to be Miocene). It is,

however, to be remembered that: (a) no genera, a fortiori species, are

known to be common to Seymour Island and New Zealand; (b) the

apparent evolutionary rate of zero for at least one penguin of this general

type from late Eocene to middle Oligocene (if the New Zealand dating is

correct) suggests that still later survival of related and not identical forms

would be more likely than not; and (c) the Patagonian penguin Arihro-

dytes grandis seems to be closely related to Seymour Island apecies. It

seems probable that the marked difference between the Seymour Island

and most of the Patagonian penguins is more a matter of facies than

of age. (The localities are separated by some 20° of latitude and must

both on this and on other accounts have had markedly different enviro-

mental conditions even in the Oligocene or Miocene.) On present evidence

the Seymour Island penguins are not likely to have been appreciably older

than the Patagonian, and might have been as fate or even slightly later.

More recently Marples (1953) has revised the Seymour Island pen-

guins, but without further discussion of their age.

Faunal lists. The known fossil penguins, according to the most recent

revisions, are listed in Table 5,

SIMPSON—AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL PENGUINS 6T

Table 5.

KNOWN FOSSIL PENGUINS

A. New Zealand (data from Marples, 1952).

Early Late Early Middle

Eocene Eocene Oligocene Oligocene

Heretaungan Kaiatan Runangan Whaingaroan Duntroonian Waitakian

Indet. x

Palaeeudyptes

antarcticus x — ? x x

Pachydyptes

ponderosus x

Archaeospheniscus

lowei x

A. lopdelli x

Duntroonornis

parvus x

Platydy ptes

novaezealandiae x ?

P. amiesi z

Korora oliveri x

B. Australia (this paper).

Age

Late Eocene Oligocene

Blanche Point marls Gambier limestone

Palaeeudy ptes ef. antarcticus x

Gen. et sp, indet. A. x

Gen. et sp. indet. B. x

C. Seymour Island (Wiman, 1905, and Marples, 1953).

(All of same age as far as known, probably late Oligocene or

early Miocene.)

Anthropornis nordenskjoldi

Eosphaeniscus gunnari

Notodyptes wimani

Delphinornis larsenii

Ichthyopteryx gracilis (validity doubtful)

D. Patagonia (Simpson, 1946; some highly dubious records and

probable synonyms omitted).

(All of same age, basal Patagonian, “Juliense’ member, latest

Oligocene or early Miocene).

68 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

Palaeospheniscus gracilis

P. rothi

P. patagonicus

Paraspheniscus bergi

P. nereius

Perispheniscus wimani

Isolremornis nordenskjoldi

Paraptenodytes antarclicus

P. curtus

Arthrodytes grandis

Anthrodytes? andrewsi

NOTE ON THE ORIGIN OF PENGUINS

I have elsewhere (Simpson, 1946) supported the theory that penguins

arose, not from flightless land birds or in a delimited land area, but from

diving sea birds (ecologically similar to diving petrels) widely distributed

around the South Temperate Zone, Recently de Meillon (1952) has

opposed all aspects of that theory on the evidence of penguin fleas.

The only fleas known to occur on penguins are Listronius robert-

sianus, Parapsyllus longicornis, and P, magellanicus. Both genera belong

to the subfamily Parapsyllinae, with six other genera. Except for those

on penguins (and other sea birds) all members of the subfamily are

confined to South America where most of them are rodent fleas. De

Meillon therefore argues that the penguins must have acquired the fleas in

South America and must themselyes have originated there. This seems to

be a non sequitur. There is no evident reason why the penguins may not

have acquired these fleas after penguins had evolved as such and had

spread to South America from any place or zone of origin, As to why

they happen to have only South American fleas (as far as known), that

is no harder to explain on either theory, hence no better evidence fur or

against either, than the fact that they have long been in Australia and New

Zealand (since the Hocene) and probably also in Africa (fossils unknown)

without, apparently, acquiring parasites there. It is also pertinent that

the earliest known penguins antedate the appearance of rodents in South

America.

Moreover all three species of penguin fleas are known to occur also on

wide-ranging groups of flying birds: L. robertsianus on petrels, P. longt-

cornis on shearwaters and an Antarctic thrush, and P. magellanicus on

whale-birds, jaegers, sooty albatrosses, albatrosses, and Cape pigeons.

There is, no evident reason why the primary dispersal of the fleas may not

have been partly or wholly by flying birds.

SIMPSON—AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL PENGUINS 68

De Meillon also implies that the abundance of fossil penguins in the

South American ‘“Subantarctic’ (most of them are from far up in the

Temperate Zone) supports his view. But, as noted above, known fossil

penguins occur earlier in Australia and New Zealand. In fact the fossil

record is so spotty that it does not really suggest anything about the place

of origin except to conform with the idea that penguins have always been

Southern and to show that they were ‘very widespread in the southern

Temperate Zone by the end of the Oligocene.

De Meillon further argues that penguins probably arose as non-flying

land birds because land birds are most likely to come in contact with

rodents and flying birds would avoid the rodents by taking to the trees or

to islands. But penguins do regularly come ashore on rodent-infested

coasts, and probably have long done so. (The Patagonian fossil occur-

rences, at least, are near or at what was then a continental shore.) So

do fiying sea birds that could have transmitted fleas to penguins, Moreover,

ground-nesting flying birds are very common in South America and else-

where where rodents, and their fleas, are abundant.

De Meillon further cites in the same connection the tick Ornifhodorus

falaje, which occurs on South American rodents and, as a distinct sub-

species, in South African penguin nests. But the same species is also

known on terns, and the other known penguin ticks have almost certainly

been acquired from flying sea birds (Zumpt, 1952). Moreover, however it

occurred, the transfer of O. talaje from rodents to penguins probably took

place relatively recently, millions of years after penguins first arose. Other-

wise it is incredible that the ticks have moved to a new host and 2 new

continent with only subspecific differentiation.

The evidence from parasites seems to me to have no special bearing

one Way or another on the origin of the penguins, and the theory earlier

supported, although speculative, still seems most likely on other grounds.

REFERENCES

Feruglio, B. (1949) : Descripcion geologica de la Patagonia. Vol. 2. Yaci-

mientos Petroliferos Fiscales, Republica Argentina, 349 pp., pl, 61-80,

Finlay, H. F. (1952): Microfsaunal notes on matrices associated with fossil

penguin bones. /7 Marples, B. J., Early Tertiary penguins of New

Zealand, N, 2, Geol, Sury., Paleont. Bull. 20, pp. 58-64.

Finlayson, H. H. (1938): On the occurrence of a fossil penguin in Miocene

bedg in South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc., 8. Aust., vol. 62, pt. 1,

pp. 14-17, 1 pi

70 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Glaessner, M. F. (1955): Pelagic fossils (Afuria, penguins, whales) from

the Tertiary of South Australia, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., vol. 11, no. 4,

pp. 353-372, pl. 34-36.

Lowe, P. R. (1939): Some additional notes on Miocene penguins in relation

to their origin and systematics. Ibis, vol. 5, pp. 281-296.

Marples, B. J. (1952): Early Tertiary penguins in New Zealand. N. Z.

Geol. Surv., Paleont. Bull. 20, pp. 1-66, pl. 1-8,

Marples, B. J. (1953): Fossil penguins from the mid-Tertiary of Seymour

island. Falkland Is, Dependencies Surv., Sei. Repts. no. 5, pp. 1-15,

pl. 1-2.

Meillon, B. de. (1952): The fleas of sea birds in the Southern Ocean. Aust.

Natl. Antarctic Res. Exped. Repts., ser. B, vol. 1, Zool., pp. 1-11.

Simpson, G. G. (1946): Fossil penguins. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., vol.

87, pp. 7-99.

Wiman, C. (1905): Ueber die alttertiaren Vertebraten der Seymourinsel.

Wiss, Ergebn. schwed. Sudpolarexped. 1901-1903. Stockholm, vol. 1,

pp. 1-37, pl. 1-8.

Zumpt, F. (1952): The ticks of sea birds. Aust. Natl. Antarctic Res,

Exped. Repts., ser. B, vol. 1, Zool., pp. 12-20.

A NEW KOALA FRoM THE PLIOCENE PALANKARINNA

FAUNA or SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By BR. A. STIRTON, Museum or Panusontouocy. University ar

Canirornia

Fig, 1-2

SUMMARY

A new genus and species of koala, Perikoala palankarinnica

Stirton, is described on part of a left mandible from the Palankarinna

fauna east of Lake Eyre in South Australia, The age of the fauna is

thought to be early or, possibly, middle Pliocene. Detail features in the

teeth have been emphasized. Other than in the koala, Phascolarctos,

there are suggestions of affinities in the fossil with the bushtail possum,

Trichosurus, with the giant gliders, Schoinobates, and with the ringtailed

possums, Pseudocheirus. Comparative figures of P;, M., and M, in these

genera, including the fossil, have been made, Much more fossil evidence

is needed to determine the phyletic relationships of the genera studied,

and to understand the familial relationships of the koalas to the rather

broad family Phalangeridae.

INTRODUCTION

Part of a mandible of a koalalike marsupial was discovered by Mr.

Paul F. Lawson in the summer of 1954, when the South Australian

members of the 1954 South Australian Museum-University of California

expedition were returning from Birdsville to Adelaide. The specimen was

found in place about 500 yards south of the Woodard locality where the

bulk of the material was located in the escarpment along the west side

of Lake Palankarinna. Fragmentary remains of other small vertebrates

were found scattered through the matrix at this new site. This is the

oldest known record of the Phascolarctinae and is the only one that has

been recovered from the Tertiary. The paratype was picked up on the

surface by Mr. Richard H. Tedford near this locality in 1953 (Stirton,

1955).

I am grateful to Mr. Herbert M. Hale, Director of the South Austra-

lian Museum, for the privilege of describing this interesting new venus.

The illustrations were made by Mr. Owen J. Poe, staff artist, in the

Museum of Paleontology at the University of California.

72 RECORDS OF THE 5,A, MUSHUM

Genus Perikoala nov.

The characters of this genus are those of the type species until other

species are described.

Perikoala palankarinnica sp. noy.

Holoty pe.—Part of left mandible with talonid of P,, M, and M, nearly

complete. South Australian Mus, No. P 10893.

Paratype.—Fragment of right maxillary with posterior border of

alveolus of P?, the roots, of M!, M? in place but with much of the enamel

surface and the inner edge broken away, part of the alveolus of M® and

the base of the jugal arch, Univ. Calif. Mus. Paleo. No. 45343.

Type Locality —Greenish-blue, fine grained, sandy gypsiferous clays;

flood plain deposit on same level as channel sands of Woodard lecality,

but about 500 yards farther south; 35 feet above the basal conglomerate.

U. C. locality V5375.

“The exposures (are along the west side of Lake Palankarinna, east

of Lake Byre; 18 miles S. 75° W. of Etadunna Station homestead.

Military grid reference 656431, ordinance sheet Marree, South Australia,

H54/1.2.5.6, zones 5 and 6, first edition 1942, scale 1:506880.” (Stirton,

1955).

Age.—Early or, possibly, middle Pliocene,

Diagnosis.—Lateral opening of dental canal not discernible on hori-

zontal ramus below Ms.

P,; with lophid between hypoconid (1) and protoconid interrupted by

tiny groove on slope of protoconid; protoconid and small entoconid

connected by short high lophid, this continues downward and lahbiad in

wide curve to posterior base of hypoconid enclosing posterior talonid basin

which opens posterolabially at that point; outline of talonid rounded,

not triangular, without crest continuing from entoconid ta posterolabiai

corner,

M, sharply angulate ‘anteromedially; with prominent central basin;

paraconid present, separated from much larger metaconid by rather deep

lingual valley; metaconid without posterior spur into area of central

basin; low irregular transverse crest. extends lingually from hypoconid to

midline of crown opposite similar crest descending from entoconid.

M. divided into anterior trigonid, central, and posterior trigonid

basins: vestigial transverse crest between protoconid and metaconid more

() Thhe premolos dental tarminglogy is tased on appurent ansloguus pokifiens with those in the molar

STIRTON—A NEW PLIOCENE KOALA 74

Pronounced than one between hypoconid and entoconid; labial part of

middle valley not deep transversely nor shelflike.

Anteorbital fossa of maxillary shallow; width of base of jugal arch

opposite M? = 6.7; M? as wide as long (in paratype).

Description.—Horizontal ramus below M, deeper than in Trichosurus

but shallower than in Phascolarctos, 16.5; thickness below M; = 7.4; small

mental foramen 3.5 in front of anterior root P:, and below diastemal

crest, 1.3 in diameter; surface of bone broken over anterior part of dental

canel; lateral opening of dental canal not discernible on horizontal ramus

telow M,,

Molars with crenulated enamel surface in occlusal basins; no alveolus

for P,,

Anteroposterior axis of P, in line with that of molars; anterior two-

thirds of P,; broken away; evidently bilobed; area back of protoconid

preserved; protoconid not occupying anterocentral position; larger than

hypoconid; lophid between hypoconid and protoconid interrupted by tiny

groove on slope of protoconid; protoconid and small entoconid connected

by short high lophid, this continues downward and labiad in wide curve

to posterior base of hypoconid enclosing posterior talonid basin that opens

posterolabially at that point; outline of talonid rounded; not triangular,

without crest continuing from entoconid to posterolingual corner; roots of

P; larger than on molars, widely divergent.

M, partly destroyed on labial side; elongate, sharply angulate antera-

medially; paraconid slightly linguad of median position, evidently separs-

ted from much larger metaconid by rather deep valley; metaconid with

convex lingual surface; lophid extends posterolingually from mnetaconid ta

a much lower metastylid (=) on lower median lingual edge of tooth; meta-

conid without posterior spur into area of central basin; slight crest leads

down posteriorly (evidently from protoconid) to median valley where it

terminates at transverse commissure adjacent to anterior wing of hypoco-

nid, these wings or crests form labial margin of central basin; entoconid

opposite hypoconid; low irregular (due to crenulated anterior and posterior

slopes) crest extends lingually from hypoconid to midline of crown oppo-

site similar crest descending from entoconid, this apparent vestigial

transverse lophid separates posterior talonid basin from larger central

basin; low crest runs from hypoconid posterolingually around to base of

(4) ‘The medinn lingual stylid present in the molars of Prriaata, Mhoscolarctos, Psoudocheirug and

Schoinvdatey ig somewhat analogous in powilion to the metanylid in the Kynitae (Oshorn and Wortman

1892, Pig. 3), Metastylid in the Myuidae is u misnomer since it did mot arise from the cingulum nor j= if

a peripheral cusp. Th seems to have qrisen from the posterior half ef the metaconid but te innervated

from. the posterior nerve plexus. On the other Hand the median lingual stwid in [erikacla seems to We

pariphecs) and indeed may have arisen from a cingulum in an ancestral farm. To am svre po ennifiaion

tan avise in referring to this cusp in the koala und relnted cenern as the metastedid,

74 RECORDS OF THE 3.A. MUSEUM

entoconid (8); no hypoconluid; low posterior enfostylid posterolinguad of

entoconid on lingual surface; length of M, — 6.4; width across talonid

= approximately 3.8 (part of labial surface of hypoconid broken away);

roots parallel, more delicate than on P,, length = 9.5, M, nearly rec-

tangular; transverse crests extend from protoconid and metaconid

and separate anterior trigonid basin from anterior part of central

basin; similar but much less apparent elevations extend from

hypoconid and entoconid and divide talonid imto shallow posterior

talonid basin and posterior part of central basin} no paraconid;

enamel surface broken sway opposite beth protoconid and meta-

conid; mefastylid broken away; protoconid opposite metaconid; ento-

conid slightly anterior to hypoconid, sub-equal, crescentic cusps oriented

anteroposteriorly, depth controlled by extensions and positions of antera-

lingual spur of hypoconid and posterolingual spur of protoconid (this

character is intermediate between the features seen in Trichasurus and

Phascolarctos); no anterolabial crest from hypoconid extending down to

block mouth of median valley; labial part of median valley not deep

transversely nor shelflike; large crenulated central basin; no hypoconulid;

entoslylid as on M, well developed on lingual surface below and postero-

linguad of entoconid; length of M. = 11.5; width across trigonid = 4.3;

width across talonid = 4.6; width between hypoconid and entoconid = 2.6;

roots as on M,, length = 8.5.

COMPARATIVE CHARACTERS ON RELATED GENERA

Phascolarctos

1. Mental foramen 2,0 in front of anterior root of P,, and 2.9 below

diastemal crest, 1.7 mm, in diameter.

2. Prominent lateral opening of dental canal below M,,

3. Smali masseteric foramen.

4. Chéekteeth with crenulated enamel surface in occlusal basins.

5, P, and P, absent.

&. P. with slight emargination on lingual and labial sides dividing tooth

into anterior and posterior moieties; entoconid equal in size and

opposite bypoconid, both connected to larger protoconid by lophids;

median crest extends anteriorly from protoconid; connected to smaller

(ly Oshern and Worthan (1892 m. 8 Fig. 3) fret desevihed ertaytyiid a= a ttle tainforcing cusp

(hob phew itp heohind the enioronid. This wae dabolled on a MWenv/enijipere tooth, A memih dxter in anether

iper OL hiseory wel honolies of the human mebir cosps,? Lretenieles Anopiger, Jahre, VIT.,

Kyo, lena, T4747.) Osten reforred to {lie game enspin as ‘4 —--the distal wr intermediate enap’’

s——"hepeconuld’ avd debelled it ch a lower mintar nf Mfawoy fustherwore he inferred its presenca

in Mieety aid Aneptonerplie At. first, evidently, Osborn tid net reeoknize the homelogy of this

conulld in the Primates and in the Wquiene ler in We he Iabellad tho posrmdr conulid on all equid

lower moehera and tremolars oa Dopeeimlid Gonseprently, bere, To wm rafarring te the term evdostylil

fo thee Hite FHT YT Pf Hiatt = E'S “OUP TL tthe ertuenniy

whe

STIRTON—A NEW PLIOCENE KOALA mh

protoconid by anteroposterior crest; lophid continues from entoconid to

posterolingual corner; low concave posterior lophid forming posterior

edge of talonid basin; slight posterolingual shelf; no paraconid; roots

not widely divergent; position aligned with anteroposterior axis of

molar series,

M, nearly rectangular, not sharply angulate anteromedially; paraconid

vestigial and not separated from metaconid by deep lingua! valley;

paralophid (#) curves around anterior border of tooth to vestigial

paraconid; paraconid connected posteriorly to metaconid; pratoconid

smaller than metaconid; metaconid with nearly flat lingual surface;

lophid extends. posterolingually from metaconid to vestigial metastylid

on median lingual edge of tooth; metaconid with posteromedian spur;

protoconid with posterior spur terminating in median valley (home-

logous with part of labial border of central basin in Perikoala); low

trenchant ridge connects protoconid with entoconid labially; trigonid

and talonid basins instead of central basin; very low but distinct

metalophid crosses middle of crenulated basin diagonally where it joins

laphid that connects metaconid and metastylid; entoconid opposite

hypoconid; no crest extends lingually from hypoconid into talonid

valley towards entoconid; talonid valley anteroposterior in direction;

low erest runs from hypoconid posterolingually around to entoconid:

but no posterior talonid basin is formed; entostylid present; iength

of M; = 8.0; width across talonid = 5,0.

M.-M, rectangular; trigonid and talonid basins widely open antero-

posteriorly; no paraconids; protoconids opposite metaconids; hypo-

conids opposite entoconids, subequal, crescentic cusps oriented antero-

posteriorly; labial shelflike median valleys deep, terminated lingually

by anterolingual spurs of hypoconids (metalcphids) and posterolingual

wings of protoconids (protolophids), points of termination close to

midlines of teeth; no indications of transverse crests directly connect-

ing protoconids with metaconids or hypoconids with entoconids; small

anterolabial crests of hypoconids that extend down to block mouths

of median valleys become progressively stronger from M.-M,. Meta-

stylids and entostylids though somewhat inconspicuous beconie pro-

gressively weaker from Ms-M,.

Pseudocheirus

No mental foramen anterior to P;,

One small lateral opening of dental canal below M,,

Tiny masseterlc foramen posterior to opening of opening of posterior

dental canal,

tT) Fow lovhid terrainology see Seivtan, Mtl, yp. tug, Fiz. =

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Cheekteeth with smooth enamel surface.

P, and P. present; P,; smaller than P,.

P, without lingual and labial emarginations, narrowly triangular;

protoconid anterior to and higher than oblique hypoconid crest; hypo-

conid crest separated from entoconid by commissure; entoconid slightly

linguad of hypoconid, in proximity of, but not connected to protoconid

by crest; valley between protoconid and entoconid open across tooth;

valley between paraconid and protoconid distinct; roots not widely

divergent; position aligned with anteroposterior axis of molar series.

M, sharply angulate and narrower anteromedially; faint indication of

paraconid; lingual surface between metaconid and anterior tip

depressed as vestigial valley; paralophid descends from protoconid to

anterolabial base of tooth; narrow trigonid valley opens anteriorly

slightly labiad of midline; proteconid much smaller than metaconid,

rather flat shaped cusp; metaconid with flat lingual surface; lophid

extends posteriorly from metaconid to vestigial metastylid on median

lingual edge of tooth; protoconid with short posterior crest that

extends down to edge of labial mouth of long narrow diagonal median

valley; prominent metalophid runs diagonally across center of tooth

and vonnects to vestigial metastylid; no central basin: anteroposterior

trigonid trench instead of basin; talonid basin; entoconid anterior to

hypoconid, not connected; no crest extends lingually from hypoconid

into talonid basin toward entoconid; talonid Jophids diagonal in direc-

tion; sharp diagonal hypolophid extends across to posterolingual

corner of tocth to low but distinct hypoconulid; no entostylid; length

of M, = 4,1; width across talonid = 2.2.

M, — M, narrow, elongate, angulate anteriorly; trigonid and talonid

basins narrow, bounded posteriorly by protolophids and hypolophids

with lingual openings between metaconids and metastylids and

between entoconids and hypoconulids; on M, and M,, on M, and M,

posterior openings of talonid basins between entoconids and hypo-

conulids because entostylids are missing; no paraconids; metaconids

anterior to protoconids; entoconids anterior to hypoconids, metaconids

and entoconids larger than protoconids and hypoconids, protoconids

and hypoconids crescentic, metaconids and entoconids trenchant, all

four cusps oriented obliquely; both labial and lingual median valleys

short, directed anteriorly; no indications of transverse crests connect-

ing protoconids and metaconids, or hypeconids and entoconids; no

small crests leading directly anterior from hypoconids,

Schoinobates

. No mental foramen anterior to P,,

oh on oe go

STIRTON—A NEW PLIOCENE KOALA 7

Two and sometimes three lateral openings of dental canal may occur

below P,, M, or anterior end of M,.

Small masseteric foramien present.

Cheekteeth with smooth enamel surface.

. P, seldom present, greatly reduced; P, absent.

P; larger and with more complicated patterns than in Pseudocheirus,

faint lingual and labial emarginations, narrow, nearly rectangular;

protoconid anterior to and higher than obliquely curved hypeconid

crest; hypoconid faintly discernible on crest; hypoconid crest connected

to indistinct entoconid; entoconid connected to larger protoconid by

curved crest; but posterolingual crest present; posterolingual sloping

talonid basin with low ridge at its posterior margin; valley betveen

protoconid and entoconid closed by high sharp crest lingually; distinet

valley between paraconid and protoconid closed by crest lingually,

position aligned with anteroposterior axis of molar tooth row.

. M, not as sharply angulate and narrow anteromedially as in Pseudo-

chetrus; paraconid small but distinct, connected posteriorly to meta-

conid by sharp lophid; lingual surface between paraconid and metaconid

marked by distinct valley; paralophid descends from protoconid to

anterolabial base of tooth; trigonid basin wider than in Pseudocheirus

opens anteriorly slightly labiad of midline; protoconid much smaller

than metaconid, slightly less flattened than in Pseudociicirus: lophid

extends posterolingually from metaconid to median lingual edge of

tooth; faint metastylid; metaconid with posterolabial spur; protoconid

without posterior crest extending down to edge of labial mouth of

diagonal median valley; slight shelflike process at mouth of median

valley; prominent metalophid runs diagonally across tooth and connects

te spur back of metaconid to a small metastylid; no central basin;

entoconid anterior to hypoconid not connected by lophid; ne crest

extends lingually from hypoconid into talonid valley toward entoconid;

talonid basin diagonal in direction; hypolophid interrupted where

talonid basin opens posteriorly; no hypoconulid; tiny entastylid

posterolingually from entoconid; small conulid posterolabially and at

base of entoconid in talonid basin, also present on M, but not on M,

and M,; length of M; = 4.2; width across talomu — 2.5.

M.-, narrow, elongate, broadly angulate anteriorly; trigonid and talanid

basins relatively narrow but wider than in Pseudocheirus; protolophids

not continuous through to metastylids, and hypolophids, not continuous

to posterior lingual corners of teeth; no paraconids; metaconids

anterior to protoconids, enteconids anterior to hypoconids, metaconids

and entoconids larger than protoconids and hypoconids, protoconids

and hypoconids crescentic, metaconids and entoconids trenchant, all

oo OT ye

RECORDS OF THE S5,A, MUSEUM

four cusps oriented obliquely; both lingual and labia} median valleys

short, directed anteriorly; no indications of transverse crests connect-

ing protoconids and metaconids, or hypoconids and entoconids; no

small crests leading directly anterior from hypoconids; stylids vestigial

or absent and no hypoconulids on M,, M; and M,.

Trichosurus

Mental foramen 1.5 in front of anterior root of P; and 2.1 below

diustemal crest.

Tiny lateral opening of dental canal present or absent below posterior

end of M,.

No masseteric foramen.

Cheekteeth with smooth enamel surface.

P, present, P, absent.

P, without lingual and Jabial emargination, broadly triangular talonid

with single median crest; no paraconid; roots not widely divergent;

position oblique to anteroposterior axis of molars.

M, sharply angulate anteriorly; no paraconid; paralophid extends

from. protoconid straight forward to anterior tip; protoconid in antero-

median position, larger than metaconid; metaconid with convex linqual

surface; no posteromedian spur from metaconid and no metastylid;

protoconid with prominent lophid running posteriorly into center of

tooth where it joins another coming forward from hypoconid blocking

transverse central valley; area of central basin open as wide as lingual

valley; entoconid opposite hypoconid, connected by transverse lophid;

low crest runs from hypoconid posterolingually around to entoconid,

forming shallow posterior talonid basin toward lingual side of talonid,

no suggestion of hypoconulid on crest below and behind entoconid:

length of M, = 6.8; width across talonid = 4.5.

M, with talonid slightly wider than trigonid, M,; — M, with trigonids

wider than talonids; trigonids and talonids traversed by high lophids

between protoconids and metaconids, and hypoconids and entoconids;

no trigonid, talonid nor central basins; no paraconids; protoconids and

hypoconids opposite, crescentric cusps; metaconids and entoconids

opposite, semi-crescentic, oriented anteroposteriorly, subequal; labial

median valleys not shelflike, terminated lingually at a point labiad to

midline of tooth; no ridge leading directly forward from hypoconids

down into median valleys; no lingual stylids.

CONGLUSION

Even with the limited evidence available Perikoala palankarinnica

gen. and n. sp. is phascolarctine though the characters show it is

STIRTON—A NEW PLIOCENE KOALA 79

generically distinct from the living koala. If it is directly ancestral to

Phascolarctos or even in a proximity to that position, considerable evolu-

tion has occurred in the group since late Miocene and early Pliocene time,

The patterns in the molars may indicate a distant relationship to a

bilophodont marsupial. The koala patterns could have been derived from

primitive bilophodont teeth somewhat like that possessed by the ancestors

of Trichosurus, It is indeed unfortunate that no teeth were found with

Wynyardia which otherwise shows trichosurine affinities.

Without some fossil evidence it is difficult to even guess where

Pseudocheirus and Schoinobates fit into this phyletic picture, They are

as specialized as Phascolarctos in their cheekteeth and in a somewhat

different direction, Much more evidence is needed from fossils to deter-

mine the phyletic relationships of these genera, and to understand the

familial relationships of the koalas to the rather broad family

Phalangeridae.

LITERATURE CITED

Osborn, H. F, (1892): The history and homologies of the human molar

cusps. Anatomisches Anzeiger, Jahrg., vol. 7,8 vo, Jena, pp. 740-747,

figs. 1-12.

Osborn, H. F., and Wortman, J. L. (1892) : Fossil mammals of the Wasatch

and Wind River beds, Cellection of 1891. I. Homologies and

nomenclature of the mammalian molar cusps, pp. 84-90, figs. 1-3, (by

H. F. Osborn). Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., vol. 4, pp. 81-147, pl. 4,

figs, 1-18.

Stirton, R. A. (1941): Development of characters in horse teeth and the

dental nomenclature. Jour. Mammalogy, vol. 22, no. 4, pp. 484-446,

figs, 1-10.

(1955). Late Tertiary marsupials from South Australia. Rec.

South Aust, Mus., vol. 11, no. 3, pp. 247-268, figs. 1-11.

ms#, metastylid; mv, anedian

LABIAL

pad

PERIKOALA

GS | o} iii

E tb

metd PHASCOLARCTOS

Fig. 1. Comparative ovclusal views of left Py, M, and M, in Psendocheirus lamipinoaus, Schoinobates

nev. and Phascolarctos cinereus (6)

Perikvals pulankarinwica, gen. ot sp,

volano, Trichosuruy vylpeevlu,

The anterior fare of the trigowid ig well worn in Schotiabates. até, anterior trigonid basis; en? , enitoconid;

metaconid; mel4 , metalophid;

hypolophid; Ay?, hypocronid; mea? ,

pals, paralophid; prt, protoconid; pri? ,

kyl? ,

pad, paraconiil;

entostylid; Ae4, hypoconulid;

tri, trigouid basin.

valley ;

posterior {alonid basin; fb, talon basin;

SCHOINOBATES

cae

oe ak ee

: |

TRICHOSURUS

PERIKOALA

Mo M, P3

PHASCOLARCTOS

Fig, 2. Comparative lingual views of left Py, M,, and M, in Paeudocheirus, Schoinobates, I'richosurua,

Pertkoala n. gen., and Phascolarctos (X5).

KNEE MOULDED POTS reom tuz NEW HEBRIDES

Bry DOUGLAS MAWSON, Unrersrry or ADELAIDE

Plate i and text fig. 1

When engaged on geological investigations in the New Hebrides

Islands in the year 1903, among other places I visited was Wuss on the

west coast of Espiritu Santo, the largest island of the Group, The west

coast is high and mountainous: in fact within a few miles of Wuss are

located the highest peaks of the Island, It is a young coastline, determined

by faulting and downthrow to the west of folded and faulted Tertiary

and possibly late Mesozoic sediments, greatly intruded by andesite and

basic igneous rocks.

Only at Wuss along the coast is there a comparatively large flat

alluviated area. This is a few square miles in diameter, the result of

copious outwash by streams from the mountamous, hinterland. The sea

front is a low beach line. A large native community exists there. The

alluviated area which supports a considerable population at Wuss is set

in a length of steep coast lacking protected harbours. Consequently the

coast both to the north and to the south is unfavourable for the establish-

ment of other native villages. The Wuss folk are therefore more isolated

than is usual with other communities of the New Hebrides. This no doubt

accounts in some measure for obvious differences which we noted in their

way of life when compared with that of natives elsewhere in the New

Hebrides. For instance we were struck with the extent of irrigation chan-

nels associated with the growing of taro, yams, sugar cane, etc, Also the

people of Wuss were found to be remarkable for having developed on a

notable scale an earthenware pottery industry. This latter may, however,

be in large measure due to the fact that in that region there are available

suitable clays derived from the older sediments and decomposed igneous

rocks exposed in that locality, Elsewhere in the New Hebrides, in the

coastal regions at least, coral, coral sands and volcanic sands aré

dominant while clay formations are scarce or absent.

The novelty of the pottery industry at Wuss was of so much interest

that observations on the process of manufacture were recorded as outlined

below. All operations were performed by women.

The raw material employed is a yellow clay. It was broken dawn to

very small pieces, aid on a sheet of bark and sprinkled with water,

84 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fiz. 1. Pottery making in Wuse Village; a, dished pisée of knended clay; b, stack of dished pitens;

ce, Yaw pot as moulded on figxed knee; dg, bambgo scraper beng apptied to tip of pot; 6, section of pot

alter trimming of edge, fmt before scraping ta prover thickness; {, section of lip after development of

dinsl form: g, pot after appligation of decorative rotls uf clay, h, coconut shell seraper employed within the

pot tu reduce the wall to any dasirad thickness; i) fivishtd ot.

Then followed a thorough kneading to a uniform doughlike consistency.

When sufficiently mixed it was worked up into a ball-shaped mass.

Two other women then took a hand. Taking pieces of clay from

the ball they worked on them with wet fingers, kneading them together

to make smaller clay balls, each of which was then pressed out into

shallow sauccr-shaped forms (Fig. 1a). After making about six such

dished pieces they were stacked on top of each other (Fig. 1b) and

finally the pack was thoroughly kneaded and rolled up again to form a

large ball.

MAWSON—NEW HEERIDEAN POTS 85

From this stage on, the operation was performed by one person

only, Knéeling on ané knee and with the other sharply hent and wetted,

the woman pressed the ball of plastic clay down onto the rounded end

of the bent knee, while at the same time continuously rotating and patting

it, In this way, in about three minutes the clay was moulded to a deeply

concave form (Fig. 1c).

Then with a wetted piece of bamboo wood, its cutting end shaped

as shown in Fig. 1d, she scraped and worked over the upper rim portion

of the crude bowl, making it smooth, while at the same time thinning out

the clay wall and tapering it off. In this operation one hand was held

on the inside while the other manipulated the wooden tool, The uneven

tap edge was then pinched off and made smooth by running the wetted

fingers over the surface (Fig. 1e).

The wooden tool wag again employed to increase the curvature

inside the mouth of the bowl. In this way a double curved Hp was

developed. Again with wetted fingers) working around the lip it was

smoothed and given its final form (Fig, 1f). The bamboo wood tool was

also employed to even up the curvature of the exterior of the bowl, and

use of this tool was again followed by the smoothing operation with

wetted fingers,

Exterior ornamentation was then applied, effected as follows. Some

of the well-worked clay was rolled between the hands to make elongated

pencil-like sticks. These were worked in rib fashion on to the exterior

of the bowl as shown (Fig. 1g) and the final impressed markings weré

done with a stick.

We did not personally observe the manufacturing process beyond

this stage but were informed that the next step followed after a period

of about five days. In that time the shaped clay bow! had partly dried

and stiffened. Then operating on the interior of the vessel the overthick

wall was reduced to the desired thickness, eraploying as 4 tool a segment

of a cocoanut shell, usually smaller than that figured (Fig, 1h) and with

sharpened edge.

Should eracks have developed in the clay walls of the pot during

drying, repair is effected by cutting out the crack with a sharp-edged piece

of bamboo wood followed by filling up the resulting groove with freshly

prepared plastic pieces of damp worked clay.

A colour wash was then applied. This was a thin suspension of

red ochreous clay in which the pot was dipped. After air drying for a

few days inside one of the village houses the pots were ready to be fired.

In this operation a number of the air-dried pots were assembled together

and fire heaped around them, Fig. li gives an indication of the final form

and the plate shows two examples collected in Wuss village.

86 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

The above account is of first hand observation made in 1903. The

literature on the native pottery of the New Hebrides is mainly of this

century and is scattered. Reference may be made to descriptions by

MacLachlan (1939) who also quotes earlier sources.

REFERENCES

Maclachlan, R. R. C. (1939): Native pottery of the New Hebrides in Journ.

Polynesian Soc., Wellington 48, 32-55 (with references).

Mawson, D. (1905): The Geology of the New Hebrides, Proc. Linn, Soc.,

N.S.Wales, 30, 400-482, pl. xiv-xxix.

ABORIGINAL BARK PAINTINGS rrou FIELD ISLAND,

NORTHERN TERRITORY

By CHARLES P, MOUNTFORD, Honorary Assocrare m

Etunotocy, Sours Ausrrauian Museum

Plate ii and text fig. 1

An examination of the early records suggests that, wherever the

aborigines used sheets of bark to construct their wet-weather shelters,

they decorated them with designs in coloured ochres.

Peron, (1807-16, pl. 18), in a sketch of a burial place on Maria

Island, Tasmania, shows sheets of bark with painted designs; Bunce,

(1857, pp. 49-50), refers to paintings on bark huts in central Tasmania;

Smyth, (1878, p. 292), mentions their use on the Wonnangatta River,

Gippsland, and Curr, (1886, p, 273), on the Parroo River of central New

South Wales.

Worsnop, (1897, p. 37, pl. 18), illustrates two tracings made from a

series of five bark paintings collected by Captain F. Carrington on Field

Island, Northern Territory, in 1884, (Carrington, 1890, p. 73), (fig. 1).

Arafura Sea

Van Diemen Gulf

Field Island ®

Oenpelli

NORTHERN TERRITORY

AUSTRALIA

Captain Carrington presented these paintings to the Royal Geographical

Society of South Australia in 1887. They found their way later into the

ethnological collection of the South Australian Museum, where they are

still housed-

388 RECORDS OF THE 3,4, MUSHUM

The Field Island series of bark paintings is of particular interest as

they form a comparison with the art of Oenpelli, Western Arnhem Land,

where Spencer, (1928, pls. 519-534), and Mountford, (1956, pp. 109-264,

pl, 34-84, figs. 12-56), have recorded many bark and cave paintings. The

paintings are also the only records of the art of the extinct Field Islanders.

Although the designs on the Field Island paintings have deteriorated

during the past seventy years, it is still possible to clearly distinguish all

but one of the original figures. To ensure a permanent record cf this

interesting group, I photographed them, Using the faint designs on

the bark sheets as a guide, Miss Patricia Catcheside then retouched the

prints illustrated on pl. ii.

On the upper edge of pl. iia is a conventionalised painting of a pied

goose In flight. Below the goose are two beche-de-mer, and below them

again a cat-fish. (+). On the lower left is an excellent representation

of a skip-jack.

Plate iir illustrates a decorative painting of an unidentified water-

bird in flight. As far as I know this, and the pied goose on Plate iia, are

the only examples of aboriginal art depicting flying birds in so realistic

a manner.

On pl. jic is @ further group of interesting figures. On the extreme

left. is an X-ray painting of a sweep; on the right is a pied goose which

bears some resemblance to a bark painting recorded by Spencer, (1928,

fig. 534), except that the Field Island example shows no trace of X-ray

art, On the extreme right is an opcssum, showing the prehensile tail,

the whiskers and the two eyes on one side of the head (*).

In the middle of pl. iic is a woman with upturned legs, distorted arms

and spines projecting from her face and vulva. This figure bears a clobe

resemblance to cave psintings at Oenpelli of dangerous spirit-women

called the Nadubi. Mountford, (1956, pl. 58B, page 203), records a myth

and figures a cave painting of a Nadubi woman at Unbalanja Hill, Cenpelli.

She, like the woman in the Field Island painting, has upturned legs, and

spines projecting from her elbows, vulva and other parts of her body.

The aborigines believe that when a Nadubi spirit-woman sees an

aboriginal travelling alone, she sneaks up behind him and shoots one

of her spines into his body. Sometimes the medicine man is able to

save the aboriginal’s life by magically removing the spine, but more often

the patient sickens and dies.

“G) Moyniferd, (1946, pl 80%), figures on Xray painting of 8 ral-Gsh, Tr: on 1. BE 50B;, ove

of mw skip-jagk,

() This is not undsual ion the art of the bark paintings. Speneer, (1998. fig. 595), fgores

goose from Oenpelli, and Monattord, (1949, pl, NIV. fig. B), so cchidna from Gauitnm Island, ia both

nf whivh (pe owe epee are slewn on ote aide of (Te Themed,

MOUNTFORD—FIELD ISLAND PAINTINGS 89

There is an X-ray painting of a female sea-going turtle, (pl. iip ),

indicating lines of eggs and the alimentary canal, and on pl. iis are

two sharks, the details of the one on the right having almost disappeared.

In the upper left of the same sheet is an unidentified design, and on

the upper right, an aboriginal holding an object in his hand.

REFERENCES

Bunce, D. 1857: Australasiatic Reminiscences.

Carrington, F, 1890: The Rivers of the Northern Territory. Proc. Roy,

Geog. Soc. Aust. (S.Aust. Branch), Vol. 2.

Curr, E. M. 1886: The Australian Race, 4 vols.

Mountford, C. P. 1939: Aboriginal Decorative Art from Arnhem Land.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.Aust. 63.

Mountford, C. P. 1956: The Art, Myth and Symbolism of Arnhem Land.

Peron, F, A. and Freycinet, L. 1807-16: Voyage de Decouvertes aux

Terres Australes.

Smyth, R. B. 1878: The Aborigines of Victoria, 2 vols.

Spencer, W. B, 1928: Wanderings in Wild Australia, 2 vols.

Worsnop, T, 1897: The Prehistoric Arts, Manufactures, Works, Weapons,

etc. of the Aborigines of Australia.

THE GENUS MYRMICOTROMBIUM WOMERSLEY 1934 (ACARINA,

ERYTHRAEIDAE), wira REMARKS on tox SYSTEMATICS or rue

ERYTHRAEOIDEA axp TROMBIDIOIDEA

By R. V. SOUTHCOTT, Sours Ausrratisan Musson.

Text fig. 1-2

SUMMARY

The genus Myrmicotrombium Womersley 1934, with genotype (mono-

typic) M. brevicristatum Wom. 1934. is restudied, the holotype male being

redescribed, as well as some details of the adult female and nymph. The

mite, although having some features suggestive of the Smarididae, belongs

to the Erythraeidae, and not to the Trombididae, in which it was placed

by its author. The species is now recorded from Australian Capital

Territory, as well as South Australia. On two occasions it has been

captured in association with ants, but its relation to ants (if any) is at

present conjectural.

A specimen from Burma is also referred to this genus.

The systematics of the Erythraeidae (Hrythraevidea) and of some

of the Trombidioidea are referred to, Feider’s (1955) subfamily

Myrmicotrombiinae, erected within the Trombidioidea, cannot stand. The

genus however merits a subfamily within the Erythraeidae, and hence

the subfamily Myrmicotrombiinae n. sf. is erected within that family,

and compared with the other subfamilies of the Erythraeidae, namely the

Erythraeinae n. sf,, Leptinae n. sf., Callidosominae n. sf. and Balaustiinae

n. sf. (Balaustiidae Grandjean 1947), which are keyed.

INTRODUCTION

In 1934 Womersley described and figured as a new genus and species

of mite Myrmicotrombium brevicristalum, placing it within the family

Trombidiidae. This was described from ‘‘a single specimen collected with

ants at Glen Osmond, South Australia, September 11, 1933”, collected

by himself, In 19387 Womersley, in revising the systematics of the

Australian Trombidiidae, referred again to that genus and species, placing

it within the subfamily Johnstonianinae Thor 1935. In 1947 Thor and

Willman issued a monograph on the family Trombidiidae, and followed

Womersley in the systematic placing of this mite, as have Baker and

Wharton (1952), In a systematic account of the Trombidioidea (this term

corresponding to the Trombidiidae of the previous authors mentioned)

92 RECORDS OF THE 58.A. MUSEUM

Weider (1955) has erected a subfamily Myrmicotrombiinae to accommodate

it, placing that subfamily in the family Stigmotrombidiidae (1) Feider 1955,

Seria Sagittotrombidiinae Feider 1955, along with the subfamilies

Tanaupodinae Thor 1935, Calothrombiinae Oudemans 1947 (in Ther and

Willmann), Johnstonianinae Thor 1935 and Notothrombiinae Oudemans

1947 (in Thor and Willmann),.

In extensive collecting of Acarina at Glen Osmond, South Ausiralia,

and surroundings, directed particularly towards the families Erythraeidae,

Trombidiidae and Smarididae, from 1933 onward (see Southcott 1946b)

the writer captured a species of mite corresponding to Womersley’s des-

cription, on rare occasions, However this mite was found to belong to

the Erythraeidae and not to the Trombidiidae. In life light. pink plumoee

setation gives it a Trombidiid facies. Examination of the type specimen of

Myrmicotrambium brevicristatum Wor. 1934 in the South Australian

Mugeum collection, in 1945 showed that these specimens were of the same

species. Mr, Womersley has agreed with the writer that the species

should be placed in the Erythraeidae.

Redescription of Myrmicotrombium breyicristatum Wom. 1934

Fig. 1-2

Adult (Fig. 1 A-D; 2). Colour in life light pink.

The holotype (male) (mounted) with body ovoid, 950. long to tip

of rostrum of chelicerae (mouth cone), 5404 wide. Eyes present, one

on each side, almost circular, 22-24, across, placed anteriorly on the

propodosoma. In the midline, anteriorly on the dorsum, is a short crista,

with two sensillary areas, The anterior senvillary area is placed shortly

behind the eyes. It has a blunt indistinct “nasus”, and is 30u long by 21.

wide, and is provided with two very finely ciliated tapering sensillary

setae, 30-32, long. Anterior sensillae bases lip apart. In addition the

anterior sensillary area carries 4 typical dorsal setae, 20-23. long.

Posterior sensillary area pear-shaped, 24 long by 22, across, with two

sensillary setae similar to the anterior, 424 long; sensillae bases lip

apart. Crista distinct, entirely behind the eyes (sce Figs. 1A, 2). Distance

between anterior and posterior sensillae bases (centres) 65, (intersensil-

lary distance).

The dorsum of the body is provided with a bushy covering of heavily

ciliated setae, of two distinct types and sizes. The larger setae are

spathulate and heavily ciliated, 28-42, long and 11-15 wide where

Gy This family name pripesed hy Mader bys na stulue na there is mq sraiug with oul

Pienbt rene on which it shonld be haced. ‘The sane applies to the fumily Periiremutrombidiidee

vider 1995

SOUTHCOTT—GENUS MYRMICOTROMBIUM 93

430 fe

Sourtcatt

Fig, 1. Myrmicotrombium brevivristatum Womersley 1934; A-D adult male, holotype: A entite

specimen, setae omilted (exeept supra-onychial papillae and setae}. Legs 11 and il] on the right hand

side detached, Internal and ventral structures shown in stipple; B external genitalia aud adjacent

chitinous purt of internal genitalia, male, showing lavia majova and labia minora; dorsal] seta

(spathulate type), from above; D same, below; FE dorsal seta, shorter type; F nymph, dorsal seta,

spathulate type (all sé¢tae to scale on right).

expanded. The ciliations are stiff, oblique and sharp-pointed, and change

direction along the course of the seta, being more outstanding toward

each end of the seta (Fig. 1 C). These seta show a slight inferior

keel. The setae originate from a minute seta base, as is usual in the

Erythraeidae; the seta base is 2.5.4 wide, The smaller are more

34 RECORDS OF THE 8.4. MUSEUM

numerous, and the larger spathulate setae are interspersed among them,

The smaller setae are practically uniform in structure throughout their

length, non-expanding, more slender, somewhat more flaccid, densely

(and somewhat flaccidly) ciliated, setae 18-254 long (Fig. 1 E).

Venter with setae similar to the smaller dorsal setae, but these slightly

larger and with more outstanding ciliations. The male genitalia are of

typical Erythraeid type, with outer and inner lips as figured (Fig, 1 B)

(labia majora and labia minora) respectively. There are no genital

suckers,

Legs as figured. Leg I fairly stout, others somewhat more slender.

however all the legs have a lumpy angular appearance, with the genua

bellied (Fig. 1 A). Each tarsus carries above the claws, at its distal

end, a projecting supra-onychial papilla and bristle, clearly tactile in

function (two being present on each tarsus I). The tactile bristles

curyed and spiniform; on leg I 28, long, on II 30”, on DI 28n, on IV

304. Tarsus I 127 long by 64) high, Il 70u x 36p, I T4p x 36y

IV Qi. x 36% Metatarsus (tibia) I 120. long, I 74pn, M1 Tip, IV

107, In their proximal parts the legs are provided with plumose setae

similar to the body setae (Fig. 2); among these are short spiniform

sensory setae usual for the Erythraeidae (some are shown in Fig. 2 on

the (telo-) femur I and genu I. These sensory setae are more common

on Lhe more distal parts of the legs, and constitute terminally about 50%

of the setae,

Chelicerae styliform, as figured, with the usual Erythraeid feature

of the cheliceral stylets at the tip of the mouth cone. Posteriorly the

gnathogomal endoskeleton ends within the body in the typical posterior

cornua or “forceps” of the Hrythraeidae (shown in Figs. 1 A, 2). There

is ho sign of any extrusile tube to the gnathosoma, as. occurs in the

Smarididae- The palpi are slender, with chaetotaxy as figured (Fig, 2).

By the slender appearance the palpus suggests the Smarididae rather

than the Erythraeidae. There are no specific features suggestive of the

Trombidiidae.

The adult female is similar to the male, but the dorsal setae are

longer, to 554 long with the larger type (spathulate) setae (allotype

female from Morialta, South Australia, 9th October 1944, collected by

H, Womersley, in the collection of the Sonth Australian Museum); not

figured.

Nymph (Fig. 1F) (specimen from Black Mountain, Canberra, Austra-

lian Capital Territory, 19th October 1944, under stonés, collected H,

Womersley, in the collection of the South Australian Museum. Although

NUS MYRMICOTROMBIUM

SOUTHCOTT—GE

SauvTtucortt

adult molé. holotype, showing nnherior

as wall as the enathosoma ond palpi, and part of tho

ht ai the crista is shown the right posterigr horn of the gnathosoma, (subeuticular).

ubinm brevieristetum Womersley 1924;

ineluding crista anil ayss,

Murnicotre

To the riz

part of dorsum of body,

Fig.

potorinr lege.

96 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

rather damaged the following particulars may be given from the mounted

specimen: )

Of the same general structure and setation as the adult, but the

longer (spathulate) dorsal setae more slender, to 554 long. The tarsi

of the feet are proportionately higher than in the adult. Tarsus I 1204

long * 70m high, Il 662 x 384, I 742 x 36u, IV 85yn x 34u

Metatarsus I 135. long, If 83y, TIT 84n, TV 108,.

Localilies, South Australia: Glen Osmond, 11 September 1933, with

ants, male (holotype) (H, Womersley); Glen Osmond, in dead pine

needles, March 1935, one specimen, male (R. V, S.); Glen Osmend, T

May 1939, in soil at base of Eucalyptus cladocalyx, one specimen

(R. V, S.); Brown Hill Creek, 19th June 1938, with ants, one specimen

(J, 8. Womersley); Morialta, 9th October 1944, one specimen, female,

allotype (H. Womersley).

Australian Capital Territory: Black Mountain, Canberra, under stones,

19th October 1944, three specimens, including one nymph (H. Womersley).

Myrmicotrombium sp.

In the South Australian Museum collection is a slide of a specimen

that can be referred to this genus, labelled “Nganyawa, 9 December 1946,

in soil” (Burma: name of collector not given). No other information is

recorded about. it.

Unfortunately the specimen is in a very damaged condition, and is

unsuitable for description. The spathulate dorsal setae are up to 38

long, and the ciliations of these are possibly somewhat longer and stronger

than in the M. brevicristatum specimens seen. Whether this is of any

significance cannot be stated at present.

Biology of Myrmicotrombium brevicristatum.

On two occasions this species has been recorded in the company of

ants (species of latter not stated). The original of these, as indicated

above, is reflected in the generic name. Its life history is unknown. It

has been observed only in superficial layers of soil or vegetable litter or

under stones. Whether there is any association with ants, other than

accidental, is not known.

The Affinities of the Genus Myrmicotrombium.

As is indicated in the description, from its styliform exsertile

chelicerae, the genus belongs to the Erythraeidae and not to the Trombi-

diidae. Womersleéy was misled by its Trombidiid facies, and later writers

had perforce to follow him, as none of them saw any specimens.

SOUTHCOTT—GENUS MYRMICOTROMBIUM aT

The genus is unique among the Erythraeidae in having the eyes

placed entirely in front of the crista. In this character the génus

resembles the genera Smaris Latreille 1796 (= Sclerosmaris Grandjean

1947) and Fessonia von Heyden 1826 (= C&cosmaris Grandjean 1947)

of the Smarididae, but no previously described Erythraeidae. Another

feature suggesting affinities with the Smarididae is the presence of the

tactile bristle arising from a distinet papilla above the tarsal claws

(supra-onychial papilla and seta). This is a highly developed feature

in some of the Smarididae, e.g. the genera Smaris Latreilie 1796 and in

HWirstiosoma Womersley 1934 (= Smaris Grandjean 1947 non Latrcille

1796) and to a lesser extent in Fessonia von Heyden 1826, where they are

ciliated, Such setae are also present in some of the Erythraeidae.

Despite its affinities with the Smarididae, there is no trace of an

extrusile collar by which the gnathosoma can be projected in front of

the bady, hence the genus belongs to the Erythraeidae.

Feider (1955) has erected a subfamily Myrmicotrombiinae in the

family Trombidiidae (s1.) monotypic for Myrmicolrombium Womersley

1934, which he grouped with the subfamilies Johnstonianinae and

Notothrombidiinae, in his “Infraseria” Duplicitrombidiinae Feider 1955

(of his “Seria” Sapittotrombidiinae Feider 1955, family Stigmotrombidiidae

Yeider 1955), While it is not the purpose of the present article to deal

with the systematics of the Trombidioidea, it is clear that the subfamily

Myrmicotrombiinae Feider 1955, by definition cannot stand, It is however

apparent that the characters of the genus Myrmicofrombium merit sub-

family status within the Erythraeidae, The most important character

is the placing of the eyes entirely in front of the crista, and on this

character the writer proposes the subfamily Myrmicotrombiinae n. sf.

{non Feider 1955). This subfamily porsibly forms a connecting link

between the Smarididae and the Erythraeidae (#). It is not proposed to deal

with the systematics of the Erythraeidae at any length in the present

article (these will be considered in a separate paper), but it is thought

desirable to indicate here the relations of the Myrmicotrombiinae to the

other subfamilies of the Erythraeidae, These may be separated as in

the following key to the adult forms:

is TWO GYES ON CACH SIME oer ecseccceccssnnnncenencnnievitine ie ei n. sf-

One eve on each side .

2. (1) Metatarsi (tibiae) of adults and d nymphs * with & pair ‘of tienes

at the distal end dorsally .. agttavieuga tind ~

_Callidosominae 1 n, 8k

Metatarsi (tibiae) ‘without: tubercles pee eoessnassc at yar pgtepayuntecss atti tereo net

() Thése fwo faiilies vonstilate the emparfaimily kd Vkreee tg a Test. Tntradieed by Grunthjuin

(19478) w replace the "Sublenhors'’ Apmholostiemata Giiemins 146

98 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSHUM

3. (2) Hyes entirely in front of the crista or cristal areas o.com

sca eras eeeranim rears: WOO Myrmicotrombiinae n. sf. non Feider 1955

Eyes between levels of anterior and posterior sensillary areas of

GTS T ettincnseescdiptessenpyepeyeprendgqrevntenengettorvneginvensletangebedpithnenprdqdnseeymeenegcafedanypemaneebsbines sitter 4,

4. (3) Eyes anterior to middle of Crista... cc cceenedeptinae n. sf.

Eyes behind middle of crista. occnccccsuuoneenndalaustiinae n. sf.

The subfamilies Erythraeinae, Callidosominae, Myrmicotrombiinae,

Leptinae and Balaustiinae proposed above are based on the genera

Erythraeus Latreille 1806, Callidosoma Womersley 1936, Myrmico-

trombium Womersley 1934, Leptus Latreille 1796 and Balaustium von

Heyden 1826 respectively. The genus Balausfium is used in the sense

of Grandjean (1947b). The subfamily Balaustiinae nov. is proposed in

place of Balaustiidae Grandjean 1947 (Grandjean 1947a).

REFERENCES.

Baker, E, W., and Wharton, G. W. 1952, “An Introduction to Acarology”.

The Macmillan Company, New York.

Feider, 4. 1955, Acarina Trombidoidea (sic) in Fauna Republicii Populare

A A

Romine, Arachnida 5 (1): 1-187, Hdit. Acad. Pop. Romina.

Grandjean, F. 1947a, Etude sur Jes Smarisidae et quelques autres

Erythroides (Acariens), Arch. Zool. exp. gen. 85 (1): 1-126.

Grandjean, F. 1947b, Au sujet des Erythroides, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., Paris

(2) 19 (4): 327-334.

Southcott, R. V. 1946a, On the Family Smarididae (Acarina), Proc. Linn.

Soc. N.S.Wales 70 (8-4) : 173-178.

Southcott, R. V. 1946b, Studies on Australian Erythraeidae (Acarina),

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 71 (1-2): 6-48.

Thor, S., and Willmann, ©, 1947: Trombidiidae. Lieferung 71b in Das

Tierreich, Berlin, pp. 187-541 +- xxix-xxxvi.

Womersley, H. 1934, A Revision of the Trombid and Erythraeid Mites of

Australia with Descriptions of New Genera and Species, Rec. 5. Aust,

Mus. 5 (2): 179-254,

Womersley, H. 1937, A Revision of the Australian Trombidiidae (Acarina),

Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 6 (1): 75-100.

THE USE or PLASTIC PANELS ror ILLUSTRATING HEAVENLY

BODIES

By H. J. BOWSHALL, Arrisr, Sovra Ausrratian Museum

Plates iii-iv

Some months ago, it was decided that illuminated panels showing

some of the heavenly bodies would be weleome and interesting additions

to the children’s display gallery in the South Australian Museum, This

exhibition, now ready for installation, depicts the Moon (pl. tii), Halley's

Comet, the nebula in Andromeda (pl, iv), the chromosphere of the sun

and the solar system itself.

When working on a glass shect, internally illuminated by a light

situated near the edge of the sheet, it was noticed that puint on the

surface and small flaws in the glass, such as bubbles and scratches on

the surface, become illuminated and glowed quite brightly. Our first

models were constructed by painting the design on sheets of plate glass

which were illuminated by passing light through one edge of the sheet.

Results were not satisfactory, however, for light illuminated figures

painted on the glass for a distance of only about two feet from the edge.

Furthermore, most. plate glass manufactured in Australia has a slight

greenish tint, which alters colours painted on the glass, black becoming

brown, for example,

Further experiments were carried out, using colourless sheets of

plastic (‘‘Perspex” acrylic) instead of glass, and the resulis were most

encouraging. This plastic will transmit light from the edge to a distance

of over five feet through the sheet, while colours applied to the surface

of the sheet are not altered by the light.

Instead of painting the details on the plastic, it was decided to enter

the field of light by engraving them into the surface of the sheets, and

this proved to give far better results than the use of paint. The

engravings stand out in high relief from the dark background, giving a

realistic third dimensional effect. It was found that the deeper the

engraving on the plastic, the more brilliantly illuminated that part

became, and vice versa. If required, colours were applied to the engraved

surfaces, a technique used for the solar system and chromosphere of the

sun,

100 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

Several points concerning the use of plastic should be mentioned

here. Most plastic sheets have a rather rough edge and this must be

removed by polishing in order that the maximum amount of light may

be transmitted through the sheet, As the upper edge of the shect ts

the only source of light, it is important that this edge in particular be

perfectly smooth. Moreover, as plastic is somewhat affected by heat,

a light such as that provided by a cold fluorescent tube is preferable to

ordinary filament lighting. The tube is arranged at the top ci the shect

in such a manner that only light escaping from it passes down through

the sheet itself. As the light enters the sheet, it is transmitted to the

lower edge, and portion is reflected back through the sheet again,

When using this technique of “edge lighting” the plastic sheet, as in

the case of glass used in preliminary experimentation, must be completely

free of surface scratches. Unfortunately, plastie is very easily scratched,

and even handling cannot prevent smal! scratches appearing on the

surface. These must be removed by polishing with a fine cuttmg com-

pound: the writer found tooth powders most effective. The sheet is

then washed with a sponge cloth and water, and finally wiped dry with

a soft cloth. However, harsh rubbing in the final drying of the sheet

produces a considerable charge of static electricity on the surface, which

readily attracts dust particles.

Experiments were conducted with several thicknesses of plastic.

Sheets one-eighth of an inch thick were first employed, but light did not

penetrate the required distance into the plastic; eventually it was. found

that sheets of a thickness of three-cighths of an inch gaye optimum

results,

The images were transferred to the plastic sheets as follows.

Photographs of drawings of the reauired size were prepared from suitable

illustrations and these were applied to the front, or viewing, surface

of the sheet, with the backs of the photographs facing the front of the

sheet. A powerful light was used to illuminate the viewing side of the

plastic sheet; the figures, then clearly visible through the back of the

sheet, were engraved on this surface. In the case of the moon it was

nécessary to prepare a composite picture, fitted together from sectional

photographs. To complete the exhibit, and in order to ensure a dari

background, a black velvet curtain wes hung behind the plastic sheets-

Tt is hoped that, in the future, there will be further opportunity

for the use of this technique of “edge lighting" for exhibition panels in

the South Australian Museum.

ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS iy SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By CHARLES P, MOUNTFORD, Hoxornary Assocrats in Franonoey,

Sourm Ausrnanian Myseum

Plate v and text fig, 1-18

This paper records six localities of aboriginal cave paintings in

South Australia, three of which are in the Mount Lofty Ranges, i.e.

(i), Native Valley, Kanmantoo; (ii), Harrison Creek, Tungkillo; (iii),

Cook Hill, about five and a half miles east of Mt. Pleasant, The other

three groups are: Yappala Hills, south south-vest of Hawker; Gilmore

Well on lyre’s Peninsula about midway between Port Augusta and

Whyalla, and a small group in a low cave near Wertaloona, on the

eastern side of the Northern Flinders Ranges, (not shown on map, fig 1).

(i) NATIVE VALLEY, KANMANTOO

The Native Valley case paintings are in a shallow cave on the eastern

side of a creek on Section 393, Hundred of Monarto, a few miles in an

easterly direction from the township of Kanmarttoo.

These paintings have been known to the local residents for many

years, but were first brought to my notice by Mr. H. M. Hale, Director

of the South Australian Museum. Later, in company with other members

of the Anthropological Society of South Australia, we visited the locality

to record these fast disappearing examples of aboriginal art. ‘

Most of the paintings, which were on the southern end of the cave),

and on the roof were badly weathered, a few of them so badly that it

was difficult to follow their ontline. To ensure the greatest possible

accuracy, the paintings were traced on transparent cellophane, from

which fig 2 and 3 were prepared.

On fig 2, a and e, are simple human beings in positions suggestive

of dancing; b, a pair of interlocked figures, one without a kead, and c,

a hollow-bodied man or woman that bears some resentblance to cave

paintings recorded by Mountford (1937, fig. 12) from Napier Broome Bay,

north-western Australia. At d, is a squatting individual with a tail

and a boomerang-shaped object in front; f, and possibly the badly-eroded

design h, are human representations, and the group at. m, a curious

meandering “rake” design, a human being, and a circle. On the bottom

102 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

@ Hawker

MY oppalla

Pt Auguste

Gilmore Wellé

@ Mallett

@ Snowtown @ Bore

Pt Wakefield

@ Gawler

Cook Hill

Pr Lincoln Tungkitts

ungki

Kangaroo Island

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Cave Painting Sites

Fig, 1. ‘Localities of Cave Paintings in South Australia.

at n, are three designs which are almost certainly human, the figure on

the right having been elaborated by a series of transverse lines. The

design at k, could be a badly-drawn bird track but there is no reasonable

103

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS

N HMI

Native Valley,

Fiz, 2, Cave Paintings,

RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

Paintings, Native Valley.

Fig. 3. Cave

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS ida

explanation of the “rake” design, g, or the ellipse with the radiating

lines at o. There is a lizard design at j; 1, is not decipherable.

The right-hand design of group a, fig. 3 suggests a human being,

with arms. akimbo, wearing a ceremonial head-dress. The figure to the left

and the right are indecipherable. The design at b may represent a

crescent moon (1); e¢ and j are exaggerated bird tracks. At n is an

incomplete design of a bird similar to that recorded by Tindale and

Sheard (1926, fig. 15), in the Yatalunga cave on the South Para River.

The figures e, k, 1, and m are indecipherable; the remainder, d_ f,

h, and g, represent men and women.

(ii) HARRISON CREEK, TUNGKILLO

This group of cave paintings are situated on the roof walls of a low

rock shelter (pl. V,A), on the southern edge of Harrison Creek, Section

481, Hundred of Tungkillo and about two miles south of a town by the

same name. Members of the Anthropological Society assisted in the

recording of this group,

On fig. 4, a, b, c, d, e, f, g, j, k, m and p, resemble lizards although

it is possible that some of them may represent aboriginal men, On the

left of c, is a barred circle, a common design in the rock engravings at

Mt, Chambers Gorge, (Mountford, 1929, fig. 174-7).

The fern-leaf design at n resembles a cave painting in a rock shelter

at Bimba, (Mawson and Hossfeld, 1926, fig. 2). This design is common

in the art of the Central Australian deserts, (Mountford, 1937, fig. 5),

and is present in the rock engravings of Panaramittce (Mountford, 1929,

fig, 6). The figure to the left of n, as well as at o, and h, are

indecipherable.

(iii) COOK HILL

Five and a half miles east of Mt. Pleasant and a quarter of a mile

north of the Cook Hill Road is a large granite boulder about twenty feet

long and six feet high, A deep overhang on the eastern side forms a

low rock shelter, which was most probably a favourite camping place

for the aborigines.

On the walls and ceilings of this shelter were a number of faded

aboriginal paintings. Mr. N. B. Tindale, who first located these paintings

and who kindly gave me the sketch from which fig. 5 was prepared,

copied all the designs that were not too faint for definite recognition.

1 ‘There iv a similar dngiem in the Yoppala Hills, fig, 9¢

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

106

\ ;

S Sy &

CSS

MI 2.

Cave Paintings, Tungkillo.

Vig. 4.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS 10T

Fig. 5, Cave Paintings, Cook Hill.

The designs, a, b, c, d, e, f, k, and m represent either men or

lizards. Similar designs are present in all the painted caves of the

Adelaide Hills.

At f is a combination figure, the lower being either human or reptile,

the upper, unidentifiable. There is a group of linked circles at n, and

a single example at q.

(

Fig, 6, Gave Painings, Cogk Hill,

108 RECORDS OF THH §8.A. MUSEUM

A triple-headed snake at s, is similar to a cave painting on the River

Marne recorded by Hossfeld (1926, p. 290, fig. 2). There is no explanation

for h, o, or the interesting figure at p, the right-hand side of which might

represent the long-necked freshwater tortoise of the near-by River Murray.

(iv) THE YAPPALA HILLS

Three shelters in which there are a number of unusual cave paintings

are situated ai the southern end of the Yappala Hills, about six miles

south south-west of Hawker, in the Hundred of Wonoka.

The larger shelter is half-way up the face of a steep cliff, on the

western side of a ravine whose watercourse pours into Palmer Creek.

Two smaller caves are situated on a conical hill to the east. For the

sake of clarity, these shelters are designated, the western shelter (fig. 7);

the upper eastern shelter, (fig. 8) and the lower eastern shelter (fig. 9).

During 1937, Mr. H. M. Cooper showed me photographs and sketches

of some of the designs in the western shelter and Mr. Maurice Leask

sent a description and photograph of the upper and lower eastern shelters.

It was not until 1955, in company with Mr. Ainslie Roberts, that

I had an opportunity of personally investigating these caves. On thet

oceasion we made a complete photo-mosaic of the western and upper

eastern shelters, but did not locate the lower eastern group. I am

indebted to Mr. H. M. Cooper for permission to use his sketches from

which fig. 9 was prepared.

(a) The Western Shelter

This shelter is about thirty-five feet long and six feet cr more in

height, Fig. 7, traced with a photo-mosaic prepared, reveals a number

of interesting designs which are not present in any other recorded group

in South Australia. Another unusual feature is that all the designs, with

the exception of the barred circles at j, have been painted in black.

At c, is the most striking and unusual dasign in the cave; a circle

of radiating lines enclosing groups of curving crescents and U within U

designs. At e, and f, are similar groups except that the radiating lines

enclose a circular disc.

There are groups of parallel lines at a, b, f, g, 1, and n, most of

them associated with exaggerated paired kangaroo tracks, as at f, There

are examples of the “rake” design, also present at Native Valley, (fig. 2).

No reasonable explanation can be offered for tlie paintings at h, k and m.

The barred cirele design at j resembles rock engravings in Mount

Chambers Gorge of the Northern Flinders Ranges, (Mountford, 1929, figs.

174-7), These designs, which are seldom found in the cave painting or

rock carving art of South Australia are particularly common in rock

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS 109

- “y

nd MN

Lie

Mn Wy. 5

. » DD) ny. y: ni v

Fig. 7, Cave Paintings, Yappala ills, Western Shelter,

engravings of the upper Yule River of North Western Australia, (Worms,

1954, pi. 1b, 2d, 3a), where they represent a human vulva.

(b) The Upper Eastern Shelter

The paintings are in a low cave which had been eroded at the base

of a large boulder. There were a few straight line markings on the low

ceiling. The bulk of the designs, (fig. 8), extended along the back wall

for about twenty feet.

The predominant painting was an incomplete oval, a, of short black

lines. Although seldom present in cave paintings elsewhere in South

Australia, these groups of short lines are particularly numerous in the

cave paintings at Gilmore Well, (Pl. V, C). At b, are bird tracks,

probably emus; c, paired boomerangs and what. could represent a simple

throwing slick; d, a group of parallel lines, a hand stencil with a finger

110 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Re MAI LENG y MO 1 doa

ai : 7 HUMNIp ry

Why

\ ‘hy Waiting

Fig. 8. Cave Paintings, Yappala Hills, Upper Eastern Shelter.

missing, and a number of bird tracks; e, grouped boomerangs and a

multiple barred design; f and g, hand stencils, and h an unidentifiable

design.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS

Lddte gage

as AN

(UN 4,

112 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

At m is possibly a badly-drawn boomerang and n, an emu track.

Design k, is interesting; it may consist of no more than a bird track

atlached either to a U-shaped symbol or an incomplete circle. I do not

know of a parallel design in Australian primitive art.

As mentioned earlier, fig. 9, was prepared from sketches made by

Mr. H. M. Cooper. The barred circle designs, a and c. resemble those

at Mt, Chambers Gorge (Mountford, 1929, fig. 180-2); b, and h, are

similar, but may have had a different meaning. There are U within U

designs at k, g, and e, which are common in the art of central Australia

(Spencer and Gillen, 1899, fig. d, p. 148; fig. f, p. 149; Mountford, 1937,

fig. 3, 7, 9,11). They are also present in the rock engravings at Mallett,

(Basedow, 1914, pl. xvi, fig. B) and Yunta (Mountford, 1937, pl. x, fig. 5).

Groups of parallel lines such as at d, were common at Yappala in both

the upper and lower shelters. It is tempting to think of them as tally

marks, but we have no evidence that this is so, nor that the aborigines

ever kept tallies of events,

There is no reasonable explanation for the interesting figure at j,

which is particularly common in the cave at Gilmore Well, fig. 17. Design

b might be a combination of a barred circle and a U within U design; h

is a barred circle and a bird track; e¢, combined U within U designs, and

k, an incomplete circle.

(v) GILMORE WELL

Late in 1953, Mr, Hans Mincham of Whyalla wrote and told me of

aboriginal paintings in two eaves in the rough hills about three miles

east of Gilmore Well, which, in turn, is about six and a half miles south-

west of Blanche Harbour, Hundred of Jenkins {fig. 1).

During 1955, Mr. Ainslie Roberts and I visited these caves (PI. V, BO,

inspected the paintings and photographed a number of the paintings from

which we prepared the illustrations. The lower cave was approximately

sixty feet long and up to ten feet high, the upper cave being about a

third the length of the lower,

Although there are hundreds of individual paintings in the two caves,

the range of designs is particularly limited. On the right-hand side of

the lower cave (Pl. V, C.) are a short number of parallel lines, in

red and white, painted along the edge of more or less horizontal bands

of rock, Between and above these bands are a number of bird tracks

and paired footmarks of kangaroos.

On the walls and ceiling of both the smaller upper cave and the left-

hand side of the lower cave (in addition to the painting of a man, lines

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS 113

D bit

unt Vé

anne

Fig. 10-14. Cave Paintiogs, Gilmora Well,

ri cin

a TTYL tinal

Weaetd ca,

Vig, 15-18. Cave Paintings, Gilmore Well.

114 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of short marks and multiple-barred designs), are a large number of

human, animal and bird footmarks painted heterogeneously over the whole

surface,

We did not make a complete photo-mosaic as at the Yappala Hills

caves, but photographed a series of typical groups i!lustrated on fig. 6

and 10-18,

Along the lower edge of fig. 10 are a number of incomplete human

footprints; on the right is a large multi-barred oval; in the centre a group

of four long parallel lines intersected with transverse bars; and on the

left, amid a number of heterogeneous figures, a single barred design.

The paintings illustrated on fig 11 are mostly tracks and groups of

short parallel lines. At the bottom of the panel, some aboriginal artist

has created an interesting pattern by joining a series of bird tracks

together.

Fig. 12, (with the exception of the four multiple-barred designs on the

lower left), is covered with the tracks of men, dogs, kangaroos and birds.

One interesting series of tracks depicting a dingo chasing a kangaroo

starts at a, in the centre of fig. 12, continuing up the wall, leaving it at

b, then continuing across the ceiling as shown on fig. 14.

On fig. 13 are a number of kangaroo tracks, a human footprint on the

left, and a fragment of a wheel-like design on the right. A similar design

has been found among the rock engravings of Yunta Springs (Mountford,

1929, fig. 89), and in an elaborated form at Mount Chambers Gorge

(Mountford, 1929), fig. 175).

On the left of fig. 6 is a crudely painted man in white, with a line

{perhaps a spear), projecting from his head. There is no explanation for

the patch of white below. On the right is a multiple-barred design.

On the left of fig. 15 are four grouped boomerangs; in the middle a

multiple-barred figure, and on the right, a design of unknown meaning.

Multiple-barred designs, with the exception of five groups of short marks

and two of long parallel lines, occupy the most of fig. 16.

There are, on fig. 17, three well-drawn human footprints, two dog

and five kangaroo tracks as Well as eight multiple-barred designs.

On fig. 18, a “wheel” design, similar to than on fig. 13, is predominant.

There is also a human footprint, group of short parallel lines, two emu

tracks, and a number of indecipherable designs,

(vi) WERTALOONA

Mr. H. M. Cooper found a small group of cave paintings in a low cave

on the eastern slopes of the Flinders Ranges, about five miles south of

Wertaloona. These are shown at fig. 9, m.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS 115

DISCUSSION

A review of the paintings described in this paper suggest that, in

the cave art of South Australia, certain types of designs tend to be used

only in specific localities. Paintings of human figures are far more

numerous than any other in the Adelaide Hills; the circular designs of

short lines, fig. 7, c, e, and f, are only found in the Yappala Hills cave,

and the multitude of short lines at Gilmore Well.

The same predominance of certain designs is also present in the art

of the rock engravings; such as U within U designs at Mallett; (Basedow,

1914, pl. XVI, fig. B) and the barred circle designs at Mt. Chamibers Gorge,

(Mountford, 1929, pp. 351, 353).

This grouping suggests that some of the localities where paintings

and rock engravings are now found were totemic places, alihough not

necessarily forbidden to the women.

REFERENCES

Basedow, H. 1914: Aboriginal rock engravings of great antiquity. Journ.

Roy. Anth. Inst., 44.

Hossfeld, P, 1926: The aborigines of Australia: Native occupation of the

Eden and Angaston Districts. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Austr., Adelaide, 50,

Mawson, D., and Hossfeld, P. 1926: Relics of aboriginal population in the

Olary District. Trans. Roy, Soc. 8, Austr., Adelaide, 50,

Mountford, C. P. 1929: Aboriginal rock carvings of South Australia. Aust.

Ass: Adv. Sci., 19.

Mountford, C. P. 1937: Aboriginal crayon drawings from the Warburton

Ranges in Western Australia. Rec. 5. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 6.

Mountford, C. P. 1937a: Aboriginal crayon drawings, Northern Aranda

Tribe of Central Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Austr., Adelaide, 61.

Mountford, C. P. 1937b: Examples of aboriginal art from Napier Broome

Bay, North-Western Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr,, Adelaide,

61.

Spencer, W. B., and Gillen, F. J. 1899: Native tribes of Central Australia,

Tindale, N. B., and Sheard, H. L. 1927: Aboriginal rock paintings, South

Para River, South Australia, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 51.

Worms, A. E. 1954: Prehistoric petroglyphs of the Upper Yule River,

North-Western Australia. Anthropos, 19.

RECORDS or UNCOMMON SOUTHERN AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSCS

By BERNARD C. COTTON,

Curator or Mouuuscs, Sours Avsrratian Museum

Plates vi-vii

The following notes deal with records, localities and new information,

gathered over the last few years, concerning some lesser known Southern

Australian Molluscs. Two new genera are introduced.

Nautilus repertus Iredale

Plate vi (top)

Nautilus repertus Iredale, 1944; Australian Zoologist, 10, (3), 295-296,

text fig.

A. R. Riddle 1920 published a paper entitled “An Adventitious

Occurrence of Nautilus pompilius Linn, with a Short Bibliography on

Ocean Currents affecting the Australian Coast.” The Nautilus referred

to was taken by James Scott of Yorketown at Foul Bay, Southern Yorke

Peninsula, opposite what is locally known as the Old Mill. The animal

was nearly intact, only small portions having been removed by sea-birds

and it was not in an obvious state of decomposition.

This is the only record of Nautilus occurring in South Australia, not

even a fragment of shell has been seen on our coast, previous to or since

this record. Incidentally, no living Nautilus has been recorded from

anywhere on the Australian Coast, though many shell fragments of

Nautilus alumnus have been taken on the North Queensland Coast, and

that species is presumed to be living in quantity nearby.

Nautilus pompilius Linne, type locality Amboina, is plentiful in certain

places on the Indo-Pacific, such as the Philippines, the animals being used

as bait and the shells as drinking vessels and as a source of Mother-of-

Pearl ornaments by some Pacific Island natives. Quiggin mentions the

use of this species by the natives of New Britain who make “lillie”, a

creamy-white string of Nautilus pompilius discs used as shell money.

Riddle, in his summing up, dismissed any possibility of the Nautilus

having migrated from the West and concluded that “A migration, how-

ever, along the warm Notonectian current, which sweeps past the home

18 RECORDS OF THE 5.A, MUSEUM

of the species and then down the Eastern Coast of Australia, seems

more probable. ... By this medium the migrating Nautilus could well

arrive at a position East of Bass Strait and Tasmania, How it could

then travel westward against the easterly current from the Great Austra-

lian Bight must he considered.”

Iredale, p. 295 under his original description of Natlilus alumnus

from Queensland, writes, “There is a record of a living specimen from

Yorke's Peninsula, South Australia, A. R. Riddle 1920, which is not

acceptable." The incorrect identification of the South Australian shell

has thus, again, confused the issue concerning the authenticity of this

specimen.

There are strong reasons why the conclusions of Iredale and Riddle

are not correct. The shell concerned, which was accidentally broken

and repaired years ago, was presented recently to the South Australian

Museum by Mr. P. Scott. It is not the Indo-Pacific Naulilus pompilius

Linne nor is it the still smaller, differently patterned Queensland and

New South Wales species Nautilus alumnus.

The South Australian example is the large Navlilus reperlfus Iredale,

described from South Western Ausiralia. The specimen, D. 14518, is

a big one measuring 22.7 cm. x 17.6 major and minimum diameters 4s

recorded by Riddle, approximating to the measurement of the Holotype

from Rottnest, South Western Australia, examined by me in the Western

Australian Museum im 1949. A shell of a similar size was mentioned

in the Adelaide “Advertiser” on December 21st, following the present

author's note about Riddle’s specimen. This belongs to Mr. Willism

Heslop of Glenelg, S.A. who received it from Cottesloe, Western Australia,

One fram Bunbury and one from Albany in the South Australian Museum,

Verco collection, are typical. Verco 1935, p. 144 records a “Nautilus

pompilins (N. reperfus) in Captain Douglas’ collection, taken on the

beach at Esperance, in the Western Bight” approaching to within 900

miles of the South Australian locality and within the westerly drift.

Whitley took a specimen at Pelsart Island, Abrolhos with muscle scar

flesh attached. The South Australian record is the only Nautilus of

any species with the complete animal, known to have been taken off

the Australian coast.

From this known range of NV. repertus it may now be safely

presumed that a breeding ground exists off the Western Coast as

suggested by Iredale 1944, p. 294, but it is situated probably off the

South Western tip of the Continent.

This large species is characterized by the pale and reduced banding

which becomes obsolete on the pasterior half of the shell, There is no

COTTON—UNCOMMON AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSCS 119

perforation but 2 round brown colour patch covers the umbilical region.

All adventitious occurrences of strange species in Southern Australian

waters have been definitely identified as of Western Australian origin.

In other words the drift is from the West, and there is no drift from

the east through Bass Strait.

The following evidence confirms this contention. Weeding 1942, p. 2,

remarks, “It has been pointed out that a warm surface current from

the Indian Ocean flows along the track of the Southern Ocean cold

current and is about 400 miles wide and 250 fathoms deep. This is

said to be on the surface at Cape Leeuwin but 150 fathoms below at

Cape Northumberland", and the same author, speaking of varietal names

applied to Western Australian Chitons, Weeding 1942, p. 1, states “This

applies very definitely to those subspecific names introduced for Western

Australian variants, for the variations found in these species are found,

not only in Western Australia, but often in the bays of the Great

Australian Bight and again, to a still greater degree, in Spencer Gulf,

South Australia. The marine fauna of the Kastern Gulf Coast of that

Gulf shows a definite Western influence.”

Other examples of tropical types of Molluscs populating Western

South Australia from South Western Australia, among many, not reaching

Victoria, are the large Gastropods such as the Baler shell Melo miltanis

Gray, Dinassovica jourdant Kiener and Cellana laticostata, all confined

to the Flindersian Region, Cotton 1930, p. 219.

Argenauta nodosa Selander is common in South Australia but Argo-

naula argo Linne, the delicate, narrow Paper Nautilus of the Indian

Ocean and South Western Australia is extremely rare here. Of 500

Argonauts taken by George Pattison at Troubridge Shoal, S.A., 490 were

A. nodosa and only 10 were A. argo apparently drifted from South

Western Australia.

In 1909, Verco, after exploring St. Francis Island, wrote in his

manuscripts:—

“The following notes give evidence of Western drift in the Great

Australian Bight. The circumstances were related to me by Lloyd and

Arnold of St. Francis Island.

a. On the west side of Dog Island, lying near St. Francis Island to the

North of Petrel Bay, can be seen a large iron buoy which drifted

from its moorings in Albany, W.A. Captain Weir of the ‘Governor

Musgrave” tried to tow it off but it was too firmly embedded and

heavy.

b, A cargo boat belonging to the “Eclipse” in Esperance Bay, W.A., gat

adrift and was found by Lloyd beached in Smoky Bay.

120 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

c, A teak log with the British Government brand on it, and supposed

to have come from Burma was found by Lloyd stranded on the

south side of Goat Island.”

Verco concludes: “'The current is said to flow eastward from the

Leewwin some distance south of St. Francis Island and to cause an eddy

which comes up from the South East away to the East of St. Francis

Island in the summer time. In winter the stray north westerly winds

cause a current setting from the West in the Bight."

As Riddle 1920, p. 260 correctly remarks, in connection with the

unique Nautilus “Its position on the Western side of the Bay, however,

suggests a westerly drift.”

Charonia powelli sp. nov.

Plate vi (lower)

Shell large, fusiform, varices strongly formed and nodular, situated

at about every one and a quarter turns and undulating the suture and

giving a distorted appearance to the sculpture of spaced spiral heavily

nodular ribs, about five between the centre of the body whorl and the

angular shoulder formed by the most developed ridge. ‘The heavy ridges

have smooth, weak spiral riblets in the interstices. Colour bright yellowish

to nut brown, maculated with dark brown and white on the nodules. Spire

rather short and narrow. Aperture ovate, distinctly channelled above

and below, the anterior canal somewhat recurved. Outer lip a little

expanded, with teeth in groups of three, two, or single, light brown

coloured. Columella concave, inflexed towards the canal, three plaits

at the top, wrinkled anteriorly. Holotype, Height 167 mm., width 85 mm.

S.W.A., Ellenbrook, D. 14517.

Remarks. This rather rare shell living in the Flindersian region of

Southern Australia, has been recognised by collectors for many years

as a species, distinct from Charonia rubicunda Perry 1811 (Sepfa) of

New South Wales, though it has remained unnamed. Charonia powel!li

differs from the deeper water species Ciiaronia euclia Hedley 1914 in

being much more robust and having strong nodular sculpture, wider body

whorl and shorter spire.

It can, however, attain to quite a large size, one cited by Cotton,

1945, p. 258 being 210 mm. in height. The present species is quite distinct

from Charonia rubicunda Perry 1811, which inhabits the Hastern coast

of Australia and Charonia insfructa Tredale 1929 from deeper waters of

the same area.

The genus Charonia Gistel 1848, type species Murex tritonis Linne

1758 has as synonyms Trilonidea Lamarck 1807 not Muller 1776, Trifan

COTTON—UNCOMMON AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSCS 121

Montfort 1810 not Linne 1758 and Eutriton Cossmann 1904. Charonia

powelli is named after the well known New Zealand Conchologist, A. W. B.

Powell, Assistant Director of the Auckland Museum.

Notovoluta kreuslerae Angas

Voluta kreuslerae Angas, 1865; Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 55.

This rare Volute has been taken from craypots in Encounter Bay

and records from Investigator Strait, Middleton, Yankalilla, St. Francis

Island, Port Elliott, Capé Borda, 55 fathoms. Tunk Head 16 fathoms,

Backstairs Passage 22 fathoms, Newland Head 20 fathoms and Porpoise

Head 12 fathoms were mentioned by Cotton 1946, p. 16, where a few

details of the animal were given. Two from Newland Head in the collection

of Peter Wearne each measure 102 mm. in length and a third one collected

by him at Victor Harbour measures 83 mm, in length.

Cottonia dannevigi Verco

Scaphella dannevigi Verco, 1912; Trans. Roy. Soc., 8. Austr., 36, 225,

pl. 13, fig. 1-3.

The first specimen of this species taken in South Australia and the

only one in the Museum collection is a dilapidated broken shell D. 816

lacking the whole of the last whor!, dredged by Verco, 1896, off Newland

Head, 20 fathoms,

A large and good specimen is in the collection of Peter Wearne taken

by Cain Rumbelow, 1953 Encounter Bay, in craypot, 12 fathoms. This

second South Australian specimen is light yellowish-brown with the typical

white band around the upper middle of the body whorl, and measures

160 mm. in length.

A young example, 89 mm. in height, taken in a craypot at Corny Point

is in the J. Turnbull collection.

A further juvenile specimen measuring 89 mm. (3) inches in length)

with a portion of the protoconch present closely resembling that of

Mamillana mamilla was taken by Robert Hall in March 1954 off Seal

Rock, one mile South-East of Victor Harbour at 14 fathoms, from a cray-

pot. The typical white band is again present, An exceptionally good

example of Voluta eraptanda was taken in another craypot at the same

time, place and depth.

The holotype of this species was dredged by the “Endeavour" in

77-105 fathoms, 90 miles west Eucla, Western Australia, together with

eight further examples recorded by Verco (8) p, 226, Neither holotype of

Cypraca umbilicata armeniaca Verco, nor Scaphella dannevigt Verco are

in the South Australian Museum Collection. They were, according to Verco,

122 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSHUM

sent to the Australian Museum from his collection. On the back of a

tablet bearing cuttings from the plate of Nassaria torri in this publication,

Verco wrote, “The original of this shell is in the Federal Museum (in

charge of the Australian Museum, Sydney) sent there by Dr. Verco after

being described and figured in the Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr, 1912.”

Mamilla mamilla Gray

Voluta mamilla Gray, 1844; Sowerby’s Thes. Conch. 7, p. 207, pl. 50,

fig. 57-58.

A juvenile dead shell in bad condition, taken at the Murray Mouth

is the first record of this species from an exact locality in South Australia.

Umbilia hesitata armeniaca Verco

Cypraea umbilicata armeniaca Verco, 1912; Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.

Austr,, 36, p. 211, pl. 10, fig. 1-3.

Mr. C. F. Kurtze of Portland has handled 2,000 shells of this once

“rare” species, all trawled at 60-80 fathoms, Bass Strait near Cape

Everard, Victoria during the last two years.

These specimens are a little darker than New South Wales. examples.

Some 6% approximated to the Flindersian variant Umbilia hesitata

armeniaca in having the “apricot-yellow” base. About 5% are the

miniature Umbilia hesitata beddomei—previousiy only recorded from

New South Wales, but there are intermediate forms grading in size and

shape into typical Umbilia hesttata.

Altivasum flindersi Verco

Latirus aurartiacum Verco, 1895; Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., 19,

89-90, pl. 2, fig. 1, 1a, not Montfort 1810,

Altivasum flindersi Verco, 1914; Trans. Roy. Soc.. S. Austr., 38, 484,

The holotype D. 12515, dredged in 183} fathoms Backstairs Passage,

ts an immature living individual.

Later, two further specimens were dredged by Verco off Newland

Head in 22 fathoms. The smaller living one measured 57 mm, in height

and the larger dead one 86 mm, in height. Cotton 1945, p. 13, recorded

a large specimen taken by W. Bowden at Cape Borda, 15 fathoms,

September 2, 1946, and now finds that the specimen, housed in Mrs. E. R.

Sims collection, measures 97 mm. in height. A still larger specimen taken

by Bowden at Cape Borda and in the same collection measures 127 mm.

in height. A shell in the collection of Mrs. L. A. Elliott, taken by her on

Middleton beach, measures 50 mm, in height. The best and biggest

specimen of all measuring 145 mm. in height, taken in a craypot at Corny

Point, is in the J. Turnbull collection. In the same collection I identified

COTTON—UNCOMMON AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSCS 123

a perfect example of a rare volute Iredalina auranlia Powell dredged in

New Zealand waters. There is only one living specimen recorded and all

others are dilapidated examples.

Xenophora flindersi Cotton & Godfrey

Onustus flindersi Cotton & Godfrey, 1938; Rec. 5S. Austr. Mus,,

6 (2) 205.

The holotype specimen D. 13615 came from St. Francis Island, 15-20

fathoms and measures 18 mm. in diameter.

Three smaller specimens taken with the holotype are also in the

Museum collection. Verceo, 1909, p. 270, first recorded these specimens

under the name of Xenophora tatei Harris 1897, a Miocene fossil from

Muddy Creek, measuring 44 mm. in major diameter and X. fatei like

many Tertiary fossils from Southern Australia, so closely resemble the

recent forms as to suggest that many now living are Miocene persistent

species.

Fortunately a series of six living specimens was dredged in January

1956 by David Howlett and Peter Wearne in the type locality. The largest

individual measures 47 mm. across. The recent shell is more delicate

and less strongly sculptured than the fossil which has, as Verco says, a

wider umbilicus.

Bothriembryon barretti Iredale

Bathriembryon barrefti Iredale, 1930; Vict. Naturalist, 47, p. 119,

fig. in text.

In the Malacological Society of Australia, Newsletter, Jan. 1957 gives

a most interesting record of this species found between Madura and

Balladonia on September 18th, 1956. The ground was strewn with white

eriphragms and some still adhered to the foot of the animal.

Strangesta gawleri Brazier

Helix (Zonites) gawleri Brazier, 1872; Proc, Zool. Soc., 618.

This native snail originally described from the Mount Lofty Ranges

was thought to be confined to the higher parts of that area, Mr. H. M.

Cooper took many specimens alive at Stony Creek, Wilmington, 1,200

feet above sea level on August 21, 1955 following a very wet winter when

water was accumulated in patches on the surface. He again took the

species on August’ 28th, 1955 at Mount Remarkable. Specimens of this

carnivorous snail placed in his garden at Glenelg are still alive a year later

when a very wet winter was again experienced.

Bothriembryon mastersi Cox

Bulimus mastersi Cox, 1867; Proc. Zool. Soc,, 39,

124 RECORDS OF THE 8.4, MUSEUM

The South Western Australian genus Bofhriembryon extends across

the Nullarbor plains represented by the species B. barrett? Iredale,

At Port Lincoln B. angasianus Pfeiffer is found, a peculiar colour

banded species and also B. mastersi. H, M. Cooper took B. mastersi m

quantity alive at Streaky Bay and I took it alive at Moonta Bay, on the

west coast of Yorke Peninsula and dead shells further south at Corny

Point. B. decresensis Cotton was described from Cape Cassini, Kangaroo

Island and represents the South Hastern limit of the genus. It has not

been recorded from the East coast of Yorke Peninsula.

Family Melanellidae

Melanella Bowdich 1882. Type species Melanella dufresnii Bowdich

= Melaniella P. Fischer 1887 = Eulima Risso 1826.

The distinguishing feature separating the Melanellidae from the

Styliferidae is the possession of an operculum by the former and the

lack of it by the latter: Following Laseron’s work a revised list of

Flindersian species is given here with certain genera tentatively allotted

to the family Styliferidae.

Euliamaustra Laseron 1955. Eulima prorima Sowerby.

augur Angas 1865. Eulima. 5.W.A., §.A. (type), Tas., Vict.

orthopleura Tate 1898. Eulima, 8.W.A., 8.A., Holdfast Bay (type,

D. 13463) Tas.

murrayae Cotton & Godfrey 1932. Eulima. S.W.A., 5.A., Gulf St.

Vincent, 10 fathoms (type, D. 10630),

planicincta Cotton & Godfrey 1932. Eulima. S.W.A., S.A., Gulf

St. Vincent, 10 fathoms (type, D. 10635),

edwardsi Cotton & Godfrey 1932. Eulima, S,W.A., S.A., Cape

Borda, 55 fathoms (type, D. 10634).

mayt Tate 1900. Eulima. S.W.A., 5.A., Tas., Swansea (type, D-.

13462), Vict.

tryont Tate & May 1900. Eulima. 5S.W.A., 5.A., Tas. (type), Vict.

inflata Tate & May 1900. Eulima, §.A., Tas. (type), Vict.

fenisoni Tryon 1886. Eulima. §.W.A., S.A., Tas. (type), Vict.

gradata Cotton & Godfrey 1932. Eulima. §.W.A., Ellenbrook (type,

D. 10634), S.A.

imamaculata Pritchard & Gatliff 1900. Stylifer. S.A., Vict. (type).

articulata Sowerby 1834. Eulima. §.A., Vict., N.S.W. (type).

reegerae Cotton & Godfrey 1932. Eulima. S.A., Cape Borda, 55

fathoms (type, D. 10629).

cunaeformis May 1915, FEuiima. S.A., Tas. (type).

australiensis Thiele 1930. Strombiformis, N.W.A., 5.W.A.

montebelleensis Iredale 1914. Eulima. N.W.A.

montageuana Iredale 1914. Eulima. N.W.A.

COTTON—UNCOMMON AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSCS 125

imodesta Thiele 1930. Melanella. N.W.A., S.W.A.

helena Thiele 1930. Melanella. N.W.A., S.W.A.

élsa Thiele 1930. Melanella, N.W.A., 8.W.A.

Chryseulima Laseron 1955 Slylifer brazieri Angas.

braziert Angas 1877. Stylifer. S.W.A., S.A,, Tas., Vict., N.S.W.

(type).

expansilabra May 1911. §.W.A., S.A., Tas. (type), Vict.

Laseron 1955, p. 87, in a valuable revision of these mostly parasitic

species, mentions that the shell figured by May, 1923, pl. 45, fig. 11

from Tasmania is not Eulima munita Hedley 1903 (Eulimoda). He

regarded it as possibly an undescribed species. It has been named,

however, by May himself as Eulima expunsilabra from Cape Pillar

100 fathoms. Cotypes of both species are in the South Australian

Museum collection and the difference between them had been pointed

out in 1932 by the present author when specimens were recorded

from Cape Jaffa, Beachport, Neptune Islands, at 104 to 300 fathoms.

Specimens have since been recognised from Hopetoun, King George

Sound and Port Phillip, Victoria, There seems to be no authentic

record of Kulimoda munitla from the Flindersian region though it

has been included in check lists.

Curveulima Laseron 1955. Curveulima cornuta Laseron.

commensalis Tate 1898, Eulima. S.W.A., 8.A., Holdfast Bay ( type,

D. 13461), Vict., N\S.W.

indiscreta Tate 1898. Eulima. §.W.A., 5.A., Holdfast Bay (type,

D. 14196).

triggi Cotton & Godfrey 1932. Melanella. S.W.A., 5,A., Cape

Jaffa, 90 fathoms (type, D, 10633).

petterdi Beddome 1882. Eulima, §8.W.A., S.A.; Tas. (type), Vict.

NS.W., Q.

edwardsi Cotton & Godfrey 1932. Melanella. S.W.A., S.A., Cape

Borda 55 fathoms (type, D. 10634).

Cuspeulima Laseron 1955, Leiostraca acutissima. Reeve.

acutissima Reeve 1886. Leiostraca. S,W.A., 5.A., Vict., N.S.W. (type) =

Leiostraca lesbia Angas 1871.

lodderae Hedley 1903. Leiostraca. §.A., Vict., Tas., N.S.W. (type) Q.=

Eulima vilrea Adams.

williamsi Cotton & Godfrey 1932. Strombiformis. $S.W.A,, S.A,

Cape Borda 55 fathoms (type, D. 1063).

broadbentae Cotton & Godfrey 1932. Slrombiformis. S.W.A., S.A,

Cape Borda 55 fathoms (type, D. 10636).

joshuana Gatliff & Gabriel 1910, Leiostraca. S.W.A., S.A., Tas.

Vict. (type).

126 RECORDS OF THE S.A- MUSEUM

biviitata H. & A. Adams 1853. Letostraca. 5S.W.A., §.A., Philippines,

Soo Loo Sea (type)=Eulima bilineata Adams & Reeve.

Fusceulima Laseron 1955. Fusceulima jacksonensis Laseron 1955.

briunnea Tate 1887. Stylifer. S.W.A., §.A., Vict. (type). Parasitic

on the periproct. of Stronglylocentrosus, a sea urchin.

Hebeulima Laseron 1955. Leiostraca inusta Hedley 1906.

perexiquus Tate & May 1900, Rissoa. S.A., Tas. (type), Vict.

fricata Hedley 1907. Eulima. S.A., Vict., N.S.W. (type).

Family Styliferidae

Stylimella Laseron 1955. Stylifer lodderae Petterd 1884.

lodderae Petterd 1884, Stylifer. S.A., Tas. (type), Viet., N.8.W-

petterdi Tate & May 1900. Stylifer. S.W.A., Cottesloe, 5.A., Tas.

(type), Vict., N.S.W.

Syntharella Laseron 1955. Eulima topaziaca Hedley 1908,

fopaziaca Hedley 1908. Eulima. 8.A., Tas., Vict., N.S.W. (type).

Stylapex: Iredale 1925. Stylapeax lactarius Iredale 1925.

laseroni sp. nov. Laseron 1955, p. 100, pointed out that the Tas-

roanian species figured in May, Illustr. Index Tasmanian Shells, pL 45,

fig, 24, No. 999 as Stylifer brazieri Angas 1877 is not that species

but an undescribed one. It is here named Stylapex laseroni sp, nov.

and May’s figure cited as Holotype.

Ilypermastus Pilsbry 1899. Hypermastus coat Pilsbry 1899.

mucronatis Reeve 1866. Eulima. S.W.A,, S.A., Tas., Vict,, N.S.W.

(type).

georgiiregis Cotton & Godfrey 1932. Eulima. 8.W.A., King George

Sound (type, D, 10631), 5.A.

Genus Granata nov.

Shell ear-shaped, spire small, aperture oblong, oblique, nacreous;

outer lip thin. Seulpture of close, equal, spiral, granular cords. Operculum

horny, multispiral. Animal resembling that of Tvovhus but without

lateral filaments, The general anatomy and radula is closely related to

that of Euchelus, but the animal is large and not capable of being

contained within the shell.

Type species: Stomatella imbricata Lamarck,

Remarks: It has been usual for authorities to take Gray’s designation

of Slomatella imbricala Lamarck as the type species of Sfomatella

Lamarck (Rafinesque) 1815, but Anton 1839 designated Stomatella

auricula Lamarck 1818, from Southern Australia as type species of

Stomatella. S. auricula is closely allied to Stomatella planulata Lamarck

1818, the type species of Gena Gray 1842, from the Indo-Pacific.

COTTON—UNCOMMON AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSCS. 127

It therefore becomes necessary to introduce the new genus Granata

for Siomatella imbricata. This genus is contained in the family

Trochidae, subfamily Margaritinae though it seems that the Granata,

Herpetopoma, Euchelus, Darilia, graup is somewhat different from the

typical Margarifes group.

The genera Stomatella, Gena, Stomatia, Pseudostamatella, Bro-

deripia, Roya, are quite distinct and belong to the Family Stomatiidae

sometimes placed as a subfamily Stomatiinae of the Trochidae.

Genus Notomella nov.

Enfomella Cotton, 1945; S. Austr. Naturalist, 23 (2), 14.

Type spectes: Emargittula candida Adams 1851.

The name Entomella is preoccupied by Cossmann 1888. This was

pointed out to me by Myra Keen of Stanford University who asked that

a substitute be supplied. The above name is to be incorporated in a

revision of the Fissurellidae by Grace Johnson in the Treatise on Inverte-

brate Paleontology, edited by Raymond C. Moore, printed by the Geologi-

cal Society of America, University of Kansas Press.

Equichiamys bifrons Lamarck

Chlamys bifrons Lamarck, 1819; An. 5. Vert., 6, 164.

Reference was made, Cotton 1954, p. 168 to the presence of this

edible ‘Queen Scallop” washed up on the beach, South of Outer Harbour.

An acre of this species lives off the South Bank of the Outer Harbour,

whence came examples recently donated to the Museum by Robert Hall.

The shells are encrusted with sponges and usually have clusters of the

Southern Sipper Limpet Zeacrypia immersa and an occasional Capilus

dustralis attached to the valves. They are fixed to the sea bed debris

at a depth of 10 to 20 feet below low tide and are immobile except in

the young stage. Similar beds occur off Stansbury, Normanville, Yanka-

lilla Bay, Backstairs Passage, Kangaroo Island at American River off

Point Marsden and in Coffin Bay. Dredging off Point Marsden, Verco 1935,

p. 64, wrote ‘Our dredge was thrown over in eightcen fathoms and

brought up living and dead scallops, and in this country we worked until

4.30 p.m., passing over many miles of water. This revealed how immense

must be the tracts thickly inhabited by these bivalves.”

The three species Nolovola alba, Equichlamys bifrons and Mimach-

lamys asperrimus were taken in quantity and Verco continues “As for

dead shells of these Scallops, they would have to be measured by the ton.”

Little investigation has so far been made as to the commercial possibilities

of these Scallops though the Scallop industry of 'Tasmania is next in size

to the Oyster industry.

124 RHCORDS OF THE S.A MUSEUM

Anadara trapezia Deshayes

Plate vii

Arca trapezia Deshayes, 1840; Mag. Zool., 21.

This dominant bivalve fossil of our Mid-Recent stranded beaches is

found in numbers around Murat Bay, Port Wakefield, Outer Harbcur,

Yorke Peninsula near Ardrossan, inside the stranded beach dunes to the

southwest of South Australia and at Port Augusta in quantity on the

surface and from bores sunk to test foundations for the new power house,

Although many specimens are found joined, having died in situ, a

quantity of valves also occur on the surface. A strange circumstance in

connection with the odd valves is that at several places where they have

been counted in a marked area, the percentage of left valves is about 60%

and the right 40% of the total taken.

Mr. H. M, Cooper, who has collected many hundreds of these shells,

meticulously counted those on an area at Port Augusta Power Station.

Of 282 specimens picked up only 112 were right valves. A similar

proportion of odd valves existed at Port Augusta West, Port Wakefield

and Streaky Bay.

Valves have been picked up on native camp sites such as at Moana,

Ardrossan, Port Wakefield and Port Augusta West, but their presence

on these sites suggest that they have been transported by the aborigines

for use as implements. One yalve has been found near Lake Torrens.

The extreme western point at which specimens have been taken alive

in Victoria is Port Phillip, according to paired shells with periostracum

attached sent to the South Australian Museum by Gatliff some forty years

ago. Another living series sent by Gabriel some time ago are from

Western Port.

Mr. Richard Plant of Cowes, Phillip Island, recently reported four

iarge colonies of Anadara trapezia living in shallow water in Western

Port Bay, near Churchill Island, Reid’s Bight (two) and Rhyll. While

kindly forwarding specimens he mentioned that they were found living

in mud in the vicinity of Kalelysia scalarina the cockle which is so

plentiful at the Outer Harbour, South Australia.

In the Malacological Club of Victoria, Newsletter, Vol. 4, No. 14,

June 30th, 1956, it is mentioned that a member, Robert Burns, had taken

eleven live specimens at Port Arlington, near Geelong. These localities

are considerably further south than the Mid-Recent beds of South

Australia and suggests that if the species were introduced to our State

and placed in suitable localities it may repopulate our waters.

Incidentally, there is a single valve with ligament intact in the

Museum collection taken many years ago by Walton and Matthews at

Levens, Yorke Peninsula. This is undoubtedly a fortuitous occurrence.

COTTON—UNCOMMON AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSCS 129

Ostres, sinuata Lamarck

Ostrea sinuata Lamarck, 1819; An. S. Vert., 6, 208.

Lamarck gave the locality “les mers de la Nouvelle Hollande”. This

is undoubtedly the South Ausiralian Port Lincoln cr so-called Mud Oyster

and Port Lincoln has since been designated as type locality.

The species is identical with Ostrea angasii Sowerby 1871 from New

South Wales where it is now extinct. During the last ten years there

has been a noticeable increase in the size of natural beds and in the

number of Port Lincoln oysters washed up on the local beaches. Off

the artificially cut outlet from the Torrens River Swamps ito the sea at

Henley Beach South a considerable number of oysters may be picked up

on the beach after heavy squalls which appear to have become more

frequent during the last ten years. Heavy beach scouring, first recorded

in 1949 off Broadway, Glenelg has again taken place this year during

June, July and August. During August of this year quantities of oysters

were taken attached to Pinna dolabraia and many such smooth attach-

ment areas. A smooth worn motor tyre was covered with half-grown

oysters and other smooth surfaced debris washed down through the

outlet was similarly covered. The Sea Gull; (Silver Gull) are keen

competitors with the human collectors.

Verco, in manuscripts, recorded many localities for this Oyster. S.A.,

Kangaroo Island, Eastern Cove, American River, Streaky Bay, Dredged

Beachport 110 fathoms, Eastern Cove 11 fathoms, St. Francis Island 20

fathoms, Black Point, Yorke Penmsula 5 fathoms, Gulf St. Vincent 7

fathoms, Backstairs Passage 20 fathoms, Investigator Strait 20 fathoms,

Ardrossan 8 fathoms, Cape Jaffa 180 iathoms, W.A. Albany, Hopetoun,

King George Sound, dredged Great Austrelian Bight 30 miles west of

Eucla 84-96 fathoms,

A large and old specimen measuring 170 mm. in diameter and 90

mm, in thickness across the {wo vaives has a label attached, reading:

“Mammoth Ovster, dredged in Duticn EBay, August 1912, Its age is

estimated at 15 years. Presented by Mr. W. G. Randall, Chief Inspector

of Oyster Fisheries." <A still larger but younger example is 175 mm.

(nearly 7 inches) in diameter and is labelled: “This oyster shell with

the living fish was detached irom a pile of the Port Victor Jetty. Mr.

W. G. Randall who presented it estimated the age at about 10 years.”

There are a number of further specimens in the collection closely

approaching these in size.

Saxostrea australis Lamarck

Ostrea austraiis Lamarck, 1819; An S, Vert., 6, 209.

130 RECORDS OF THE §.A4, MUSEUM

This species, originally described from King George Sound, Western

Australia was recorded by me living, from Coffins Bay and St. Francis

Island. Further evidence of this Rock Oyster living in South Australia

is now to hand. On August 11th, 1934 a well-known collector, Charles

A. Anderson of Kingscote wrote ‘We have two kinds of oysters here,

one is the Mud oyster and the other is a thin paper shelled one, in shape

like the Sydney Rock.’

Tate 1887 writes “The Sydney Rock Oyster (O. glomerata Gould)

so largely imported as food is not indigenous in our waters (S,A.) but it

has lately been introduced, so I have been informed, to the Port Lincoln

district’.

Verco, in his manuscripts, refers to odd occurrences of O, glomerata,

O. imbricata, O. mordax in various places in South Australia.

It is possible that these accounts refer to Saxostrea australis in

South Australia. The only authentic record of the introduction of the

Sydney Rock Oyster Ostrea commercialis seems to be that relating to

those brought in and cultivated for a few years at Osborne on the Port

Adelaide River by the Adelaide Oyster Company Limited, in 1934. The

project was abandoned,

REFERENCES

Cotton, B. C. 1930: Rec. S. Austr. Mus., 4 (2), 219-241.

Cotton, B. C. 1945: Trans: Roy. Soc., S. Austr., 69 (2) 249-262,

Cotton, B. C. 1946: South Australian Naturalist, 24 (1) 15-16, pl. 1,

fig. 1-4.

Cotton, B. C. 1954: Rec. S. Austr. Mus., 11 (2) 165-176, pl. 23, fig. 1-2.

Iredale, T. 1944: Australian Zoologist, 10 (2), 294-298.

Riddle, A. R. 1920; Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., 44, 257-261.

Verco, J. C. 1909: Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., 33, 270-276.

Verco, J. C. 1912: Trans. Roy, Soc., S. Austr., 36, 206-232.

Verco., J. C. 1935: Combing the Southern Seus, 1-174.

Weeding, B. J. 1942; South Australian Naturalist, 21 (4) 1-2.

A REVISION or tux FLOWER BUGS (HETEROPTERA ANTHO-

CORIDAE) or razr AUSTRALIAN ann ADJACENT PACIFIC REGIONS

—PART Il

By GORDON F. GROSS, M-Sz.,

Assistant Curator or Insecrs, Sout Avsrratian Museum

Fig. 1

Genus Poronotellus Kirkaldy, 1904

Poronotellus Kirkaldy, 1904: Entomologist, 37 (498), 280, Zimmermann,

1948; Insects of Hawaii 8, 179.

Poronotus Reuter, 1871: Ofv. Vet. Akad. Forh., 562. Champion, 1900.

Biol. Centr. Amer. Rhynch., 2, 33.

Buchananiella Reuter, 1885: Act. Soc. Sci. Fenn., 14, 114 & 126. (668

& 680).

Cardiastethus (in part) White, 1879: Ent. Mon. Mag., 16, 142.

Body oblong, pubescent, head longer than the width between the eyes.

Rostrum just reaching base of anterior coxae. Posterior margin of

pronotum deeply sinuate, lateral margins almost straight. The channel

of the scent gland reaching middle of pleurac, straight or directed

posteriad apically. Cana be easily distinguished from Cardiasfethus on

the shape of the scent canal and by the shorter rostrum.

This genus could not be included in Part II because at that stage it

was not clear how many species were involved in these regions. The position

is still not as clear as the author would like but it seems preferable to

consider that there are only two very variable species concerned, P. whitei

in Australia and New Zealand and P. sodalis in the Pacific Islands.

Poronotellus sodalis (White) 1878

Fig 1A

Cardiastethus sodalis White, 1878: A.M.N.H., (5) 1, 372.

Buchananiella sodalis Reuter, 1885: Act. Soc. Sci, Fenn., 14, 127 (681).

Poronotellus sodalis Zimmerman, 1948: Insects of Hawaii, 3, 179.

‘A reddish brown Cardiaslethus, clothed with pale hairs; eyes and

posterior lobe of the pronotum piceous; antennae, legs and elytra yellowish

brown; the apex of the clavus and especially the cuneus apically, brownish

fuscous; the apex of the second, the third and fourth segments of the

antennae, the head between the eyes and the membrane fuscous,

Length about 22 mm.

132 RECORDS OF THE 8.A, MUSHUL

(Translated from White's Latin description.)

‘Oblong, piceous ferruginous, with a low pallid pubescence; rostrum,

antennae, legs and the hemelytra yellowish testaceous, on the latter the

clayus towards the apex and the cunctis fuscous membrane infuscated,

veins fairly weak; rostrum only attaining the base of the anterior coxae;

the sides of the pronotum strongly narrowed towards the apex, straight

but very lightly curved just before the apex, the posterior part a little

impressed in the middle, the rims orificiorum of the metastethium shortly

curved backwards at the apex, the longitudinal lateral keel is almost

straight and fairly remote from the apex of the rima. Length 2%4 mm.

‘It is distinguishable from the following two species’ (i.e. corlinua

and wiiftei) ‘in that the sides of the pronotum are less distinctly curved

before the apex, the disc is cbsoletely impressed in the middle posteriorly,

the rostrum is somewhat shorter and the different structure ot the orifice

of the metaplenra. The body is oblong piceous ferrugineous, with a

very low pale pubescence. The head is piceous ferrugineous, as long as

wide (with the eves), as long in front of the eyes as an cye, trons (male)

a little wider than an eye. Rostrum pale yellowish testaceous reaching

cnly to base of the anterior coxac, second segment hardly surpassing the

tead. Antennae yellowish testaceous, second segment apically a little

rmore darkened, a little shorter than the width of the head with the eyes.

Pronotiim piceous ferrugineous, sbout twice as wide basally as the median

length, the apical annulus tentious but distinct, sides straight but lightly

curved a little in front of the apex, the lobe outside of the callus: fairly

narrow, the callus posteriorly and laterally demarcated by distinct

impressions, the posterior dise in the middle a little or hardly impressed,

flattish. Scutellim piceous ferrugineous, medially impressed. Hemelytra

‘estaceous, lightly shining, clavus towards the apex and the cuneus

tuscous. The embolium apically about half the width of the apex of

the corium, the inner suture becoming evanescent towards the apex but

there is a strongly impressed lonsitudinal line going right to the apex,

lateral margin straight; on the membrane the veins are very low. The

mexopleurae are densely and lightly transversely striate. Legs yellowish

tea:aceous, almost smooth.’ (Translated rom Reuter’s Latin descriptions

in hia “Monographia”.)

A series of specimens in the South Australian Museum collections

from Fiji are referable to this species which seems to be fairly widely

distributed in the Pacific. From them the following standard measure-

ments have been obtained:—

Head. Length, 260-390; length in front of eyes, 90-140; length behind

eyes, 50-100; length of eyes, 140-210; width across eyes, 310-400;

GROSS—REVISION OF FLOWER. BUGS 133

width of eyes, 90-210; interocular, T0-150; width of collum, 280-350.

Antennae. 1, 70-110; IT, 200-320; TIT, 140-200; IV, 160-260.

Rostrum. I, 70-110; I, 170-270; TI, 160-220.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 310-390; posterior width, 670-830; median

length, 220-330; lateral length, 350-480.

Seutellum. Anterior width, 410-540; median length, 290-430; lateral

length, 330-410.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I wt Ot cl.

I 170-260 400-400 300-400 30-40 40-50 50-90 30

Ir 150-220 310-410 320-430 30-40 30-50 70-90 30

It 170-220 400-500 520-620 30-50 50-90 70-120 30-40

Total length, 1770-2190; total width, 670-870; length abdomen,

870-1,070; length male genitalia, 190-340; length female genitalia, 120-140,

Loc. Distributed widely over the Pacific Islands, the species was first

described from Hawaii. The specimens in the South Australian

Museum are all from Fiji; Viti Levu (A. M. Lea).

Poronotellus whitei (Reuter), 1885.

Fig. 1B

Buchananiella whitei Reuter, 1885: Act. Soc. Sci. Fenn 14, 127 & 129

(681 & 683),

‘Oblong, obscurely yeHowish testaceous, with low yellowish pubes-

cence, shining, hemelytra darker, cuneus infuscated, membrane smoky,

the basal angle interiorly and the base of the veins sordid yellow, the

latter all distinct, well elevated, antennae and legs pale yellowish, the

second segment of the antennae fairly broadly infuscated; rostrum

reaching the anterior coxae, the disc of the pronotum distinctly impressed

in the middle. Length (male) 2 mm.

Habitat. Tasmania, D. Schayr. (Berlin Museum).

Very similar and closely allied to B. confinua but differing somewhat

in. the slightly smaller size, and the more dilute colour. Body more darkly

yellowish testaceous or almost ferruginous, shining. Head as long as

the pronotum, length in front of eyes not much more than length of

an eye. Rostrum just attaining the anterior coxae, pale yellowish, first

segment blackish. Antennae pale yellow, first segment testaceous, the

second as long as the head between the eyes and the apex, the apical

2/5 blackish (last missing in the example), Pronotum apically 2/3

narrower than at the base, apical annulus very distinct, callus fairly

elevated, posterior dise more obsoletely punctate, basally deeply sinuate,

lateral margins completely straight; all more obscurely yellowish testa-

ceous or almost ferruginous. Scutellum almost ferruginous. Hemelytra

134 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Pig. 1. A. Poronotellusa sodalia (White); mole genitalis. B. Porontelits whitet (Reuter); male genitalia

C. QOplobates woodwardi sp. nov,: female, fore femur and tibia. D. Lasielliden glaberrime

Reuter; male genitalia. F. Scolojoscelis poralleluae (Motsch): male genitalia.

darkish yellow, testaceous, almost flat with a fairly dense low pubescence,

the exterior margin and the exterior puncture more deeply coloured to

the apex of the corium; membrane smoky, veins basally and the inner

angle paler, all the veins very distinct but more obsolete apically, the

common areola of the two inner veins a little shorter than the basal

space of the membranal suture between the base of the third vein and

the internal angle of the membrane. Sternum and abdomen ferruginous,

mesosternum laterally punctulate, ventrally and apical margin of the

segments more or less blackish. Legs completely pale yellow, fairly

smooth.’

(Translated from Reuter’s Latin description in his ‘“Monographia,’’)

All the Australian specimens of this genus and the two New Zealand

ones available to me for study seem to belong to this species. From them

the following standard measurements have been obtained.

GROSS—REVISION OF FLOWER BUGS 135

Head. Length 380-500; length in front of eyes, 120-170; length behind

eyes, 50-120; length of eyes, 170-220; width across eyes, 350-430;

width of eyes, 120-170; interocular, 90-150; width of collum, 280-380.

Antennae. I, 80-120; I, 270-400; TIT, 160-210; IV, 190-260.

Rostrum, I, 70-140; I, 180-290; I, 160-210.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 290-400; posterior width, 710-930; median

length, 260-350; lateral length, 410-530.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 380-620; median length, 360-500; lateral

length, 360-510.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsil i i el,

I 190-300 380-500 350-480 30-70 30-70 90-120 30-50

sal 170-240 360-480 400-500 34 50-70 90-120 30

buat 170-260 48C-570 580-590 30-70 70-100 100-170 30-50

Total length, 2,040-2,760; total width, 760-1,050; length abdomen,

900-1,550; length male genitalia, 190-290; length female genitalia, 90-210.

Loc. New South Wales: Bondi near Sydney (K. K. Spence, 1 specimen),

Mittagong (A. M. Lea, 2 specimens). Hornsby (C. Gibbons, 2 speci-

mens), Gosford (2 specimens); Queensland: Cairns district (A. M.

Lea, 12 specimens, one of which was attracted to light), Somerset

{C. T. McNamara, 1 specimen), Mt. Tambourine (A. M. Lea, 1

specimen), 15 mi. W. of Bowen (on Casuarina crisiata = lepidaph-

loea) 24th September, 1950, (EH. F. Riek, 1 spccimen); Victoria:

Wahringa (June 1936, 1 specimen), Grantville (6 specimens); Tas-

mania: Launceston (A. M. Lea, 1 specimen); Lord Howe Island

(A, M, Lea, 12 specimens); New Zealand: Liitle Barrier Island,

Hauraki Gulf (11 December, 1952, T. E. Woodward, 1 specimen) ;

Otaki River south of Levin, Wellington Frovince (30 November 1951,

T, KE. Woodward).

The species is extremely variable both in the standard measurements

where some very large ranges are recorded and in the colours noted,

On the measurements no consistent graup could be detailed, a specimen

having a very high or low reading on one measurement would lie very

near the average in most others, or a series of specimens all.from the

same restrictive locality (e.g. Lord Howe Islund) eften give the same

extreme range as I have quoted for the wiuc'e species.

Because of this and the great varie’ of colour variants one is

tempted to suggest that the species is in process of breaking up into

a series of subspecies and that as yet definite groups have not appeared.

Another noteworthy feature about the species is that out of about

40 examples studied, only four were males.

136 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Material belonging to genera and species dealt with in parts I and II

of the present series but examined subsequently.

Subfamily ANTHOCORINAE

Orius australis (China), 1926

Orius australis (China), synon. Gross, 1954: Rec, S. Austr. Mus., 11 (2),

136-7.

A new series of females have been measured since this species was

mentioned in Part I and the consequent extensions to the range of the

standard data are:—

Head. Total length, 320-380; length in front of eyes, 80-140; length

behind eyes, 50-70; length of eyes, 160-180; width of head across

eyes, 380-410; width of eyes, 90-120; interocular, 140-190; width of

collum, 310-400.

Antennae. I, 70-100; I, 200-220; III, 150-190; IV, 160-220.

Rostrum, J, 70-90; Il, 240-270; It, 155-160.

Pronotum, Anterior width, 330-420; posterior width, 690-810; median

length, 270-350; lateral length, 400-450.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 530-560; median length, 350-410; lateral

length, 400-460.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I 0 UI el.

I 270 350-390 350-360 40 70 =©7%0-S0 40-50

oy 220-230 350-390 340-360 30-40 50-70 80-90 40

Ti 220-260 430-480 520-600 50 80-90 80-90 40

Total length, 1,980-2,250; total width, 690-880; length abdomen,

960-1,290; length ovipositor, 380-570,

Habitat. Queensland: the measured specimens are from a. large series of

Specimens from Carnarvon Gorge, 29 May, 1954; St. Lucia, 30 May,

1951; Tibrogargan Creek, 4 September, 1953; Toorbul Point, 11

August, 1952; and Gratton (by sweeping), 4 March, 1954, all collected

by T. HE. Woodward, University of Queensland.

Orius armatus Gross, 1954

Orius armatus Gross, 1954: Rec. 8. Austr. Mus., 11 (2), 137-8,

One more specimen, unfortunately lacking the abdomen, has been

measured and the alterations to the previously quoted ranges of the

standard data are:—

Head. Length behind eyes, 50-90; length of eyes, 140-190: width of head

across eyes, 360-400; interocular, 180-160; width of collum, 300-360.

Antennae. I, 200-230; If, 170-190.

Rostrum, I, 180-220; TIT, 150-170.

GROSS—REVISION OF FLOWER BUGS 137

Pronotum. Anterior width, 330-400; median length, 270-290; lateral length,

360-400.

Scutellum, Anterior width, 480-530.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi l I im cl.

I 120-210 330-380 310-360 40 70 70 30

sat 170-180 330-360 320-360 40-50 60-90 70 30

m 200-210 420-470 480-520 40 50-90 90 30

The specimen is from Queensland: Carnarvon Gorge, 29 May, 1954.

T, E. Woodward. Woodward Collection.

Anthacoris arctatus (Walker, 1872: Cat. Hem. Het., 5, 153) is

actuaily an Oxycorenus (Lygaeidae) according to distant 1904

(A.M.N.H,, (7) 14, 22).

Subfamily LYCTOCORINAE

Genus Falda Gross, 1954

Falda (Gross), 1954; Rec. S. Austr. Mus., 11 (2), 139) definitely is

not an Anthocorid but belongs rather to the very closely allied Prostem-

minae, usually considered as a subfamily of the Nabidae. Carayon 1950

(Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., (2) 22 (1), 95-101) has emphasised afresh the

very close relationships of the Nabidae, particularly the Prostemminae,

to the Cimicoid group of families. In appearance some of the smaller

species are exceptionally like Anthocorids and it was this very close

resemblance that led the author to first place this species as an Anthocorid,

His attention was drawn to its true position by Dr. Carayon.

It is probab!y synonomous with Alloeorhynchus Fieber and F.

queenslandica may in fact be A. flavolimbatus Kirkaldy, 1907 (Proc,

Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 32, 781) although Kirkaldy’s description is not suffi-

ciently good to determine this.

Oplobates woodwardi sp. nov.

Fig. 1C

Elongate, shining, piceous. Rostrum would surpass somewhat the

base of the head (if complete). Eyes fairly prominent with a long hair

in front on each side, Collum well defined. Pronotum fairly rectangular

but anterior angles not well marked, collar distinct but tenuous. Sides

of pronotum with very fine ciliations and with a long hair at each

posterior angle and one behind each apical angle. Fore and hind margins

concave,

Hemelytra surpassing somewhat the apex of the abdomen which is

equipped with some long hairs. A well developed ovipositor present.. Fore

femora slightly enlarged with six large teeth (30 u) fairly centrally

placed on the inner margin, Fore tibiae slightly curved.

138 RECORDS OF THE 8.4. MUSEUM

The standard measurements from the one female are:—

Head. Total length, 570; length in front of eyes, 210; length behind eyes,

90; length of eyes, 240-260; width across eyes, 480; width of eyes,

140; interocular, 220; width of collum, 360.

Anfennae. I, 140; TI, 500; rest missing.

Rostrum. I, 140; Il, 400; last. segment missing.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 380; posterior width, 770; median length, 330;

lateral length, 500.

Scutellum, Anterior width, 600; median length, 470; lateral length, 380.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I I sael el.

I 410 550 550 —_ — — —

II — 520 520 30 70 120 os

raee — 620 810 — — — —

Tota] length, 2,930; width across abdomen, 950; length abdomen, 1,030;

length ovipositor, 550.

This species is easily distinguished from O. femoralis Reuther by its

smaller size, more slender build, and longer more centrally situated teeth

on the femora.

Loc. Queensland: Brisbane (T. E. Woodward, 1954, Holotype, Female,

Reg. No. I 20,085) in the Department of Entomology, University of

Queensland.

Lasiochilus derricki Gross, 1954

Lasiochilus derricki Gross, 1954: Rec. S. Austr. Mus., 11 (2), 143-5.

Two more specimens of these species have become available to the

author for measurement since the original description. These measure-

ments extend somewhat the ranges quoted for the standard data as

derived from the holotype and the allotype. These new ranges are:—

Head. Total length, 430-500; length behind eyes, 70-20; interocular,

210-260.

Antennae. I, 120-170; If, 330-400; T1, 350-580; IV, 406-450,

Rostrum. 1, 220-260; 01, 600-690; UT, 350-400.

Pronotum. Anterior width. 430-460; median lensth, 560-400; lateral length,

480-520.

Seutellum. Anterior width, 500-520; median length, 380-450; lateral

length, 420-470.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I I int el.

I 310-830 520-580 550-640 30-50 90-100 140-150 50

aa 220-280 520-620 550-590 50 90-100 §=140 60-70

I 240-260 690-760 790-830 50-70 90-120 140-170 70

Total length, 2,760-3,480; width, 1,090-1,330; length female genitalia,

720-800.

GROSS—REVISION OF FLOWER BUGS 139

The two measured specimens are from “leaf mould in rain forest,

Blackbut, South East Queensland, 10 September, 1954, T. E, Woodward.”

In the Department of Entomology, University of Queensland.

Lasiochilus vitiensis Gross, 1954

Lasiochilus vitiensis Gross, 1954: Rec. §. Austr. Mus., 11 (2), 148.

Another female of this species is now available for measurement

and the following extensions to the previously quoted ranges are now

noted.

Head, Length in front of eyes, 140-170; width collum. 330-330.

Antennae. II, 260-280.

Rostrum, I, 90-100; I, 220-260.

Pronotum. Posterior width, 740-810; lateral length, 430-480.

Scutellam. Anterior width, 570-620; median length, 330-400; lateral

length, 430-480,

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I It i cl.

I 260-330 450-480 360-450 Same

at 240-260 480-470 430-520 Same

1 260-310 570-600 670-710 Same

Total length, 2,410-2,690; width, 950-1,000; length ovipositor, 450-530.

Loc. The additional specimen is also from Fiji; Taveuni (May, A. M. Lea).

Subfamily DUFOURIELLINAE

Lasiellidea glaberrima Reuter, 1895

Fig 1D

Lasiellidea glaberrima Reuter, 1895: Ent. Mon, Maz., 31, 172. Gross,

1954: Rec. S. Austr. Mus., 11 (2), 153.

A male specimen referu.kl: to this species is now available for study.

From it the following standard measurements have been obtained.

Head. Total length, 590; leazth in front of eyes, 190; length behind eyes,

100; length of eyes, 240; width across eyes, 430; width of eyes,

120-140; interocular, 190; width of coilum, 350,

Antennae. Missing,

Rostrum. I, 170; Il, 350; I, 260.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 350; posterior width, 740; median length, 360;

lateral length, 470.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 550; median length, 400; lateral length,

430-450.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I i i cl.

I and II Missing

Ti 220-280 640-650 760-770 30 90 140 —

140 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Total length, 2,950; total width, 770; length abdomen, 1,280; length

male genitalia, 290.

Loc. Queensland; St. Lucia, Brisbane (30 June 1951, T. E. Woodward).

Scoloposcelis parallelus (Motsch.), 1863

Fig. IE

Anthecoris parallelus Motschulsky, 1863: Bull. Soc. Mose., 36 (3), 89.

Scoloposcelis parallelus auctt.: syn: Gross, 1954: Rec. S. Austr. Mus., 11

(2) 155.

Two more complete specimens are now in the South Australian

Museum, both are from Rossel Island, Papua, H. K. Bartlett. One of these

is a male and the genitalia are now figured for comparison with those of

other genera.

Cardiastethus aridimpressus Gross, 1955

Cardiastethus aridimpresius Gross, 1955: Rec. S, Austr. Mus., 11 (4),

412-413.

There is a misprint on page 412 in the standard data given for this

species. The measurements for antennal segment I are of course 90-100,

not as quoted 900-1,000.

Cardiastethus lincolnensis Gross, 1955

Cardiastethus lincolnensis Gross, 1955: Rec. S. Austr. Mus., 11 (4), 413.

Another specimen collected by Lea from the holctype locality has

since become available to the author and the measurements derived from

this specimen extend somewhat several of the ranges quoted in the

standard data for the species as derived from only four specimens. The

new ranges are:—

Rostrum. I, 90-170.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 400-520.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 520-490.

Legs. Femur I, 480-520; femur III, 630-690; tibia IIl; 670-740; tarsus

TH, I, 30-50; tarsus TT, 0, 80-90; tarsus TI, OT, 100-120.

Total length, 2,070-3,190.

Measured specimen from Pt. Lincoln, South Australia. A. M. Lea

(Reg. No. I. 20,084) in the South Australian Museum.

REFERENCES

Carayon, J., 1950: Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat.. 2 (22), 1, 95-101.

Champion, G. C., 1900: Biol. Centr. Amer, Rhynch,, 2, 306-335.

China, W. E. and Myers, J. G., 1929: A. M. N. H., 10 (3), 97-125,

China, W. E., 1926: Bull, Ent. Res,, E7 (1), 361-362.

China, W. E., 1933: A.M.N.H., 10 (11), 514-518.

GROSS—REVISION OF FLOWER BUGS 141

Condon, H. T., 1954: S. Aust. Ornith., 21, 17-27 and 41-44.

Cookson, I., 1953a: Aust. J. Bot., 1 (1), 64.

Cookson, I., 1953b: Aust. J. Bot., 1 (3), 462-472.

Cookson, I., 1954: Aust. J. Bot., 2 (1), 52-58.

Cookson, I. and Pike, K. M., 1953a: Aust. J, Bot. 1 (1), 71-82.

Cookson, I. and Pike, K. M., 1953b: Aust. J. Bot. 1 (3), 474-482,

Cookson, I. and Pike, K. M., 1954: Aust. J. Bot., 2 (1), 66-68.

Crocker, R. L, and Wood, J. G., 1947: Trans, Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 71, 91-136.

Distant, W. L., 1904: A.M.N.H., 7 (14), 220-222.

Distant, W. L., 1906: Fauna British India (Rhynchota}, 3, 4-8 (London.)

Distant, W. L., 1910: Fauna. British India (Rhynchota), 5, 295-309

(London).

Dufour, L., 1831: Ann, Soc. Ent. Franea, 2, 104-107,

Fabricus, J., 1794: Ent. Syst., 4, 75.

Fallen, C. F., 1814: Spec. Nova. Hemipt. Disp. Meth., 9.

Fieber, F. X., 1860: Wien. ent. Monats., 4, 270.

Fieber, F. X., 1864; Wien. ent. Monats., 7, 61,

Hahn, C. W., 1835: Wanz. Ins., No. 3, 19-20.

Gross, G. F., 1954: Rec, S. Aust, Mus., 11 (2), 129-164.

Gross, G. F., 1955: Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 11 (4), 409-422.

Kirkaldy, G. W., 1902: In David Sharp’s Fauna Hawaliensis, 127 (Cam-

bridge).

Kirkaldy, G. W., 1904: Entomologist, 37 (498), 280.

Kirkaldy, G. W., 1907: Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., 32, 781.

Kirkaldy, G. W., 1908: Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 33, 374-375.

Lethierry, L., and Severin, G., 1896: Cat. Gen. Hem., 3, 237-252 (Brussels).

Motschulsky, 1863; Bull Soc. Most, 36 (3), 89.

Poppius, B., 1909: Act. Soc. Sci. Fenn., 37 (9), 1-43.

Poppius, B., 1910: Wien. ent, Zeit., 29, 140,

Puton, A., 1886: Cat. Hem. Faune Pal., 43 (3rd Hdition:.

Reuter, E., 1871: Oefv. Vei. Akad. Forh.; 562.

Reuter, E., 1875: Bihang till 8.V.A.K. Handh., 3 (1), 65.

Reuter, B., 1885: Act. Soc. Sci. Fenn., 14, 555-756 (1-201).

Reuter, E., 1895: Ent. Mon. Mag., 31, 170-172.

Spencer, B., 1896: Rept. Horn Scient. Exped. to Central Australia, 1,

196-199.

Tate, R., 1889: Aust, Ass. Adv. Sci., 1, 312-325.

Tate, R., 1890: Handbook of the Flora of Extratropical South Australia.

(Adelaide).

Tindale, N. B.; 1947a: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8 (4), 616-617.

Tindale, N. B., 1947b: Loc. cit,, 619-652.

Tindale, N. B., 1949: Loe. cit., 9 (2), 143-154.

142 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

Tindale, N. B., 1952: Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 75, 25-29.

Usinger, R. L., 1946: Bernice P. Bishop Mus. Bull, 189, 55.

Van Duzee, E. P., 1917: Cat. Hem. Nth. Mexico, 287-297 (Berkely, Cali-

fornia). Issued as Univ. of Cal. Pubs. Bulls., Coll. Agr., Agric., Expt.

Stn., Entomology, 2.

Walker, F., 1872: Cat. Het., 5, 148-161.

White, F. B., 1877: A.M.N.H., 4 (20), 111.

White, F. B., 1878: A.M.N.H., 5 (1), 372.

White, F. B., 1878: Ent. Mon. Mag., 15, 159.

White, F. B., 1879: Ent. Mon. Mag., 16, 142-148.

Wolff, J. P., 1811: Icon. Cim., 5.

Zimmerman, E., 1948: Insects of Hawaii, 3, 169-179 (Honolulu).

PALAEOCRANGON, A PERMIAN ISOPOD CRUSTACEAN

By M. F. GLAESSNER,

Universrry or Apznaipn, Sovrn AvsTRALIA

Fig. 1

Recent work on the Isopod suborder Phreatoicoidea (Nicholls 1943-44)

which dates back to the lacustrine Triassic of Australia (Chilton 1918)

has made it possible to review the position of a hitherto doubtful Permian

fossil from England and Germany, Palaeocrangon prablematicus

(Schlotheim) (Fig. 1a). Bate considered it first as an Isopod (in Kirkby

1857, where the genus was re-named Prosoponiscus, without justification),

and later as an Amphipod (Bate 1859), an interpretation in which von

Ammon (1882) and others concurred. Geinitz (1863) questioned Bate’s

a ¢ sy b

10 mm. 20 mm.

Fig. 1. tre f igeecrangens preblematicus (Scblotheim), Recoustruction from figures given by Rate, 1849,

pl. fe

h—Protamnphixoyus wwiunanattensis (Chilton). Reconstruction, from Nicholls, 1943, fig, 264,

wh rie ot the appendages omitted and hboundarivs hetween abdeninal segments 1-b shown by

olled lines,

reconstruction and later van Straelen (1931) listed the fossil as “incertae

sedis”. Pulaeocrangon has a head with a peculiarly curved trontal profile,

projecting lateral lobes (eyes?), and strongly developed but incompletely

preserved mandibles. There are seven thoracic segments, followed by an

abdomen consisting of two very large segments. The terminal segment

ends in a slightly upturned point. Uropods are visible on its sides. The

body is laterally compressed, with a median ridge on the head and

abdomen.

In Bate’s reconstruction four abdominal somites and a telson are

added which make the fossil appear like an Amphipod but Geinitz and.

in fact Bate himself figured what are obviously the basal portions of the

144 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

uropods on the sides of the second abdominal somite. This observation, in

conjunction with the fact that only the two abdominal segments have

been found, in identical relative position in all known specimens, makes it

clear that the first segment represents the fused abdominal segments 1-5.

A drawing of the only known fossil Phreatoicoid (fig. 1b) in which the

sutures between these somites are omitted, demonstrates the striking

resemblance between Palaeocranyon and the Phreatoicoids. Fusion of

abdominal somites does net occur in recent Phreatoicoids but it is known

in the suborders Flabellifera and Valvifera, It is not a primitive character

and for this reason Palaeocrarigon must be excluded from the Phreatoi-

coidea and placed between therm and the higher suborders of the Isopods,

According to Nicholls (1943-4) ‘the closest relationship (of the Phreatoi-

coidea) within the Isopcds would appear to be with the Circlanidae rather

than with the Asellota. To non-Isopcedan groups, the Amphisopidae seem

nearest akin to the Apseudidae (Tanaidacea), and since these laiter are

presumably representative of a more primitive stock cf the Peracarida,

with possible relationships to the Amphipoda, the resemblance of the

Phreatoicids to the Amphipodan type may be indicative of parallelism

in evolution in forms derived from a commion Stock rather than, as Chilton

has maintained, merely a superficial resemblance due to convergent

evolution”.

The occurrence of the primitive Palceocrangen with pronounced

Phreatocoid affinities in the Permian is in good agveement with these

views.

In a supplementary note to his paper, Nicholls (1944, p. 155-6)

expresses the opinion that Acarholelson forms a link between the

Syncarida and the Phreatogicoidea and that the family Acanthoielsonidae

might even be included in this suborder. This is particularly interesting

in connection with Calman’s stutement (1933) on possible relations of

the Syncarida, through the Acanthoiclsonidas, with Anfhinecocaris which

has characters that could be expected to occur in the ancestors of the

Tanaidacea.

Tt is likely that the Orders Tanaidacea, Isopoda (through Palaeo-

erangor and the early Phreatoicoidea) and possibly also Amphipoda (of

which no definite pre-Tertiary fossi! representatives are known) are

related to early Anaspidacea by way of the Acanthotelsonidae,

REFERENCES

Ammon, L. vy. 1882: Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der fossilen Asseln,

Stimingsber Bayer. Akad. Wiss., 12, 507-551, pl. 1-4,

Bate, C. Spence 1859: On the fossil Crustacean found in the Magnesian

GLAESSNER—A PERMIAN PALAEOCRANGON 145

Limestone of Durham by Mr. J. Kirkby and on a new species of

Amphipod, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 15, 137-140, pl. 6, fig. 1-7.

Calman, W. T. 1933: On Anthracocaris scotica Peach, a fossil Crustacean

from the lower Carboniferous. Ann. Mag. Hist., ser. 10, 11, 562-565,

fig.

Chilton, C. 1918: A fossil isopod belonging to the fresh water genus

Phreatoicus. J. Proc, Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 51, 365-388.

Geinitz, H. B. 1863: Beitrage zur Kenntnis der organischen Ueherreste in

der Dyas (oder permischen Formation zum Theil und uber den Namen

Dyas. N. Jahrb. f. Min., Geol., Pal., 385-388, pl. 3, fig. 1-5.

Kirkby, J. 1857: On some Permian fossils from Durham. Quart. Journ.

Geol. Soe., 18, 214-216, pl. 7, fig. 1-7.

Nichols, G. E. 1943-44: The Phreatoicoidea. Papers and Proc. Roy. Soe.

Tasmania, (for 1942), 1-145, (for 1943) 1-157, figs.

van Straelen, V. 1931: Crustacea Eumalacostraca (Crustaceis decapodis

exclusis). Foss. Catalogus, I, pt, 48.

‘: ee

RECORDS

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Vol. XIII, No. 2

Published by The Museum Board, and edited by the Museum Director

Adelaide, 15th August, 1958 tf

Printed in Australia by W. L. HAWES, Government Printer, Adelaide

Registered in Australia for transmission by post as a periodical Fs

ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS AT SLEISBECK, NORTHERN

AUSTRALIA

BY CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD,

HONORARY ASSOCIATE IN ETHNOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper records aboriginal cave paintings adjacent to the Sleisbeck uranium mining field. This

field is situated on the western edge of the Arnhem Land plateau near the headwaters of the

Katherine River (text fig. 1).

ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS AT SLEISBECK,

NORTHERN AUSTRALIA

By GHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, Honorary Associate IN

Branovocy, Sours Avstraniay Mustum

Plates viii to xv and text fig. 1

INTRODUCTION

This paper records aboriginal cave paintings adjacent to the

Sleisbeck uranium mining field. This field is situated on the western

edge of the Arnhem Land plateau near the headwaters of the Katherine

River (text fig. 1),

The eave paintings of western Arnhem Land, particularly those at

Oenpelli, early attracted the attention of investigators. Spencer, who

saw (hose paintings in 1912, mentioned them briefly in his book (1914,

p. 482). In his next book (Spencer, 1928), he illustrated several groups

of the eave paintings at the same locality (fig. 038-40, pp. 823-4).

Except for two photographs by W. R. Pennifold, published by Tindale

(1928 pl. i, pp. 35-6), no other illustrated records were made of these

paintings until the publication of a survey of the cave paintings at

Unbalanja Hill, Oenpelli and those of the adjacent localities of Cannon

Hill, Inagurdurwil and Obiri (Mountford, 1956, pl. 34-48, fig, 11-55,

pp. 109-181).

he Oenpelli art area is one of the most interesting in Arnhem

Land, if not in Australia. Although there are a number of specialized

forms in the area (Mountford, 1956, pp. 256-264), two forms p redomin-

ate:—(a) a polychrome ‘‘X-ray art’? in which the aboriginal not only

paints what he sees of the external form of the creature, but also what

he knows to be there, but cannot see, i.e., the heart, lungs, intestines,

and skeleton (Mountford, 1956, pl. 39F is typical) ; (b) a monochromatic

art, which shows man in action—running, fighting or throwing spears.

These latter paintings, always in red, and usually in single line, are

supposed, by the aborigines, to be the work of a fairy-like people, called

the Mimi, who still live in the rocky plateau (Mountford, 1956, fig.

144A, C, p. 112).

The writer has seen many thousands of paintings in and around

Oenpelli, and knows of, but has not been able to investigate, other

148 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

groups north of Oenpelli, i.¢., at Coopers Creek, Tor Rock and Nim-

bawah (text fig. 1). It seemed reasonable to suppose, therefore, that

there would be groups of cave paintings along the face of the Arnhem

Land plateau to the south of Oenpelli.

Whilst the writer was in charge of the 1954 National Geographic

expedition, at Melville Island, Dr. George Sleis, a geologist attached

to the Northern Australian Uranium Company, sent a message inform-

ing me that he had found eave paintings near the Sleisbeeck uranium

field. Through the kindness of Mr. T. Becker, the field manager for

@Nimbawah

@Ocnpelli

atherine Gorge

10 20 30 40 50 60 70

[a a ee ee ee |

Fig. 1. Map showing location of Sleisbeck.

Sleisbeck, I was able, on my return to Darwin, to visit the locality and

examine the paintings found by Dr. Sleis.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS 149

There were two groups; site 1, about five miles in an easterly

‘ . 1 * = . * ’ . ’ . * *

direction and site 2, within a mile of the mining settlement, The

paintings at the latter site are few and badly eroded.

At site 1 (pl. viii, A) in one of the residuals of the plateau, a deep

horizontal cleft, a, provided an excellent camping place for the abori-

gines during the monsoon season. In their leisure time the aborigines

had painted a large number of designs on both the ceiling and walls of

that shelter. On some parts of the ceiling, as illustrated on pl. viii, B,

uch overpainting has made it diffenlt to differentiate some of the

designs from others. In other places, where the paintings were more

widely spaced, they tended to appear in groups.

The Inajority of the designs are painted in white, sometimes

outlined in red, although there are a few in solid red; no designs m

yellow or black were seen. This unequal distribution is due probably

to a seareity of the yellow and black pigments.

Unfortunately there were no aborigines in the locality at the time

ol the visit to the paintings. There is little doubt, however, that had

some of the older aborigines been present they would not only have

been able to explain the meanings of some of the paintings, but possibly

to have related some of the associated myths.

Techniques of recording—As at Oenpelli (Mountford, 1956, p.

178), the writer used the camera exclusively for recording, photo-

graphing in both monochrome and colour, On his return to the

southern States, he first enlarged the photographs, then made tracings

from them, From these tracings, Miss Patricia Catcheside prepared

the accompanying illnstrations,

Description or THE PaintTIncs

Plate ix

A is a dancing figure which appears to be wearing a feather

head-dress,

At Cis a woman with a claw-like hand. The right side of her body

18 over-painted by an emu, outlined in white. There appears a goanna

on the right and another emu on the lower left of the main figure.

D is a sea-going crocodile (white, outlined in red), painted in a

simple form of ‘X-ray art.’? The tail is turned sideways to show the

serrated crest,

150 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A eat-fish at E is the best example of ‘‘ X-ray art’’ in the Sleisbeck

eroup, Underneath the main figure is a simple representation of

another fish.

F, G, H and K are curious human figures in positions suggestive

of dancing.

At J are two human figures. The one on the left, a male, has

distended elbow joints which are similar to figures of men and women

depicted on some of the cave and bark paintings at Oenpelli (Mount-

ford, 1956, pl. 51, C and F). These curious ‘‘joint marks’’ have a

wide distribution throughout Oceania (Schuster, 1951). On the right

of the group is a painting of a woman whose limbs are dissociated

from her body. In Australian primitive art, this characteristic 1s not

nnusual, Mountford (1937a, fig. 2), illustrates an aboriginal erayon

drawing from eastern Western Australia in which parts of the body

are dissociated, Boaz (1955, Part 3), also refers to many similar

examples in the art of the Indians of the Pacific Coast of North America,

The legs and arms at J are in the same position as the ‘‘hoeker’?

figures in the Oenpelli area (Mountford, 1956, figs. 29 and 43),

H is an ‘‘X-ray’’ painting of a kangaroo in which the heart and

lings only are indicated. On the right and lower left are small human

figures; on the lower right is a male ‘hocker’’ figure,

Plate x

A, an unidentified snake, partly covers a badly eroded human

fieure, The lower part of the snake is painted in simple ‘X-ray art.’’

B and C are paintings of the long-necked {reshwater tortoise.

D is a goanna, a large reptile which the aborigines value as food.

K almost certainly represents a eat-fish, although the fleshy fenta-

eles at the mouth are not indicated,

Group F consists of an unidentified fish and a headless kangaroo,

G@ is some kangaroo-like creature, while J is a bird; H and N are

unidentified.

At K, the group consists of a squatting man, a fish and possibly a

kangaroo.

L, a thick-tailed lizard, is probably one of the larger skinks, and at

M is a line of nine fish, painted along a narrow ledge of rock.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS 15]

Plate xi

On this plate are several groups of distorted figures whose positions

are suggestive of dancing,

At A is depieted an attractive group of three human beings in

white, outlined in red; two of them are women.

B, a dancing woman with an elongated body, has a bar across her

face (perhaps some form of head-dress), and her breasts, pubes ancl

knees decorated with lines and dots of red paint. C is a woman with

long arms, short body and a curiously shaped head, D is another long-

bodied woman of a type common at both Sleisbeck and at Oenpelli.

Those previously recorded by Mountford (1956, fig. 18J and 32C), are

typieal of the Oenpelli area.

I is a curiously distorted human being with twisted arms and legs.

The hollow-hodied woman at F is similar to those recorded by

Monntford (1938, fig. 36), from Napier-Broome Bay, Western Aus-

tralia, and from the Oenpelli area (1956, fig. 21 and 28A).

G, K, Land N show male figures with much enlarged sex organs,

The limbs of L are in the form of a ‘‘hoeker’’ while those of M have

swollen elbow joints, similar to the ‘‘joint marks’? mentioned earlier.

The dancing woman at H, although somewhat eroded, indicates

considerable movement.

J,amale figure, about ten fect in length, is wearing a head-dress.

The figure has been painted on the lower edge of a projecting horizontal

ledve of rock.

The painting at M is the only example observed at Sleisheck that

bears a slight resemblance to the running figures, either in the Oenpelli

area (Mountford, 1956, fig. 12, 13, 31, 44, and 47), or those in the area

of Napier-Broome Bay, in Western Anstralia (Mountford, 1987, fig. 2).

Plate xii

This plate illustrates an unusual group of human figures, most of

which are painted in white and outlined in red. The man, whose head

has disappeared through erosion, was several feet long. To the upper

right of the man is a long-bodied woman and, at his feet, are two

other well-executed long-bodied women and an unidentified bird. To the

left, opposite the lower group of women is a design in white which

probably represents a man wearing some form of head-dress; on the

extreme left is an imperfect representation of some animal, perhaps

an echidna.

152 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Plate xiii

This plate illustrates some of the animals, birds and reptiles

at site 1.

A is one of the larger wading birds. The artist has drawn the

head inward so that the painting fits into the available space.

B, painted in red, and outlined with white, depicts one of the

wallaby-like creatures. Above the wallaby are two drawings, in red, of

human footprints.

A good example of a fish, painted in ‘‘X-ray art,’’ is shown at C.

This fish is, most probably, the freshwater skip-jack (see Oenpelli

painting, Mountford, 1956, pl. 79A, for comparison). The fish covers

the feet of a rare black wallaby (Osphranter bernardus), identified by

the brush on its tail (Mountford, 1956, pl. 73B, p. 244).

D is a simple ‘‘X-ray’’ painting of a snake, and E, painted on an

exposed vertical face of rock, illustrates an attractive, but somewhat

eroded group of three kangaroo-like creatures. The smallest creature,

on the right, has spines on its tail similar to the painting illustrated

at F. This creature, with spines projecting from its mouth, legs, body

and tail possibly illustrates one of the mythical beings, such as the

Nadubi in the Oenpelli area. When one of the Nadubi observes an

aboriginal travelling by himself, it kills the man by projecting into his

body one of its many spines (see Mountford, 1956, pl. 58B, p. 203).

G, painted in red lines, and L and J, painted in white, are unidenti-

fied kangaroo-like creatures.

The group shown at K were the only paintings at site 2 that could

be photographed successfully. They represent three long-necked fregh-

water tortoises.

Plate xiv

All the figures illustrated on this plate (except H, which is in red),

were painted with white pigments.

At A is a distorted figure, a series of dots, and a small wallaby.

The figures at B, a female and possibly a male, have their legs turned

backwards towards the shoulders in the same manner as the much-

feared Mamandi spirit people of the Oenpelli area (Mountford, pl.

d8B, fig. 29, 45D, p. 197). The woman is holding a spear in her hand.

C is also a distorted man or woman similar to that shown on pl.

xi, C. On the right is an eroded painting of a human figure.

MOUNTFORD-—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS 153

A curious painting of a human figure without a body is shown at

D. The legs and one arm originate at the shoulders; the other arm,

with two hands, starts at the head of the figure. The elbow joints are

enlarged in a similar manner to those of the painting depicted on pl.

xi, N. The designs on either side cannot be identified.

At Bare two men, or women, with hands upraised as if taking part

in a dance. The figure on the right is wearing a head-dress.

The group at F can be seen on the lower left of plate xv. On the

upper left of this group are two ‘‘hocker”’ figures; on the upper right,

is a man with a much enlarged penis and, on the lower left, are

two long-bodied figures with hands interlocked. There are also two

unidentified birds on the lower left. Gand J show two human figures in

a squatting position, the lower left figure having an enlarged penis.

The woman at K, with her limbs in the form of a ‘‘hocker,’’ is wearing

a head-dress.

Plate xv

This complex group, situated on the ceiling of the shelter, is

somewhat separated from the majority of the paintings. Although at

first sight the group appeared to illustrate some mythical story, a

closer examination revealed that considerable overpainting had been

carried out at different periods.

There are arm ornaments hanging from the elbows and upper

right arm of the central figure, A, and decorations at its knees”

and around its head.

At B, C and M are paintings of fish, C being most likely the skip-

jack (see also pl. xiii, C).

D may be either a lizard or a badly drawn man, while on the

right, at HE, is a group of long-bodied men and women.

A man, F, partly obscured by the main figure, is holding in his

hand an object, L, which resembles the goose-wing fan, called norkun,

which the Oenpelli people often depict in their paintings (Mountford,

1956, fig. 47B, 52B, and 53).

At J is a long-bodied man in a sitting position; G and H, the

figures on the lower left, have already been described in association

with plate xiv.

(1) The aborigines of South Australia perform certain ceremonies with bundles of leaves

tied to their knees (Angas, 1847, pl. 5, No. 4).

154 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

DISCUSSION

An examination of the cave paintings indicates that the art of

Arnhem Land changes rapidly from north to south.

In the Oenpelli area, the ‘‘X-ray’’ paintings of creatures and men

are particularly numerous, both in the caves and on the bark paintings.

Although this ‘X-ray art’? is common in the bark paintings of Goul-

burn Island, about sixty miles to the north of Oenpelli (Mountford,

1937), the designs are much simpler and not by any means as numerous

at Sleisbeck, less than a hundred miles south of Oenpelli (text fig. 1).

Further south, the representational art of Arnhem Land is soon

absorbed by the abstract, conventionalized art of Central Australia.

At Sleisheek, with the possible exception of pl. xi, M, there is an

absence of the single-line Minit rumning figures, so characteristie of

some phases of the cave art of Oenpelli,

On the other hand, the long-bodied and distorted figures, dominat-

ing the cave paintings of Sleisbeck, form but a small proportion of

the designs in the eaves at Oenpell. The writer has examined photo-

graphs of similar long-bodied human forms painted on the walls of the

Katherine gorge, about sixty miles south of Sleisbeck (text fig. 1).

Two other interesting figures with a wide distribution in Oceania,

z.e., the ‘hoeker’’ figures and those with ‘‘joimt marks’’ (distended

joints), appear to he present in equal proportions at both Sleisbeek

and Oenpelli.

SUMMARY

This paper records cave paintings on the headwaters of the

Katherine River, and adjacent to the Sleisheek uraninm field in the

Northern Territory of Australia, The paintings are illustrated and

their resemblances to those at Oenpelli and other Australian localities

are discussed.

REFERENCES

Angas, G. F. 1847: South Australia Illustrated.

Boaz, Franz. 1955: Primitive Art.

Mountford, C. P. 1937: Examples of Aboriginal Art from Napier-

Broome Bay and Parry Harbour, Trans. Roy, Soc, 5, Aust., 61.

Mountford, C. P. 1987a: Aboriginal Crayon Drawings from the War-

burton Ranges of Western Australia. Ree. S, Aust. Mus., 6.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS 155

Mountford, C. P. 1939: Aboriginal Decorative Art from Arnhem

Land. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 63.

Mountford, C. P. 1956: The Art, Myth and Symbolism or Arnhem

Land. Records of the Australian-American Expedition to Arnhem

Land, 1.

Schuster, C. 1951: Joint Marks, a Possible Index of Cultural Contact

between America, Oceania, and the Far East. Royal Tropical

Institute. Amsterdam Communication, No. 44. Department of

Cultural and Physical Anthropology, No. 39.

Spencer, W. B. 1914: Native Tribes of the Northern Territory.

Spencer, W. B. 1928: Wanderings in Wild Australia, 2 vols,

Tindale, N. B. 1928: Native rock shelters at Oenpelli, Van Diemen

Gulf, North Australia. South Austr. Naturalist 9 (2).

Rie, SJA. bese Vou, NOTE Pauare VIII

rh.

Chive Pritings gt Sleisheek A, Site: Ts, painted ceilings of bey,

Ha fee patie Lats

NUEEE, Pian IN

Vor.

Hie, SOAS Massey

Iti, SOA. Abbie Vi NUEL Pwr NS

se sebsite.

wee nts ae Mine 2, Sleishect,

Iie S.A. Misia Vow NEIL, Viave NU

Hein SAL Ma stra Vow NEEL, Piste NU

iN QPF Se i

aT oped Ml

LL) PP a)

SST Sy)

Cove Pooaetie ae Sites lod ot) Rleieherd

Rie. SoA, Meshon Vou NUE Puark NIV

Rec. ScA. Meseem Vou NETL, Phare XV

Cave Patitings at Site 1, Sleisheel

REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS

(LEPIDOPTERA HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)

PART VII

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Part VI of this revision was published in these Records, vol. XI, no. 4, 1955, pp. 307-344. The

various genera of the family Hepialidae are being revised as opportunities offer; it is intended when

the series is complete to discuss their mutual relationships.

REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS (LEPIDOPTERA

HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)

PART VII

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.Sc., Sourm Ausrratian Museum

Plates xvi-xxili and text fig, 1-35

INTRODUCTION

Part VI of this revision was published in these Records, vol. XI,

no. 4, 1955, pp. 307-344, The various genera of the family Hepialidae

are being revised as opportunities offer; it is intended when the series

is complete to discuss their mutual relationships,

Genus Endoclita

In Part IV of this Revision (Tindale 1941, v. VII, pp. 18-39) the

Indian members of this genus were discussed. To these are now added

those species whose ranges extend to Indonesia, South-East Asia and

the islands off the coast of Hast Asia as far north as Japan. Twenty-

nine species are discussed, of which fifteen are described and figured as

new.

It may be of interest to note that few members of the genus

Endoclita seem to live east of Wallace’s Line, where the genus Oenetus

tends to replace it. FE. sibelae Roepke 1935, the only reported species,

which may be an exception, is from Batjan. It has not been examined.

In general the species are relict ones and those of adjoining areas,

though clearly related, have, from long isolation, become genetically so

far sundered as to represent distinct species. Even forms seemingly

very close in general appearance may be separated readily on examina-

tion of genital structures and wing venation, ete.

Little is known about their life histories. Of most of the species

only a relatively few examples ever have been taken, and most of

these have been captured only as a result of casual encounter, rather

than after systematic search for them, Even the bringing together,

on loan, of much of the available new material has yielded only meagre

series upon which to base the study.

158 RECORDS OF THE $,A. MUSEUM

The status of the genus Endoclita has been discussed earher aud

there is little to add, Iv some of the Hast Asian species the curious

local expansion of the costa of fore-wing in the region of Se, is at a

maximum; élsewhere it has been suggested that this character cannot

be used with any satisfaction to give separation of those possessing it,

with full generic rank. The valid name Hypophassus is available for

nse by anyone who may see fit to employ it as a subgeneric tag.

Study of Fast Asian species suggests that some small variations

occur in the positions of the eross veins. Thus in the fore-wings of

F. hosei im vein appears just beyond the fork of M, and My, instead of

before it as in the genotype, while similar variations occur also in the

hindwinws of this and other species. There is also variation in the

number of vannal veins in the hindwing, especially in females. In

this sex there is a tendency for the development of two strong veins

after Cu, with occasional traces of a short third one near base of wing.

These veins are probably respectively PCu, 1V and 2V. In other

species only one such vein extends to the margin of the wing. In such

species it seems generally to be that PCu is lost or developed only near

the base of the wing and 1¥V is the strong vein extending to the margin

while 2V may be redueed to a short stub near the hase.

There is alsa some variation in the dimensions of the posterior

legs, which in general tend to be reduced in size and to possess a

specialized plume of hairs on the tibiae, In some species these hairs

are found to be concealed in a fold of the integument of the thorax, in

others the plume is large and in all available specimens is found fully

displayed. Because of the poor condition of most of the specimens

which are taken it is not always clear whether the difference hetween

concealed and displayed male plumes is a real phenomenon or whether

it is due merely to accidents of preservation, However the varying

degree of rednetion in the size of the posterior leg is of significance,

The genus is notable, in some species, for the enlarged eyes of the

male and oceasionally of the female. In this character they resemble

members of the Australian and New Guinea genus Qenetus in which

there also occurs every degree of enlargement of the male eyes. In

that genus however it seems to reach a Maximum.

The tendency to have enlarged eyes is not the only link between

these two genera and it may be correct to say that Oenetus and.

Endoclita may be rather closely related with a tendeney to replace each

other east and west of Weber's or of Wallace’s Line. Both genera

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 159

belong to that section of the family in which the larvae have a timber-

boring habit and live principally in relatively wet, forested country,

with a high, and year round rainfall. In general they are very vulner-

able to periods of aridity. Some species extend to the temperate zone,

as in Northern Japan and Tibet, but their true home seems to be in the

wet tropies where their habitats appear to range from sea level near

mountain ranges to altitudes of at least 6,500ft,

In the females of some species the anterior gonapophyses of the

genitalia appear to be in some measure different on the two sides of

the body, The condition is not unique in the family, for in some South

American species the genitalia are so completely asymmetrical that it

is hard to reconcile the two sides.

In this genus earlier authors were often confused by the similari-

ties of wing marking in the species. They tended to pick out examples

possessing the same general wing patterns, as species and later workers

have tended to accept these wing pattern assemblages as apecies,

Only through the study of characters of the genitalia has it beeu found

that the several forms often found standing together in collections

under one name label can be sorted out as discrete species. There

sometimes has been uncertainty surrounding the identification of the

one which should be linked with the original name and description,

lence in the preparations for the present Revision most of the type

specimens of the earlier described species have had to be sought out

and re-examined, Only in the ease of H. avnae perhaps does some

doubt remain as to the species intended to be described.

The Indian species of the genus were keyed in the earlier part of

this revision. The following key, based almost entirely on the genitalia,

gives only the Hast Asian forms dealt with in this paper. It is of

necessity incomplete because the opposite sexes of some species are

still nnkown.

KEY TO THE BAST ASIAN AND INDONESIAN SPECIES

OF ENDOCLITA (based principally on the genitalia)

Mates

1. Tegumen of genitalia with a posterior, ventrally

directed sping .. .. -- 6+ e- ee ee ee ee ee ee marginenotatus

Teeumen of genitalia without a posterior, ven-

trally directed spine .. ©. 6. 6. ey ee ee ee ee 2

160 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

2. Tegumen in lateral view with ventral margin

unarmed . Serpe a

Tegumen in ‘lateral view with. ventral ‘margin

armed . , 6p Sg latat maha date ae

3. Margins of see not widely apart at pos-

terior extremity . :

Margins of tecumen widely apart ‘at ‘posterior

extremity 8404 Sion eka oe be he

4. Tegumen with more than ie longitudinal keels

Tegumen with only two longitudinal keels

Posterior margin of 8th sternite with distinctly

anvulate iiédias notch .. .

Posterior margin of 8th sternite without dis.

tinetly angulate median notch ..

6. Posterior aa of tegumen not touching pos-

teriorly .

Posterior margins of tegumen touching poster-

iorly .. -

7. Teguminal margin curved .. rue (he's

Teguminal margin straight .... 2... .. 2...

8. Teguminal margin forming an S curve .. .. ..

Teguminal margin not forming an §S curve

”

Sternite 8 strongly transverse ..

Sternite 8 nearly as long as wide ..

10. Ventral lips of tegumen slenderly chitinized . .

Ventral lips of tegumen stoutly chitinized .

11. Margins of tegumina parallel in posterior half

(anterior half concealed) .

Margins of tegumina diverging from anterior

to posterior extremity (anterior half not con-

@Galbd). sy. fr £3 5-8. $5. 2 nce ace aie whl eS oct ok

12. Spines on tegumen serially arranged ..

Spines on tegumen not serially arranged ..

13. Spines on tegumen in a double group ..

Spines on tegumen in a single group .. ..

14, Serial spines confined to anterior half of tegu-

PUTT 06 Fo Se Re he opie ee on do

Serial spines along most of margin ..

paraja.

javaensis

EXCVESECENS

sinensis

camphorae

aikasama

sericeus

aurifer

broma

salvazt

14.

aroura

raapt

tosa

15,

16.

17.

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS

Posterior half of tegumen strongly dilated .

Posterior half of tegumen not dilated .

Highth sternite with hind margin not notched

Kighth sternite with hind margin notched . .

Tegumen in lateral view with anterior spine ..

Tegumen in lateral view without anterior spine

Males either unknown or not keyed :—

annae, sibelae, dirschi, niphonica, williamsi,

kosemponis, wereja, hosei, kara.

Femaues

Posterior margin of 7th sternite convex

Posterior mare of 7th sternite in some meas-

ULE CONCAVE .. we ee ee ee ee

Highth sternite ‘Sonmet than wide yal ue Notd ot. su lat

Kighth sternite as wide as or wider than ‘Jong

Anterior gonapophyses broad and not pointed

Anterior gonapophyses narrow and pointed ..

Seventh sternite more than one half as long as

wide .. f

Seventh sternite Jess than c one

wide . aes

Ventral. portion of Sth sternite sidt wide nt

anterior margin .. . .

Ventral porupe of 8th sternite wide at anterior

margin... ......-. : rai8

Highth sternite with posterior half dilated.

Highth sternite with posterior half not dilated

half as long as

se ee ee . . * 8 +

. Anterior gonapophysial plate with spine at pos-

tero-median angle .. .

Anterior gonapophysial plate ‘without spine at

postero-median angle .. step Wpa

Anterior gonapophyses as large flat plates at

Anterior gonapophyses as small irregular plates

Posterior gonapophyses dilated at posterior

extremity ....

Posterior gonapophyses not dilated at posterior

extremity .. ....

aurata

crenilimbata

niger

davidt

aroura

sericwus

aurata

topeza

davidi

kosemponis

camphorae

eXCTESCENS

161

warawita, tara,

162 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

10. Ventral eminence of 8th sternite much on

than wide ...... warawita

Ventral eminence of. 8th satnite: abouts as wide

as long .. .. ...... 11

11. Posterior senandphysés sthennated doaterioviy williamst

Posterior Sida aachis broadened poster-

far tur §.y) 8a Poole the te ase ats

12. Sides of th sternite paKatiates vtete ae ae te Era

Sides of 7th sternite conver arging towards

anterior margin .. .. .. 6... 2.0.2. -. 4. hoset

13. Anterior gonapophyses longer tian aia .... kara

Anterior gonapophyses wider than long ...... iereja

Females either unknown or not keyed :—

marginenotatus, paraja, javaensis, sinensis, aikasama, aurifer,

broma, salvazi, raapi, tosa, mger, crenilimbata, annae, sibelae,

dirschi, niphonica.

Endoclita marginenotatus (Leech)

This species was referred to and figured in the earlier part of my

revision (1941, p. 22 and fig. 15); there is nothing fresh to add; it is

keyed herein so that all the known Chinese species are mentioned.

Endoclita paraja sp. nov.

Plate xvi, fig. 1 and text fig. 1

Male: Antennae threadlike, short; head with eyes only moderately

large, head, thorax, abdomen, except base, fuscous brown, legs and base

of abdomen paler; posterior legs of moderate size, with large tibial

plume of orange-yellow hairs. Forewing straight to Se., then strongly

excavate before tip, apex faleate, termen and inner margin somewhat

sinuate; im vein touching M forks at both ends, wing colour chocolate-

brown with paler, somewhat iridescent transverse bands in anal and

terminal areas and a triangular patch at about one-half length of

cell; a cluster of three small black-rimmed silvery-white spots around

junction of rm vein with M, and another set of three at basal M fork,

two other tiny spots half way between rm vein and termen; a notable

dark patch at point of obsolescence of Cu., also traces of dark marks

along costa. Hindwings with costal margin slightly eoneave, apex

subfaleate, termen angled, im vein as in forewing; vannal region with

PCu obsolete except at base, 1V and 2V both present, the latter a short

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 163

Fig, 1-3. 1, Endoctita parujo Tindale, Borneo (7), male genitalia, veniral

aspect, 2. Hadoclita exercacens (Butler), Japan (Loomis), male genitalin,

ventral aspect. 3. Female, Mt. Takao, genitalia, ventral aspect.

vein: tip of wing coloured as in forewing, with a single black-rimmed

silvery spot just below R. near tip; rest of wing an iridescent purplish-

blue iu many angles of light, gray in others; the termen somewhat less

iridescent, vannal region and base clothed in grayish-brown hairs.

Wines beneath with traces of dark-brown spots along costa, otherwise

dull iridescent purple, or grayish-brown, depending upon angle of view.

Wing length 40 mm., expanse 85 inm.

Loc. Unknown (?Borneo) a male in Tring Collection at British

Museum.

The only known example was found among Tring Museum dupli-

eates with deficient locality data, but is believed to have come from

Bornev,

The male genitalia (fig. 1) have the 8th sternite transverse with a

median large noteh and two smaller side notehes on the posterior

margin. The tegumen is large, in lateral view it shows rather an

evenly cnrved silhouette with smooth margin; in ventral view the two

teguminal plates are carried close together in the midline and show side

ridgea, one of which terminates anteriorly in a strong process; the

harpes, so far as they may be seen, are simple, with a brush of forwardly

directed hairs.

164 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

In the form of the genitalia this species bears some distant relation-

ship to #. gavaensis but that species has a far more delicately formed

tegumen, without lateral keels and strong antero-lateral processes.

The species is characterized by the presence of the most brilliant

purplish-blue, almost violet flush yet seen on the hindwings of any

member of the genus. <A similar example in the British Museum,

which I have not been able to study in detail, may belong to the same

species, It is labelled as from Borneo, and this may well confirm the

place of origin of the specimen deseribed above. It is similar to

FE, tosa of Java in its wing patterns but the genitalia show a double

ridged tegumen instead of the simple one of that species; the hind

margin of the 8th sternite shows three notches instead of one,

Endoclita javaensis Viette

LEendoclita javaensis Viette 1950, Bull, Inst. roy, des Se. nat. de Belgiqne,

26 (41) p. 1; fig. 1 (genitalia),

Loe. Wast Java: Nongkodjadjar, Tengger, 1 Dec, 19383 4,000ft.

(type, a male, unique, expanse 77 mm., in coll. Institute royal des

Sciences naturelles de Belgique, I.G. 10.706).

This species has not been examined.

There is stated to be a costal swelling on the forewing; and the

male genitalia, as figured, have the tegumen furnished with two

anteriorly directed blunt processes and a ventral keel which presents a

simple outline. So far as may be judged by the description and figure

this species is nearest to 2, paraja, which differs in having large antero-

lateral processes on the tegumen and a very robust ventral keel.

Endoclita excrescens (Butler)

Plate xvi, fig. 2 and text fig, 2-3

Hepialus excrescens Butler 1877, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, xx, p. 482

(female, not a male); Butler 1878, Tl. Lep. Het. B.M. ii, p. 20, pl. 27,

f. 7.

Phassus aemulus Butler 1877, Ann, Mag, Nat. Hist. xx, p. 482 (male);

Butler 1878, Ill. Lep, Het. B.M. ti, p, 20, pl. 27, f. 8.

Tepialus excrescens Leech, 1888, Proce. Zool, Soc. Lond., p. 645.

Hepialus excrescens Staudinger, 1892, Romanoff, Mem. Lep. (8), p. 289.

Phassus heret Pfitaner, 1912, Seitz Macrolep. ii, p. 488, pl. 54a (nec.

Fixsen).

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 165

Phassus excrescens Pfitzner and Gaede 1933, Seitz Macrolep. x, p. 842.

Male. Antemae thread-like, tapering, of abont 22 segments, pale-

brown; eyes normal; head rough-haired; head, thorax and abdomen

above pale brown, bases of antennae, sides of thorax, and lee's a richer

orange-brown; posterior legs not reduced; a large tibial tnft of bright

orange hairs present. Forewings with costal margin rather straight,

ascarcely noticeable elevation in region of Se, ; termen and inner margin

forming a single even curve; im vein touching forks at both ends;

wing colour warm brown with pale erayish-fawn marking and bands,

many outlined narrowly in black. Hindwings with costa sinuate and

narrowly bordered with colour and markings of forewing; rest of wing

dull gray with only slight traces of a bronzy lustre when viewed from

special angles; inner area with only Cu, and oue vannal vein present, as

in the genotype, Wing length 34 mm., expanse 74 mm-

Female, Similar to male in colour aud markings. Posterior legs

slightly reduced in size but without specialized plumes on tibiae, Fore-

wings with im vein shortly before fork of M, and M,. Hindwing with

Cu, Peu, 1V and 2V veing all well developed and extending to margin,

Wing length 42 mm., expanse 90 mim.

Loc. Japan: Yokohama (type, a female, collected by Jones,

expanse 69min, and a male, same details, expanse 76mm., described as

type of aemulus, in British Museum), Yokohama, 25 Sept., 5 Oct. and

9 Oct, 1910; and Oiwake (Berlin Miuseum); Sugita, 11 Oct. 1889 and

Kagoshima, Noy, 1898 (Tring Collection at British Museum), Useuitoge

near Mt, Asama, 3 Ang, 1916; Karnizawa, Jnly 1914 (W. J, Holland)

and Mitsukuri (United States National Museum) Tohetsu, Hokkaido,

Sept.Oet. 1908 (A. KE. Wileman); Kyushu (J. H, Leech Collection in

British Museum) Mt. Takao, 26 Sept. 1926 (Cornell University Collee-

tion) Ussnri; Chibaroosk, 2 Ang. 1911, a female (Tring Colleetion at

British Musenm),

The male example particularly described arid figured in this paper

is trom Japan, probably Yokohama, and is from the Dr, H. Loomis

Collection. Ut has been coupared and agrees very exactly In size,

colour and markings with type of vemulus, which is the opposite sex

ol the type of #. excrescens, which was wrongly considered also to be

a male, but is a rather impoverished female. In the Berlin Museum

there are two similar males, from Yokohama, presumably also taken

by Dr. Loomis, although they are variously ascribed to ‘‘Laomis’’ and

Laom**, The present author reealls with appreciation the encourage-

ment he reeeived from Dr, Loomis in his bovhood collecting efforts in

Japau in 1914-1915.

166 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

A female from Mt, Takao is described, it also has been compared

with the types, and differs from the type female only in its more normal

size.

The male genitalia, as drawn without disseetion (fig. 2) show the

8th sternite notched in subrectangular fashion along its posterior

margin, in lateral view the tegumen is well chitinized with an evenly

arcuate silhonette, not armed with spines, in ventral view the tegumina

are seen to widely diverge towards the posterior extremity.

Despite marked differences in wing pattern and shape the male

genitalia suggest a relationship with /, crenilimbata, his relationship

is probably real, and may tend to support a view that the degree of

expansion of the costa of forewing aft Se, is not a good character lor

generic separations in this geuus.

‘The female genitalia of fhe Mt. Takao specimen (fig. 3) have the

7th sternite more than half as long as wide and the posterior margin

somewhat coneave. The Sth sternite has a rather wide and rounded

ventral mediau prominence about as long as wide, its posterior margin

is smooth and polished; above it and extending more posteriorly

is a rather regose projection about half as wide. The anterior gonapo-

physes are rugose, that on right side much wrinkled and with a pit, that

on left side more rounded in outline. The posterior gonapophyses are

wide and are embraced within a roll of the integument of the sternite,

which forms a hood, open below, over the ovipore,

The resemblances of the female genitalia are with those of 2.

camphorae, but they are abundantly distinet in the dimensions of the

anterior gonapophyses which are small irregular plates in this species,

rather asymmetrical on the two sides, whereas in FE, camphorae they

are large smooth plate-like members,

Endoclita sinensis (Moore)

Plate xvi, fig. 3-4 and text fig, 4

Phassus sinensis Moore, 1877, Aun. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4) xx, p. 94.

Phassus herzt Fixsen, 1887, Romanoff, Mem, Lepid, iti, p. 335, pl. 15,

fiz. 3,

Male. Antennae short, filamentous, ochreous brown, Head, thorax

and abdomen gravish-fawn, legs darker; posterior legs somewhat

reduced, with a large tibial tuft of ochreous-yellow hairs, Forewing

with costa slightly sinnate, no costal dilation at Se,, apex rounded,

termen and inner margin rounded; wing colour grayish-fawn with a

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 167

smoky-brown patch near the base of the cell enclosing a white spot;

there is a second elongate white spot, rimmed with black, lying in cell

and at one end cut aerogs by the junction of rm vein and M,; three

obscurely paired sets of black spots on costa, these have pale fawn

borders; traces of one, occasionally two small, black-margined white

spots in a localized brown patch just below apex. Hindwings dull

vrayish-fawn; vannal region with Peu reduced to a vestige near base

of wing; 2V present as a short vein. Wing length 35 mm., expanse 76

mm.

Female similar to male; wings broader and more rounded, posterior

legs without specialized hairs, costal spots of forewing tending to be in

sets of three; subapical white spots present. Wing length 56 mm.,

expanse 79 mm.

Loc. China: Shanghai (type, a female, described as a male,

expanse 60 mm., Moore Collection, 94-106 in British Museum) ; Chekiang

(80-123 in British Mnseum, males, one described above, also a female

same details, expanse 97 mm., described by Moore); Kiukiang, June

1887, A. K. Pratt, Tring Collection, in British Museum).

Korea: Gensan June 1887, J. H. Leech (female described above,

in Leech Collection at British Museum, 1900-64), Pung Tang, 18 miles

N.E. of Seoul, 29 June (the type of herzi, a female, expense 80 mm.,

in. British Museum),

Fig, 4-6, 4, Eadoclita sinensis (Moore), Kiukiang, male genitalia, ventral

aspect. 5, Endoclita eamphorae (Sasake), Tesio, male genitalia, ventral

aspect. 6. Female, Yokohama, genitalia, ventral aspect.

168 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The male of this species has not been previously described, since

the type from Shanghai, although described as a male, is a female. I

am indebted to Mr. W. H. T. Tams for sending for stndy, at very

short notice, ihe pair figured here, A rather dilapidated male example

from Kiukiang is in the Tring Collection; it has vein M, of forewing

ending abruptly at about one-third the distance between the fork of M,

and M, and margin. This is probably an individual variant.

Tt is diffienlt, on wing markings alone, to separate E. sinensis from

E, caumphorae of Japan; in both the sexes are similar and the colour

and markings generally indistinguishable, Only when the genitalia are

compared do yalid differences appear. In the male at least these are

quite of specific value, hence it is to be assumed that 2. sinensis on the

Asiatic mainland and 2. camphorae in Japan are either old races or

Members of a superspecies which have remained so long apart, gene-

tically, that they must be given the status of separate species, Hf,

kosempouts also is clearly related, but is more distinetly separated by

wing markings and colour differences as well as by characters of the

genitalia, All three may be considered to form a species group in the

sense of Zeuner (1943),

The male genitalia in this species (fig. 4) have the 8th sternite very

robustly formed, with a broad and deep hind marginal notch and rather

square cut outer angles, ‘he tegumen is strongly chitinized and black,

with the two side pieces rolled over towards the middle as if forming

a longitudinal eylinder with a medium ventral slit; the figure shows

(rather inadequately) the general appearance, When viewed from the

side that portion of the tezumen which most nearly meets the opposite

side in the mid-line is seen to he smoothanargined and to form a

rounded eminence. The female genitalia have not heen examined,

In addition to the material studied in detail at Adelaide and at the

British Museum, examples from the following localities have been secu

and most probably belong to the species -—

Korea: Gensan (June and July). China: TIehang (June,

Kuikiang (June) and Hongkong.

The type of Phassus her2t was briefly examined in the British

Museum. If seems unquestionably to be a direct synonym of /. sinensis,

The figure in Seitz Macrolepideptera, ii, 1912, plate 54a, supposedly of

this species, belongs to E. excrescens,

The expanse of the wings of the described ‘‘male’’ type example,

was given by Moore as 2} inches (¢.¢, 54 mm.) and of his female as

33 inches (89 mm,). It is dificult to reeoncile these dimensions with

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 169

ones made by myself on the British Museum specimens, which gave a

measure of 60 mm, and 78 mm. respectively (23 and 34 inches). It

should also be noticed that Moore speaks of the light coloured markings

on the forewings of his species as bright yellow, whereas those of the

examples seen seem to be silvery-white. It is not clear whether the

present day appearance is due to the post-mortem changes of the past

70 odd years since they were captured, variation in several examples,

differences in the quality of the light in which they were examined for

the purposes of the original description, or a combination of all these.

Endoclita camphorae (Sasake)

Plate xvii, fig, 1 and text fig, 5-6

Phassus camphorae Sasake, 1908, Tokyo Nippon Konchu Kw. To,, 2,

p. $1, ‘

Phassus camphorae Matsumura, 6000 Insects, p. 1024 fig. (female).

Phassus camphorae Pfitzner and Gaede, 1933 Seitz Macrolep. x, p, 843,

pl. 78e.

Male, Antennae thread-like, with about 22 segments, bright ochre-

ous yellow, Head with eyes moderate; head, thorax and abdomen

grayish-fawn, legs slightly darker; posterior legs moderate in size,

with a tibial tuft of dull ochreous-brown hairs. Forewings with costa

straight, slight traces of an elevation at Se,; apex rounded, termen

rather straight, inner angle and inner margin well rounded; venation as

in genotype, wing colour grayish-fawn with paler bands and markings;

three pairs of black spots along costa, each outlined in pale fawn; a

white spot above basal M fork, enelosed in black; another white-centred

black spot just above Cu, at one-half; also a group of three or more

in outer part of cell near rm vein, Hindwings with venation as in geno-

type, colour grayish-fawn with apex well rounded, sub-hyaline; a few

darker markings along costa; a faint purplish tinge on wing when

viewed from certain angles, Wing length 34 mun., expanse 73 mm.

Female. Similar to male but colour a pale shade of grayish-lawn,

long hairs at base of abdomen and on meso- and metathorax paler still;

hindwings hyaline; vannal region with PCn developed only at base,

2V well developed, extending to one-half inner margin. Wing length

35 mm., expanse 76 mm.

Loc. Japan: Tesio, Hokkaido (June and July); Hakodate, Hok-

kaido (June and July); Junsai Numa, Hakodate (28 July); Yoshino,

Yamato-ken (5 July); Yokohama; Shimonoseki (July); Ishizuchisan,

Shikoku (26 June); Satsuma (May); Kagoshima, Kyushu (August).

170 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

So far as can be ascertained with material available at Adelaide

&, camphorae is confined to Japan. It resembles closely in wing

patterns E, sinensis but has markedly different male genitalia,

The male has fhe genitalia (fig. 5) with the posterior margin of

the 8th sternite slightly and broadly excavated, with an arcuate area

ot rough surface forming a median lip. The tezumen when viewed

laterally has the ventral margin smooth, and forming « conical emin-

ence; in ventral view the tegumen is seen to be rolled inwards towards

the centre line anteriorly, giving an S-shaped contour to the ventral

margin,

The female genitalia (fig. 6) drawn from a rather small example

expanding only 64 mm., from Yokohama, show a large 7th sternite

with an anterior sinuate fold and slightly excavated posterior margin;

the 8th sternite has two parts, a laterally compressed and longitudin-

ally grooved yentral portion and a narrower, parallel-sided, ventrally

grooved dorsal trough-like portion which is of considerable length.

The anterior gonapophyses are angulate pieces with a rounded swelling

at the posterior extremity; the Integumeut of the sides of the ultimate

segment form a hood over the ovipore.

The examples described are a male from Tesio (July, 1901) in the

Tring Collection at the Brilish Museum, and a female from Yokohama

(Dr. Hl. Loomis). The type, from Southern Japan, has not heen

examined; the specimens under examination agree very well with the

figure by Matsumura,

Endoclita aikasama sp, nov.

Plate xvii, fig. 2 and text fig. 7

Male, Antennae (wanting in only available specimen). Byes

large and dilated but in lateral view not concealing whole of head.

Head, thorax, legs and abdomen venerally dark ehocolate-brown, some

lighter hair on the metathorax, posterior legs only slightly reduced, a

large plume of specialized ochreous-yellow hairs on tibia, Forewings

with costa sinuate, very slightly dilated at Se,, apex faleate, termen and

inner margin in one continuous eurve; im vein only shortly before

fork of M, and M, and extending ta fork of M, and M,; wing colour

ehocolate-brown with slightly eurved transverse darker lines between

the veins, some incorporating tiny flecks of cream, margined with

black; a group of three creamy-white spots at basal M fork and another

group around the junction of rm vein and M,; a somewhat more con-

spicnous brown patch where Cu, vein becomes obsolescent; in addition a

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 171

larger pattern of more shiny seales showing a purplish sheen in certain

lights, and forming transverse bands along inner margin and across

outer third of wing; also forming patches along costa. Hindwing with

costa sinnate, termen and inner margin angulate; tip of wing brown with

wing pattern of forewing; rest of wing dark gray with a strong purplish

flush when viewed from many directions; basal fourth of wing clothed

in dense fawn hairs, Wings beneath dull brown, with traces of wing

pattern evident only along costa, Wing length 68 mm., expanse 144 mm,

Loc, Java: Vulkan Gede, 1894 (collected by Prilwitz, from Staud-

inger Coll., No. 759, in Museum f. Naturk., Berlin), Examples similar

to this type specimen were in the Tring Museum, in 1936, as niger

RKeeke, which they are not, When compared direetly with the type of

Tig. 7-9. 7, Endoclita aikasama Tindale, Vulkan Gede, male genitalia,

ventral aspect. 8 Mndoctlita sericeus (Swinhoe), Java, male genitalia,

ventral aspect. 9. Type, a female, Mulang, freehand sketeh of genitalia,

ventral aspect.

pfitznert which is a form of F. niger, the type of FE. aikasama proved

to be much larger and with different marking. At the time | formed

the opinion that it might be only a giant form of Ff. niger, and con-

specific, but closer examination and comparison with the example of F,

niger described elsewhere in this paper has convinced me that they

represent two species, not even closely related.

172 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

This is by far the most robust of the Indonesian species of the

genus and the female, when taken, should be rather large. The rich

brown colour, the faleate wings and the striking masses of golden

yellow coloured plumes on the tibiae of the posterior legs are highly

characteristic,

The genitalia have the hind margin of the 8th sternite broadly

excavate and sinuate with a slight median notch (fig. 7). The tegumen,

in ventral view, shows a slightly serrated margin which is reflexed

outwards so that in lateral view the outline of the tegumen is smooth

and apparently unarmed. It thus contrasts with EF. niger in which the

margin is not reflexed and consequently in lateral view the margin

appears finely serrate.

Endoclita sericeus (Swinhoe)

Plate xvii, fig. 3 and text fig. 8-9

Phassus sericeus Swinhoe 1901 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) vii, p. 469.

Male. Antennae threadlike, short, of twenty-two segments, bright

ochreous brown. Head with eyes large, from the side concealing most

of head except the frons, metallic gold in colour; head, thorax and legs

dark brown; abdomen, and particularly the long hair at base at abdo-

men, much paler, posterior legs normal, a very large tibial plume,

bright ochreous yellow. Forewings with costa somewhat sinuate, only

a trace of an expansion at Se,, apex faleate, termen and inner margin

well rounded; wing colour dark chocolate-brown with obscurely defined

paler fawn streaks and bands, particularly an irregular one from near

costa at four-fifths to inner margin at two-thirds and traces of another

parallel to termen; a semicircular pale fawn patch in cell at basal M

fork, two black rimmed silvery-white spots with traces of a third, and

a cluster of tiny similar spots at junction of rm vein and M,. Hind-

wing's with costa slightly sinuate, termen well rounded, vannal area with

PCu reduced. 1V and 2V present; wing colour grayish-fawn. Wings

beneath with a series of brown spots along costa, elsewhere grayish-

brown, in certain lights with a pale but strong bronzy lustre. Wing

length 30 mm., expanse 66 mm.

Female. Similar to male; posterior legs not plumed. Wing length

30 mm., expanse 66 mm.

Loc. Java: Malang (Type, a female, 66 mm. in expanse, not

a male as described, No. 1901-178 in British Museum); Soekaboemi;

Nongkodjadjar (4,000ft., Dec. 1930, A. M. K. Wagner); Java 1891

Fruhstorfer Coll. (allotype male in United States National Museum, ex

Brooklyn Museum).

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 173

The male from the United States National Musenm Collection

described above may be regarded as the allotype, since the type is a

female.

The male genitalia (fig. 8) have the &th sternite wider than long,

with the posterior margin waved, The tegumen has the ventral margin

smooth; in ventral view it is sinuate, with the two halves diverging to

the rear.

Fig. 9 wives a freehand sketch of so much of the female genitalia

as may be seen on the type. The 8th sternite has a wide upper portion

broadly rounded posteriorly and a broad ventral portion, also well

rounded. The anterior gonapophyses are suboval in outline.

Although #. javaensis was taken at Nongkodjadjar in the same

month as this species, it seems to be quite distinct.

This species seers to fall closest to EZ, gmelina of Burma in the

forin of the genitalia, although the resemblances may be in part aeci-

dental; in wing form, notably the absence of a costal expasion on the

forewing, it is distinct from EH, gmelina and falls closer to BE. damor

from which it can be readily distingnished by the form of tlie Sth

sternite of the male, which is not deeply notched as in that species,

Endoclita aurifer sp. nov.

Plate xviii, fig. 1 and text fig. 10

Male. Antennae very short, threadlike, ochreous; eyes large,

brown, thorax brown, darker on the sides, abdomen pale brown,

posterior lews with a moderately large tibial plume of golden yellow

hairs. Morewings relatively broad, faleate at tip and with costa moder-

ately dilated about Se,; wing colour dull purplish-brown, markings in

the form of linked circular ochreous patches forming spots between the

veins, euch spot contains several tiny ochreons-white-centred brown

spots; the ochreous markings are most concentrated in a triangular

patch enclosed between the area bounded by costa, from near hase to

just beyond Se,, a line from there to near fork of M, and Cu,a, and a

line along vein Cn, to near base; another large ochreous patch at apex

and several series of spots running parallel to termen; silvery-white

spots much larger than the white ones on rest of wing occur just before

middle of wing and again at end of cell; there are traces of several

very dark orange spots along Cu;. Hindwings subfalcate, termen

angled, dull purplish-brown, ochreous at tip. Wing length 37 mm.,

expanse 78 mm.

174 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSEUM

Loc, Java: type a male, unique, in British Museum (ez Tring).

This male is » very striking one. Its relationships are probably

with the next species, #. broma with whieh it shares an almost identical

basic wing pattern, although the wings are somewhat longer in propor-

tion and the colours are unlike.

The male genitalia so far as they may be seen from helow without

dissection (fig. 10) have a tegumen which has on its margin no arma-

ture of spines, the tegumen is drawn out anteriorly into a depressed

projection which passes inside the posterior margin of the 8th sternite;

the posterior part of the tegumen is laterally expanded,

In the form of its genitalia this species, like EB. sericeus, shows

relationship with FE, gmelima of Burma, but the 8th sternite is quite

Fig. 10-12. 10. Endoolita aurtfer Vindale, Java, male genitalia, ventral

aspect. 11-12. Endoclita broma Tindale. 11, Male, Djembher, genitalia,

ventral aspect. 12, Female, Mt, Andjasmara, genitalia, ventral aspect.

different, having merely a slightly concave posterior margin instead of

a highly complex outline as in that species.

This species may be close to FH. javaensis, an Kast Javanese species

taken at 4,000ft. at Nongkodjadjar in Tengger, but appears to he dis-

tinct by reason of the more widely separated posterior portions of the

tegumen., The sinuate line of the keel of the tegumen, when viewed

from the ventral] side, also contrasts with the relatively straight margin

figured by Viette for that species.

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 175

Endoclita broma sp. nov.

Plate xviii, fig. 2-3 and text fig, 11-12

Male, Antennae lacking in available specimen; eyes moderately

dilated, head and thorax dull brown, abdomen pale grayish-awn darker

at tip; posterior legs slightly reduced, with deep orange tibial plume.

Forewings relatively broad, faleate at tip, only slightly dilated on

costa at Se,, colour grayish-fawn with rich chocolate-brown markings,

generally in the form of linked cireular discs, in basal half of wing

uniting to form a triangular patch, also two broad bands running

parallel to termen in distal half of wing; the fawn areas and chocolate-

brown spots are marked with numerous fine dark lines running hefween

ihe veins. here are two small silvery-white spots, margined with

black, below middle of cell and a group of mneh smaller ones near

apex of cell. Tindwings grayish-fawn with costa near tip bearing

three brown patches. Forewing length 35 mm,, expanse 76 mm,

Female, Hyes moderately dilated, ochreous-brown, Head, thorax

and abdomen dull brown; wings as in male, background colour pale

fawn; eireylay markings as in male, but dark brown, with contained

spots represented only by linear black marks; silvery-white spots

present in cell, as in tale, but smaller and black-edged; traces of four

darker marks below Cu,. Windwing dull grayish-brown with traces of

a subterminal series of darker cireular marks appearing like ‘*water-

marks.’? Wing length 88 mm., expanse 80 mim.

Loc, Java: Djember, Besoeki Residency 1,300-2,500 feet, Méllin-

ger, 1892 (type, a male in British Mnseum, ex 'lring) ; Mt. Andjasmara,

Malang district, November and December 1828, G. Overdijkink (allo-

type female in Joieey Coll. 1930-75, at British Museum), The sexes are

associated with some confidence,

The wing pattern of this species, from Hastern Java, is similar to

FP. aurifer, with which it shows relationship. Ti is possible that it is

the dark extreme form of that species but in view of some seeming

differences in the genitalia, so far as they may he compared, I prefer

to regard it as a separate species.

In the only male available for study the genitalia are deeply

retracted, the tegumen so far as it appears is unarmed, the two sides

being placed widely apart; the 8th sternite is evenly coneave on its

posterior margin. When compared with 2. aurifer the terminal seg-

ment of the body is very differently formed in this species (fig. 11).

176 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

In the female genitalia the 7th sternite has the posterior margin

entire and transverse, the anterior gonapophyses are flat plates,

rounded at the tips, but coming to a blunt point near the middle of the

inner margin, The 8th sternite has its posterior margin triangular with

a rounded point (fig, 12).

The female genitalia show resemblanees with those of FE, qgmelina

but the anterior gonapophyses are much broader and the shape of the

7th sternite shows little resemblance to its form in that species.

Endoclita salyazi sp. nov.

Plate xviii, fig. 4 and text. fig. 13

Male. Antennae short, threadlike, with about 29 segments, with

incipient traces of peetination and a few fine hairs, eyes dilated; head,

thorax except sides, which are brownish-black, and abdomen and legs

browimish-fawn, posterior legs with a conspicuons plume of golden

yellow hairs. Forewings with costa straight and a very conspicuous

dilation at Sc,; wing tips faleate, termen rounded, slightly concaye at

inner angle, colour pale grayish-fawn with markings slightly more

browi; a series of generally paired small black spots along costa, a

larger one near inner margin and two series of black-bordered silvery-

white spots at middle and at end of cell, also a scattered group of small

ones in apical fourth of wing, the intensified brown colour of cell out-

lines a triangular patch of grayish-lawn near the middle of the wing.

Tindwing with costal margin sinuons and deeply coneave at about

three-filths its length, apex slightly faleate, termen dilated in anterior

half, slightly concave at hind angle; markings at wing tip as in forewing,

rest of wing grayish-fawn with faintest traces of a purplish sheen from

some angles of view. Wing length 48 mm.,, expanse 92 mm,

Loc, Laos: Thado, 6 June, 1915, R, Vitalis de Salvaza (type a

male, unique, in Cornell University Colleetion, lot $41),

This species appears to be related to #. paraja and EB. tosa, parti-

enlarly in the form of the wings, and in the placing of the conspicnous

black spot on the forewing, but the strong dilation of the costa and the

far larger eyes, which from the side conceal most of the head save the

palpi and the frons, are very evidently different, The male genitalia

(fig. 18) in ventral view show what appears to be the Sth sternite as

wider than long with a sinuously margined posterior lip. The tegumen

has a straight ventral keel and the keels of the two sides diverge

markedly toward the posterior extremity of the body.

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 177

Fig. 15-15. 13. Rudoelita salvazi Tindale, Thado, male gonitalia, ventral

aspect. 14-15. Endoclitu aroura Tindale. 14, Male, Lebong Sandai, goni-

talia, ventral aspeet. 15. Female, Lebong Sandai, genitalia, ventral aspect.

In the key the male genitalia of this species fall into a section

entirely different from /. tosa and F, paraja, The former is distinctive

because of the parallel arrangement of the teguminal margins and the

conspicnous spines along the margins. £. paraja differs in the much

larger tegumina mecting firmly in the midline instead of diverging, and

is distinetive in the form of the posterior margin of the Sth sternite,

Endoclita aroura sp. nov.

Plate xix, fig. 1-2 and text fiz. 14-15

Male. Antennae very short, threadlike, composed of about 22

subspherical segments; eyes moderate; head and thorax densely rough-

haired, dark brown, abdomen and legs greyish-fawn; a plume of yellow

hairs on posterior tibia, Forewing with costa straight, slightly con-

cave beyond Se,, apex round-pointed, termen well rounded, wing colour

fawn with a faint purplish iridescence, markings in the form of tiny

brown streaks, each tending to surround a patch composed of a few

yellow scales; a large patch of yellow seales at end of cell, Hindwings

with costa concave, apex blunt-pointed, wings broad, grayish-fawn with

a dull purplish iridescence, except near apex, whieh has the pattern

of the forewing. Wing length 25 mm., expanse 53 mm.

Female. Much larger than male, form of wings and markings

similar, hindwings with purplish iridescenee even less evident. Wing

length 50 mm., expanse 105 mm,

178 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Loc. Sumatra: Lebong Sandai, Benkoelen (male type and allotype

female, Joicey Collection in British Museum 1929-122) ; another female,

same details, ‘but expanding 92 mm.

Lebong Sandai is in the south-west of the island of Sumatra. The

circumstances of the taking of the specimens have not been recorded,

This species is reminiscent of Indian species such as FE. rustica

and its allies, The absence of costal dilation on the forewing, and the

wing form itself strengthens the resemblance, but the male genitalia

are of different form and it is clear that they are at best but distantly

related species.

The male genitaha (fig. 14) have an Sth sternite much wider than

long. The tegumen is armed with irregular teeth set in a double row

at the anterior end; viewed from the ventral aspect the keels of the

tegumina diverge widely towards the posterior extremity.

The female genitalia (fig. 15) so far as they may he seen without

dissection in the allotype example, show the 7th sternite with a eon-

vex posterior margin coming to a blunt point in the midline. The

anterior gonapopliyses are broad digit-like plates, largely covering the

heavily chitinized 8th sternite, whose posterior extremity appears as

a rounded eminence, deeply incised on its ventral side,

Two dried eges, presumably of the species, were found adhering

to the hairs of the tip of the abdomen of the female, They suggest that,

when newly laid, the eggs were smooth-shelled und almost spherical,

with a diameter of 0.7 mm,

Endoclita raapi sp. nov.

Plate xix, fig. 3 and text fig. 16

Male. Antennae simple, threadlike, eyes dilated; head, thorax and

abdomen dark grayish-brown, posterior legs with a moderate sized

ochreous tibial plume. Forewings with region of Se, not noticeably

dilated, but the margin excavated beyond; wing tips feebly faleate,

choecolate-brown with traces of dark purplish-brown arkings find

patches, particularly a semicireular patch lying behind R vein at about

middle of cell, helow which are two brown margined angular silvery-

white spots; at the end of the cell there is another group of three small

silvery-white spots; in the terminal half of wing there are numerons

obseure markings between the veins, a few of these take the form of

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 179

small light-centred brown spots; near the apex other of these markings

are tinged with ochreous brown. Hindwings grayish-brown, a few

traces of ochreous brown and darker brown mottlings at the wing tip.

Wing length 35 mm., expanse 74 mm.

Loc. Nias (Raap) type, a male, in British Museum (ex Tring)

and male paratype in South Australian Museum.

This species is rather inconspicuous. It shows no signs of irides-

cence even when the wings are moved in a bright light. The bright

chocolate colour of the forewings with the obscure traces of ochreous

rings each of which is dark margined and centred, are reminiscent of

E. aurifer from Java, but in that species the tegumen of the male is

not armed with spines along its antero-lateral margin.

16 17 18

Fig. 16-18. 16. Endoclita raapi Tindale, Nias, male genitalia, ventral

aspect. 17. Endoclita tosa Tindale, Tengger, male genitalia, ventral aspect.

18. Endoclita aurata (Hampson), Laos, female genitalia, ventral aspect.

The male genitalia of the figured specimen appear to have suffered

injury to part of the tegumen of the right side. For critical detail

chief reliance should be placed therefore on the tegumen of the left side

(shown on right side of fig. 16). This shows a series of spines on

the antero-lateral portion; what appear to be the harpes are small,

inconspicuous swellings barely projecting beyond the posterior mar-

ginal limits of the 8th sternite.

180 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Endoclita tosa sp. nov.

Plate xix, fig. 4 and text fig. 17

Male, Antennae simple, threadlike, very short, ochreous coloured

and composed of about 22 segments. Head wide with prominent eyes,

in lateral view almost concealing outline of head. Head, thorax above,

abdomen and legs grayish- fawn, becoming more gray on abdomen;

posterior legs reduced and with a yellow tibial plume. Forewing with

costa straight, a slight dilation at Se,, termen and inner margin well

rounded in a single curve; apex pointed, slightly faleate; termen well

rounded; wing colour pale grayish-fawn with dull brown markings and

suffasions, notable a broad V- shaped area in middle of wing and a

broad band composed of obscurely circular dises of brown each with a

few yellow scales at their centre; this area extends along termen from

apex to inner margin at three-fourths; two series of black-bordered

white spots, one near notch of V-shaped brown patch and the other at

r-m vein, a notable black spot inwards from two-fifths inner margin.

Hindwings with costa rather straight, apex blunt-pointed, termen

dilated and hind angle slightly excavated; traces of forewing pattern at

tip of wing, rest dull gray, smooth- scaled, and showing a dull purplish

iridescence in some angles of light. Wing length 37 mm., expanse

80 mm.

Loc. Java: Singolangoe, Tengger (5,000ft., April 1934, F. P. A.

Kalis. Type a male, unique in British Museum, ex Tring).

This species is close to E. paraja which is believed to be a Bornean

species, but it differs in the less intense purplish flush of the hindwings,

in the different shape of the 8th sternite, and in the tegumen, which

has, in ventral view, a series of lateral spines on its margin, instead of

being unarmed when viewed from this aspect.

The male genitalia (fig. 17) have the 8th sternite wider than long,

with the posterior margin somewhat excavated in the midline. The

tegumen is strongly chitinized and the ventral keel rolled slightly out-

ward and armed with a series of teeth. The harpes are long, and so

far as may be seen without dissection, are digitiform and clothed with

laterally directed hairs.

Endoclita aurata (Hampson)

Plate xx, fig. 1 and text fig. 18

Phassus auratus Hampson, 1892, Fauna Brit. Ind. Moths, i, p. 321

(male).

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 181

Endochta aurata Tindale, 1941, Ree. S. Austr. Mus., 7, p. 37, pl. 7,

f. 69 (male).

Female. Antennae filamentous, of about 20 segments, dark brown

with paler annular rings. Eyes large, in lateral view concealing most

of head, brilliantly reddish-gold in colour; head, thorax and legs

yellowish-fawn, abdomen grayish-fawn, posterior legs slightly reduced ;

no tibial plume. Forewings with costa straight, apex, termen, and

inner margin well rounded. Wing colour pale brown with paler fawn

transverse bands obscurely margined with darker brown; a patch of

seales just below apex and an area along costa from near base to two-

thirds with golden yellow scales which show a brilliantly golden and

metallic gloss from certain angles. Hindwings with costa sinuate,

apex well rounded, termen and inner margin angled, colour pale

grayish-fawn, showing a pale bronzy lustre from some angles. Wings

beneath pale grayish-fawn without markings. Wing length 25 mm.,

expanse 53 mm.

Loc. Laos: Thadua. 8 Oct., 1915, R. Vitalis de Salvaza (allotype

female, in Cornell University, lot 841, sub. 266). Burma: Bernardmyo,

5,500-7,000ft. (type, a male, in British Museum).

The male was redescribed in my 1941 paper. The female which is

now confidently associated with it, extends the range of the species from

Burma to Laos,

The female genitalia (fig. 18) have the 7th sternite almost as long

as wide, with the posterior margin convex in the midline and showing

slight lateral concavities; the 8th sternite is large, wide at the anterior

end and evenly rounded posteriorly with a raised rim when seen in

ventral view; the anterior gonapophyses are slender and spine-like,

ending in a sharp point.

This species shows some relationship with E. sericeus of Java,

and is superficially like Nevina aboe but is readily differentiated from

the latter by the typical Hndoclita venation.

Endoclita niger (van Eecke)

Plate xx, fig. 2 and text fig. 19-21

Phassus niger van Hecke, 1915, Zool. Med. Leiden, i, p. 248.

Phassus pfitenert Gaede 1933, Seitz Macrolepidoptera, 10, p. 843,

pl. 100a,

182 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Male. Antennae threadlike short, ochreous. Head with eyes

moderate; head, thorax, abdomen and legs pale fawn; posterior legs

somewhat reduced, a specialized plume of hairs present but concealed

ina fold of the metathorax. Forewing’ with costa sinuate; a moderate

costal expansion at Se,; wing tip strongly faleate; im vein from close

to fork of M, and M.; ground colour several shades of pale brown

arranged in circular patches between the veins with a tendency for each

ring to have a small ochreous-white spot outlined with fuseous; more

conspicuous ereamy-white spots at basal M fork and at junetion of

rm vein with M,; a slight infusecation runs along vein R, nearly to

termen, Hindwings with im vein directly from lork of M, and M., only

one vannal vein (1V) to margin, PCu obsolete exeept at base, wing

texture subhyaline, colour gray exeept at tip where the forewing pat-

tern is present; the gray parts of the wing are perhaps brilliantly

iridescent in life but only traces of a purplish sheen remain in the

specimen deseribed. Wing length 39 mm., expanse 83 mm.

Loe. Java: Vulkan Gede (Prilwitz, 1894),

The type of 1, niger has not been examined, but there seems little

doubt about the synonymy given above.

From the expanse given (140 mm.) if is possible that the type is

a female, not a male, as deseribed, A female of close to the given

dimension, from Western Sninatra (ea Frulistorfer Collection), is in

the Tring Collection,

FE. atkasama also from Vulkan Gede, and deseribed In this paper

Was originally associated with this speeies. However it is much

larger (146 tm. expanse), uid is not the sume species. The two

differ in colour and in the form of the genitalia.

The type of £. pfitznert from Western Java in the Berlin Museum

has been examined. It is larger than the male example deseribed

above (expanding 121 mm.), but otherwise it agrees very well with

it. It also agrees with the figure published in Seitz Macrolepidoptera

10 (plate 100a) save that its wiity tips are little more faleate than shown

there and, as in the described specimen, there are many fine yellow

marks forming elongate ocellate centres to each dise-like marking ou

the forewing, The hindwing is more a dull purplish-gray than the

colour indicated in the figure. The antennae are shown as far too long

in the Seitz figure,

Viz, 20-21 show two views of as much of the male genitalia of

the type example of pffenert as may be seen without dissection. The

teeminen in lateral view (fig. 21) is evenly arched posteriorly, the

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 183

Fie, 19-21. 19, Hndoclita niger (van Eecke), Vulkan Gede, male genitalia,

ventral aspect. 20-21, Type male of 4. pftenert, free hand sketches of

male genitalia, ventral and Interal aspects,

margin has a slightly serrated appearance from spines which project

laterally from the ae dly turned over lip of the tegumen, as may

be seen in ventral view (fig. 20). The third figure (fig. 19) is a ventral

view of the genitalia of Oe ingle example from Vulkan Gede described

above. This shows more of the anterior portion of the tegumen than

is evident in the type of FE. pfiteneri. The contour of the tegumen

from below is a trifle more angulate than in that example.

Endoclita crenilimbata (Le Cerf)

Plate xx, fig. 3 and text fig. 22-25

Hypophassus crenilinbata Le Cerf 1919, Bull. Mus. Nat. D’Hist. Nat.

Paris, 25, p. 471.

Male. Antennae (wanting in example studied), head with eyes

relatively small; head, thorax and legs pale fawn in colour with a

narrow black tine on side of thorax; posterior legs slightly reduced,

with a very large tibial plume of oechreous-fawn hairs, abdomen eray,

slightly paler near base. Forewings with costa strongly expanded

at Se, apex with trace of faleation, postero-lateral angle of wing

with crenulated indentations between the veins; im vein nearer to

fork of M, and M, than in the genotype and tonching M, after fork

of M, and M,; wing colour pale ochreous fawn tending to a grayish-

fawn on terminal third; indistinct traces of black lines enclosing

gray patches of scales along costa and notably in apical third of wing.

Hindwings with im vein as in forewing, vannal region with two well

184 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

developed veins after Cu.; these are probably 1V and 2V, with vestiges

of a PCu at base, between Cu, and 1V; wing colour dark gray without

any marked metallic sheen even when viewed from many different

directions. Wing length 43 mm., expanse 93 mm.

Loe. China: Yao Gi, 4,000-5,000ft (male in United States National

Museum); Pin-Fa, Kwaichau, R. P. Cavalerie, 1918 ( type, probably

a female, not a male, in Paris Museum).

The specimen described as the male is in the collection of the

United States National Museum and has been kindly loaned to me for

study, along with the other material not yet described.

This species is unmistakeable because of the crenulated margin

of the forewings in the region of the anal angle, and the dilation of the

costa at Se,, which in this species probably attains almost a maximum.

In the original description the type example was said to be a

male but later on in the paper is indicated to be a female; since the

posterior legs are indicated to be ochreous gray and no mention is

made of the very large plume of ochreous hairs it is probable that it is

a female.

The male genitalia (fig. 22-23), so far as visible without dissection,

show the 8th sternite broadly excavated on its posterior margin. The

tegumen has a strong ventral keel, finely serrated on its margin, the

two sides diverge strongly towards the posterior extremity.

Fig, 22-24, 22-23. Hndoclita crenilimbata (Le Cerf), Yao Gi, male genitalia,

ventral and lateral aspects. 24. Hndoclita topeza Tindale, Kiang Kong,

female genitalia, ventral aspect.

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 185

In the form of its genitalia this species seems to fall into the

same section of the genns as F. excrescens from which it differs

greatly in the degree of expansion of the costa of forewing as well

as in wing pattern.

Endoclita anmae (Le Cerf)

Hypophassus amnae Le Cerf, 1988, Bull. Soe. ent. France, 38, p, 181.

Loe. South China: vicinity of Tatsienlu, 1910. Type deseribed

as a male, expanse 96 mm. (ew collection of Charles Oberthur in

collection of R. Biedermann). This species has not been examined.

From the deseription it would seem to fall near ZB. erenilimbata

since the inner margin of the forewing has (hree crenulations between

M, and 1V. No costal dilation of the forewing is mentioned and the

hindlegs are not indicated as armed with « tuft, On the other hand

there is mention of some crenulation on the margin of the hindwing

and the presence of silver spots on the forewings. The expanse of the

wings is given as 96 mm. If the sex determination is correct this must

be a very distinct species; if however it should prove to be a female

it is just possible it could be the same species as I. crenilimbata.

Endoclita topeza sp. nov.

Plate xx, fig, 4 and text fig. 24

Female. Antennae (wanting in available specimen). [ead with

eyes moderately large, but in lateral view not concealing whole of

head; head, thorax, abdomen and legs dull oclireous fawn, Forewings

with costa straight, traces only of a costal dilation af Sei, apex well

rounded, termen rather straight, immer margin well rounded, wing

eolour fawn with grayish-fawn suffusions and pale brown markings

between the veins enclosing paired oval areas of ground colour; five

black spots on costa, each with a diffused fawn-coloured centre and

three groups of black-bordered creamy-white spots, small ones near

apex, a group of two or three with one larger spot at r-im vein and

two smaller spots in cell at about one-third its length, Hindwings

with costa concave in middle, apex well rounded, termen straight and

hind margin well ronnded, small traces of the forewing pattern at

apex, rest of wing ochreous fawn, somewhat brighter than forewing,

Wing length 51 mm., expanse 109 mm,

Loc. aos: Kiang Kong (Xiang Khong) 14 April, 1920, RB.

Vitalis de Salvaza (type. a female) unique, in Cornell University

Collection, lot 841, sub. 267).

186 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

This specimen stood in the Cornell University collection nnder

the name Phassus stgnifer but it is not that species. [ am indebted

to Dr, W. T. M. Forbes for the opportunity of studying it. Through

his kindness T have held it for some years. Its closest relationship is

with BE. chalybeata, both in wing markings and in the form of the

female genitalia, The last named organs differ in the more robust

character of the table-lee-shaped Sth sternite, which contrasts with

the more truly spatulate form met with in FE. chalybeata, 1t may be

regarded as the eastern representative of a small species group

embracing 2, chalybeata and the present form,

The female genitalia have the 7th sternite about as long as wide,

its posterior margin broadly coneave; the Sih sternite is narrow at the

anterior extremity and even narrower towards the middle of its length

before it swells into a large spade-like portion with strongly dilated

sides. The anterior gonapophyses are somewhat irregularly shaped

plates and the posterior gonapophyses are well chitinized members:

a narrow dise-like portion near the midline is separated hy a deep

constriction; the integument ol the sternite forms an incomplete hood

over the ovipore,

Endoclita davidi (Poujade)

Plate xxi, fig. 1 and text fig, 25-26

Hepialus davidi Poujade 1886, Bull. Soc, Ent. France, 6 (vi) p. xcii

(male and female),

Hypophassus excrescens Viette, 1948, Musée Heude, xii (8) p. 84 (nee

Butler).

Female, Autennae (wanting in example deseribed), eyes normal,

moderate; head, thorax, apical half of abdomen above, and nnderside,

also legs, bright orange-brown; basal half of abdomen above, dark

brownish-fawn; posterior legs small, without notable tibial plume,

Forewing with costa straight save for a rounded eminence at Se.

termen gently rounded in a eurve continuous with inner margin; im

from just before fork of M, and M, and touching fork of M, and M,:

wing colour orange-brown with traces of darker orange-hrown spots

along costa and in a triangular patch in middle third of wing, traces

of ochreous-yellow marks outlining some brown spots, also {wo areas

flushed with yellow, one in cell and the other along inner margin below

Cu,,; there is another yellowish band, broken into reetangular patches,

running slightly obliquely to the termen; internally from this is a

row of raised brown spots, some margined with darker ochreous-brown.

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 187

Hindwings with costa straight, termen evenly rounded, anal area with

veins Cu,, 1V and 2V to margin, Peu represented only near base;

wing colour dark gray, the scales being long and hair-like except along

the termen, where they are orange-brown, and near apex, where the

colour and markings are like those of forewing. Wing length 48 min.,

expanse 103 mm,

Loe, Tibet: Moupin (type a male, and allotype female in Mus.

Soe, Mint, de France; not examined), China; Chia Kou Ilo (two males,

one female, in British Museum). Formosa: Suishako, 1907; Oryusan,

TIpinehiku 6,500ft., A, i, Wileman, 24 Nov,, 1908.

The fernale example from Suishako, described above and figured,

resembles very closely ones from Chia Kou Ilo standing in the British

Museum under this name. Some doubts may remain as to the proha-

bility that specimens from Formosa and ones from Moupin are likely

to belong to the one species, but the deseriptions fit very well, The

ochreous forewings and dark hairy-sealed hindwings with ochreous

marging are highly distinctive. T do not follow Viette in regarding

this species as synonymous with F, excrescens.

Pfitzner, in Seitz Macrolepidoptera, i, p. 484, regarded the species

as a form of MWepialus nebulosus Alpheraky but the three males and

the female example standing in the British Museum are certainly

members of the genus E'ndoclita and possess a distinct costal expansion

at Se, of forewing so that they eannot fallin the genus Hepialus, The

male genitalia show relationship with those of FE. crenilimbala trom

which the species differs markedly iu wing form. Fig. 25 is based on

a sketch of the tegumen of one of the British Museum male examples

of F, davidi from Chia Kon Ho, as viewed from the side. It, shows a

long, gently arcuate and finely serrated margin to the tegumen, in

eontrast with the shorter, slightly exeavate margin found in the

related F, crenilimbata (fig. 25).

The Chia Kou Uo examples were taken by A. IE, Pratt at 1,700ft.

in July, 1889. The female closely resembles the one deseribed above

from Formosa; its abdomen had been detached and remounted ventral

side nppermost, bat is unlikely to be ineorrectly associated, An example

from Canton, China in the United States National Musenm has the

costal expansion very conspicuously developed and another from Suifnu

in the same collection shows an even more extreme development of

this feature. Since these specimens were not critically studied it is

possible they do not represent the one species.

188 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The genitalia of the Formosan female (fig. 26) show the 7th

segment semicircularly excavate on posterior margin; the ventral

portion of the 8th sternite is produced posteriorly into a long digiti-

form process, this is narrower than the dorsal portion of the same

seyment, which, from a wide root extends backwards to a similar pro-

cess, whose ventral surface shows indications of grooving. The anterior

Fig. 25-27. 285-26, Bndaoclita davidi (Poujade). 25. Freehand sketch of

genitalin of male from Chia Kou Ho, in British Museum, lateral aspect.

26, Female, Suishako, genitalia, ventral aspect. 27. Zndoclita kosemponis

(Strand), Rokki, female genitalia, yentral aspect.

gonapophyses are large oval plates with the inner margins slightly

erenulated. In the example under examination there is a newly laid

egg in the channel formed by the folding over of the terminal segment.

This egg is 0.55 mm. in diameter, spherical with a small micropyle at

the end directed anteriorly; it is cream coloured.

Endoclita kosemponis (Strand)

Plate xxi, fig. 2-3 and text fig. 27

Phassus signifer var kosemponis Strand 19 , Arch. Naturg. 81, Abt.

A. 12, p. 150.

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 189

Female, Antennae short, threadlike; eyes moderate, in lateral

view not concealing outline of head; head, thorax, abdomen and lees

grayish-fawn, Forewings with costa straight, apex not acute, termen

rounded; wing colour light grayish-fawn with dark grayish-brown

inarkings, principally a large triangular patch in centre of forewing

embracing a black bordered creamy-white spot near end of cell; a

series of grayish-brown spots alone costa and delicate semi-lunate

hight fawn areas, margined by grayish-brown, principally along inner

marginal and terminal portions of wing. Hindwings with costa con-

cave, apex well rounded, termen rounded, a slight concavity at hinder

angle, pale grayish-lawn without markings save for traces of two

darker spots along costa near apex, Wing length 44 mm., expanse

94 mm,

Loc, Formosa: Kosempo (H. Santer 1911, type, a male and allo-

type female, same details but captured June 1907, iu Deutsches Intom.,

Mus., Dahlem): Rokki (L. Gressitt) 13 May 1934, a female, described

above, in Cornell University Collection, and another, same details,

but taken 17 May 1954, in South Australian Museum.

1 am indebted to the authorities of the Deutsches Entom, Museum,

at Dahlem for the photographs of the type and allotype reproduced in

this paper. I examined the examples briefly in 1986 but failed to note

the dimensions and Strand’s original description is not available to me.

The female deseribed is in the Cornell University collection.

Through the courtesy of Dr, W. T. M. Forbes I wag able to compare

it directly with the type female in Berlin.

The male is similar to the female described above, grayish-brown

in colour; in neither sex are there any indications of a costal swelling

ou forewing. The head is slightly wider in the male than in the female

but in both the eyes are of normal size,

This species is abundantly distinct from MH. signifer of Assam with

which if has little in common. Its principal relationships are seen

inely with EL. damor and HB, chalybeata which possess the same basic

wing patterns and equally are without costal expansion on the fore-

wing.

The male genitalia could not be examined in detail during my

visit to Berlin, but inspection of the type showed that the hind margin

of the 8th sternite was widely and deeply notehed in a sweeping curve

while the teguiuinal margins of the two sides, in ventral view, appeared

to diverge widely from the anterior end to the middle of their length

and then to converge again, leaving a subrectangular median space.

190 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Female genitalia (fig, 27) based on the example from Rokki, have

the 7th sternite transverse, the eighth modified into a ventral heart-

shaped median plate with a shallow central groove and a more dorsal,

posteriorly produced flat projection narrowly grooved along its mid-

line; the anterior gonapophyses are large and plate-like with a spine

or distal projection on the postero-median extremity. There is a pair

of slender, distally hair-covered processes which may be the posterior

eonapophyses. In some details the female genitalia are reminiscent of

Prdoclita damer wut in that species the anterior gonapoplyses are

irregular in shape, the postero-median projection of the 8th sternite

is not grooved for its whole length, aud what appear to be the posterior

gonapophyses are broad plates,

Endoclita warawita sp. noy,

Plate xxi, fig. 4 and text fiv, 28

Female. Antennae wanting in only example available, eyes moder-

ate, head, thorax, except a lateral brown line, and base of abdomen

above, pale ereamy-brown with scales of fine velvety texture, abdomen

somewhat darker (mueh abraded in the type example). forewings

short and wide, costa with a marked dilation at Se,, wing tip strongly

faleate; im vein directly from ork of M, and M.; wing colour warm

brown. Wing pattern of usual Hndoclita type; eight riel brown patches

on costa, each in part outlined with black and white lines; three groups

of silvery-white spots one at junction of rm vein and M, and three-

fifths the distance between rm vein and M,, a second around fork of

M, and M,, and the third between R, and. M, at three-fifths the distance

between rm vein and wing margin; the pattern on the imner margin

and the transverse lighter bands are marked with scattered silvery-

white seales which give the wing a slightly glistening appearance.

Hindwings strongly angled, slightly faleate at tips; veins with Peu and

1V both well developed, also basal fraces of 2V; apex of wing narrowly

brown within a darker spot, texture of rest of wing sub-hyaline, with

dusky-brown seales, strongly opaleseent, and violet or purplish-brown

when viewed from most angles. Forewing length 86 mm., expanse T6

minh,

Loe. North Borneo: Mt, Kana Bal, 1,200 to 1,500 metres (Water-

stradt) 1894. Type, a female, unique, in Museum f. Naturk,, Berlin,

marked as part of Staudinger Collection, No. K739,

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 19]

This species is readily distinguishable from P, ijereja which occurs

in the same locality, because of the marked costal expansion of the fore-

wing, The origin of im vein on M, and M, is also different, It is much

smaller than that species and has ochreous-brown wings rather than

grayish-brown ones. In both species the hindwing shows a purple

sheen in certain lights, particularly marked in the present species,

being evident also on the underside of both wings. Although the only

Fig. 26-30. 28. Lardoclita maravita Tindale, Mt. Kina Balu, female genitalia,

voutral aspect, 29. Andoelita williamai Tindale, Los Banos, female genitalia,

yontril aspect. 380. Hndectita tarany Tindale, Lebong Sandai, female geni-

talia, ventral aspect, with egy appearing in orifice of ovipore.

available specimen is much worn there should be no difficulty im reeog-

nising it again with the aid of the figure.

The female genitalia (fig. 28) have the 7th sternite transverse, and

with an entire hind margin mych drawn backwards at the sides; the

Sth sternite has a digitiform median process and rolled lateral margin;

the anterior gonapophyses are rounded and plate-like; the posterior

gonapophyses have strongly chitinized and dilated terminal processes.

Endoclita williamsi sp. nov.

Plate xxii, fig, 1 and text fig, 29.

Female, Antennae (wanting in available specimen); eyes large,

in lateral view masking whole of head; head, thorax, abdomen and legs

192 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

pale fawn, hind legs small, without specialized plume of hairs. Fore-

wing with costa straight, slightly faleate at tip, dull brown with

unobtrusive paler bands following general pattern characteristic of

the genus; some ill-defined black spots along costa, a group of three

small silvery-white spots around junction of rm vein and M,, another

white spot at fork of M, and M,; traces of minute, generally paired,

ochreous spots outlined in dark brown, on apical third of wing. Hind-

wing with both Peu and 1V veins present; smoky-brown except very

narrowly at wing tip; an obscure opalescent blue sheen on wing in

certain lights. Wings beneath dull brown without well defined mark-

ings. Forewing length 44 mm., expanse 93 mm.

Loc. Philippine Islands: Los Banos, at light (F. X. Williams)

type a female, unique, in United States National Museum.

This species is named for Mr. F. X. Williams to whom T have been

indebted for many observations on Hepialidae. At first glance this

species might be thought to be the EZ. ijereja of Mt. Kina Balu, but the

eyes are much larger and there are significant differences in the sex

organs.

The female genitalia (fig. 29) show a seventh sternite with hind

margin entire and straight, with claw-like anterior gonapophyses. The

8th sternite has a large medial ventral elevation and internally a broad

plate with the lateral margins curled down. The semi-circular hind

margin of the median elevation is clothed in dense hairs on small

papillae. The terminal part of the abdomen is widely flanged.

In the form of the genitalia this species probably falls closest to

E. hosei of Sarawak, also described in this paper but differs in the

shape of the anterior gonapophyses and the form of the 8th sternite.

Endoclita taranu sp. nov.

Plate xxii, fig. 2 and text fig. 30

Female. Antennae short, threadlike, purplish-brown, of about 22

segments. Head with eyes large but not covering silhouette of head;

head, thorax above, abdomen and legs pale fawn, sides of thorax

brownish-black, posterior legs of normal size, without specialized plume

on tibia, Forewings long, slender, costa sinuous with a marked costal

expansion at Se; apex strongly falcate, termen and inner margin

well rounded in a single curve; colour grayish-brown with dull brown

suffusions, notably in the middle of the wing, and enclosing a triangular

patch of light gray scales in middle of cell; a pair of black-bordered

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 193

silver spots at one-third length of cell and a group of tliree around

junction of rm vein with M,; faint traces of other spots along costa

and in a line of brownish suffusion extending from near apex to inner

margin at three-quarters; a white and black bordered brown spot

inwards from inner margin at one-half. Hindwings with costal margin

slightly concave, tip of wing markedly faleate, termen well rounded

with a slight concavity at hind angle, colour dull grayish-brown with a

bright purple suffusion evident from some angles of view, tip of

wing with rudiments of wing pattern of forewing, Wing length

56 inm., expanse 119 mm.

Loe. Sumatra: Lebong Sandai, Benkoelen (type a female, unique,

in Joicey Collection at British Museum, 1925-122.).

From the similarity in size one might consider this species to be

the female of the large Ff, aikasama of Java, but there is apparently

no instance of a species with the costal dilation of forewing developed

in the female and absent in the male. The wing patterns are similar

and both have faleate wing tips. On close inspection the similarities in

the two species hecome less apparent and it is with some confidence that

they are kept apart.

The female genitalia show a broadly transverse 7th sternite with

parallel sides, and a broad vertical projection to 8th sternite, about as

wide as longs the posterior gonapophyses are slightly dilated at their

posterior extremities. In the available specimen (fig. 30), an ege is

held in the opening of the ovipositor, it is nearly spherical, smooth

and pale cream coloured.

Endoclita hosei sp, nov.

Plate xxii, fig. 3 and text fig. 31

Female. Antennae short, filiform, of 22 segments. Eyes large,

dilated, but in lateral view not quite concealing rest of head. WUead,

thorax, legs, and probably abdomen (much abraded in the type speci-

men) pale fawny-brown, posterior legs of normal size without special-

ized plume. Forewings with eosta straight, except for a moderate

expansion at Se,, apex slightly faleate, fermen and immer margin mm a

single swept curve; im vein just beyond fork of M, and M,; wing eolour

pale brown with richer brown areas in centre of wing and in a series

of circular patches running parallel to termen; a double pateh of brown

towards costa, and of black below it at the point of obsolescence of

Cuz; a series of dark brown and black spots along easta; there are

194 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

traces of a series of tiny black-ringed ereamy-white spots just below

each vein along termen; a group of three larger ones at junction of

Tro vein and M,, two others at the basal M fork and trace of others.

Hindwing with costa straight, termen and inner margin angulate, im

vein before fork of M, and M, but after branching of M, and M,; Peu and

1V_ both extending to margin; wing tip brown, with pattern of fore-

wing; rest of wing dull gray, in certain lights with a dull purplish

suffusion. Wing length 46 mm,, expanse 97 mm,

Loc. Sarawak: Baram district (Charles Hose), Type a female,

nnique, in Tring Collection at the British Mnsenm.

A first impression is that this species is close to BH. warawita from

nearby Mt. Kina Balu, because of the almost identical wine patterns,

bit the wings are relatively longer and the costal eminence on forewing

less conspicuous; the form of the Sth sternite and of the genital pro-

cesses show it to be quite a different species.

The female genitalia have the 7th sternite transverse, with the

side margins converging towards the anterior end. The 8th sternite is

a broad plate with semicircular posterior margin, the posterior gona-

pophyses have the distal extremities dilated.

in the type specimen unhatched eggs are visible through a break

in the wall of the abdomen, They are spherical, matt surfaced,

0.5 mm. in diameter, and show traces of a micropyle on one side.

Endoclita kara sp, nov,

Plate xxil, fig, 4 and text fig, 82

Female. Antennae (wanting in described specimen); head with

eyes moderately large, in lateral view not covering silhonet(e of head;

thorax, abdomen and legs ochreous-fawn. Forewing with costa siuuons,

slightly dilated at Se, apex blunt-pointed, termen and iiner margin

well rounded, wing volour pale grayish-fawn with brownish-lawn suifu-

alta; particularly a V- shaped area in middle of wing marking off

au area of pale ground colour in cell; groups of black-bordered white

spots at two-fifths cell and near r-m vein, a series of brown margined

circular patches between veins, principally in terminal third of wing,

each eirele with traces of a tiny central brown-ringed cream-coloured

spot, a figure eight shaped black spot obscurely margined with eream-

coloured scales inwards from inner margin at one-half, and traces of

others. Windwings with costa nearly straight, apex blunt, termer

rounded but slightly straightened near inner angle; grayish-l'awn with

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 195

a brassy lustre from some angles of view; traces of forewing pattern

only at tip of wing. Wing length 27 mm., expanse 57 mm.

Loc. Java: Vulkan Gede, Preanger district (1896, Prilwitz, type,

a female, unique, in Mus. f. Naturk., Berlin).

Related to EZ. sericeus from which it appears to differ in the nar-

rower dorsal part of the 8th sternite, the form of the posterior margin

of the 7th sternite, and in the longer, apically acutely pointed anterior

ronapophyses.

The female genitalia (fig. 32) have the 7th sternite transverse

with the lateral margins converging towards the anterior extremity,

33 34

Fig. 31-85. 81. Andoctita hoset Tindale, Sarawak, female, genitalia, ventral

aspect, 32, Lndoclita kara Tindale, Vulkan Gede, female genitalia, ventral

aspect. 33-35, Dadoclita ijereja Tindale, Mt. Kina Balu, 30-34. Female

genitalia, oblique and ventral aspects. 35, Egg diameter 0.60 mm,

The 8th sternite has a nose-like ventral process and a well rounded

osterior margin; the anterior gonapophyses are large and triangular

Pp Bins | or Boney §

in shape, terminating posteriorly in blunt points.

Endoclita ijereja sp. nov.

Plate xxiii, fig. 1 and text fig. 33-35

Female. Antennae (wanting in the described specimen); head

with eyes moderate, in lateral view not masking whole of head; head,

thorax and base of abdomen pale fawn, abdomen possibly darker (much

stained on type specimen); hind legs small, without specialized hairs.

Forewings with Se; present but withont appreciable costal swelling,

im vein separated from fork of M, and M, by a stalk shorter than in

196 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the type of the genus; wing colour smoky-brown with numerous paler

smoky-fawn markings, including a broad band across forewing from

costa af four-fifths to inner margin at. three-quarters; a line of black-

centred pale-fawn-margined spots along costal vein, others on costal

margin and a larger brownish-black spot where Cu. becomes obsole-

scent; a cluster of three white spots at junction of r-m vein and M,, and

another two (or three) at fork of M, and M,, other fleeks of creamy-

white scattered on outer third of wing. Hindwings with veins Peu and

1V both present; apical fifth of costa marked as in forewing, rest of

wing smoky-brown; in certain lights all but the anal margin and the

apical fifth of wing glows with a purplish-brown sheen. Forewing

length 54 mm., expanse 114 mm.

Loc. Borneo; Mt. Kina Balu, 1,200-1,500 metres, 1893 (Water-

stradt) type, a female, unique, in Mus. f. Naturk., Berlin.

This example bears a Staudinger collection No. K. 739, At first

glance it is like #, sigufer in the pattern of wing markiugs but the

wing tip is slightly more faleate, the costal markings are more numerous

and there are many points of difference in the details of the markings.

The female genitalia (fig, 33-34) have the 8th sternite with its

posterior margin spade-shaped and the 7th with posterior margin

straight, the anterior gonapophysial elements, in view from below,

show a rounded spine-like proeess overlying a blunter projection; in

oblique lateral view it appears more like a plate with two rounded

projections; the posterior gonapophyses are large with a median keel

and deep medio-lateral fold. In the form of the genitalia this species

bears no relationship to EF. signifer-

Hees dissected from the abdomen are available as are also others

still adhering to the apex of ahdomen, They are 0.6 mim, in diameter,

spherical, smooth, with a smal] circular area of different texture around

the mieropyle, Colour of dried eges, dark brown (fig. 35).

Endoclita sibelae (Roepke)

Phassus sibelae Roepke 1935, Trop, Natuur. 24, p. 102, fig.

This species, described from Batjan Island, has not been examined.

Endoclita signifer (Walker)

Phassus signifer Walker 1856, Cat. Lep, Het. Brit. Mus., vii, p. 1568.

Endoclita signifer Tindale 1941, Ree, S. Austr. Mus., 7, p. 30,

Hypophassus siqnifer Viette 1948, Musee Hende, xii (8), p. 83.

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 197

Viette reports this species from Tonkin at Hoa Binh. It is not

clear whether he has critically examined and compared the genitalia

of his specimens. Previous identifications of the species in Hastern

Asia all have proved to be based on other species, for example the

female example described in this paper as EF. topeza long stood under

this name in the Cornell University Collection.

UNIDENTIFIED SPECIES OF ENDOCLITA

Other species thought to belong to Endoclita but not. critically

considered for this revision are Phassus dirschi Bang Haas 1939 from

Kansu, and Gorgopis niphonica Butler 1879.

REFERENCES CITED

Bang-Haas, O. 1939: Iris. p. 59, fig.

Butler, A. G. 1879: Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (5), iv, p. 357.

Zeuner, I, . 1943: Trans. Zool. Soc. London, 25, p, 110.

ADDITION TO PREVIOUS PART

Sahyadrassus magnus Tindale

Plate xxiii, fig. 2

In a previous part of this revision, Tindale (1942, p. 154), this

species was described, but not figured. The paper had been rather

rapidly completed during a brief leave from military duties. The

deficiency is now made good. The only known example, in the British

Museum, is a rather dilapidated looking male which was much injured

in the post when being sent to me in Australia. In the original descrip-

tion it was ascribed in error to the South Australian Museum collection,

Rre. SoA. Museen Vou. NILE, Pearse NVI

Fie der panes | ebe |

Ree. Sok. Museen Voto NIL, Phare NVI

Reine SOAS Ma osne Vor NEEL Phare AVOUT

1) kt

ri]

Vhade, ae

ine, SON. Meso Von NUTT, Pravin NUN

(Huh.

the, SoA. Meanie M Von, XU, Phare XN

Mie SLA AP siiem Vor, NIE, Piark ANI

Rime, SoA. Moeswoa Vot. NULL, Paave XAT

Y1S) tty,

dale, femme, Los

Tite williawesé

Rre. SoA. Mose Vow. NET, Phare NNIE

Pig. 1. Andoelita igerveda Vondales Herik Ma. Kine Bray Tht ta,

Wie 2) Sehyadiitssns mois Vindale, aide, Deni Tlis, Roo didia, Phe an

NEW CRETACEOUS FOSSILS FROM NEW GUINEA

BY MARTIN F. GLAESSNER, UNIVERSITY OF ADELAIDE

WITH A CONTRIBUTION ON A NEW AMMONITE GENUS

BY R. CASEY, GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN

Summary

Mollusca including the ammonite, Chimbuites sinuosocostatus gen. et sp. nov., Pleuromya cuneata

sp. nov. and several species previously known from Australia are described from the Albian of

Papua and New Guinea. Two new Trigonias, a dimitobelid belemnite and a new species of

tubicolous worm Rotularia are described from the Cenomanian. An introduction summarizes new

data on the Cretaceous of New Guinea which have become known during the last decade.

NEW CRETACEOUS FOSSILS FROM NEW GUINEA

By MARTIN F. GLAESSNER, Universrry of ApDELAIDE

With a Contribution on a New Ammonite Genus

By R. CASEY, Geotoctcar Survey or Grear Brrrarw

Plates xxiv-xxvi and text fig, 1-5

ABSTRACT

Mollusca including the ammonite Chimbuites sinuosocostatus gen.

et sp. nov., Pleuromya cuneata sp. noy. and, several species previously

known from Australia are described from the Albian of Papua and

New Guinea. Two new Trigonias, a dimitobelid belemnite and a new

species of tubicolous worm Rotularia are described from the Ceno-

manian. An introduction summarizes new data on the Cretaceous of

New Guinea which have become known during the last decade.

INTRODUCTION

Much progress has been made in the study of Cretaceons sediments

and fossils in the Australian part of New Guinea since they were last

reviewed (Glaessner 1943, David 1950). The main results of the new

discoveries can be summarized as follows: (1) greater extent and

completeness of the Cretaceous record, (2) confirmation and extension

of Australian relations of the faunas, and (3) zoning of facies according

to tectonic environment. Any approach to detailed biostratigraphy

of this large and little-known area can only be gradual and detailed

zonal correlation of Cretaceous strata is not yet possible. It should

be based on detailed zonal collecting from continuons fossiliferous

sequences which could not be carried out because of difficulties of

terrain and tectonics. Nevertheless, the identification of a number of

fossils has led to age determinations which though necessarily some-

what vague and provisional, have added to the record of Cretaceous

geological history of the area.

200 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The Cretaceous commences in New Guinea with basal Lower

Cretaceous (Jvfravalanginian) shales, with a fauna corresponding to

that of the Lochambel beds at the top of the Spiti shales in the

Himalaya. It ineludes Haplophylloceras strigile (Blanford), a distine-

tive species which is also well known from the Suly [slands and from

Western New Guinea. It was fonnd recently in Papua, in the Vicinity

of the Kereru Range, The Infravalanginian Zone ammonite Subthur-

mannia boissieri (Pietet) has been recorded by Spath (1952, p. 23)

from this locality,

The presence of higher Neucomian cannot be as clearly demon-

strated, The absence of well-dated faunas of this age is, however, less

likely to be due to regional non-deposition than to lack of suitable facies

or to local erosion prior to a transgression of the Aptian or Albian.

Evidence of such a transgression was found in the headwaters of the

Fly River (Osborne 1945).

The Aptian is not represented hy distinctive mollusean faunas.

The genera Maccoyella and Peratobelus which are abundant in the

Aptian of Anstralia have not been found in New Guinea and the

ammonite tentatively identified as Deshayesiles is shown by Casey to

represent a new genus of Albian affinities. Assemblages of smaller

foraminifera suggesting Aptian are oceur but are not yet sufficiently

well known to permit definite correlations.

The Albian is well represented but has not yet been zoned, Ans-

tralian affinities are now well established though other elements are

also present in the Albian fauna of New Guinea. Among them are

Ptychomya and Nerinea (Glaessner 1945), and. Puzosia,

The foraminiferal fauna of the Albian of New Guinea contains

a number of well-known Enropean and North American species, in

addition to some from the Great Artesian Basin and others from the

Carnarvon Basin (Western Australia).

In the Cenomanian, affinities can he established only with the

northern and western fringes of the Australian continent (Melville

and Bathurst Islands, Carnarvon Basin), as the Great Artesian Basin

does not contain marine deposits of this age, Such affinities have been

found among the foraminifera and mollusca but further discussion

has to be deferred until the Australian Cenomanian faunas are

described,

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 201

The following Table summarizes the known faunal relations:

New Guinea Australia

Pseudavicula papyracea™ .. 64 22 45 0+ =. ee Alb. Alb,

Aucellina gryphaeoides .... 1... -- =. +... Alb. $8

Plewromya cuneata ooo. ce ce ee ee ee ee ee Alb? —

Linotrigomia (Oistotrigania) lima .. .. .. .. Cen, Met

“Trigania’’ PAPWANd oo eee ce ce ee ee ee ee Con. 4

Cymaloceras hendersond o.oo. 6. ce ee ee ee es Alb. Alb.

Cymatoceras Sp... ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Cone —

Chimbuites sinuosocostatus .. .. .. .. 6... Alb. —

Puzosia cf, plamulata.. 2. 6. 6. ee ee ee Alb, —

Myloceras davidi .. .6 ¢. cc alee ee ee eee ATD. Alb.

Myloceras cf. ftndersi .. 6.66 oe ce ee ee ee Alb. Alb,

Labeceras trifidum .. 2. 0. 6. 2. ee ae ee as) ADD. Alb,

Porahibolites blanfordi® 0. 0. 0. 0... 0... Alb. —

Dimitobelus (Tetrabelus) macregort .. .. .. Alb-Cen, ©

Rotularia spirulaeoides .. 5,-2.6 -. 7 ee ee) Cen. _—

The Chimbu Cretaceous sequenee on the north flank of the Kubor

Anticline) is characteristic of a distinctive tectonie zone which

Edwards and Glaessner (1958, p. 111) recognised as geosynelinal. They

referred to it as miogeosynclinal while Rickwood (1955, p. 81) considers

it as ‘more nearly eugeosynclinal than miogeosynclinal’’. There 1s

agreement on the necessity of assuming more mobile belts to the north

and east of the area, with volcanic islands as a souree of the abundant

voleanic component, while a relatively stable area was situated to the

south and west, In this area the Albian and Cenomanian fossils here

deseribed were collected from greensands and caleareons shales. These

(1) See Glaessner 1945. (2) Similar speecias or subspecies in the Albian of the Great Artesian

Basin,

(8) ‘This section is included in the area studied by Rickwood (1955) who found further fossils

und revised the stratigraphy. He mapped’ the Kondaku Tujfs (Lower Cretaceous) and

fhe overlying Chim Group (Marit Shales and Chimbu Tuffs of Edwards and Glaessner),

pointing out that its subdivisions are recognizable only in the Chim Valley and that

it is ‘‘probably not wholly Upper Cretaceous’? as ammonites found by natives in this

vicinity and deseribed below as Albian tame from its hase, There is of course no reason

why the rock-stratigraphie Kondakn/Chim boundary used in mapping should coincide

wilh the chronological Albiun/Cenomaninn boundary. The top of the Chim Group is

probably uot younger than Cenomanian (or Turonian) rather than ‘fa record of

uninterrupted sedimentation from the uppermost Cretaceous . . .« to Eovene’’ as

Edwards and Glaessner had thought possible, Rickwood has found that not only one

but all limestone ‘‘lenses’? with Eocene foraminifera included in the upper part

of Noakes’s section below the main Eocene searp are slump blocka and that Cretaceous

fossils, including Dimitobelus macgregort (Glaessner) oceur only 1,500 feet below the

top of the Chim Group.

202 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

sediments are probably an eastward extension of the Albian-Ceno-

manian Feing Group (Osborne 1945, Glaessner 1945) of the Upper

Fly River area 200 miles to the west-north-west, which they resemble.

OF EASTERN NEW GUINEA

showing

FOSSIL LOCALITIES +

Reference: 1. Masul Village

2. Kubukirua Ck. W.of Kuage

3. Sura Creek

4. Kerabi Valley

5. Sebe Creek

Fig, 1 Locality map.

It is probable that the fossils described from a less altered portion

of a phyllitie greywacke series (Kaindi Schists) near Wau in New

Guinea (Glaessner 1949) are also of Albian or Cenomanian age. The

geuera Cliona, Cucullaea, Glycymeris, ‘‘Trigonia’’, Cardium, Vulsella,

Inoceramus and Tibia? have been recognised. These rocks represent

a regionally metamorphosed zone of the mid-Cretaceous geosyncline of

New Guinea.

The localities of most of the deseribed species are shown on the

accompanying map (fig. 1) which was kindly made available by the

Australasian Petroleum Company.

Holotypes of the new species are in the palaeontological collection

of the University of Adelaide. Paratypes are in the South Australian

Museum. Other examined specimens have been returned to the private

collection of the Australasian Petroleum Company.

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 203

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The author is indebted to the Australasian Petrolerm Company

for permission to describe these fossils and to publish this paper; to

Dr. P. HK. Kent, Mr, W, D. Mott, Mr. F. K. Rickwood and Mr, G, A. V.

Stanley, who collected or obtained the fossils and supplied information,

and to the Departments of Geology of the Universities of Melbourne

and Queensland, and the Australian Museum (Sydney) for the loan

of specimens. The Australasian Petroleum Company provided the

drawing of text fig, 1; Miss A. M. OC. Swan assisted in the drafting of

the other text figures, and Miss M. J. Wade (University of Adelaide)

photographed most, of the specimens.

DESCRIPTIONS

Aucellina gryphaeoides (Sowerby)

Plate xxiv, fig. la-b and text fig. 2

Avicula gryphaeoides J. de C. Sowerlyy, Trans. Geol. Soe., ser, 2, vol. 4,

1526, pp. 156, 335, pl. 11, fig. 3.

Aucellina gryphaeoides Pompeckj, N. Jahrb. Min. ete., Beil.-Bd. 14,

1901, pp. 354, 365, pl. 16, fig. 6-8,

Aucellina gryphaeoides 11, Woods, Mon. Cretac, Lamellibr. England

vol. 2, pt. 2, Palaeontogr. Soe. 1905, p. 72, pl. 10, fig. 6-13.

Aucellina aryphacoides hughendenensis (non Etheridge), Edwards and

Glaessner, Proc. Roy. Soe, Vict., vol, 64, 1953, p. 98.

Material and occurrence: Two left valves and one right. valve

from Kubukirua Creek, west of Knage Village, Eastern Highlands of

New Guinea, abont 5 miles northeast of Wahgi-Purari junction (Coll.

G, A. V. Stanley). One left valve from Sura Creek, east-south-east of

Lake Tebera, Papua (Coll. F. K. Rieckwood).

Remurks: The specimens from New Guinea agree remarkably

well in shape, eurvature, aud ornamentation with the English species,

two specimens of which from the Cambridge Greensand were kindly

forwarded for comparison by Dr. L. R. Cox, of the British Museum

(Natural History), In the right valve the height is slightly less than

the length and the radial ribs are more pronounced on the surface of

the internal mould, In the left valve the proportions and eurvature of

the umbo are identical with those of the Nuglish form.

204 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A comparison was made with specimens from the Tambo Forma-

tion of Queensland (Granada and Ilfracombe) of the species described

by Etheridge as Avicula hughendenensis. R. Etheridge Jr. in Jack and

Etheridge. 1892, p. 461), remarks that A. gryphaeoides differs from the

Australian form in having a much larger umbo in the left valve, ‘‘and

the general characters of the right valve are quite different.’’ The

first of these statements can be confirmed, the second is of questionable

value. Pompeckj noted the longer auricle of the left valve and the

radial sculpture. These distinguishing characters are of minor import-

ance compared with differences between other species of the genus

and may therefore be considered as subspecific. Only the somewhat

more pronounced radial sculpture is seen in the New Guinea specimens

which are thus closer to the English form. On examination of further

material from with the very wide geographic range of the species,

ii a a

Sm.m.

Fig. 2. Aucellina gryphacoides (Sowerby). Enlarged view of the proximal

portion of right valve (pl. 1 fig. 1b), camera lucida drawing showing outline

of complete posterior and fragmentary anterior auricle.

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 205

they may be found to constitute another subspecies, The characters

of the umbo and auricles are, however, definitely as in the English form

to whieh the present specimens are therefore referred.

A, inecurva Wtheridge from the Albian of Darwin, A. exglypha

Woods from the Albian of New Zealand, A. parva (Stoliczka) from the

Cenomanian of Southern India and A, radiatostriata (Bonarelli and

Navera) from the Upper Aptian of South Georgia are clearly specific-

ally different, the last-named differmg in the much stronger radial

sculpture, the less projecting umbo and the less strongly developed

posterior part of the left valve (see Wilekens 1947).

Age: It is diffienlt to reach a definite conclusion about the strati-

graphic range of this species and allied forms, Woods (1903) listed

it from the Upper Gault, the Cambridge Greensand, and the Ceno-

manian up to the zone of Holaster subglobosus. Gillet (1924) also

includes in this species d'Orbigny's Inoceramus coquandt (Upper

Aptian). Pompeckj (1901) considers the identity of this species with

A, gryphaeoides as “very probably’? but points ont that it has not

been properly described. D’Orbigny’s type figure does not show the

characteristic shape of the umbo of the English form, An Aptian age

of any typical gryphaeoides does not seem to be well established.

Neither has it been figured from the Upper Cenomanian. In the Canca-

sus it was listed hy Renngarten from the Upper Albian where it occurs

stratigraphically above the Lower Albian A. caucasica Abiech. <A.

aryphacoides is therefore to be considered as mainly an Upper Albian

form, possibly extending into the Lower Cenomanian (Woods, Pom-

peckj), Harlier and later references require confirmation, A, g, hugh-

endenensis is according to Whitehouse restricted to the Middle and

Upper Albian Tambo Formation of Queensland and its equivalents in

South Australia. H. O. Fletcher collected many fine specimens of this

subspecies at Onepah Station, about 30 miles N.N.E. of Tibooburra,

New Sonth Wales (Anstralian Museum, Nrs. F; 42149, 42155-7, 42169-

70, 42179, 42208, 42215, 42219),

Linotrigonia (Oistotrigonia) lima sp. nov.

Plate xxv, fig, 7a-b and 8-9

Material: Wolotype (Adelaide University Geol, Dept. No. F15324)

showing both valves in apposition, partly concealed by hard sandy

matrix. Paratype, a left valve, carinal portion and umbo broken but

surface well exposed by weathering. Also abont 10 external and

internal moulds and fragments (Coll, F. K. Rieckwood).

206 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Diagnosis: Flank ribs mostly gently eurved, bearing long, stout,

close-set spines; area very wide, covered with numerous small blunt

tubercles which are arranged to form oblique curved costae diverging

from the flank ribs at an angle of about 60-70° in the young and about

40° on the adult shell,

Descriptions Shell thick, broadly elliptical in outline, but with

a straight, relatively short postero-dorsal margin. Umbo small, very

slizhtly projecting. Area wide, almost flat; marginal carina obtuse,

straight. In young specimens the area is covered with numerous crenu-

lated costae which are straight near the carina and bend npward near

the dorsal margin. In the adult the areal costae break up into numerous

small blunt tubercles giving the area a distinctive ragp-like surface.

Flank ribs reaching the ventral margin at an angle of about 70-80";

they are very gently curved, separated by wider spaces, about 10 with

a few short antero-ventral intercalations. There are 7-8 additional

anterior flank ribs, diverging sharply from fhe main ribs towards the

anterior margin which they reach at right angles, The main and some

of the anterior costae are at first covered with and later in ontogeny

break up into long stout close-set spines. The chevron-like divergence

of areal and flank ribs on the marginal carina is well marked, parti-

enlarly in yonng stages (pl. xxv, fig. 9), bnt in the adult the areal eostae

are much weaker than the flank ribs and growth lines become increas-

ingly well marked. The eostae are seen on the internal surface of

the valves as broad depressions, The interior margin is crenulated.

Teeth and buttress well developed, with fine dental crenulations, but

not well preserved.

Measurements; Length 41 mm., height 31.3 mm., length of carina

about 40 min. (holotype), maximum thickness 28.6 mm. Length of

paratype about 37 mm.

Comparison: This species resermbles closely the form deseribed

as Trigonia (Acanthotrigonia) phyllitica Glaessner (1949), from the

sheared and partly contactanetamorphie greywacke-phyllite complex

of the Kaindi Group in the Morobe District of New Guinea. Since then

Cox (1952) has revised the taxonomy of the Trigoniidae and has

removed the ‘‘spinose scabrae’’, to which both this and the new species

belong, from Acanthotrigonia (now placed in the synonymy of Ptero-

trigonia), to form a new subgenus Oistotrigonia. This is a far more

satisfactory grouping, Linotrigonia (Oistotrigonia) phyllitica (Glaess-

ner) differs from the new species in the ornamentation of the area which

is covered with fine but distinet ribs becoming obsolescent near the

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 207

lateral edge. The flank ribs appear to have been sharper and are

covered with ‘small protuberances’’. While these observed differences

make it impossible to place the present material in L, (0.) phyllitica,

the discovery of better preserved material of this species must be

awaited before their significance can be fully evaluated, In other

species of the subgenus the flank ribs swing forward much more

strongly, the spines are less distinet, and the area is not as closely

papillate.

Occurrence: Bast of Lake Tebera, Papua; common in dark green

glauconitie sandstone, with Dimitobelus macgregort, Dentalium sp.,

gastropods, and other lamellibranchs,

Age: While the subgenus Oistotriyonia ocenrs throughout the

Cretaceous and is therefore unsuitable for detailed age determination,

the association of the new species with other mollusea unlike thoge from

the Lower Cretaceous of New Guinea point to a probable Cenomanian

age. This does not conflict with local stratigraphic observations.

Remarks: Another species of Trigonia (sensu lalo) oceurs in the

Purari Greywackes. It has a small area and numerous flank ribs

which are vertical in the median part. The available material does

not permit detailed description and identification,

“Trigonia” papuana sp, nov,

Plate xxvi, fig. la-b

Material: (1) Holotype: Right valye, almost complete but with

the umbonal portion worn smooth (Queensland University Geol. Dept.

No. F'17914, coll. W. D. Mott, loose in stream gravel in outcrop area

of Cretaceous sandstones); (2) Fragment of caleareous matrix

(Queensland Univ, Geol. Dept. No, F17915) containing two almost com-

plete left valves and numerous fragments. Worn. Coll. W. D. Mott;

(3) Fragmentary right valve. Coll, R, A. Woodward; (4) Rock

fragment measuring about 14 x 2 x 3 inches containing remains of at

least. twelve valves forming a shell breeeia (Inmachelle). Coll. R. A.

Woodward.

Description: Shell thick, triangular to pentagonal in outline, length

equalling height, almost equilateral, moderately convex, Anterior

margin straight, ventral margin convex, postero-ventral angle obtuse,

posterior and postero-dorsal margins straight and subequal in length.

Umbo broadly rounded, worn in all available specimens.

208 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Area wide, moderately convex, with a very faint median furrow

and weak eoncentric growth lines. Marginal carina well developed

in the holotype, rounded, with a shallow furrow between it and the

area and a wider and deeper suleus along its anterior side. Both

suleus and carina appear to be variable, the suleus being better deve-

loped in the paratype specimens in which the carina is not as clearly

visible as in the holotype.

Umbonal portion of the valve smooth, showing only faint growth

lines, the beginning of the median ridge, and the sulcus. Anterior and

ventral part of the valve ornamented with concentric ridges (8 in the

holotype). They take an arcuate course from the anterior margin of

the valve to the anterior border of the suleus where they end abruptly,

or to the veutral margin, The surfaces of the first two ridges are

smooth to undulating, the later ones are covered with close-set rounded

knobs becoming more distinct and numerous on the younger costae and

varying in size.

Hinge teeth of right valve long and strong, finely crenulated.

Comparison: This species belongs ta a rather obscure and uncom-

mon group of Trigoniidae, Some of its distinctive characters occur

in a somewhat vagne manner in some of the specimens deseribed by

Woods (1917) as T. hanetiana @Orbigny from the Senonian of Amuri

Blutf, New Zealand. Among them are the snbtriangular outline, the

carina and suleus, and the oblique arcuate trend of the costae (see parti-

cularly pl. 9, fig. 4). Im the new species there is no indication of the

divergent short anterior ribs which form an angle with the main ribs in

most of the specimens figured hy Woods, The valves are not elongate

in ontline, the tnhercles on the ribs are different in shape and size, and

the senlpture of the area is much weaker in the New Guinea species.

The New Zealand form does not agree entirely with the typical South

American T. hanetiana which is even less like the new species. YT.

obtusa Tupé was included by Woods in the synonymy of 7. hanetiana

as ‘‘a short form’’, I was unable to see figures or descriptions of this

form in the literature at my disposal.

Taxonomic posilion; Marwick (1932) erected a new genus Paci-

trigonia in which he placed J. haneltiana d’Orbigny, T. explectu Wil-

ckens, and his new species P. sylvesteri. In these Upper Senonian

species the oblique sculpture is weak while in the new speuies it is

dominant. Other differences are the oblong, Inequilateral shape and

the obscure carina in Pacitrigonia. Among the new wenera and sub-

genera deseribed by Cox (1952), Buchotrigonia (Syrotrigonia) shows

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 209

the closest resemblance but according to the generic diagnosis the

costae are non-tuberenlate. The correct generic and subgenerie posi-

tion of this species must therefore remain undecided until more material

becomes available and publications which are at present inaccessible

to the writer can be consulted.

Occurence: Kerabi Valley, north-west of Mt. Murray, Papua.

Age; Cenomanian, greensands with Mantelliceras and other Acan-

thoceratids,

Pleuromya cuneata sp. nov.

Plate xxiv, fig, 2a-c¢

Plenvromya n. sp., Rdwards and Glaessner, Proce. Roy. Soc, Vict., vol.

64, 1958, p. 64,

Holotype: Adelaide University Geol. Dept. No. F15300.

Material: 19 specimens, with both valves in apposition.

Diagnosis: Shell thin, ornamented with conspicuous coneentric

folds varying in strength, with occasional irregular fusion of adjoining

folds in the central part of the shell. Folds bluntly triangular in cross

section, with a gentler ventral slope. Fine growth lines on and between

folds. Umbones situated between one-third and a half of the shell

length from the anterior end, incurved, not prominent. Anterior end

short, broadly and evenly rounded, posterior end narrowed. Greatest

height either in front of or at the umbo. Posterior suleus weak in

some specimens, absent in others. Posterior gape moderate.

Measurements: .

Ant. distance

Spec. Length Height Max. thickness of umbo

MB ac te ws 32 a 69 46 36 30,5

b (Holotype) ..., 67 47.5 33.0 24

C eee ee) GAL 46 30.5 35

ne elec cee ge 36 27 21.2

Bee o.oo ee 3h 0 30 25 20.5

No, 194 (Erni) .. 56.5 40.5 28.5 22

Description: In all specimens both valves are preserved, with some

of the thin shell adhering to the cast. Some are partly enclosed in

hard caleareous nodules. The hinge is not exposed but after cutting a

specimen sagittally a small tooth-like projection was found under the

umbo of the left valve. The external ligament and strong nymphs are

clearly visible. One or two specimens show faint traces of the deep

210 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

pallia] sinus which appears to end below the umbo. In eight specimens

the right valve igs slightly larger or at least higher at the umbo and

hinge than the left valve. In three specimens the valves and their

heights are equal. The valves taper strougly and evenly towards

the narrowly rounded posterior margin and the thickness of the shell

decreases along an almost straight line from its maximum which is

anterior to the umbo, This gives the shell a prononneced wedge shape

in both lateral and dorsal views. There is a slight variation in the

position of the umbo, in the strength of the folds, and in the posterior

suleus which is fainthy visihle in only five of the specimens. There is

no anterior ridge or other radial sculpture.

Remarks: The new species shows all features recently enumer-

ated in the diagnosis of Pleuromya (Arkell 1934), with the exception of

details of the hinge structure which are not clearly visible in closed

shells. P, ewneata differs from P. alduini, the type species, in its much

straighter ventral margin bringing the greatest height almost below

the umbo. It resembles closely and appears to be econgenerie with P,

borealis Warren from the Albian of the Mackenzie River Valley,

Canada (Warren 1947), Specifie differences are seen in the narrow

umbo and in the anterior end being more evenly rounded and sharply

angular in dorsal view, The posterior gape ts wider.

Occurrence: The exact localities at which this species ocenrs are

not known. The present specimens were collected by natives near

Masul Village, on a tributary of the Chimbu River, about three miles

east-sonth-east of Chimbu, Kastern Highlands of New Guinea, together

with specimens of Chimbuites sinuosocostatus and a few other species.

Two further specimens were obtained by a missionary from natives

living in the nortli-esstern slopes of the Bismarck Mountains, about

25 miles north-west of Chimbu. These were nsed by members of the

Gende tribe as magie stones in connection with their gardening. It

is probable that the specimens from the Chimbn area were colleeted by

the natives for sunilar purpose but if is unlikely that all the specimens

eame from the same source as there is little intercourse between the

tribes in this area, and similar rocks are known to oceur at both loeali-

ties. The specimens from the Gende tribal area were briefly described

by Erni (1944, p, 474) as “Plewromya or Panopaea”’ and their geulp-

ture was compared with Panopaea gurgitis (Brongniart), The pos-

terior end of one specimen and the posterior dorsal side of the other

are damaged, Plaster casts of the two fossils presented by the late

Dr. Bernoulli of the Basel Museum show that they are specifically

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 211

identical with the Chimbu material which is well enough preserved to

show all features required for generic identification.

Cymatoceras hendersoni (R. Etheridge Jr.)

Text fig. 8a-¢

Nautilus hendersoni R. Etheridge Jr. (MS,) in Jack and Wtheridge,

Geol, Pal, Queensland and New Guinea, 1892, p, 502,

Nautilus (Cymatoceras?) hendersoni R, Etheridge Jr. Queensland

Geol, Survey Bull,, 13, 1901, p. 34, pl. 1, fig, 1-2, pl. 2, fig. 1-3.

Nautilus (Cymatoceras?) henderson R. Etheridge Jv., Contr. Pal.

South Aust., No. 14, 1905, p. 16, pl. 1, fig. 6-9, pl. 3, fig. 9-12.

Eutrephoceras henderson (Ktheridge), Teichert. J. Paleont,, vol. 26,

p. 737,

Cymatoceras &p. Rdwards and Glaessner, Proce, Roy. Soe. Viet., vol, 64,

1958, p. 98.

Material: Three incomplete casts, one with some of the outer

shell well preserved.

Description: The best preserved specimen, about 150 mm, in diame-

ter and 100 mm, wide, shows the distal half of the outer whorl enclos-

ing the complete inner whorls. It is septate throughout, Only a small

portion of the surface of the shell is visible. There are eight to nine

septa in each of the preserved half whorls. The suture line consists of

a wide ventral saddle, a shallow rounded lateral lobe, a high and

undulating umbilical saddle. There is a small annular lobe, the whorl

section is regularly rounded, the height being about three-fifths of the

width. The venter is gently arched. The umbilicus is deep and narrow.

The siphuncle is centrodorsan where the height is abont 63 mm,

Another specimen which must have reached a diameter of over

200 mm. is poorly preserved but shows surface sculpture consisting

of fine wavy ridges with a wide lateral forward sweep. They are

unequal in strength and spacing, giving on the whole the impression of

being somewhat accentuated at intervals of about 5mm, These ridges

are seen only on thei outer surface of the shell which is thick. Very

fine longitudinal striae can be seen only with a hand lens.

The third specimen is smaller, 87 mm, in diameter, and much worn.

It shows clearly 16 septa in the last whorl.

212 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Tels

Fig. 3. Cymatoceras hendersoni R. Etheridge jun. a. Septal view, b. mature

suture, c. Juvenile suture,

These specimens agree well with Etheridge’s description of the

Queensland species, particularly in the general shape and the delicate

sculpture. The umbilical lobe seems to be more strongly expressed in

the present specimens but as Etheridge did not draw the suture line

and only figured it on a cast in which the edges of the chambers were

damaged, the significance of this possible difference is uncertain.

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 213

Occurrence: The figures represent characters of a specimen found

in a concretion in shale, outeropping in Kubukirna Creek, west of Knage

Village, 5 miles northeast of the Waligi-Purari Junction, Kastern High-

lands, New Guinea (Coll, G. A, V. Stanley), Other specimens were

found by natives near Masul Village, 3 miles east-south-east of Chimbu

airstrip, Central Highlands of New Guinea.

Age: The age of the specimen from near Knage is Albian. It

was found together with Aucellina gryphacoides, and a foraminiferal

fauna of Albian age oceurs in close proximity. The specimens from

near Masul were received together with Chimbuites but other fossils

indicating younger (Cenomanian) age (Mantelliceras and Turrilites)

were also obtained from natives in this vicinity.

Remarks: Another species of Cymatoceras oecurs in the Ceno-

manan greensauds with Acanthoceras in the Kerabi Valley. It ean

be distinguished by its much more sinuous costae which are separated

by narrow sharp furrows. here are also very fine longitudinal ventral

furrows spreading out laterally. The only known specimen measures

47 mm. in diameter.

Chimbuites Casey and Glaessner gen. nov‘?

Type species: C. sinuvosocostatus Casey and Glaessner nov. sp.

Diagnosis: More or less involute, Whorls subrectangular in

section, with flattened sides, rounded ventro-lateral shoulders and

feebly convex venter. Umbilical wall steep, smooth, but with rounded

rim. Costation of flexuous primary ribs, thickened on the lower half

of the flanks and terminating at the umbilical margin, alternating with

groups of secondary ribs. Secondary ribs end mostly at, mid-flank;

others make low-angle bi- or tri-fureation from the primaries, Ribs

traverse the venter with a forwards sinuosity, their regularity inter-

rupted by periodic, shallow, vestigial constrictions, confined to the

venter and the outer half of the flanks, Suture line with narrow, sub-

symmetrically trifid lateral lobes, and numerous auxiliaries declining

with gentle obliqnity to the umbilicus,

This new genus is to be placed in the Family Hoplitidae sensu

lato and ig allied to the genera Uhligella Jacob, Lemuroceras Spath,

Cymahoplites Spath, Puzosigella Casey and Pachydesmoceras Spath.

(4) The deseription and diseussion of this new genus was contributed by RK, Casey who also

reviewed the description of its type species. T wish to thank Mr, Casey for his

valuable ¢ontribution (M.F.G,),

214 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

These are all heavily ribbed derivatives of the Desmocerataceae which

connect that superfamily with the Hoplitaceae. Uhligella has much

blonter ribbing and the ribs are raised into bullae at the umbilical

margin on the inner whorls, Lemuroceras and Cymahoplites are more

compressed, the umbilical wall is oblique and the eostation different.

Pugosigella has a more distinet rim to the umbilicus, which on the early

whorls is surmounted by obtuse bullae, the inner half of the flank tends

to hecome smooth at the size of the New Guinea specimen, and the

suture line has the reduced number of auxiliaries and umbilical retrac-

tion of Puzosia. Pachydesmoceras bas nore numerous, finer, secondary

costae on the inner whorls which rarely branch trom the primaries; on

the outer whorls the costation simplifies by reduction in the proportion

of secondaries to primaries and bifureation is there more frequent,

UVhligella ranges from Upper Aptian to Middle Albian and is

typically European (though the generic name bas heen used imeritically

for ribbed desmoceratids from all parts of the world). Lemuroceras is

top Lower to basal Middle Albian and is at present known only from

India and Madagasear. Cymahoplites and Puzosigella are of about

the same age; the former occurs in Central Russia, the latter in Cali-

fornia, Pachydesmoceras is known mainly from oceurrences in the

uppermost Albian of Eurasia, but has heen reported from the Lower

Turonian of Japan and Cameroons.

Chimbuites sinuosocostatus Casey and Glaessner sp. nov.

Plate xxiv, fig, 3a-b; plate xxv, fig. la-b and 2, and text fig. 4

1953 Deshayesiles n, ap. Edwards and Glaessner, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet.

vol. 64, p. 98,

Holotype: Adelaide University Geol. Dept. No. F15308.

Material: Hight apecimens in varying states of preservation,

Description: Whorls thick, with slightly rounded flanks, and arched

but flattened venter; nmbilicns narrow. Greatest whorl thickness half-

way between the mid-flank and the umbilical rim, Ribs gently sigmoidal

on the flanks and continuous across the venter with a pronounced

forward sinus. There are only 12-13 primaries which bifnreate some-

what irregularly abont the middle of the whorl height, with inter-

ealation of three to four rounded but distinct secondaries, There is

little if any difference between primaries and secondaries across the

venter. Fine growth lines appear on the surface of the shell, On the

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 215

last whorl of the largest specimen and on the body chamber of the

holotype the ribs become flatter and less distinct. The suture is as

described for the genus,

Measurements:

Specimen: a b e d e ft

Holotype

mm % mm, % mm. % mm. % mm. % mm. %

diameter .. ..130 100 87 100 94.5100 84 100 62 100 40.5100

whorl height.. 60 46 438 49 44 46 40 47 32 51 20 49

whorl thickness 46 35 36.5 41 39 41 35 41 265 42 17 41

umbilicus .. .. 23 17 17.5 20 21 22 19 22 125 20 84 20

Remarks: All specimens are septate throughout but the largest

shows the spiral suture extending another quarter whorl, apparently

without septation. The holotype, which is intermediate in size, shows

the body chamber over one-third of the last whorl. There is little

Fig. 4. Chimbuites sintosocostatus Casey and Glaessner n, g., n. sp. Whorl

section, A.U.G.D, No, 15311.

variatiou in ribbing, inflation, or width of umbilicus over this size range

but the sculpture becomes weaker and smoother on the body chamber of

the larger specimens. The venter is more broadly rounded in smaller

specimens and the inflation of the whorls near the umbilical margin is

more pronounced in the largest specimen which is, however, somewhat

deformed and abraded, The forward inclination of the primaries seems

to increase with age. There is a slight variation in the depth of the

ventral forward sinus but in all specimens in the present collection,

except one, it is well formed, This exceptional specimen is preserved

as a septate fragment of two whorls with a maximum height of about

30 mm., equal to that of the smallest measured specimen of C. sinuo-

socostatus. The ribs divide here closer to the venter. The external and

lateral lobes are wider and the external saddle is more elaborate, This

may represent another species.

216 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Locality: Near Masul Village, about 3 miles east-sonth-east of

Chimbu airstrip, Hastern Highlands, New Guinea, collected by natives

probably from pebbles in a small local stream, and Presented to a

party led by Mr, G. A. V. Stanley in 1949.

Age: Probably Albian. The matrix of the holotype contains

another fragmentary specimen and also abundant small gastropods.

Puzosia cf. planulata (Sowerby)

Plate xxv, fig. 3

ef. Ammonites plonularis Sowerby, Sharpe, Cret. Ammonites, Palaeon-

togr. Soc., 1855, pt. 2, p, 29, pl. 12, fig. 3 (mon fig, 4),

Description: Two specimens of Pugosia haye been found close

together, one over 300 mm, in diameter and the other less than 35 mm.

The smaller specimen is complete but the shell is only partly preserved

and the distal nmbilical portion of the body chamber is damaged. There

are six constrictions. On the surface of the shell they form a rounded

tongue-like ventral forward sinus which is marked proximally by a

ventrally much widened and projecting smoothly rounded rib. On

the internal cast the ribs are extremely faint and hardly noticeable.

The distal edges of the constrictions are more strongly marked than

the proximal "edges, The ventral sinug is angular and almost inter-

rupted. Spath (1923, p. 48) deseribed P. planilata (Sowerby) as

compressed, haying a larger umbilicus than P. communis Spath, acute

chevrons on the periphery, and more distinet costation. In these

respects the small specimen agrees with P, planulata but in the absence

of material for direct comparison and of sufficient literature on other

species the identification must be left in doubt.

In the large specimen of Puzosia the outer whorl is septate through-

out. One third of this whorl was lost and in the gap one third of

the penultimate whorl is seen. At a diameter of about 300 nm. the

height and width of the whorl are about 160 mm., at its proximal

fracture they are about 112 mm. The diameter of the umbilieus is

about 100 mm, The venter is more arched and the flanks are more

rounded than in the small specimen. The ornamentation is similar

but obsolescent and the ventral sinus is more rounded though not less

pronounced,

Locality: Kubukirua Creek, west of Kuage Village, 5 miles north-

east of the Wahgi-Purari Junction, Mastern Highlands of New Guinea.

Age: Albian,

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 217

Myloceras davidi Whitehouse

Plate xxvi, fig. 2-3

Crioceras sp. R. Etheridge Jr., Rec. Aust. Mus., vol. 7, 1909, p. 144,

pl. 38, fig. 1-2.

Myloceras davidi Whitehouse, Mem. Queensland Mus., vol. 8, 1926, p.

235, pl. 37, fig. 2.

Material: Two incomplete specimens (coll. F. K. Rickwood).

Description: ‘‘ Coiling crioceratid, whorls compressed; first whorls

more loosely coiled than later; costae thin, numerous, with small papil-

late ventro-lateral tubercles; septal suture with rectangular saddles

and deep very numerous L,’’ (Whitehouse). This species is distin-

guished from others, according to its author, by the compressed shape

of its shell and by the deep narrow lateral lobe of the septal suture.

Both characters are well shown in the present specimens in which the

costae are slightly flexed as in the holotype.

Locality: Vicinity of Sura Creek, south-east of Lake Tebera,

Papua.

Age and distributions: This species is known from the Upper

Albian Tambo Formation of Queensland. Its occurrence provides a

further valuable link between the Albian faunas of Queensland and

New Guinea.

Myloceras cf. flindersi (McCoy)

ef. Ancyloceras flindersi McCoy, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. 20,

1867, p. 356.

ef. Crioceras flindersi (McCoy) (partim) R. Etheridge Jr., Rec. Aust.

Mus., vol. 7, 1909, pl. 39, fig. 1-3.

ef. Flindersites flindersi (McCoy), Whitehouse, Mem. Queensland Mus.,

vol. 8, 1926, p. 237.

Material: Two fragments of the distal part of the shell, mostly

preserved as casts (Coll. F. K. Rickwood: No. 226KH, with Pseuda-

vicula? sp.; 245K H, with Inoceramus sp.).

Description: The fragments, both from the straight part of the

shell, agree in size and development of ribs and nodes with Etheridge’s

figures. There is considerable irregularity in the height of insertion of

secondary ribs. The tubercles are markedly elongate. The venter is

218 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

preserved in one specimen but it is too badly crushed for an exact

description of its ornamentation. It was apparently much narrower

than in Etheridge’s specimens.

Measurements: Dorso-ventral diameter 60-65 mm., transverse dia-

meter about 25 mm. (deformed by compression). Length of larger

fragment about 80 mm.

Occurrence: Vicinity of Sura Creek, east-south-east of Lake

Tebera, Papua.

Age: Albian.

Remarks: Spath (1938, p. 601) has placed the genus Flindersites

Whitehouse in the synonymy of Myloceras Whitehouse.

Labeceras trifidum Whitehouse

Plate xxvi, fig. 4a-¢

Crioceras sp. R. Etheridge Jr. in: Jack and Etheridge, Geol. Pal.

Queensland and New Guinea, 1892, p. 502, pl. 33, fig. 4.

Crioceras laqueus R. Etheridge jun., Rec. Aust. Mus. vol. 7, 1907, pl.

49, fig. 7, 9 (non fig. 8).

Labeceras trifidum Whitehouse, Mem. Queensland Mus. vol. 8, 1926,

p. 228.

Material and preservation: Three specimens showing the terminal

‘‘hook’’. In one of them the collapsed straight portion and the aperture

can be seen, in another the entire body chamber from the last septum

to the apertural margin is preserved. Both are from a greenish grey-

wacke. The third specimen, from a grey shale, is distorted.

Description: The species was based on incomplete specimens

showing the ‘‘body chamber with prominent dorso- lateral tubercles

from which very fine but prominent ribs trifureate’’ (Whitehouse 1926,

p. 228). This description of the ornamentation, as well as the reference

to subcircular whorl section with flattened venter, fits the specimens

from New Guinea well. It is noted that the trifurcation is common but

not regular; bifurcating ribs with and without tubercles occur also, as

in the specimens figured by Etheridge. Some of the tubercles are very

prominent, particularly in the area of strongest curvature. The

apertural lappets are arcuate and directed slightly inward. They pro-

ject 6 mm. beyond the straight ventral margin of the peristome in a

specimen in which they are 12 mm. apart and in which the greatest

width of the chamber is 17 mm.

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 219

Measurements: he distance between the aperture and an external

tangent to the back is 32.5 mm, in a speeimen in which the dorso-ventral

and transverse diameter of the last septum are 13.2 mm. The other

specimens are about the same size.

Occurrence: From the area north of the Middle Purari River,

Papua, One specimen was found 5 miles north of a point on the river

6 miles below Hathor Gorge, the others are from the same area,

Age and distribution; This species is known from the Upper Albian

of Queensland and South Australia. The genus is restricted to the

Upper Albian.

Dimitobelus (Tetrabelus) macgregori (Glaessner)

Plate xxvi, fig. 5a-b and 6, text fig. 5

Tetrabelus macgregori Glaessner, Proc, Roy. Soe. Viet., vol. 56, pt. 2,

1945, p. 160, pl. 6, fig, 12.

Dimitohelus n, sp,, Rickwood, J. Geol. Soc. Aust., vol. 2, 1955, p. 73.

Material: Holotype (Melbourne University Geol, Dept. No, 1876) ;

two fragmentary rostra (Queensland University Geol. Dept. No.

F'14501-2, coll. W. D. Mott) ; one well-preserved small and seven larger

fragmentary rostra, Of these, four represent the apical portion and

three shows the phragmocone, two af them are partly embedded in the

matrix, and one is free and very large (coll. F. K. Rickwood),

General remarks: The stndy of the new material has made it

necessary not only to amend the description of the species but also

that of the genus, The large new specimen (15294) shows the phray-

mocone to a length of about 70 mm, (25 mm. maximum width), with the

rostrum broken between the two main longitudinal grooves (see pl. xxvi

fig. 5) so that the siphunele is exposed between them, This proves that

the main grooves are ventro-lateral, not dorso-lateral as [ had stated in

the original description of the species. This description was based on

a comparison with an unnamed species of Tetrabelus trom New South

Wales (Ktheridge 1902, p. 46, pl. 9, figs. 3-6, Whitehouse 1924, p, 414).

A careful study of other species of Tetrabelus shows, however, that in

7’. seclusus and kleimi, Blanford, Giirich, Spengler and in faet White-

house had considered that two deeply incised furrows correctly as

ventro-lateral. This is clearly seen to be the position in rélation to the

siphunele in a specimen from Mountain Well, Onepah Station, 30 miles

north-north-west of Tibooburra, New South Wales (Coll, H, O. Fletcher,

220 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

fal

a b Cc

Fig. 5. Dimitobelus (Tetrabelus) macgregori (Glaessner). Holotype.

a. Ventral view. b. Left lateral view. ¢. Right lateral view. vl. Ventro-

lateral grooves. dl. Dorso-lateral lines. 1dl. Lateral double lines (left

side covered with matrix).

Aust. Mus. No. F42263) which probably represents the form which

was described but not named by Etheridge from the same area. More-

over, this relation of the same grooves to the siphuncle can also be seen

in the specimen figured by Etheridge (1902a) as Belemnites eremos

Tate from South Australia, though Tate, Etheridge and Whitehouse

had described them as dorso-lateral in this and other forms which are

now placed in Dimitobelus. I have stated elsewhere (Glaessner

1957) that there is no evidence for this interpretation which must be

abandoned.

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 221

Generic position: Although originally distinguished mainly on the

assumed presence of dorso-lateral grooves the genus Dimitobelus should

not be merged with Peratobelus in which only ventro-lateral grooyes

but no lateral double lines are present. J etrabelus was believed by

Whitehouse to be ‘‘a direct descendant. of Dimitobelus, the line of

division occurring at the stage when the ventro-lateral groove ceases

to be dependent on the dorso-lateral, but has an independent existence

(now disconnected from the lateral lines" (Whitehouse 1924, p. 414).

His definition of the Tetrabelus is: ‘*Clavate belemnites with dorso-

lateral grooves and lateral lines, but having, in addition, independent

ventrolateral grooves’’. In Dimitobelus the ventro- (not dorso-)

lateral grooves merge (after a swing towards the dorsal side) with

the lateral lines, and a dorso (not ventro-) lateral anterior extension of

these lines may also be present, This makes the separation (*‘indepen-

dence’’) of the ventro-lateral grooves from the lateral lines the main

distinguishing feature, not the two pairs of lines (see Whitehouse’s

fig. 3), Ktheridge’s species, however, and the new specimen from New

Sonth Wales do not show this separation allhough in other characters

they resemble 7. kleini and 7. seclusus, tis therefore preferable to

consider Telrabelus a subgenus of Dimitobelus.

Description: Rostrum clavate, stvongly constricted in the alveolar

region, dorso-vertrally compressed, particularly where it expands to

its greatest width. Ventro-lateral grooves deeply incised and sharply

defined, extending well below the protoconeh, straight but directed

towards a lateral position at {heir posterior end where they approach

the fine lateral double lines, Dorso-lateral lines weakly inpressed in

the alveolar region. Apex tapering gradually, The compression of

the rostrum seems to increase during growth. The alveolar angle is

about 15°, increasing slightly anteriorly. The bulbous protoconch is

about 0.55 mm. wide and 0.4 mm. lone, the following chamber of the

phragmocone 1 is 0.25 mm. long. The ratio of maximum transverse to

maximum dorsoe-ventral diaineter of the clavate portion of the rostrum

is 1.8 in five specimens, 1,4 in one, and 1,2 in the smallest individual,

Comparison: This species resembies closely D. diplychus (McCoy)

=B. canhami Tate) but differs in the less clavate shape of the rostram

and in the less intense dorso-ventral flattening, the mean ratio of the

maximum transverse to the maximum dorso-ventral diameter being

1,3 (range 1,2—1,4), as compared with 1,4—1.5 in D. diptychus. Tt

appears from a study of type specimens in the collections of the Uni-

versity of Adelaide that the forms deseribed by Etheridge from South

222 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Australia as Belemnites eremos (R. Etheridge Jun., 1902, p. 51, pl. 7,

fig. 18-21) should be ineluded in D. diptychus.

Occurrence: Middle Purari River, Paw Creek and about 8 miles

north-west; vicinity of Sebe Creek, east of Lake Tebera, Papua; Chim

Valley, 2 miles north-west of Chimbu, Western Highlands of New

Guinea (coll. F. K. Rickwood) ; Kerabi Valley, north-west of Mt. Mur-

ray, Papua (coll. W. D. Mott).

Age: Upper Albian and Cenomanian. The specimen (pl. xxvi,

fig. 5) which was found about 8 miles north-west of the locality of the

holotype was associated with Myloceras and Labeceras trifidwm, Both

these occurrences are in the Upper Albian. The specimens from the

Kerabi Valley are associated with large Mamtelliceras and other Acan-

thoceratids in greensands. The specimens from near Lake Tebera were

found in similar greensands, together with the Linotrigonia described

above, stratigraphically above the fossiliferous Albian. The material

from the Chim Valley came from a very hard shelly impure glauconitic

limestone 1,500 feet below the top of the Chim Group, several thousand

feet above the horizon of the fossiliferous Cenomanian ‘‘Maram”’

Shales which contain foraminifera in the Chimbu section and Huom-

phaloceras at Mingende about 7 miles west.

Rotularia spirulaeoides sp. nov.

Plate xxv, fig. 4a-b and 5-6

Material: Six specimens (Queensland University Geol. Dept. No.

1833, coll. R. A. Woodward), 5 specimens collected by W. D. Mott,

including the holotype, Adelaide University, Geol. Dept. No. F15320.

Description: Shell small, discoidal, umbilicate on both sides.

Whorls inflated, apico-basal diameter increasing rapidly up to the

last whorl, radial diameter of the whorl increasing slowly. The

earliest portion seen consists of two flatly trochospiral whorls followed

by one or two planispiral adult whorls expanding above the blunt apex

of the initial coil incompletely and somewhat irregularly involute on

both sides, at first to about half the whorl height but finally becoming

evolute and ending in a short tangentially projecting constricted tube.

Peripheral margin with a single broadly rounded keel, externally sep-

arated from the body of the whor] by shallow but clearly marked grooves

which are about equidistant from the umbilical and peripheral margins.

Surface showing arcuate growth lines concave towards the aperture’

above and below the lateral groove in which the direction of curvature

is reserved. Irregularities of growth tend to produce alternating

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 223

umbilieal constrictions and ribs, The coiling is sinistral (in the sense

of Cox 1953, not of Wrigley 1951). In transverse section the inner

tubular space is cireular, with a dense inner and a layered outer wall

which is very thick along the umbilical edge, and with a thin brownish

‘‘epidermal’’ covering,

Measurements: Diameter np to 21 mm., ereatest thickness of last

whorl in largest specimen 7 mm. diameter of tube 2.7 mm.

Comparison; The species differs from ‘ Tubulostinm’’ discoideum

Stoliczka (Cenomanian of Southern India) in the rounded peripheral

keel, the periphery in the Indian species being truncated. The new form

resembles ‘‘Hotuwaria’’ spirulaea (Lamarck) very elosely in shape and

surface seulpture but differs in the lower and more rounded keel and

the depressed early whorls which according to Rutsch (1940) often

project above the adult coils i that common Huropean Kocene species.

In the new form the early whorls are lower than in “‘Rotularia”™’

elymenivides (Guppy) !rom the Hocene of the Antillean Region. Other

differences are the gradual transition to the planispirally eoiled part

of the shell and the greater thickness of the flanks at the level of the

periphery of the preceding whorls in the new species, The forms

described by Gardner (1939) from the Mocene of the Gulf Province of

North America differ in surface seulpture and the development of the

peripheral keels,

The new form differs from ‘‘Spirulaea’? gregaria R, Btheridge

Jr., in that the latter is concavo-sub-convex, and the periphery is vot

ridged or angled, In ‘‘Tubulostinm’* ornatum Wilekens from New

Zealand the peripheral keel is separated from the lateral bulging

zones by two much more pronouneed furrows. ‘7'.’ fallax Wilekens

from the Senonian of the Antaretie has a triple peripheral keel. 7,

australis Cox is smaller than 2. spirulacoides, being 14 mm. in diameter,

and appears to he less involute and more discoidal, and the straight

section of the tube is longer,

Taxonomic position: The taxonomy and nomenclature of the group

to which the new species helongs has heen discussed extensively in

recent years (Gardner 1939, Rutsch 1939, Wrigley 1951, Cox 1958).

While Rutsch has argued in favour of considering these fossils as

gastropods and of applying to them the name Tubulostinm, Wrigley has

shown conclusively that the earliest stage of formation of the tube.

which is rarely preserved, has the character of a worm tnhe. Wrigley’s

arguments m favour of the application of the generic name Rotularia

Defrance 1827 instead of Tubulostivm Stoliezka 1867 (which may

224 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

replace it if the prior use of Rotularia by Lamouroux in 1822 is con-

firmed) were accepted by Cox (1953).

Locality: Kerabi Valley, north-west of Mt. Murray, Papua.

Age: The genus ranges from Albian to Lower Oligocene. The

association of the new species with Mantelliceras and other Acantho-

ceratids places it in the Cenomanian.

REFERENCES

Arkell, W. J., 1934: A Monograph of British Corallian Lamellibranchia,

pt. 7, Palaeontogr. Soc. (1933), pp. 277-324, pls. 37-44.

Carey, S. W., 1945: Note on Cretaceous strata in the Purari Valley,

Papua. Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict., vol. 56, pt. 2, pp. 125-130.

Cox, L. R., 1952: Notes on the Trigoniidae with outlines of a classifica-

tion of the family. Proc. Malac. Soe. Lond., vol. 29, pp.

45-70, pl. 3, 4.

1953; Lower Cretaceous Gastropoda, Lamellibranchia and

Annelida from Alexander I Land. Falkland Is. Depend.

Surv. Se. Rep. No. 4, pp. 1-14, pl. 1, 2.

David, T. W. EK. (ed. W. R. Browne), 1950: Geology of the Common-

wealth of Australia, London.

Edwards, A. B., 1950: The petrology of the Cretaceous greywackes of

the Purari Valley, Papua. Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict., vol. 60,

pp. 163-171.

and Glaessner, M. F., 1953: Mesozoic and Tertiary sediments

from the Wahgi Valley, New Guinea. Proc. Roy. Soe.

Vie., vol. 64, pp. 98-112, pl. 3.

Erni, A., 1944: Ein Cenoman—Ammonit, Cunningtoniceras holtkert

n. sp. aus Neuguinea. Eclogae Geol. Helv, vol. 37, pp.

468-475, pl. 11.

Etheridge, R. Jr., 1902: A monograph of the Cretaceous invertebrate

fauna of New South Wales. Mem. Geol. Survey N.S.W.,

Pal. No. 11.

1902a: The Cretaceous Mollusca of South Australia and the

Northern Territory. Mem. Roy. Soc. South Aust., vol. 2,

pt. 1.

Gardner, J., 1939: Notes on fossils from the Eocene of the Gulf

Province 1. Annelid genus T'ubulostwm. U.S. Geol. Surv.

Prof. Paper 193n.

GLAESSNER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS 225

Gillet, S,, 1924: Htudes sur les lamellibranches néocomiens, Mém.

Soe. Géol, Mrance (n.g.) vol. 1.

Glaessner, M, F',, 1943: Problems of stratigraphic correlation in the

Indo-Pacific Region. Proc. Roy. Soe. Viet., vol. 56, pp.

41-80.

1945: Mesozoic fossils from the Central Highlands of New

Guinea. Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict., vol. 56, pp. 151-168.

1949: Mesozoic fossils from the Snake River, Central New

Guinea, Mem, Qld. Mus. vol. 13, pt. 4, pp. 165-181, pl.

14, 15.

1952: Geology of Port Moresby, Papua. Douglas Mawson

Anniv. Vol. Univ, Adelaide, pp. 63-86,

1957: Cretaceous belemnites from Australia, New Zealand

and New Guinea. Aust. J. Sei., vol. 20, No. 3, pp. 88-89.

Jack, R. L., and Etheridge, R. jun., 1892; The Geology and Palaeon-

tology of Queensland and New Guinea, Brisbane and

London.

Marwick, J., 1932: A new Trigonia from Canterbury. Ree. Canter-

bury Mus., vol. 3, No, 7, pp. 505-509, pl. 67,

Osborne, N., 1945: The Mesozoie stratigraphy of the Fly River Head-

waters, Papna. Proe, Roy. Soe. Vict., vol. 56, pp, 131-148.

Pompeckj, J. F., 1901: Uber Ancellen und Aucellen-ihnliche Formen.

Neues Jb, Min, Geol, Paliont., Beil.-Bd. 14, pp. 319-366,

pl. 15-17,

Rickwood, F’. K., 1955: The geology of the Western Highlands of New

Guinea, J. Geol. Soc, Aust., vol, 2, pp. 63-82.

Rutsch, R., 1939: Die Gattung Tubulostiwm im Kociin der Antillen.

Kelogae geol. Helv., vol, 32, pp. 231-244, pl. 12.

Spath, L. F,, 1923-1939; Monograph of the Ammonoidea of the Gault,

Palaeontogr. Soc.

1952: Additional observations on the invertebrates (chiefly

ammonites) of the Jurassic and Cretaceous of East Green-

land, II. Sone Infra-Valanginian ammonites from Linde-

mans Fjord, Wollaston F'orland; with a note ou the base of

the Cretaceous.—Medd. om Grénland, vol. 133, No. 4.

Warren, P. §., 1947: Cretaceous fossil horizons in the Mackenzie River

Valley. J, Paleont., vol. 21, pp. 118-123,

226 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Whitehouse, F. W., 1926: The Cretaceous Ammonoidea of Hastern

Anstralia. Mem, Qld, Mus., vol. 8, pt. 3, pp, 195-242, pl.

34-41,

1924: Dimitobelidae, a new family of Cretaceous belemnites.

Geol, Mag., vol, 61, pp, 410-416.

Wilckens, O., 1947: Paliiontologische und geologische Ergebnisse der

Reise von Kohl-Larsen (1928-29) nach Siid-Georgien,

Abh. Senckenberg naturf. Ges., No. 474, pp. 1-75, 9 pl.

Woods, T1., 1905: Monograph of the Cretaceous Lamellibranchiata of

England, pt. 2. Palaeontogr, Soe,

1917: The Cretaceous faunas of the north-eastern part of

the South Island of New Zealand. N.Z. Geol. Sury., Pal.

Bull, no. 4, pp. 1-41, pl. 1-20,

Wrigley, A., 1951; Some Hocene Serpulids. Proce. Geol. Ass., London,

vol, 62, pt. 3, pp. 177-202, fig. 1-66,

EXPLANATION OF PLATE FIGURES

PLATE XXIV

Fig. lx-b. Auecllina gryphacoides (Sowerby). Ja, Left valve, internal mould, A.U,G.D,

No, 15812, xi.8. 1b. Right valve, internal mond, A,U.G.D, No, 15313, x1.4,

Fig. 2u-«. Plewromya euneata u, sp. Holotype, A.ULG.D. No, P15800. Nat. size,

Fig. da-b. Chimbuites sinuosocostatus Causey and Glatssner n.g., n. sp. Tlolotype, A.U.G.D.

No. FI5308. Note regeneration of damaged shell flank in Fig. 3b, x0.77.

PLATE XXV

Fig. la-l. Chimbutles sinvosveostatus Casey und Glaossner, i.e, sp. Paratype, A-U.G.D, No.

Fipall. Nat. size.

Fig. 2. Chimbuites sinuosocostatus Casey and Glaessner, 1.g., ms. Paratype, A.U.G.D, No,

15810, x0.47.

Fig. 3. Puzosia ef. planulata (Sowerby), A,U.G.D, No, 15315. Nut. size.

Pig. 4a, 4b, 5, 6. Rotwlaria vpirulaevides n. sp. Fig. da, b, Holotype, ATG.D, No. 15320,

sla. Vig. 5. Paratype, AUG, No, 15381, x15, Fig. 6. A.U.G.D No, 15322, x1.

Fig. Ta, 7b, 8, 9, Linotrigonia (Oistotrigonia) lima n. sp. Papua. Fig. 7a, b, Holotype,

A.U.G.U. No. FIS824, nat. size, Fig & Paratype, damaged left valve showing

spinose sculpture, A.ULG.D, No. 15825, 0.9 not. size, Vig. 9. Plastotype of external

mould of young left valve, A.U.G.D. No, 15326, x1.4.

PLATE XXVT

Fig. la, b. ‘'Trigonia’’ papuana vn. sp, Right valve, holotype, Q.U.G.D. No. 17914. Nut. sive.

Fir. 2, 8. Myloveras davidi Whitehouse. Fig. 2. A.U.G.D. No. F15817. 0,8 nat. size,

Fig. 6. AU.G.D. No. W15318, 0.7 nat, size,

Fie. dae. Laheceras trifidum Whitehouse. Complete body chamber, internal mould with

shell remnants, A.U.G.D. No. 115293. Nat, size.

Fig. 5a, b, Dimitobelus (Tetrabelus) maegregori (Glaessner). = Fragmentary rostrum,

A.U.G.D, No, F15294, Fig. 5a. Proximal portion of incomplete rostrum, The part

covering the phragmovone has been removed to show the siphuncle and the smooth

‘Csnlitting surfaces’? between the ventro-luteral grooves and the phragmocone, Fig.

Hb. Showing transverse section, upper half of periphery indented by ventro-lateral

frooves, Nat, size,

Fig. 6. Dimitobclus (Tetrabelus) macgregort (Glacssner). A.U.G.D Wo. F15295, Split

rostrum showing cast of protoconch and proximal portion of phragmocoue in situ. x8,

Rime. SAL Muswen Von NILE, Phare NNT

To fae jutge 226, |

Pre, SOAS Mesto Vor, NOT, Prare NAV

Rae, SOA. Messen Vou, NUL Phare NNVI

AUSTRALIAN BEETLE-MIMICKING BUGS OF THE FAMILY

LYGAEIDAE (SUBFAMILY RHYPAROCHROMINAE-TRIBE LETHAEIND

BY GORDON F. GROSS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

During sorting of the Museum collections of Lygaeidae Rhyparochrominae the writer came across

the four very interesting species described in this paper. They belong to two new genera which must

be placed in the tribe Lethaeini in respect of the three tricholbothria on sternum V, the last of which

lies posterior to spiracle V (Scudder, 1957, p. 154).

AUSTRALIAN BEETLE-MIMICKING BUGS OF

THE FAMILY LYGAEIDAE (SUBFAMILY RHYPAROCHROMINAE-

TRIBE LETHAEIND

By Gorvon F. Gross, Soura Austranmn Muszum

Fig. 1, A-D

INTRODUCTION

During sorting of the Museum collections of Lygaeidae Rhyparo-

chrominae the writer came across the four very interesting species

deseribed in this paper. They belong to two new genera which must

be placed in the tribe Lethaeini in respect of the three trichobothria

on sternum V, the last of which lies posterior to spiracle V (Scudder,

10957, p. 154).

In both genera the hemelytra have lost all trace of a membrane and

have become hardened so that there does not appear to be any distine-

tion between clavus and corium. The condition does appear to be one

of brachyptery for, although hardened, these ‘‘elytra’’ extend almost

to the apex of the abdomen. This is also true of the brachypterous

hemelytra of Myocara Bergroth. I would suggest that in the case of

these two new genera the macropterous form is either absent or very

rare,

At first glance both genera resemble small beetles and the resem-

blanee of one of them (Carabocoris nov.) to some of the smaller

members of the Carabidae is particularly striking.

The four species are extremely shining and without (Coleocoris

nov.) or virtually without (Carabocoris) punctation above. This condi-

tion is also partly developed in some other members of this section of

the Lethaeini (e.g., Myocara Bergroth). The types of all four species

are lodged in the South Australian Museum.

SYSTEMATIC

The four species and the two genera may be distinguished by the

following key.

1. Pronotum with lateral margins in anterior three quarters

broadly curved, in posterior quarter straight and parallel thus making

228 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

pronotum of pronounced carabid shape. Hardened hemelytra with

sparse punctations, Upper surface of insect chestnut brown except for

four yellow patches, a pair on lateral margin of each ‘‘elytron’? . . .

Carabocoris biplagiatus sp. nov.

Pronotum trapezoidal, upper surface largely piceous (Coleocoris

nov.) ... 2

2. With three lateral yellowish patches, one on humeral angles

of pronotum the other two on lateral margins of ‘elytra’? . . .

Coleocoris triplagialus sp, nov.

Coloration not as above, but with at least some of the coloration as

longitudinal or transverse lines . . . 3,

3. Lateral margins and base of pronotum yellow, so also lateral

margins of ‘‘elytra’’ and also a longitudinal line on ‘elytra’? abont

one-third out from inner margin and not reaching to base or apex

. . . Coleocoris lineatus sp, nov.

Base of pronotum only, and lateral margins of ‘‘elytra’’ as well as

two patches very near the Inner margin and about one-quarter way

along length of inner margin from tip of scutelluam yellow -— .

Coleocoris ocellatus sp, nov.

Genus Coleocoris nov.

Above shining, impunctate with seattered long hairs. Beneath

with a few punctations for the most part arranged in rows on the

thorax but otherwise impunctate with sparse long hairs and a short

pilosity. Head strongly triangular, immersed almost to eyes which are

moderately large, ocelli apparently absent. Tylus just surpassing

jugac. Antennae about half length of body, first segment shortest but

surpassing apex of head, second the longest, third a little shorter, sub-

equal to or a little longer than fourth, Antennae with a short semi-

adpressed pilosity and three or four spine like hairs on first segment and

apical part of second, Rostrum of various lengths but always surpass-

ing middle coxae.

Pronotum, flattened trapeziform, almost square anteriorly, pos-

terior and lateral margins straight, latter marginate, posterior angles

almost a right angle, anterior ones shortly eurved, no trace of a collar,

Scutellum about as long as wide, flattened, with apex acuminate and

lateral margins smoothly excavate in a sweeping curve.

GROSS—BEETLE MIMICKING BUGS 229

Ilemelytra feebly convex, thoroughly hardened like beetle eylytra,

reaching almost to base of last abdominal segment, apical margins

eurved and lateral margins broadly curved.

Fore femora incrassated with three or four spines beneath near

the middle running towards apex and several near apex on upper side,

hind and mid femora likewise with several spines on upper side near

apex and hind femora also with several spines near apex below. All

tibiae with about 15-20 strong spines scattered along their length. First

segment of tarsi at least twice ag long as remaining two segments

together. Coxae with two or three spines, Sternum V with three

trichobothria placed in line, anterior pair close together, posterior one

placed behind spiracle and near hind margin,

Genotype: Coleocoris triplagiatus sp. nov.

IT am unable to exactly place this genus amongst the described

forms though it does seem to have some affinities with Myocara Ber-

groth. The head is longer in Myocara and the latter genus has ocelli

but, otherwise the head and pronotum are very similar in shape to those

Fig. 1, A, Coleacoris triplagiatus gen. et sp. noy. B. Coleocoris lineatus

sp, nov, C. Colvocoris ocellatus sp. nov. D. Carabocoris biplagiatus gen.

vt. sp. mov. (All approximately x7.)

of Coleocoris. There are odd punetations on the pronotum and seutel-

lum of Myocara and quite a lot on the hemelytra of Myocara but the

underside of the two genera is very similar, even to the arming of the

legs. In brachypterous Myocara acuminata Bergroth the hemelytra are

likewise quite large but there is still a distinction between clavus and

corium,

230 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Coleocoris triplagiatus sp. nov.

Fig, 1A

Above and below a shining dark brown with seattered long brown

hairs and «a very short and very sparse white pilosity, thicker and

longer on the underside of the abdomen and the antennae. Above with

three yellowish spots on either side, one in each posterior angle of the

pronotum and two on the lateral margin of each ‘‘elytron,’’ an oblique

one about half way along and an oval one at about three quarters.

Coxne, rostrum and three apical seements of antennae brown, first seg-

ment of antennae, apex of fourth and legs yellowish brown, a light

yellow triangular patch on outer posterior margin of the propleuron

confluent with yellow pateh on opper side at inmeral angle. Rostrum

surpasses nid coxae, some long hairs on head and pronotum, length

of antennal segments 0.30 mm., 0.70 mm., 0.70 mm., 0.70 mm., hind

femora 1.0 mm., hind tibiae 1.1mm. Total leneth 3.4-4.0 mm., width

1.7 mn, length pronotum 0.90 mm.

Loes. South Australia: Holotype male (Reg. No. 120,092) allo-

type female (Reg, No. 120,098) from Moolooloo Station, Flinders

Ranges 2,000ft. (Hl. M. Hale, 1921) ten paratypes, two of which are

lary: ad (Reg. No. 120,094), from Leigh Creek (no collector or date) and

one paratype (Reg. No, 20,095) from Mt. Remarkable (October, 1925,

F. EK. Wilson).

Coleocoris lmeatus sp, nov.

Fig. 1B

Body above and below a dark shining brown with above an

extremely sparse and short pilosity, below, at least on abdomen, lees

and antennae this pilosity somewhat thicker and longer. Above with

lateral margins of thorax and elytra and upper apical quarter of third

antennal segment bright yellow, hind margin of pronotum and a longi-

tudinal stripe on each “elytron?? about one-third way out from inner

margin and commencing at about half length of seutellum from basal

margin and not reaching apical margin by about half this distance

dirty yellow. Femora, rostrum and antennae brown, tibiae and tarsi

yellowish brown.

Head with a long hair on vertex on each side of the line joining

middle inner margin of eye to base of tylus and another in each anterior

corner of pronotum. Rostrum surpasses mid coxae, length of antennal

GROSS—BEETLE MIMICKING BUGS 231

segments 0.30 mm., 0.65 mm.,, 0,63 num., 0.50 mm., hind femora 1,1 mm.,

hind tibiae 1.3 mm. Total length 3.7 mm., width 1,7 mm., length

pronotum 0,70 mm,

Loc, Thursday Island: Holotype female (Reg. No. 120,096) and

two paratype females (Reg. No. 120,097), No other data.

Coleocoris ocellatus sp. noy.

Fig, 10

Body above and below piceous, with a very fine white pilosity

beneath, thicker on the abdomen and antennae, Tlind margin of

pronotum continuing obliquely across hind angles, and a patch beneath

contiguous with it on the outer posterior angle of the proplenra,

lateral margins of *‘elytra’’? (wider in the hindermost portion) and

two rectangular patches near the inner margin a little behind apex of

seutellum, and last antennal segment (except at base) white, the apical

two-thirds of latter a dirty white. First three segments of antennae,

rostrum, coxae, femora, dark brown, tibiae brown, tarsi yellowish

brown.

Rostrum reaching almost to base of third ventral segment, length

of antennal segments 0.30 mm., 0.66 mm., 0.57 mm., 0.60 mm., hind

femora 1.1 mm., hind tibiae 1.4 mm, Total length 3.8 mm., total width

1.6 mm., length pronotum 0,77 mm.

Loc. Western Australia: Holotype female (Reg, No. 120,099)

and paratype female (Reg. No. 120,098) both from Swan River (J.

Clark, no other data).

Genus Carabocoris nov.

Above shining, with scattered punctations on elytra and scattered.

long hairs especially along edge of pronotum and ‘‘elytra.’’ Beneath

with strong punctations for the most part arranged in rows on the

thorax, otherwise impunctate with sparse long hairs and a sparse short

pilosity. Head strongly triangular, immersed almost to eyes which are

moderately large, ocelli apparently absent, Tylus just surpassing

jugae. Antennae abont half length body, second segment the longest,

third and fourth subequal and both shorter than second. Antennae

with a short adpressed pilosity and a few strong hairs on first segment.

Rostrum reaching hind coxae.

232 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Pronotum flattened, anterior and posterior margins straight,

lateral margins marginate, anterior three quarters a smooth convex

eurve, posterior quarter straight parallel sided, hind angles almost a

right angle, no trace of collar, Whole pronotum in appearance remark-

ably like that of a typical carabid beetle. Seutellum about as long as

wide, flattened with apex acuminate and lateral margins smoothly

exeavate in a sweeping curve, seutellim somewhat smaller than in

Colevearis,

Hemelytra leebly convex, thoroughly hardened like beetle elytra,

reaching base of penultimate abdominal segment, apical and lateral

margins broadly curved. Surface sparsely punctate.

Fore femora incrassated with three or four short spines beneath

in the apical quarter, mid and hind femora with some very short spines

near apex, All tibiae with abont 8-12 strong but short spines scattered

along their length. First segment of tarsi at least twice as long as

remaining two segments together, Sternum V with three triehoboth-

ria placed in line, anterior pair elose together, posterior one placed

behind spiracle V and near hind margin,

(renotype: Carabocoris biplagiatus n. sp,

The affinities of this genus are undonbtedly with Coleocuris. It

must rank as a separate genus as the three species of Coleocoris

described above from widely separate localities are all remarkably close

to one another structurally and Carabocoris talls considerably out

of this range in features other than the distinctive shape of the

pronotum (e.¢., punctation of ‘“elytra,’’ different position of anterior

femoral spines, weaker arming of tibiae and antennae, ete.).

Carabocoris biplagiatus sp. noy.

Fig. 1D

Body above and below dark brown, with legs antennae, rostrum

and two lateral patches on “elytra,’? one about the middle and the other

just before apical angle, yellow, A few sparse dark hairs near apex of

head, along lateral margins of pronotum and lateral and apical margins

of “‘elytra,’’ and beneath; on upper surface of abdomen and on legs and

antennae a yery short close white pilosity, Length of antennal seg-

ments 0.30 mm., 0.60 mm., 0.57 mm.,, 0.57 mm., hind femora 0.9 mm.,

hind tibiae 1.6 mm. Total length 3.8 mm., total width 1.6 mm,, length

pronotum 0,69 mm.

GROSS—BEETLE MIMICKING BUGS 233

Loc. Western Australia: Holotype female (Reg. No. 120,100)

from Lake Austin (H. W. Brown, no other data) and two paratype

females (Reg. No. 120,101) from Cue (H. W. Brown, also no other

data.).

REFERENCE

Scudder, G. G. E., 1957: ‘‘The higher classification of the Rhyparo-

chrominae (Hem. Lygaeidae)’’ Hint. mon. Mag., 4 (18); 152-156.

ON CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS

(WITH NOTICE OF RELATED SPECIES FROM ADJACENT TRACTS)

PART Il — THE POTOROINAE

BY H. H. FINLAYSON, HONORARY CURATOR OF MAMMALS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Since the Horn Expedition of 1894 (Spencer, 1896) comparatively little has been published on the

marsupials of Central Australia. This venture while rich in new discoveries, left many gaps in the

detailed knowledge of eremian species. Much is still obscure regarding their general biology and

local and regional distribution and status, and in particular, the level of subspecific differentiation

attained by eremian marsupials in relation to corresponding forms in the peripheral areas of the

continent, is almost unknown.

ON CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS

(With notice of related species from adjacent tracts)

PART HI—THE POTOROINAE

By H. H. FINLAYSON, Honorary Curator or MamMats, SoutH

Austratian Museum

Plates xxvil-xxxi and text fig. 1-2

CONTENTS

Introduction, 236.

1, Bettongia lesueurt Quoy and Gaimard 1824—

(a) History of the Species and General Distribution, 238.

(6) The Central Australian Representative

Distribution and Habits, 239; Material Examined, 245; External Characters,

945; Cranial Characters, 249; Dentition, 253.

Distribution and Habits, 259; Material Examined, 261; External Characters,

261; Cranial Characters, 261; Dentition, 262; Relationship of the Central

Australian and Lower South Australian Populations, 264; Remarks on

Subspecific Differentiation in B. lesweurt, 264.

2. Beltongia penicillata Gray 1837—

(a) Distribution, Habits and Status of the Species as a Whole, 268.

(b) Material Examined, 275.

External Characters, 276; Cranial Characters, 279; Dentition, 281.

(d) Subspecific Differentiation in B. penicillata—

Comparison of South and Western Australian Moieties of the Series of

B. penicillata ogilbyt used in ¢ (supra), 286; The Waldana karpitchi, 286 ;

“B. gouldi Gray” and Dwarfism in B. penicillata ogilbyt, 287; B. penicillata

francisca Finlayson, 289; B. penicillata anhydra Finlayson, 290.

3. Status of Other Members of the Subfamily in Central and South Australia, 293.

4, Post-pleistocene Representatives of the Subfamily in the Same, 295.

5. Remarks on the Distribution and Bionomie Interrelations of the Potoroinae, 296.

6. Summary, 299.

7. References, 301.

8. Explanation of Plates, 299.

236 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

INTRODUCTION

Since the Horn Expedition of 1894 (Spencer, 1896) comparatively

little has been published on the marsupials ol Central Australia.

This venture while rich in new discoveries, left many gaps in the

detailed knowledge of eremian species. Much is still obscure rezard-

ing their general hiology and local and regional distribution and

status, and in particular, the level of subspecifie differentiation

attained hy eremian marsupials in relation to corresponding forms in

the peripheral areas of the continent. is almost unknown.

Pastoral settlement in Central Australia since 1894 has had an

adverse effect on the mammalian life of large areas, including that

worked over by the Horn Expedition, but the creation of Aboriginal

Reserves originally totalling 75,000 square miles on the adjoining

borders of the States of South and Western Australin and Central

Australia has incidentally provided a partial sanctuary for fauna.

Tere the introduetion of domestie stock and most other Muropean

enterprise is banned, and nearly virgin conditions prevailed until the

entry of the Enropean fox in mwnbers within the last 24 years.

During the years 1931-35 the writer visited this area four times

spending in all some 13 months in field observation and collecting,

between 136° 30% and 128° 10’ Kast and 22° 30° and 28° 0’ South

(approx.). The main collecting stations and routes covered during

this portion of the work are indicated upon a detailed map which

accompanies a general description of the eountry, published by the

writer in 1936 and two preliminary papers upon muridae from the

same sonree appeared in 1940 and 1941. The mammals of the Lake

Hyre Basin had been dealt with earlier (1931-89), Since 1945 enquiry

and further field work have been extended to areas of the Northern

Territory to the north and east of the main reserve. In the present

series of papers the term “Central’’ is used for the whole tract

covered without reference to political boundaries, since conditions as

they effect the ecology of mammals are not sensibly different in the

three sections,

The summaries of distribution of most species are given in broad

outline only and are subject to future modification, The sparse and

fluctuating occurrence of many of the surviving mammals, the vast

areas involved and the confusion caused by European occupation,

make a more detailed treatment impossible. All that is attempted

here is to quote localities for all material examined, to add the results

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART IIL 237

of personal observation and of enquiry among natives and corres-

pondents, and to combine this with existing records, many of them

little known and seattered through the literature of exploration and

surveys. The body of data assembled in this way, provides a con-

siderable advance both in seope and accuracy on the information

previously available, but anything approaching a satisfactory survey,

has long since ceased to be possible, Systematic interrogation of

aborigines, with authentic specimens to stimulate interest and

facilitate comparison, has long heen practised by the writer and has

prove a most fruitful source of information. When subject to

checking and cross cheeking among the older people of widely

separated and independent groups, such testimony can be refined to a

high degree of ntility, and it is keenly to be regretted that the chaos

into which aboriginal life has sunk, has brought this source almost to

an end.

The data and material obtained on these private expeditions has

formed the nucleus on which the following reports are based, but in

addition, much other relevant material in the South Australian

Museum has been consulted, In reviewing the morphology of Central

Australian species, one of the chief aims has been to provide a reliable

description of an authentic series, which might serve as a basis for

comparison with other populations when such are available, and so

shed light on the degrees of subspecitic differentiation mentioned

above, In some cases also where fossil or subfossil material has been

available in sufficient, amonnt, such a comparison has given usefal

information on the Post Pleistocene history of the species. In this

work metrical dala in the form of ranges and approximate means of

dimensions and indices has been freely used in arriving at tentative

conclusions, but conventional statistical analysis is deferred. It has

been necessary to distinguish a few well marked forms by nomen-

elature, but in general T have been chary of adding new names for

such differences as have been demonstrated and taxonomic treatment

along trinomial lines has not been consistently followed. In the present

state of the development of the subject, such a course, even if desired,

is a hazardous one owing to the frequent inaecessibility of type

specimens and the impossibility of forming just estunates of the

normal range of variation in the species they represent.

In this connection it may be noted, that within the Central Aus-

tralian field itself, conditions as they apply to ground living mammals

are especially ill adapted to the operation of the Formenkreise type of

mechanism, which underlies the theory of the development of the

238 RECORDS OF THE 5,A. MUSEUM

geographic subspecies. Over vast areas of tle country, the ecological

gradient is exceedingly low and physical barriers to the free move-

ment, even of stall forms are absent. On the other hand, climatie

faetors in the form of sparse and irregular rainfall, exert cataclysmic

effects by periodic depopulation of whole districts during drought and

repopulation of the same by the breaking of drought. These popula-

tion movements are almost entirely capricious in direction, and in

mammals of high mobility and dispersal capacity result in a constant

mingling of communities over areas so wide that regional differentia-

tion of a permanent character is largely suppressed.

Bettongia lesueuri Quoy and Gaimard 1824

Originally described !rom Dirk Hartog Island in Shark Bay on

the Western Australian coast in lat, 26° South, this rat kangaroo has

since been shown to have had one of the most extensive continental

ranges of any of the Australian marsupials, reaching from about

14° South lat. in the north-west down to the extremity of the south-

east coast in lat, 37° 50’ South, and from the west eoast almost across

to the eastern cordillera in New South Wales, The north-eastern

sector embracing most of Queensland and part of New South Wales

has yielded no published records of the species and thus forms an

interesting hiatus in its distribution, but whether of fact or merely

record, is somewhat doubtful (fig. 1).

The range has frequently been given as Western and South

Australia and this has misled many writers, even in recent years, to

overlook its former presence in Vietoria and New South Wales. That

it occurred in the Murray districts of these States in 1863 was plainly

attested by Krefft m Lydekker (1894) and more doubtfully, in

northern New South Wales in 1865 by Maegillivray (in Iredale 1937).

Tate (1948) has also publisted evidence of its occurrence in Victoria,

The former habitat included a wide range of climates but

wherever it occurred it seems to have followed a fossorial way of life

on more ar less open plains, and has shown itself, especially in arid

distriets, markedly intolerant of pastoral occupation, so that both its

numbers and dispersion have been greatly reduced from what obtained

primitively. Nevertheless, it still occupies large areas in the States

of Western and South Australia and the Northern Territory,

Two races have heen separated from the original insular form;

B. lesueurt qrayi Gould 1840 based on the Swan River in Western

Australia and B, lesuewri harveyi Waterhouse 1842 from Eyre

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART ITI 239

Peninsula, South Australia. In addition, the insular form B. lesweurt

lesueurt Qnoy and Gaimard 1824, has now been accorded a representa-

tion on the adjoining mainland by (Hanert (1950). While these names

have been widely used, the morphological basis on which they have

rested is of the flimsiest, and as Harper (1945) has pointed out, the

lines of demarcation or intergradation between the forms are quite

unknown.

The material in hand comprises series from both Central Aus-

tralia and the lower districts of South Australia, and these will be

considered separately,

THM CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN REPRESENTATIVE

Disramrrmon ann Hasrrs: The former distribution in the Centre

was wide (fig. 1), but its limits can now be but vaguely indicated in all

those areas which have heen under pastoral occupation for long.

Probably its greatest stronghold was along the east-west axis ol the

Macdonnell Range system and in the south-west seetor in and about

what are now the great Aboriginal Reserves on the borders of the

three States, As late as 1940 it was still numerons here, particularly

sa in the Musgrave-Everard Range area from which it extended with

increasing sparseness into the north-west districts of South Australia,

to about lat. 30° South. Forty years before this, at about the tnrn of

the century, its eolonies were continuous over the western half of the

latter State, as far down as the Adclaide-Wakefjeld plain.

OF its northern extension, there is little satisfactory evidence,

bot [ place its limit provisionally at about 20° South lat. To the west

of Stuart’s line in this latitude if may exlend somewhat further north,

but to the east of it, the Barkly Tableland was apparently never

oeeupied, and interrogation of Wombaia survivors there has given

only negative results,

The eastern limits lie near the Queensland border, It is well

known to the eastern Arunta and the [lyowra, and remained within

their territory between the Plenty and Sandover Rivers until the late

1920's. The Wonkanooroo have a name for it in the south-eastern

extremity of the Arunta desert but it was not reported by either

Colson in 1938 or Madigan in 1989 in their traverses of the central

portion of this region. South of the Arunta Desert, Andrews (1876)

collected it in 1874 in the Lake Eyre clistrict probably on the Macnmba

at the north end, and Sanger (1882) recorded it from the lower

Cooper on the east side, Sanger’s account of it, however, is more

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

240

yanansay 1

Buoyeq JO vornquysip ay) yo dey

onviaig

Apave 4

’

4g ASIA WINOLDIA:

‘

7 §

90S OOF OOF Ooz O01

S310

g veuarnn

3% yO! N

ivi 2 ts

(30 uorysod)

+4 ° .

iyettt ttre -~!

+ +

(@ uoryiod)

AVG

w2ngaod

(B56!) yuweyxa parryjaq

Biszioads 24] YDIUM

GM usaony, Ul SBME 4luD

“ykanTey ‘TACAB * aNINS3]

.$20 84, JO $a1917800) ad;

'S2IUZIANDIO JO

Spi9gd4 JuBayUBis 424j0 Q yeasydrdad

udIWedns30 UeadOdng yo BUN Ie 23UB44NI90

: jo Alisuap wy uoinquysip aiqeqoid

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 241

suggestive of Caloprymnus than B, lesueurt and in 1931 I was unable

to get any positive evidence of the latter in this part of the Lake Eyre

Basin. Longinan (1930) does not record it as a Queensland species.

T'o the west, the records are few and derived chiefly from journals

of exploration in the Sandridge, Gibson, and the Victoria Deserts and

their value is uncertain owing to frequent confusion in the accounts

with Lagorchestes spp. and Thalacomys, and the absence of material

m support. Ilowever, I accept Giles’ citation (1889) at approximately

24° 42’ South and 127° 44" Hast in Gibson Desert ur 1874 ag the mode

of occurrence is characteristic and I have taken it personally north

of Desolation Glen in the Rawlinson Range, only 50 miles south-east

of his locality, Carnegie’s (1898) record from Wilson Cliffs in the

Sandridge Desert at lat. 22° 1’ South and 126° 57’ Hast may perhaps

relate to Thalacomys. The Canning Stock Route Expedition of 1981,

Which crossed about 100 miles west of Wilson Cliffs, recorded neither

the animal nor its warrens, nor is there any recognizable account of

the animal in J. Forrest’s journal of the 1874 traverse along the 26°

paraUel, though in the latter case as in most early exploration, such

negative evidence is not likely to be significant. The qnestion of the

isolation of these Central and South Australian populations of

B, lesueuri from those of Western Anstralia, which has an obviows

bearing on the validity of the three races named is thus Jett undecided

by the published reeords. The case for continnity of distribution in

the recent past, based on the continuity of ayailable habitats is, how-

ever, a yery strong one; even if the eentral portions of the three

western deserts are regarded as impassable barriers, there remain

three avenues. of feasible jntercommunication along three routes, viz,

the coast lands of the Bight, the 26° parallel, and the north and

eastern margin of the Sandridge Desert. In conneetion with the

latter it may be noted that the large ‘trabbit’? warrens recorded by

M. Terry in 1929 in the Tanami district in approximately 28° South

and 129° 51’ Mast, would almost certainly be warrens of B. lesveurs

doubtfully parasitized by rabbits.

Its present status (1958) is everywhere a rapidly dwindline one,

It survives in very small mumbers in the territory of the northern

moiety of the Tlyowra and of the Worgaia to the east and north of

the Elkedra (Ilketera) River, which has only recently been bronght

under pastoral aceupation; possibly also, as an extremely attenuated

remmant at one or two points in the drainage of the Sandover and

Plenty Rivers, and in the Reseryes of the south-western seetor, In

the latter its persistence will depend in large part on the extent to

242 RECORDS GF THE S.A. MUSEUM

which the fox is able to increase its range to the north, The southern

portions of the Reserve have been heavily infiltrated by this post im

recent years and it is doubtful if it exists today in the Musgrave

Range area, where it was in large numbers only twenty years ago.

The species formerly oeeupied a prominent place in aboriginal life

and lore, in practical venery aud in legend. Its identity is easily

tracealile in their accounts, by its habit, unique in the Macropodicdae,

of exeavating large warrens for community dwelling und by its

trueculenee, To the Pitjanjarra of the Reserves it is known as metika

or tehungoa, and the seeond of these terms has a very wide usage,

ranging in the north beyond the Rawlinson Range into Pintubi

territory, while in the south reeognizable variants of it can be traced

as far as Ooldea. The western Arunta eall it tnunka, but their eastern

moiety bave largely adopted the Ilyowra word, alutta, which in recent

times they have carried into the Pituri creek and Toko range ares on

the Queensland border in lat, 22° 30° South upprox. The original

Wonkamnnna of this district are now reduced to a very few

individuals who no longer ocenpy their home territory, and in a recent

visit to it Twas unable to learn their name for the animal trom their

supplanters, or to fix definitely whether the species ever oceurred

there. However, it certainly extended to a point about half way

between the Tarlton and Toko ranges, and within 50 miles of the

horder. These two names also have considerable extension to the

north and are used or understood, far beyond the boundaries of the

Arnnta and Ilvowra as drawn by Tindale (1940), The Wonkanooroo

and Dieri call it kanunka, which snygests a recent derivation from

the Arunta word.

In 1951-38, before the fox had beeome a serious factor, I found it

one of the most plentiful maminals of the Reserves, Tlowever, its

numbers fluetuate greatly and its oceurrence is loeal and discontinuous

and not uniform. Warrens housing a big population during one

season may be found quite deserted the next, though conditions lave

not greatly changed in the meantime. It has often been deseribed as

an animal of the ‘sandhills’? bot this is only true in the vernacular

sense in which all areas away from rocky ranges, are so described.

With the exception of rocky hills and ranges and dense thickets, it

colonizes most types of country; grassy and herbaeeous loam flats

within the Major ranges, open mulea and ironwood parks skirting the

ranges, and penetrates deep into the true sandridge areas as well, Here

as elsewhere, however, its warrens are usually made in the firm loam

at slight clevations on wndulating swales and not in the sandridges

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 243

proper, On the northern margin of the Amadeus Basin the burrowing

is often done into slight outerops of friable limestone and gypseous

rock and in 1950 T noted a similar occurrence over a small area

between the western Macdonnells and Stuart Bluff Range, though the

animal has long been extinet there. This is the type of warren noted

by Giles (supra) and is affected also apparently by the coastal

colonies at Roebuck and Shark Bay.

In general, Central Australian warrens are much less complicated

than those described in Western Australia by Gilbert in Gould (1855)

and Dahl (1897). One excavated on a loam Hat at Yaringa, sonth-

west of the George Gill Range, went to a total depth of no more than

four feet, at which level lay the main gallery from which two

tehungoos were taken. Above this were many short off-shoots which

were occupied by rabbits only and this arrangement is a frequent one

but whether it is universal here as Wood Jones (1923-1925) avers it

is further south, is doubtful. The burrowing habit is more funda-

mental in tehnngoos than in rabbits, a large proportion of which in

these latitudes lead a surface existence or make use of shallow excava-

lions only for shelter or breeding. When the rabbit invaded the

contre, abandoned or incompletely utilized tehungoo warrens were

plentiful as they are now, and it seems more likely that the rabbit

parasitized the tehungoo than vice versa, as has been suggested, and

this is also the native version. No doubt the rabbit has introduced an

adverse Jaetor into the ecology of FB. lesweuri as with other small

native herbivores, but in the 60 years they have heen together in the

south-western areas of Central Australia, it has not proved a fatal

one, and hut for the imerease of the fox it meht have continued ta

enjoy a somewhat reduced tenure, indefinitely. In areas of pastoral

occupation still other factors are superimposed by the presence of

stoek, with which it cannot cope.

Tt is extremely shy and cautious, strictly nocturnal and in summer

at least, leaves the warrens only long after dark and is a most

dificult animal to observe under natural conditions, even when it is

plentitnl, In the accounts of the Llorn Expedition and of some of the

explorers it. is confused with Laygorchestes hirsutus which is often seen

in daylight in spinifex tracts. The tehungoo, however, is not normally

found in such eountry but burrows in areas where the small plant

cover tends to be rather varied with salsolae and suceulents such as

Culandrinia and Portulaca and when large warrens are occupied, its

pads—tchungoo roads in local parlance—are often conspicnons,

244 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

radiating out to its feeding grounds. The track nearly always shows

a distinct imprint of the tail between those of the feet, and these are

wider apart than in Lagorchestes.

In addition to the green parts of a large muumber of plants, it

excavates and eats quantities of bulbs and tubers, of which the roots

of the very widely spread procumbent species, Boerhaavia diffusa, are

the most important (Pitjanjarra, karrpilba; Ilyowra, ayeppa). The

bulbs of the yelka or ont erass, Cyperus bulbosus, and of a lily called

hy the Dyowra ilelennya (Crimean sp.) are also sought out, as well as

an unidentified yamlike product known as poonha in the Musgrave

Range area. In the south-west seetor, where the quondong (Hucurya

acuminata) is plentiful, its fruits (waianoo, mangada) are an

important item of diet and are taken down into its burrows in

quantity. Not only is the (fleshy rind eaten but, like the local Notomys,

it makes use of the oily kernel of the nut as well, which necessitates

enawing away a large part of the flinty lard easing; a task for which

the stout rodentlike first meisurs are well adapted (Pl. xxvii, fig, Hj

Pl. xxviii, fig. A).

Under present day conditions it is not easy ta get mmdamaged

apevimens. Tt is wary of traps especially on warrens and when caught

in the ordinary types of small steel trap is difficult to hold owing to

its fragile limbs. A good many are taken accidentally by doggers in

the tnch larger dog trap which often takes the animal by the middle

and prevents struggling, Praetically the only way of getting it

undamaged is hy digging it ont which is extremely laborious, It is

powerlnl for its size and when taken from a burrow struggles

violently and seratehes and bites severely, making the while a harsh

aspirant soand with aceasional grunts. The latter 1 presume is the

eall which it has often heen stated to make at night when abvoad,

though T have never heard if thus in the Centre,

On moonlight nights the blacks occasionally take them when

feeding away from the warrens, either by the spear or with dogs, and

if pressed for food, the women will sometimes dig out the smaller

burrows, though nowadays the labour involyed is out of all proportion

to the probable results. In the heyday of the species on the Sandover

River, where for a tite it was in very large numbers, the Ilyowra

practised some ingenions methods of shortening this labour. Haying

selected a large and well populated warren, a party of men working

in the middle how's of the night, when the animals were away feeding,

securely blocked up the entrances to all the deep burrows, but left

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART UI 245

open a number of shallow experimental drives which were always

present on the outskirts of the larger warrens. The aluttas, returning

hefore dawn, were thrown into confusion by this denial of their

acenstomed refuge, and after frantic but unavailing efforts to clear

the entrances, were forced by the rising sun to take shelter in the

shallow drives, Here they were promptly stupefied with smoke to

prevent them digging deeper (whieh they otherwise do very expedi-

tiously) and were then dug out in numbers with little trouble. They

were munch relished as meat. Thirty-five years ago, towards the end

ol their major tenure of the Ilyowra country, their way of life became

considerably disorganized and a portion of the remnant forsook the

warrens and lived in holes in creek banks.

From most nonhuman predators it was well protected by its

strictly noeturnal feeding and deep burrowing habit, but the largest

of the local lizards (Varanus giganteus), a voracious creature,

attacked it in the warrens, and took considerable toll.

The specimens personally examined have heen free from the

larver ectoparasites. The animal has no characteristic smell, Repro-

duetion appears to extend over the greater part of the year and pouch

embryos and young, up to 170 mm, Jong, have been obtained both in

mid-summer and mid-winter,

ExrerxaL Craracrers: The material examined represents 32 indi-

vidnals, obtained from the following localities, all in the south-western

sector: (a) Chundrinna, N.W. of the Mverard Range at lat. 26° 5178.

and 132° 18’ E.; (b) several other points between Chundrinna and the

southern [ront of the Musgrave Range; (c) Allarimna, on the northern

front of the Musgrave Range; (d) near Murrachurra Spring, 20 miles

east of Mount Conner in lat. 25° 26’ 8. and 182° 13’ B.; (¢) Yaringa,

12 miles S.W. of King's Creck in the George Gill Range; (/) north of

Desolation Glen in the Rawlinson Range at about 24° 53’ S. and

128° 16° EK. That portion of the series which is sexed comprises

123, 189.

Wood Jones (1928-1925) has given an extended aceount of the

external characters of a series from the Lake Phillipson area and as

the present material is in substantial agreement with his, a full

deseription is dispensed with and the following supplementary notes

substituted,

His illustration of the head gives a much better impression of the

appearance of the living animal than earlier figures; the deep abruptly

trnneated muzzle ts especially characteristic and in this point it differs

246 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

from its congeners while somewhat resembling Caloprymnus. In lite

the rhinarium is bluish pink and its upper margin is evenly convex

and not spurred upwards in the centre, The facial vibrissae are well

developed thongh slender; the genals and supraorbitals are unusually

large and exceed the mysticials. The ear backs are evenly convex and

without indentation as in Caloprymnus,

In the manus the palm is vellowish white and coarsely granular;

the palmar pad being less developed than in Caloprymnus. The

digital formula based on the distal extension of the digits is

3>2>4>5>1 as given by Wood Jones, but the disproportion im

general development of the three central digits is slight and the

formula for size is 3>4>0r — 2>5>1; the claws are white and

translucent. In the pes, the plantar surface where exposed is

yellowish white, and coarsely granular over its whole extent whether

covered or exposed; at about the mid point of the metatarsos the

granules are hexagonal and average 13 per em. but elsewhere they

vary mich in shape and are often irregular. The encroaching of the

hairs from the dorsum vf the foot over the plantar surface is a

constant feature in all young and young-adult animals and the con-

dition is usually much as figured by Wood Jones (op. cit., fig. 199),

The hairs at this stage are uot felted down mto a mat but are

arranged in two overlapping layers taking origin in opposite margins

of the dorsal surface and remaining quite separate; the development

of hair is profuse and the insulation of the less calloused portions of

the sole and digits, very effective. In old animals, however, the hairs

are thinned out by abrasion and the entire plantar surfaee of pes

and digits is not infrequently quite naked. The apical segment of

the fourth digit is much less expanded than in Caloprymnus or

Aepyprymnus, and the elements of the main interdigital pad are sume-

times incompletely (nsed as in Poforous, a shallow suleus dividing it

into two longitudinal moieties. The nails of the digits are yellowish

white and translucent.

The tail is nearly circular in section and tapers slowly to its apex;

calloused areas ate not developed upon it. The pouch opening is

posterior to the mid point of the ventral length and the space inter-

vening between its lower margin and the cloaea is often nearly nude,

aml sharply defmed by laterally diverging hair tracts, The cloaca

has no enlarged bristles, but a short fleshy process is developed on its

posterior margin, similar to but smaller, than that which I have

recorded for Caloprymnus (1932), No sternal gland has been

observed,

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART II 247

Secondary sexual differences are slight; the male is not superior

to the female in linear dimensions, but is more massive, with a thicker

blunter head, and deeper muzzle, and heavier feet.

Pevace: The general colouration viewed from a distance of a few

feet varies in different individuals from grizzled buff grey to grey

brown with lighter ventrum and the head and appendages distinetly

eoutrasted in warmer buff and tan, At its best the pelage is dense

and soft; mid dorsally the main pile reaches 22 mm, with guard hairs

to 30 mm, lengthening on sides to 25 mm. and 33 mm. respectively,

The basal half of the main pile is about Ridgway’s slate grey, the

suceeoding third forms a sharply contrasted band varying in different

individuals from light buff, to tilleul buff, and the extreme tip clove

browu, The guard hairs are slate grey in the shaft, with a narrow

brown hand separating it from the flattened blade which varies from

ivory yellow to near white and the extreme tip shades off from sepia

io black; a small proportion of guard hairs are dark throughout. The

composition of the pelage is fhus similar to that of Caloprymnnus \ut

the overlay of ivory and white is mach less profuse and has less effect,

on the general ground eolour, which ranges from deep olive buff to

light brownish olive-

The sides are similar to the dorsum, but paler and less grizaled

and are sometimes separated from the ventrum by a lateral line of

rieh buff. The ventral fur averages 17 mm, with a sparse overlay

reaching 30 rm.; it is mostly bicolor, with a basal zone of slate grey

almost obscured by the terminal colour which is creamy white variably

washed and dappled with warm buff, The scrotum, small areas on the

throat, and mid helly are ereamy white to the base. The head is more

warmly eoloured than the body, the ground colour varying from tawny

olive to Ginnamon buff; on the muzzle it is closely grizzled with brown

and buff but the erown and genal surfaces are more uniform, The

inner surfaces of the ear are nearly nude except distally where they

are sparsely covered with short adpressed cinnamon bulf liairs.

Externally the ear backs ave well covered with loose Muffy fur, slate

at base, rich tawny olive terminally and conspicuously bordered at the

anterior margin with clove brown,

The forelimb is externally long haired, buff dulled by the basal

slate colour; internally somewhat lighter; the manus densely clothed

with adpressed hairs of clear cinnamon buff lengthening over the base

o! digits but not obsetiring the claws. The hind limb is externally like

the sides or rather darker and sometimes has a poorly developed

248 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

lighter hip stripe. The pes also is cinnamon buff or slightly richer

and has a tendency to darken on the outer metatarsal surface and the

fifth digit. Its hairing is close, short and dense dorsally, but is

greatly lengthened on the sides so as to overlap and obscure large

areas on the plantar aspect of the digits. In most examples the digits

of both manus and pes ave stained a bright orange tan by clay dust;

this can be completely removed by mild detergents leaving the colour

the prevailing buff. The immediate tail base is clad with dorgal body

far which gives place suddenly to short coarse hairs, which are closely

adpressed except on the terminal third of ifs dorsum, where a pro-

gressive lengthening hegins, Laterally and ventrally the colour is

uniform einnamon buff, hut dorsally this is darkened by a peneilling

of brown, increasing distally until it completely replaces the buff

ground colour of the subterminal fifth or more by rich prout's brown

to clove brown, The apex of the tail for distances averaging 35 11m.,

is pure white on all surfaces when unstained and dorsally its hairs

are lengthened to 20 mm, and frequently form, especially in subadults,

a (distinet erect erest. The tail is everywhere densely clad and its

scutation completely obseured.

Variation of the pelage in density, texture, degree of grizsling

and ground colour is considerable, hat in the present series cannot be

satisfactorily linked with local, seasonal, or sex factors. The shabbiest

coats with the darkest ground colour are found in winter months,

when rump abrasion is often marked; but dense, even, richly coloured

cots and their opposites occur al all times of the vear and there is

little evidence of a seasonal moult affecting members of a colony,

simultaneously, The coat in subadults as late as the P?M® stage, is

often looser, with a greater exposure of ground colour than in adults.

Wood Jones (op. cit.) comments on the fugitive nature of the

*‘vellow’? colouration in this species. T find that field skins in my own

collection, personally made in 1932 and 1933, and which have had no

contact with liqnid preservatives and have been stored in the dark,

still show the original colouration as noted on the freshly killed

animals at the time. Others in the South Australian Museum of the

same provenance which were treated there by immersion in alum and

salt pickle, show a more or less marked change of olivacious ground

eolour to warmer browns, which are not normal to the living animal,

and there is a variable degree of bleaching of the cinnamon buff of the

appendages.

Under the name ‘*Belfongia lesuenr grat’? Gould, Boardman

(1949) has deseribed the hair tracts in an advaneed pouch young trom

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART I 249

Bernier Island, whieh however, would more conventionally be

regarded as representing the typical race B. lesueuri lesueuri of Quoy

and Gaimard, In the present series, examples suitable for checking

the primary tracts are lacking, but in adults, except for small

suprarhinal and preorbital divergences, the external pelage over the

entire dorsal surface is directed uniformly caudad, and on the limbs

distad, the postaxial trends of the latter being largely obseured, In

undisturbed material the ventral inelination of the lateral fur is

slight and there is no median opposition ridge on the ventrum, as is

frequent in Caluprymnus. A reversed gular tract, directed forward

and outward is constant, and radial tracts diverging from the pouch

margins and precloacal areas of females, and the serotal area of

males, can usually be made out, In general, interruptions to the

primitive candad flow in the adult pelage, are much less in evidence

on both dorsum and ventrum, than in most Maecropodinae.

Dimexsions: The range and mean yalues in mms. of conventional

nensnrements for a bisexual series of eight fully adult mdividuals at

the P'M! stage, is given in tabular form on p. 267. Even when age

ehanves are thus drastically restricted, the variation in all items is

high, reaching 26% in the head and body length, Sexual differentia-

tion is inappreciable, the adult female being as large as the male.

Maximum dimensions for ear and pes are often attained as early as

{he P*M? stage. The tail is always shorter than the head and body in

adnits, but may be snbequal in younger animals,

The following figures give the detailed measurements of a

subadult ¢ (P*M*) trom Yaringa Creek, at the western end of the

George Gill Range, in Central Australia: head and body, 285; fail,

285; chest, 150; length of manus, 24; nail of third digit, 9; pes, 101;

4th toe, 42; nail of 4th toe, 17; ear, 86 x 22; rhinariym to eye, 31;

eye to ear, 25; eye (intercanthal), 11; weight in grammes, 910.

Weiehts of adults are not available, but would probably reach

3,000 grammes,

CGranian Crarscters (PI. xxvii, fig, A-IT): Both skull and

dentition of B. lesveuri present notable features which have been

imperfectly described and some of these separate it decidedly from

its congeners, by making an approach (especially in dentition), to the

more advanced condition of Aepyprymnus and Caloprymnus.

Since existing descriptions give little information on the variation

which oceurs, and are based for the most part on mixed series from

several localities, the whole question of subspecific variation on these

250 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

inportant heads, remains quite vague. In the present work, 72 skulls,

(the majority of them not sexed), from South, Central and Western

Australia have been used in examining the eranial and dental

characters of the species as a whole; fifteen of these, taken from

individuals of known external characters, represent the Central Aus-

tralian population, and these alone form the basis of the following

description, Differences shown by material from other localities, are

dealt with in the sequel, using this homogeneous series, as a standard

of comparison,

Intrinsie variation within the series, is lugh, both in non-metrical

morphology and dimensions; in a series of 23 eranial and mandibular

measurements the percentage variation in adults ranges from

7.5-40%, with a mean of 159%. Many of the most salient features of

the skull observed singly, such as the development of the rostrum,

size and shape of nasals, width of zygomatic arch and interorbital

region (which are very apt to give premature impressions of sub-

specific difference) are subject to marked individual yariation,

The skull is densely ossified, with strong musele ridging, and with

the mandible, attains a maximum weight of 19 grammes; it is the

shortest and widest in the eenns and in this respect is equalled hy

Caloprymnns alone amongst the Potoroinae, the length + breadth

‘atio falling as low as 1.5. The maximum aygomatic width is usnally

posterior, but wide variations occur in the overall zygomatie outline,

which is sometimes similar to Trichosurus vulpecula,

The nmzzle region is short deep and less conieal than usual, and

the mean facial index of 181 is one of the lowest lor the subfamily.

The nasal bones reach or slightly exeeed the Jevel of the anterior

margins of the orbits; their length <- breadth ratio is variable as is

also their overall shape and the conibined posterior margin may be

almost transverse, sharply angulate or invaginate in the mid line:

there is always a distinct and sometimes a sudden, constriction of

their width just anterior to the maxillo-premaxilliary suture. The

interorbital area of the frontals is of medium width averaging 25%

of the basal length; but is parallel sided until late in life when the

free margins converge slightly to form a moderate intertemporal

constriction. The supraorbital ridges are sharp and overhanging and

occasionally develop rudimentary postorbital processes. The varia-

bility of the coronal portion of the frontoparietal suture mentioned

by Wood Jones (op. cit. p. 209) is well illustrated but the transverse

condition is the commoner. The development of the temporal ridges

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART IIL 251

reaches a maximum for the subfamily in B. lesweuri, but their eon-

finence on the parietals is very posterior and a sagittal crest as in

Potorous tridactylus is not formed, At a lower level on the vault,

the sqnamosal suture is often strongly ridged, A crescentie inter-

parietal is long persistent and overlaps in part the supraoccipital on

the lambdoid crest, which is but moderately developed.

The occipital plane is nearly vertical and deeply indented and its

arch is low and broad; the paraoecipital process is well developed and

distinct posteriorly though its anterior surface is closely applied to

the bulla and it has little free projection,

On the lateral aspect, the premaxilla is reduced, though less so

than in Aepyprymnus, and still makes an important contribution to

the wall of the nasal cavity: its suture with the nasal is about equal

in length to that of the maxilla. The facial plate of the laerymal has

from } to 4 the area of the orbital plate; the lower foramen in adults

is usually larger than the upper, but they may be subequal and are

oceasionally conflaent. The zygomata, especially the malar contribu-

tion, are relatively much the most powerful in the Potoroinae, and the

infrazygomatie process of the maxilla, thongh it falls far below the

standard of Calaprymnus and the Macropodinae, is distinetly indicated,

The area of the temporal pterion is rugose and deeply impressed and

the series inspected affords no exception to, nor important variant of,

the frontal-squamosal contaet, which, following Owen’s original

observation (1866) now proves to be constant lor the subfamily

(Finlayson 1932, 162, and Pearson 1950, 213-221). The diastema, with

that of Aepyprymnus, is relatively the shortest in the subfamily, and

{he posterior palate is one of the narrowest; its posterior vaeuities

are also Jong and narrow and oceupy almost the whole of the inter-

molar space, the medium septum and posterior bar being reduced to

fragile remnants often lost by damage; their anterior extension varies

from the middle of M! to its anterior margin, and a pair of small

foramina sometimes lie beyond this. The anterior palatal foramina

are execedingly variable, the length fluctuating over a 40% range,

The enormous expansion of the alisphenoid bulla is perhaps the

most conspicuons specialization of the skull, though it comes as a

culmination of a well marked tendency in the Potoroinae, and is less

remarkable in the Macropodidae as a whole since the discovery of

Lagorchesles asomatus which approaches it in this character. Never-

theless the bulla in B. lesweuri is probably the Jargest in relative

volume in the Marsupialia and has comparatively few rivals in the

252 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

whole of the Mammals, In the prepared skull, owing to the incom-

plete condition of the upper rim of the tympanie annulus, the jalla

communicates [reely with accessory cavities in the posterior root of

the zvyvoma and adjoining parts of the squamosal; the eondition in

varying degree is general throughout the Potoroinae but is especially

developed in B, lesneuri. While the habits of L. asomatus are

unknown, &, lesuewi remains unique in the Macropodidae as a

fossorial adept and in seeking some funetional correlation of the

enlarged bulla, this fact inevitably comes to mind, and receives some

support from the fossorial and strongly bullate Thalacomys of the

same region. However, the conflicting evidence of the fossorial and

non bullate wombats amongst marsupials, and bullate and non bullate

rodents of burrowing habits must leave the matter am open one,

Tate (1948, p. 241) has noted a condition in the mastoul

sqnamosal region in whieh the Phalangweridae and Macropodidae

differ. I find that the same area has differential value both at snub-

family and species rank, within the Jatter. Tn the Macropodinae with

few and partial exceptions, the mastoid margin of the squamosal and

the root of the zygomatie process are separated by a deep fissure above

the tympanie annulns. In all genera of Potoroinae persistent attempts

are made to bridge this gap, by the oulgrowth of a delicate flange-

like process from the mastoid margin of the squamosal, which narrows

the fissure to a channel. In B. /eswewrt alone, this channel is in old

ave sometimes converted inte a closed canal by a separately ossified

plate joining the Hanee to the zvgoma root (Pl, xxvn, fig. F).

The mandible is distinguished by the stoutness and convexity of

the lower border of the horizontal body below the molar rows, the

width and relative erectness of the ascending process, and the exten-

sion of the angular proeéss into a slencler style conforming to the

contours of the billa. The confinence of the pterygoid and masseteric

fossae, is wide as noted by Tate, but very variable, and the masseteric

canalis very large, Abbie has sugeested that the latter is a lonectional

correlation in the Potoroinae to the presence of a large premolar, but

{le relative development of the canal seems to bear no simple relation

ty the size of the premolar or the length of the jaw in the different

species, as one would expect if this were sv. Potorous tridactylus with

a long slender jaw, and comparatively small P* has the canal as

strongly developed as &. lesuewri, where these proportions are

reversed, Moreover the long slender jaw of Dorcopsis luctuosa which

supports an enormous premolar (hoth absolutely and relatively larger

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 253

than anything shown by the Potoroinae), makes no departure from

the meagre development of the canal general in the Macropodinae.

The evidence of sexual differentiation is unsatisfactory, being

supported on the female side by two adit skulls only, but so far as

it may be aecepted indicates that cranial differences are slight. The

female skull tends to be slightly smaller, with shorter nasals, wider

interorbital space, Jonger anterior palatal foramina and a higher

facial index. Musenlar impressions tend to be less in aged females

than in aged males. Ave changes are not marked and their recog-

nition ig complicated by irregularities in dental suceession and

individual variation. ‘This leads to a wide overlap in dimensions and

strnetural detail hetween different dental groups; thus skulls as early

dentally as P*M* may be as large in overall size as aged skulls of the

same sex at P*M*.

Dimensions: As the sexual factor eainot be accurately assessed

in any of the three recent popwations and searcely at all in the snb-

fossil one, but is known to be slight, comparisons have been made for

the most part with bisexual series. The following figures give the

range antl approx. mean of skull measurements of (1) a bisexual

series of 8 at P'M' and (2) : females at P®M*: greatest length,

64,3-73.3 (69.2), 62.5-65.8 (63.4); basal leneth, 54.2-60.2 (57.2), 52.3-52.6

(A2 BY avgomatic breadth, 40) 5-45. 6 (48.0), 28.7-40.6 (39.9); nasals

length, 22.8-28,6 (26.3), 32.5-24.9 (23.6); do, greatest brendth et

(12.4), 10.7-12.1 (11.6); do. least breadth, £9-6,8 (5.9), 5,2-5.4 (5.3) ;

depth rostrum, 14,0-18.6 (13.0), 11.3-12.9 (11.8); interoxbital sonetrie.

tion, 15.2-16.3 (14.5), 14,0-15.4 (14.5) palate length, 34.8-38.0 (36.4),

31 4-34.9 (32.8); do. breadth inside M*, 9.8-12.2 (11.8), 9.5-11.1 (10.4);

ant, palatal foramina, 2.2-3.8 (2.8), 2.0-2.9 (2.5); Hr ery 7.3-9.0

(7.6), 6.0-8.4 (6.8); bulla Jength, 15.1-17.0 (15.9), 14,8-16.6 (15.0);

bulla breadth, 11.0-13.8 (12.2), 11.2-12.1 (11.6); facial index, 171- 191

(181), 166-197 (179); mandible, maximum breadth, 40.2-44.0 (41.7),

36,5-38.8 (37.9), maximum depth below M., 8.1- we (8.8), 6.6-8.6

(7.6); breadth ascending process, 13,7-16,3 (14.8), 12.5-13.5 (13.0),

Desrreion (CP). xxviii, fig, A-M): Variation in “Baas dimensions

ol teeth not rapidly altered hy wear, such as the premolars and

molars, ranges from 5-349 with a mean otf 15%,

The incisors, as a group are relatively large and functionally

important teeth, by the standards of the genus, and they sustain heavy

wear. As a resnlt the Ist and 2nd are subject during life to marked

changes of size and shape. I’ when unworn has a broad alveolar base

254 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

tapering to a pointed apex; growth is persistent however over a large

part of the life span and as the tooth is extruded the apex is worn

back to a chisel edge whieh steadily widens until it yields the

maximum diameter of the tooth, Its size dominance over I° and 1

is greater than in B. cuniculus or B, penicillata and tends to inerease

with age, and from 4 to 4 of its height prajects beyond their working

level, The dorsoventral height ranges in the present series from

4,9-7.9 rom. and its antero-posterior diameter from 2,2-3.0 mm, Both

Thomas and Waterhouse claimed that a broader and flatter I’ was

tliagnostic of B. lesweurt, but the material in hand does not support

this. There is however a noticeable rotation af the tooth with

advancing age, so that its labial wall becomes more and more anterior

in aspect and less lateral.

I? is relatively constant, reaching a maximum antero-posterior

length of 3.0 im. to young skulls and a transverse breadth of 21. 1°

when wnworn is comparatively narrow and upright with a vertical

height of 3.1-8.6 mun, and antero-posterior length of 2.0-2.6; with age,

it is thrust forward more and more and obliquity of wear may

increase the latter value to 3.3 mm. The transverse broadening of

I? and the inturning of the eutting edge of I are both more marked

than in other beltongs and foreshadow the extreme condition of

Aepyprymnus.

The lower incisor is comparatively stout for the genus but shows

all the differential characters separating the Potoroinae from the

Macropodinae in this feature; i.e, its great absolute length and

relative narrowness, Maximum width at alveolus with evenly tapering

outline to the apex, absence of median expansion of the blade, and of

abrupt ineurving of the upper margins. Tn adults of moderate wear,

the anteroposterior length from alveolus is 10.6-11.4, and this is main-

tained or even inereased in very old animals, where the shaft of the

tooth may be completely denided of enamel. The maximum trans-

verse breadth of enamel ranges from 2.7-3.1 and shows considerable

resistance to age changes nntil late in adult life, though its site moves

steadily distad. On the other hand the maximum breadth of the tooth

as a whole, ineluding dentine, increases markedly with age and 1s

always proximal; in eight adnits it varies from 3,2-4.3.

The canine is well developed but variable in size, shape and

inclination, In the young fully enamelled condition it is flattened and

incisiform, with the labial face nearly as large as that of [', and with

a vertical height of 3 mm. ca. and anteroposterior breadth of 2.2 mm,

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART Hl 255

As wear advances the apex becomes more pointed, the recurvature is

accentuated and both height of the tooth and width of root exposure

in alveolus may increase to 3.7 mm, The premaxillary suture bisects

its alveolus and the tooth is always much nearer to the 3rd incisor

than to either of the premolars, Although clearly a functionally

important tooth its apex never descends much below the middle of LI’.

In the permanent premolars, B. leswewrt illustrates in an extreme

degree the general trend of the Potoroinae towards enlargement,

suppression of cusps and vertical corrugation, P* is a narrow anid

usually almost parallel and straight sided blade and in relation to

skull size is by far the largest tooth in the subfamily, Wear ts heavy,

but is chiefly seen in removal of the surface grooves, and reduction

o! the height of the blade; the latter may fall trom 3.8 mm. to 1.7 mm,

while length and breadth are almost unchanged. In taloned forms of

the tooth, the maximum breadth is always posterior, otherwise at

about the anterior third. Both the erest of the blade and the

enamelled wall ol the crown are of nearly even height throughout its

length, the main posterior eusp alone being sometimes slightly raised ;

in 10-grooved examples the anterior cusp is seareely differentiated.

The number of grooves on the external wall varies from 8 to 10; 9

being present in 50% of examples and 8 and 10 occurring with equal

frequency in the remainder. The grooves may form an even series of

shallow crescents with the convexity anterior or they Maay have a more

or less radial arrangement converging postero ventrally to a common

centre below the posterior angle of the ¢rest. The normal inclination

of the long axis of the tooth is evenly anterointernal towards the

midline of the palate; rarely it may be parallel but never extraverted

as i penieillate.

A point of some general significance with P* is the variability of

the postero-internal talon and its cusp and the internal ledge—

struetures which in the Macropodinae are regarded as of great specific

integrity. In B. lesveuri of this series, both may he completely absent

or strongly developed in premolars of the same degree of wear

(Pl, xxviii, fiz, F and G), and the talon is sometimes aceompanied by

a posterior fossette. Anteroposterior length of unworn or slightly

worn examples ranges from 7.6-8.7 mm, with a mean of (8.2), trans-

verse breadth 2.5-3.3 (3.0) and vertieal height of enamel He 38 (3.5).

The lower secator Py, is a siinplified and somewhat reduced

version of the upper, with length and breadth about 15% less but with

the height of the blade retained, The maximum breadth may he

256 RECORDS OF THE $,A, MUSEUM

either posterior or anterior or at both, but never median. External

grooves vary from 8 to 10 and generally conform to those of its

opponent; where the number differs, the lower tooth generally has the

fewer, The talon and internal ledge are almost completely suppressed,

Antero-posterior length 6.5-7.3 (7.0); transverse breadth 2.5-2.5 (2.7);

vertical height of enamel crown 3.2 3. § (3.5).

The 3rd upper premolar P* is a much shorter and broader tooth

than the secator; Its Maxiinum width is always median and its outline

oval in superior view. ‘The talon is absent, buf the internal ledge

variably developed, and either 56 or G grooves are present an the

external wall with equal frequency; the grooves are commonly almost

intaet when the tooth is shed, The 3rd lower preiuolar P, is similar

to the upper and is reduced in about the same proportion as the lower

seeator, Its outline is slightly reniform, the lingual wall being con-

cave with the crest of the blade conforming to this curvature; grooves

0 or 6. Seven examples of upper and lower 3rd premolars, derived

from skulls showing a rather wide range of development, have the

following dimensions, respectively:—atitero posterior length, 4,7-5.4

(5.0), 4.04.9 (4.5); transverse breadth, 2.7-3.1 (2.9), 2.3-2.8 (2.5);

height of enamel crown, 2.7-8,2 (2.9); 2,9-3.3 (3.1),

The upper deciduous premolar MP*, is of the usual quadrate

molariform type and is frequently as large as the third trae molar.

Its chief interest lies in the sectorial modification of the antero

external cusp, augmenting the blade of the contiguous P*, 1 first

drew attention to this feature in Aepyprymnus (1981) where it is

very strongly developed and Tate (1948, 249) has since diseussed it in

other genera. In B. lesueuri, it is well, thonglh variably developed in

both upper and lower series, The mandibular tooth MP, is trigonid

the anterior lobe heing alinost monopolized by the secant antero-

internal eusp; it remains however four rooted, In size MP, is much

inferior to M;. The following are the dimensions of MP* and Be,

respectively in the 7 subadult sknlls; antero-posterior length, 3 3.3-3.8

(3,5), 33-85 (3.3); breadth anterior Jobe; 2,8-3.2 (3.0), 1.8-3.5 (2.2);

breadth posterior lobe, 3.3-3.7 (3.5), 2.7-3.0 (2.9).

The upper molar rows, in distinction from B. cuniculus and B.

peniclata are decidedly arched, with the greater convergence

posterior, The effect is accentuated by the rapid diminution, in

overall size and especially of transverse breadth, of the 2 posterior

molars, whieh is a marked though not exclusive characteristie in

B. lesueuri. Tate (1948, 269) has recently redirected attention to the

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART IL 257

difference between the Potoroinae and Macropodinae in molar

formulae and has published some dimensions of the molars of 3

examples of B. lesuewri. As noted earlier by Wood Jones, however,

there is much individual variation in this regard, and in the present

series the range in dimensions is wider than given by Tate. I find

also, that in expressing the general size relations of the molars as

funetional units, an approximation to the sectional crown area is a

more convenient and more adequate criterion than linear dimensions

alone, and the formulae which follow are based on the values of

1 (“2”), where 1 is the anteroposterior length, and ab and ph

are the transverse hreadths of the anterior and posterior lobes,

respectively.

In the upper molars the sequence M’>M'>M'>M* occurs in 9

of the 7 eompleted dentitions measured, the other 2 showing the

alternatives M'>M!2>M'>M* and M’=M?>M">M? the position of M*

and M' being constant throughout. In the remaining 8 skulls,

M?>M? holds in all, and M'>M® in the 3 examples in whieh the latter

tooth has erupted, Clearly therefore there is a high degree of

probability, that on completion of the molar series in the subadult

examples, 18 of the 15 examples (87% ea.) would show the dominant

2.1.3.4, sequence, The frequencies qnoted later in comparing popula-

tions have been deduced in this way from mixed series of adult and

suhadult dentitions, rather than on adults alone, whieh sometimes

form less than half the available material and would certaimly yield

less accurate estimates, The range and mean of the molar crown

areas expressed as a percentage of that of the corresponding first

molars are: M' (100); M* 97-114 (106); M® 63-95 (78); M* 20-49 (31).

Tn the mandibular series, the declension in size is less rapid. The

sequence M.>M,>M,>M, hols tor approx. 62%, M,>M, im 31%

and M,—M, im the remainder; M. and MM, are constant in the sequence,

The variation in erown area of the lower molars and their mean

valnes, expressed as a percentage of that of M, is: M, (100); Mz

113-134 (124); M, 90-121 (104), and M* 40-60 (49).

With regard to size relation belween the upper and lower series

there is also much overlapping, but in general the npper Ist and 2nd

molars are larger in crown area and relatively wider than the lower

and the lower 3rd and 4th molars are larger in area and wider than

the upper, Length > breadth is the commoner condition in most of

tle molars of both series, but breadth > length has the higher

frequency in M?, M* and M,. In M? the posterior lobe is generally

258 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

wider than the anterior, and in M, invariably so; in all other molars

both upper and lower, narrowing of the posteri ior lobe is by far the

commoner condition, Mt is exeessively variable and sometimes almost

vestigial and is not always strictly bilobed in form, so that its

quantitative relations are less aceurately expressed than in the

anterior teeth.

The erown pattern of the molars is essentially similar to that of

Caloprymnus and Aepyprymnus and represents an advanee on the

lophodont element of the biuno-lophodont system of cusps which

prevails in the vest of the sub family. In the upper molars, however,

the main transverse ridges are still confined to the bueeal cusps,

There is a general increase in height and saliency of all cusps and

ridges and in particular a preeursor of the anterior basal ledge of

the Macropodinae is strongly developed, In unworn upper molars,

the oeclnsal surface is narrow, occupying only about 4 the available

width of the crown, and the exposed lingual wall is frequently twice

the height of the bueeal. Cor responding features in the lower teeth

are similar but less marked. Crown wear on the molars is compara-

tively slow and at the P' M* stave dentine exposures are generally

confined to the lingual cusps of M'; in very aged examples it does,

however, proceed ta complete obliteration of crown pattern. Inter-

proximal wear is also negligible except in very aged exainples. In the

three dimensions studied there is no signifiennt difference between

corresponding molars of adult and subadult dentitions,

The range and mean (in brackets) for—(1) the antero-posterior

leneth; (2) breadth of anterior lobe; and (3) breadth of posterior

lobe, of the molars in a bisexual series of 15 skulls, follows :—

M', 4,0-4,4 (4,.2)5 3.9-4.5 (4.2); 3.94.6 (4.3). M*, 4.0-4.5 (4.2); 41-47

(4.5); 4.0-4.6 (4.2). M*% 3.6-4.0 (3.8); 3642 (3.8); 30-35 (3.2).

M', 2.0-3.0 (2.8); 24-2.8 (2.3); 1.522 (18). My. 2.7-42 (4.0): 3.0.36

(34); 3642 (3.8), Mi 4049 (44); 39-45 (41); 3840 (4.0).

M,, 8.641 (3.9); 3.7-4.2 (4.0); 3.0-3.8 (3.5), M.. 2.4-3.1 (2.8); 2.6-3.0

(2.8); 1.6-2.2 (2.0). The values for Ms.is in situ are: Upper 11.4-13.0

(12.1). Lower 11.8-12.8 (12.2).

The tooth ehange in B. lesweurt ig subject to considerable varia-

tion; the commonest condition is that P* erupts after M* or with M’,

when the skull has attained to 90% of its metrical development and

somatic development is equally advanced. The premolar condition in

B. lesueurt is a more reliable guide to maturity than the molar; M*

is erratic in coming into place, sometimes delayed until the skull is

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART I 259

aged, at others appearing precociously in very early life, The

functioning dental condition P*M* appears to be long persistent and

tides the animal over a considerable range of developmental stages.

Sexual differentiation in the teeth is chiefly shown by the Ist

upper incisor which in both adult and subadult groups is distinetly

larger in males than in females and of more persistent growth. In

this it usurps the usual sex linkage of the canine, which is not

appreciably different in the sexes.

THE LOWER SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REPRESENTATIVE.

DistarsuTion axp Hasrrs: There is abundant evidence to show

that Belflongia lesueuri was formerly one of the most numerons and

universally distributed mammals of South Australia, finding and

colonizing suitable habitat zones im all the distriets of the State with

the possible exception of the deeper Mallee and the flooded portion of

the lower South-KMast and the inner portions of the Nullabor Plain,

Tt was well established on the Adelaide Plain, where its remains are

sometimes brought to light today from long forgotten warrens, by

suburban building operations.

To the early settlers it was a familiar animal and traditional

knowledge of it persists im many eountry districts, but written

accounts are rare, the early press commentators on the South

Australian fauna nearly always quoting the existing uccounts of

Waterhouse and Gould, which relate almost entirely to Western Ans-

tralia, A valuable exception was provided by A. Molineux who

published some interesting details of its abundance in 1855-6 in the

farming distriets of the Lower North between the Light and Gilbert

Rivers, 50 miles north of Adelaide, where it did some damage at

harvest time, both to standing erops and hay stooks. He mentions

having shot 149 in four nights, and 50 in one night in this locality,

and confirms mueb that had been oliserved by Gilbert in Western

Australias particularly in the enormous size of the warrens, the call,

and the strietly nocturnal habit. Fle considered that they were grass

and erain eaters in the main, and referred to the Enropean prejudice

against the flesh, whieh he had personally found baseless. J. H.

Browne (1897) also gave a valuable account of it in the same district,

deseribing its burrows and the natives’ method of procuring it there-

from which inelnded a fumigating technique as in the Centre.

G. W. Francis records that in 1862 it was one of the first

zoological items in the collection maintained in the Botanic Gardens,

260 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

as an early preeursor of the Adelaide Zoologieal Gardens, and two

years later M, Symons Clarke gave details of two specimens taken

near the suburb of Walkerville, and again in 1889 near Two Wells, 30

miles north of the town. From 1900 to 1904 the greater number of

the specimens in the South Anstralian Museum were received, chietly

trom the Gawler River district, which at this time, was one of its last

strongholds on the Adelaide-Wakefield Plain. A small group from

this locality was maintained in captivity in the Museum grounds, and

formed the basis of the mounted group now exhibited there, The lust

specimen from Kyvre Peninsula was obtained at Worunda, near Port

Lineoln—the locality of Waterhonse's type of harveyi—in 1909.

With regard to aboriginal names for the species in lower South

Australia, the only terms whieh ean be assigned to lesuewri with mueh

certainty, are yelki of the Narranga of Yorke Peninsula, and bukurra

or bokra of the Neadjeri of the Lower North district,

The chief causes of its remarkably sudden decline have been

discussed hy Wood Jones (op. cit.), but these are not adequate for a

complete explanation in all districts. The late Mrs. Daisy Bates while

at Ouldea collected considerable evidence from the aborigines to show

that its numbers had diminished markedly in the coastal areas at the

Head of the Bight before Huropean influence had become appreciable

there, and this at a time when if was still very plentiful in the drier

tracts north of Ooldea to the Musgrayes, However, by 1910 from one

canse or another, it appears to have been virtually extinet in the

Southern Division of the State, below the parallel of 32° South, which

includes all the agricultural areas. In the pastoral country to the

north of this line, the sueceeding 40 years have, as far as can be

ascertained, seen its disappearance from all except the fav north-

western distriet, where both its populations and its prospects of

survival are identical with those of the Centre, already reviewed,

We owe to the energetic intervention of the late Professor Wood

Jones the possibility of the survival of the species in the south. Ju

1920 he obtained living specimens from the Lake Phillipson area in

the north-west division, and suceesstully maintained them as a breed-

ing colony at the University of Adelaide for some years. Some of the

progeny of this gronp were transferred in 1924 to the sanctuary of

Flinders Chase at the western end of Kangaroo Island at the mouth

of St. Vineent Gulf. The site is for the most part densely bushed and

not very well suited to its habits, but reeent reports from the Ranger

indicate that it is still extant though its inerease is slow.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART IIL 261

Reports of the reeurrence of ‘kangaroo rats’? in the southern

mainland of South Australia, are made almost yearly, but all which

have been investigated prove to be due to contusion with the bandi-

eoot, Jsoodon obesulus.

Remains of the species are plentiful in alluvium and eave deposits

throughout the State and are a common constituent of aboriginal

kitchen mididens.

The series examined below represents approximately 36

individuals, of which the bulk is unsexed skeletal material. It is mueh

more restricted in geographic range than the Central Australian

collection, comme for the most part from the coastal Adelaide-

Wakefield Plain, with outlying specimens {rom the nearer foothills of

the Mt. Lotty Range and from Yorke and Eyre Peninsulas. The locus

of ifs most northerly specimens is 700 miles south-west of that of the

most southerly of the Central series. Sethe examples bred in captivity

by Wood Jones from stock from Lake Phillipson, an intermediate

sie, are anomalous in respect to pelage and cranial eharacters and

have been deleted from both accounts,

External Craracrers anp Pauace can he tested only on four

individuals; a skin from southern Eyre Peninsula and three mounted

speciniens from the Adelaide district, which have heen on exhibition

in the Sonth Australian Mnseum for thirty years. Soft parts, so far

as they can be checked in this dried material are in close agreement

with the Central animal. The Eyre Peninsula skin is in good preseva-

tion, unfaded and indistingnishable from winter skins from the Centre,

The mounted specimens are too faded for colour comparisons, but are

in close agreement with Central skins in all points of composition and

colour distribution; the subadult specimen has a white apical erest

strongly developed, The pelage is not richer in the south.

Fiesir Diwenstons are quoted in the table on p. 267 for a bisexual

series of 9 examples at P*M', The variation is still wider than in the

Centre, reaching 26% in the head and body length, and there is a wide

overlap with that series in each item; the slight increase in the mean

length of pes in the south may he significant, but the other differences

are doubtfully so.

Cranran Craracrers (Pl. xxvii, fig, C): Twenty skulls from

Lower South Australia have been examined and measured; four only

ave subadult, the remainder are at ?*M* and for the most part are

much more aged than skulls of the same dental stage trom Central

Australia,

262 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

In structural features there is close agreement with the Ceutral

series but the southern skull tends to he slightly larger. In a series

of 21 cranial and mandibular measurements of ie 16 at P*M"*, the

increase in the mean value varies from 1 to 15% with an average

increase of 5%; the greatest being the length af ae anterior palatal

foramina (15%), depth of mandible (18%) and diastema (11%).

Two other measurements are lower; the least width of nasals (2%)

and the facial index (4%). The increase is greater in longitudinal

dimensions than in teene Ves rse, so that the sknll is frequently propor-

tionately narrower in zygomatie width (8%) and in the width of the

mandible and its condyle (9%),

The differences hetween the two geographic series have no doubt

been accentuated by the greater average age of the lower South Aus-

tralian skull, but are not primarily due to this cause, since the sub-

adult skulls at P*M* show similar differences from their Central

counterparts. The mean variation in the dimensions of the southern

series is even greater than in the Central one, in the proportion of

22-15, and in nearly * of the measurements the range completely over-

laps both maxima and minima of the latter. As in the Central series

dwart (nlly adult skulls ocenr, smaller in most dimensions than

average subadults,

Dimenstons: The following figures give the range and mean of

skull measurements of bisexual ee of (1) 16 at P*M* and (2)

4 at P*M®, Greatest Jeneth, 63.2-76.2 (72.9), 68.0-70,0 (69.3); basal

leneth, 54.0-66.5 (63.1), 57.1-60.0 (5 9): pierce breadth, 39.5-46.2

(43,9), 41.8-48.2 (42.4); nasals length, 23,8-30,0 (27.8), 24.7-25,7 (29.3) ;

nasals greatest breadth, 11.5-15.8 (13.2), 10,0-11.9 (11.1); nasals least

breadth, 5.0-7.0 (5.8), 4.6-5.5 (5.1); depth rostrum, 11.5-141 (13.3),

11.7-13.6 (12.7); interorbital constriction, 14.0-17.0 (15.5), 14.6-16.2

(14.9); palate length, ae 41.2 (88.7), 34,0-87.5 (35.9); palate, breadth

inside M2, 10.8-13.8 (12.5), 10.8-11,8 (11.3); ant, palatal foramina,

95-44 (3,3), 2.7-3.2 tear, diastema, 6.7-10.2 (8.7), 7.7-9.0 (8.2) 5 bulla

loneth, 14,6-18.7 (17.1), 16.0-18.0 (16.7); bulla breadth, 10.5-14.8 (12.6),

12,4-13.5 (13.0); facial index, 162-195 (174), 171-181 (174); mandible,

maximum breadth, 38.0-45.0 (42.4), 40,5-40.5 (40.5); mandible, depth

helaw M., 9,0-11.8 (10.3), 8.1-9.2 (8.7); mandible, breadth ascending

process, 13.4-17,0 (15,0), 14.0-14.4 (14.2).

Dewrrrion: Here also the range of variation in dimensions is

greater than in Central Anstralia, and in all items there is a generous

overlap between the two series. The mean dimensions of teeth which

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART Iil 263

are substantially free from age and wear changes, such as the length

and breadth of premolars and molars tend to be slightly higher than

in Central Australia, the chief increases being P* 3.5%, P* 6%,

Mst3 30%, M.. 4%, M* 15%, M, 10%. In many other dimensions,

however, there is a virtual identity of mean values and Py is 2% and

M, 4% lower. The prediastemal teeth are difficult to cormpare

accurately owing to age changes, but in subadults are also slightly

larger, the canine probably as much as 10%.

Structurally the teeth in the two series are in close agreement.

The erown of the canine is obscurely bicuspid in two examples. P* is

somewhat more constant in talon development than in the Central

series and its anterior expansion is more frequent and more marked;

one 7-grooved example occurs, but otherwise 8, 9 and 10 grooves

uppear with abont the same frequeney as before, In the lower Pia

taloned variant with sigmoid outline (Pl. xxviii, fig, J) not seen in the

Central series, occurs in 2 examples.

The chief change in the absolute dimensions of the molars as

compared with their Central Australian counterparts, 1s the mean

increase in the 3rd and 4th of both jaws, and of the 2nd in the upper,

and a decrease in M, of the lower jaw. The molars also tend to be

slightly narrower,

The gradation in molar size as interpreted hy the sectional crown

area yields the same prevailing sequences as in the Central material.

The enlargement of the posterior teeth with respect to the first how-

ever (especially marked in the lower jaw), leads to the occasional

appearance of such conditions as M'=M' and M;—M,, which have

not been noted in the Centre, while M'>M*, M,=M,, and M,>M, do

not oceur. In the upper molars M*>M'>M*>M* accounts for approx.

90% of the cases, M2>M'=M*>M? for 5% and M2—M'>M3>M?* for

5%. In the lower series M,>M,>M,>M4 oeenrs in approx. 79% of

eases and M.—M,>M,>M, in the remainder. The range and mean

of the sectional crown areas expressed as percentages of those of the

first molars, are as follows: M?. (100); M®. 100-124 (112); M*. 68-100

(83); M*. 27-59 (36) and M,. (100); M.. 117-142 (180); M,. 104-182

(119); My. 53-82 (62).

The tooth change is not illustrated. There are no supernumary

molars, but a vestigial I’ oceurs in one example. The following

figures give the range and mean of the linear dimensions of the cheek

teeth; the values for the third and the deciduous premolars are

derived from 4 subadults and the remainder from 16 ut the P*M*

264 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

stage. P* length, 7,7-9.8 (8. 5); P" breadth, 2.6-3.6 (3.1) ; P* length,

5.0.5.6 (5.3); Pa breadth, 9.63.0 (28); MP* length, 343.7 (35),

MP* breadth ant. lobe, 2834 (2. 9); Ms'* in situ, 113 14.0 (12.5);

wid in the mandible P, length, 6.0-7.5 (6.9); Py breadth, 2.5-3.3 (2.7);

Ps leneth, 4,3-4.6 (4.4); ; P; breadth, : 2.3-2.7 (2 wet 5); MP, length, oa

(3.4); MPs breadth, 2.0-2.3 (2.2); Ms. in situ, 11.1-13.0 (12.7); Mt

anteroposterior length, 8.9-4.6 (4.2): ite: anterior lohe, 3.7-4.5

(4.2); breadth posterior lobe, 3.6-4.5 (42). M*®, 4.2.5.2 (4.5); 4.05.0

(44); 3.64.8 (4.2); M4 BAD rats R542 (40); 37-40 (A)

M! 19-86 (2.7): 31-33 2.8); 17-25 (2.1); My. 3542 (38); 3.13.5

(3.3); 344.0 (3.7); Ma. 404.9 (44): 564.3 (41): 37-45 (40): Me

3.6- BT | ei ; 86-43 (4.1); 3444.1 (3.7): My. 3.0-34 (3.1); 2.7-8.4 (8.0);

Supsvectric DirrwkeNvrrarton «N Rettongia lesueuri.

The relationship of the Central Australian and lower South

Australian Populations: While it is possible by the close examination

of series to detect and define divergent trends in these two popula-

tions, it must be emphasized that the differences noted are not only

slight in theniselves but are of an average character and leave many

individnals of both groups virtually inseparable by an appeal to the

minutae of morphology, and certainly quite inse parable by the facile

and subjective methods which have been rife in differentiating

geographical ‘*forms’’ of Australian mammals. TA is noteworthy that

the range of variation in the seographically restricted sample from

lower South Australia is greater in most items than in the more

widely clispersed one from the Centre: a act which appears to conflict

with the helief, for which there seems much justification in other

eases, that aridity with its concomitant of instability in ecological

conditions, is a potent factor in promoting variability in eremian

forme.

Under these cireumstances the use of another trinomial to

distinguish the Central Australian animal is clearly superfluous and

for practical purposes the two groups are here regarded as forming a

taxonomnie unit,

The wider question of the validity of Bl. harveyi as a South and

Central Australian subspecies, in relation to the typical B. Ll. lesweurt

of Shark Bay and B, 1. grayi of the Swan River district, is beyond

the practical scope of the present work. Although large colleetions of

hoth the latter are in existence and both have heen stated to be

variable, no detailed analysis of characters has been published, and

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 265

without sueh the material locally available is madequate for a decision,

Tate (1948, 269) the latest commentator, on a basis of existing

accounts, opines grayi doubtfully distinet from lesneurt, harveyi

probably more so. Cabrera (1919) held the opposite view.

The following comments, suggested by the results of the fore-

voing examination, are made as an interim contribution on this head.

Recent belie in the distinctness of grayi from harveyi, seems to be

based chiefly on the statement of Wood Jones (op. cif. 210) that the

Western Australian auimal was larger bodied and shorter eared. The

comparison from which this conelnsion arose, appears to have been

made between South Australian animals measured in the flesh and the

dimensions of the type as given by Thoinas (1888) for the stuffed skin,

in which the ear would have been much contracted and the body very

probably stretehed. The more recent measurements of Shortridge in

Thomas (1907) made on animals in the flesh from the Avon district of

Western Australia give values for the head and body and tail which

are much closer to those of South, Central and north-west Australian

specimens, while both ear and pes are actually the longest recorded,

The skull characters of the south-western animal have not

hitherto heen known with certainty: the specimen Q measured by

Thomas (1888) is doubtfully localized and gives values which merge

almost entirely with those of lower South Australia, The provenance

of Waterhouse’s specimens is also uncertain. Three skulls from

south-west Western Australia which have been examined during the

present work, differ from the lower South Australian population in

much the same way as the latter do, ftom that of Central Australia,

ic, there is an average 6% increase in the mean of all dimensions

except 3; the greatest being in the rostrum which is noticeably deeper

aud wider and in the least breadth of nasals. The diastema, inter-

orbital constriction and breadth of bulla are slightly lower by 2-3%.

Avain, however, as in the South-Central Australian comparison there

is a very wide overlap in the range of dimensions, which involves 20

of the 23 items studied,

Similar size increases oceur in most elements of the dentition and

there is a slight inerease in hypsodontism especially of P* (Pl. xxviii,

fiz, K) which is a stouter as well as a higher tooth when unworn, ils

vrooves are 10 in the 2 examples which can be connted—Thomas

records wp to 14 for the species, The mean for the length of molar

rows ig not increased but the individual teeth are slightly broader than

in Sonth Australian skulls. In matters of proportional development

266 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

which can be tested by mensuration, the south-western skull and

dentition are closer on the whole to those of lower South Australia

than to those of the Centre, but in a small residue of characters an

mtermediate condition obtains. In the crown area ratios of the molars

for example, the upper teeth repeat and accentuate the trend in the

lower South Australian series, towards enlargement of the posterior

teeth at the expense of the first. But in the lower jaw there is a

return to the Certral Australian condition. The size sequence formula

however, for both upper and lower teeth is the dominant one as it

occurs in both South and Central Australia.

One only of the 8 skulls examined is accurately localized; this is

a large male at P*M*, taken at. West Popanyinning, 90 m, south-east of

Perth (PI. xxvii, fig. D). ITts dimensions are as follows: greatest

length, 76.0; basal length, 66.1; zygomatic breadth, 47.4; nasals,

length, 31.5; nasals, greatest breadth, 14.5; nasals, least breadth. 6.6;

rostrum, depth, 14.8; interorbital constriction, 14.5; palate length,

41.5; palate breadth inside M*, 13.0; anterior palatal foramina, 3.9;

(iastema, 8.6; bulla, 17.0 x 12.5; facial index, 175; mandible, maximum

breadth, 44.0; mandible depth below M., 11.0; mandible breadth ase.

process, 17,6; P* 88x 3.5; Ms™ 13.2; P, 7.0x3.0; Ms, 13.3.

A single skull from Coolgardie, 330m. east of the Swan River

district (in the subarid Goldfields environment) is closer to the means

for lower South Australia.

No material of the typieal race certainly localized in Shark Bay

or the North-West Division of Western Australia, has been examined

hy the writer, but Shortridge’s field measnrements (in Thomas, 1907),

indicate that the means for Bernier Island specitnens are slightly

higher than those of Central or Sonth Australia, except for the ear

which is equally shortened. Ol pelage characters, little can be gleaned

except that fide Collett (1897) the apieal blanching of the tail is less

frequent In adults than in South and Central Australia.

The only detailed skull measurements of this typical form ayail-

able to me are those of Waterhouse (1846, 205) based on a drawing

by Owen and doubtfully comparable with the other data. However,

as amplified by Collett and Thomas, it would appear that a very

small bulla (eonsiderably below the mean in any other group)

exists in a comparatively large skull, and if tlris ratia is constant, it

would provide a valid distinction from the series here studied. Collett

267

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III

‘Apoatqoodsor 6% pue GOT 8B ‘boynmD ‘Wy “_ UI seUMOYT, ‘CG Aq poqont) »+—

(¢-¢g) 9¢-¢e

(If) G-OF

¥O-LG

(GE) 68-1

(CE) LE-FE

Ieq

(90T) OTT-ZOL

(OT) Z1T-801

e801

(101) F0T-96 |

col

(FOI) 80I-L6

seg

(06%) 00-08%

(16) OL8-E8z

B6Z

2(€6%) GO8-08%

00g

2(10&) O€8-91%

(gee) 09€-0¢8

(G18) 068-098

LoP

(FFE) OLE-STE

OLE

(61) 88-98%

Apog

pue peop,

“BOBO OL z

“Youou plosesy wo 7

"+++ eSprqsogg x9 SE TPT “VM “SI tetusog “ 1monsey,,

"+++ eSprqsoyg x9 S [‘PT “WA “QOMySIp uoay ‘,1he3,,

‘plhoy xe paqesnojeooy “P uLys paymg +, 1ABIB,, Jo ad Ay,

“"""" “WHH ‘sed 4? 8 [P0xestg = “BI[eIysnY [BiqUep

tens nwdsare a tH ea as obi 3) Stas “Pp uosdypryg exeT

““WTHH eWed 38 6 [enxesigq ‘“BITeIIsny qgnog TOMO'T

iinansa] nibuopag 10 ,SHOVY,, FHL {O SNOISNAWIQ] TVNYALXGY

I WTaVi

268 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

mentions also a sagittal crest and a bieuspid canine; the former has

not been noted but the latter oceurs sparsely in South Australian

skulls.

In taking a general view of the inter-relationships of the material

reviewed, it is clear that, in cranial and dental characters at least, the

three populations of Beltongia lesueuri in Central, South, amd the

south-western portion of Western Australia, form a metrical cline

ascending in the sequence named, but with a wide overlap between

sneceeding groups. At each stage of the transition a few characters

may be found to provide examples of lag or even reversion, but abrupt

discontinuities, of a kind foreshadowing speciation, are not presented.

Bettongia penicillata Gray 1837, subspp.

Drsrrieurion AND Hanrrs: The presence of this species in Central

Australia has not hitherto been reeorded; Le Souet indeed (1926)

expressly exeludes it therefrom in his remarks on its distribution,

In 1932, Mrs. D. Bates at Ooldea, drew my attention to an

aboriginal myth based on the karpitehi, an animal deseribed as

resembling Caloprymnus in size ancd appearance, in sharing also a

nestmaking habit, but difering in its black brushed tail. A year later,

in the Everard-Musgrave Range district, I learned that the karpitehi

was a living entity and known by that name, both to the original

Yankunjarra and to the Pitjanjarra, who partly supplanted them from

the west. They compared it with the tchungoo or metika (B. lesueurt),

but confirmed the nestmaking and black eandal crest, and knew it as

a sparsely occurring animal over a considerable area straddling the

South and Central Australian border. In the next two years it was

reported from Pundi (the most southerly point, about 85 miles sonth-

west of Ernabella), at Unyaha Hill on the Officer Creek, at Mount

Harriett, where a specimen was taken which was kept for a time by

a white dogger as a pet, and near Mount Conner, approximately 70

miles west of north of Ernabella, on the Central Australian side.

Tn none of these eases was I able to examine any material, but in the

old collections of the South Australian Museum is a specimen taken

near Waldana Spring, about 125 miles north-west of Ooldea, and this

is the only example of the karpitehi here studied,

The species is also recognized by aborigines from specimens, and

substantially similar aceounts given of its habits, over large areas of

the eastern and north-eastern parts of the Territory, where it has long

ceased to exist. In the hill country of Huckitta the Ilyowra called it

FINLAYSON—CENTRAIL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 269

indwarritcha; to the Worgaia on the Buchanan and Rankin Creeks it

was windijarra, and probably the velkamin of the mixed Warramunga

atid Walpari people east of the Murehison and Devonport Hills.

North of the Barkly Tableland along the Gulflands both in Queensland

and the Northern Territory it is probably still extant, and groups of

mixed Alowa and Mara blacks from Tanumbirini and Nutwood,

recently gave if the name, yamul. Hisewhere in the north there are

but vague accounts of it at Mainoru, at the Katherine and possibly in

the Finnis River district; but it may be noted that the vast areas of

richly grassed eucalypt savannah south of the Arnhemland platean,

would by analugy with its habitats in she south, provide ideal stations

for the species, but for the presence of stock.

In the winter of 1933, Michael Terry, while prospecting on the

Western and Central Australian border, observed ‘‘spinitex rats’? of

whieh he las given some account in his book ‘Sn and Sand.’’ This

aceount, however, has a three species basis, invalvine Lagorchestes

asomatus, Lagorchestes hursutus and Betlongia penicillata. Among

specimens sent by him to the South Australian Museum is a portion

of a skull from an animal taken in July 1983 near the Melwin Hills

in the Lake Mackay area about 470 miles north of the Waldana site,

and in the sequel this is treated tentatively as a second and markedly

distinet eremian phase of B. penicillata,

Disrrisirros Knsktwiern mw AusrrantA: Much uncertainty pre-

vails as to the former extent of the distribution of B. penicillala in

Australia, with some conflict in existing accounts, While it is no

longer possible to ascertain the foll truth, a review of records State

hy State, will fill in other gaps than the Central and Northern Aus-

tralian one, and elarily some obseurities,

Western Australia: The work of Shortridge (1910, and in

Thomas 1907) and of Glanert (1983, 1950) has made the position

elearer here than in the Hast. The northern record is at Shark Bay,

whence it extended in a widening belt to the Pallinup River on the

south coast. Kast of this line it is also aecorded some tenure by these

authors, but the extent of it is vague and leaves the question of linkage

with the south and central populations unsolved. However, the

Central Australian records given above are sited in eremian conditions

much more severe than those of its presumed eastern frontier in

Western Australia and go far to support the existence of such links,

if not today, at least in the recent past.

South Australia: The early writings of Gray (1848), Gould

(1852), Harvey (1840) and Waterhouse (1841) establish it on lower

270 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Eyre Peninsula, at the head of St. Vincent Gulf and in the Adelaide

district, Later, rural tradition following its extirpation, gives it a

very wide, if not universal distribution over the southern parts of the

State, It is less easy to trace in this way than B. lesweuri, however,

and was sometimes confused with Lagorchestes leporoides, mt when

both bettongs were known, B. penicillata seems to have been the

commoner species, Mainland records for South Australia supported

by recent material locally available are limited to a few examples in

the Sonth Australian Museum (infra) which come from the west

slopes of Mount Lofty and from Waldana, but sub fossil and native

camp site specimens, many of the latter quite recent, confirm its

presence in the lower South-Kast, the Fleurien Peninsula, Murray

Mallee, and Yorke Peninsula.

North of the 32° parallel, there are neither material records nor

accounts which can he regarded as free from entanglement with

Lagorchestes, except those of the Waldana and Musgrave-Hverard

Range area in the far North-West, noted nnder Central Australia.

The karpitchi legend is not local ta Ooldea but derived from visitors

fram the Musgraves. In spite of this wide hiatus in records in the

subarid areas of the State, the Muserave-Waldana occurrences

support the view of a former complete north-south occupation of

South Australia, as in the ease of B, leswewri, though it cannot be

supported by evidence as with that species. At least one, possibly

more insular representatives occurred in South Australian waters.

A skull of the extinet St. Francis Island bettong has been examined

(infra) and proves to be a form of B. penrcillata as predicted by

Wood Jones; and the “kangaroo” smaller than a cat, taken by

Flinders’ party on Flinders Island in 1802 (Cooper 1953) may also he

referable to this genus. However, Flinders’ accounts of the small

macropods of these islands, like those of Baudin, Peron and Ronsard

(Cooper 1952) are evidently a blend of Thylogale eugenti with smaller

forms.

Extirpation of B. penicillata in South Australia appears to have

followed much the same conrse as with B. lesweuri; the last three

examples taken, of which T have been able to get reliable accounts,

were at Riverton in the Lower North district in 1908, at Lameroo in

the Murray Mallee in the same year and on the Wild Dog Creek in

the Flentieu Peninsula in 1910,

OF the several aboriginal words which haye been applied to

“kangaroo rats’? in lower South Australian yocabularies, only one,

the coolgar of Harvey (1840) at Port Lincoln on Eyre Peninsula can

271

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III

“Kea °

Ble|itoiuad Bipudjjeg JO uouNquysip ayy yo dey 2By

"1. 2 gaS30 VisOLIIA

CDS fog TNNO GS yyy

. ao) A :

Vi1a18Vv

“Ll awaaD

383d 290148 GNyS

ivayy)

“JUE]X2 P2A2B2q

St sayads auyyyttt+

UdIUM UL SPIIP JIU) 4, FT

‘BoSiouedy eapsque _—St

WéquiBo'Bjeyouad saoea

BUY JO $o1j1yeI0) adAy P'S’ Zh

*SB9U24ANIIO 4O

SPs10924 JUBIJUBIS WYO ®W jeswydiad ©

ualjedns20 uradoing

JO duty Je UOINgaYSIP alqeqosg E2J_o

idl Ot sli

272 RECORDS GF THE S.A. MUSEUM

be applied with certainty to B. penicillata, the animal so-called having

heen identified by Gould in 1858. This is clearly equivalent to kulka

of the later Parnkalla vocabularies of Kyre Peninsula and probably

also to koka and kurka of the Kaurna of the Adelaide distriet. The

names bukurra or bokra of Le Brun and Browne’s providing, have

been linked with B, ogilbyy (= penteillala) by Johnston (1943) but

definitely belong to the burrowing: species, B. lesueuri.

Victoria; There are several categorical and inclusive statements

of the oeeurrenee of B. penicillata in Vietoria, viz, Forbes Leith and

Lucas (1884) and Thomas (1888), but the extent of its oceupation is

uncertain. Brazenor (in Harper 1945) states that Victorian specimens

are in the National Museum, Melhourne, and that the last record was

in 1857, Later, however (1950), le omits B. penicillata trom the list

af Vietorian mammals and substitutes RB. cwniculus Ogilby, hitherto

revarded as exclusively from Tasmania, where B. penicillata does

not veenr.

T have accounts of a nest building bettong from West Victoria

generally in 1854, and tle Grampians district in 1910. Nest building

would not of course distinguish B. exniculus from B. penicillata, but

the Sonth Australian populations in the lower South-East and Murray

Mallee distriets were almost certainly continuous into Vietoria, and

they are based upon a form with a small rounded extrayverted secator,

quite different from that of B. cwntenlus.

New South Wales: The elvief sources here are Gould and Krefft.

The former (18411852) bad personal knowledge of 11 down the course

of the Namoi to its junction with the Gwydir and on the adjacent

Liverpool Plains, He accorded it also a wide distribution thronghout

New South Wales except lor the coastal slopes of the Divide, where

he considered it to he replaced wholly or in part by gaimadi, held ly

some to be a closely related, possibly subspecifie form. Kretf (1864)

recorded it in western New South Wales on the lower Murray between

the Darling junction and Envston, 60 miles south-east, and made the

interesting statement that at Gunbower Creek, 150 E. of Huston, it is

completely replaced hy Aepyprymnus, He does not mention B.

penicillata on the Victorian side of the river.

Queensland; The species is not listed for Queensland in any of the

earlier accounts, and until quite recently, localized records were limited

to the original one at Coomnmoboolaroo in the Dawson Valley. This

was based upon the personal testimony to the writer of Charles

Barnard (a well informed naturalist and son of Lumboltz’s Lost), wha

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 273

comtributed largely to the latter’s collection. W. Boardman (1943),

however, published on an example from Pine Mountains in south-

eastern Queensland (Aust. Museum Sydney, No. 1121). Three

localities are so named in this area, and which is relevant is not

known—a mean position for it is plotted on the distribution map.

Tate (1948, 267 and 1952, 592) has given details of seven more in

American mnseums, taken at Mount Spurgeon and Ravenshoe towards

the western fall of the Atherton tableland; three of these were taken

as late as 1932. Recent enquiry by the writer in the field suggests

that it may still survive in the Gulf country of the north-west of the

State adjoining the Northern Territory border, though no material is

available in support,

The overall range of B. penictllata as outlined above, was probably

as extensive as that of B. lesuwenri, While it was absent from a con-

siderable north-vestern sector occupied by the latter, its eastern and

north-eastern extension was much vreater, and this, containing the

chief highlands ol the country, adds much to the total diversity of

hahitats occupied. The Torresian oceurrence is noteworthy as its

northern extension nearly equals that of Aepyprymnus rufescens,

which belongs exclusively to the east coast lands. Thomas’ dictum of

1888, on the range of B. penicillate “fall Australia exeept the extreme

north’? seems to have been at that time an expression of opinion

rather than an ascertained fact, but in the sequel as developed above,

it comes near the truth (fig. 2),

The status of the species is even more insecure than that of

B. lesueuri. Probably oths of its former range is now empty of it

and it survives only in three widely separated localities of North

Queensland, the Western Centre, and the south-west. of Western

Australia, Tts hold in the two former is slight and in the latter alone

does there seem much hope of perpetuating it.

IIanrrs: The sites which furnish the above records present

eeological contrasts of an extreme kind, They vary from North

Queensland forests under a 5Uin. rainfall, to spinifex plains on the

edge of the Sandridge Desert; from coastal dunes in Western Aus-

tralia to 5,000ft. plateaux in New South Wales; and from thermal

constaney under the monsoon in the north to marked seasonal changes

and sharp winters in the sonth-east. Morcoyer, versatility in exploit-

ing habitats is shown not only on this regional scale but in the

frequently ubiqnitous nature of its occurrence in restricted areas, In

South Australia it was less selective in this regard than B. Jesueurt

274 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and oeeurred in the Mallee and in the higher stringy hark (Hucalyplus

obliqua) tiers of the ranges, where the latter was rare or absent, On

the Fleurieu Peninsula, much favoured nesting sites were the patches

of blue gum forest (Mucalyplus lencoxylon) with a wiry tussock sedge

(Lepidosperma carphoides) and sparse herbage on an otherwise rather

open floor. At Cuballing in the south-west of Western Anstralia

where in January 1926 I obtained part of the series examined below, a

rather similar plant association ocenrs in Wandoo forest (Hucalyptus

redunca var. elata); but here the terrain is varied with rocky ridges

supporting thickets of a prickly shrub, Dryandra nobilis.

Nest making appears to be very characteristic of the species and

in some form or another is exhibited in all types of country even in

the spinilex flats of the Centre. But nests are not the only form otf

eammps used; in Western Anstralia it is sometimes locally yery

abundant, as Shortridge records for Pingelly in 1904 and as [1 found

it at Cuballing, where the animal was much more numerous than its

nests in the quite restricted areas from which it was flushed. I is

probable that at such times a proportion shelter in hollow logs and

rock cavities on the Dryandra vidges. The type of nest made

evidently yaries somewhat with locality; Gould’s account from New

South Wales differing considerably from Gilbert’s in the Swan River

district of Western Anstralia. 1 have seen no examples in South

Australia but they are described by those who knew them hoth here

and in western Vietoria, as rounded and woven of grass stems and

there is no mention of the earth excavation at the base as in New

South Wales nor of the wse of sticks in place of grass and of a tubular

entry poreh as in Western Anstralia,

At Cuballing, those put up in the day time from grassy flats had

a characteristic somewhat unwallaby-like gait with the head low, back

much arched and the tail not rigidly curved but fluent and with the

black brush displayed very conspicuonsly—it did not seem at all fast,

under these conditions. Wood Jones records that it was used in

coursing in South Australia nnder the name ‘*Squeaker’’; but this

term was also applied in Sonth Australia to a hare wallaby

Lagorchestes leporoides, whose speed and saltatory powers were

exceptional. In the evenings they were constantly about the enclosure

at the homestead, and even when invisible could often be located hy

their solt grunting in the dusk. By means of freshly toasted bread

they were enticed np on to the verandahs, where they were not at. all

abashed by the presence of three people, several cats and a lighted

lamps cats and bettongs were often within a few feet of one another

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART UTI 275

and neither animal showed the slightest interest in the other's

presence. They were taken very easily in a crude form of box trap

improvised for the purpose and baited with toast. Indeed it was often

easier to get the animals into the trap than to take them out alive, for

il less fierce than B, lesweuri, they are exceedingly quick and nunble

and bite and struggle as the latter does, with remarkable strength.

It shares with B. lesvewri and with most of the subfamily the phalan-

geroid characteristic of a tender pelage, and large patches of fur and

epidermis are easily lost in such encounters. A South Australian

observer, M. 8, Clark, stated that a local example taken im 1864

showed some slight prehensile power of the tail; I was not able to

confirm this with living animals at Cuballing—either in the open or

when trapped, but I am not prepared to follow Shortridge (1910, 821)

in discounting either its ability, or habit, of carrying grass with the

tail for nesting wurposes, Gould’s positive statements on the matter

were apparently based on his own observations and were subsequently

confirmed by animals in captivity. Photographie evidence of the sane

habit in Polorous tridactylus is provided by Le Souef (1926, Pl. 54).

Data on reproduction in the field is scanty; a female im my

collection taken in July at Angusta in the extreme south-west of

Western Australia, had a large furred pouch young of head and body

leneth 210mm, D. L. Serventy (1958-55), who has given an interesting

account of his observations in the same district as my own, records

large pouch young at the end of March, These two records seem to

indicate that the very rapid increase of its populations, which used to

oceur in Western Anstralia, were due to the species breeding several

times in the year as Krefft (1862) suggested was the case with B.

lesueuri. Krefft observed only single young in the pouch in New

South Wales.

At Cuballing, the living animal was observed to have a strong and

somewhat unpleasant smell. No ectoparasites were noted but ova of

such were present in the fur,

Recent Matarian or B. penicillata Wxaminep: This is both less

plentifnl and more ¢liverse than in the case of B. lesueuri. 1. For the

characters of B, penicillata ogilbyi LT have relied chiefly on 7 skins and

skulls in my own collection, taken at several points in south-west

Western Australia and fully authenticated, supplemented by 2 skins

and 6 skulls in the South Australian Museum collection and believed

to be of local origin. 2, The Waldana karpitchi (sxpra) in aleohol,

276 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

3. A markedly dwarfed skull of lower South Australian origin, 4. The

holotype of B. penicillata francisca Finlayson. 5. The holotype of

B. penicillata anhydra Finlayson.

Bettongia penicillata ogilbyi Gould

ExrernaL Craracréns: Anthenti¢e material illustrating the

external characters of the species, is available chiefly from Western

Australia, and the following brief review is based on dried material

representing 7 individuals from Cuballing, Popanyinning, and Augusta

im the south-western district and is provided to parallel that of B.

lesueuri (supra) and to draw attention to the marked variation in

pelage which oecurs there.

B. penicillata has been said to be the smallest of the genus, but

the material in hand indieates that at comparable dental stages it is

as large or larger, than the Central Australian B. lesueuri. In life

the animal appears slighter and more trimly built than the latter, and

its limhs are even more delicate, and tail, pes aid ear, are all shorter

in comparison to head and body length, The head is narrower, the

ear broader at base and the upper lip less developed than in

B, lesueuri. The mien is bold, alert and impish; characteristic of the

genus and differing widely from the prevailing types of physiognomy

in the Macropodinae (Pl. xxxi),

The upper margin of the naked tesselate rhinarium is produced

upwards and backwards in the centre as a more or less acute spur.

The mysticial vibrissae reach 40 mm, in length; the lower rows pale

brown or whitish, but the remainder jet black; the genals and supra-

orbitals, reaching 87 mm., are also black and less developed than in

B, lesueuri . Wye lashes are weak, as is general in the subfamily, but

erescentic rows of stout bristles (to 15 mm.) are strongly developed

on the lower margin of the orbit and less so upon the upper, Of

submentals and interramals few have survived undamaged in the

material—these are colourless and transparent, and in the latter

group, reach 12 mm, only,

The manus is similar in its main features to that of B. lesweuri

but is somewhat longer and slighter and with longer digits and elaws.

The second digit is longer in relation to the third than in that species,

but the digital formula is the same, and the thickening of the fourth

digit is carried still further. The claws are yellowish white, have

moderate curyature, are laterally compressed and taper little to the

apex, in a superior view. The maximum length of the third claw is

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 277

14.5 (as against 11 mm, in B, lesweurt); the fourth claw is little

inferior to the third, The palmar structures ave not well shown. Of

brachial vibrissae only the ulnar carpal has been seen; a colourless

bristle of 12 mm.

The pes is also more slender than that of B. lesueuri, but agrees

with it in the hairing of the plantar surfaces, which involves the same

areas but is less dense; in this it differs markedly from B. cuniculus

and Aepyprymnus, and also from Waterhouse’s plate (1846, Pl. 12,

fie. 5), which, however, may he based on an abraded example. The

granmation of the sole is finer, averaging 19 per em.,, and the coloura-

tion of integument and nails, though variable, is generally darker; in

the darkest examples the sole is nearly black and the nails dusky

brown, in contrast to the pale manus.

Dimensions: Published dimensions of the species appear to have

heen derived chiefly from processed skins and are for the most part

uncorrelated with maturity data; the pes measuremeuts also are

partly vitiated by inelusion of the nail.

The following are the conventional measurements in mm, taken

in the flesh from two adyvaneed subadult males (P*M") at Cuballing:

lead and body, 430, 805; tail, 261, 279; pes, 107, 104; ear, 38, 38. In

an adult female (P*M"), the pes reached 110 mm. The percentage

relations to the head and body Jength in these two subadalts, as com-

pared with Central Australian B. lesuewri at the same dental stage,

ure respectively: tail, 79-91 (85), 100-122 (108); pes, 32-34 (33), 35-41

(37)3 ear, 11-12 (145), 19-14 (13.3).

Priace: This presents much of importance which does not emerge

in existing accounts, In the adult unworn pelage the texture is

variable; offen erisp or even harsh as in depyprymnus and quite

unlike B. lesueuri. Mid-dorsally the main pile of under fur, which is

copious, teaches 20 mm., with guard hairs to 382 mm., and the length

does not increase much elsewhere. The basal { of the under fur is

about blaekish-plumbeous of Ridgway, followed by a subterminal hand

of snuff brown deepening to cloye brown and black on the points.

The euard hairs are profusely developed and the majority reach

26 mm.; the banding is the same as in the underfur, except that a

narrow zone of dark brown separates the basal grey trom the flattened

subterminal segment, which is much lighter in colour, near cinnamon

buff, A considerable proportion of guard hairs (much higher than in

other species) are black throughout their length and more strongly

flattened; they sre so numerous as to constitute almost a third pile

278 RECORDS OF THE 5.A, MUSEUM

reaching 32 mm. in length. The general dorsal eolour is a rich

grizzled brown near snuff brown and is determined by the admixtare

of brown, buff and black of the terminal and subterminal bands, the

basal grey being entirely excluded from the surface, It is uniform

over the head, body and limbs, the tail alone contrasting in darker

and richer tones.

The sides are slightly paler; there is no lateral line of buff but a

gradual transition to the ventral colour, which is greyish white washed

with eream buff; areas of pure white ave sometimes present on mid

line of belly and throat. The muzzle is brown (near bistre) and not

grizzled, the rest of the head like the back. The ear backs are well

furred, snuff brown to the buse and not grizzled nor darkened at

margins and little contrasted with the crown; the inner surface

sparsely clothed and somewhat lighter than the backs; the tuft at the

tragoid noteh, inconspicuous.

The manus and digits are well haired but the nails are not

abseured, The colour variable; basally a deep brown, but bleaching

irregularly on the surface to grizzled clay colour; the digits pale drab

or near white, The pes also well haired and strongly fringed, the

terminal bristles on fourth tue reaching 25 mm. but not obscuring the

nail; metatarsus and digits usvally darker than the manus but varying

from bistre to huffy brown and paling proximally to buff; the margins

may be either lighter or darker than the dorsum.

The fur of the tail base shares the body ecolonr and length for

80 mm. or go, but is then shortened to 15 mm, and its colour enriched

to a red brown (russet to tawny) which may extend over half or more

of the dorsal and Jateral surface. The fur is then progressively

lengthened, darkened, and erected, forming a black or brown-black

dorsal erest reaching 30 mm. ut the apex, The lateral surfaces are

coloured like the dorsum and inay or may not eontribnte to the brush,

The ventral surface in adults is always much lighter (cinnamon buff

to cream buff) and the hair is bristly and adpressed distally, where

seale exposure by abrasion may occur. The hairing and colour of the

tail varies considerably, chiefly with age; the blackest and most exten-

sive crests aré in subadults, and in such there may be a coextensive

blackening of the ventral surface, but never a ventral duplication of

the crest.

The chief variations of pelage, which are of a marked kind, are

clearly age characters and independent of sex and season, In suh-

adults as late as the P*M* stage, which may be almost full grown, the

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART IIL 279

coat is softer and looser in texture, and the overlay of guard hairs

and the resulting grizzling much reduced. The subterminal band of

the underfur pales to olive buf or buffy brown and of the guard hairs,

to ivory or near white and the pale basal grey shows through to the

surface—the resulting dorsal colour being a weak grey brown or drab.

A fully furred pouch young (head and body ea, 210 tm.) shows a

smooth adpressed coat about 13 mm. long dorsally, with a colour

scheme similar to the adults, but even darker and richer.

The adult pelage of this Western Australian series as given above

is notably different from other bettongs I have examined—larker,

browner, and with less contrast between the subterminal band and the

external colour. The darkest examples are quite close to the pelage

of Potoraus tridactyjlus. In subactults the difference is less and skins

of all species which haye been immersed for long periods in saline

preservatives may justify Thomas’ phrase ‘not definitely different.”

The hair tracts in the above pouch young are in substantial agree-

ment with Boardman’s figures (1943, fig. 17 and 18) exeept im the

vicinity of the eve. Here a strongly eonspicillate effect is produced

by radial tracts from its margins interrupting the general candad flow

on the taee: that from the anterior canthus is a direct reversal of

considerable extent and is marked off by strongly developed opposi-

tion ridges. On the tail, the distal flow of the lateral surfaces has an

upward infection, and the mid dorsal tract which is strictly distal, is

separated fvom it by converging ridges; a similar condition occurs in

Culoprymuus at the same stage. In adults the condition in penicillata

is much as in lesweuri.

CrantL Cuanserers (PL xxix, fig, A-F): The treatment of

cranial and dental characters is made to cover some areas of conflict

in existing accounts and to supplement these where possible and is

chiefly based on a series of 14 skulls, drawn in equal proportion from

south-west Western Australia and from lower South Australia. A

preliminary comparison (infra) having shown it to be sufficiently

homogencous for treatment at subspecies level, IT regard if as repre-

senting B. penicillata ogilbyi Gould, and use it as a standard for the

definition of other forms. The roimparisons made are with B. lesnewrt

unless otherwise stated, and where metrical, with the means of the

three populations of that species studied (supra). Individual varia-

tion both metrieal and nonmetrical is considerable, but ich less than

in B. lesueuri; the mean variation for 24 cranial measurements being

10 per cent.

280 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

In general form the skull is close to that of BR. cuniculus. When

fully adult it is longer than in 8. leswewri but narrower and shallower,

so that the overall size as measured by the displacement volume

(54 ce.) is searcely vreater than in Central Australian B. lesueuri.

The ossification is lighter, and the surfaces smooth, with museular

impressions redueed; mean adult weight 16 g,

The chief regional difference is in the rostrum which is longer,

yielding a rostral index of 43 and facial mdex of 226 as against 36

and 178 respectively; it is also relatively wide and deep basally and

forms a steeply tapering eone without the lateral constriction or

dorsal flattening of B. lesneuri. The nasal bones are both actually

and relative to skull length, longer and narrower posteriorly, but their

shape varies, partly at Jeast as an ave character, In subadnlts the

posterior margins are often sinuous and irregular and invaded by

spurs from the frontals and the lateral are suddenly constricted at

the maxillo-premnaxilliary sutore, giving shapes like some of the B.

lesueuri variants. In adult and aged skulls the posterior margins are

transverse and nearly rectilinear and are well in advance of the

interorbital line; the junction is sharply angular with the lateral

margin which converges evenly to the anterior nares, where it is

suddenly constricted to a sharp apex, over-reaching the gnathion

anteriorly—a condition different from amy phase of B, lesweuri. The

zygomatic arches are shorter as well as narrower, with the maximum

width posterior to mid point, rarely anterior to it; the interorhital

space wider, less concave and virtually umeonstricted throughout life,

an incipient. post-orbital process impressed on their edges, and the

temporal ridges searcely evident before the tooth ehange, and always

weak. The interparietal is variable, similar to B. lesweuri when

present, but sometimes not developed or very early fusing with the

parictals.

Tn lateral aspect, the premaxillae make a larger eontribution to

the wall of the rostrum, their nasal suture equal to or greater than,

the maxilliary; malar much weaker, its median depth but half that of

B, lesveuri; the supratympanie canal is not completed by bone and

the squamosal-frontal contact at the pterion, is invariable.

The palate is longer and wider than in B, lesvenri and differently

shaped owing to the extraversion of the secator and anterior

divergence of tooth rows. The anterior palatal foramina are variable,

with dimensions overlapping those of B. lesveuri, but yielding means

above the Central Australian and about equal to the lower South Aus-

tralian population of that species, The posterior vacnities vary both

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 281

in size and site, but in general are smaller and usually lie entirely

within the palatine bone, whereas in B, lesuewri they are bounded

anteriorly by the maxilla. The diastema is the longest in the genus,

averaging 20 per cent of the basal length. The alisphenoid bulla is

much smaller, its chief diameter relative to basal length being 25%

lower; it is still, however, a prominent feature, quite similar in

general shape, and in size, the second in the subfamily; it is not trans-

parent as stated by Thomas, unless very greasy.

The mandible ig slighter throughout, with most dimensions

10-15% helow the B. lesuewri means, the diastemma alone being longer.

The lower border is less convex, the ascending process less erect, and

the masseteric foramen, though variable, usually decidedly smaller.

Sexual differentiation earnot be adeqnately assessed, but is

apparently slight, the female as large as the male, Age changes slight

bnt more definite than in B. lesvewri and chiefly shown by the shorter

rostrum and relatively wider nasals in the subadult skull and a lag

in the expansion of the bulla and mandibular condyle.

Dimensions: The following figures give the range and mean of

skull dimensions in mm, for (1) 5 adults at P*M’*, of both sexes; and

(2) 5 subadults at P*M* of both sexes: greatest length, 76,8-81.0 (78.3),

70.5-74.5 (72.4); basal length, 64.5-68.5 (66.1), 59.8-62.8 (61.1) ;

zygomatic breadth, 39.6-42.7 (41.4), 38.7-40.1 (894); nasals length,

31,0-32.6 (31.8), 27.5-30.5 (28.9); nasals, greatest breadth, 12.0-14.3

(13.3), 13.0-18.7 (13.4); nasals, least breadth, 6.3-7.9 (7.3), 6.2-6.8

(6.5); rostroam depth, 14.3-15.9 (14.9), 12.6-15,0 (14.0); interorbital

constrietion, 16,.8-18.4 (17.7), 16.3-18.0 (17.3); palate length, 42.0-45.4

(43.8), $8.5-41.4 (39.8); palate breadth inside M’*, 12.0-13.2 (12.4),

10.8-12.4 (11.8); ant. palatal foramina, 2.9-4.0 (84), 2.6-3.2 (2.9);

diastema, 12.7-14.0 (13.5), 12.0-18,7 (12.7); bulla length, 13.8-15.0

(14.4), 12.844.2 (13.3); bulla breadth, 9.6-10.1 (9.9), 8.2-9.1 (8.5) ;

basieranial axis, 19.2-22.8 (20.5), 18.3-20.0 (19.0); basifacial axis,

45-2-47.5 (46,2), 41.1-43.6 (42.5); facial index, 213-236 (226), 210-237

(224); mandible, maximum breadth, 38.5-43.0 (40,8), 35,9-39.1 (37.8) ;

depth of ramus below M®, 8,9-9.8 (9.2), 8.0-9.0 (8.4) ; breadth ascending

process, 11.6-15.6 (12.7), 10,2-12.0 (11.5),

The series contains larger examples than have hitherto been

recorded.

Destrrvion (Pl. xxx, fig, A-J and 0): The dentition is similar to

that of B. lesueuré Wut less specialiaed and with a greater residuum

of phalangeroid characters; it was regarded hy Bensley as directly

282 RECORDS OF THE 8,A, MUSEUM

linking the genus with Hypsiprymnodon. In most eategories the

dimensions overlap those of the Central Australian series of B-.

lesuewri, but are decidedly below the means of the three populations

of that species reviewed above, and there is a general tendency to

narrowness and slightness, thongh there are one or two exceptions to

that, The mean variation in dimensions of functionally stable teeth

is slightly lower (14%). In the following account the comparison

throughont is with B, lesweurt unless otherwise stated,

The incisor rows meet at a narrower angle and are more separate

from the canine. T' is a smaller tooth, rather less upright, and with

its labial face lateral throughout life, Dorso vemtral height 5.5-6.4

(5.8) ; anteroposterior length 2.2-2.5 (2.3). T? much narrower and with

its anteroposterior length about equal to that of I", not notably

longer as ight he inferred from Bensley’s comparison with

THypsiprymnodon; it is the first of the prediastemal series to erupt;

anteroposterior length 2.3-3.0 (2.5); transverse breadth 1.6-1.9 (1,8),

I* with its crest more normally aligned in the ineisor row; its shape

much as in &, lesvevri and with similar changes with wear; dorso

ventral height 2.8-3,7 (8.2); anteroposterior length 1.9-8.0 (24). The

labial faee of all three incisors is longitudinally grooved more

frequently than in B. leswenri, but there is much variation—fie, A

shows a strongly grooved phase of I! and [’. T, longer and more

slender, with a greater tendency to slight upward curvature weakly

sugvestive of Pefaurus and Distoechurus m the Phalangeridae;

anteroposterior length 11.4-14.4 (12.7); breadth 3.0-3.3 (3,1).

The canine is a larger tooth, showing similar variation in shape;

dorsoventral height 4.54.8 (4,7),

Dental differences between B. lesweuri and RB. penicillata culminate

in the permanent premolars, the two species representing in this

feature the extremes of specialization and consetvatism, within the

genus. The ehief distinctions of P* in the latter are its smaller size,

hypsodontism, and extraversion of its axis, and convexity of erest

anteriorly.

In the present series, while the angle of rotation is fairly constant,

the degree ta whieh the posterior portion of the blade abstains, varies.

The body of the tooth, however, is always decidedly curved, its out-

lines as seen from above following a shallow sigmoid, with a constric-

tion at the posterior one-fifth and maximum breadth at the anterior

one-third of its length, A posterointernal talon is always developed,

but is quickly reduced by wear; an internal ledge scarcely

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 283

differentiated. In profile the unworn crest undulates; an anterior

rounded and grooved portion, and a smooth posterior cusp, being

separated by a shallow declivity, but equality of height is soon

attained by wear. In contrast, the enamel wall of the crown is nearly

twice as high anteriorly as posteriorly; its grooves are constantly

seven on the buceal wall and are either vertical or converge to the

centre of the crest; they are generally wider than in B, lesweuri, In

unworn or slightly worn exariyiles, anteroposterior length 7.0-7.4 (7.1) ;

breadth 2.8-3,2 (3.0); height (of enamel) 4.3-4.6 (4.4).

The Jower secator P, is simpler than its opponent, 10% shorter

hut with breadth and height slightly greater, relatively; extravergion

of its axis is even throughout its length; its outline from above almost

straight sided, with the greatest breadth near the anterior one-third;

no talon is developed. The profile of the erest is quite straight and

the enamel of the wall higher anteriorly; grooves constantly seven;

anteroposterior length 6.2-6,7 (6.4); breadth 2.7-3,.0 (2.9); height (of

enamel) 41-48 (4.2). |

P* is very much smaller than the secator, but generally similar to

the anterior half of that tooth; evenly rotated outwards and with its

maximnm breadth median and its ontline from: above oval except for

a re-entrance at the posterointernal corner; the profile of its erest

straight or at most very slightly rounded; its enamel wall as in the

seeator; grooves constantly five. In the skull of a pouch young, the

erest of P* which is erupting, shows no extraversion, but lies parallel

to the midline of the palate; anteroposterior length 4.0-4.6 (4.4);

breadth 2,4-2,7 (2.6); height of enamel 3,5-4.8 (4.0). P. similar to its

opponent, scarcely reduced, but more evenly sie erooves five; antero-

posterior length 3.7-4.1 (4.0); breadth 2.5-2.7 (2,5); height of enamel

3.5-44 (3.9),

The upper deciduous premolar MP* ig similar to that of B.

lesuveuri, but smaller; markedly smaller than M*; the blade of the

anteroexternal cusp is less developed amd its crest more oblique to that

of P*® It is the first of the cheek teeth to erupt, its appearance

synchronising with I? and preceeding P*, Its lower opponent MP, is

also smaller, bot with its anterior lobe relatively wider than in B.

lesucuri; the crest of the anterointernal cusp is obscurely notched on

its outer surface, and meets that of P, more directly than in the upper

tooth, Dimensions of seven examples of MP* and MP, respectively,

showing slight to moderate wear are; anteroposterior length 3.0-3.6

284 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

(3.3); 2.8-3.5 (3.0); breadth anterior lobe 2.6-2.8 (2.7); 2.0-2.5 (2.3) ;

breadth posterior lobe 3.0-3,3 (8.1); 2.4-2.7 (2.5).

The molar rows, whieh in relation to skull length are the shortest

in the genus, diverge anteriorly in straight lines. he absolute sive

range of all molars as shown by the crown areas overlap the minimum

for the combined B. lesueuri groups, but the means are decidedly

lower (from 4 to 19%), the inferiority being greater in the seeond

and third of both upper and lower series,

The interrelations of crown areas are generally similar to those of

R. lesueuri, Wot there is an inerease in the relative size of the first

molars, both upper and lower, and a decrease in the second and third.

In the upper jaw this creates a tendency towards subequality of M*

and M? and in the lower jaw to dominance of M, over My, both con-

ditions being rare or of minor frequency in B, lesuewri and quite

absent in 2. cuniculus where the latter condition is excluded by a

characteristic enlargement of M,. The index of reduction or ratio of

largest to smallest molar, is lower (less steep) than in B. lesuewri, the

mean values for the upper and lower series respectively being 2.9 and

2.0 as against 3.3 and 2.3 in the latter, he molar formulae and their

approximate frequencies and the percentage relation of the crown

areas of individual teeth to the corresponding first molars, is as

follows: in the upper jaw M?>M'>M*>M* 50% M'>M? 42% M'=M*

8%; M* and M* being constant in the sequence; and M* 100; M* 90-107

(99); M" 70-80 (75); M' 26-43 (36). Tn the lower jaw M:>M.>M,>Mu

839; Mi=M, 8%; M.>M, 9%; M, and M, being constant; and M,

100; M,; 107-120 (113); M. 90-108 (96); M, 48-70 (56).

The size and shape relationships of the corresponding upper and

lower molars and their variations, and the relation of anterior to

posterior lobe, are much as in B. lesueuri; the breadth/length ratio

tends to be slightly lower than the B, leswewri means in the upper

teeth, and slightly higher in the mandibular set,

The range and mean of the anteroposterior length, breadth

anterior lobe, and breadth posterior lobe in the molars of the bisexnal

series of eleven skulls is as follows;—M! 3.7-4.2 (4.0); 3.5-4.4 (3.9);

3.74.2 (4.0). M® 3.6-4.5 (4.0); 3.844 (4.0); 3.5-4.2 (3.8). M® 3.5-4.0

(3.7); 3.8-3.8 (3.6); 2.7-3.2 (3,0). M* 2.2-3.0 (2.5); 2.0-2.9 (2.5);

1.7-2,.2 (1.9). Ms.’" length in situ. 11.0-12.7 (11.8). M, 3.5-4.0 (3.7);

8.2-3.7 (3.5); 3.5-4.1 (38.6). M. 3.84.2 (4.0); 3.7-4.1 (3.9); 3.6-4.0

(3.8). My, 3.5-8,.9 (3.7); 3.54.0 (3.7); 3.2-3.7 (84), My 2,7-3.5 (3.0) 5

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 285

2.7-3.2 (3.0); 2.7-3.2 (3.0); 2.1-2.7 (2.3). Ms.., length in situ, 11,1-12.5

(11.5),

The crown pattern of the molars is very similar to that of B.

lesueuri, but with the eusps and lophs lower and less prominent. An

accessory cuspule originating at cingulum level on the buccal wall of

M! and M* and sealing that aspect of the median valley, is developed

in about half the series, and more rarely appears on MP* and M*; the

analogus feature on the lower molars, mentioned by Bensley, has not

been traced. M{ are somewhat less variable than in B. lesuewri and

simulate more or less crudely the main structural features of Mj.

The series affords no example of the tooth change, but the erup-

tion of P{ may be delayed beyond that of M4; this, however, is as

likely to he due to proeocity of Mj as to retarded seeators, as it ocenrs

in skulls still metrically and suturally subadult. There is no instance

in this series of the secator preceding the 4th molar as is frequent in

B. lesueuri and B. euniculus, so that, ou the whole, a later tooth elange

seems indicated for B. penicillata,

Suesprciwie Divrenenrration iw Bellongia penicillata.

B. penicillata ogilbyi, Gould; The western representative of B.

penicillula in the Swan River districts was early separated by Gould

and Waterhouse (1841) from the type of New South Wales, as a full

species under the name B. ogilbyi; while a single immature skin from

South Australia, was made the type of a third species, B. gouldi, by

Gray in 1843, Later examination of more material from all three

localities revealed much local variation and overlapping, and Thomas

in 1888 merged both names in B. penicillata Gray 1837, and it is only

in recent years that they have reappeared in suspecifie form, without,

so far as T can ascertain, any new evidence in support of this course,

being addueed,

T lave examined no material certainly localized in New South

Wales, but the local variation in south-west Western Australia outlined

above is sufficiently wide to vitiate most of the pelage distinctions

claimed for the eastern animal and the metrical differences implied

hy Waterhouse’s and Gonld’s data, are not significant when compared

with the range in the present series except possibly for the sceator,

which is confirmed by Tate for North Queensland (1948 op, cit., 267).

The eastern animal would appear to be very weakly differentiated,

with at most a slightly ¢reyer pelage, occasionally longer secator, and

possibly some slight differences im nidification,

286 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

The South Australian animal, so far as it can be understood from

material available here, is even less distinct from the western one.

In the South Australian Musewn are two skins and six skulls whieh

although without reliable data, are probably of local origin; fwo of

the skulls almost certainly so. A close and detailed comparison of the

cranial and dental characters of these skulls with Western Australian

material from the south-western districts only, ciseloses slight average

Jifferences of which the following are the chief. (1) The rostrum

tends to be slighter in the Sonth Australian skull. (2) The zygomatic

process of the squamosal is also slighter, move concave above and the

adjoining squamosal more inflated, (3) In the mandible the mandi-

hular foramen is often larger. (4) The antemolar teeth are virtually

identical, but in the molars the condition M'>M* is twiee as frequent

in the South as in the Western Australian group. The variation in

all characters is high and this with the inadequacy of the samples,

easts doubt on the significance of the differences, which in any ease

are somewhat less than those separating the Central and South Aus-

tralian populations ol B. lesweuri. The overall similarity of the two

samples from localities so remote is much more impressive. The two

South Australian skins present no characters whieh cannot he

reconciled with the Western Australian range.

These findings appear ta me to justify and confirm the clear

statements of Gonld and Waterhouse (op, eit), often overlooked, that

“B. ogilbyi’? of the Swan River districts, also occurred with very

slight modification in the State of Sonth Australia, and if Krefft

(1864) is right. extended far beyond it, into the lower Darling Basin

of New South Wales,

The Waldana karpitchis This was taken about 1897 by R. T.

Maurice at Waldana Spring on one of the preliminary journeys which

culminated in his traverse with Murray from Fowler’s Bay to the

Cambridge Gulf, in 1902. The loeality is about 125 miles north-west of

Ooldea in the arid western division of South Australia, and about 100

miles sonth of Pundi, whenee came the most southerly of the reports

I had of it from the Pitjanjarra in 1934, Maurice mentions having

seer! ‘kangaroo rats’? im some plenty both sonth and north of

Waldana, but what species are involved in this observation is doubtful.

The specimen (South Anstralian Museum, registered number

M4140) is an aleohol preserved female poneh young having the

dimensions; head sand body, 173; tail, 190; pes, 78; ear, 28. The

pelave in its present condition is paler and more grizzled than is usual

in B, penicillata ogilbyi, but it is a moot point how mneh of this is

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART IIT 287

due to bleaching during the 60 years of its partial immersion in

spirit. The colow® distribution on maanus, pes and tail is quite as in

ogilbyi; the tail darkening rapidly distally and forming a low but

distinet black brush over the terminal third. The skull (greatest

length 46.6 rum.) is functionally edentulous or nearly so, but I! and

[? and the third and milk premolars of both jaws are sufficiently

advanced for examination of their crowns alter removal of soft tissue.

This is the only fleshed specimen of B. pentcillata from an

eremian distriet which | have examined and it is unfortunate that its

immaturity and storage history render a full appraisal, al subspecies

level, impracticable. In essentials it is reconeilable with the standard

ogubyt series reviewed and is quite distinct cranially from the form

anhydra from 470 miles further north.

No skull of B. penicillata ogilbyi, strietly matched dentally with

the Waldana specimen, has been available for comparison, and growth

changes in the skull are so rapid at this stage, that differences between

individnals are of doubtful significance. Nevertheless 1t seems

questionable to me whether the Waldana skull at dental maturity

would have attained to either the maximum length or relative rostral

development of full seale ogillyi and the length of MP", which is the

most advaneed of the teeth and appears to be fully formed, is below

ihe mean of the standard series (2.9 ef. 3.3 mm,). Jf these three

differences were realized in the adult it would snggest aflinity with the

stnall skulls next considered, with taxonomic implications which are

there indieated.

“B, penicillata gouldv? Gray; The type of Gray's Bettongta

gouldi was a small skin without skull believed to be immature, but the

second specimen reviewed hy Waterhouse (1846, 22, Pl. 6, fig. 1) in

the same conection was an adult skull of very small size. The

present material includes a very similar skull, whieh, thongh not

formally localized, may be inferred from associated material and other

evidenee to be from the western slopes of Mount Lofty; this has been

élosely compared with the standard L. penicillata ogilbyi series with

the following results.

It is an udvaneed subadult at P*M*, and remarkably small in the

relevant age group of ogilbyi; 18 of 23 lmear dimensions studied

falling below the range of these, with an average difference from the

mean of —13%; its displacement volume is only 60% of that of

Bop. ogilbyi. Differences im proportional development (shown by the

pereentage relationships of dimensions to the basal length) exceed

288 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

5% in 10 items; the chiel changes being in anterior palatal foramina,

leugth of bulla, breadth and depth of mandible (-++8 to 12%) and

palatal breadth and facial index (—12 and —11% respectively).

Laterality in the posterior structures of the mandible is especially

noticeable, the transverse breadth of condyle being + 14%; the

mandibular foramen of the same region, is both actually and relatively

the widest in the series; otherwise nonmetrieal differences are absent.

an the general appearance of the skull normal for ogilbyt,

The dentition as a whole is proportionately reduced, with, how-

ever, a slightly narrower I° and slightly stouter Pf. The crown ares

seqnenees and percentage ratios are: M® 103>M* 100>M* 73 and

M: 118>M, 100=M, 100 and the index of reduction (three teeth

only) is L4 (upper) and J.1 (lower); these size relations ean all be

closely matched in the standard series of ogilbyi,

The (dimensions of this sknIl are:—ereatest length 62.5; basal

leneth 52.5; zygomatic breadth 36.0; nasals lengih 23.5; nasals

greatest breadth 10.5; nasals least breadth 5.8; rostrum depth 12.05

interorbital constrietion 14.5; palate length 32.8; palate breadth inside

M* 9.0; anferior palatal foramina 2.4; diastema 10.8; bulla 124 x 7.8;

basicranial axis 17.5; basifacial axis 35.0; facial index 200; mandible:

maximum breadth 36.2; depth below M, §.2; breadth ascending process

10.0; breadth of condyle 4.8. Ms2* 9.7. Msas 9.6, P*® and Ps

respectively; length 3.5; 3.3 breadth 2.5; 2.6 grooves 5; 5. The agree-

toent with the older skull of Waterhouse, so far as it can he studied

from his account, is very close. The palatal length given by

Waterhouse (11 lines) is evidently a typographical error.

The general level of differentiation reached by these small skulls

is quite appreciable and is distinetly wreater for example than that

shown by the South ag compared with the Western Australian moieties

of the ogilby? series used as a standard. But thongh they are by no

means mere miniatures of the B. p. ogilbyi skull, their taxonomic

recornition Taises biological objections and seems to me contra-

indicated. On the one hand, to treat them as representing a sub-

species of B, penicilluta, existing in very small numbers side by side

with B. p. ogilbyi at widely separated points, is to violate the chief

principle held to underlie the equilibrium between geographic races,

by attributing to if a reproductive isolation which should not exist at

subspecitie level, On the other hand to treat them as representing a

full species is clearly unjustifiable on worphological grounds,

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 289

The alternative is to regard them, as Waterhouse suggested, as

dwarfed examples of ogilbyt owing their distinctions to individual and

physiological rather than genetic causes, This is supported by the

existence in the same region of similar though less marked dwarfism

in the allied species lesweuwri, where subspeeifie distinction could not

be seriously considered. Dwarfism and gigantism within species of

Australian mammals, especially under eremian conditions, offers an

interesting field for the study of changes in proportional development

with changing body size, The amplitude of the size difference in

material otherwise strictly homogeneous at subspecies level, is often

astonishing, as shown for example hy Spencer (1896, 25) and Wood

Jones (1928a. 106) for Dasycereus and which I have confirmed im the

subspecies hillieri of the Lake Eyre Basin (1933), and im Rattus

villosissimus.

“2B. gouldi’’ as a form (either specific or subspecifie) oceurring

between the head of Gulf St. Vincent and Mount Lolty in territory

densely aecupied by B. py. ogilbyi, under a 20-80 inch raintall, is

difficult to aeeept., But the ease might be different if these localities

were erroneous and the material were derived from further north,

Hi might well then represent a subspecific eremian offshoot of ogilbyt,

to which the Waldana specimen from 600 miles north-west of the head

of the Gulf, should be referred,

In the absenee of this evidence, T am confirmed in the rejection

of these dwarf skulls from lower South Australia as representing a

distinet race or species (whether * B. gouldi’’ or not) by the existence

of two others in which the distinction of even smaller size, is

reintoreed by structural changes of a much more decided kind, and by

adequate geographical isolation.

Betlongia pemvillata franeisca Finlayson, 1957: This formn was

based upon a portion of a skull in the old collections of the South

Australian Museum (Registered number M, 5484), which came trom

St. Francis Tsland, Nuyt’s Archipelago, off the Hyre Peninsula coast

of South Australia in approximately 32° 35° 8. lat, and 183° 20° Bi.

longt.; no other details of its provenance are reeorded.

The speeimen lacks the occiput, nasals and mandible, but has a

eomplete adult maxilliary dentition, together with the two first

incisors and L* of the right side. The dimensions available suggest a

complete skull of about the same size as the Mount Lofty dwarf in its

present subadult condition. As eompared with B. penicillata agilbyr

290) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of the adjacent mainland, the rostrum, while normal in shape, is

probably reduced in relative length though the rostral index cannot be

determined. The interorbital breadth and breadth of palate are

relatively greater, and (he anterior palatal foramina longer.

The incisors are worn and damaged and little of differential value

can be inferred trom them, but the premolars and molars are well

preserved, though the erowns of the latter show heavy wear. The

secator, P* (PL. xxx, fig. M and N) conforms in a general way to that

of penicillata s. lat. in its long axis being rotated outwards from the

midline of the palate; in the wall of the erown, being twice as high

anteriorly as posteriorly; and in the broad grooves. It differs from

B, p. ogilbyi in the extraversion of the axis being less in degree and

more ever in mode, with less torsion of the erest; in reduction of the

eroaves from seven to six and in its greater breadth, The last

distinetion is critical; while the length of the tooth is reduced by

nearly 20% as compared with the means for vgilbyi its hreadth is

actually increased by 6%, leading to a breadth/length ratio of 95 as

against 42. The general appearance ol the secator is similar to P*

of ogilbyi, but it differs in its distinet posterointernal talon and mich

sreater bulk, which is 2} times that of P* in the Mount Lofty dwarf of

the same cranial size,

The erown areas of all the molars (PL xxx, fig. N) are below the

‘ange for ogilbyz; the reduction being much less on M' and M* than

on M* and M*. The percentage size ratios ealeulated from the crown

areas are: M* 105>M? 100>M*® 68>M! 24, yielding an index of

reduction of 4.4 as against a maximum of 3.8 in ogilbyi,

Dimensions: interorbital breadth, 14.0; palatal length, 94,0;

palatal breadth inside M*, 11,2; anterior palatal !oramen, 3.2; Ms."

10.4: P' length, 5.8; P? breadth, 3.2.

The former presence of this bettong on St, Francis Island was

recorded by Wood Jones (1928b), who inferred from the deseriptions

of those who had known it in life, that it represented penicillata, The

external characters are otherwise unknown, and the present fragment,

as far as IT am aware, is the only material relic of the animal, which

is believed to have become extinet some 70 years ago,

Bettongia penicillata anhydra Finlayson 1957: The type and only

known specimen of this form, is a part skull with mandible (Sonth

Australian Museum, registered number M. 3583) from an aminal in

the flesh collected by M. Terry in July 1933 near the McKwin Hills

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART Il 291

of the Lake Mackay area of Central Australia, in approximately

22° 2/8, lat. and 129° 47° KH. longt, The external characters are not

known with sufficient precision for recording.

The skull (PL. xxix, fig. G and H) lacks the occiput, basioccipital

and posterior portion of the bullae but has a complete mandible.

Suturally and dentally it is fully adult but not aged, and the dentition

which is complete, shows moderate wear, In general size it is inferior

to francisea and is the smallest skull of the genus yet examined; its

estimated displacement volume being 34 ec. approx, as against a mean

value of 54 ce. in the standard series of B. penicillata ogilbyi and

53 ee. for the Central Australian 2. lesueuri. In absolute dimensions,

17 of the 19 items tested tall below the minimum for ogilbyi with an

average difference trom the means of 20%. Proportional development

as determined by the percentage relation of dimensions to the length,

disclose a high order of distinetion from ogilbyi, the mean difference

in this eategory being 11%. The elief proportional changes are:

zygomatic breadth + 13%; interorbital constriction — 1890; diastema

— 24%; breadth of bulla + 25%; depth of mandibular ramus + 17% ;

tires idth of ascending process + 26%. In addition the rostrum is

much shortened, the rostral index falling to 34 as against 43 in ogilbyt.

Some of these changes indicate convergence towards B. lesueuri,

but especially characteristic are the Sollowing: the narrowness and

general weakness of the muzzle region; the narrowness of! the nasals;

the very short anterior palatal foramina and a strongly developed

interorbital constriction, unique in the genus, The brainease ts

relative narrow and more tapered anteriorly than in either B. lesueurt

of Central Australia or B. penicillala agilbyi and the temporal crests,

which are strongly developed, are differently disposed towards the

midline, Im the mandible, the proportions of coronoid, ascending

process and mandibular foramen are nearer BL lesuewri, and the

relative depth of the body of the ramus is actually greater than in

that form.

In the dentition, the incisors show characters of both species, I?

being broader than is usual in B. penicillata ogilbyi and T° lacking the

inturning of the crest, seen in B. lesneur?. The seeator, P* (Pl. xxx,

fig. L and R) is aetnally longer and as broad as in the much larger

ogtlhyi skull, but its height is about 10% less and is more evenly

distributed alone its leneth. It shows many of the fundamental

characters of the B. penicillata secator and in extraversion of its axis

and torsion of erest is intermediate between B. p, ogilbyi and B. p.

292 RECORDS GF THE S.A, MUSEUM

francisca; its grooves are wide and seven or eight in number.

Morphologically the tooth differs widely from its B. lesueuri analogue,

in its relatively greater breadth; greater anterior height yielding a

height/length ratio of 47 as against a mean of 42 in Central Ans-

tralian B. lesuewri; and in the extrayersion and torsion of its crest,

which are not remotely approached hy any specimen of B. lesweuri in

the three populations studied, in which a straight crest and distinct

introversion are invariable. The outturning of the lower tooth P, 1s

less marked; its crest is straight aud its grooves are reduced to seven,

The length of the molar rows in situ, and the crown areas of all

the molars individually, ure below the minima for B. penicillata

ogilbyi. The reduetion, as in B. p, franeiszea, is least on the first and

second molars, and greatest on the third and fourth, but the eolateral

disparity between these pairs is even greater, and the fourth molars

are extremely small teeth. M* on the other hand is particularly large

and broad as in ogilhyi, These changes lead to an unprecedentedly

high index of reduetion (greatest erown area/least) in both upper and

lower jaw as follows: B. p. anhydra 6,5 wpper, 4.2 lower; \ Central

Aystralian B, lesueurt, 1.9-5.1 (3.3), 1.5-3.2 (2.3); and B. p. ogilbyi,

2.4-3.8 (2.9), 1.7-2.3 (2.0). The size sequence of the molars and the

approximate percentage relation to the first molar, as gauged hy the

crown areas, are: M! 100>M? 94>M* 62>M* 15 and M, 108>M,

100>M, 81>M, 26; these sequences occur in both B. penicillata and B.

lesueurt, but are more frequent in the former. The upper molar rows

are slightly curved and there are no supernumerary cusps on the

anterior members. Dimensions: greatest length, 62.1; zygomatic

breadth, 37.4; nasals, length, 23.7; nasals, greatest. breadth, 9.5; depth

of rostrum, 11.6; interorbital constriction, 12.2; palate length, 32.5;

palate, breadth inside M*, 9.4; anterior palatal foramina, 2.4; diastema,

8.0; bulla, anterior breadth, 10.4; mandible, depth below Mz, 8.7;

breadth of ascending process, 13.3; P* and P, respectively, length 7.5,

6.4, breadth 3.0, 2.8; Ms.", 10.5; Ms..,, 10.2; I’ dorsoventral height

5.8; anteroposterior length 2.1; I? anteroposterior length, 2.6: trans-

verse breadth, 1.8; I* dorsoventral height, 2.6; anteroposterior

length, 2.2.

As stated iu the original description, this skull presents a blend

of the characters of B. lesuewri and B. penicillata, with a basis of

intrinsie features. The combination, if constant, would undoubtedly

merit recognition at full species level, but in the absence of any

(1) Wrongly cited in the original deseription as 3.9.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART IIL 293

further material to supplement the holotype, I fmd the possibility of

metrical anomalies introduced by dwarfing, and the lack of any

information on the external characters of the animal, a sufficient

deterrent to that course. While the balance of likeness is perhaps

towards B, lesuewri, the highly diagnostie P* is so different from the

secator of that species, and has so munch in cormmon with that of B.

penicillata, that I have chosen to associate it provisionally with the

latter as a subspecies.

The overall development of the Bettongia penicillala group

though very imperfectly known, would seem to be served by the

conception of B, penicillata ogilbyi as a dominant south-western race

extending east from the Swan River districts by way of coast lands

into South Australia and beyond into the eastern portions of the

Darling basin of New South Wales. B. penicillala penicillata would

then represent a poorly differentiated highland race distributed on a

north-south axis chiefly on the western slopes of the Great Divide, and

possibly extending into a subtropical littoral zone round the Gulf of

Carpentaria both in Queensland and the Northern Territory. PB.

gouldi Gray as at present known is void and founded on local dwarfs

of the ogdbyi populations, while avhydra and francisca may have

arisen from similar dwarts, stabilized and further differentiated under

ereniian and insular conditions respectively.

STATUS OF OTHER MEMBERS OF TUE SUBFAMILY IN

THE RHNGION.

Several aboriginal vocabularies contain words for animals which,

while but vaguely known to the present generation, are suggestive of

members of the present group, either from the general drift of the

aceount or from the volimiary selection of known members of it, for

comparison, One such is the telmaki, of the Pitjanjarra and

Yankunjarra, which, though known to many of the older people, has

not been seen nor taken for many years in the granite ranges about

the 26th parallel, which was its locus. It is compared always, though

in varying terms, to the karpitehi or the tehungoo, These last, repre-

senting PBeltongia penicillata and B- lesueuri respectively, together

with Caloprymnus campestris Gould of the Lake Kyre Basin are the

only species of which there is definite evidence as living or recently

living forms in the Centre and adjacent arid tracts,

294 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Since I recorded the sudden increase of Caloprymnus in the Lake

Eyre Basin (1982; 1986.) there have heen few, if any, reliable reports

af it. Bolliger (1938) published some observations on a rat kangaroo

to which he gave this name, but he has since been good enough to

inform me (in litt) that the identity was mistaken and that the animal

(an unloealized zoological gardens exhibit) was probably Aepyprym-

nus rufescens. All attempts to trace Culoprymuus as a living or

recently extinet species beyond the limits mapped in 1932 have given

only negative results, but the finding of skeletal remains in eaves of

the Evela district (Lundelins 1957) tends to confirm Tate’s statement

(1879) of its presence at the head of the Great Anstralian Bight

eighty years ago. This I was inclined to reject in 1932 as no material

of the species is mentioned by Tate, while on the other hand, skulls in

the old collection of the South Australian Museum, which had been

labelled Caloprymnus (possibly by Tate), were actually B, lesueuri.

Potorous, as a genus of modern species, seems to be almost

entirely subeoastal in its mainland distribution. Early compilers of

faunal lists claim more than one species for lower South Australia,

and there is a rural tradition that ¢ridactylus oceurred in the lower

Sonth-Mast District of the State, but Thomas’s (1888, 120) record of

a skull from the Murray River is the only material evidence in

support. The extent of its inland diffusion is quite conjectural, but

from what is known of the habitat preferences of the species, it is very

unlikely that it occupied the subarid districts in modern times.

Aietz’s use (in Gill 1909) of Potorous tridactylus for an animal at

Port Lincoln is probably based on Betlongia penicillata.

Several references to Bettongia gaimard: Desmarest exist in early

lists of South Australian mammals, which may be derived from the

statement of Waterhouse (1846. 207), but no eonfirmation of this has

been obtained in the succeeding years. The forms deseribed here as

B. penicillata anhydra and B. penicillata francisca were closely eom-

pared with the standard deseriptions of B. gaimardi but no evidence

of any special affinity to that form could be found.

In the South Australian Musenm is a skull of Aepyprymnus

rufescens Gray of normal characteristics, labelled as from ‘* Lake

Fiyre."* The locality is some hundreds of miles west of the most

inland of anthentic records of the species and presents features

radically different from the kaown habitats of Aepyprymnus. There

is no other relevant data, and the anomaly should probably be

attributed to a confusion of record.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 295

POST-PLEISTOCENE REPRESENTATIVES OF THE

SUBFAMILY.

The mammal palaeontology of Central Australia except for the

Lake Eyre Basin, is almost unknown and the writer has examined no

relevant material from these areas. In lower South Australia, how-

ever, superficial deposits, ancient camp sites and cave deposits have

yielded bones copiously, and the South Australian Museum has con-

siderable collections of subfossilg so derived, much of it gathered by

N, B, Tindale and his associates in aboriginal archaeology, Small

amounts in my own collection have also been available.

The chronology of the collections is in most cases, only vaguely

known; the oldest are probably those from layer 11 of the Devon

Downs beds which Tindale (1957) links with his Prepirrian culture

with a possible age (based on radiocarbon data) of about 5000 B.P.

At the other extreme, some of the superficial camp site bones may be

eoeval or nearly so with the Huropean occupation, though very few

specimens of many hundreds examined show signs of gross recency

in the form of soft tissue or fat stain,

The Potoroinae in that portion of this material which has been

available to me, is referable to known species and the greater part of

it to Bettongia lesueuri and B. penicillata, Of the eleven sites ranging

from Hawker in the north to Tantanoola in the extretne south whieh

have yielded Betlongia remains, eight contain Jesweurt and six

penicilluta, while only three contain both. Little or nothing on the

former local status and distribution of the species can be deduced

from the collection as a whole, however, which consists for the most

part of chance surface finds not fully representative of the deposit.

In the case of the Tantanoola, Kongarati and Devon Downs finds,

where systematic excavation was made, RB, penicillata was much the

more numerous of the two. This accords with the modern status of

the two species and probably indicates that it was locally still more

dominant at that time, since the densely ossified skull of lesxeurt is the

more resistant to weathering and disintegration; cranial, as distinct

from mandibular specimens occur more frequently with lesvewri than

penicillata, Species of Potorous, broadly referable to fridactylus and

morgan’ also occur sparsely. The latter is present for example in

level 1 of the Devon Downes deposits of Murundian age and also in the

deeper Mudukian beds of level 6. The possible northern extensions

of earlier forms of such fossils into the Centre, and especially into the

Lake Kyre Basin, derives interest from its bearing on the hypothesis

296 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

to which I have referred (19382, 165) of the evolution of Caloprymnus

there, from a Potorous like ancestor, which would be a natural

eonsegence if Spencer’s ideas (op. cif.) on the evolution of the

Diprotodonts, are well founded.

The archaeological site of Tartanga, which is adjacent to that of

Devon Downs but considerably older was but sparsely mammaliferous

and yielded no Potoroinae. It may be noted here in passing, that the

Tartanga Macropus molar which was formerly regarded as anomalous

with respect to M. giganteus and to which Tindale has reverted

(1957.9) is probably reconeilahle with that species, Examination of

larger series than were available at the time has shown that a

maximum breadth of 10 mm. in the anterior lobe of M, is occasionally

reached in the local form, M. qiganleus melanops, Gould,

A comparison of the cranial and dental featnres of the Potoroinae

of these collections, with the series reviewed (supra) will be presented

elsewhere. Treatment of the skeletal material is deferred pending

completion of a review of the general ogtcology of the group, which is

in hand.

REMARKS ON THE DISTRIBUTION AND BIONOMIC

INTERRELATIONS OF THR POTOROINAK

In the modern wreck of this remarkable group of mammals the

plan ol its unfolding into the vast territories, which it formerly

oeeupied, is but dimly te be seen. The contributions of palaeontology

are yet to come,” and the recent distribution, imperfectly known as

it is, together with the phylogeny of its members at species level, are

the main sources of such insight as may be had, and they leave much

unexplained.

Deductions made on a continental seale from what is known of

distribution, are apt to be fallacious here, unless due regard is had for

the comparatively recent and unequal effects of aridity. This

(whether it be a waxing or a waning influence) has undoubtedly left

its mark on the range of some species, which were probably first

occupied under climates very different from the present. Even such

broad questions as the site of origin of the radiation and the diree-

tions iu which species have diffused are largely speculative. It may

(2) T¢ the molar figured hy Johnston (1882) to which ottention has recently been redirected

by Edmund Gill (1957) is neeeptrd as a member of this group, it would nppear to

be the earliest recorded oceurrenee, Tt came trom the beds of One Tree Point,

Tasmania, stated to be of Upper Tertiary age.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART IIT 297

be noted that there is in a general way a tendency for concentration

hoth of species and population, in the south and east and that

Tasmania was oceupied by both sections of the subfamily, whereas m

the north and west representation is more sparse and neither section

attained a footing in New Guinea.

Recent work on the phylogeny of the group by Pearson (1947;

1950), whose main theme in his later papers is the distinction of the

rat kangaroos as a whole from the Macropodidae at full family level,

bas tended to obseure the deep cleavage between the potoroos and

bettongs. This was first developed by Bensley (1903) from cranial

and dental eonsideratious chie(ly and was considered by him to eall

for subfamily distinction. The merits and demerits of this are

variously regarded, but it seems to derive some geographical support

from what is known of the present occurrence of the most primitive

forms of both sections. Unless the sites now occupied are to be

regarded as mere fortuitous residual areas in a much wider former

range, they might be accepted as points of origin of two distinct

radiations, the one stemming from a Hypsiprymnodon-like ancestor in

the north-east and yielding the Beltungia species and Aepyprymnus,

and the other arising in the extreme suuth-west from a primitive

Polorous species or potoromorph and leading, as Bensley believed, to

P. tridactylus as its linear end point and to Calaprymnus as a highly

aberrant offshoot. Tn both cases the evolution leads from dense serub

or jungle living forms of sedentary habit and restricted range to

highly mobile, wide ranging denizens of open forest or plains, The

similarity of Belfongia and Caloprymnius in somatic features is

remarkably close but attained through convergence of phylogenetically

distinct stocks, Spencer’s postulate (1896,1.184) of a widely separate

origin of Betfongia and Hypsiprymuadon, the former in the main

east-central originating centre of the Diprotedonts and the latter in

a north-eastern Torresian site, seems to clash with the generally

accepted derivative relation of the two genera,

In the field relations of Bettongia penicillata with B, lesyeurt and

Aepyprymnus rufescens there is much that is interesting and signifi-

cant. Morphologically and in relation to the main evolutionary trends

of the genus, B. penicillata may be regarded as a basal and compara-

tively generalized form, while B. leswewri and Aepyprymnus on the

other land are advanced in the same sense and have in addition

adaptive specializations of an individual kind. There is little doubt

that over much of South and Western Anstralia, B. penteillata and

DB. lesueuri were truly sympatric, camping and feeding over the same

298 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

areas and exploiting ecological combinations of a very similar kind.

In the higher rainfall areas B. penicillata more than held its own and

often maintained much denser populations than B, lesuewrt, But with

inereasing aridity this proportion was reversed until in the Centre

B. lesueuri vastly outnumbered B. penicillata, which in all probability

was being rapidly eliminated there long before any of the adverse

factors of Mnropean oecupation operated against either species. Here

under present day conditions, when population clensity in relation to

total area ayailable is always low, it is doubtful whether direct com-

petition plays much part. in the eliminating process, which is probably

decided by adaptive deficiencies in the uest-building habit as cot-

pared with the fossorial one of B. lesneurt. Caloprymmis, a nest

builder, succeeds in maintaining only a very tenuous hold on the Lake

Eyre Basin, where it has no marsupial competitors on the same

ecological level.

In eastern Australia, similar relations must have existed between

B. penicillata and Aenyprymius, WKrefft indeed, quoting the blacks,

stated that there were considerable discontinuities in the habitats of

the two in New South Wales. bot in many districts, the Dawson

Valley for example, in Queensland, blending of territories or very

close interdigitation of the same, must have oceurred, The recession

of B. penicillata from these fertile and well-watered districts, which

was also largely independent of Kuropean influences, was much more

probably due to direct competition, in which dAepyprymnus, also a nest

builder, would be advantaged by its superior size, and more advanced

herbivorons dentition and greater range of food plants,

The general distribution pattern of the species and their con-

trasting status, snggests that B. penicillata, as an earlier protean

generalized form gained transcontinental distribution in the absenee

of competition, and under somewhat more pluvial conditions than now

obtain. It was then encroached on by later developing and more

specialized forms; Aepyprymuus ultimately replacing it in most of

the north-eastern coastal areas, gatmardi in a portion of the Pacific

Slope of the Divide, and cuniculus in a later insulated Tasmania;

while in the south and west lesweuri reached equilibrium with it where

the rainfall was assured and supplanted it in the Centre with the aid

of increasing aridity. So far as is known, no species of Bettongia

occurs in the eastern portion of the Lake Eyre Basin which is the

present habitat of Caloprymnus; the failure of B. lesueuri to supplant

the indigenons Calaprymnus in this area, which is near the eastern

frontier of its advance in this latitude, is probably due, like other

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART III 299

similar anomalies in the Centre, to lack of sufficient population

pressure in the former to provide the incentive for invasion of a

habitat of such rigorous conditions,

SUMMARY

1. The results of field work on Central Australian representatives

of the Potoroinae are summarized,

2. The continental distribution and status of Bettongia lesueurt

Q). and G. and of Bettongia penicillata Gray is diseussed and the

distribution approximately mapped,

3. Detailed reviews of external, cranial and dental characters of

authentically localized populations of these species are made and

suhspecific differentiation assessed in general terms.

4. There is brief treatment of habits, bionomic interrelations,

post-Pleistocene representation and related topics.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

(The dental elements figured are of the right side of the dorsal aspect of the skull

unless otherwise stated.)

PLATE XXVIL

The skull in Betlongia lesueuri Quoy and Gaimard, 1824,

Fig. A. Dorsal aspect in an adult @ from Mount Conner, Central Australia. A broad short

muzzled phase (X 0.9).

Fig. B. Dorsal aspect in an adult ¢ from the Musgrave Range area of far north-west South

Australia, A narrower, longer muzzled phase (X 0.9),

Fig. C. Dorsal aspect in an adult g¢ from River Light, lower South Australia (X 0.8).

Fig. ” Pati aspect in an adult @ from West Popanyinning, south-west Western Australia

X 0.8).

Palatal aspect of exumple figured at A (X 0.9),

Lateral aspect of the same (X 0.9).

Occipital aspect of the same (X 0.8),

Lateral aspect of right mandibular ramus of example figured at B (X 1.1).

PLATE XXVIUT

Dentition of Bettongia lesucuri Quoy and Gaimard, 1824,

Fig. A. Labial and buecal aspects of the upper incisors, canine, P* and MP* in a subadult. 3

from Mount Conner, Central Australia (X 2.9),

Fig. B. The occlusal aspect of same (X 2.9),

Fig. C. Buecal aspect of the lower teeth P,, MP,, M,, M, in an immature 9 from the Mus-

grave Range area of South Australia (X 3.0).

Fig. D. Occlusal aspect of P, and MP, of the same (X 5.0).

Fig, E. Buceal aspect of P* in an adult ¢ from the Musgrave Range area (X 2.9).

Fig.

300 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Fig. F. Ocelusal aspeet of the same, showing strong development of the postervinternal

(talon) eusp. (X 2,9),

Fig. G. Occlusal aspect of unworn P* in a young adult @ from the same locality, showing

virtual absence of talon (X 2.8).

Fig, H. Bueeal aspect of P, of tha same individual (X 3.1),

Fig, T. Occhisal aspect of the same (X 3.0).

Fig. J. Occlusal aspect of P, in a young adult from Ti-Tree Gully, lower South Australia; a

taloned variant with sigmoid outline (X 2.8).

Fig. K. Buceal aspeet of P* (of left side) in a young adult ¢ from Popanyinning, south-

west Western Australia (X 2.8).

Fig. L. Ocelusal aspect of upper cheek teeth in the immature Q figured at C and D, showing

unworn crown patterns in M* and M* (portion of M? im alveoli) (X 3,0).

Fig. M. Ocelusal aspect of M*M* in an adult g from Mount Conner, Central Australia,

showing moderate wear (X 4.0).

PLATE XXTX

The skull in Bettongia penicillata subspp.

Fig. A. Dorsal aspeet of an adult 9 of B, penicillata ogilbyi Waterhouse from Augusta,

south-west Western Australian (X 0.9).

Fig, B, Dorsal aspect of a subadult of the same at P*M* from Mount Lofty, South Australia

(X 1.0).

Fig. C. Palatal aspeet of the example figured at A (X 0.9).

Fig. D. Lateral sspect of same (X 0.9),

Fig. E. Occipital aspeet of same (X 0.9).

Fig. F. Lateral aspect of right mandibular ramus of same (X 1,1),

Fig. G. Dorsal aspect of type skull of RB. penicillata anhydra (X 0.0),

Fig. H. Palatal aspect of same (X 0.9).

PLATE XXX

The dentition in Betiongia penicillata subspp.

Fig. A. Labial aspect of upper incisors and canine of the left side in an immature 3 of

B. penicillata ogilbyt from Cuballing, south-west Western Australia (X 3.0).

Fig. B. Occlusal aspect of same (X 3.0).

Fig, ©, Bueeal aspect of P* and MP* in an advanced subadult ¢ in which the molar rows

have been completed before the tooth change. Same locality (X 3,1).

Fig. D. Occlusal aspect of the complete upper series P*-M"*, in the same (X 2.8).

Fig. KE. Buccal aspect of the lower serics in the same (X 2.8).

Vig. F, Occlusal aspect of the same (X 2.8),

Fig, G. Bueeal aspect of P* in an adult 2 of B. penicillata ogilbyi from Augusta, south-

west Western Australia (X 3.1),

Fig. H. Occlusal aspect of same (X 3,1).

Fig. I. Bueeal aspect of P, in same individual (X 2.9),

Fig. J. Occlusal aspect of same (X 2.9),

Fig. K. Bueeal aspect of P* in the type of B. penicillata anhydra (X 2.8).

Fig, L. Occlusal aspect of P* and M*M* of the left side of the same (X 2.8),

Fig. M. Buceal aspect of P* in the type of B. penivillata francisea (X 3.0).

Fig, N. Occlusal aspect of P* und M*-M* of the left side of the same (X 3.0).

Fig. O. Ocelusal aspect of P* and M*M®* (right side) in an adult ¢@ from lower South

Australia, showing considerable wear and a well developed accessory buceal cusp on

M? (X 2.8).

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS—PART IIL 301

PLATE XXXT

The charaeters of the head in Bettongia penicillata ogilbyi; an immature 9 from

Cuballing, south-west Western Australia, (Photographed January, 1926.) (X 1,3¢a,)

REFERENCES

Abbie, A. A., 1939: Proe, Zool. Soc. London, 109B, 276

Andrews, F. W., 1876: S. Aust. Parl, Paper No. 19,

Bensley, B. A., 1908: Trans. Linn. Soe., London, 2, TX, 83-217.

Bolliger, A., 1938: Aust. Medical Review, 1118.

Boardman, W., 1948: Trans. Linn. Soc., New South Wales, LXVITI, 106,

1949: ibid. LXXTIYV, 195.

Brazenor, C. W., 1950: Mammals of Victoria, Melbourne, 46,

Browne, J. H., 1897: Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 72.

Cabrera, A., 1919: Genera Mamalium; Monotremata, Marsupialia,

Madrid, 135.

Carnegie, D. W., 1898: ‘‘Spinifex and Sand’’, London, 249 et seq.

Collett, R., 1897: Proe. Zool. Soe. London, 317-336,

Cooper, H. M., 1952: ‘*French Exploration in South Australia’’,

Adelaide, 1-200,

—— 1958: “*The Unknown Coast’’, Adelaide, 39.

Dahl, K,, 1897: The Zoologist, 671, 210,

Finlayson, Ti. H., 1981: Trans. Roy. Soe. S, Aust., LV, 89.

—_—— 1932: ibid, LVI, 148-167,

1933: ibid, LVII, 201.

1935: The Red Centre, Sydney, Map.

1936: Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., LX 159.

1940; ibid. 64. 1. 125-136.

1941: ibid. 65. 2. 215-232.

——— 1957: Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 12, X, 552.

Forbes-Leith and Lucas, 1884: Vict. Nat., 1. 4.

Gill, Edmund D., 1957: Memoirs. Nat. Mus., Melbourne, 21, 189.

till, Thomas, 1909; Proce, Roy. Geog. Soc. Aust’asia., S, Aust. Branch,

X (1907-1908), 181.

Giles, H., 1889: ‘‘Australia twice traversed’’, London 1, 280.

Glauert, L., 1933: Jour, Roy. Soc. West. Austr., XIX, 26.

—— 1950: ibid. XXXIV, 115-134.

Gould, John, 1840: Proc. Zool. Soe. London, 178.

———— 1841: ‘tA monograph of the Macropodidae’’, London, Pl.

XTV.

1852: ““Mammals of Australia’’, Pl. LXII and text.

1855: ibid. Pl. LXIV and text.

302 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Gray, J. F., 1887: Charlesworth’s Mag. Nat. Hist., London, 1, 584.

1843: List Mammals Brit. Museum, London, 94.

Harper, F., 1945: ‘*Hxtinet and vanishing mammals of the Old

World’’, New York, 79-81.

Harvey, J, B., 1840: 8S. Aust, Magazine, 1, 210,

Iredale, T., 1987: Aust. Zoologist, 9. 40,

Johnston, R, M., 1882: Pap. and Proe. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1881, 12,

fig. G4a-e.

Johnston, T. H., 1943; Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67 (2). 263,

Krefft, G., 1862: Trans. Phil. Soc, New South Wales, 1.

1864: Cat. Mamms. Aust. Museum, Sydney, 45,

Le Sonef, A. S., ef al, 1926: ‘‘Wild Animals of Australasia’’, 236.

Longman, H. A., 1930: Mems. Queensland Museum, X, 1, 55-64.

Lundelins, E., 1957: West, Aust. Naturalist, 5, 173-182,

Lydekker, R., 1894: ‘‘Marsupials and Monotremes’’, Allen’s Nat.

Library, 68.

Owen, R., 1866: ‘Anatomy of Vertebrates’’, 2. 342.

Pearson, J., 1947: Reports of A.N.Z.A.A.S. (Adelaide), 1946, 91-93.

———— 1950: Pap. and Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 211-229,

Qnoy and Gaimard, 1824: ‘‘Voyage Uranie’’, Zoology, 64,

Sanger, EH. B., 1882: Am. Naturalist., XVIII. 9-14.

Serventy, D. L., 1953-55: West. Aust. Naturalist, 4, 136.

Shortridge, G. C., 1910: Proc. Zool. Soc, London 2, 803-848.

Spencer, B., 1896; ‘‘Reports of the work of the Horn Scientific

Expedition to Central Australia’, Pt, 2. Zoology.

Tate, R., 1879: Trans. Phil. Soc. 8. Aust. (1878-1879), 124.

Tate, G. H. H., 1948: Bull. Am. Mns. Nat. Hist., 91, 269.

1952; wid, 98, 592.

Thomas, O., 1888: ‘*Catalogue of Marsupials and Monotremes in the

British Museum’’, 112.

1907: Proe. Zool. Soc. London (1906), 769-773.

Tindale, N. B., 1940: Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Aust., 64, 1, 142-231, Map.

1957: Rec. S. Austr. Museum, XIII, 1-49.

Waterhouse, G. R., 1841: Jariine’s Naturalists Library, XI, 183.

1842: Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 47.

1846: Natural History of Mammalia, Lond,, 1, 203.

Wood Jones, F’., 1923-1925: ‘‘Mammals of South Australia’’, Adelaide,

207.

1923b: Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., XLVI, 94.

Ree. Sod. Musee Vor. NIT, Phare NNVII

Ta face page WO.)

Ree,

Musto

Paduim ‘hh ‘iy

Vou. NTL, Phare XXVIII

HH)

(Photu.

Dentition at ye Hlanaia lesieie Q paul Gi.

Ree, Sol. Mouse Von. NIITT, Phare NNLN

iv.

illata Gr

in Betlhondia per

ne,

S.A. Museum

Vou. NEEL Pare XAN

hy JEU

(Phota,

vicilate Gru,

Dentitien of Le ttoyaia pe

Rises SoA,

M Vor. NET Puyre NNNI

Hlend of Beltongee pewiettato ogilthae Waterhouse, (iota, hs Tabby

RECORDS

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Vol. XIII, No. 3

Published by The Museum Board, and edited by the Museum Director

Adelaide, 2nd July, 1959

Printed in Australia by W. L. HAWES, Government Printer, Adelaide

Registered in Australia for transmission by post as a periodical

OBITUARY NOTICE

SIR DOUGLAS MAWSON, O.B.E., F.R.S., D.SC., B.E.,

1882-1958

It is with deepest regret that we have to record the death of Douglas Mawson on the 14" October,

1958, at the age of 76.

It truly may be said of him that he was the most notable and active of those who have served in an

honorary capacity in the South Australian Museum.

Air Douglas Mawson, O.6.70,, PATS. Dese, BAL, TRS 1958.

OBITUARY NOTICE

Sm DOUGLAS MAWSON, O.B.E., F.B.S., D.Sc., B.H., 1882-1958

It is with deepest regret that we have to record the death of

Douglas Mawson on the 14th October, 1958, at the age of 76,

It truly may be said of him that he was the most notable and

active of those who have served in an honorary capacity in the South

Australian Museum.

His association with this institution commenced fifty-two years

ago—surely a record. For about fifty years he was Honorary Curator

of Minerals; for many years a prominent member of the Museum

Committee; and later, of the Museum Board, of which he was

Chairman at his death.

He vigorously advocated the need for separating the Museum,

Art Gallery and Public Library into independent departments, instead

of all being controlled by a composite Board of Governors with

unrelated interests. His representations were a major factor in

bringing about the adoption of the system of separate control for

each of these public institutions.

His scientific achievements and world-wide reputation are too

well-known to need mention here. It is because of the high esteem

in which he was held by those fortunate enough to have been closely

associated with him that his passing will be so deeply mourned by

all Members of the Board and Staff of this institution where, through

his active interest, everyone was privileged to enjoy his quiet

and modest disposition—always the sympathetic friend and wise

counsellor.

Douglas Mawson was a noble figure physically; but also, in every

sense, a great man—one long to be remembered.

TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN THE WESTERN DESERT OF AUSTRALIA

PART I

WOMEN WHO BECAME THE PLEIADES

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

In Western Desert lore the Pleiades and the Morning Star are ancestral Women Beings, given

various names (Kungkarungkara, Okaralja, Aragutja, IIknarindja, etc.). They climbed into the sky

and became stars to escape the attentions both of a man named Njiru, and of his son Jula. These

women attacked Njiru with packs of dogs which they kept as their protectors. In the sky of autumn,

the early morning appearance of the Pleiades, low down in the east, marks the beginning of the

aboriginal New Year and the commencement of the season when dingo dogs (papa) give birth to

their young. Since these pups serve as food for men, Increase Ceremonies for the dingo are a feature

of the autumn season. The stories of the would be virgin women are made complex because the

names of some of the principal beings are changed and even became transposed in some tribal

versions of the stories.

TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN THE WESTERN DESERT OF AUSTRALIA

PART I

WOMEN WHO BECAME THE PLEIADES

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.Sc., Sours Avustranman Museum

Plates xxxii-xxxix and text fig, 1-8

SUMMARY

In Western Desert lore the Pleiades and the Morning Star are

ancestral Women Beings, given various names (Kungkarungkara,

Okaralja, Aragutja Uknarindja, etc.), They climbed into the sky and

became stars to escape the attentions both of a man named Njiru,

and of his son Jula. These women attacked Njiru with packs of

dogs which they kept as their protectors. In the sky of autumn, the

early morning appearance of the Pleiades, low down in the east,

marks the beginning of the aboriginal New Year and the commence-

ment of the season when dingo dogs (papa) give birth to their young.

Since these pups serve as food for men, Increase Ceremonies for the

dingo are a feature of the autumn season. The stories of the would

be virgin women are made complex because the names of some of

the principal beings are changed and even became transposed in some

tribal versions of the stories.

In this paper Mandjindjara, Pindiini, Pitjandjara, Ngadadjara

and Jangkundjara outlines of the stories are given and a preliminary

description also is given of a cave, Owalinja (‘Walinja, O’walinja),

on the northern side of the Musgrave Ranges, where Jangkundjara

tribespeople held Increase Ceremonies for the Kungkarungkara, Papa

and associated totems, in a sacred cave. They also depicted their

Ancestral Beings on its walls.

INTRODUCTION

This is the beginning of a series in which it is proposed to set

out basic data on some myths and totemic beliefs of the several

peoples of the Great Western Desert of Australia.

It is planned to give an account of the material evidences for

the totemie beliefs, and where possible to give texts and details of

306 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

song cycles and ceremonies, Stone arrangements, secret places, and

associated markings and paintings will be described and eeremonial

objects figured.

This data will be amplified with drawings made by aborigines

themselves in illustration of statements they have made about their

beliefs. There will be discussions on the significance of the stories.

Data is in hand for the Jangkundjara, Pitjandjara, Mandjindjara,

Pindiini, Jumu, Kukatja, Pintnbi, and Neadadjara tribes among

others in the eastern and central areas of the Desert, as well as

much other data from the Wanman, Mandjildjara, and several other

tribes of the northern and western portions of the Desert. The

distribution of these tribes is shown in a map published by Tindale

(1940) of which a new edition is in preparation, The name Pindiini

relates to the tribe called Wongaii on the map. The name Pindiini is

now preferred,

Observations on which this series is based commenced among

Pintubi and Jumu people met at Mount Liebig, Central Australia,

during a Board for Anthropological Research and South Australian

Museum Hxpedition, August, 1932. During this University of

Adelaide Expedition beliefs abont the Pleiades group of stars and

about the ancestral virgin women linked with them, were first bronght

to the personal notice of the author in their Jumu and Pintubi versions.

Two years previously he had been shown tlie Aragutja Ilknarindja

Ceremony of the Kukatja near Hermannsburg, Central Australia.

These stories aroused his interest and it became evident that a

detailed study might have high value in the understanding of native

beliefs.

During a three-monthtong journey in the Mann and Musgrave

Ranges (May-Angnst 1933) many sheets of drawings and associated

data were collected from Jangkundjara and Pitjandjara men and a

first attempt was made to learn the language of the Western Desert

people and to collect, their stories in text (see preliminary report by

Tindale 1933). Jangkundjara men at this time depicted drawings and

related outlines of myths connected with Owalinja, Aliwanjawanja,

and other sacred places in the area, and gave details of the

Kungkaringkara woinen, Ceremonies in which the activities of some

of the Beings were enacted, were filmed at Konapandi and at

Ernabella and were published (Board for Anthropological Research

16 mm. films Nos. 20, 26, and 27),

TINDALE—TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN AUSTRALIA 307

Field work continued at Ooldea in November 1934, among Pindiini

and Mandjindjara men from west of Ooldea and with Jangkundjara

people who had come south from the Everard Ranges. Men named

Kakana, Mindjukuli (the latter then abont 50 years of age), Mana

and some others of the Jangkundjara tribe had memories which

went back to before the times of the Carruthers Survey of 1888-1890,

when the aborigines made their first. effective contacts with white

men. Their kinsmen of course had had brief encounters with earlier

explorers, including Giles (1874) who had an armed encounter with

some 200 of the Musgrave Range aborigines at Officer Creek, on

September 6, 1875.

In 1935, gathering of data, including drawings, was continued

among Neadadjara people durimg an Hixpedition led by the author

to the Warburton Ranges in Western Australia. These people were

then fully tribalised. Some of the drawings were obtamed jointly

with an associate on this occasion, and some of them have been

described (Mountford 1937). It was agreed that he should amply

himself more particularly to diseussion of the artistic aspects of the

work of these people, leaving the exposition of the mythological

content to the present writer. Some details of the Wati Kutjara myth

have been given in a paper published shortly after the Expedition

returned, Tindale (1936, p, 169).

In 1989 field work was continned with some of the same

Ngailadjara informants as were first encountered in 1935. By this

date they had congregated in the vieinity of Laverton, Western

Australia, Tribal disintegration, brought abont in part by the estab-

lishment of the Warburton Range Mission, and by the transportation

of some of the natives ta the township, had enticed them many miles

away from their own territories. Unfortunately few ever retarned

to thetr original homes and most of them were still missing from

there when the area was visited again in 1957,

After a rather long break, orccasioned by other activities during

the war, Ooldea Soak was re-visited in 1949. Between the two visits

Mr. and Mrs. R. M. Berndt had studied there, publishing their field

notes in a series of reports in Oceania, Berndt and Berndt (1944).

Because of the changing population at that Soak it is not certain that

any of their data was obtained from people T met there earlier, and

their notes touch only incidentally on stories referred to in this paper,

Some Pintuhi and Nealia aspects of the Kungkarungkara myth

were studied agam at Yuendumu, Central Australia in 1951.

308 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

Western Australian data, coming from tribes as far west as the

Indian Ocean, were gleaned during a period of six months field work

im 1953. Still further data was added at Haast Bluff, Central

Australia during visits in 1956 and again in 1957, Tape recordings

were made of several versions of the Kungkarungkara and assaciated

tuyths. In between the two visits to Haast Bluff, the Jangkundjara

and Pitjandjara tribal territories were re-visited as far west as

Lightning Rocks, Western Australia, in eompany with Mr. W, B.

MaeDougall, Native Patrol Officer. Many ceremonial places were

visited in the Rawlinson, Blyth, Cavanagh, Musgrave and Everard

Ranges and southward to beyond Mount Lindsay. During this

journey it was possible to visit Owalinja in company with one of the

aldest of the western Pitjandjara men and to learn a little about

the vast detail of paintings depicted in the Owalinja Rock Shelter.

Subsequently it was possible to talk with several Jangkundjara men

about the significance of this cave,

KUNGKARUNGKARA AND THE MAN NJIRU

While men were waiting for a party of young initiates to arrive

at Oollea during one of the concluding stages of the minu initiation

ceremonies of 1934, at which T was present by invitation, fourteen

men took part in a disenssion ahowt the journeyings of the Wati

tjitji tjukur of Koljorn. Those present included Pindiini (Wongalt),

Mandjindjara, and Jangkundjara tribesmen, some of whorm had never

met each other belore this series of ceremonies, The author happened

to come on them on the Sth November just after discussions had

hegun and was able to wateh old Pindiinit and Mandjindjara men

drawing circles, one by one, on the ground, joining them with single

and multiple lines, as they described the encounter of the Being

Njiru with the Minma (Okaralja, or Kungkarungkara) women, The

occasion so fortunately and wuhexpectedly encountered, was the

description by a Pindiini man, to a Jangkundjara andience, of the

Mandjindjara and Pindiini versions of the myth, He was assisted

hy a Mandjindjara man.

Fig. 1 depicts a copy of the ground drawing, which, after over two

hours of exposition, extended over the sand for a length of about

25ft. During this time the audience had shuffled and moved along

the sandy ground, without rising to their feet and thns had kept pace

with the growth of the pictographie record of the progress of the

story.

Kapi Koljoruna

Jalainja Pandiinia Kapi Koljoruna

Jolperna

Manakanbini

Alunitjanja

Wunbunbunja

Mujuna pena

Mitata

Kulalja

genaptiuionia

Oilpurudjara na

Oleininja AnmayaO

UR.

Fig. 1. Journey of the Wati Njiru from Koljoru to Anmango, as depicted in a ground

drawing 25ft. long, at Ooldea, South Australia, 5th November, 1934. The design has been

cut into five lengths so that Para is followed by Manakanbini and so on.

310 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSEUM

The given outline of the journey was that known to Pindiini

men in whose territory the place Koljoru, figuring largely in the

story, was said to be.

Wati tjitji kotjo tjokotjoko (man child one small), who became

the Ancestral Being Njiru appeared in the west as a child at Kapi

Koljoruna, the Koljoru Water Place (Kaljorn, Koloru, Kaljornnga,

ete.), which is south-east of the Warburton Ranges in Western

Australia. Its position on the map was learned many years later,

Whence Njiru came no-one present knew, but he arrived from

the north-east. He then travelled north-westward from Koljoru, but

Mandjindjara men who knew of his track were not at Ooldea to tell

of his earliest wanderings, as a boy. However Koko, a Pindiini man,

who had heen to Laverton, Western Australia and who spoke some

English, thought Njiru had gone as tar west as Tarlu (Lake Darlot)

“near Meekatharra, but long before white man went there.’’ In the

west Njira became a man, After he had been cireumeised and

subincised he journeyed south from Tarlo, and then eastwards to

Tjokoranja and again eastward to Jalainja. One day when he went

into Jalainja to drink water he was attacked by a pack of dogs

belonging to Minma tjuknr (women totem). These Minma or women

were the Kiungkatungkara (also called Kungkarara or Okaralja).

Njirn fled into the bushland, trailing an injured member, forming a

long water-course called Njirunjawipu (Njirn penis) extending to

Wangarna. After this he travelled on to visit various waters,

including Pandjinja, Pilapila and Pandiunja, returning again to Kapi

Koljerina before going on to Pedinja. Near Pedinja at a place

called Korukading he had an encounter with a Being named Korukadi

of whom more will be said in a later paper. As he journeyed still

further eastward towards lara, Njiru, now healed of the wounds to

his wipu, made a line of sandhills extending north-eastwards. This

is the Njtrunatali, along which he caused stall watering places to

appear, at intervals, At Para he lay down on a sandhill (tali),

leaving an impression of his hody, known as the Talimurumuru, He

then continued on to Tali 'Tjangara and Manakanbini. Pollowing the

same line of waters for seven or more stages to Jompilnga he again

encountered the Kungkarungkara women, near Mojuna, The women

who had fled from Jalainja after their Papa (dogs) had driven Njiru

away, went to Papulnga where there was a Kapi tjangara (ie, a

water depression) frequented by Koneia, a Snake Being, Tlis Being

had come from Koljoruna by a different track, The women killed the

snake at Papulnga, cansing the water to dry up, and then continued

TINDALE—TOTEMIC. BELIEFS IN AUSTRALIA 311

in the direction of Mujuna. In the ground drawing, four lines made

by running fingers through the sand marked the journey of the

women towards Mujuna.

Near Jompilnga Njirn had discovered tracks of these four

Kungkarungkara women walking separately across country to Mujuna

from the north-avest. He followed them, passing Mujuna, then the

Mujunapena (Mujuna clay pan) and continued on their trail, first

to Wunbunbunja, and then to Alungitjanja. Tere the four women

were seen to be together, and Njiru caught up with them, but they

= Pe =a > Thay

on” hk ‘Sh rite f-= ES a

yee ce LEA, eh. et

oY 2 BE .B@a\h Be Ey

: , SS eke’ 3S esi =o oon

se PE ie Sse! =

: = A Ss a ho ms,

: = ae G 5” =a <= ae *

: aS ‘SS’ ! = ea ett

. 4 ga #*

: j ‘ = niente

’

nate!

Pace gan tema

ng Aa. =" eA

i) Selgiae ny i hielb, HEL A

NER

‘

--a-

‘

See dyenett®

TO.

TT ETTED

Mir OROOT-

LG; uy > ai

Gi>

o «

uy. eFDLpI.

Ider:

SEDs

ater eet.

‘

7 Mies & ANT

lie S ’ Fs

eed Pr] 4 a ‘ + +!

lve vas are oy VES) as

,aimee ay Bf :

. ; = Sys oy ae ae

* (ae =| >, 2 . =

2 1 & as ; ~

"e 2 = — <i) t ‘

ee , oe =>

*, a t=} ~ 3 = ;

est vs =

~y 2g ;

et eey es S$ ,

we oo? aa

Fig, 8 Geographical drawing showing the Vieinity of Konkakutjarana (place of two

women) also called Minma Kutjara. The left half shows the jnbu (hills) from which a

watercourse, cutting across other hills, runs from Koljoruna to Kapi Pedinja (Petinga),

represented by the eirele, The watercourse runs in # north-casterly direction; wavy lines

at right are runnels of water off the range, called ‘water anakes'', The whole records an

episode in the journey of Njiru from Koljoruna to Pedinja. Tt was drawn in black, red

(represented by dots) and yellow (indicated by short linea) by Kakana, a Pindiini man

at Ouldea, 9th November, 1984. Tt should be compared with Fig, 3b, depicting a separate

event of the atory, which represents this part merely by a line connecting two cireles.

312 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

eseaped again and fled in the same WNW direction to Tjawaltjawal

(this is also the name of a sandhill-growing tobacco plant), to

Tetunja, Ukanja, and thence to Tjiimatanja-mama, visiting the main

waterhole and also the camping place of Tjiimatanja. They then

hastened on passing Klponja, Mitata (a ngama waterhole), Patagi

and Kaltjan, turned ESH to Kulalnga, and again NE to Oleininja

and Oilpurudjarana, At Alanjinga, Njiru almost caught up with

them but they took flight, like eagles, and escaped leaving no tracks

(maka tjena), Unable to find them Njiru walked NE to Pokoding

(Pokodinja), going a long way without seeing any signs of them.

He then turned SE and at Kongauga found stale (racks of the women,

He followed these to Konkatjutanja (women-many-place) a very long

way, This is the western-most water used by the Jangkundjara

tribesmen and situated south of Cheesman Peak (native name

Pingkikavinga). At this point Pindiimi and Mandjindjara men “lost

the story,'’ for Njiru had gone into the territory of Pitjandjara

people at Anmango, Njiru became a star and Kelilbi the morning

(and evening star) represents some of the women who kept dodging

away from him, Kvery man has a share in this wapar (story) and

each place meritioned in the above summary has its own song.

In the course of the next few days several men made drawings

which brought ont details of the story, Thus fig. 2 shows the

geographical setting of events in tie life of Njiru near Koaljorw.

Vig. 3 b sngyests the activities of the Kungkarungkara after the

attack by Njiru at Jalainja and fig. 4 a shows the line of sandhills

made by Njiru between Pedinja and Para. All the places are west

of Anmango, whieh, I learned in 1957, is at the western end of a

range close to and west of Cheesman Peak, near the border of

Western and South Australia,

During the evening and night following this exposition of the

journeyings of Njiru and the Kungkarungkara, the stars of Orion's

Belt were pointed out to me as representing the Being Njiru. As the

night progressed a series of three pairs of stars successively rising

were iniicated to be the footprints ol Njiru (Njirn tjena). Some

days later a man made a drawing of Njiru (fig. 4, bh) wearing a

wanigi (or string figure) made of paduru (fur string) to represent

these Inma Njirunja tjena. The tips of such wanigi are decorated

with tjwrlpn tjaljurupa (bird feather deeorations). In the night sky

a very bright star ovar Orion’s Belt is Tjantjalu; this star wears

such tjnrlpu feathers. These tjaljuru (taljuru) feathers, detached

from wanigi and placed on a stick, are worn by young men in their

ler

tt ae saree eee

ee eee

Thee weer e ne ee

wih)

Fig. 3. a, Minma or woman following Papa (dog). Tracks as drawn by Lenggat-

jukur, a Pitjandjara man about 52 years old, at Umbukulu in the Mann Ranges,

Ynd July, 19383. The original drawing was in white. b, Geographical drawing repre-

senting the tracks of the Kungkarungkara women as they fled wildly away from

Jalainja (red cirele, top left) with their dogs; drawing shows their change of pace

as they neared Papulnga, where they found water jn a small piti or rockhole (central

spot) in a tjangara or large basin (large concentric spiral). The water was brought

there hy Koneia (a snake) from far away Koljorunja (down from top right). They

killed the snake, so destroying the water, and travelled away northward (series of

lines to right). The Being Njiru, having been bitten by the Papa (dogs) of the

Kungkarungkara, at Jalainja, dragged his injured member, making a gorge or water

channel, Njirunjawipu rimuing to Wangarna (top left). He then made a track east-

ward through Pilapila, Pandunja, and Koljoruna to Pedinjakapi (double circle at

hottom centre), Beyond the limit of the drawing he continued to Para and Mana-

kanbini. A line of waters from Papulnga to Pedinja shows the distance which

separated Njirn and the women. These waters were Jaldainga, Japurunja, Pujudunja,

Neapartinja, Ngintajarunga, Porpordjun and Korukading (near Pedinja). Drawn

by Kakana, at Ooldea, 18th November, 1934. Dots represent. red, black lines are black

in the original.

314 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

hair when they return to their homes after they have passed through

the final stages of the minu ceremony of initiation.

After the stars representing Njiru tjena had risen in the sky

the Kungkarungkara (also called Okaralja, Kungkarara and Minma)

appeared in the early summer sky, These are the Pleiades. Still

later, before dawn, a pair of stars were seen which are called Ipi

ani

Fig. 4. a. Njirunjatali, a line of sandhills made by the Wati Njiru when travelling

north-eastward from Kapi Pedinja, at the left, to Pars, where he Iny down in a

depression beside the Talimurumuru and then continued towards the north-east. The

sandhills (tali) are of the kind called Tali tjangara with long-lasting-water-hearing

depressions in them. Red spots, depicted here by dots represent water places, the

Talimurumuru is shown as a black-ringed red patch, the tali were yellow in the

original; drawn by Kakana, November, 1934. b. Wati Njiru dancing with a wanigi

of puduru (fur string) on his head. The wanigi has the extremities of the arms

decorated with tjurlpu tjaljurupa (bird feather ornaments). Alongside him is

depicted the minu walk, decorations painted on the badies of minu (subineised men)

as chest or back ornaments when they return to their families as fully initiated men.

Drawn by Mana, November, 1984, ec. Pitjandjara drawing showing Ipi, the two women

who became the wives of the Wati Kutjara. They are called Kalka kutjara by the

Ngadadjara. This design is painted in a cave at Mount Lindsay. d, Sand drawing,

original about 2ft. in diameter, depieting the Kungkarungkara as the Pleiadew in the

sky, Drawn by a Pitjandjara man on the ground, with his finger, while talking about

Owalinja Rock Shelter.

TINDALE—TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN AUSTRALIA 345

(the Women’s Breasts, or Milk). The last named stars are, as 1

learned some years later, linked by the Pitjandjara with Japu Minma

Tjukur, a Woman Ceremonial Stone, against which young girls press

themselves to cause their breasts to grow and their milk to flow.

The Ipi themselves are depicted sometimes as in fig, 4, ec. ‘The

Tpi women were wives of the Wati Kutjara.

JULA SON OF NJIRU AND THE KUNGKARUNGKARA

In Ngadadjara belief in the Warburton Ranges, Western Aus-

tralia, Jula was of the Purnngu ¢lass. He had come from the west to

Kanamara, a place to the east of Lake Carnegie. He chased and

married Pananka and Milangka women.

Ceremonies for hit were held at Kapi Rera in the Warburton

Ranges, At this place a ceremonial board, carvetl with intricate

patterns, was enclosed in a ceremonial object made from fur string

and displayed during a rite mtended to increase the supply of dingo

pups. Fig. 5, © shows a native drawing of the ceremonial object at

Kapi Rera, Further north there was another place, at Jakornka in

the eastern Rawlinson Range, Jula arrived there from a place called

Kunangura passing eastward along the Range to Jakornka where

there is a cave in which the Papa (dog) ceremony takes place.

A stone emblem, said to be that of Wati Jula, was seen at

Jakoruka by Mr. W, B. MacDougall during his exploration of the

area in 1950. He has shown me a photograph of it. Tt lay under a

pile of fresh Bucalyptus leaves held dawn hy stones. Hach stone was

of the size of a large ball, The stone emblem itself was about 2it.

long.

According to one statement the Being chased two Kungkarung-

kara women up the gorge in winter time (njenga), and his penis

became so cold thaf it snapped off.

Ngadadjara men of the Western Rawlinson Ranges say however,

that this object is the wipu (phallus) of Jula which had been bitten

hy Papa (dogs) belonging to the Kungkarungkara, and the stone halls

represent the kuna or faeces of the Dog Beings. Ceremonies are

held in the autumn season, aimed at expediting the rising of the

Pleiades growp of stars and stimulating the increase of dingo pups.

Jula is represented in the heavens as * and B Orion, The

‘helt of Orion’? represents the ‘toes’ or tracks of Jula. His wives

are represented by three red stars between « and P Orion.

316 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

After leaving Jakoruka Jula passed out of Ngadadjara territory

in a south-easterly direction to Wankarei (= Wankari) where he

went tarupango (he entered the ground or changed his state).

Wankarei is near Poka, a water east of Trew Gap on the north side

Wig. 5. a, Wati Julana, the man Jula at the plaee Ngaltabalunga, west

of Anmango, bearing a wanigi or string cross on his head. b. Bullroarer,

{fmbibubi, of the man Jula, at Ngaltabalunga, whence he travelled eastward

into Pitjandjara country. Drawn by Mindjukuli at Ooldea, 9th November,

1934, ¢, Wati Jula tingari tjukur, the man Jula secret totem, of the place

Kapi Rera in the Warburton Ranges, Western Australia, drawn by Katabulka,

4 Ngadadjara tribe old man, 23rd May, 1939, Drawing shows extremely

stylised human figure, incorporated into a representation of the secret board

of Jula. In Ngadadjara Increase Ceremonies the tjurung board (middle of

figure) is made the eentral feature of an elaborate string figure. The black

spots in pairs along the margin represent highly stylised tjaljuru (tjaljira)

or tufts of feathers terminating cross bars upon which the puduru or strings

are bound. In the two main drawings contrasted here, one seems to be a

highly stylised derivative of the other.

TINDALE—TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN AUSTRALIA 317

of the Mann Range. The name Nijiru does not seem to appear in

the Ngadadjara version of the myth and it is Jula who is attacked

by the dogs of the Kungkarungkara.

In the Pitjandjara version Wati Julana, fig. 5 a, is the son of

Njiru. He came into the Pitjandjara country from the far north-west,

swinging a bullroarer (bubi bubi) fig. 5 b, and appeared first at

Ngaltabalunga (place of good kurrajong trees), This water is west

of Anmango, and west of the Tomkingon Range, Nygaltabalunga is

on the border between Ngadadjara and Pitjandjara country. Fig, 5 a

shows Jula carrying a wanigi at Ngaltabalunga. He journeyed east

to a place called Jula, near Trew Gap in the Mann Range, where he

attempted to mate with Mingari. He had just succeeded in doing sa

when he was attacked by Papa Kantju.

Papa Kantju, or Kantjanja, was a dog devil being (papa mamu

tjukur). He attacked the Wati Julana, son of the Kungkarungkara,

drageed ont his testicles, and fed ou them. In Pitjandjara story this

event took place at Jula, west of and near Trew Gap in the Mann

Range, Jula had travelled from Poka to Umbukulu and thence to

Jula.

In ceremonies held in autumn the Pitjandjara enact this attack,

which they aseribe to the place Warara. Freshly scraped wood

shavings are made up into parcels and saturated with blood drawn

from the arms of participants by lashing the upper arm and piercing

a vein. The gory objects, kept highly oxidised by the fresh shavings,

are then either tied to the head of the dancer representing Jula or

held between the teeth of men acting the part of the Papa Kantju.

16 mm, films were taken of this ceremony by the present author in

1938 at Konapandi, and again at Ernabella in the Musgrave Ranges

and these were published by the Board for Anthropological Research,

University of Adelaide in their films Nos, 20 and 27.

PRELIMINARY NOTES ON THE PLEIADES MYTH OF THE

JANGKUNDJARA

The central theme of the Jangkundjara myth of the women of

the Pleiades is the life and behaviour of women of the dawn time as

they try to avoid the efforts of a male Being, Njiru, to enter into

incestuous relationship with them, for Njirn was ‘‘wrong’’ for them.

Niiru in part was successful, and Jula, a second Being was his son.

Jula had two sons, Milpali and Jungku by Mingari, The two lizard

318 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ge ot tee

Pat)

StS oat

‘ re "

Se STONY BEE BEN STS waae

Pig. 6. The Wati Kantjeiri who attacked Jula, son of the Kungkarungkara.

a. Wati Kanjeiri of Kandjanja. b. The Kanba (snake of the water Kand-

janja. c. Inma kudidji bunu ngalta, ceremonial shield of kurrajong tree,

used by the Being Kantjeiri, when he attacked Jula. d. Kudidji tjokotjoko,

small shield (i.e. one of normal size) used by present day Jangkundjara

people. e, f£. Ngalta kanku, desert kurrajong (Brachychiton gregorii) growing

at Kantjanja in the Everard Ranges. Drawn by Manana, 13th November,

1934.

TINDALE—TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN AUSTRALIA 319

men are the Wati Kutjara, who married the [pi sisters. A

genealogical tree makes this clear ;—

NJIRU = Okaralja (Kungkarungkara)

JULA = Mingari

Tpi = MILPALT JUNGKU = Ipi

In Jangkundjara belief the activities of all these ancestral beings

were closely linked together, they all lived their lives at about the

same time and some of them were descendants of the others, all being

associated with each other, as Jangkundjara folk are in their kinship

system. In some ways this complicates the telling of details of the

several myths. As a first step I have therefore chosen to give a brief

outline of some of the activities of each of the principal ones and then

where text material is available to give more intimate details, The

Beings about whom details are available include :—

Jula, son of Njirn.

Mingari, the woman whom he chased (in animal form, the Moloch

lizard).

Wati Kutjara, the two men, Milpali and Jungku (in animal form,

two kinds of Varanus lizard or ngintaka) the sons of Jula

and Mingari. In Western Anstralia these men are not called

brothers (Tindale 1936, p. 171) and are known as Mumba

and Kurnkadi.

Wati Malu, the Kangaroo man.

Kantju, a Dog Being who attacked Jula,

Wati Tawalpa (in animal form the tawal or hare wallaby

Onychogale lunata).

Kalaia, the Kmnu man.

Korukadi, with whom Jula had an encounter at Korukading.

THE PLEIADES MYTH OF THE JANGKUNDJARA

An outline of the Jangkundjara version of the virgin women myth

commences at the opposite end of their territory from Konkatjutanja,

the place named in the Pindiini version, and begins with the

appearance of the Kungkarungkara women from the north at Uluuru

(Ayers Rock). Here in ancient times many different Beings met, An

elaborate drawing of the place Uluuru is available and will be depicted

in a later contribution when details of texts are being placed on

record. The women attempted to kill Koneia, the great snake of

320 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ulonrn. There was a fight and the women fled, Jowrneying sonth

from the vicinity of Ayers Rock the women, the Minma Kungkarung-

kalpa, sat down for a while at Junamba (Ju: namba) whieh is the

native water at the Yununba Hill of maps. They then travelled

westward to Owalinja (O’walinja, ‘Walinja).

About the time the women arrived at Owalinja a Being named

Tawalpa who lived at Owalinja, provided stones with which Njiru,

then a youth, was circumcised. He became aman. At Owalinja the

Kungkarungkara women were camped with their dogs, when Njiru

appeared te them as a man. He wished to cohabit with the

Kungkarungkara. He attempted an assault but was frustrated by

Papa, the dogs. Before the dogs drove him away be had had coitus

with one of the women, as is depicted in the cave at Owalinja.

The Kungkarungkara women left Owalinja and crossed over the

Musgrave Ranges to Aliwanjawanja (the Hrliwanyawanya of maps)

on the south side,

At Aliwanjawanja there is an outerop of stone of a type (diorite)

called algara, used in stone axe-making. The rocks around this place

are likened to the shape ol! a woman's sex organs and the site is

therefore connected with a ceremony of the Kungkarungkara, for in

native belief the women caused the stone to appear there.

At Aliwanjawanja Nijiru again attacked the women and the

presence of the deep rockhole at this place is ascribed to hia having

penetrated the body of one of the women, The dogs again droye him

away. In the cave beside the rockhole at Aliwanjawanja, Njiru is

said to have left bis ’walka (painting) showing himsel! in the act

of mating. From this place the Kungkarungkara women passed in

a westerly direction along the southern side of the Musgrave Ranges.

They visited Ulparakindja, which is west of Kuli on the south side.

They then went to Topalnga and Palingga, In the west Jula, son of

Njiru, was born. Turning sonth across the sandhills and travelling

a great distance, to the remotest place in Jangkundjara territory, the

women arrived at Akandjudula. There they changed state or went

into the ground (tarupango). They went up into the heavens (ilkari,

alkari) and now appear in the early morning sky during the ‘‘cold

time’? (njenga) and ‘‘walk'’ across the sky. Their appearance in the

sky is shown in a sand drawing made by a Pitjandjara man when

discussing the Owalinja Cave (fig. 4, d).

Jangkundjara men who have travelled out of their own country

have learned that the Kungkarnngkara went south into the Pangkala

TINDALE—TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN AUSTRALIA 321

territory near Port Augusta with Njira still in pursuit. They have

tle idea that the Beings made a circuitons eastward journey returning

again to the north, During this journey Njiru and the Kelilbi (Star

women) are supposed to have visited a big jabu (hill) beside the sea,

south and east of Port Augusta (perhaps one or other of the peaks

of the Flinders Ranges, Mount Remarkable, Mount Brown, ete., which

possesses a deep gorge). The Beings then went north and the women

are believed to have fled to Erumangara, « big plain ‘‘near Alice

Springs’’.

TWO JANGKRUNDJARA VERSIONS OF THE STORY OF

JULA AND THE WOMAN MINGARI

Kongka Mingari (woman mountuin-devil lizard) came from the

west and arrived at Mingari (in the country of the informant's wife,

a Pitjandjara woman). rom the place Mingari, the Being went to

Pilki, which is west of Walukutjara, and therefore somewhere to the

west of 129° Ki. long. x 28° 8. lat, She then travelled eastwards for

a great distance to Tjalapina (Tjslpanbinja, Talbanbinja), the

approximate position of which is near 131° H, long. x 28° 20’ S. lat.

She bronght with her many papa inura, wild dogs. Today Tjalapina

is both a papa and a mingari tjukur place. From here Mingari

travelled south-eastwards to Kalaingga, situated on a line of waters

running from Puntana to Tlili near the Everard Ranges, fetching her

many dogs with her. Before the Kongka Mingari came, there were

no dogs, only men tjukur in the country. One of the papa inura,

named Bulgo, beeame lost at Kalaingga and the woman called to him,

loudly *Po:! ’Pat! Bulgo ‘poz! but no dog eame. Mingari lay

down, Bnigo returned during the middle hours of the night, lay

down and went to sleep (angen). LBye-and-bye Mingari rose to

urinate (kombo) and to look about. She noticed that Bulgo had

returned, The dog woke and pricked up its ears to listen, for it

heard a noise in the ground,

It was the sound of the kata (son) of Njiru, named Jola, who

was sneaking up to capture the woman. Bulgo leaped up and seized

Jnla by his penis (kalu). Then the whole pack of dogs surrounded

Jula, who fled back towards Anmango, During his outward journey

to steal the woman, Jula had travelled underground all the way from

Anmango to Indinkarta (also ealled Indinkartn), a day’s walk west

of Kalaingga. On the way, at Tjalapina, he had urinated and a

roaring sound, like tji:::! still can be heard there within the rockhole

322 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

as evidence of his passing. He had used his penis to dig a track.

At Indinkarta he had emerged from the ground and travelling on the

surface came to Kalaingga, where, while mating with Mingari, he

was beset by her dogs, who chased him away to the north-west. Some

of the dogs hung close to him all the way to Anmango whence he

had come, others became tired, and some died at Okarta (not yet

located). Bulgo was among those which disappeared and although

Mingari called him he never returned.

Njiru, at Anmango, saw the plight of his son and picking up a

kali (boomerang) in one hand and a branch in the other stood up to

beat off the dogs, thrusting all black dogs on one side, brindle dogs

on another and yellow ones in a third place. All the dogs were killed

and were piled up in different heaps according to their markings.

Kongka Mingari followed after her dogs but gave up the chase

at Julbudjaru and returned to the east. Having been assaulted by

Jula she gave birth to the Wati Kutjara. It will be noted that the

relationship between coitus and childbirth is recognized,

Mingari gave names to all her dogs, and Jangkundjara dogs

today receive similar names according to their markings.

Names of the dogs of Mingarv:

Bulgo—fawn dog.

Julpunj—yellow dog.

Njukali—black dog.

Tjerei—white dog.

Negotjarun—another white dog.

Toldjaru—brindle dog.

Tjundalka—white nose and mouth,

Kongi—white and black slut.

Tjapina—black slut.

Karderi—white mark on legs.

Tjitangkanja—white mark on neck, otherwise brown,

Both Njiru and Jula remained thereafter at Anmango, the home

of Njiru, in Pitjandjara country.

From the context it might appear that some of the details of

this version were derived from the informant’s Pitjandjara wife and

Milina, the narrator, a middle-aged man, after telling his story said:—

‘‘The old men may know more than this about the story of Mingari

eortr rr Ke

wee eee sewer] * 68 want

‘

’

‘

Mee eee

“=

Fig. 7. a, b, left and right. Drawings of the Wati Kutjara (ngintaka) tjukurupa

of the place Owalinja, in the form of concentric circles, called kuri kuri, as drawn

by Moinkorei, a Jangkundjara old man, in August, 1953. These figures are

depicted in Owalinja cave and are reproduced on the bodies of performers during

the ngintuka tjukurupa ceremony. ¢. Drawing of the Wati Kutjara (ngintaka)

of the place Ngankuru on the South side of the Mann Range, as drawn by a

young man, Lankatjukurupa, of the Pitjandjara tribe, 18th August, 1933, Milpali

and Junka (Jungku) are represented as together supporting the kuri kuri figure.

d. Man carrying a wanigi in a ceremony as drawn in August 1933 by Djimindinja,

a Pitjandjara old man of Peltadi in the Mann Range.

324 RECORDS OF THE 5,A. MUSEUM

but sometimes they do not talk. Some tjilpi (old men) say there is

more to be told’’.

In a second Jangkundjara version from the Everard Ranges,

told by an older man, the Being who attacked Jnula was a dog in

human form, the Wati Kantjeiri (antju) who was associated with

the place Kandjanja, north-east of Karumilnga. The name is

identified with the Kandoenna Creek of maps, running north-eastward

from Mount Carmeena (Karumilnga), This creek flows into the

Alberga River,

In attacking Jula, the Being Kantjeiri carried a rectangular

shield made from wood of the ngalta or kurrajong tree, A ceremonial

drawing of the shield shows on it the same minu marks which were

depicted on the body of the minn imitiate at Ooldea, on his return to

his people (fig. 6, ¢). WKandjanja, where ceremonies are performed

for the Papa Kantjeiri tjukur being, is an important native water,

at which lives a large snake, Kanha, Beeanse the snake lives there

the water is a permanent one,

Fig. 6 shows a native drawing of Wati Kantjeiri in human form,

his inma kudidji bunu ngalta (ceremonial shield wooden kurrajonz),

the Kanba (snake) of Kandjanja, two ngalta kanku (kurrajong

trees), and an ordinary shield,

OWALINJA CAVE AND THE KUNGKARUNGKARA WOMEN

Owalinja (“Walinja, O’walinja) Cave is situated on the south side

of a granitic outcrop on the plain north of the Musgrave Ranges.

There is a second native place of this name near Ernabella, Data on

it and indications of the association of the Kungkarungkara women

with the cave waa first obtained in May 1933, when the name appeared

on several drawings made hy aborigines, for example, fiz. 7, a, b.

This was during a journey to the Mann Range. Dr. C, J. Hackett

and I passed too far south of the place to make a visit. The late

Rey. J, R. B. Love later informed me that he knew the Owalinja

Cave, and that it had many paintings in it. Tts existence has been

a matter of record since the days of the Carruthers Survey.

During May 1957 T was able to visit this cave in eompany with

Mr. W. B. MaeDougall, Native Patrol Officer, who earlier had

informed me also of its interest and made arrangements for my visit.

A few days after visiting the cave, Tommy Dodd (Tjnndaka), the

F\ half-caste who had escorted Mr. C, P, Mountford on a trip to the

TINDALE—TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN AUSTRALIA 325

Mann Range several years previously, told me that they had passed

neat the eave but he had not thought to draw attention to it, From

the published acconnt hy Mountford (1948, p. 124), it appears they

were in some haste on this part of their journey. There are brief

references to the myth in his book (p, 155).

The area in which Owalinja stands was until 1914 the territory

of a northern group of the Jangkundjara, but following the serious

drought of that and the following year, Pitjandjara men, forced east-

ward out of their usual living areas in the Mann and Tomkinson

Ranges by the drying up of waters, successfully moved into the

Owalinja country and deprived these people of their territory. They

killed some and forced others to move south to the Everard Ranges.

This shift foreed some hordes of the Jangkundjara to attempt a

migration still further south. They in their turn seem to have

displaced some Kokata people, who from fear of the ‘*Northerners,”’

moved south-eastward, away from Ooldea towards Kingoonya; others

went to the coast at Fowler Bay. In making this migration the

Jangkundjara moved alone the boundary zone between the Ngalea

and Kokata peoples following the track of an ancient traditional

trade route, Up to the year 1984 they still maintained links with

their former mulga and sandhill (erritory in the north, bot having

continned to retreat towards Ooldea rather than towards the Everard

Ranges whenever waters of the desert failed them, they finally

settled down and now have become detribalised around the Mission

on the const near Yalata and at Koonibba. Those who survived the

effects of contact with European diseases, ete, are now widely

seattered. A lew returned to the Mverard Ranges, others are still

living on the coast near Yalata and a few, when last encountered,

were in camp near Port Augusta.

Of set purpose the exact position of Owalinja is not mentioned

in this report pending offictal decisinn as to action to protect it from

wnauthorized visitors and vandalism, In the interest of science it

is hoped that a carefully controlled archacological excavation may be

permitted since its rightful owners, the Jangkundjara no longer

use it.

This rockshelter is possibly one of the most spectacular ones in

Australia, and the layer upon layer of paintings on its walls will

reqnive ovach patient work and analysis by artists to ascertain the

suecession of gtyles, ete., depicted on its walls, The present

preliminary account gives only a history of the known succession of

326 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

tribal visitors from Jangkundjara through Pitjandjara to Ngadadjara

and will indicate the associations the cave has with some Jangkund-

jata beliefs about the Kungkarungkara, Njirn, the Wati Kutjara and

kindred ancestral Beings.

To the usurping Pitjandjara who came from the west in

1915-1916 the eave was so far unimportant that even women ani

children were able to visit the rock and were permitted to camp at

Owalinja, without much restriction, The usnal camping places for

women were on the northern and western sides of the hill, Here they

sheltered from rain in the summer time. The southern, formerly very

sacred cave, is visited only by Pitjandjara men. They say that as

there are paintings of wanigi (ceremonial string figures) and other

secret objects which must not be seen by the wninitiated, women

cannot go there. Paintings of wanigi on the walls of the western

shelter are ignored,

In legendary time Njiru, the Kongkarungkara, the Wati Tawalpa

the lizard woman Milpali, the Wati Kutjara and the Wati Malu all

visited Owalinja, leaving records of their passage in the eave,

Fig. 8, a is a drawing of a wanigi of the Wati Kutjara by a Jang-

kundjara man in 1934 which is paralleled hy wanigi of the same toter

im Owalinja Cave, while fig, 8, b depicts a figure of the same totem

drawn by a Pitjandjara man of the Mann Range in 1933. The Jast-

named has below it the marks painted on the backs of the performers

during Increase ceremonies for lizards at which the string figure is

displayed. Njiru made his attack on the Kongkarungkara in the cave

and Tawal (the hare wallaby, Onychogale lunata) after residing there

leff, on a visit to Aliwanjawanja in company with the Milpali

tjukurupa, before he went on a journey south to seatter knife-stones

over country near Armaroodina, as will be related in another part of

these records.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF OWALINJA MAIN CAVE

The main cave is entered from the south, It is under a great

dome of granite which has been weathered out to form a chamber

45 yards long, 10 yards wide and 3 yards high at its highest point.

Part of the floor at the western end, where it is lowest, is cluttered

wilh smaller granite boulders and a ramp of sloping rock runs

upwards at the east, ending in a narrow crevice. The front of the

reckshelter is hidden hy large native fig trees so that the cave is not

very conspienous from the south, and its size is only appreciated when

at the western entrance. The whole of the walls and roof are painted

fears

“Te igh,

dts

eee

‘>

omy

EWN

See est

Fig. 8. a. Jangkunjdjara wanigi (thread cross) of the Wati Kutpara and Milpali

drawn by Manana, about 55 years of age, at Ooldea, 13th November, 1934.

The memory of this man went back to before the Carruthers Survey; he was a

middle-aged man before the Pitjandjara drove him and his companions away

from the Owalinja area, The drawing is in red (dotted) and black. b. Pitjand-

jara wanigi of the Wati Kutjara ngintaka tjukurupa (men two lizard totem)

drawn by Tjinguinja a newly iniated youth, on Gth June, 1933. The marks below,

also in white are called inma tjana walka and are painted on the backs of

performers during the Increase Ceremony for ngintaka; wanigi depicted in

Owalinja and ascribed to the Wati Kutjara, closely resemble these drawings.

328 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and overpainted again and again, designs continuing even on the

lip-like overhang of the roof at the entrance, where they are in partial

darkness except at the brightest time of day,

First impression is that most of the older paintings, and these

include the earliest ones designated as being of the Minma

Kungkarnngkara, are in ved ochre, but on closer examination there

is seen to be great variety.

There are several very late ones in yellow ochre. A Pitjandjara

old man, who accompanied ns, ascribed these to recent visits by

Ngadadjara men rom the Warburton Range. These men had vome

over on a visit to the Wrnabella Mission, since its foundation just

before World War Il. The newly painted yellow figures include,

according to him, representations of a snake (leiro), one of a watiinma

njurtidjara (man ceremonial object carrying), and a third group

ineluded some he conld not identity,

It is of interest to note that a sonree of the yellow pigment

(garnierite) is the nickel ore outerop near Wro:tjo, north of Mount

Hinekley, This is an important native place on the boundary between

Ngadadjara and Pitjandjara tribal territories. The pigment itself

is gathered from the rims of the nests of ants which mine the little

pellets of if in the course of their burrowings.

Marks which my informant, and other Pitjandjara men had placed

as an overlay on the older Jangkundjara figures since 1915 were

recognized and pointed out, Some of those indicated as of recent

Pitjandjara origin were of men riding camels. These and some of

the other Pitjandjara dvawings were in black and white, and all had

been painted after 1915,

Tt is of some interest to note that drawings, in chalks of kinds

issued by the Mrnabella Mission, had been added in the western eave

since a visit by MacDougall in the previous year, and our native

giude was able to confirm that Pitjandjara people from the Ernabella

Mission had camped at Owalinja dnving the summer of 1956-1957,

hence the rockshelters preserve native records from ancient times

right up to the present day.

THE CEREMONTAT, PAINTINGS AT OWALINJA

The figure of the ancestral Being Nijiru in coitus with the

Kimgkarnngkara (Pl, xxxv, A) is a curious drawing; the posture is

that of similar drawings 1 have seen elsewhere and ean be beat

understood alter an appreciation of the method of mating adopted by

TINDALE—TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN AUSTRALIA 329

Central Australians. Roth (1897, p. 179, fig. 433) gives a useful

deseription and figure,

The oldest Minma Kangkarungkara paintings are depicted usually

without mouths, in red, with their hair long and as pointed out to me

by old man Peter, rolled wp in a coil, folded in on the forehead, as

was the fashion for Pitjandjara and Jangkundjara women, and was

still the practice among the Ngadadjara in 1935 (Pl, xxxix, A).

Photographs taken in 1903 by Basedow (1914) in the Musgrave

Ranges, show this style, which in 1933 was still in vogue among

both Jangkundjara and Pitjandjara people.

The later paintings of Njiru and the Women are in black, and

are less elaborately done.

The Jangkundjara used to hold Inerease ceremonies for Papa

dingo) in this eave. They depicted their dogs showing two eyes, in

a 7 2 > ?

black outlined with white.

A flat stone on the western end of the Owalinja Cave was used

in the Papa ceremony as a rubbing place for papa kuloinba or dog

excreta, with the while powder of which some of the paintings were

done, as part of the ceremony. During the rites a song was sung

deseribing the effects of the attack on Njiru by the dogs belonging to

the Kungkarungkara,

Song :—

I: Njirunja kala nalkur

Exelamation Njiru penis bitten

nari keildjoro keildjoro itjarta

lay (bleeding) spear

Njirunja kalo nalkur nari

Njiru penis bitten lay

The ceremony was performed in the cave because there was a

close association hetween the Kungkarungkara Women and their dogs.

Fivures painted represent the papa (dogs) themselves, the imma.

pndurn bulka (ceremonial-object string large), wanigi (string figure)

and men carrying wanigi on their heads during the Papa ceremonies.

The Papa ceremony is shown by Pitjandjara to young men before

circumcision. They are given only brief glimpses of highlights of

the dances at this time. The proceedings at such a ceremony were

witnessed by the author in 1933, at Konapandi on the southern side

of the Musgrave Ranges. A film record of the ceremony, taken by

330 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

him, has been published as part of Film No. 20 in the 16 mm. series

of the Board for Anthropological Research at the University of

Adelaide.

Plates xxxii-xxxvili show some of the paintings in the two caves

examined; an approximately complete coverage would require more

than five times this number of figures. In the explanations to the

plates notes are given on those recognized by Peter, our Pitjandjara

informant. It is hoped to be able to take Jangkundjara men to the

shelter. Some text and song detail already has been gathered and

will appear in Part IT of this series.

During my 1933 visit to Aliwanjawanja I happened to be

examining the rockshelter there and sketching in my notebook when

a Pitjandjara man followed my tracks into the cave. After watching

me for a while he departed but later returned and began, of his own

accord, making drawings in the shelter with charcoal as pigment.

We each worked silently for some time, but when he had finished

and had turned to go, I learned he had painted leiru or snake

markings, in part over inma njurtidjara wati (men carrying

ceremonial objects) in white paint. I photographed him (Pl. xxxix,

B) at work.

REFERENCES CITED

Basedow, H., 1914: Proc, Roy. Geog. Soc. of Aust., 8. Aust. Branch,

Adelaide. 15: 57-242.

Berndt, R. M., 1941: Oceania, Sydney. 12: 1-20,

Berndt, R. M., and Berndt, C., 1945: Preliminary Report of field

work in the Ooldea Region. Sydney,

Carruthers, John, 1892; South Australian Parliamentary Paper,

Adelaide. 179,

Giles, E., 1875: Geographic travels in Central Australia from 1872 to

1874. Melbourne.

Mountford, C, P., 1987: Rec. 8. Aust, Mus., Adelaide. 6; 5-28.

1948: Brown Men and Red Sand. Melbourne.

Roth, W. E., 1897: Ethnological studies among the north-west Central

Queensland aborigines. Brisbane.

TINDALE—TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN AUSTRALIA 331

Tindale, N, B., 1933: Oceania, Sydney. 4: 101-105,

1985: Oceania, Sydney. 6: 199-224.

1936: (1) Oceania, Sydney, 6: 481-485,

——— 1936: (2) Oceania, Sydney, 7: 169-185.

1940: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide. 64: 140-231.

EXPLANATIONS OF PLATES

PLATE XXXIT

Fig. A, South side of Owalinja granite dome looking east, showing native fig trees con-

evaling entrance to tho main shelter,

Fig. B. Shelter used by women and children on the western face of Ovwalinja; the

protected area beneath the large central boulder is about 15ft. long and 10ft wide,

with oceupational debris present in « aand-floored alwove at fhe gouthern end.

PLATE XXXIIT

Vig. A. Fifteen fect of the back wall and roof at the westorn end of the main shelter at

Owaliaja, with Pitjandjara informant, Peter, Above his head a pieture of man aud

horse, painted since 1915. The roof shows faintly visible substrata of large-sized

human figures chiefly in red ochre overlain by black figures outlined in white.

Fig. B. Tip of rock shelter near western end showing lines of small white figures and black

oes, some outlined with white. On the right is the figure of Njiru with a

Kungkarungkara woman (see Pl, xxxv, fig. A), and at upper left the figure of

man with supposed horse (see also Pl. xxxv, fig. B),

PLATE XXXIV

Fig. A. ‘The upper figure of Pl, xxxiv shows a heroié sized figure of Njiru in red outlined

in white, the nose is represented by « white fine and thore are traces of eyes; to the

right are traces of red figures of the Kungkarungkara overlaid with black ones ot

Niiru outlined with white; the nose and eyes are shown. At the left the overlay

consists of black figures of the Kungkarungkara, with apots representing stars on

their bodies and the pudenda drawn as wide black openings; benvath them is the

e of one of their defending dogs, in black with the outline and paired eyes in

white At the lower right of middle is a cruder figure of a wanigi-bearing man in

black outlined in bright yellow. This is one of those ascribed to recent Ngadadjaru

visitors, The background is a maze of red lines representing earlier paintings,

Fig. B. This shows a, portion of the wall approximately 12ft. wide « little more to the right

and extending lower down on tho back (han the one above. There is some overlap.

A contral figure und one to the left are each of Njiru, in different styles but both

painted in black, outlined with white; that on the loft shows chat cieatrices. The

white foot track painted over it, to the knowledge of our Pitjandjara informant, was

done after 1915, At lower middla is the figure of a black dog, the Papa Kantju,

outlined in white; above its tail is another inma njurti wati, painted entirely in yellow

ochre; this overlay is ascribed to the recent Ngadadjara visitors, The emu (kalaia)

figure at the left of middle is Kalaia tjukurupa, a Being who appears as a group of

stars and aa dark patehes in the Milky Way; the spots on the body represent stars,

Just to the left of the middle is a squatting figure of one of the Kungkaraagkarsa

in black, outlined with white; two similar figures with white spots on their bodies also

represent Kungkarungkara women.

332 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

PLATE XXXV

Fig. A. Enlarged view of the figure of Njiru cohabiting with one of the Kungkarungkara;

the design is in black outlined with white; the white semicirewar design is a later

addition. The design was painted over an earlier figure, apparently of the same su bjact,

in red ochre

Fig. B. Vigures in red of two Kungkarungkurn women. The smaller human figure and

animal in black outlined with white was said to be a man with a horse, Below it is

a supposed cattle brand added by a civilized aboriginal.

PLATE XXXVI

Fig. A. Njiru (right) and a Kungkarungkara woman (left), These are painted over two

kuri-kuri circles representing the Wati Kutjara, whose wanigi, thread ¢ross or string

figure is partly shown at the right.

Fig. B. Portion of roof at eastern end of main ghelter, about 15ft. wide, showing two

large wanigi of the Wati Kut,jara and kuri kuri or concentric circle Marks representing

the Wati Kutjara. The kuri kuri may be compared with text figure 7 (right), and the

wanigi with those in text figure 8,

PLATE XXXVIT

Fig. A. Paintings in the Western or Women’s cave. At left is & figure of u woman

carrying wooden dishes on her head, below is a man riding a camel. The older

paintings consist of white spots un a black surface, concentrie eireles, lines of emu

tracks in white with an underlay of obscured figures in red ochre, and innumerable

white spots,

Fig, B. Contral portion of the Women's enve showing some recent, designe in crayons

obtained from the Mission over smoke obscured white paintings, The central figure,

suid to represent a motor truck, is believed to have been done by Pitjandjara living

at Owalinja in the summer of 1956, The concentric circles are in white and at the

extreme right and extending beyond the picture are traces of wanigi designs in red

overlain by white designs; they are shown in PL, xxxviii,

PLATE XXXVTIL

‘Two figures bearing wanigi (thread erosves) as depicted at the southern end of the Women’s

Cave (of the Pitjandjara). The main figure on the right of the middle is painted

in red with a. black ace, and varries an inma njurti in red, outlined with white;

the central part of the wnnigi is black with red and white bars. The large wanigi

in the middle is ved outlined in white. There are two cross sticks in red and i

central pala; the white outline appears to bu un addition, Tt is supported on the head

of a man figure painted in white with the face and body indicated in black. The

lines of man, dog and kangaroo tracks were made after the wanigi design. AU the

designs in this shelter are darkened by smoke from camp fires.

PLATE XXXIX

Pig, A. Pitjandjara man making leirn or snake markings, in Aliwanjawanja. (Erliwanya-

wanya of maps) Cave on 20th Jume, 1932; his efforts were superimposed on white

figures of inma njurtidjara wati (ceremonial-ohject-carrying-men).

Pig. B. Unmarried woman of the Ngadadjara tribe, Warupuju, Warburton Range, Western

Australia, showing her hair folded in on the brow, as in Kungkarungkara women

depicted in Owalinja Shelter (photograph by the late Mr. BE, O. Stocker, taken during

the University of Adelaide Expedition of August 1935).

Ree. SoA. Mesncw Vou. XT, Phare NNNII

Raw SOAS Alnseim Vou, NUE Pravin NAXNITEL

Rie. SAL Mesteua Vou. XI, Prats XXXIV

Rae SoA. Messer at Vou, XIU, Phare NNAY

Rie, SOAS Mesnew Vou, NIL, Phare SNAVI

Ree, SoA] Mesueom Von NTH, Phares NNNWII

Ree. SOAL Mosnecs Vor NT, Prare SNXNVIL

Rec. S.A. Museum Vou. XI, Phares NNNTX

THE PIGMY SPERM WHALE ON SOUTH AUSTRALIAN COASTS

(CONTINUED)

BY HERBERT M. HALE, DIRECTOR, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Some data concerning two young Pigmy Sperm Whales, Kogia breviceps (Blainville), are recorded.

These examples were stranded on the shore of St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia. In one of them

cartilaginous vestiges of the pelvis were present.

Passing references are made to post mortem changes of colouration in Mesoplodon layardii (Gray)

and to the identification of Pseudorca crassidens (Owen) off the coast of South Australia.

THE PIGMY SPERM WHALE ON SOUTH AUSTRALIAN COASTS

(Continued)?

By HERBERT M. HALE, Director, SourH Avstranin Musrum

Plate xl and text fig. 1-2

SYNOPSIS

Some data concerning two young Pigmy Sperm Whales, Kogia

breviceps (Blainville), are recorded. These examples were stranded

on the shore of St, Vincent Gulf, South Australia. In one of them

cartilaginous vestiges of the pelvis were present.

Passing references are made to post mortem changes of coloura-

tion in Mesoplodon layardii (Gray) and to the identification of

Pseudorca erassidens (Owen) off the coast of South Australia,

INTRODUCTION

On July 11, 1958, two small whales were noticed floundering in

shallow water at Largs Bay, a residential and holiday resort on the

eastern shore o! St. Vineent Gulf in South Australia; here, at low

tide, a considerable expanse of ‘‘flat’’ is exposed owing to the gently

sloping sandy coast. Both examples were described by observers as

being about 7ft, in length; they were stranded on the beach next day,

unfortunately a Saturday, when crowds of visitors were present.

With one of the Museum preparators (Mr. A. Rau), and his assistant,

I went to the abovementioned beach soon after the specimens were

reported, hoping that we might recover them. Regrettably, however,

one example had been literally hacked to pieces and the skull smashed,

but the remains on the beach showed it to be, without doubt, Magia.

Moreover, Mr. I’. Johnson, a resident of Largs North, had secured

two 35 mm. Ferrania eolour photographs of this example, taken as

it was thrashing about in very shallow water.

The second specimen had been removed by Mr, Howard Trotter

and was exhibited during the week-end outside his refreshment rooms

at nearby Outer Harbour, <A description and measurements of this

example were made and shortly afterwards the animal was brought

to the South Australian Museum.

(1) Bee also Ree, 8. Aust. Mus, viii, 1947, 531-546,

334 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Specimen No. 1. Sex Unxnown

The photographs reproduced on pl. xl are enlargements from the

two eolour photographs secured by Mr, Johnson. The portions

which are dark in the half-tone prints were blue on the back (as in

Boschma’s illustration of 1951, fig. 1) merging into blackish brown

on the upper part of the head and body, The light areas, however,

are much more extensive than in examples previously recorded, the

greater part of the snout, the belly, and the lateral parts of the body

below the level of the eye, being white. The mottlings which appear

on the caudal portion (pl. xl, upper) are apparently splashes of

blood diluted with sea water. The colour pictures show the water

nearby to be blood stained, and the animal to he bleeding from wounds

on the front of the snout and dorsal fin, the edges of the flukes and

the underside of the caudal parts,

The snout is blunt, somewhat as in the adult female previously

described from South Australia (Hale, 1947, pl. xiv, upper fig.)

and in Boschma’s abovementioned figure; it is obviously longer than

in the other juvenile (No. 2) deseribed below. The dorsal fin is

large and faleate, and the open blowhole is obvious in the lower

photograph on pl. xl herewith.

The photographs alone must suffice as a record for this example,

which, as already noted, was said to be 7ft. in length.

Srrcimen No. 2. Youna Mare

Colowr.—When examined by us the animal had been dead for

about 48 hours. The colouration then was almost black above, lighter

below.

External Characters —The measurements of the young male

Kogia were as follows:—

mm. per cent.

Total length to notch of tail flukes .. .. ., 1930 100

Tip of snout to vertieal level of anterior

corner of eye .. , 180 9.3

Tip of mandible to vertical ‘evel ‘of anterior

corner of eye .. , . 140 7.3

Tip of snout to vertical level of anterior edge

of dorsal fin .. .. , ool ant ae wt Meu 48.2

Tip of mandible to axilla ate pie! cad 386 20.0

Tip of mandible to anterior point of ‘genital

BUS pg Spier et en Ge ee ae vere OD 65.8

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE 335

mm per cent.

Width of flukes .. .. 1. 0. ee ee ee ee ee 408 24.6

Length of base of dorsal fin . .. .. -- .- 220 11.4

Height of dorsal fin .. .. .. -. .. -. +.» 160 8.0

Greatest length of pectoral fin .. .. -- -. 300 15.5

Greatest width of pectoral fin . .. .. .. .. 105 5.4

Length of eye 2. 4. 2 66 ce ee be ee te 24 1.2

Depth ‘of eye . 2 ci Gd sa ee Ge pe ae ae 13.5 0.7

Fig. 1. Young male of Kogia breviceps, Largs Bay, South Australia,

Sketeh to scale made 48 hours after death. (Specimen No. 2, % natural

size.)

In general the body proportions approach those of the smaller

calf deseribed by the writer in 1947. It will be noted, however, that

the faleate dorsal fin is much larger and commences slightly anterior

to the middle of the total length of the animal, while the pectoral

fins (fig. 2) are relatively shorter and narrower; the upper edge in

both flippers had been damaged, and had healed, during life. [Sexed

examples of Kogia recovered during the past decade show that the

size of the dorsal fin is no indication of sex (Allen, 1941, p. 29).]

The snout is considerably shorter and has a more abrupt downward

dorsal curvature, its tip being on a level with the eye. In the foetuses

recorded by Allen (1941, fig. 1) and by me (1947, fig. 5) the tip of

the snout is below eye level.

The tips of two tiny teeth were visible at the anterior end of the

upper jaw, projecting very slightly above the gum. In the lower jaw

there were 13 teeth in the right ramus, 12 in the left. The single

blowhole was ecrescentric, curved obliquely backward from the mid-

line; it was apparently similar in calf No. 1 (see pl. xl, lower

photograph) and not as in Boschma’s illustration of an adult female

(1951, fig. 1).

336 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The notch in the tail was well marked, approximately 25 mm.

in depth.

The differences in the shape of the head, as shown in the photo-

graphs of the living example, reproduced on pl. xl and in the sketch

of the dead young male (fig. 1) are quite marked.

Fig. 2. Left (upper) and right flippers of Kogia breviceps, Largs Bay,

South Australia. (Specimen No, 2, 4 natural size.)

Skeleton.—The flesh has been largely removed from the skeleton,

which is in process of maceration, pending further examination. In

the partly fleshed skeleton, with the vertebrae all in place, a count

showed a total of 57: cervical, 7; thoracic, 14; lumbar, 10; caudal, 26,

the last being very small, only about 4 mm. in length.

Vestiges of the pelvis are present. They are hard, but are

cartilaginous, as suspected by Glover M. Allen (1941, pp. 32-33),

and are about 24 mm. in length, slightly curved and approximately

five times as long as deep.

Skeleton in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. M6186.

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE 337

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS AND REMARKS

My best thanks are due to Mr. F’, Johnson for the colour slides

of eall No. 1, and to Maseum Artist and Photographer, Miss M. Boyee,

who is responsible for the hall-tone enlargements therefrom, Also

to Mr, Howard Trotter, who readily parted with the young male when

he was informed that it was of scientifie interest; and to Mr. A, Ran,

who painstakingly and successfully searched for the pelvic cartilages.

It is a matter for regret that, in ny experience, whenever small

whales, or for that matter larger species, are stranded near populated

areas, they are at once matilated by visitors. In South Australia

small whales cast up on beaches are almost invariably reported as

“ Blackfish,’ with, maybe, the remark that as ‘Blackfish’? ave common

in our seas they cannot be of much interest. In all probability the

smaller whales occurring off our coasts are by no means as rare as

it would appear trom published records. It it certain that maty

strandings are not observed, as whales surely must be cast np from

time to time ou uninhabited portions of the vast coastline of Australia,

It is worth stressing the fact that post mortem changes occur

very rapidly in at least some of the small whales, In February, 1956,

a young male Strap-toothed Whale (Mesoplodon layardii) was seen

swimming off Rocky Point in the Ameriean River Hstnary at

Kangaroo Island, South Australia, for about a week, During that

period it was studied by Prof, Richard Blackburn and Dr. James

Forbes, competent observers, who deseribed the colouration as bronze-

brown on the dorsum, pale grey ventro-laterally grading to off-white

on the underside.

Me. F. J. Mitehell of the Mosenm staff, together with one of the

preparators, went to the site 48 hours after this specimen, injured

by gunshot, was stranded. Its colouration then was black ahove,

grading to purplish-pink on the sides and with isolated grey patches

on the underside of the head.

The animal, being in obvious distress, had been killed by Dr,

Forbes soon afler if came ashore and it was noted that the whale

lost ils life colouration immediately after death,

‘he complete skeleton and some measurements of the whole

animal were secured; ] am indebted to all the abovementioned for the

data and material obtained concerning this Mesoplodon,

Opportunity is taken to correct an error in identification of a

herd of whales stranded at Port Prime, on the eastern side of St,

Vineent Gulf in South Australia. An extremely hurried visit was

338 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

made here by the late Prof. Harvey Johnston and me during the days

of petrol rationing, the trip being made possible by one of the local

newspapers. (Hale, 1956, p. 181) and the species was recorded as

Globicephalus ventricosus. Later examination of all photographs

secured at the time by a news photographer, and of a skull recovered

by my friend Mr. H. A. Brooks, of nearby Buckland Park, shows that

this herd consisted of examples of the False Killer Whale (Pseudorca

crassidens).

REFERENCES CITED

Allen, Glover M., 1941: ‘‘Pygmy Sperm Whale in the Atlantic’’.

Zool. Series, Field Mus. Nat. Hist., Chicago, xxvii, 17-36,

fig. 1-4.

Boschma, H., 1951: ‘‘Some smaller whales’’, Endeavour, x (9),

181-135, fig. 1-4.

Hale, Herbert M., 1947: ‘‘The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Kogia breviceps

Blainville) on South Australian Coasts’’. Ree. 8. Aust.

Mus., viii, 531-546, pl. xiv-xviii and text fig. 1-17.

1956: ‘‘The First Hundred Years of the South Australian

Museum’’. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., xii, 180-181, fig.

Ree, S.A, Mesrnear Vou. XT, Proare SN

Young Tigny Sperm While aground in shallow water, CSpeeimon No, 1, Large Bay,

South Austeatia.)

REDESCRIPTION OF TWO OF CANESTRINDS 1884 SPECIES OF

AUSTRALIAN ACARINA

BY H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Fresh material referable to the two species of Acarina-Mesostigmata described and figured by

Canestrini 1884, as Laelaps dolicacanthus and Laelaps coniferus has now been studied and the

species are redescribed and refigured. Two new genera Cosmetolaelaps and Conolaelaps are erected

for the species respectively. The nymph of dolicacanthus and male and nymph of coniferus are

described and figured for the first time.

REDESCRIPTION OF TWO OF CANESTRINIS 1884 SPECIES OF

AUSTRALIAN ACARINA

By H. WOMERSLEY, Sour Avustravin Museum

Fig. 1-3

SYNOPSIS

Fresh material referable to the two species of Acarina-

Mesostigmata described and figured by Canestrini 1884, as Laelaps

dolicacanthus and Laclaps coniferus has now been studied and the

species are tedeseribed and refigured. Two new genera Cosmetolae-

laps and Conolaelaps are erected for the species respectively, The

nymph of dolicacanthus and male and nymph of coniferus are

described and figured for the first time.

INTRODUCTION

In 1884 Canestrini deseribed a number of species of Acarina from

material collected in Queensland by Prof. Pulle of Padova University.

Amongst these were Laelaps dolicacanthus u. sp, and Laelaps

coniferus n. sp. neither of which has since been collected or recognized

although Rainbow (1906) in listing Canestrini’s records states that

there are in the Australian Museum specimens which are probably

this species collected by S. J. H. Moreau at Antonio, near Rydal,

New South Wales. At my request for the loan of these specimens,

Mr. A. Musgrave, Entomologist, Australian Museum has very kindly

searched the collections, but failed to find the preparations. It must

therefore be considered that the specimens have been lost over the

years.

Recently, however, specimens which undoubtedly belong to

dolicacanthus were found on an old slide in the South Australian

Museum collection. The slide was labelled ‘‘Laelaps, sp. off Ontho-

phagus laminatus Macl., Townsville, Queensland—F. H. Taylor’’,

without any date of collection. Taylor, however, was working in that

area in the 1920’s. Canestrini stated that he had several specimens

from on a lamellicorn’’ beetle, briefly described both sexes, and

gave recognizable figures of the male venter and dorsum and of the

male chela.

340 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

Laelaps coniferus n, sp. was described from specimens fuand in

a vial of insects collected by Prof, Pulle in Australia. Canestrini

shows (fig. 4) a recognizable figure of the ventral surface althongh

if is now clear that if is not quite correct in certain details, Speci-

mens referable to coniferus have recently been collected from

millipedes in a rotting Hucalypt log at Hampton, 30 miles NE of

Toowoomba, Queensland, Oetuber 3rd, 1956 by Dr, G. F. Bornemissza.

Only the females were found by Canestrini, bot Bornemissza’s

material comprised both sexes and a solitary eedysing nymph.

As both the above species are unique amongst the Laelaptidae

in many features, new genera are erected for them; viz., Cosmetolae-

laps for dolicacanthus and Conolaelaps for conifers.

Genus Cosmetolaelaps nov.

Laelaptidae with 2-tined specialised seta on palpal tarsus. Dorsal

shield entire, covering almost the whole of the dorsum in both sexes,

furnished with ea. 81 pairs of generally long and strong ciliated seine

of which 8 pairs are laterad of the shield and all but the posterior

pair are anterior of the mid-dorsal line,

Female without pre-endopodal shields; sternal shield much wider

than long with 53 pairs of setae; metasternal shields absent,

represented only by seta and pore; genital shield short and drop-

shaped with one pair of setae; no ventral shield; anal shield broadly

pear-shaped with the paranal setae in line with the posterior of anns,

postanal seta the longest; endopodal shields of eoxae IIT and IV well

defined and free, Legs shorter than body, IL somewhat stouter than

others; tarsi with pad-like caruncle but without elaws, Gnathosoma

normal with 4 pairs of setae, the posterior two pairs ciliated. Teetam

roughly triangular.

Male with the sternal, genital, metasternal and ventral shields

coalesced, finely punetate with striate Tines, the combined shield

narrowest between coxae TV then expanding and narrowly separated

hy striate cuticle from the separate anal shield: sternal setae of

moderate length and stronger than in female, metasternal setae

strong and very long reaching to tip of ventral shield; renital setae

also strong and long: ventral shield with two pairs of short lateral

setae; anal shield with the postanal seta. much longer than the

paranals. Stigma between coxae IIT and LV with the peritremal

shield extending shortly posteriad and the peritreme running to coxae

TI. Gnathosoma as in female, Chelicerae similarly with each finger

WOMERSLEY—TWO AUSTRALIAN ACARINA REDESCRIBED 341

stout and furnished with one strong tooth, movable finger with a long,

hackwardly directed spermatophore carrier, the tip of which itself is

also chelate. Legs not longer than body, all tarsi with pad-like

caruneles and no elaws; leg IL very stout, tarsus apically with 3

strong spines.

Cosmetolaelaps dolicacanthus (Canest. 1884)

Laelaps dolicacanthus Canest, 1884. Acari dell'Australia. Atti

ist. Veneto, 2 Ser. Vi: 709, tav. VII, fig. 2, 3; Rainbow, 1906.

Synopsis of Australian Acarina. Ree. Aust. Mus. 6: 172,

Fig. 1 A-B, 2 A-F

A strong sclerotised brown species of oval form; with the above

generic characters, The following specimens are deseribed.

A single female of idiosomal length 7502 and width 520, and

legs I 4802 long, IT 4802, LIT 4600 and TV 6550p. Dorsal shield 690,

long by 430« wide, with a number of pores and 31 pairs of long to

very long strong ciliated setae, the longest being the two posterior

setae to 290”, Ventrally the sternal shield is strongly and finely

punctate with striate lmes, 244 wide by 108» long medially, anterior

margin lightly coneave, posterior margin lightly concave with 3

excavations of which the median is the deepest, with 3 pairs of strong

setae 47 long, and two pairs of pores; metasternal shields only

represented hy a seta 45 long and a small pore; genital shield as

figured, slightly wider than long, 117» hy 94», with one pair of setae

2u long; anal shield as figured, 117« long by 125 wide, paranal

setae 40p long, postanal seta 70« long, eribrum present; on ventral

cuticle with 9 pairs of small setae.

Two males, one of 800” idiosomal length and 6104 width, the

other $902 length, 670« width. Length of legs respectively, I 580,

(590), IL 700u (730), TIT 550u (580x), 1V 730» (812), The follow-

ing measurements are from the stnaller specimen; dorsal shield 754

lang ly 600. wide; posterior dorsal setae 450” long; the combined

sternal, metasternal, genital and ventral shield 440» long, sternal

portion 255 wide, ventral portion 244 wide, separated posteriorly

from anal shield by 35; anal shield 116 by 116/; sternal shield with

3 pairs of normally placed setae 944 long; metasternal setae very

long to 285. and strong; genital setae also very long to 155» and

strong; lateral setae on ventral portion 37 long; paranal setae 80,

long, postanal 145,, Legs as figured, femur, genu and tibia each

342 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 1. Cosmetolaelaps dolicacanthus (Canest. 1884), A-B, Female of 7504 length

mounted, A. Dorsum, B. Venter. C.-D, Nymph of 510 length mounted, C. dorsum, D.

venter. E. Chelicerse of female,

WOMERSLEY—TWO AUSTRALIAN ACARINA REDESCRIBED 343

with apophyses on II, and tarsi II with 3 strong apical spines; leg IV

with a small stout posterior spine on femur.

A single nymph of idiosomal length 510p, width 360», as figured.

Legs I 420u long, II 406», ITI 370», IV 4064. Dorsal setae as figured,

Fig. 2. Cosmetolaclaps dolicacanthus (Canest. 1884). Male of 800u

length mounted. A. Venter. B. Gnathosoma and palpi. C, Cheli-

cerae. D. Tip of spermatophore carrier much enlarged. WH, Tined

seta of palpal tarsus. F, Tectum,

344 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

14 pairs, posterior to 2354 long. Venter as shown with a shield-

shaped sternal shield with 3 pairs of fine setae. Peritreme short and

not extending beyond coxae ILL

Locality. The above specimens were found mounted in ‘balsam’?

on an old slide in the S.A, Museum collections. The slide was

labelled by the late F, H. Taylor as Laelaps sp. and the specimens

had been collected by him at Townsville, Queensland (no date, but

probably in the early 1920’s) from Outhophagus laminatus Macl.

Remarks. No record of this species apart from the doubtful one

by Rainbow (1906) has been made since Canestrini’s original descrip-

tion of specimens collected hy Prof. Pulle in Queensland from a

lamellicorn beetle, Canestrini described both sexes, but only figured

the male. The female and nymph are now described and figured.

Genus Conolaelaps nov.

Laelaptidae with 2-tined specialised seta on palpal tarsus. Of

ovoid shape with entire dorsal shield completely covering body in

both sexes. Dorsum with a number of pores and some exceedingly

minute setae,

Female without pre-endopodal shields, sternal shield longer than

wide with 8 pairs of setae, of which setae TL and TL are short and

cone-like, anterior edge deeply exeavate, posterior rounded; metas-

ternal shields absent, only represented by small cone-like setae

between the well developed free endopodal shields of coxae ITT and

IV; genital shield small, flask-shaped with eone-like setae and widely

separated from the oval anal shield; between the genital and anal

shield with 4 pairs of cone-like setae; other setae on ventral euticle

minute and simple. Legs fairly stout and shorter than body, with

normal setae except on coxae TV which has the seta cone-like, tarsi

with strong pad-like carnnele and now claws. Stigma between coxae

TIt and TV and peritreme extending to coxae If, Teetum a pointed

cone, Gnathosoma and chelicerae normal,

Male with the facies of the female but smaller. With a combined

sternal to anal shield with 7 pairs of small conical setae. Male

genital opening in the anterior of the sternal shield. Legs stout as

in female but tarsi 1 with a pair of strong claws and tarsi [LTV with

2-0 small cones ventrally, Chelicerae of male consisting of only the

movable finger which is long as figured. Teetum conical with rounded

apex.

WOMERSLEY—TWO AUSTRALIAN ACARINA REDESCRIBED 345

Conolaelaps coniferus (Canest. 1884)

Laelaps coniferns Canest. 1884. Acari dell’Australia, Atti ist

Veneto 2 Ser. VI: 711. tav. VII, fig. 4.

Fig. 3 A-L

Redescription of Female. Body egg-shaped, widest between

coxae TL and TIT. Dorsal shield covering entire body and furnished

with many pores and exceedingly minute setae difficult to distinguish

from pores. Length of idiosoma to 670%, width 410~ (Canestrini

gives 530” and 230p respectively), Legs shorter than body and rather

stout, length in a specimen of only 688 idiosomal length, I 390»,

Tl 8325p, IIL 3848p, 1V 440p, setation wenerally minute and simple except

the setu on coxae TV which is a small short cone; all farsi with large

catuncular pad and no claws. The sternal shield is shield-shaped

with «a deep anterior excavation within which are the minute simple

sternal setae 1, sternal setae If and TI1 are small aud coniform the

posterior margin is deeply rewnded and extends to inner angles of

coxae LIL; only the endopodal shields of coxae ITL and IV are present,

free and well defined; the metasternal setae only are present and are

coniform: the genital shield is small, flask-like, with one pair of small

eoniform setae; the sternal shield is 141p wide by 126” long medially

and the genital 564 long by 33 wide; the anal shield is as figured

70a long by 70 wide with mimute setae. The stigma is between coxa

TIT and IV but the peritreme is relatively short only reaching to

hetween coxac TT and Ill, The gnathosoma has probably the usual

4 pairs of setae but these are minute and difficult to ascertain,

Chelicerae as fignved with ove medium sized tooth on each finger.

Description of Male. Of similar facies to female. Length of

idiosuma 4308, width 300e. Lees T 8704 long, IT 290%, ITT 2904, TV

350». Dorsum as in female, Ventrally all the shields are coalesced

to form a single holoveniral shield, the anterior sternal margin of

which is excavate as in the female. Sternal setae T are minute and

simple and lie within the anterior excavation, the lioloventral shield

itsell with 7 pairs of small coniform setae and posterior of coxae

1V 4 or 5 pairs of minute setae besides the anals, Legs are stout

and similar, the tarsi armed as in the generic description. The

chelicerae are considerably modified, the fixed finger being absent, the

movable finger being elongate and untoothed as figured.

Description of Nymph. One specimen with idiosoma 508. long

and 300% wide and legs T 380” long, TT 810, TIT 2908, TV 3880p, shows

346

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 3. Conolaclaps coniferus (Canest. 1884). A-B., D.-F. Female of 6404

length mounted, A. venter, B, dorsum, D. tectum, BE. tined seta of palpal tarsus,

F, ehelicerae, C., GK. Male of 4304 length mounted, C. gnathosoma from below,

with right palpi from above, G. venter, H. chelicerae, I, tarsus 1 from below, J.

tarsus LV from below, K. tectum, L. Nymph of 508« length mounted showing

ecdysis between proto- and deutonymphal stages.

WOMERSLEY—TWO AUSTRALIAN ACARINA REDESCRIBED 347

the ? protonymphal features still within the skin of the next stage

(? deutonymph), the various setae being duplicated as figured,

Locality. Four females, one male and one nymph from millipede

under a Eucalyptus log, Hampton, 30 miles NE of Toowoomba,

Queensland, 3rd October, 1956 (coll. G. F. Bornemissza).

Remarks. Canestrini described this species as Laelaps coniferus

from specimens found in a tube of insect material collected by Prof.

Pulle in Queensland. His description is somewhat brief and his

figures inaccurate as far as the delineation of the genital and ventral

shields are concerned. From his figure, although the characteristic

coniform setae are arranged as shown it is evident that he failed to

gee the outlines of the genital and anal shields and the transverse

line which he shows running between the coxae IV is erroneous. The

sternal shield is as shown in his figure. Canestrini only had the

female sex, but in the material collected by Dr. Bornemissza I found

one male and one nymphal specimen which is evidently in process of

ecdysis from proto-to deutonymph.

REFERENCES

Canestrini, G., 1884: Acari dell’Australia Atti ist. Veneto, 2 Ser.

VI: 705-730.

Rainbow, W. J., 1906: A Synopsis of Australian Acarina. Ree.

Aust. Mus., 6: 145-193,

A NEW SPECIES OF URODISCELLA (ACARINA, UROPODIDAE) FROM

AUSTRALIA

BY H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The myrmecophilous genus Urodiscella Berlese 1903 is recorded for the first time from Australia. It

is represented by the new species Urodiscella nitida sp. nov. described from a single female found

on the larva of an ant Myrmecia gulosa Fabr. from Carlton, New South Wales.

A key to the known species of the genus, four from England and Europe and one from South Africa,

besides the new species is given.

All the species with the possible exception of the South African one are myrmecophilous in habit.

A NEW SPECIES OF URODISCELLA (ACARINA, UROPODIDAE)

FROM AUSTRALIA

By H. WOMERSLEY, Sours Ausrrarian Musrum

Fig. 1

SYNOPSIS

The myrmecophilous genus Urodiscella Berlese 1903 is recorded

for the first time from Australia. It is represented by the new

species Urodiscella nitida sp. nov. described from a single female

found on the larva of an ant Myrmecia gulosa Fabr. from Carlton,

New South Wales.

A key to the known species of the genus, four from Hngland and

Europe and one from South Africa, besides the new species is given.

All the species with the possible exception of the South African

one are myrmecophilous in habit.

INTRODUCTION

The genus Urodiscella was erected by Berlese (1903b) for

Uropoda ricasoliana Berl. 1889, Uropoda philoctena Trouessart 1902

and Urodiscella alophora n. sp. with ricasoliana as the genotype, all

of which are associated with ants. All three species were figured in

Berlese 1903¢,

In 1918 Hull added a fourth species U7. signata n. sp. from

England, also myrmecophilous in habit.

More recently a fifth species has been described by Ryke (1958)

from South Africa but this species was found in straw and not there-

fore definitely associated with ants.

Brief keys to the earlier species were published first by Berlese

(1903b, ¢) and then Hull (1918). Ryke did not attempt to key his

species. The brief descriptions of Berlese and Hull make their keys

difficult to assess, but a tentative key to all the five known species is

here attempted based on those of Berlese and Hull.

350 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

KEY TO THE SPECIES OF URODISCELLA

1. Dorsal setae strong and lanceolate.

Female 625» long .. .. .. .. .. potschefstroomensis

(S. Africa in straw.) Ryke 1958

Dorsal setae smaller and tapering . 2

2. Dorsal shield medially with shallow

punctures, ventral shields also

pitted. Female 485p long .. .. signata Hull 1918

(England; with Lasius flavus.)

Dorsal shield smooth .. .. .. .. .. 38

3. All ventral shields smooth and

iti Fs Ps a i pe ie

At least the perigenital shield

punctate ., .. 6. 6. ee ae ee oe 8

4. Length of female 570p . .. philoctena (Trouest. 1902)

(England, Ireland, Europe, ‘with

Lasius spp. and Messor

destructor.)

Length of female 8124... .. nitida sp. Nov.

(Australia, with larva of M; yrmecia

gulosa.)

5. Ventral shields punctate. Female

7502 long .. .. ricasoliana (Berl. 1889)

(Europe and England with Lasius

spp-)

Ventral shields smooth and ee

Male 9304 long . .. .. alophora Berl. 1903

(Luxemburg, in ants’ nest.)

Urodiscella nitida sp. nov.

Fig. 1, A-K

Type. Holotype female, from the collection of Dr. R. V.

Southeott (No. ACA 484) from the larva of Myrmecia gulosa Fabr.

(No. A 257) and collected at Carlton, N.S.W., 15th July, 1958 (coll.

D. Miller).

WOMERSLEY—NEW SPECIES OF URODISCELLA 351

_ ‘The specimen presented to the South Australian Museum by Dr.

Southcott has been disseeted, one slide containing the gnathosoma,

cliclicerae and legs I, the other the remainder of the body,

Description of Female. A broadly ovate almost rounded, dark

brown convex species, Length of idiosoma 812p, width 660,

Dorsum, The dorsal shield smooth and shining, with many

ininnte fine setae; similar setae on the marginal shields, The

marginal shields contour the dorsal shield and are entirely separated

by a narrow atrip of cuticle except anteriorly where they unite and

are fused with the dorsal shield (fig. B).

Venter. As shown in fig, A. All shields smooth, All setae

small and simple, An anterior pair of sternal setae (shown by Ryke

for potschefstroomensis) cannot be seen and the four setae in a

transverse row shown by Ryke as being on the anterior of the

perigenital shield appear to be on the sternal shield (see fig. A);

the perigenital shield otherwise has only two pairs of sefae, one

situated between coxae II and III, and the other pair at the posterior

end; the margin of the perigenital shield is simple except in the region

of coxae II where under high magnification it is seen to be finely

crenulate. The genital shield is oval with truncate base; if is 232,

long by 166» wide and extends from the middle of coxae IV to the

middle of ecoxae Il. The ventrianal shield bears approximately eleven

pairs of setae besides the paranal and postanal setae, the paranals

being placed well behind the anus. The leg grooves and exopodal

shields are as shown. The peritreme is strongly folded (fig. G) with

the stigma situated opposite coxae TIT and extending a short distance

posterior of the stigma, The tritosternum is as shown (fig. EH) with

four laciniae.

Guathosoma, The hypostome (fig. C) bears the usual four pairs

of setae of which at least the posterior two pairs are ciliated or

serrated; the second pair is much the longest, The labial cornicles

are as figured, short and stout. The tectum is similar fo that

deserihed and figured hy Ryke for potschefstroomensis. The tined

seta of the palpal tarsus is 2-+tined (fig. F); the palpal tarsus bears

two moderately long serrated setae, Chelicerae short and stout, each

finger with ene tooth (fig. D).

Legs. Coxae of leg I with outer laminae or crests as figured, at

the base of which is a geta (fig. J and H); femora of other legs all

with similar crests or laminae. Ambulacra of all legs well developed

352 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Urodiscella nitida sp. nov. Female, A, Ventral view. B. Dorsum, ©. Gnathosoma.

D. Chelicerae. E. Tritosternum. F. Tined seta of palpal tarsus. G. Stigma and

peritreme. H, Crest of femur I, I, Crest of femur IV. J, Leg I. K. Leg IV.

WOMERSLEY—NEW SPECIES OF URODISCELLA 353

with long pretarsi, and paired claws. Legs I rather more slender

than the others, to 464» long, IT and III 370» long, IV 394» long, some

of the tarsal setae on legs II-IV strongly spinelike.

REFERENCES

Berlese, A., 1889: A.M.S. ital. reperta., fase. 54, no. 10.

1908a: Zool. Anz., 27 (1): 21.

1903b: Acari nuovi, Manipl. I: 249.

1908e: Illus. monog. Acari mirmecofili:—Redia. I. 339-343,

taf. VIIT fig. 19-23.

Donisthorpe, H. St. J. K., 1915: British Ants: 200.

1927: Guests of British Ants: 204, 212.

Hull, J. H., 1918: Terrestrial Acari of the Tyne Province—Tr. N.H.

Soe. Northumberland and Durham 5 (1): 50.

Ryke, P. A. J., 1958: Proc. Zool. Soe. London 310 (2): 223, fig. 16-21

Trouessart, EH. L., 1902: Notes sur les Uropodinae: 36.

A NEW ASTERNOLAELAPS FROM AUSTRALIA

(ACARINA, ICHTHYOSTOMATOGASTERIDAE)

BY H. WOMERSLEY AND R. DOMROW

Summary

The mite family Ichthyostomatogasteridae Sellnick is recorded from Australia for the first time. It

now includes two species, Asternolaelaps fecundus Berlese from Europe, and A. australis, sp. nov.

from a bat cave in South Australia.

A NEW ASTERNOLAELAPS FROM AUSTRALIA (ACARINA,

ICHTHYOSTOMATOGASTERIDAE)

By H. WOMERSLEY”™ anv R. DOMROW™

Fig. 1

SYNOPSIS

The mite family Ichthyostomatogasteridae Sellnick is recorded

from Australia for the first time. It now includes two species,

Asternolaelaps fecundus Berlese from Hurope, and A. australis, sp.

nov. from a bat eave in South Australia.

INTRODUCTION

In 1953 Sellnick erected a new cohort Ichthyostomatogasterina

and family Ichthyostomatogasteridae, which were based on his new

genus and species Ichthyostomatogaster nyhlent from the nest of the

velvet skater duck, Melanitta fusca (1), from the island of Stora

Karlsé, off Géttland, Sweden. Tis syntypes (two nymphs, four

females, one male) are in the Entomology Department of the

Stockholm Museum.

Berlese had earlier (1923, p. 252) described withont figures both

sexes of Asternolaclaps fecundus from humus and moss from Vallom-

brosa, Italy. His types are in the Stazione di Entomologia Agraria in

Florence. This material has since been redescribed and figured in

detail by Evans (1954), and shown to be conspecific with Sellnick’s

species. Evans therefore synonymised J. nyhleni Sellnick with A.

fecundus Berlese, but retained Sellnick’s cohort and family names,

apparently in accordance with Recommendation 54 (1) (a) of the

Copenhagen Decisions on Zoological Nomenclature.

A single male of a second species of Asternolaelaps very close

to Berlese’s species was found on a live bat in a cave at Naracoorte,

South Australia. It is, however, probably not a true parasite of bats

or any other animals, Although it possibly only represents a sub-

species of A. fecundus Berlese, because of several small morphological

differences and the widely separated localities, it is here briefly

(1) South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

(2) Queensland Institute of Medical Research, Brisbane.

356 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

—To ——=

ear =

somal setae. H. Leg I. I. Leg If. J. Leg ITT. K. Leg IV. L. Tritosternum.

M, Ventral view of palp.

WOMERSLEY AND DOMROW—A NEW ASTERNOLAELAPS 357

described as a new species in comparison with Berlese’s, the only

other species in the family. Pending publication of the London

Decisions, the family name is left unchanged.

Asternolaelaps australis, sp. nov.

Fig. 1, A-M

Type: Holotype male in South Australian Museum, Adelaide; F

associated with bats in a cave at Naracoorte, South Australia, 26. viii.

to 2. ix, 1956, E. Hamilton Smith coll. The speeimen is dissected,

one slide containing the gnathosoma, the other the remainder of the

body and the chelicerac,

Description of male; Similar to A. fecundus Berlese except in

the following characters, Tdiosoma 818» long, 501» wide (imeasure-

ments ealenlated from text-figures A and B), Body setae rather

uniform (to 42 long), a few of the stronger ones heing slightly

ciliated, Sternal shield 176 long medially, 146» wide between coxae

IV; anterior sternal setae slightly ciliated, 36, long. Ventrianal

shield 390. long, 388 wide anteriorly (the measurements of the

sternal and ventrianal shields are direct from the specimen as

dissected). Metapodal shields 176» long, 26» wide, with six setae

along their length. Tectum triangular, with linear markings forming

a network over its surface, Dorsodistal margin of palpal femur quite

straight. Legs 1 504», IT 4194, TIT 427», TV 5238» long. When first

mounted a slight depression was seen both anteriorly and posteriorly

on the dorsal “shield ; these are now difficult to distinguish as depres-

sions in the dissected specimen.

Norz: The following key will serve to recognize the new species.

KEY TO SPECTES OF ASTERNOLAELAPS BERLESE

Metapodal plates without setae; tectum taper-

ing twice to form distinct spine anteriorly;

tectal striae spinulose in part; dorsodistal

margin of palpal femur with process;

European .. .. .. .. ». A. feewndus Berlese.

Metapodal plates with six astute alone their

length; teetum tapering once, evenly triangu-

lar; teetal striae without spinulae ; dorso-

distal margin of palpal femur quite

straight; Australian .. .. ., .. .. -. .. A. australis, sp. nov.

358 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

REFERENCES

Berlese, A., 1923: Centuria sesta di acari nuovi. Redia, 15: 237-262.

Evans, G. O., 1954: On the genus Asternolaeclaps Berlese, 1923

(Acarina-Mesostigmata). Ent. mon. Mag., 90: 88-90.

Sellnick, M., 1953: Ichthyostomatogaster nyhleni, eine neue Acaride

aus Schweden. Ent. Tidskr., 74: 24-37.

ON THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF COON BUGS

(OXYCARENUS FIEBER, HETEROPTERA-LYGAEIDAE)

BY GORDON F’. GROSS, CURATOR OF INSECTS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The three Australian species of Oxycarenus are described, and figured, and differentiated. Their

status is discussed and it is concluded the three species concerned are O. luctuosus (Mont. And

Sign.), O. arctatus (Walker), and a variety of O. bicolor (Fieber).

ON THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF COON BUGS

(Oxycarenus Fieber, Heteroptera-Lygaeidae)

By GORDON F, GROSS, Curator or Lysects, Sour AUSTRALIAN

Museum

Plate xli

SYNOPSIS

The three Australian species of Oxycarenus are described, and

figured, and differentiated. Their status is discussed and it is con-

cluded the three species concerned are O. luctwosus (Mont, and Sign.),

O. arctatus (Walker), and a variety of O. bicolor (Fieber).

INTRODUCTION

Every Australian entomologist is familiar with the small black

and white Lygacids of this genus. They often swarm in great

numbers, when all stages from the earliest nymphs to single and

pairing adults are present at the one time as large and fairly localized

swarms in grassy paddocks and savannah areas. ‘This curious

swarming phenomenon is also found over much the same range in

the south of Australia in the Pyrrhocorid Dindymus versicolor

Schaeffer and in the southern part of the dry centre of the continent

by the Coreid Leptocoris mitellatus Bergroth.

The name ‘‘coon bug’? first appears in the literature for the

Australian members of the genus in Froggatt 1901, It was in this

paper that Froggatt fixed the name that almost without exception

has since been used for all Australian Oxycarenus, namely luctuosus

(Montrouzier and Signoret) and he figured what he thought was this

species. Froggatt made it quite clear that he was aware that there

were at least two species in Australia (something that Tillyard 1926

p. 147 was unaware of) and that the northern one was luctuosus,

In spite of this he figured and described as luctuosus in this very

same paper the species that is commonest in the southern half of

the continent and does not occur in the northern half at all. What

is more incomprehensible still, there are specimens of this southern

360 RECORDS OF THE 8A. MUSEUM

species labelled O. frencht im the National Mnseum collections in

Froggatt’s handwriting. O. frenchi is apparently a Froggatt manu-

seript name; I can find no reeord of its publication.

There are actually three species of Oxycarenus in Australia

recorded in the literature, but one of these, considered to be a form

of the Asiatie Oryewrenus bicolor and possibly first recorded from

Australia by Bergroth in 1918 seems to be rather uncommon and from

the few specimens I have seen is restricted to the tar north of the

continent, It is easily distinguished from the other two in that in

our specimens, excep! for a narrow costal stripe on the hemielytra, it

has no white ou the npper side and need not concern us for the

moment in the following disenssion on the status of lactuosus,

The original type of luctwosus seems almost certainly to be lost,

the species was described from New Caledonia. In 1914 Distant

figured (rom New Caledonian specimens) what he took to be

luctuosus and it is this species that is the ouly one of our prominently

white marked species that occurs in the northern half of the continent.

The insect Distant figured was described by Kirkaldy in 1905 as

a new species (Jifuanus) and if seems likely that Kirkaldy was guided

in this by Froggatt’s figure. Kirkaldy says, ‘This may be Macroplax

lnetuosus Montr,, but that species is described as finely granulated,

with the clavus whitish “‘(my italies)’’ and the membrane brown.

It is also a little larger than O. lifuanus.”? This white clavus ig not

mentioned in Montrouzier and Signoret’s original description which

is ‘Long. 4 mill—Lifu (1) Petit, noir; partie coriace des homélytres

blanche, ayee une tache noire, arrondi au milieu; partie membraneuse

rembrunie; téte trés pointue, finement granuleuse, ainsi que le

corselet.*?

In view of the solely southern distribution of the species that

Froggatt figures and the apparent commonness of the species that

Distant figured in New Calendonia there can be little doubt that

Disiant’s figure is of the true lyetuosus Moutrouzier and Signoret

and that this is our common northern Ocycarenus,

In 1872 Walker deseribed Anthocoris arctatus from Anstralia

and in 1901 Distant pointed ont that this was actually a species of

Orycarenus. Specimens of the species figured by Froggatt have been

sent to the British Musenm for comparison with this species and

Mr, R. J, Tazard, who compared the specimens, is in no doubt that it

is in faet Oxycarenus arctatus (Walker),

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN COON BUGS 361

The three species may be separated by the following key :—

1, The only white above being along the

costal margin of the corium .. .. Oxycarenus bicolor

Fieber var.

Coriaceous part of hemelytra with

considerable white .. .. .. 2

2. Clavus black, corium with a large

median black patch generally not

reaching costal margin and a

minute black point in the apical

angles .. .. 0.2 ee ae ee ee ee ey )~©Oxyoarenus luctuosus

Montrouzier and Signoret

Clavus white, except behind tip of

scutellum, corium with a_ large

median black pateh never reaching

costal margin and a large black

point in the apical angles .. .. .. Oxycarenus arctatus

( Walk.)

Oxycarenus bicolor Ficber 1851

Oxycarenus bicolor Fieber 1851: Abh. Konig. Bohm. Gesell. Wissen-

schaft VIL Prag: 463. Distant, 1903: Faun. Brit. Ind. Rhynch.,

2: 44. Bergroth, 1918: Phillip. J. Sci., 13 (2-8): 73. Horvath,

1926: Bull, Soe, Ent. Fr,, 136. Esaki, 1926; Ann. Mus. nat. hnng.,

24: 161. 1941: Proe, 6th Pacif. Sci. Congr., 4: 411. Usinger,

1946: Bull. Bernice P. Bishop Mus., 189: 29. Barber, 1958:

B. P. Bishop Mus. Insect of Micronesia, 7 (7): 191.

Fieber described his species as follows, a eopy of which was most

kindly sent me by Mr. Izazard:—‘'O. bicolor, m. YWiihler schwarz.

CGlavus briunlich. Corium sehwarz, Grundbilfte weiss, Wurzel

braunlich, Spitze dreieckig weiss, mit schwarzem Endpunkt, Membran

rauchbraun, Innengrundwinkel mit dreieckigem weissem Fleck, Spitze

weisslich. Aus Hinterindien von Dr. Helfer gesammelt, Linge 14

Linien. Kopf, Pronotum, Schild weiss behaart, nebst Fihler und

Schnabelscheide schwarz, Clavus braéunlich. Bauch schwarz, glatt

glinzend. Brust schwarz, matt, groh-punktiert, Hinterbrustrand und

Ecken weiss. Schenkel pechbraun, Schienbeine weisslich, am Grunde

mit schwarzen Ringe, am Ende breit verwaschen und die Vorder-

schienen braun,’’

Bergroth 1918 records typical O, bicolor from various places in

Australia but T am inclined to think Bergroth actually had luctuosus

362 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

which fits Fieber’s description very well except that it has a pale

transparent membrane, Bergroth could have taken arctatus as being

luctuosus on account of Froggatt’s figure. Also if typical bicolor is

as common in Australia as Bergroth says it is it should be in some

of the collections before me,

The species I have before me is apparently widespread in

Indonesia, Micronesia, Philippines, New Guinea and enters Australia

in the Torres Strait area. Its identity has been accepted by all the

authors after Distant and Bergroth listed in the reference above as O.

bicolor Wieber. There is still some doubt on this score. My three

specimens do not fit the description given by Fieber for his species

(which eame from “Hinterindien*’ which T take to mean Eastern

India but which could also refer to Burma or Indo-China) in certain

respects of colour pattern.

The three specimens I have before me are piceous black wilh

sparse short erect white hairs all over and in addition with fairly

dense adpressed hairs on head, pronotum, and prothoray. The clavus

is not as piceous as the rest of the body and the corium in the main

and the membrane is dark brown as are the tibiae, tarsi, and eyes.

The corinm has a broad costal white stripe running almost all of its

length (the very apieal angle is blackish) and this stripe is expanded

hasally and apically. The membrane is thinly margined with white

and ventrally there is a broad medial white stripe on the hind tibiae

and to hind roargin of the metaplenron (broadly) and also the fore

and mid acetabnla are white. The head and pronotum are coarsely

punctate, They range in length from 3.5-4.0 mm,

Mr. Izzard who has seen two of these specimens has compared

them with Distant’s specimen of bicolor from Bnrma. This specimen

apparently agrees very well with Fieber’s deseription and from it

my specimens differ in not having ‘‘the white basal areas of eorium,

nor the triangular white patch at the apex with the small black

point’, Strneturally my specimens agree with Distant"s conception

of O. bicolor.

Usinger 1946 mentions a whole series of variants which he places

in this species. His Papnan specimens have the eostal margins pale

as do my specimens. His Pelelin specimens were smaller than the

Guam specimens with pale at bases and apices of eoria and apical

margin of membrane faintly paler. The Guam geries was very black,

completely so beneath, with only the bases and subapices of coria

white.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN COON BUGS 363

Bergroth 1918 apparently had this species in front of him from

the Philippines but he is definite that it is dagubris Motschulsky (1859;

Btud. Ent., 8: 108 as Stenogaster lugubris, also Distant, 1901: Ann.

Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) 8: 475. 1903: Faun. Brit. Ind, Rhynch., 2: 44)

and it certainly does fit the description of /ugubris better than that

of bicolor. Distant 1903 was of the opinion that Rhopalus ? funeralis

Kirby (1891; J. Linn. Soc. Zool., 24: 97 pl, TV p. 7) is a synonym of

lugubris and Bergroth that O. limbatipennis Breddin (1899: Jahr.

Hamburg Wiss. Arstatt 16: 174) from Lombok is one also,

There is quite sufficient reason, I think, to consider for the

moment all of these forms as belonging to one species in which the

costal margin tends to become whiter towards the New Guinea and

Indonesian limits of its distribution, while the Guam specimens

represent a blackish phase, Certainly the picture will not be clearer

until much better series of specimens are obtained. For the moment

Esaki and Usinger’s determination of the species as bicolor has been

permitted to stand. Usinger seemed somewhat inclined to regard

lugubris as a variant of bicolor but Izzard (in, litt.) is of the opinion

they are distinct.

Specimens seen: Mabuiag I., lorres Straits, Queensland, C. T.

McNamara, 14, and Bisiatabu, Port Moresby, Papua, W. N. Lock,

14,12 (SAM).

Oxycarenus arctatus (Walker) 1872

Plate xli, fig. C

Anthocoris arctatus Walker, 1872: Cat. Heter., 5: 153,

Oxycurenus arctatus Distant, 1901: Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) 8:

475. Gross, 1957; Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 18 (1); 187.

Cardiastethus avctatus Gross, 1954: Ree. 8. Aust. Mus., 11 (2): 133,

Oxycarenus luctuosus Froggatt (in part) 1901: Agric. Gazette N.8.W.

Mise, Publ. 538 (fig. 6 and only part of text on p. 8)-

Pieeous or dark brownish black, with a few scattered short stiff

erect white hairs. Clavus white except broadly along apical margin

where it is black. Corinm largely white with extreme apex black and

a large irregularly shaped blackish spot in the middle, this latter is

based on apical wargin of corium and occupies it from apex of clavus

to half way to apical black spot, this median large spot transversely

placed but not reaching costal margin. Membrane hyaline. Fore

364 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and mid acetabula and hind margin of metapleuron (broadly) white.

All tibiae and tarsi lighter, mid and hind tibiae with a prominent

broad white annulus in the middle. Eyes brownish. Head and

pronotum prominently punctate, scutellum rather less punctate.

Length: 3.2-4.6 mm,

Localities ;

Western Australia; 33-363/5 Tunney 28 &, 12 (W.A.M.).

South Australia: Underdale, 5 T 1958, coll, G, F. Gross, a large

series: North Adelaide 19 IT 1953, coll. G. F. Gross, Reg. No. 722,

1°; ditto, 15 I 1953, 24 4, 39 2, Reg. No. E.S.1, 330; ditto, 23 XI

1954, 38 6,22 2, Reg, No. E.S.1, 3687; Adelaide 2 I 1898, coll, J. G. O.

Tepper, 16: Parachilna (this locality is doubtful it could also be

from Owanigan Pound some miles to the east), 14: Spilsby 1, N. B.

Tindale, a series (S.A.M,).

Victoria; Murtoa, 29 VIII 1904, coll. 'T. A. Hill, on fence, large

series: South Yarra, VI 1923, a series: Melbourne, 33 8, 399;

Buckrabanyule, 20 IT 1950, coll. H. Knnis, 2¢ ¢, 49 ¢ (N.M.),

Oxycarenus luctuosus (Montrouzier & Signoret) 1861

Plate xli, fig. B

Macroplaa luctuosus Montrouzier & Signoret, 1861; Ann, Soe. ent.

Fr, (4) 1: 67.

Oxycarenus luctuosus Froggatt, 1901; Agric. Gazette N.S.W., Mise.

Publ, 538; (text, but not fig, 6). Distant, 1914: Nov. Caledon.

Zool., 1, pl. 12, p. 8 1920: Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. (9) 6: 153.

Tillyard, 1926: Insects of Australia and New Zealand: 147.

McKeown, 1945; Australian Insects: 81 (the last two apply also

to arctatus),

Oxycarenus lifuanus Kirkaldy, 1905: Trans. ent. Soc. Lond.: 347,

1908; Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 32: 773.

Piceous black, with sparse short erect stiff hairs. Clavus entirely

black, Corium white with a large median blackish spot in the same

position and of much the same shape as in arctatus, but often reaching

costal margin, apex of corium with a small black spot. Membrane

hyaline.

“The following abbreviations of institutions have been used. NM. (National Museum,

Melbourne); 8,A.M_ (South Australian Museum, Adelaide); U.Q. (Entomology Department,

University of Queensland, Brigbane); and W.A.M, (Western Australian Museum, Perth).

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN COON BUGS 365

All tibiae and tarsi somewhat lighter in colour, hind tibiae with

a broad medial white ring, mid tibiae with a narrower testaceous

one. Fore and mid acetabula and hind margin of mesosternum

(broadly), white. Margin of orifice of scent canal orange or whitish.

Head and pronotum coarsely punctate, sentellum fairly smooth.

Length: 3.2-3.9 mm.

Localities :

Southern South Australia: Medindie, 9 [TT 1958, coll, E. W. Lines,

a series: Underdale, II 1959, coll, G. F, Gross, 1% (S.A.M.).

Northern South Australia: Moolooloo, 2,000ft. Flinders Ranges,

1921, eoll. H. M. Hale, 1¢ (S.A.M.).

New South Wales: Tweed Heads, 16 VII 1958, coll. Coghill, a

series (N.M,).

Queensland: Brishane, 25 VI 1954, coll. K. L. S. Harley, 12,19:

ditto, ITT 1951, coll, Lipsett, 12 : ditto, IV 1955, eoll. N. J, Thompson,

1¢: ditto, 7 VIT 1955, coll, D. Griffith, 1¢: ditto, 15 TIT 1956, coll.

W. Jones, 12: ditto, 26 TX 1956, coll. I. Bonner, 12: ditto, 14 X

1956, coll. T. A. Bull, 22 @: ditto, 17 X 1956, coll, R. White, 1%:

ditto, X 1956, coll, J. O’Donohue, 14: ditto, 13 TIT 1957, coll, 8.

Sekhon, 14, 29 2: ditto, 24 V 1957, coll. G. Diattoff, 12, 12: ditto,

24 VITI 1957, coll, G. Ettershank, 18; ditto, 14 TX 1957, coll. B. R,

Grant, 14: ditto, 20 X 1957, coll. M. Playne, 19: Bell-Bunga Road,

S.K. Qid., 11 VIII 1955, coll. T. EB. Woodward, a series: Lawes, 4

IV 1944, coll. J. Rosser, 19: ditto, XIT 1954, coll. J. Thapa, L?:

Carnarvon, 29 V 1954, coll, T. E. Woodward, 12°: Victoria Pt. 11

IX 1954, coll, O. R. Byrne, 12: Bundamba, 17 VIII 1952, coll. J,

Davis, 14: Gaythorne, 18 TV 1946, coll. A. R. Bird, a series; Manly,

18 III 1954, eoll, G, Hooper, 14: Deception Bay, 25 TIT 1954, coll.

Y. P. Beri, 12: St. George, West Qld., in peach tree, 12 1 1956, 22% 9:

Approx. 40 miles N. of Gympie, 20 VIL 1952, 19: Bundaberg, 2 II

1949, coll. R. Boller, 2° 2: Roekhampton, 10 T 1954, eoll, K. 8. Chang,

2° ¢: Canungra, 27 IIL 1937, coll, R. F, Langdon, 22 2: Lockhart

R. Mission, Nth Qld,, 8 VI 1956, coll, E. N. Marks, by sweeping grass

and weeds, 3a 6 (U.Q.); Magnetic Island, coll. G. F. Hill, a series:

ditto, coll, A. M, Lea, a series: Rockhampton, 1¢, 1°; Stuart R.,

T-II 1927, coll. H. M. Hale & N. B. Tindale, 14, 12 17(S.A.M,):

Coen, 27 V 1951, coll, C. Oke, 19 (N.M.).

366 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Northern Territory: Roper River, coll. N. B. Tindale, a series:

Darwin, 1é, 12 2 nymphs (S.A.M.): Batchelor, coll. G. F. Hill,

presented 6 VI 1917, 22 2 1 nymph (N.M,).

North Western Australia: coll. Lea, No. 6362, 12 (N.M.).

Millstream, in flowers of yellow hibiscus, 17 VII 1958, and Millstream,

Deep Reach, 23 VII 1958, all coll. R. P. McMillan, a series (W.A.M.).

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

I am indebted to the Directors of the National Museum,

Melbourne and Western Australian Museum, Perth, for permission

to study the material in their collections and to Dr. T. EB. Woodward

for arranging the loan of material from the Entomology Department,

University of Queensland.

REFERENCES

Bergroth, E., 1918: ‘‘Studies in Philippine Heteroptera’’—I. Philipp.

J. Sei, 13 (2): 43-73.

Breddin, G., 1899: Hemiptera Insulae Lombok in Museo Hamburgensi

asservata adiectis Speciebus nonnullis, quas continet

Collectio Auctoris.’”” Jahr. Hamburg Wiss. Anstalt.

16: 155-197. Twelve figs.

Barber, H. G., 1958: Insects of Micronesia, Heteroptera, Lygaeidae,’’

B. P. Bishop Insects of Micronesia, 7 (4): 171-218.

Eleven text figs. 1 map.

Distant, W. L., 1901: ‘‘Rhynchotal Notes—XI Heteroptera: Family

Lygaeidae’’, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) 8: 464-486 &

497-510,

1903 & 1904; ‘*The Fauna of British India including Ceylon

and Burma. Rhynchota’’, Vol. 2: i-xvii and 1-242

(1903), 248-503 (1904), 319 text figs.

1914: ‘*Rhynchota from New Caledonia and the surrounding

Islands’’ in F. Sarasin and J. Roux’s Nova Caledonia,

Zoologie, 1 livre 4 (10): 369-390, pls. 11-12.

——— 1920: ‘‘Rhynchota from New Caledonia’’, Ann. Mag. Nat.

Hist. (9) 6: 143-169.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN COON BUGS 367

Hsaki, T., 1926; ‘‘Verzeichnis der Hemiptera-Heteroptera der Insel

Formosa’’, Ann, Mus. nat. hung., 24: 136-189.

1941: Proc. 6th Pacif, Sci. Congr. 4:

Fieber, F. X., 1851: ‘‘Rhynchotographien, drei monographische

Abhandlungen. Sciocoridae, Oxyearenus, Notonectaé

Abh, Konig. Bohm, Ges. Wissenschact Prag (5) 7 (4):

425-488,

Froggatt, W. W., 1901; ‘‘Notes on Australian Hemiptera,’’ Agric.

Gaz, N.S.W., Mise. Publ, 538: 1-10, 1 pl.

Gross, G, I"., 1954; ‘*A Revision of the Flower Bugs (Heteroptera-

Anthocoridae) of the Australian and adjacent Pacific

Regions I’. Ree. 8S. Aust. Mus., 11 (2): 129-164, 4

text figs.

1957: **Ditto—I1’’, Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 13 (1): 131-142, 1

text fig.

Horvath, G., 1926: ‘‘Sur les Oxycarenus nuisibles aux Cotonniers,

avee la deseription d’une espéce nouvelle (Hem.-

Lygaeidae), Bull, Soe. ent. Fr., 135-6,

Kirby, W. F., 1891: ‘‘Catalogue of the described Hemiptera Heterop-

tera and Homoptera of Ceylon, based on the collection

formed (chiefly at Pundaloya) by Mrs, KE. Ernest

Green’, J. Linn, Soe. Zool., 24: 72-176, pls. 4-6.

Kirkaldy, G. W., 1905: ‘‘Memoir on the Rhynchota collected by Dr.

Arthur Willey, F.R.S., chiefly in Birara (New Britain),

and Lifu’’. Trans. ent, Soe. Lond., 327-862, pl. 17.

1908: ‘*Memoir on a few heteropterous Hemiptera from

Eastern Australia’’. Proce. Linn, Soe. N.S.W., 32 (4):

768-788, pl. 43.

McKeown, K, C., 1945: ‘‘ Australian Insects. An introductory Hand-

book’’, Sydney, 1-303, many text figs.

Montrouzier, X & V. Signoret, 1861; ‘*Hssai sur la Faune entomo-

logique de las Nouvelle-Calédonie (Balade), et des Iles

des Pins, Art, Lifu, ete.’’ Ann. Sei. ent. Fr. (4) 1:

09-74.

Motsehulsky, V., 1859: ‘‘Insectes des Indes orientales’? Etud. Ent.,

§: 25-118,

368 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Tillyard, R. J., 1926: ‘‘Insects of Australia and New Zealand’’.

Sydney, i-xi, 21-560. Many text figs. and plates.

Usinger, R. L., 1946b: ‘‘Insects of Guam—2. Hemiptera Heteroptera

of Guam’’. Bernice P. Bishop Mus. Bull., 189: 11-103,

fig. 27.

Walker, F., 1872: ‘‘Catalogue of the specimens of Hemiptera Hete-

roptera in the collection of the British Museum—V’’.

London 1-202.

we ‘shppjowD snurmalirey "EQ ssusonjany Siuatbolleg “IBA LOJODIG STUALO2A LY OW

= V5 04 4 4)

Von, XIU, Pravr

THE GEOLOGY AND LATE PRECAMBRIAN FAUNA

OF THE EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE

BY M. F. GLAESSNER, UNIVERSITY OF ADELAIDE,

AND B. DAILY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

More than a decade has passed since Sprigg (1947) first found fossilized soft-bodied animals in

what were then believed to be Lower Cambrian quartzites near the old Ediacara mining areas, some

380 miles (by road) north of Adelaide. In recent years the significance of these finds has received

recognition in the palaeontological literature. At the same time further collecting has revived

interest in the area and in May 1958, in view of its scientific importance, the area of the original

discovery was proclaimed a fossil reserve, to be under the control of the Minister of Education and

the authorities of the South Australian Museum.

THE GEOLOGY AND LATE PRECAMBRIAN FAUNA OF THE

EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE

By M. F. GLAESSNER, Untversiry or AprbLamng, ann B, DAILY,

Sourn Avustranian Museum

Plates xlii-xlvii and text fig. 1-2

CONTENTS

Introduction.

Geology. By M. F. Glaessner and B. Daily.

1. Stratigraphic sequence—

a. Adelaide System.

b. Lower Cambrian.

c. Cainozoie gravels.

2. Structure.

3. Distribution of fossiliferous strata.

Fauna. By M. F. Glaessner.

1. Annotated Catalogue of genera (with descriptions of two

new species).

2. Conditions of preservation.

3. Conclusions.

References.

INTRODUCTION

More than a decade has passed since Sprigg (1947) first found

fossilized soft-bodied animals in what were then believed to be Lower

Cambrian quartzites near the old Ediacara mining areas, some 380

miles (by road) north of Adelaide. In recent years the significance

of these finds has received recognition in the palaeontological

literature. At the same time further collecting has revived interest

in the area and in May 1958, in view of its scientific importance, the

area of the original discovery was proclaimed a fossil reserve, to be

under the control of the Minister of Education and the authorities of

the South Australian Museum.

It was considered desirable to give now a brief account of the

geology of the fossil reserve and the surrounding areas. This was

compiled by the authors on the basis of field observations which they

made first separately and then jointly (October 1958). This account

is followed by a review of the fauna and its significance, including

370 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

GEOLOGICAL

SKETCH MaApP

EDIACARA

FOSSIL RESERVE

FOSSIL

RESERVE

Jerrace

gravels

Lower

Cambrian

Pound

Quartz te

Foss! eas

Marino

si/fstane ana

dolomite

WARRIOOTA

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 371

descriptions of two identified and several other new species. For this

part. one of the authors (MLF.G.) is alone responsible, but he had the

benefit of stimulating discussions of palaeontological problems and

observations with his colleague.

Information and material were kindly placed at our disposal by

Mr. R. ©, Sprigg and Geosurveys of Australia Ltd., Mr. H. Mincham

and Mr. B. Flounders who generously presented their rich private

collections from Ediacara to the South Australian Museum, and Mr.

I. M, Thomas of the Zoology Department, University of Adelaide.

Dr. W. Hiantzschel of the Geologisches Staatsinstitut in Hamburg and

Dr. W. Struve of the Senckenbergiseches Museum, Franklurt, supplied

casts, and Dr. F. €. Truter and Professor 8. W. Carey sent photo-

graphs of South African fossils, Miss A. M. ©. Swan (Geology

Department, University of Adelaide) painstakingly drew the

geological sketch map. Photographs not acknowledged to others in

the explanations to the plates were produced by Miss M. P. Boyce

at the South Australian Museum,

GHOLOGY

By M. F. GLAESSNER ayv B. DAILY

1. Srrarterarnio Sequence

a, Adelaide System

The oldest rocks exposed in the area are red and purple well-

bedded siltstones and sandstones, They are exposed in cliffs along

the Warrioota Creek and on the hill slopes along its banks south of

Randell’s Lookout, as well as along the eastern foot of the range

which culminates in this hill. Strong folding, the encroachment of

sand dunes trom the west and deep weathering in the east obscure

the succession, Current-bedding is well developed and flute casts up

to 2in. in diameter, the direction of which indicates currents coming

from the west, are seen on lower surfaces of some beds. Ripple marks

are often found, trending N-S and also E-W. The siltstones contain

large nodules and veins of barytes, These beds are overlain by well-

bedded olive- to buff-eoloured dolomites. This part of the sequence

is assigned to the Marinoan Series of the Adelaide System (fig. 1).

Fig, 1. Geologiral sketch map of Ediacara Fossil Reserve and surrounding areas, The

co-ordinates of Mount James are 188" 09’ B, 30° 46° S, Lands Department maps and

serial photographs aud maps published by Segnit and Broadhurst. have been used. F—F

Gap Creek Fanlt,

372 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

It is followed by typically developed Pound Quartzite which forms

the hilly slopes around Ranidell’s Lookout in the south and Mount

James in the north, The thickness of this formation is estimated to

be about 2,000ft. The quartzites vary from thiek-bedded to flaggy,

with erossbedding, ripple marks, and mud pellets on the bedding

planes. Casts of worm burrows were observed about 300ft. above its

base near Randell’s Lookout. Beds with abundant small siliceous

nodules are seattered throughout the sequence. A prominent band of

white quartzite forms a conspictiots zone in the upper part where red

laminated siltstones also appear.

The fossiliferons member oceurs 100-200ft. below the top of the

formation. It is a fine- to coarse-grained quartzitic sandstone or

quartzite, with varying amounts of weathered felspars and irregular

very thin argillaceous partings and lenses. The sandstone is white

to grey when fresh and weathers to a deep rusty red to purple, with

black stains in depressions. Exposed surfaces are bleached. he

weathering produces flags of varying sizes which are rarely more than

Zin, thiek. Hxposnres of beds in situ on steep hill slopes show that

the individual bedding planes are uneven and wavy and the beds are

very strongly lenticular, Cross-hedding of various orders is present

throughout, The better developed bedding planes are covered with

ripples which are more or less irregular, with crests up to 3in. distant,

A bed with contorted slump rolls up to 10ft. long was found near

the southern end of the outerop of the fossiliferous member. Slump

structures also occur commonly towards the base of the fossiliferous

member at the northern end of the area.

The beds above the fossiliferous member include lenticular bodies

of more solidly silicified quartzite, some of which are distinguished

in Segnit’s mapping as ‘‘quartzite’’ from the ‘sandstone’ of the

rest of the formation. One of them forms a speetaenlar cliff about

# mile south of Gap Creek, Silicification is not confined to a single

stratigraphic horizon but extends through at least the top 10ft. of

the fossiliferons member in same places,

Broadhurst (1947) recognized the oecurrence of transition beds

between the (Pound) quartzite and the overlying (Ajax) limestones

(which had not been named at that time). Such passage beds are

now widely known throughout the Flinders Ranges and also at

Kulpara on Yorke Peninsula (Daily 1956), Their occurrence proves

that there is no stratigraphic break below the Lower Cambrian Ajax

Limestone, as Segnit (1939) had Suggested. Mineralization is

frequent at this horizon but it is believed to be related to hydrological

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 373

conditions and the pronounced change in permeability and porosity

on this boundary rather than to exposure and weathering. In agree-

ment with regional observations, the top of the transition beds is now

taken as the top of the Pound Quartzite and is placed a little lower

than in Broadhurst’s mapping. The position of the transition beds

is shown in the sections (fig. 2). They can be described as inter-

bedded sandstones and sandy and silty dolomites. They are white,

Fig. 2. Measured sections of the fossiliferous member

of the Pound Quartzite and overlying strata. Left:

Adit near south workings of the old Ediacara mine,

near the southern end of the Cambrian outcrop.

Right: In Gap Creek Fault valley, one mile south of

Gap Creek. Top: Cross-bedded and well-bedded sandy

and oolitic dolomitic limestone. 1—Interbedded argil-

laceous standstone and sandy dolomitic limestone, 2a

—Quartzite band. 2, 2b—White knotty sandstone.

3—White and reddish quartzite. 4—TFossiliferous

flaggy quartzite, cross-bedded and ripple-marked, 5—

Unfossiliferous white to red and purple quartzites and

sandstones. A—Lower Cambrian, B—Passage Beds,

C—Fossiliferous Member. Scale—lin. to 100ft.

374 | RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

yellow and purple, often leached, soft and poorly exposed while the

overlying dolomites are hard and form goad outcrops.

b. Lower Cambrian

Ocenpying the central position of the area and conformable with

the underlying Pound Sandstone is a sequence of limestones and

dolomitised limestones estimated by Broadhurst (1947) to be abont

530ft. thick. On lithological and faunal grounds these beds are

correlated with part of the Ajax Limestone which is exposed in the

Mount Scott Range, 18 miles to the north-east.

The base of the Ajax Limestone is taken at the horizon where

carbonate deposition becomes dominant and continuous, The Ajax

Limestone is variable in colour and composition, It exhibits all

gradations from a yellowish colonred dolomitised limestone, particu-

larly near the base, to grey, blne-grey and buff coloured limestones

above, either siliceous, dolomitised or both, Oolitic, often crass-

bedded dolomitic limestones with well rounded quartz grains ocenr

commonly at the base of the formation. Nodular structures, possibly

referable to algae, intraformationally brecciated limestones, and large

nodules of chalcedony are eonspicuons features of the Ajax Limestone

in this area as they are im the same formation in the Mount Scott

Range (Daily, 1956).

Poorly preserved Cambrian fossils have been found in the upper-

most 60!'t. of the Ajax Limestone, the remainder of the formation still

heing under investigation. The fossils oceur sporadically within grey

and buff colonred partially dolomitised limestones but concentrations

of small shell fragments are found in small lenses. The fossils

include silicified archaeoeyathids, phosphatic brachiopod fragments,

and phosphatie-shelled tubular organisms of onknown affinities, A

new brachiopod genus, represented by forms to which Tate referred

as “*Ambonychia macroptera,”? ranges throughout the 60ft. of beds

investigated whilst a representative of another new brachiopod genus,

known as Micromitra (Paterima) etheridge (Tate), together with the

enigmatic tubwar organisms have been found in the top 30ft.

The ‘‘Ambonychia,”’ ‘Micromitva’’ and tubular organisms are

characteristic elements of the Lower Cambrian ‘Faunal Assemblage

No. 2”? (Daily, 1956), with whieh this assemblage is correlated, It is

widespread and has been found in the Ajax Limestone near Mount

Scott, in the Kulpara Limestone at Ardrossan and Curramulka, and

in the Wilkawillina Limestone near Wirrealpa.

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 375

ce. Cainozoie Gravels

A large area between Winnowie Hut and Randell’s Lookout is

covered with coarse, well-rounded quartz gravels. They form con-

spienous eliffs near the hed of Warrioota Creek, opposite and above

Winnowie Hut. Near the head of one of the minor tributaries of this

ereek where it is deeply entrenched, the base of the gravels is seen

at least 100ft, above the level of the creek, resting on about 6ft, of

strongly silicified quariz conglomerate which is lensing in a more

sandy matrix. This conglomerate, in turn, overlies deeply weathered

and mottled Mavinoan silty shales whieh are here exposed to a depth

of 30ft. The silicified sandstones and conglomerates have also been

observed elsewhere in the area, é.9., on low hills in the headwaters of

the ereek which flows around the southern end of the Cambrian

dolomite outerap. No direct, evidence of their age has been found but

they are thought to be part of the widespread mid-Tertiary

continental sedimentary formations which elsewhere eontain plant

remains and which are invariably converted by silicification into part

of the duricrust’ of inland Australia,

The overlying terrace gravels are not related to recent drainage

which has eroded them deeply. They could be either Late Tertiary

or Pleistocene, No fossils have been found in them bnt in September

1958 Dr. R. Morwitz found a piece of freshwater limestone with

abundant gastropods west of Winnowie Hut near the boundary

hetween the terrace gravels and the Marinoan dolomite outerops, and

identical rocks were subsequently found in situ about 4 mile west of

the southern end of the Cambrian dolomite outerop. At this locality,

thin lenses of similar freshwater limestone with gastropods outcrop

at the base of a terrace gravel which resembles closely that which

was first found near Winnowie Hut. The gastropods have not been

identified,

2. Srrucrure

Earlier observers have already recognized the strueture of the

aren as essentially synclinal, Tt is, however, not a simple syneline,

nor is it ag extensively faulted as Segnit's map (1939) had indicated.

The axis of the syncline trends northward in the south, from near

Warrioota Creck, but it is offset to the west and shows a more

north-easterly trend in the central area, and a similar shift occurs

near Mount James. The dips are generally low, between 10° and

20°, Int the east flank is steeper, with dips up to 80°. There is only

one distinct fault in the area. It trends SW from near Gap Creek.

Tt was recognized by Segnit and correetly mapped by Broadhurst.

376 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The faults shown on Segnit’s map near Mount James and around

the southern end of the Cambrian outerop do not exist and the

individual beds can be followed around it easily. The Marinoan silt-

stones and sandstones along Warrioota Creek are more strongly

folded than the overlying formations and steeper dips and closer folds

can be seen in the cliffs. It may be assumed that there is some

incompetent folding of the softer siltstones beneath the hard quartzite

bot the structure of a large area oceupied by Marinoan south of

Warrioota Creek remains wnexamined. Both limbs of the Ediacara

Syneline disappear under alluvium. The flanking anticlines have not

been observed.

3. Disrrisution or vHe Fossmirerovs Srratra

The fossiliferous member in the upper part of the Pound

Quartzite was first discovered near the southern end of the Lower

Cambrian dolomite outerop. From that point on the ereek whieh ents

across it and which Ieaves a small west-dipping outlier of dolomite

on a low hill on its southern bank, the fossiliferous band can be easily

followed up the creek northward to its headwaters. It may continue

a short distance further np the east flank but it becomes difficult to

follow where the soil cover of the eastern plains eneroaches on the

bedrock. The actual occurrence of fossils depends on the flagginess

of the rock and decreases markedly where the rock becomes slightly

more Massive. On the western limb of the structure the fossiliferons

band can be followed across » hill north of the main creek until it

disappears under a patch of talus from the Cambrian dolomite hills.

The fossiliferous beds are also well developed near the northern

end of the main dolomite outerop. Here they are locally duplicated

by a normal fault, This explains the reference by Sprigg (1949, p. 73)

to two distinct fossiliferous horizons found by Mawson ‘in the

northern extensions of the fossil occurrences”, They can be followed

uorth acrosa Gap Creek and np the southern slopes of Mount James

where they are less rich owing to a gradnal change in lithology and

where they are cut off by erosion and obseured by talus from above.

The entire northern outerop of the fossiliferons strata is outside the

fossil reserve area.

The horizon in the Pound Quartzite corresponding to the

fossiliferous member has been seen in many parts of the Flinders

Ranges but has not heen found anywhere, except on the north-western

end of the Mount Seott Range, to be developed in the flaggy facies

which has proved snrprisingly suitable for the preservation of fossils.

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 377

Two areas nearer to Ediacara where the Cambrian-Precambrian

transition is likely to be exposed and where it could contain equiva-

lents of the fossiliferous member remain to be examined. ‘They are

in the southern extension of the range of hills about 8 miles south of

Warrioota Creek near Mount Michael, and near Beltana Hill about

4 miles south of Beltana HLS.

FAUNA

By M. F. GLAESSNER

1, Annotatep Caratoourn or Genera (with descriptions of two

new species)

It is estimated that to date about 800 specimens of fossils have

been collected from the fossiliferous member near the top of the

Pound Quartzite at Ediacara, The study of such abundant material

will take several years and will require extensive comparative investi-

gations on recent as well as fossil specimens. The work of the last

12 months has, however, revealed several facts of outstanding

significance which make it desirable to review briefly our present

knowledge of this fauna.

1. The fauna consists not only of Medusae believed to represent

the Seyphozoa and Hydrozoa but there are also Anthozoa (Octo-

corallia) and Annelida and at least two entirely new types of

invertebrates.

2, Certainly one and possibly more elements of this fauna show

relations to the fauna of the Nama System of South Africa.

3. Stratigraphic and palaecontological evidence supports the

placing of this fauna in the Late Precambrian rather than the Lower

Cambrian,

Apart from factual evidence in support of these statements, it

seems desirable to record here some observations on the type

specimens of Sprigg’s fossils from Hdiacara (1947, 1949). These

types are deposited in the palaeontological collections of the

University of Adelaide. Sprigg considered all his species as probable

hydrozoan or seyphozoan medusae, Their taxonomic position was

recently reconsidered by Harrington and Moore (1956) and briefly

reviewed by Caster (1957). There has not yet been an opportunity

of making careful comparisons between the types and the abundant

new material of medusa-like fossils. Such further studies are

378 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

expected to influence morphological interpretations and systematic

placement of at least some of the taxa, on the specific as well as on

higher levels. As a basis for such future work, an annotated catalogue

of all genera described by Sprigg and others is here given in

alphabetical order; descriptions of some of the new forms are included

in it. Numbers prefixed ‘‘P’’ refer to specimens in the South Aus-

tralian Museum. Others refer to Adelaide University palaeontological

collections.

Beltanella Sprigg

Beltanella Sprigg, 1947, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 71, p. 218.

Beltanella Sprigg, 1949, Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Aust., 73, p. 81.

Beltanella Harrington and Moore, 1956, Treatise Inv. Paleont., p. #70.

This genus was placed by Sprigg in the Suborder Trachymedusae

(Trachymedusina) and left in this position by the later authors.

There is only one species, B, gilest Sprigg, represented by a single

specimen, and no further specimens have been assigned to it.

(Holotype No. T 38-2056.)

Cyclomedusa Sprigg

Cyclomedusa Sprigg, 1947, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 71, p, 220,

Cyclomedusa Sprigg, 1949, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 73, p. 91,

Cyclomedusa Harrington and Moore, 1956, Treatise Inv. Paleont.,

p. F158,

Ediacaria (part) Harrington and Moore, 1956, Treatise Inv, Paleont.,

p. P74.

This genus (type species C. davidi Sprigg, Holotype No, T 5)

was described by Sprige (1949) together with other ‘‘medusoid

problematica’’, and Harrington and Moore diseussed it under the

heading ‘‘Medusae imcertae sedis’’, These later anthors combined

the species OC, radiata with Tateana inflata and considered both as

‘‘exumbrellar impressions’? of Hdiacaria jlindersi. A preliminary

study of the types indicates that Sprigge had correctly placed C.

radiata in the same genus as C, david), Tateana imflata does not seem

to be distinguishable generically and possibly even specifically from

C. radiata, Wossils of the same general type, with variations dne ta

preservation, are found very commonly and are well represented in

the new collections. The holotype of the third species, C. gigantea

(No. 2035) is not easily matched by any other specimen. This applies

at present also to the two incomplete specimens described by Sprigg

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 379

(1947, pl, 5) as Hdiacaria flindersi. It is therefore undesirable to

accept Harrington and Moore’s procedure and to place the species

C. radiata and the genus Tateana in the synonymy of Ediacaria

flindersi. Russian workers on Lower Cambrian faunas, particularly

I. Zhuravleva, (personal communication) have expressed the opinion

that Cyclomedusa may be related to certain saucer-shaped Archaeo-

eyatha which they have found in shale and sand facies of the Lower

Cambrian, The external resemblance is undeniable but no evidence

of the distinctive double wall of the Archaeocyatha has been found

in Cyclomedusa.

Dickinsonia Sprigg

Dickinsonia Sprigg, 1947, Trans. Roy, Soc. 8, Aust., 71, p. 221.

Dickinsonia Sprigg, 1949, Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Aust., 73, p. 95.

Dickingonia Harrington ond Moore, 1955, Kansas Geol. Survey, Bull.

114, pt. 5,

Dickinsonia Harrington and Moore, 1956, Treatise Inv. Paleont.,

p. F24,

Dickinsonia Glaessner, 1958, Trans, Roy. Soc. 8, Aust., 81, p. 188.

Dickinsonia Glaessner, 1959, Geol. Rundschau, 47.

Sprige (1949) had considered the affinities of this genus as

‘extremely uncertain’’ but had concluded that ‘‘the coelenterate

category seems the most logical association for the present’.

Harrington and Moore established for the genus Dickinsoma the new

Class Dipleurozoa. I have stated that it resembles certain worms

more than any coelenterates. No finality can be reached until the

entire material which now amounts to well over 100 specimens ranging

in length from 10 to 330 mm. is examined. The type species is D.

costata Sprigg (Holotype No. T 6-2055).

Ediacaria Sprigg

Ediacaria Sprigg, 1947, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 71, p, 215,

Ediacaria Sprigg, 1949, Trans. Roy, Soc, 8, Aust., 73, p. 83.

Ediacaria (part) Harrimeton and Moore, 1956, Treatise Inv. Paleont.,

p. F74,

The genus which is represented by the imperfectly preserved

holotype of EF. flindersi Sprige (No. T 1) and one other doubtful

specimen, was considered hy Sprigg as representing the Semaeosto-

matida but listed under Trachylinida incertae sedis by Harrington

380 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and Moore, who placed in its synonymy the genus Tateana and the

species Cyclomedusa radiata. I have stated above that they cannot

be separated from other Cyclomedusa. At present no other specimens

ean be identified as Hdiacaria and its reconstruction (Sprigg, 1949,

fig. 5) rests on uncertain grounds,

Madigania Sprigg

(See Spriggia Southeott)

Medusina Walcott

(See Protolyella Torrell)

Papilionata Sprigg

Papilionata Sprigg, 1947, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 71, p. 233.

This genus was described for the single specimen of its type

species P. eyrei Sprigg (No, T 8). It was not mentioned by Sprigg

in 1949 and was listed by Harrington and Moore (1956, p. F159) as

‘‘nroblematie form of unknown affinities, not a medusoid’’. It appears

to be a poorly and incompletely preserved specimen of a Dickinsonia,

Parvancorina Glaessner

Pl. xlvii, figs. 5, 6 |

Parvancorina Glaessner, 1958, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 81, p. 187.

Parvancorina, Glaessner, 1959, Geol, Rundschau, 47.

This form, of unknown affinities, originally described from a

single specimen, is now represented by 16 individuals ranging in

length to 25 mm. The only additional morphological detail which

has been observed is a division of the two lateral areas by about

7 or more fine oblique lines on either side of the main anchor-shaped

depression. They are slightly convex towards the narrow (posterior?)

end of the body and join the lateral margins at approximately right

angles. They may represent traces of appendages. The main anchor-

shaped depression is unsegmented in all specimens. The type species

is P. minchami Glaessner (Holotype No. P 12774),

Protodipleurosoma Sprigg

Protodipleurosoma Sprigg, 1949, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 73, p. 79.

Protodipleurosoma Harrington and Moore, 1956, Treatise Iny.

Paleont., p. P79, F'87.

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL. RESERVE 381

This is a rare form which has been assigned to the Leptomedusae,

Le., the medusoid forms of Calyptoblastina (Ilydroida), The genus

was based on a single specimen of its type species, P. wardi Sprigg.

(Holotype No, T 36-2023.)

Protolyella Torrell

Harrington and Moore (1956, p, F153) bave shown that

Walcott’s name Medusina which Sprigg (1949, pp. 89, 90) had used

for three new species, is inapplicable. They extended the generic¢

concept of Protolyella to accommodate them, A preliminary study

of the types shows that ''M.’’ asteroides (Holotype No. T 40-2021)

is probably identical with ‘‘M.’’ mawsoni (Holotype No. T 39), while

the position of the third species, ‘‘M.’’ filamentus (Holotype No.

T 68) is in doubt. The exammation of the numerous new specimens

should elarify the status of these species.

Protoniobia Sprigg

Protoniobia Sprigg, 1949, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 73, p. 77, 79.

At the end of his deseription of Protoniobia wadea from Western

Australia Sprigg states: ‘‘A second example of Protoniobia has been

discovered amongst material from Ediacara . . . The example occurs

on the same quartaite fragment as fossil No. 2010’’. This fossil, now

numbered T10-2010 is a hypotype of Cyclomedusa radiata. The

small speeimen on the same rock face is not a Protoniobia but repre-

sents the new form described below as Tribrachidiwm heraldicum nav.

gen., noy. spec,

Pseudorhizostomites Sprigg

Pseudorhizostomites Sprigg, 1949, Trans. Roy. Soc, 8. Aust., 73, p. 87.

Pseudorhizostomites Harrington and Moore, 1956, Treatise Inv.

Paleont., p. F'52.

Sprigg has compared this monotypic genus with the Jurassic

Rhizostomites and placed it in the ‘*Rhizostomae’’ (Seyphozoa),.

Harrington and Moore considered these fossils as ‘* *{Seyphomedusae

incertae sedis’’, Recent collecting has proved them to be common;

some 75 specimens are known. They show no trace of any umbrellar

margin. The branching of the grooves is variable and the centre is

usually depressed. Some specimens, however, show a more or less

irregular convex area in or near the centre. ‘‘Medusina’’ filamentus

closely resembles these specimens which also provide a link with Pseu-

dorhopilema which cannot be distinguished from Pseudorhizostomites.

382 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Pseudorhopilema Sprigg

Pseudorhopilema Sprigg, 1949, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 73, p. 88.

Pseudorhopilema Harrington and Moore, 1956, Treatise Inv. Paleont.,

p- F'51,

This genus and its type species, P. chapmani Sprigg, are based

on a single, somewhat eroded specimen (No. T 74-2086). There seems

fo be intergrading between the typical specimens of Pseudorhigos-

tomates with depressed centres and others with the branching impres-

sions extending around convexities. These forms are generally much

less regular than had been expected on the basis of the first few

specimens. The separation of the genis Pseudorhopilema from

Pseudorhizostomites cannot be maintained,

Pteridinium Giirich

Pteridium Qirich, 1930, Zeitsehr, deutseh. Geol Ges. 82, p. 637

(nom. preoce,, non Seopoli 1777),

Pteridinium Chirich, 1933, Palaeont. Zeitechr., 15, p. 144.

Pteridinyem Richter, 1955, Senckenb, Leth,, 36, p. 246.

This genus was established for specimens which have since been

lost. Richter later discussed it in great detail on the basis of

relatively abundant material from the type locality in the Kuibis

quartzite al the Nama System of South Africa, from which he selected

a neotype (Richter 1955, pl. 1, fig. 1). This genus is ineluded in the

present catalogue because of the close resemblance with the neotype

of twa specimens (pl, xlvi, figs, 3, 4) on one slab (No. P 12744).

Neither these nor any other specimens in the present collection

resemble closely such specimens as were figured by Richter (1955)

on pls. 3-6, The problems connected with their peculiar preservation

and Conularia-like appearance are beyond the scope of this discussion.

The present specimens are each about 70 mm. long and 16-17 mm.

wide. They show a median depression which takes a more or less

indistinet zig-zag course, as a resull of weaker transversal furrows

joining it alternatingly, separating hetween them faint and slightly

curved elevated {ransverse ribs which are about 2 mm. wide, 8 or 9

ribs oceupy about 20 mm. along the axis. The lateral margins are

indistinct but there is a gentle convergence towards that end which

is faced by the concave side of the curvature of the lateral ribs, In

the specimen in whieh the ribs are less laint, they extend 4 mm. and

then flatten out markedly.

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 383

The differences between these specimens and the neotype of

Pteridinium simplex Giirich are their smaller size, less distinct and

narrower ribs, and narrower shape, The specimens from Hdiacara

may be referred to as Pteridinium sp. iirich and Richter have

considered Piteridinium as closely related to Rangea, This view is

undoubtedly correct and on the South Australian material alone no

generic distinction would have been made.

Rangea Giirich

Rangea Giirich, 1930, C.R. 15th Int. Geol, Congr., 2, p. 680.

Rangea Giirich, 1930, Zeitschr, deutsch. Geol. Ges., 82, p. 637.

Rangea Giirich, 1933, Palaeont. Zeitsehr., 15, p. 139.

Rangea Richter, 1955, Senckenb, Leth., 36, p. 264.

Rangea Wells and Hill, 1956, Treatise Inv. Paleont., p. F478,

The most striking and unexpected discovery is the common

occurrence of representatives of the genus Rangea in the Ediacara

fauna. This genus was first described from the Kuibis quartzite of

the Nama System of South-vest Africa, where it is rare, About 40

specimens of fossils which cannot be generically separated from

Rangea are now known from Hdiacara. Sprigg (1949, p. 73) has

referred to some of them as algae. Gtirich compared Rangea (type

species R. schneiderhdhni Giirich) with the Ctenophora, without

assigning it to any Class. Richter (1955) placed it with Pteridinium

in a new family Pteridiniidae which he assigned to the Order

Gorgonaria, Suborder Holaxonia, of the Anthozoa (Octocorallia).

This family is not mentioned in the Treatise on Invertebrate Paleon-

tology where Wells and Hill (1956) refer to Giirich’s comparison of

Rangea with Ctenophora as very doubtful. The new material makes

it possible to assign the genus to the Order Pennatulacea of the

Anthozoa (Octocorallia).

Rangea arborea sp. nov,

Plate xliii, figs. 1-4; pl. xliv, figs. 1-3; pl. xlv, figs. 1, 2; pl. xlvi, fig. 1.

(a) Deseription

This description is based on a large number of specimens, some

of which differ considerably in appearance. Existing transitions

indieate that at least some of these differences are not of any

taxonomie value but due to differences in preservation, Others may

384 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

indicate the presence of more than one species but all available

specimens are more or less incomplete and there is not enough

evidence, particularly from measurements, on which to base specific

diagnoses.

The species Rangea arborea is characterized by a leaf-shaped

main body consisting typically of a median field, the sides of whieh

converge towards the distal end. It may appear convex (pl. xliv,

fig. 1; pl. xliii, fig. 4) or concave (pl. xliii, fig. 1), and may have a

zig-zag shaped structure impressed on it (pl. xlvy, fig. 2), or it may

consist only of such a structure (pl. xliii, fiz. 3) or become reduced

to a Zig-zag groove (pl xlvi, fig. 1). A variable number of trans-

versely direeted lateral furrows divide the lateral portions of the

leaf into convex or flatly moulded areas or branches. The furrows

extend from the median field or groove outward at angles varying

between 60° and 80°. The bases of the branches overlap the median

field partially, giving the impression of being inserted in it with

their narrowing, down-turned bases (pl. xliii, fig. 4). They alternate

in position on the sides of the axis, irregularly or more regularly,

which accounts for the zig-zag structure. In the best-preserved

specimens a division of some of the lateral branches by closely set

secondary furrows ig seen. They are 1-3 mm. apart, mostly more

distinet on the proximal margins of the branch, and set at approxi-

mately right angles to the lateral furrows so that they trend obliquely

across the leaf from the outer margin inward towards the axis.

Other specimens (pl. xliv, figs. 2, 3) show hardly any trace of

secondary furrows and the lateral furrows grade into bundles of fine

grooves arising from the median field in a similar manner to that

observed in more typical forms, This field may also be marked by

similar but longitudinally directed grooves. The entire structure

appears to consist mainly of impressions of bundles of spicules, some

of whieh may be up to 40 mm. long. Details of their shape and

surface seulptire cannot be recognized, as the width of the individual

vrooves is close to or even less than the average grain size of the

qnartzitic matrix,

The lateral margins of the main hody are often clearly marked

by more or less sinuons lines. The ratio of length to width appears

to have been variable and some leaves are broad while others are

very long and narrow. As all specimens are incomplete, this ratio

cannot now be used for specific distinctions. The width of the branches

also varies conspicuously but is believed to be to some extent a

function of growth. Several specimeng have a peduncle attached to

GLARSSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 385

the proximal end. It can be up to 12in, (30 em.) long, with parallel

sides, and about 20 mm. wide. In other specimens the peduncle is

shorter or less well defined, or the proximal end of the maim body is

obsetired or broken off. The maximum width of the body is about

44in, (over 11 em.), the maximum length (without peduncle) about

Yin. (28 em.) but all specimens are incomplete, Holotype: No.

P 12891.

(b) Comparison

Because of the marked differences of opinion concerning the

morphology and taxonomy of Rangea, a neutral terminology was used

in the description of the new species. Tt will also be used im its

comparison with R, schueiderhohni Gtrich, This species shows

clearly the leaf-shaped main body with its median field, and the lateral

branches which are separated by transverse lateral furrows and

subdivided hy secondary furrows arising from their proximal margins.

The similarity in these characters is the basis for the weneric

identification of the new form with the genus Rangea. To addition,

there is the downward turn and the narrowing of the bases of the

lateral branches and their partial overlap over the median fiell in the

distal part of the body which puzzled Riehter (1955, p. 266). The

differences are considered as specific. They are seen mainly in the

more regular arrangement of the lateral branches, the more distinet

secondary furrows, aud the sharp outer margin, with certain lateral

impressions (‘*Aussenfeld’*?) beyond it in R. schneiderhohni, Tn com-

paring a single specimen (Rf, schneiderhohni forma turgida Girich

is too obviously distorted to be of much use) with the rich new

material it is difficult to decide whieh of its features may be due to

accidents of preservation of this individnal. Such an accident may

explain the lateral projections which are seen only on one side of

the holotype specimen, and also the duplication of some furrows.

However, the regular outline and the arrangement of furrows shown

by this specimen have no parallel among the many specimens from

Ediacara and specific distinetion seems justified on this basis.

Rangea ? brevior Giirich, a single specimen which has since been lost,

cannot. be eonsidered,

(tiirich had considered, and rightly rejected, the possibility of his

specimens representing tracks (1920a, p. 679; 1983, p, 141), He then

compared them briefly with Pennatula but rejected this as a lead to

386 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

their interpretation because they showed clearly an outer margin of

the leaf-shaped body. He interpreted them as meridional sectors of

melon-like bodies, and this led him to a comparison with the

Ctenophora.

Riehter (1955, p. 266) re-interpreted some of the structures of

Rangea and revised some of Giirich’s descriptions. Tt is his eon-

elusion (p. 285) that these fossils are thin membranaceous leaves and

not remains of spherical bodies, and that therefore they are not

Ctenophora, He had abundant material of Pieridinium but uo new

specimens of Rangea aud his conelusion that both these fogsils

represented Gorgonaria Was based mainly on Pteridinium.

The study of the new material of Rangea places it clearly in the

vicinity of the Pennatulacea. This assignment explains (a) the

peiluncle, (>) the leat-shaped main body, (¢) the median field which

represents the median ‘‘dorsal track’? of the Pennatnlacea, (d) the

zig-zag junction of alternating branches which corresponds to the

“‘ventral track’, (e) the lateral branches which are comparable to

the ‘leaves’ of the Pennatulidae, and their secondary divisions which

reflect the placing of the anthocodia on them, and (f) the spicular

impressions in some of the fossils.

Some difficulties remain, but they are to be expected when an

attempt is made to place a very ancient fossil in the system of recent

forms, The diffienlty which led Giirich summarily to reject relation-

ships between Rangea and Pennatula still requires an explanation.

In Pennatula the polyps sit on lateral extensions of the rhachis which

are generally known as ‘‘leaves,’’ while in Rangea the lateral branches

appear to have been fused to form the single leaf-shaped main body

which shows a well marked onter edge in a namber of specimens.

One exception from this was recognized by Richter who deseribed the

distal ends of F. schnetderhohni forma turgida as freely projecting.

Some specimens of FR. arborea sugyest a certain measure of separation

and mobility of the lateral branches. Hven a solid single leaf with

a regular arrangement of polyps in lateral transverse rows would

not be in confliet with the basic structure of the Pennatulacea, though

this particular type of organization is not represented in the living

fauna, In Renilla which is leal-shaped with an undissected outline

the polyps are irregularly distributed and oceur on the ‘‘dorsal’’ side

only, while in Pennatula they sit on separate lateral leaves on the

‘ventral’? side. In Rangea the position of the polyps is not yet

known but they must have ocenrred jn transverse rows supported by

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 387

major spicular selerites as in Pennatwa, on a leaf-shaped expansion

of the rhachis similar to that of Renilla.

The assignment of Rangea to the Pennatulacea supports the view

that the different characters of some specimens are due to different

types of preservation, though a later separation of additional species

within the genus is not excluded. The preservation of the forms with

“snicnlar’’? structure seems to have occurred after some maceration

of the fleshy body had exposed the spicules which in living specimens

are embedded in the flesh. Jt is further suggested that the ventral

aspect af Rangea is represented by the forms with a median zig-zag

groove (pl, xlvi, fig. 1) where the lateral branches, comparable to the

‘eaves’! in living Pennatulidae arise in close proximity to the middle

portion of the rhachis, leaving hetween them a groove (‘‘ventral

track’) instead of a median field (‘‘dorsal track’), In other

specimens the ventral and dorsal aspects are superimposed,

The relationship of Pileridinmm and Eangea suggests that

Pteridiniwm also belongs to the Pennatulacea rather than the

Gorgonacea. This seems more satisfactory but a re-interpretation of

Pteridinium will be possible only after re-examinatiou of the South

African material,

Rangea? sp.

Plate xlvi, fig. 2

A very striking but unique specimen is here tentatively assigned

to the genus Rangea. Tt is 70-75 mm. wide, with partially well marked

lateral margins, but its distal and proximal portions are broken off.

The fragment is 16 em, long. It shows a median zig-zag line from

which branches arise at angles of only 30-40", These branches are

separated by distinct sub-parallel furrows which are 16-20 mm,

distant from each other. There are also secondary fnrrows abant

5 mm. apart, diverging from the primary furrows at right angles and

almost but not quite crossing from one to the next, A relationship

with Rangea is suggested by its similarity with R. arborea in the

presence of primary and secondary furrows on a leaf-shaped hody

and with its suggested ventral aspect in the development of a median

zig-zag line, Differences are seen in the strong, widely spaced

primary and secondary furrows and in the sharply defined straight

outer margin. The secondary furrows do not seem to be confined to

the proximal margins of the lateral branches tf these are taken to

diverge distally as in A. arborea. In the absence of the pedunele

388 RECORDS OF THE 38.A. MUSEUM

the orientation of this unique fragment is still uncertain and the

discovery of further specimens will have to, be awaited before it is

fully deseribed. (See Addenda, pp. 396-397.)

Spriggia Southcott

Madigania Sprigg, 1949, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 73, p. 93.

(Madigania nom. preocc., non Madigania Whitley 1945).

Madigania Harrington and Moore, 1956, Treatise Inv, Paleont,

p. 1154,

Spriggia Southeott, 1958, S, Aust. Naturalist, 32, p, 59,

This monotypic genus (type species Madigania annulata Sprige,

Holotype No, T 2031) differs from Cyclomedusa in the complete

absence of radial ornamentation at least from the inner portions of

the dises. More than 15 specimens are known at present. Harrington

and Moore (1956) listed this fossil as ‘‘medusae incertae sedis’’,

Spriggina Glaessner

Spriggina Glaessner, 1958, Trans. Roy, Soe. §. Aust., 81, p, 158.

Spriggina, Glaessner, 1959, Geol. Rundschan, 47.

Since this fossil was first described, four additional specimens

were found which do not contribute anything new to the knowledge

of its characters, This is at present one of the rarest of the

identifiable fossils from Ediacara. All specimens clearly belong to

the type spevies, S. floundersi Glaessner (Holotype No. P 12771,

pl. xlvii, fig. 1), One of the additional specimens is 24 mm. long and

about 9 mm. wide, apparently complete with about 23 segments. The

other (pl. xlvii, fig. 3) is 37 mm. long and about 11 mm. wide,

incomplete, with about 29 sezments preserved and the tail end broken

off, The third specimen is 15 mm. long and 5.6 mm. wide. The fourth

is very small and indistinct.

Tateana Sprigg

Tateana Sprigg, 1949, Trans. Roy. Soe, 8. Aust., 73, p. 86.

Ediacaria (part) Harrington and Moore, 1956, Treatise Inv. Paleont.,

p. F74.

As stated above, this genus which was based on the type species

T. inflata Sprigg (Holotype No. 2017, hypotype No. 2018) is not

considered distinguishable from C'yclomedusa, It may be specifically

identical with C. radiata.

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 389

Tribrachidium gen, nov.

Type species; 7, heraldicum sp. nov.

Characters as described for the type species.

Tribrachidium heraldicum sp. nov.

Plate xlvii, figs. 7, 8

Holotype No. P 12898,

Material: 238 specimens.

Desoription: All specimens are preserved as sub-cirenlar impres-

sions up to 26 mm, in diameter, with a sharply impressed outer rim

and a distinetly seulptured surface. This seulpture consists of three

hooked ridges of similar size and shape, radiating from the centre,

and ending along the periphery in a fringe of tentacular projections.

No such type of organisation has ever been observed in any known

organism, and uo specific descriptive terminology is available for it.

Until more is known about this new organism, only general descriptive

terms will be used, and they are not intended to carry any implica-

tions of homology. The basis of the following deseriptions is not the

fossil as it is observed but its artificially produced counterpart, all

known specimens of the fossil being considered as external moulds.

The reason for this interpretation is the observation that the marginal

projections in the fossil merge with the matrix which rises steeply

above them to the general level of the rock face, and that they end

against a deeper depression away from the periphery. Reversal of

the sculpture by casting shows the tentacular fringe arising from the

outer slopes of three smoothly convex arms and ending as three-

dimensional objects a little above the level of the surrounding rock.

This seems a more likely interpretation of the original organie

structure, and what follows is baged upon it.

The centre of the structure is very slightly depressed but not

sharply outlined, the inner ends of the three arms tapering slightly

towards it. The arms then radiate, for a distance of about 5 mm, in

the holotype, at equal angles. A convex, somewhat irregular area,

here termed a bulla, is seen in each of the three interspaces, but these

bullae do not rise to the level of the upper surface of the arms. The

arms then turn at right angles, all in the same plane and in the same

direction (dextrally in the artificial casts, sinistrally in all the natural

specimens). Their distal portions are convexly curved so as to

conform to the subcireular periphery of the structure, <A peripheral

tentacular fringe commences on the bend, extendimg to the tip of the

390 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

arm which is indistinet because of overlap by the beginning of the

fringe of the next arm. The tentacles number about 18 on each arm;

they extend from its flank to the periphery and their length decreases

gradually towards the tip of the arm. They are generally slightly

eurved in the same direction as the arm and are not perfectly

regularly arranged, some diverging more than others. They are not,

seen to branch or bifureate, The coarse grain of the matrix obscures

observation of their finer structure. In a few places suggestions of

similar tentaenlar projections can be seen also on the inner sides of

the arms, directed towards the bullae. These bullae lie within the

curvature of the arms but each seers to be more closely joined to

the radial portion of the arm next to that which ewrves around it.

If that is correet then the bullae arise from the arms in a direction

opposite to that of their hooked distal branches and about half-vay

between the eentre and the angle. The periphery is sharp, surmounted

by the blunt distal ends of the tentacles.

Remarks: This animal, thongh imperfectly known, is excluded

from all known major groups by its three tentaculate arms, A super-

ficial resemblance to certain echinoderms (Edrioasteroidea) which

comes fo mind must be discounted because of the complete absence of

skeletal plates, That the body was soft and fleshy but tough ean be

concluded from the slight distortion of the ontlines of the various

specimens and of the tentacles in the fringes; bout the arms nust have

been rigid lophophores as their position never varies, These fossils

are sufficiently numerous to make it clear that the characters deseribed

above are of taxonomic value and not aceidental features. The mouth

was not in the centre, its position remams unkown. The organism

could be considered an aberrant coclenterate, or else remotely related

to one of the other groups of tentaculate invertebrates; but tri-vadiate

symmetry of structures supporting tentacles which is obvious in the

present fossil is otherwise unknown,

A onmber of mndeserihed fossils from Ediacara correspond in

size and outline with this new form. They are flatly conical impres-

sions, with indistinct, broad, radial ridges and furrows. About §

of these impressions have been collected. The possibility of consider-

ing them as casts of the reverse side of Tribrachidinun should be kept

in mind thongh at present there is no evidence for such a supposition,

The specific name was chosen because of the striking similarity

of the pattern of this fossil to the well-known heraldic design of three

radially arranged arms or legs, as in the coat-of-arms of the Isle

of Man,

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 391

Unidentified Fossils

In addition to the fossils listed or deseribed in this catalogue

there is a relatively small number of others, One group of these

comprises bodily preserved animal remains which are represented by

insufficient numbers of specimens. About 6 of them are similar in

appearance and vaguely suggest alfinities to Siphonophora (pl, xlvii,

fiz. 9). Being irregular in shape and different in details, probably as

a result of compression in various directions, they cannot be satis-

factorily deseribed on the basis of the present material. Another

group consists of traces of life activities such as tracks, trails or

burrows. There are several types of casts which were probably

produced by secdiment-leeding worm-like organisms. They are

remarkably rare in relation to the large number of other fossils in

these beds. There are also problematical flat casts in the shape of

what appears to be a flat spiral, vaguely resembling a distorted and

fattened string of beads, There is no evidence of actual coiling and

no proof of their organie origin (see p. 395).

2. Conprtions or PRESERVATION

The study of the preservation of these remarkable fossils is

essential, firstly, for the full nnderstanding of their morphology and

taxonomic characters, and secondly, for the reconstrnetion of the

environment in which the animals lived and became entombed.

All fossils are seen as elevated or depressed areas on bedding

planes of the quartzite, According to Sprigg (1949, p. 215) they oceur

“always on the upper surface of these slabs’’, Mincham (1958,

p. 217) has observed that they ‘‘appear mostly, if not entirely, on the

lower surface of each stratum’’, Some confusion is likely to have

resulted from the faet that it is casier to find the fossils on loose

blocks which cover the hillsides below the outcrops, than on outerop-

ping rock slabs im sifu, and that on loose blocks they are more easily

seen on the rain-washed upturned than on the soil-covered lower

surfaces. Thus it is easy for the collector to gain the impression

conveyed by Sprigg, yet special studies in the field have shown that

the fossils are almost, though not entirely, confined to the lower

surfaces of the quartzite slabs. In fact, the favoured technique in

recent ecallecting consists in the wholesale npturning of slabs jutting

out of hillside outcrops in the hope that the rain (amonnting only to

a few inches a year) will wash away the soil and decomposed rock

with which the lower surfaces are almost invariably clogged, and so

expose the fossils.

392 RECORDS OF THE §.A, MUSEUM

A search was made for counterparts which should appear on the

opposing upper surfaces. As a rule, upper surfaces show nothing

at all. There is only one known exception, Dr, B. Daily has photo-

vraphed a medusa-like fossil appearing as usual as a convexity on

the lower surface of a large slab, together with its concave eounter-

part on the opposing upper surface of the bed below. He has also

collected a sequence of three adjoining layers of quartzite (No.

P 12900 A, B, C) from an onterop. The bottom of the top layer (A)

shows a Dickinsoma and medusae. The top of the middle layer (B)

contains no counterparts. I1s bottom shows a Tribrachidium. There

is again no counterpart of this on the opposing top of the lower layer

( Cc), while its bottom contains Cyclomedusa. Loose slabs eannot be

reliahly ortentated as they represent usually single or incomplete sets

of cross laminae. Yet for some specimens in the collection orientation

is suggested hy observed textural features and this makes it probable

that at least one specimen of Dickinsonia (Adelaide University coll,

No, T65-2024) is preserved on the strongly ripple-marked upper

surface, while tubular worm casts project from and along what

appears to be the lower surface. Three specimens collected by

1. Mineham and B, Flounders are very unuswal in appearance and

seem to have come from the same bed, They are covered with long,

narrow, leal-lke specimens of Rangea, One slab, No. P 12716, shows

on the opposite face an impression of Tribrachidium heraldicum. in

the usual preservation, This appears to be the lower surface, These

are the only specimens with fossils both on the mpper and on the lower

surface of a single slab, ‘he extreme rarity of fossils on upper

surfaces, and ol counterparts, can be explained with a high degree of

probahility hy the embedding of the organisms in thin layers and

films of clay and the subsequent casting of either the organie bodies

or their impressions by the overlying sand. The thin clay layers

which are responsible for the flagginess are destroyed by the weather-

ing which separates the flags or slahs from each other, Traces of very

thin clay lenses are seen on fresh vertical fractures of some quartzite

beds bnt the rock is sa strongly welded aronnd them by silicification

that if has not yet been possible to obtain fossils by splitting along

such lenses, Fossils can be found in situ by opening up flags in

outerop and removing the weathered material separating them, but

some weathering has so far proved essential far the discovery of

fossils. The same conditions were reported to exist in the lossiliferous

Kuibis quartzite in Southwest Africa (Richter 1955),

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 395

The distribution of fossils throughout the thickness and outcrop

area of the fogsiliferous strata seems to be essentially random, and

the more frequent species are found trequently associated on single

slabs in considerable numbers. Parallel orientation, presumably by

currents, has been found on one or two slabs containing elongate

types of Rangea. Most other forms which are rounded in outline, do

not show orientation or accumulation by transporting forees thongh

some of them occur in groups. There is no evidence of fossils or

bedding laminae being distorted by seavengers and nothmg points to

functional interrelations of the various types of organisms.

Sprigg bas observed and discussed the important fact that all

fossils represent soft-hodied organisms. This has been fully eon-

firmed by later collecting. In addition to the evidence of the medusae,

there is the distortion and folding over, before or during embedding,

af specimens of Parvancorima, Dickinsonia and Rangea, proving that

their tissues were soft. The onflines of the mednsae and of

Tribrachidiwm vary slightly and specimens of Spriggina show

sigmoidal eurvature. There is no evidence of hard parts other than

impressions of spicules in Rangea,

The orientation of the organisms relative to the bedding planes

(irvine burial still presents difficulties of interpretation as they are

practically all new so that their appearance and orientation in life

are onknown, All Parvancorina, Tribrachidium and Spriagina (in

(his instance judging from the head which must have been conver )

are preserved as impressions or “negatives”. Beltanella, all or most

Cyclomedusa, Spriggia, and ‘*Protalyella’’ ave preserved as flat or

high (Geltanella) convexities on the lower surfaces of the beds. Cross

sections through some medneoid fossils show evidence of consideralile

compaction and of even greater original convexity. This creates some

difficulty in the comparison with recent medusae which are mostly

found stranded in convex-ujprward position (Schafer 1941). Further

studies of these convex-downward genera and also of Psewdorhizos-

lomites whieh differs trom them in preservation are reqnired. ‘The

genera preserved as ‘negatives’? appear to be external moulds of

actual individuals embedded in clay partings which have vanished,

while Rangea seems to represent casts of impressions made by

individuals in different positions.

The preservation of Dickinsonia has yet to be stndied, but at

least some specimens are elearly impressions on the lower surfaces of

the beds and are therefore to he interpreted as external moulds.

394 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

3. CoNcLuSIONS

a. Composition of the fauna

The Ediacara fauna can no longer be considered as consisting

almost exclusively of medusa-like fossils, though these constitute the

majority of specimens collected. The following seven genera can be

recognized :—

Pseudorhizostomites Sprigg

Beltanella Sprigg

Ediacaria Sprigg

Protodipleurosoma Sprigg

Cyclomedusa Sprigg

?Protolyella Torrell

Spriggia Southeott

Much detailed and comparative work remains to be done on the

hundreds of medusoid specimens which are available. The latest

published taxonomic revision (Harrington and Moore, 1956) places

the first of these genera in the Scyphomedusae, the second and third

in the Trachymedusae (Trachylinida), the fourth in the Leptomedusae

(Calyptoblastina), and lists the representatives of the remaining three

as ‘‘Medusae incertae sedis’’. These assignments and the underlying

morphological interpretations are subject to further revision in the

light of the abundant new material.

The Phylum Coelenterata is represented in the fauna not only by

possible Seyphozoa and Hydrozoa but also possibly by Siphonophora

and by Anthozoa Octocorallia. The genera

Rangea Giirich and

Pteridiniwm Giirich

have been recognized and placed in the Order Pennatulacea. The first

of these is a common element of the fauna,

The Phylum Annelida is represented by

Spriggina Glaessner

which resembles the living Tomopteridae. This Phylum could also

include the common genus

Dickinsonia Sprige,

of which abundant material has yet to be examined. Life activities

of annelid (and possibly other) worms are represented by tracks and

burrows which, however, are not very common.

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 355

Two entirely new types of invertebrates complete the fauna as it

is known at present, They have been described as new genera

Parvancorina Glaessner and

Tribrachidiwm Glaessner,

each represented by a single new species.

bh, Keology

The fauna is marine and eonsists of pelagic and benthonic

elements, Sprige has diseussed the fossils which were known to him

with reference to living medusae and their pelagie mode of life.

Little ean be added to the disenssion of this part of the fauna at the

present stage of the investigations. We know now more abont. the

conditions of embedding and preservation of soft-bodied animals

(Schafer 1941). The preferred orientation of the medusa like fossils

in a convex-downward position is puzzling and requires explanation.

A ‘prominent benthonic element in the fauna are the sessile Penna-

tulacea, Their living representatives occur in upright position in

varying depths of water, with the peduncles buried in sandy sediment,

They lived probably not far from their place of burial. There is

evidence of worms burrowing in the sandy sediment, Spriggina could

have lived either on the sea floor or in the water above it. The mode

of life of Parvancorina and Tribrachidiwm is unknown. Representa-

tives of these three genera were trapped on muddy ground, probably

hy receding water. That the sedimentary environinent was a very

unstable one is proved by the ubiquitous eross-bedding and ripple

marking of the fossiiferons strata and by slump rolls and mud pellets,

The nature and direction of the currents remains to be established

by modern methods of analysis of cross-bedding, Sandstone casts of

mud surfaces with drying cracks have been found and drying cracks

on rippleamarked surfaces (*‘Manchuriophycus’’, see Hantzschel 1949)

also occur, These occurrences prove that the water was shallow

enough to make occasional emergence of newly deposited sediment

possible. Some of the soft-bodied animals could have been preserved

by desiccation, and in this sense Sprigg was justified in visualizing

the area as one of “fossil beaches’*, If the problematic markings

(pl. xlv, fig. 3) are in fact identical with the foam impressions

deseribed hy Hiintzschel ani Richter (1954) which they resemble more

than any known traces of organie aetivities, they would support the

available evidence of emergence and drying of bedding planes.

396 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ec. Biostratigraphic relations

Sprigg (1947, 1949) had considered the age of the Ediacara fauna

as Lower Cambrian, at a time when the place of the previously

diseovered Cambrian fossils in the general time-stratigraphy of that

System was unknown and when the Pound Quartzite was thought to

represent the Lower Cambrian, Daily (1956) has since placed the

overlying Archaeocyatha limestones in the lower part of the Lower

Cambrian. The occurrence of a rich new fauna. without any known

Lower Cambrian elements below these limestones is a valid reason

for placing the Pound Quartzite at the top of the Precambrian and

for considering its age as Late Proterozoic. Sedimentation was

regionally continuous from Precambrian to Cambrian and has

produced again and again through long spans of time similar rock

types, so that there is little difference between the Marinoan and the

Lower Cambrian dolomites, ar the quartzites in the lower part of the

Marinoan, the Potind and the Lower to Middle Cambrian. As in the

time stratigraphy of later geological periods, only biostratigraphic

observations can determine the position of the base of the Cambrian,

Below that horizon only absolute measurements of geological time ean

he used, with the exception of the possible time significance of the

Proterozoic ice ages—and of the Late Proterozoic fauna,

With the recognition of elements of the fauna of the Kuibis

quartzite of the Nama System in the Edtacara fauna, this stands no

longer alone and the way to its use in inter-regional correlation is

opened, The occurrence of Rangea in the Bdiacara fauna, together

with Pteridinium and medusoid fossils which are at. least similar to

Paramedusinm africanum Giirich is a strong argument in favour of

placing the fossiliferous part of the Nama in the Late Precambrian.

Medusoid fossils have been reported from the Late Proterozoic of

other parts of Australia and from the Algonkian Nankoweap Group

of the Grand Canyon of Arizona. Detailed comparisons of these

fossils and further collecting in Late Preeambrian fossiliferous strata

should be stimulated, because of not only their palaeozoological but

also their biostratigraphic interest, by the diseovery of a rich and

varied Late Proterozoic fauna in South Australia,

ADDENDA

While this paper was in press, several publications were received

to which reference should be made. Their titles have been incor-

porated in the list of references below hut no alterations have been

made in the lext above.

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 397

Ford (1958) described Precambrian fossils from Charnwood

Forest in Leicestershire, England, as Charwia masont Ford and

Charniadiscus concentricus Ford. The first name refers to frond-lke

hodies about 10-25 em, long and up to 4.5 em. wide, consisting of

oblique lobes which meet alternatingly at a sinuous median groove,

Each of these lobes is divided by secondary furrows, at right angles

to the lateral furrows, into about 13 secondary ‘‘segments’’. The

structure is almost identical with that deseribed here (p. 387, pl. xlvi,

fig. 2) as Rangea? sp. This fossil which is about twice as large as

the Charnian type specimen should now be known as Charnia sp.,

as it is closer in stracture to this genus than to Rangea. Specific

identification must await the discovery of other, more complete

specimens at Hidiarara.

The oceurrence of Charnia among the Late Precambrian Lossils

of South Australia raises further points concerning the nature of

these fossils, in addition to its obvions bio-stratigraphic interest.

The English fossils end proximally in *‘blunt stalks’* which are 2 em.

wide, This confirms the view that Charnia and Rangea represent

similar organisms; what has been clemonetrated concerning the

Pennatulacean affinities of Rangea should apply to Charnia, Ford

(1958, p. 214 f.) states that Chornia resembles Rangea schneiderhdhm

Giirich and rightly rejects the view that these fossils are Ctenophora

or Gorgonaria. His conclusion, however, is that ‘‘Charnia masont

may most rationally be interpreted as an algal frond’’, He suggests

that Charniodiscus concentricus Ford (‘‘a disc-like organism 5-30 em.

in diameter with a roogh-surfaeed central area surrounded by a

smooth flange which may or may not bear concentric corrugations’’)

may be the basal part of the same alga, ‘In one case only are frond

and disc apparently associated’’, “Il Charniadiscus were considered

alone, it could be compared favourably with one or the other of the

various forms of medusae stich as those in the Lower Cambrian of

Australia’. This is of extraordinary interest, as the possibility of

some medusoid fossils from [diaeara being the bases of the stalks

of Rangea had been considered bat put aside for lack of decisive

evidence. Stalk-like projections from the centres of medusoid fossils

haye been observed but none of them shows a Rangea or Charnia-

frond at the other end. A further search for such speciinens will be

made in the field. Ford's statement concerning the affinities of his

fossils coucludes: ‘*The only likely alternative is that they represent

a primitive eoelenterate of unknown affinities’. The new material

of Rangea suggests that this alternative view is preferable, and that

398 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

these Precambrian Coelenterates were closely related to the

Pennatulacea.

The stratigraphic range of this group seems to have been

extended to the Lower Palaeozoic by the discovery of a Pennatula-like

stalked frond about 12cm. long and less than 2 em. wide, which was

very briefly described by Tremblay (1941) from a coarse sandstone

lithologically resembling the Upper Cambrian Potsdam sandstone,

but found at a locality 90 miles down the St. Lawrence from Ottawa,

where the geological map of Canada _ shows only Ordovician.

Hantzschel (1958) has recently reviewed doubtful fossil Octocorallia

and prefers to consider most of them as tracks of unknown animals.

He admits, however, that Tremblay’s fossil, though not definitely

assignable, is comparable with Pennatulacea.

Finally, curious projections on lower surfaces of sandstone beds

of Early Palaeozoic age have been described by Howell and

Hutchinson (1958) from Washington and referred to Bergaueria

Prantl, originally described from the Ordovician. Prantl thought them

to be infillings of cavities occupied by Ceriantharia-like coelenterates

and Howell and Hutchinson conelude that their fossils may have held

the stalks of pennatulid-like animals,

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE XLII

Fig. 1. View of Mount James. Looking north across the outcrop of massive quartzite and

the underlying fossiliferous strata, from just below the base of the Cambrian, about one

mile north of the Ediacara fossil reserve. Photo, M.F.G.

Fig. 2. Outcrop of fossiliferous strata below top of Pound Quartzite, about one mile south

of Gap Creek. Photo. B.D.

Fig. 3. Outerop of fossiliferous strata below top of Pound Quartzite, near locality of Fig. 2.

Photo. M.F.G. Length of scale Qin,

PLATE XLIII

Figs. 1-4. Rangea arborea nov. sp. Fig. 1. Holotype. Large specimen on weathered surface.

Note distinct left lateral margin and secondary furrows mainly on right lateral

branches, No. P 12891. Fig. 2 Specimen with distinct lateral margins, median field

and lateral furrows. No. P 12890. Fig. 3 Specimen with zig-zag trace of median field,

with ‘‘spicular’’ structure (compare with Pl. XLV, Fig. 2). No. P 12892. Fig. 4.

Fragmentary specimen, with traces of secondary furrows on lower margins of lower left

lateral branches. No. P 12896,

Fig. 5. Rangea schneiderhéhni Giirich. Photograph of latex mould of holotype, forwarded

by Dr. W. Hantzschel, Geol. Staatsinstitut, Hamburg, Germany.

Scale in centimetres.

PLATE XLIV

Figs. 1-3. Rangea arborea nov. sp. Fig. 1. Specimen with long pedunele, on ripple-marked,

eroded surface. The main body with its median field, lateral branches and secondary

furrows is seen above a medusoid fossil, probably Protolyella? mawsoni (Sprigg). No.

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 399

P 12888. Fig. 8. Specimen showing ‘‘spicular’! structure of median field, and lateral

margins, partly folded over on left, Natursl size. No, T 94-2015. Fig, 3. Specimen

showing ‘‘spicular’’ structure of median field and lateral branches. x0.9. No, T

93-2016. Photographs 2 and 3 by Mr. K. P. Phillips.

PLATE XLV

Figs, 1-2, Rangéa arborea nov, sp, Fig, 1. Several individuals, partially overlapping, show-

ing ‘‘dorsal’’ and ‘‘ ventral’? aspects, preserved on upper surface of bed. No. P 12716,

Fig. 2. Fragmentary eppetmnen (upper right), preservation intermediate between Pl,

XLITI, figs. 2 and 8. Below are two unidentified medusvid fossils, No. P, 12895-

Fig. 3. Unidentified casts. No, P 12893,

PLATE XLVI

Fig, 1. Rangea arborea nov, sp. ‘Ventral’? aspect, Compare with Fl, XLIII fig. 3, 4/3

natural size (length of seale 1 em.), No, P 12894.

Vig. 2. Rangea? xp. Specimen with straight lateral margins and median zig-zag proove,

Natural size, No, P 12897,

Figs, 3-4, Pteridimium sp, Two specimens from one slab, poorly preserved. Natural size.

No. P 12744.

PLATE XLVIT

Figs. 1-4 Spriggina flowndersi Glaessner. Fig. 1. Holotype, 5/4 natural size. No. P 12771.

Fig. 2. Paratype, 5/4 natural vize, No, P 12772, Pig. 3, Speeimen No, P 12809, 4/3

natural size. Fig. 4. Median portion of specimen No, 12772 enlarged to show acicular

setae, attached to parupodia, x24,

Figs, 5-6 Parvancorina minchamt Glaessner, Two specimens showing oblique traces of

possible nppendages on the Intoral areas. The apparent ‘‘tail’’ of fig. 6 appears to be

due to fortuitous grooving of the bedding plane. Fig 5, x12, No. P 12001, Fig. 6

natural size, No, P 12887,

Figs. 7-8. Tribrachidium heraldicwm noy. gen., nov. sp. Fig. 7, Holotype, natural size, No.

P 12898. Fig. & Paratype, natural size, No, P 12889,

Fig. me Problematic fossil, possibly belonging to the Siphonophora, 4/3 natural size, No.

12734.

Specimens represented by figs. 1-8 are preserved as concave impressions but lighting

chosen for clarity may give the appearance of reversed sculpture,

Photographs of figs. 4-7 and 9 by Mr, B, Tlounders,

REFERENCES

Bayer, F, M., 1955: Octocorallia. In: Moore, R. C. (ed.), Treatise

on Invertebrate Paleontology, Part F, pp. F166-F231.

Broadhurst, E., 1947; Ediacara silver-lead field. South Aust. Dept.

Mines, Mining Rev., No. 84, pp. 87-105.

1953: The Wdiacara silver-lead field. Geology of Australian

Ore Deposits, Fifth Empire Min. Met, Congress Proc.,

vol, 1, pp. 524-527.

Caster, K. E., 1957: Problematiea. Geol. Soc. Amer. Mem. 67, pp.

1025-1032.

Daily, B., 1956; The Cambrian in South Australia. 20th Int. Geol.

Congress, El Sistemo Cambrico ete,, Sympos, pt. 2, pp.

91-147.

400 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ford, T. D., 1958: Pre-Cambrian fossils from Charnwood Forest.

Proc. Yorkshire Geol. Soc., vol. 31, pp. 211-217, 3 figs.

Glaessner, M, F., 1958: New fossils from the base of the Cambrian

in South Australia (Preliminary Account). Trans. Roy.

Soc, 8, Aust., vol. 81, pp, 185-188, pl. 1.

1959: The oldest fossil faunas of South Australia. Geol.

Rundschau, vol. 47, pp. 522-531.

Girich, G., 1930a: Die bislang iltesten Spuren von Organismen in

Siidafrika, C.R. 15th Int, Geol. Congress, vol. 2, pp.

670-680, 5 figs.

1980b: Uber den Kuibis Quarzit in Siidwestafrika.

Zeitschr, deutsch. Geol. Ges., vol. 82, p. 637.

1933: Die Kuibis-Fossilien der Nama Formation von

Siidwestafrika. Palaeont. Zeitschr., vol. 15, pp. 157-154,

Hiantzschel, W., 1949: Zur Deutung von Manchuriophycus Endo und

aihnlichen Problematika. Mitt. geol. Staatsinst. Hamburg,

H. 19, pp. 77-84.

1958: Oktokoralle oder Lebensspur? Mitt. Geol. Staatsinst.

Hamburg, EH. 27, pp. 77-87.

Harrington, H. J. and Moore, R. C., 1955: Kansas Pennsylvanian

and other jellyfishes. Kansas Geol. Survey Bull, 114,

pt. 5, pp. 153-163, pl. 1-2.

1956: in Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology, Part F,

Coelenterata.

Howell, B. F. and Hutchinson, R. M., 1958: New Lower Paleozoic

Coelenterate from Washington. Bull. Wagner Free Inst,

Sci., vol. 33, No. 2, pp. 13-15, 2 pls.

Mincham, H., 1958: The oldest fossils found in South Australia.

Education Gazette, S. Aust., vol. 74, pp. 216-219, figs.

Richter, R., 1954: Marken von Schaumblasen als Kennmal des

Anttauch-Bereichs im Hunsriickschiefer-Meer. Senckenb.

Leth,, vol. 35, pp. 101-106.

1955; Die altesten Fossilien Siid-Afrikas. Senckenb. Leth.,

vol. 86, pp. 248-289.

Schifer, W., 1941: Fossilisations-Bedingungen von Quallen und

Laichen. Senckenbergiana, vol. 23, pp. 189-216.

GLAESSNER AND DAILY—EDIACARA FOSSIL RESERVE 401

Segnit, R. W., 1939: The Pre-Cambrian-Cambrian Succession. Geol.

Survey South Aust, Bull. No. 18, pt. ITI, Geology of the

Ediacara Mining Field, pp. 57-63, figs. 22-23.

Southeott, R. V., 1958: South Australian jellyfish, 8S. Aust.

Naturalist, vol. 32, pp. 53-61, figs.

Sprigg, R. C., 1947: Early Cambrian (?) jellyfishes from the Flinders

Ranges, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., vol.

71, pp. 212-224, pls. 5-8.

1949: Early Cambrian ‘‘Jellyfishes’’ of Ediacara, South

Australia, and Mount John, Kimberley District, Western

Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., vol. 73, pp. 72-99,

pls. 9-21.

Tremblay, P., 1941: Morphologie externe d’un fossile nouveau.

Le Naturaliste Canad., vol. 68, p. 272, 1 pl.

Wells, J. W., and Hill, D., 1956: Ctenophora. Im: Moore, R. C.

(ed.), Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology, Part F,

p. F478.

Rec. S.A. Mussum Vou. XIV, Prare NUII

Reo. SoA. Meseem Von. NTT, Puars XLUTL

Rec, ScA, Mirseem Vou, XU, Puare XLV

Von. XIU, Puars NUVI

Musrum

Reo. S.A,

V LVI

va)

Vou, NIL, Phar

Rec. SoA, Mouskum

RECORDS

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Vol. XIII, No. 4

Published by The Museum Board, and edited by the Museum Director

Adelaide, 30th July, 1960

Issvep 19rn Aucust, 1960

Printed in Australia by W. L. HAWES, Government Printer, Adelaide

Registered in Australia for transmission by post as a periodical

A REVISION OF THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS HAHN

(HETEROPTERA: COREIDAE: RHOPALINAE)

FROM THE INDO-PACIFIC AND AUSTRALIAN REGIONS

BY GORDON F’. GROSS, CURATOR OF INSECTS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The species of the genus Leptocoris Hahn 1831 (= Serinetha auctt.) for many years have been

difficult to separate in the Indo-Pacific region.

My first introduction to this problem was an attempt to identify the Australian specimens of the

genus in the various Australian Museum collections. Most of the medium sized species were

labelled lurida (Dallas), the larger abdominalis (Fabr.) and a small unnamed species from Central

Australia was evidently vulgaris Bergroth. In an effort to find more satisfactory taxonomic

characters I dissected out the male and female genital capsules of a series of specimens and it was

soon evident that there were only three very distinctive species involved. The medium sized group

belonged to two species and it was possible to identify one sction of these with the name mitellata

Bergroth because of the presence in most (but not all) of a distinctive red spot on the hemelytra; this

is mentioned in Bergroth’s description. The remaining medium sized specimens belonged to the

same species as the small vulgaris whilst the largest specimens represented another species.

A REVISION OF THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS HAHN (HETEROP-

TERA: COREIDAE: RHOPALINAE) FROM THE INDO-PACIFIC

AND AUSTRALIAN REGIONS

By GORDON F. GROSS, Curator or Lysxots, Soura AusTRALIAN

Museum, ADELAIDE

Plate xlviii and text fig, 14

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I am indebted to the following individuals and Institutions for

loan of specimens, comparison of types and all the other courtesies

and kindnesses without which such a revision as is presented here

would be impossible:—Dr. W. E. China and Mr. R. J. mg and

the Trustees of the British Museum (Natural History); Dr. H. C.

Blote and the Rijksmuseum van Natuurlijke Historie, b sides Dr,

A, J. Nicholson and the C.S.1.R.0., Division of Entomology, Canberra;

Dr. J. W. Evans, the late Mr. A. Musgrave and the Trustees of the

Australian Museum, Sydney; Mr. C. W. Brazenor, Mr. A. N. Burns

and the Trustees of the National Museum, Melbourne; Dr. W. D. L.

Ride and the Trustees of the Western Australian Museum, Perth;

Dr. J, L. Gressitt, Bernice P. Bishop Museum, Honolulu, and other

Institutions providing material for the Insects of Micronesia project;

Dr. T, EB. Woodward and the Department of Entomology, University

of Queensland, Brisbane; Dr. Hans Sachtleben and the Deutsches

Entomologisches Institut, Berlin-Friedrichshagen (for the loan of

Breddin'’s type of Serinelha spectabilis); Dr. R. Malaise and the

Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet, Entomologiska Aydelningen, Stockholm

(for the loan of Stal’s type of Serinetha corniculata); Mr. O. L.

Cartwright and the Trustees of the United States National Museum;

Dr, W. Hackman, Helsinki; Dr, J. OQ. Hiising and the Zoologisches

Institut, Martin Luther Universitat, Halle-Wittenberg; Dr. S. L. Tuxen

and Dr. Anker Nielsen, Universitets Zoologiske Museum, Copenhagen;

Dr, T, Jaezewski and the Institute of Zoology, Polish Academy of

Sciences, Warsaw (for the loan of Dohrn’s type of Serinetha dallas) ;

and Mr. B, A. O’Connor and the Department of Agriculture, Suva,

Fiji Islands.

404 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ABBREVIATIONS

The following abbreviations have been used for Institutions in

which the material used in this revision is lodged, A.M., Australian

Museum, Sydney; B.M., British Museum (Natural History) ; B.P.B.M.,

Bernice P. Bishop Museum, Honolulu; C.N.H.M., Chicago Natural

History Museum, Chicago; C.S.LR.0., Commonwealth Scientific and

Industrial Research Organization, Canberra; K.U., Kyushu University,

Fukuoka; N.M., National Museum, Melbourne; R.M., Rijksmuseum,

Leiden; S.A.M., South Australian Museum, Adelaide; U.Q., Entomology

Department, University of Queensland, Brisbane; U.S.N.M., United

States National Museum, Washington; W.A.M., Western Australian

Museum, Perth; and Zool. Inst. Halle, Zoologisches Institut, Halle-

Wittenberg.

INTRODUCTION

The species of the genus Leptocoris Halin 1881 (= Sermetha

auctt.) for many years have been difficult to separate in the Indo-

Pacific region.

My first introduction to this problem was an attempt to identify

the Australian specimens of the genus in the yarious Australian

Museum collections. Most of the medium sized species were labelled

lurida (Dallas), the larger abdommalis (Fabr.) and a, small unnamed

species from Central Australia was evidently vulgaris Bergroth. In an

effort to find more satisfactory taxonomic characters I dissected out the

male and female genital capsules of a series of specimens and it was

soon evident that there were only three very distinctive species

involved, The medium sized group belonged to two species and it was

possible to identify one seetion of these with the name mitellata

Bergroth because of the presence in most (but not all) of a distinctive

red spot on the hemelytra; this is mentioned in Bergroth’s descrip-

tion. The remaining medium sized specimens belonged fo the same

species as the small vulgaris whilst the largest specimens represented

another species,

The search for the eorreet names of these latter two species

involved examination of specimens from many collections ranging

over the whole of the Indo-Pacifie region, while even some African

and the two American species were examined for possible synonymy,

This survey revealed that the male genitalia belonged to only seven

very distinct types and that using the male genitalia as a basis of

classification a variety of forms quite different in general appearance

belonged to the same species, whereas in other cases specimens of

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 405

almost identical appearance in colour and general shape belonged to

different species. The female genitalia were not quite so distinctive in

many cases, but in the several species (abdominalis and rufomarginata)

where a number of varied individuals came together in the range of

one species, whilst others very similar were referable to the other on

the basis of the male gentitalia, the female genitalia proved to be very

different from each other and gave the same result,

The number of male genital types seen has now been extended to

thirteen (following the examination of some unique types) and it

appears that each one of these reprsents a distinet species. The names

applied at various times to the Indo-Pacifie species of Leptocoris

number thirty-one. The types of five of these can no longer be traced

(tagalica Burmeister, rufus Hahn, mitellata and vulgaris Bergroth,

taprobanensis Dallas, and taitensis Guérin). One of the thirteen

species uppears to be new.

SYSTEMATIC

Genus Leptocoris Hahn 1831

Leptocoris Hahn 1831: Wanz. Ins., 1: 200. Burmeister, 1885: Handb.

der Hnt, 2; 305. Stél, 1870: Kongl. svensk, Vetens. Akad. Handl.,,

9 (1): 226, Distant, 1882: Biol. Centr. Amer. Heter., 1: 172,

Uhler, 1886; Check List, 13. Kirkaldy, 1905: Trans. ent. Soc,

Lond,, 350. 1908: Entom,, 41: 123. Distant, 1908: Entom,, 41+ 47.

Van Duzee, 1917; Cat, Hem. Nth. Mexico, 123.

Serimetha Spinola, 1840: Mssai sur les Hémipt., 247. 1850: Tavola

Sinot., 87. Dallas, 1852: List. Hemipt. Ins., 2: 459, Stal, 1862:

Stett. ent. Ztg.,, 28: 306. 1865: Hem, Afr., 2: 112, 1873: Kongl.

svensk. Vetens, Akads, Handl. 11 (2) +98, 99, Lethierry & Severin,

1894: Cat, gén. Hem, 2: 122. Distant, 1902; Faun. Brit, Ind.

Rhynch, 1: 418. Bergroth, 1913: Mém. Soe. ent. Belg., 22: 164.

Villiers, 1952: Hémipt. de l'Afrique noire, 108.

Lygaemorphus Blanchard, 1840: Hist. des Ins., Hémipt., 116,

Pyrrhates Westwood, 1842: Cat, Hem. Ins. Coll. Hope, 2: 6,

Tynotoma Amyot and Serville, 1843: Hémipt., 220.

Bowea Kirkaldy, 1910: Proc, Haw. Ent. Soe., 2: 123 (as a subgenus).

The species of this gers in this region belong to several groups

if the shape of the male genital capsule is taken as the sole guide.

In the first group the ventral part of the penultimate segment of

the capsule is produced beyond the furthest posterior extension of its

406 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

dorsal part but it is never produced very far or thrown into distinct

lobes or processes. To this group belong augur (Fabr.) and minuscula

Bléte and also some African species (e.g. intermedia Dist.),

In coimbatorensis sp. noy. and corniculata (Stal) the ventral part

of the penultimate segment is not very much more produced than in

the augur group, but is thrown into four short or medium sized lobes.

To this group also belong the two American species trivittatus (Say)

and rubrolineata Barber (both of these seem to have almost identical

male genitalia and may be only sub-specifically distinct) and some

African species (e.g. fulcratus Germ.)

In the Australian mitellata Bergroth is seen the first development

of the general Indonesian and Pacific region type of male capsule in

which the male penultimate segment is produced markedly posteriorad

by being thrown into two prominent lateral lobes (parandria) and

medially into a slender laminate (in the vertical plane) or triangular

(in the horizontal plane) process which extends posteriorad up between

the claspers. In mitellata these parandria are vaguely triangular in

cross section and somewhat bifid at apex.

In vicina (Dallas), subrufescens (Kirby), cozalis (Kirby), and

abdominalis (Fabr.) the parandria are circular in cross section and

nearly as long as the claspers.

In rufomarginata (Fabr.) tagalica Burmeister, isolata (Distant)

and marquesensis Cheesman the parandria are flattened or even shal-

lowly concave on the upper and inner face and rounded below and are

therefore vaguely semicircular in cross section. This is the only type

to be found in the astern Pacific.

The males can be separated by the following key. The female

genitalia in several cases are not so distinctive and it has not always

been possible to key right down to species.

Key to Indo-Pacific species of Leptocoris—Males :—

1. Male genital capsule with ventral

part of penultimate segment

(pygophore) produced posterior-

iad to about the level of, or just

surpassing anal segment. Apex

of penultimate abdominal segment

truncate or sinuate but never pro-

duced into distinct lobes .. .. .. 2

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS

Male genital capsule with ventral

part of penultimate segment sur-

passing level of anal segment, and

its apex thrown into two cylindri-

cal or flattish lobes or four short

lobes .. .. ..

2. Apical margin of penultimate. seg-

ment of genital capsule almost

truncate. Clasper with a pro-

minent outwardly and down-

wardly directed process on its

outer margin about halfway along

its length, and with a concave area

on its ventral surface near apex

Apical margin of penultimate seg-

ment of genital capsule sinuate.

Clasper without a ventero-lateral

tooth but fairly thin and only

slightly concave on the under sur-

faces .. .. ..

3. Ventral apical margin of pysophors

sinuate with only two vague lobes,

one either side of mid _ line.

Lateral margin widened at level

of clasper, produced inwards and

bearing a short cylindrical process

alongside the clasper. A _ pro-

minent tubercle on either side of

head in front of eye .

All lobes of apical margin of pygo-

phore whether two or four more

massive and conspicuous. With-

out a conspicuous tubercle on

either side in front of eye,

although there may be an oblique

keel running down from centre of

vertex to insertion of antennae ..

4, Apical margin of penultimate seg-

ment of genital capsule thrown

into four flattish lobes. Claspers

M@theh oe oo. ae al? LE

augur (Fabr.)

minuscula Blote

corniculata Stal

coimbatorensis, sp. Nov.

408

RECORDS ‘GF THE S.A.

Apical margin of penultimate seg-

ment of genital capsule thrown

into two long lobes, cylindrical,

flattened, or semicircular in cross

section. Claspers never com-

pletely flat, but always in some

section semicircular or semi-

circular with a coneave ventral

surface .......

. Lobes of Dannltirnaté secenditt of

genital capsule flattened circular

in cross section, slightly bifid at

tip. Claspers massive . ;

Lobes of penultimate segment of

genital capsule never bifid at tip.

Claspers usually slenderer

. Lobes of penultimate segment of

genital capsule circular in eross

section .. .. .. ;

Lobes of ‘penultimate seement of

genital capsule vaguely semi-

circular in cross section, with the

upper surface often shghtly con-

cave .. .,

. Male claspers in the Fors of a longi.

tudinal somewhat curved plate

basally, giving off distally a sinu-

ate elongate process .. ore

Male claspers broader, rounded

above, slightly concave below,

very nearly the same size for all

their length .

. Lateral lobes (parandnia): of pen-

ultimate segment of genital cap-

sule curved inwardly towards

apex .....

Parandria almost parallel.

. Parandria with a noticeable groove

running most of their length

above .. .

MUSEUM

mitellata Bergroth

“I

abdominalis (Fabr.)

coxalis Kirby

subrufescens (Kirby)

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 409

Parandria smooth dorsally, without

a prominent groove .......... vicina (Dallas)

10. Parandria of pygophora as long as

claspers, markedly concave on

upper and inward surface. Para-

meres fairly thin and not very

elaborate .. .. ... . tagalica Burmeister

Parandria not as long. as aor:

less concave above... .. .. .. ..

11. Parameres prominently hooked at

apex, thence becoming broad and

laminate before roughly circular

basal part. Produced ventral part

of pygophore only vaguely tri-

angular. Large species care 29

mm.) . ! rufomarginata (Fabr.)

Parameres hooked ats apex but nar-

rowing between hooked region and

base and not becoming laminate.

Produced plate of ventral part of

pogophore elongate triangular,

noticeably keeled. Smaller species

(under 283mm.) ..........,. 12

12. Parameres long with a prominent

dorsolateral tubercle near the

apex, ventral produced part of

pygophore elongate .. .. .. .. .. marquesensis Cheesman

Parameres not as long and without

a prominent tubercle, ventral pro-

duced part of pyg ‘gophore not so

elongate ..., .. ese eee... tsolata (Distant)

Key to Indo-Pacific species of Leptocoris—Females :—

i. Female genital capsule with upper

pair of visible valves not produced

as club like processes but repre-

sented by two thickish short plates

with a few long hairs at apex,

devoid of spines... .. .... .. .. a@abdominalis (Fabr.)

410

RECORDS OF THE S.A.

Female genital capsule with upper

pair of visible valves produced as

club like processes (in some views

of L. mitellata they may appear

at first as elongate laminae), in

all but one case (rufomarginata

(Fabr.) ) bearing spines .. .. ..

. Club like upper valves devoid of

spines, smallish and rounded with

a long pilosity ..

Club like upper valves generally

larger, always with prominent

APINES 6 24 fk sj tcraege ae es

. Upper valves very convex, largish,

a ? 5

spines fairly numerous, appar-

ently in a single row or virtually

so...

Upper valves, generally flattened on

the inner surface, not so in one

species, but spines always scat-

tered over the surface of the club,

numerous or few.. ..

. Upper valves elongate claviform,

often appearing laminate at first

view, lateral valves small and

fairly elongate .. .. ..

Upper valves more freely clavate,

lateral valves fairly massive .. ..

. Upper valves large, not noticeably

flattened on the inner surface,

fairly circular in cross section,

spines always numerous ..

Upper valves generally not so large,

noticeably flattened on the inner

side, outer and terminal parts

moderately convex giving a club

shaped impression... .. .. .. ..

MUSEUM

rufomargimata (Fabr.)

mitellata Bergroth

commbatorensis sp. nov.

tagalica (Burmeister)

zsolata (Distant)

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 411

6. Upper valves with club shaped por-

tion very small with only a few

spines .. ... subrufescens (Kirby)

Upper valves with ‘club altapsA} por-

tion moderately large and with a

moderate number of scattered

Sinnes...o c.f op ft ET

augur (Fabr.)

minuscula Blote

vicina (Dallas)

7. Lateral valves prominent as two

plates just beneath club shaped

upper valves .. .. .. vicina (Dallas)

Lateral valves as two nites hardly

visible beneath the club shaped

upper valves .. .. .. 1... .... augur (Fabr.)

minuscula Blote

Leptocoris augur (Fabricius) 1781

Fig. 1 A-C, 4 B

aul soi augur Fabricius, 1781: Spee. Ins., 2: 366. 1787: Mantissa Ins.,

: 301, Gmelin (in part) 1788: Syst. Nat., 1 (4): 2174, (Type in

Bank's Collection in British Museum checked by Mr. R. J. Izzard.)

Lygaeus augur Fabricius (in part), 1794: Entom. Syst., 4: 161. 1803:

Systema Rhyngot., 226.

Leptocoris augur Burmeister, 1835: Handbuch der Ent., 2: 305.

Serinetha augur Dallas, 1852: List Hem. Ins., 2: 460. Stal, 1868: Kongl.

Svensk. vet. Akad. Handl., 7 (11): 68. 1873: loc. cit., 11 (2): 99.

Distant, 1902: Fauna Brit. Ind. Rhynch., 1: 420. Maxwell-Lefroy,

1909: Indian Insect Life, 684. Hoffman, 1933: Lingnan Sci. J.,

12 (1): 22 (biology), figs.

Lygaeus chalcocephalus Fabricius, 1803: Systema Rhyngot., 226 which

has been placed i in the sy nonymy of this species 1s based on a com-

posite specimen from two species according to Stal 1868.

Serinetha dallasi Dohrn, 1860: Stett. ent. Ztg., 21: 42 (typ. vid,).

Distant, 1902: Faun. Brit. Ind. Rhynch. 1: 420. (New synonymy.)

Reddish or reddish ochraceous in the main; rarely pale cyclamen

coloured or yellow. Pilosity black.

412 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Antennae piceows, basal segment reddish brown at base, some-

times almost to apex, With a short but thickish black pilosity.

Head fairly broad, tylus somewhat longer than jugae. <A

tumescence behind and in front of eyes and apex of tylus with a

few short black hairs. Heud otherwise fairly glabrous, not punctate,

a short longitudinal impressed line beginning just behind base of

tylus and reaching back to about ocelli, Ocelli on small raised

tumeseences, a fraction nearer to base of eye than each other,

Rostrum brownish piceous, two basal segments the palest, reaching

about middle of third true abdominal segment,

Pronotum with lateral margins straight and not laminate, anterior

margin very slightly concave, posterior almost straight, slightly sinuate.

With two obliquely directed flattish blackish depressed impunctate areas

in the anterior third (calli) which extend from the mid line to the

lateral margin. In front of their outer edges a tumeseence in each

of anterior lateral angles of the pronotum connected ta the one on the

other side by a raised triangnlar impunetate region, the apex directed

posteriorad and the sides adjacent to the apex forming the anterior

margins of the smooth depressed areas. Remainder of pronotum

finely but densely punctate, hind margin depressed, A fairly prominent

keel running from anterior depressed areas back. Pronotum in general

pretty glabrous but lateral margins and anterior raised triangular

area with a fairly sparse black pilosity,

Scutellum somewhat elevated with disc flat and a slight tendency

for the lateral margins to be keeled. Depressed at apex and trans-

versely just behind base of pronotum, Impunetate and only slightly

pilose.

Corinm and elayus finely but densely punctate with an extremely

fine short and sparse pilosity, probably greyish. Membrane black

tending brownish black broadly along the hind margin. One specimen,

presumed to be from Ceylon, in the collection of the Institut zoologique

de Warszawa has the membrane greatly reduced and the hemelytra

just surpass the middle of the abdomen.

Legs (except basal part of trochanters and coxae which are

coneolorous with main hody) piceons black with short black hairs.

Male genitalia as figured. Hind ventral margin of penultimate

segment of capsule almost truncate, very pilose, extending only a little

behind apex of anal segment. Male clasper fairly elaborate with a

ventrally and exteriorly directed tooth on the outer ventral margin

and about hall way to apex and a eoneave area on ventral face near apex,

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 413

The clasper of minmuscula Bléte is on the contrary fairly simple and

without any prominent tooth.

Female genitalia as figured, they are not easy to distinguish from

certain other species (minuscula Bléte, vicina (Dallas) ) except in that

the clubs are not very convex and the inner margin is flat. These

have numerous brown spines and a few long whitish hairs. Long

whitish hairs also scattered elsewhere on the genital capsule.

Length: 11-16 mm. Width: 3.5-6 mm.

Distribution. In the British Museum and Rijksmuseum are

specimens from Formosa, Tonkin, Laos, South India and Java, The

species apparently is wide spread and abundant on the South East

Asian mainland aud penetrates into Indonesia.

Loe.

Formosa: Hans Santer, acquired 1908 1¢ Cat. No. 3 and 19

Cat. No. 4 and both also labelled No, 58. The female has an additional

pencil label with Takao 22 XI 07 (R.M.). Takao, No. 153, H. L.

Parker collection, 1¢ (U.S.N.M.).

Tonkin: Hanoi, Feb. 1917, R. V. de Salvaza,1é¢ and 2? ¢°. Guang

Yen ,7 V 1916, R. V. de Salvaza,1¢ and1? (B.M.).

Laos: Ventiane, 22 X 1919, 1¢ and 20 II] 1917 19, R. V. de

Salvaza. Na Peng, 25 X 1919, R. V. de Salvaza,1é. Haut Mekong,

Ban Quang, 24 TV 1918, R. V. de Salvaza, 1¢ (B.M.).

Siam: Nan, 20 XIT 1927, T. D, A, Cockerell, 19. Nonteburi,

9 TI 1923, Hugh Smith, 1° (U.S.N.M.),

North India: Punjab and United Provinces, VI-X (no year),

R. L. Wogbum Coll, 1¢ and 1¢. Caleutta, No. 58, no collector or

date, 1¢. Silhet, P. R. Uhler, 1¢ (U.S.N.M.).

Java: 12 simply labelled Java, Reinn and Cat, No, 2 (R.M.).

Indonesia: 14 labelled ‘‘Indes or INT H. de Saussure’’ and

another ‘‘Indes or’? with on back of label what looks like ‘*Puil, July”’

(U.S.N.M.).

Leptocoris minuscula Blote 1934

Fig. 1 D-F, 4 €

Leptocoris ninuscula Blote, 1934: Zool. Meded., 17: 267, fig.

Reddish or reddish ochraceous. Pilosity black.

Antennae blackish brown, with a short but fairly dense blackish

pilosity.

41d RECORDS OF THE S.A MUSEUM

Fig, 1: A-C Leptocoris augur (Fab.), A—male genital capsule from above, B—same from

below, C—same from left hand side. D-F Leptocoris minuscula Bliite, D—male genital

capsule from above, E—same from below, F—same from left hand side. G-H Leptocoris

corniculata, (Stal), G—male genital capsule from above, H—same from left hand side,

I-J Leptocoris coimbatorensis sp. noy., I—male genital capsule from above, J— same

from below,

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 415

Head blackish brown, fairly broad. Tylus only slightly longer

than jugae. A swollen tumescent area behind each eye (which in

some specimens is paler), and a slightly swollen one in front of eyes

and apex of tylus with a short pilosity. Head otherwise fairly smooth.

Hyes and ocelli red. Rostrum reddish black, reaching second abdominal

segment,

Pronotum shaped very much as in augur but the two anterior

smooth areas (calli) are not so oblique, depressed or flat. There is

no tumescence on the margin in front of smooth areas nor a raised

anterior region of the pronotum in front of them. The calli are

blackish. Hind two thirds of pronotum fairly closely and densely

punctate.

Scutellum blackish, the two specimens [ have seen do not give

much idea of its form as the pins have been driven through at this

point.

Hemelytra with cortum and clavus reddish or reddish ochraceous,

finely punctured, also wrinkled. Membrane brown, The male from

Koepang has only a clavus left on the left side and corium and clavus

on the right. The corium of this specimen is rounded at its apical

angles and together with its rather square pronotum leads me to

believe that this specimen was brachypterous. Brachyptery was up

until now unknown as far as I can tell in Leptocoris, but in both

this species and augur there is evidence of its occurrence,

Legs brownish black, coxae yellowish in their basal 2/3, Most

of mesosternum and mesopleura (except the postero-lateral areas),

a patch on the propleura above the coxal insertion and most of the

visible metapleura brownish black,

Male genitalia as figured. Ventral apical margin of penultimate

segment sinuate, vaguely three-lobed, very pilose. Claspers fairly

thin, only slightly concave on their ventral surface.

Female genitalia as figured, very similar to augur in general

appearance. The clubs are flat on their inner surface and not very

concave on their outer surface, With rather fewer large spines than

augur. Apparently closely related to augur.

Length; 9-12 mm,

Loe.

Timor: Macklot, Cat. No, 5. Paratype ? (R.M.). Koepang, 6-21

June 1929, I. M. Mackerras, one brachypterous 4 (C.8,I.R.0.), The

type series was from Macklot.

416 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dr. Bléte has kindly checked my genitalia drawings with his type

series and confirmed the status of this species.

Leptocoris corniculata (Stal) 1866

Fig. 1 G, H, 3 D

Serinetha corniculata Stal, 1866: Berl. ent. Ztg. 10: 381. 1873: Kongl.

svensk. Vetens.-Akad. Handl., 11 (2): 99. Distant, 1902: Faun.

Brit. Ind. Rhynch., 1: 420. (Z'yp. vid.)

Reddish ochraceous with a fine whitish or yellowish pilosity.

Distal segments of antennae brownish black, base of second segment

and whole of first segment reddish brown.

Head broad with a tumescence behind, and a short but prominent

tubercle in front, of each eye. Eyes concolorous with rest of head,

ocelli yellowish.

Depressed areas of pronotum vaguely oblique, fairly flat. Region

of pronotum in front of these calli raised but somewhat declivous

towards anterior margin. A strong keel runs back from between the

calli to the hind margin which is depressed and broadly curved. Lateral

margins behind calli curved laminate, the whole lateral margin gives the

impression of being strongly notched in the region of the calli as the

laminate lateral margins cease at this point and in front of the calli

the collar is produced laterally as a little lobe on each side. In the type

only the centre of the hind pronotal dise is flat, towards the lateral

margins it is inclined upwards and the lateral margins behind the

ealli are actually the highest parts of the pronotum. The pronotum

is coarsely punctate. Scutellum with sides vertical, upper surface flat.

Hemelytra very finely punctate with a pale vellowish pubescence,

membrane black.

Underside mostly yellowish ochraceous. Rostrum (except tip

which is black) and legs including coxae reddish. Dorsal margins of

abdominal segments and apical regions of seventh abdominal segment

also red. An area above coxae on both meso- and metapleuron blackish

and a faint one on propleuron tending fuscous. Fach ventral segment

laterally with a blackish area running from near dorsal margin almost

to venter and from anterior margin almost to hind margin, the hind

margin of each segment (except the seventh which is red) is therefore

yellowish ochraceous and this ochraceous band is wider ventrally than

dorsally.

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 417

The male genitalia of the unique type are as figured, The ventral

surface of the pygophore is produced forward and the apical margin

is sinuate with an obsolete lobe either side of the mid line, Laterally

the margin of the pygophore is flattened and directed inwards, towards

the clasper, alongside of which it gives off a thinnish but fairly long

process, this process is hard to see amongst the pilosity, and due also to

its proximity to the clasper. The eclaspers are laterally flattened and

very pilose, their dorsal margin is straight but the ventral one tends to

he convex, Anal tube elongate. The ventral and lateral margins

of the pygophore, the external faces and the ventral margins of the

claspers and the apical margin of the anal tube are very markedly

pilose and this pilosity tends to conceal the structure of the base of

the claspers and the margins of the pygophore,

The female genitalia are unknown.

Length: 14 mm,

Loe.

Western [ndia, Diiben,. Reg, No. 364; 58,

Stal’s Holotype Male (Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet, Stockholm),

Leptocoris coimbatorensis sp. nov.

Fig. 1 1, .J,4 D

Reddish or reddish ochraceous. Pilosity black or white.

Antennae castaneous or black, basal segment reddish, sometimes

with a little black on top. Segments with a very short pilosity.

Head moderately broad with a tumescence behind each eye and in

front of eyes an obliqne fold beginning near midline of head about as

far back as line joining centres of eyes and proceeding forwards, out-

wards and downwards to insertion of antennae, This fold with a

shallow suleus in front of its anterior margin. In one specimen the

head is suffused in front with black. Ocelli small but on obvious

tumesences, much nearer eyes than each other.

Rostrum almost reaching fifth abdominal segment, mainly brown,

last segment in the main almost black.

Pronotum very similar in shape to augur but with the lateral

margins rolled like a selvage and anterior depressed smooth areas

somewhat convex.

Seutellum with centre raised, flat, and somewhat infuscated; lateral

margins tending to be slightly raised above this as low keels, reddish.

418 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Corium and clavus as well as scutellum and hind part of pronotum

covered with a very fine pilosity, Corium and clavus very finely

punctate in some specimens with smallish yellow patches. Membrane

brownish black.

Underside with a fine white pilosity, an area of black on each of

the pleurae above the insertion of the coxae, largest on the metapleurae.

Legs brownish, coxae red.

Male genital capsule as figured. Very distinctive. Ventral apical

margin of penultimate segment of capsule very pilose, thrown into

four short lobes, extending well behind apex of anal segment, concave

on its upper surface beneath the claspers. Claspers tairly broad with

flattened faces and set at an angle to one another. Ventral face with

a very dense pilosity giving the clasper somewhat of the aspect of a

toothbrush. A blunt tooth along the external (and due to the

inclination) dorsal margin about two-thirds of the way to apex.

Female genital capsule as figured. Upper valvulae very club-

shaped, not elongate with at most two rows of spines running from near

base to past apex. About 12 spines all told on each valvula and of

course the usual long hairs. Lateral valvulae fairly massive and

conspicuous.

Length: 10-15 mm.

Loe.

South India: Bolampatti Valley, Coimbatore District 20 IV 37,

B.M.-C.M. Expdn. to South India TV-V 19387. Reg, No. B.M. 1947-469,

Holotype ¢, allotype ¢, paratype ¢ and two paratype ° @ in the

collection of the British Museum (Nat. Hist.).

Leptocoris mitellata Bergroth 1916

Fig. 2 A-C, 4 4

Plate XLVIIT

Leptocoris mitellatus Bergroth, 1916: Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria 29: 31.

Woodward, 1951: Trans. Roy. Soc. N.Z., 79 (2): 207.

Leptocoris (Serinetha) sp, Evans, 1928: Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 10 (2):

463,

Ranging in colour from a purplish red to brick red, Long pilosity

black, short pilosity whitish.

Antennae piceous with a moderately close black pilosity shorter

than width of segment,

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 419

Head broad with a tumescence behind eyes and an oblique ridge in

front of eyes running down to insertion of antennae very much like

coumbatorensts. Tylus and a quadrate patch on vertex with its apex

at base of tylus and running back to base of head with the ocelli placed

on its lateral margins black or brownish black. Sometimes also jugae

and tumescences behind eyes infuseated. Head with a few sparse black

hairs which are more numerous on the calli behind the eyes, the oblique

ridges in front of them and the tylus and jugae,

Rostrum black, reaching to base of second or third abdominal

segment.

Pronotum very finely punctate in the posterior two thirds, with

two oblique smooth anid slightly oblique blackish or purplish ealli in

the anterior third which are separated from the anterior margin by a

slightly raised triangular smooth area, This anterior smooth area and

the lateral margins with moderately dense stiff black hairs, Hind

margin of pronotum depressed and with a fine whitish pilosity: the

dise with a median keel beginning between the calli and evanescent

towards middle on base,

Scutellum raised, flat. on top, blackish or purplish, with a fine

whitish pilosity.

Corium and clayus very finely punctate, in the purplish red

specimens there is usually a small quadrate bright red spot at the

inner apical angle of the corium, also the humeral angles of the corium

are somewhat reddish and this extends a little along the lateral margin.

These two red areas are sometimes not obvious even in purplish red

specimens and especially so in brick red ones. Membrane black,

apically brownish.

Underside with black or purplish patches on anterior parts of

pleurae and sometimes lateral (and sometimes also ventral parts of

4, 5 and 6 ventral segments) of 2-6 segments blackish or purplish.

Male genital capsule as figured, pygophore thrown into two lateral

lobes (parandria) which are conspicuously notched at apex, almost

bifid. Claspers massive, elaborately constructed, with tips turned

downwards. Anal segment flattened dorsally. Ventral part of

penultimate seement blackish,

Female genital capsule as figured, upper valvulae produced into

two elongate clubs which are not as convex on the ventral surface as in

some species and are fiat on the inner posterior surfaces. These clubs

with for the most part a single row of spines running from about one

420 RECORDS OF THE 3.A. MUSEUM

third of their length from base to apex, changing direction at apex

and possibly becoming two rows. Lateral valvulae small but easily

distinguishable, Ventral valvnlae not distinct,

Bergroth’s type cannot be traced but there is no doubt on the

identity of the species.

Length: 11-16 mm.

Loe.

This is apparently the commonest of the Australian species and

is the only species in Southern Anstralia. It appears to occur almost

always south of the tropic of Capricorn and is apparently absent from

Tasmania, Tt is very abdundant in the drier centre of the continent.

Loe.

Western Australia: 77 miles east of Balladonia, June 1914—696,

12,12 (W.A.M.)

Northern and Arid South Australia; 407 miles west on Trans-

continental Railway 4 X 20 coll, Troughton & Wright, 2¢ 4, 29 2,

Reg. No. K45478 (A.M.) ; Ooldea, VIT 21 coll. J. A. Kershaw 12 (N.M.);

Ooldea, T. D, Campbell, 14 : Ooldea, no other data, 14: Barton, A. M.

Lea, 12, 12: 20 miles west of Kyehering Soak, Transcontinental

Railway S. to W.A., 11-08, M. Chandler 26 V 04, 2¢ 6, 12 (N.M,):

Kingoonya, Coll, R. Harvey, 1%; dead on salt, south-west gull of Lake

Gairdner, 18 ITL 50, coll, G. F. Gross & F, J. Mitchell, 18, Reg No.

B.S.1, 863: Mullaroo Peninsula, Lake Gairdner, 17-19 IIT 1950, G. F.

Gross 13,12 ; Bookaloo Siding, 19 VITI 1948, coll. G. F. Gross, 28 4,

12%: Whittata Sth. Andamooka Rgs., 19 August 1948, 22 2°, and 21

August 1948, coll G. F. Gross 344, 2292: Wongamoodla Ck,

Andamooka Res., 26 VITT 1948, coll, G. I, Gross, 2¢ 2,49 %, and many

nymphs: Birthday Well, Cariewerloo Stn., 9-12 [1 1950, coll. G. F.

Gross, 22 4, 29 2; near Frazers Hut, Cariewerloo Station, IIT 1950,

coll. G. F. Gross (all 8.A.M,); lron Baron, 4 TV 48, coll, D.S., 24 2 and

4¢ 92 (N.M.);: Whyalla, XT 1952, coll. Tans Mincham, 1? ; Hammond,

X 1950, 1. V. Mincham, 12, 1° (A.M.); Mern Merna, Flinders Rgs.,

15 IT 1949, coll, G, F. Gross, 22 4, feeding on Bullock Bush (/Hetero-

dendron olaeiformum) in large numbers, 8-15 IL 1949, coll. G. F. Gross,

542,622: Wilpena Pound, N. Mlinders Rgs., 27 X 1955, coll. E, T.

Giles, 12: Well 4 miles east of Oraparimna Stn., Flinders Regs.,

12 11 1956, at light, coll. G. F. Gross, 12, 19; Wirrealpa Stn., N.

Flinders Rgs., 28 X 1955, at light, coll, H, T, Giles, 19 : Italowie Gorge,

N. Flinders Rgs., 30 X 1950, coll. H. T. Giles, 22 2,29 2? : Owieandana,

N. Flinders Regs., coll. H. M. Wale & N, B. Tindale, 12 : Araona Spring

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 421

(now Aroona Reservoir) nr. Copley, 30 XI 1951, coll. G. F. Gross, 12 :

Mt, Painter, N. Flinders Rgs., coll, H. G. Stokes, 18,19; Flinders Rgs.,

26 V 47, no collector, 54 ¢, 2% ?; Lake Frome 30 VIII 1952, coll. K.

Peake Jones and Party, Reg. No. .S.1. 169 (S.A.M,); Mt. Lyndhurst,

20 miles east of Farina, coll, KE. Troughton, 3¢ 3, 399, Reg. Nos.

K42721 & K42731: Berri, damaging garden figs, 28 IIT 1939 (A.M.).

Between Renmark and Mildura, on ‘‘bullock bush"' (Heterodendron

alaeciformum) 10 V 1959, M. Kenny, 1 and a series of nymphs

(S.A.M.).

Southern and Temperate South Australia; Karkoo near Pt Lincoln,

coll, D. Kimber, 1°; Bundaleer Forest, Southern Flinders Ranges,

911927, 1¢ :**Kurlge’’ Blackwood, 850/t, at mercury vapor light, coll.

N. B. Tindale, 19 X 1955 and 70°F., 18, 1 XI 1957 and 75°F, 19,

14 XT 1957 and 74°F, 12, and 28 XI 1957 and 77°F, 1 2 : Mt. Gambier,

VIO, coll. J. W. Rose, 19 and 3 nymphs: Kangaroo Island, coll. 8. H.

Shandon, 1¢ (S.A.M.); Clarendon, 27 X 1946, coll, H, M. Cane, 1¢

(C.S.1.R.0.).

Northern Territory: Hermannsburg, 73 3, 392; Jay Creek,

VI 1938, coll. C. Barvett: Finke R., coll. J. W. Rose (S.A.M.).

Bergroth’s types were from near Glen Helen, Macdonnell Rg, and

Nlamurta, James Range.

Victoria: North Vietoria, XL 1942, coll, R, Pescott, La, 32 ¢

(A.M.); Murray River, eoll. J. E. Dixon, presented Jan, 1940, 24 ¢,

322: Mallee, Murray River, IV 1919, coll. J, BE. Dixon, presented

11940, 14,12: Murray River, coll. C. French, presented 15 XI 1911,

2° 2: Murrabit, 31 TIL 1947, No. AS, 14,12: Kerang, 21 IV 1946, coll.

R, Bb, T. 424,32 2, and 11 V 1946, 2¢ @, and 3O VI 1946, 82 2 and

24 XI 1946, 18; Mehnea, 25 [V 1955, coll, KH. M,, 102, 29 @: Mallee

District, coll. J, E. Dixon, presented 3 ILI 1914, 12; Lake Hattah, coll.

J, KH, Dixon, presented 11940, 384 4,82 293 Hattah, 111 1914, coll. J. B,

Dixon, 13; Lake Hattah, 2 XT 1915, coll. J, E, Dixon, 24 ¢, and 1918

22 2: Hattah, no other data, 22 ¢ : Onyen, 29 XT 1916, coll. J, E. Dixon,

364,222: Sea Lake, IV 1916, coll. D. Goudie, 12 ; Inglewood, no

other data, 29 9: Gypsum, N. W. Viet., XI 1926, coll. J. BE, Dixon,

presented I 1940, 24 4, 12: Kiata, X 1928 coll, F. EK. Wilson, 29 ¢

(N.M.); Yackarandah, coll, W. D. Davey, 1¢ (S.A.M.),

New South Wales; Florida North, Moree, 4 I 1938, coll. Miss G.

Grace, Reg. No. K66769, 24 ¢: Watercourse at Moree, XT 1933, coll.

A, Musgrave, 12 (A.M.); Moree, 1919, coll. W. W. Frogeatt 12 and1¢

and 1920 1%: Therribri, XI 1932, coll. Mackerras, 14, 39 2; Goan

Water Hole, 4 V 1950, coll. K. Key, 12: New England National Park.

422 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

19 ILI 1954, coll. E. F. Riek 13,492 (C.S.1.R.0.); Mullaley, XI 1957,

coll, F. E, Wilson, 12 (S.A.M.); Curlewis, 29 X 1933, coll. A. Musgrave

& T. Iredale 14 ; Coonamble, XI 1906, coll. W. W. Froggatt, 18,2¢¢:

Trangie, 2 V 1950, coll. P. C, Minter, 14, 12:9 miles on the Dandaloo

Road from Trangie, 25 VIII 1950, coll. L. Chinnick and B. Cameron,

284,12: Trangie, 23 XI 51, coll. B. Cameron, 12,32 2 (C.8.1.R.0,) ;

Bogan River, coll. J, W, Armstrong, Reg. No. K64293, 2¢ 4, 1%:

Tennamungarnio via Dubbo, 4 TX 1947, coll, Mrs. G. Bakewell, Be Q:

Dubbo, XI 1928, eoll, A. J. Barrett, Reg. No. K5864, 12 (A. M,):

Newcastle, 3 IV 1946, No. R, 3,19 (N. M.); Marsden, I 1940, coll. Mrs.

R. B. Sanderson, 12, 32 2 (C.8.1.R.0.); Lannigan’s Creek, Geelong

Caves District, near Yerranderie, 18 VII 1927, coll, T, G. Campbell,

Reg. No. 56574, 12 and 10 XI 1927, coll, A. Musgrave and T. G.

Campbell, Reg. No, K56908, 12: Savernake, 24 XI 1948, 14, 19:

Lookout Tank near Broken Hill, 6 TV 1942, coll, Chadwick, 13 (A,M,):

Red Gum, Deniliquin, 1926, 1¢ (C.S.1.8.0.).

Queensland ; Clermont XI 1929, coll. Dr. K. K, Spenee, Reg. No.

K62359, 12 (A.M.); Biloela, 5 XUL 1926, coll. E, Bollard, 1é (U.Q.);

Bidsvold, V 1929-TV 1930, coll, T. L. Baneroft, 12 (C.S.1.R. ‘0. ): Morven

District, TV 1941, coll. N. Geary, 23 8,19: Bunya Mts., 18 XIT 1937;

3000’, coll. N. Geary, 13, 12 and 22 [ 1938, 2000’, 1a : Cunnamulla,

X 1944, N. Geary, 19 (A.M.); Brisbane, 28 VIIL, 1911, coll, H, Hacker,

12: Beaudesert, 30 V 1942, coll. . W. Withbraham, 14,29 2; Plateau,

Killarney, 14 XI 1932, coll. H. Hacker, 12 : Killarney, 1, XT 1982, coll.

H, Hacker, 14 (U.Q.); Stanthorpe, no other data, 19 : Lawes, 13 III

1952, coll. G, Saunders, 1?, (S8.A.M,),

Australia: Unlocalized, but presumed from Queensland, Koebele,

no other data, ahdomen missing (U.S.N.M.).

New Zealand: A single Leptocoris specimen has been recorded

from New Zealand and is mentioned in Evans 1928. If the identification

and locality were correct it could well be this species, or perhaps

tagalica Burmeister which occurs alsu in Samoa.

Leptocoris vicina (Dallas) 1852

Fig. 2D, H, 4 8

Serinetha vicina Dallas, 1852: List. Hem. Ins., 2: 460. Distant, 1902;

Fauna Brit. Ind. Rhynch,, 1: 420 (exelide reference to conalis).

(Type in British Museum checked by Mr. R, J. Izzard.)

Astacops nigricornis Walker, 1872: Cat. Het. 5: 36. (Type in British

Museum check by Mr. R. J. Izzard.) New synonymy.

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 423

ew ;

— \

Fig. 2; A-C Leptocoris mitellata Bergroth, A—malo genital capsule from above, B—same

from below, C—same from left hand side. D-E Leptacoris vicina (Dallas), D—male

genital capsule from above, E—same from below, PvG Loptocorts subrufescens (Kirby),

F—male genital eapsule from above, G—same from |)clow. H-J Leptocoris coxalis

(Kirby) (drawn from the type male in the British Museum by Mr. R. J. Izzard and not

to same seale us remainder), I[—malu genital capsule from above, 1—same from below,

J—paramere in dorso-lateral view.

424 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Sermetha longirostris Dallas, 1852; List, Hem, Ins., 2: 461. (From the

sketch of the female genitalia supplied by Mr. Izzard this species

is probably a synonym of vicina.) New synonymy,

Leptocoris nigricornis Bléte, 1934: Zool. Meded., 17: 269.

Leptocoris carnivorus Usinger, 1946: B. P. Bishop Mus, Bull., 189;

25, fig. (Paratyp. vid.) New synonymy,

There is just a slight doubt that vicina is actually the final name

for this species. LL. victna was described from the Philippines as

was tagalica Burmeister. If the type of this latter species is ever

found it could possibly turn out to be this species, not the species which

I believe is tagalica, (See discussion under tagalica.)

Purplish or yellowish red. Long pilosity black, fine pubescence

greyish,

Antenna blaek or purplish red, with short stiff dense black hairs,

Head moderately broad with a tumescence behind the eyes and an

wblique ridge running down in front of the eyes like coimbatorensis.

Eyes a darker red than rest of head. Head with sparse stiff hairs more

concentrated on the tumescence behind the eyes and the tylus and

jugae.

Rostrum reaching {0 apex of second abdominal segment, black

or blackish brown.

Pronotum very similar in shape and structure to augur, but the

depressed anterior smooth areas (calli) are slightly convex, purplish,

Pronotum in some specimens infuscated posteriad,

Seutellum very similar in structure to augur, flat on top.

Corium and clavus very finely punctate with a fine greyish

pubescence, In some specimens the elavus and the inner half of the

eroium is infuseated. Membrane blackish brown,

Propleurae ahove coxae and most. of mesosternum, mesopleura,

metasternum, and metapleurae and the ventral part of all abdominal

segments I1-V generally blackish. Legs blackish brown,

Male genital capsule as figured, pygophore thrown into two lobes

(parandria) which are round in cross section and with a long yellow

pilosity. Claspers fairly simple, curved downwards at apex and

feebly concave on the underside in the terminal half. In the basal

half the under surface changes inelination by 45° and becomes broader

and less concave. Ventrally the pygophore is produced posterioriad

between the claspers as a narrow lamina (hypandrium?) with its broad

face in the perpendicular plane.

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 425

Female genital capsule as figured, not easily distinguished from

those of augur and minuscula on first sight. Upper valvulae produced

as two clublike processes which are flat on their inner surfaces and with

numerous fairly long scattered spines on their outer surfaces and a

few long hairs. Lateral valvulae visible as two plates under the upper

valvulae and with a few long hairs at their apex. Ventral valvulae

somewhat convex.

Length; 12-15 mm.

Loe.

Indonesia: Java: Semirang, coll, E, Jacobson, 12, Cat. No, 2:

Java, no other data, 1¢, Cat. No. 7 (R.M.), Coral Island, Djakarta Bay,

15 V 1929, coll. I. M. Mackerras, 1 ¢ (C,S.1.R.0.).

Soembawa: Coll. vy. Lansberge, no other data, 1¢, Cat. No, L

(R.M.).

Wetter: coll. C. Schidler, acquired 1898, 19, Cat. No. 2 (R.M.).

Philippines: Luzon; Mt, Banahao, coll. P. I. Baker, 1¢ (U.S.N.M.);

Mt. Banahao, 2000’ North Luzon, coll. G, Béttcher, 1%: Bataan

Province, coll. G. Bottcher, 1¢,1¢ (B.M.); Mt, Makiling, coll. Baker,

1¢,22 9%; Los Banos, coll, P. I. Baker, 18,19 (U,S.N.M.).

Mindanao: Port Banga, South Mindanao, coll. G, Bottcher, 12

(B.M.),

Micronesia: Marianas; Saipan: Afenia-Charanka, 4 VII 1939,

coll, Teiso Esaki, 12 (K.U.).

Rota: V1 1952, coll. Y. Kondo, 12, 3 nymphs (B.P.B.M.).

Guam: Cetti Bay, 28 V 1936, coll. R. L. Usinger, 14, 1? (Para-

types of L. carnivorus Usinger) (B.P.B.M.); Inarajan, 28 1X 1938, No.

1240, on Ficus sp. and Colubrina asiatica, coll, K, G, Oakley, 62 2,19.

No precise locality or date, No, 1187, coll, D, T, Fullaway, 12

(U.S.N.M.). Ritidian Point, 2 VI 1936, coll. Swezey, 1é (Paratype of

L. carnivorus Usinger); Ritidian Point, 29 V 1945, by beating

vegetation, coll. 1H. S. Dybas, lot 2082, 34 ¢,3¢9 ° (C.N.H.M.). Ritidian

Point, 30 V 1945, coll. G. E. Bohart & J. L, Gressitt, 13, 19: VI 1948,

coll. J. L. Gressitt, 42 ¢,69 2. Ditto, on beach, 6 VI 1945, coll, G, EK.

Bohart & J. L. Gressitt, 29 ¢. Ditto, 1 VIII 1945, coll. J, L, Gressitt,

14, Point Oea, VI 1945, coll. J. L, Gressitt & G. E, Bohart, 62 ¢,

3292. One mile 8.B. of Asan, 4 XT 1947 and 30 X 1949 altitude 600-800

feet, coll. H. S. Dybas, 22 2 (B.P.B.M_.),

Western Carolines: Palau Islands: Ngariungs Islet, Ngaiang]

(Kayangel) Atoll, 16 XIT 1952, No, 5622, coll. J, W. Beardsley, ex

426 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

fern,14,52 2. Same locality and date, coll. J. L. Gressitt,1¢. Koror

Island, limestone ridge 8. of Inlet, 22 IT 1948 coll. H. 8. Dybas, I¢.

Koror Island, [V 1954, coll. J. W. Beardsley, 12, Peleliu Island, Mt.

Amiangal, 23 XII 1952, coll. J. L. Gressitt, 2¢ ¢,59 2. Pelelin Island,

East Coast, 31 VII 1945, coll, H. 8. Dybas, one male with mutated

genital capsule (B.P.B.M.).

Pulo Anna Island: 13 LX 1952, coll. N. Krauss, 14,192, 1 nymph

(B.P.B.M.),

Yap Islands: Mt. Metade near Yaptown, 12 VII 1946. No. 1087,

coll. H, K. Townes, 12. Rumung Island, 19 VI 1957, coll. C. W,

Sabrosky, 3¢ 4 (B.P.B.M.).

Ulithi Atoll: Falalop Islet, 4 X 1952 and 1 X 1952, coll. N. L. H.

Krauss, 22 2 (B.P.B.M.).

Woleai Atoll: Falalis Islet, 20 [X 1952, eoll. N. H. L. Krauss,

2é¢24 (B.P.B.M.).

Leptocoris subrufescens (Kirby) 1888

Fig, 2 F, G,4G

Lygaeus subrufescens Kirby, 1888: Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond., 553, 1900:

Monogr. Christmas Island, 128, Plate 15, fig. 3. (Type in British

Museum checked by Mr, R. J. Izzard.)

Shining brown, with a pale brown pilosity, Antennae concolorons

with rest of body. Head not very broad, structure very similar to

vicina, Eyes and ocelli red. Rostrum reaching to about middle of

fourth abdominal segment.

Pronotum shaped very mueh as in the preceding species.

Punetation of the portion behind the smooth areas more obvious.

Seutellum also shaped as in vicina. Corium and clavus more

conspicnously punctured than in the other species. Membrane the

same brown colour as the rest of the body.

Beneath the body is a pale brownish yellow with perhaps some

darkenings on the pleurae above the coxae. Legs brown,

Male genital capsule as figured, very similar in outline and also

the shape of the claspers to the preceding but the prominent lateral

lobes (parandria) of the pygophore are conspicuously grooved on their

upper surfaces for a good part of their length,

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 427

Female genitalia as figured. The upper valvulae are produced as

clubshaped processes which are flat on their inner side. They are

however smaller than in vicina and with a lot fewer spines, apparently

not more than 10. The lateral valvulae are apparent as plates beneath

the upper valvulae with a few terminal hairs, Ventral valves fairly

convex,

Length: 11-14 mm.

Loc.

Christmas Island, Indian Ocean, 1 TV 1933, 18,19 (B.M.).

Leptocoris coxalis (Kirby) 1891

Fig. 2 H-J

Serinetha coxalis Kirby, 1891: Journ. Linn, Soc. Lond., Zool., 24: 93.

Serinetha vicina Distant (in part) 1902: Fauna Brit. Ind. Rhynch.,

1: 420.

This species is only represented by the unique male type in the

British Museum, figures of whose genitalia have been done for me by

Mr. Izzard and comprise fig. 2 H-J of this work.

The species is evidently distinct from vicina although it belongs

to the vicina group.

Kirby describes the species as ‘‘Red; antennae, except at extreme

base beneath, scutellum, membrane, legs except the coxae, pectus, and

ventral surface of abdomen except at the sides and extremity black.

Easily recognizable by the conspicuous red coxae on a_ black

background.”’

Length: 14 mm.

Loc.

Ceylon.

Leptocoris abdominalis (Fabricius) 1803

Fig. 3 A-C, 4 H

Lygaeus augur (in part) Fabricius, 1794: Ent. Syst., 4: 161, 88.

Lygaeus abdominalis Fabricius, 1803: Syst. Rhyng., 226. (Type

checked in Copenhagen by Dr. A. Nielsen against sketches of

genitalia. )

428 RECORDS OF THE SA. MUSEUM

Leptocoris abdominalis Burmeister, 1885: Handbuch der Ent., 2: 305.

Bléte 1984; Zool, Meded., 17: 266.

Lygacomorphus abdominalis Blanchard, 1840: Histoire nat, des

Insectes 3: 116.

Pyrrhotes abdominalis Westwood, 1842: Cat. Hem. Coll, Rev, Hope,

ete., 2: 26,

Serinetha abdominalis Dallas, 1892; List Hem, Ins., 2: 460, Stal 1868:

Kongl, svensk, Vetens.-Akad. Handl., 7 (11): 68, 1873; Loe. cit.

11 (2): 99, Tryon, 1892: Ann, Qld. Mus., 2: 22. Lethierry &

Severin, 1894: Cat. gén, Hém,, 2; 122, Distant, 1901: Ann. Mag,

nat. Hist. 7 (7); 428. 1902: Faun. Brit. Ind. Rhynch., 1: 419, fig.

?Leptocoris rufus Hahn, 1881: Wanz. los. 1: 201, f. 102. (The type

of this species cannot be located and its position here is only

conjectured, and traditional.)

Serinetha taprobanensis Dallas, 1852: List. Hem, Ins., 2; 461. (Type

presumed lost.) New synonymy,

Leptocoris bahram Kirkaldy, 1899, Bull, Liverpool Mus., 2: 46. (Type

in British Museum checked by Mr. R. J, Iazard.) New synonymy,

Leptocoris marginata Blote, 1934; Zool., 17: 267, fig. (Type checked

in Leiden against sketches of genitalia.) New synonymy.

Excepting the original references of Fabricius, and the references

to taprobanensis, bahram and marginata, practically all of the other

references probably refer also in part to the next species rufomarginata

(Fabr.), Most series I examined labelled either abdominalis or

rufomarginala were a mixture of both species.

Both are very variable species and abdominalis ean be separated

at the moment into at least three subspecies on colour and colour pattern

and the development of the keel on the dise of the pronotuin and also

on the convexity of the pronotal dise, These are :—

Leptocoris abdominalis taprobanensis (Dallas) 1852

Is the extreme western variant of the species, occurring on the

Islands of Ceylon and Socotra. Distant 1902 p. 419 also mentions the

“pale form taprobanensis Dall.—is not infrequent at Calentta,’’ The

general colour is a bright honey yellow, the eyes and ocelli are red and

the antennae, rostrum, all thoracic sterna and pleurae (except the dorsal

margins broadly of the pleurae, especially of the first and the hind

margin of the metaplenra narrowly, which are yellow) and all the

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 429

ventral abdominal segments (except for a broad stripe along their

dorsal margins and except the last and those of the genital capsule

which are yellow) and membrane black, Pronotal keel fine, This

subspecies is fairly broad in relation to its length, Although Dallas’

type cannot now be found m the British Museum, there is no doubt it

was this form he had for it is common in all eolleetions from Ceylon

which [ looked over.

Leptocoris abdominalis abdominalis (Fabr.) 1803

Is the central variant arid the type race of the species oecurring

in Indonesia and the Philippines. The general colour is a dark brick

red but the distribution of red and black is the same as for the previous

subspecies. The dise of the pronotum just behind the impressed

smooth area tends to be rather more couvex than in either of the

other two snbspeeies and in one specimen (paratype of margimata

Bléte) [have seen if is conspicuously so. The pronotal keel is almost

obsolete, and the snbspecies is fairly broad in relation to its length,

Leptocoris abdominalis blétei subsp. nov,

Is the eastern variant of the species and confined so far as L

know to New Guinea. The general colour is a honey yellow, the

head tending to be a little suffused with red or blackish brown. Eyes

and ocelli red. The distrihntton of yellow and black beneath is exactly

as for the subspecies taprobanensis aud the membrane is black with a

greyish tinge, but above the pronotam has a Jarge semicireular black

patch with its diameter ou the hind margin of pronotum and occupying

three-quarters of this hind margin. ‘This spot extends forward to at

least half way to apex of pronotum., The pronotal keel and impressed

smooth areas are also black and in one specimen most of the collar in

front of these, as is the scutellum, clavus and all the corium except for

a broad longitndinal stripe along the whole length of the outer margin

which is yellow. The pronotal keel is more distinct, possibly because

it is outlined with black in the region of the pronotum anterior to the

large black posterior spot. This subspecies is also conspicuously more

elongate in relation to its width than the other two subspecies.

The description of the species with allowances tor the subspecifie

Variations is as follows.

General colour dark brick red (subsp. abdominalis) or honey

yellow (subsp. taprobanensis and blotei), Pilosity on antennae black,

long pilosity on body greyish, short pilosity golden.

430 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Antennae black, with a fairly thick short pilosity, Head broad,

with two obliquely placed suleit running from jnst in front of insertion

of antennae to join in middle of vertex at about level of middle of eye

thence continuing to base of head as a single longitudinal sulcus, the

three sulei in the form of a y. Head dark brick red (subsp.

abdominalis), honey yellow (subsp. taprobanensis) or honey yellow

suffused with red or brown (subsp. bldter). Eyes and ocelli always red.

Rostrum black.

Pronotum with the two somewhat depressed narrow smooth areas

running from centre line to lateral margin and somewhat obliquely

placed, yellow or yellowish brown in the subspecies taprobanensis,

red in abdominalis and black or piceous in the subspecies blote:. The

narrow collar of the pronotum in front of these depressed smooth areas

very raised and more annulus shaped than in most other species. In

the subspecies blotei often suffused with black, Lateral margins of

pronotum behind the depressed smooth areas fairly rounded, not nearly

as straight as in the eight preceding species although in the subspecies

blotei they are not as rounded as in the other two subspecies. Hind

rmoaargin sinuate. Dise of hind portion of pronotum coarsely punctate

and often convex or tumescent near the centre in the subspecies

abdomimalis, more finely punctate in the other two, Hind part of

pronotum brick red in abdominalis golden yellow in taprobanensis and

golden yellow with a large semi-cireular black spot with its diameter

about three quarters of the hind margin and extending forward to at

least middle of the pronotum. Keel from where it emerges from this

large spot on the pronotum to where if terminates at the impressed

areas black in blétez.

Seutellum slightly raised flat on top, yellow in taprobanensis, brick

red in abdominalis and black in blotet, Trmpunctate smooth.

Corium and clayus very finely and fairly sparsely punctate, honey

yellow in taprobanensis, brick red in abdominalis and black, except

for an onter margin of the corium which is broadly yellow in blétet.

Membrane black, or with a greyish or metallic greenish tinge in the

ease of bléter.

Hind part of pronotum, seutellum and coriaceous part of hemelytra

covered by a fine golden pubescence.

Underside largely black or blackish brown, Underside of head,

dorsal margin of propleura broadly, and dorsal margin of meso-pleura

and upper half of posterior margin of metaplenra narrowly yellow in

taprobanensis and blotei, red or reddish brown in abdominalis. Genital

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 431

capsule, last visible ventral segment and a broad longitudinal streak

running along the dorsal parts of abdominal segments 1-5 yellow

suffused with sanguineous in laprobanensis, yellowish brown in blotet

and reddish brown in abdominalis.

Male genital capsule as figured. Penultimate segment thrown into

short lobes which are circular in cross section, convergent, and very

strongly pilose. Claspers as figured, in the form of a longitudinal

segment of a hollow cylinder basally, becoming a cylindrical and

somewhat sinuate process apically,

Female genital capsule as figured. Upper valves unlike all other

species are not in the form of clubs but are small plates beneath the

anal segment and with a few long terminal hairs. Lateral valves visible,

a similarly shaped set of plates below these again, and ventral valves

fairly convex.

Length: 14-21 mm.

Loe,

Ceylon (subsp. taprobanensis): 3 V 93, coll, Sir G. T. Smith,

292: Colombo, I 1915, coll, I. Me Eeh’n, 1¢ (S.A.M.); coll. Schaum,

no other data, 1¢ Cat, No. 46 (R.M.): no data, 1¢; no data except

Walkers Catalogue 52, 62,19 (B.M.), Peradeniya, X 1910, coll. R, L.

Woglum, 34 2, 32 2, Peradeniya, 12 X 1903, coll, W. F, Rosenberg,

2, Paradeniya, No. 59, no other data, 1° (U.S.N.M.).

Indonesia (subsp. abdominalis): Boloang Mengon don Modajag,

North Celebes, LX 1917, coll, W. Kaudern, 12, Cat. Nat. No. 2: Fort de

Kock, Sumatra, XI 1918, coll, Edw. Jacobson, 14, Cat. No. 33 (R.M.).

Java, from P, R. Uliler coll. 12 (U.5.N.M.).

Philippines (subsp. abdominalis): Bataan Province, Luzon, coll.

G. Béttcher,14¢ (B.M.). Baguio Benguet, coll. Baker, 2¢ ¢ 19. Samar

Island, coll, Baker, 18. North west of Panay Island, coll. Baker, 12

(U.S.N.M.).

Formosa (subsp. abdominalis): Grove, 1,5 miles 5, of Nodoe, 13

VIL 1929, coll. on Lingnan University 5th Hainan Island Expedition

1929,1¢,12 (U.S.N.M.),

Eastern Asia (subsp. abdominalis): Assam: No, 57, coll, W.

Ashmead, 14 (U.S.N.M.). Siam: Singora, VI 1929, coll. H. M. Smith,

13. Tha Lo 30 LX 1931, coll. Hugh Smith, 1? (U.S.N.M,). Vietnam:

Annam-Cana, Phanrang Province in Pinus merkusit belt at altitude

0-600 metres, 18-22 VIII 1932, coll. M. Poilane, 12 (U.S.N.M.).

432 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

New Guinea (subsp. blétei): ‘‘Mist Camp’’ of Netherland Indies—

American New Guinea Expedition, 1800 metres, 9 I 1939, coll. L. J.

‘Toxopeus, Holotype ¢, Allotype °, 1 paratype ¢, 2 paratype ¢ 2

(R.M.). Krisa, Vanimo, Nth. New Guinea, IV 1939, coll. L. E.

Cheesman, 1 paratype ¢, Reg No. I 20, 103 (S.A.M.); Goroka, 1550

metres, 10 VI 1955, in light trap, coll. J. L. Gressitt, 1 paratype

(B.P.B.M.).

Leptocoris rufomarginata (Fabricius) 1794

Fig. 3 H-G, 4 I

Lygaeus rufomarginatus Fabricius, 1794: Ent. Syst., 4: 152. (Type

checked in Copenhagen against sketches of genitalia by Dr. Anker

Nielsen.) 1803: Syst. Rhyng., 220 (exclude reference to stolli).

Serinetha rufomarginata Dallas, 1852: List Hem. Ins., 2: 460. Stal,

1868: Kongl. svensk. Vetens.-Akad. Handl., 7 (11): 68. Lethierry

& Severin, 1894: Cat. gén. Hém., 2: 123. Distant, 1902: Faun.

Brit. Ind. Rhynch., 1: 419. Esaki, 1926: Ann. Mus. nat hung., 24:

157.

Leptocoris ruformarginatus Kirkaldy, 1905: Trans ent. Soc. Lond.,

350.

Lygaeus taitense Guérin, 1830 (1838): Voy Coquille Ins., 2: 178, pl. 12,

fig. 15. (Type presumed lost.)

Serimetha fimbriata Dallas, 1852: List. Hem. Ins., 2: 462. (Imperfect

type in British Museum checked by Mr, R. J. Izzard.)

Lygaeus flavomarginatus Matsumura, 1913: Thous. Ins, Japan. Addit.,

1: 141, tab. 14, f. 4.

Leptocoris spectabilis Breddin, 1901: Allg. Zeitsehr. Ent., 6: 113-115.

(Typ. vid.)

Leptocoris insularis Kirkaldy, 1908: Proce. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 33:

353. (The type cannot be located but all the large specimens of

Leptocoris seen from Fiji have been rufomarginata) China, 1930:

Insects of Samoa 2 (3): 103. Bléte, 1934: Zool. Meded., 17: 267.

Leptocoris fimbriata Blote, 1934: Zool. Meded., 17: 267.

As mentioned after the synonymy of L. abdominalis in most

collections the series labelled abdominalis or ruformarginata have

each been a mixture of these two species. Therefore most of the

references above (except Fabricius’ or Breddin’s original descriptions

and references to insularis) refer in part also to abdominalis.

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 433

This is undoubtedly the most variable species in the whole

Leptocoris complex of the Rast Asian and Pacific area. It cannot be

clearly differentiated into geographic races as can abdonunalis, or at

least not on the material before me, As one example, most female

specimens from the Solomon Islands J] have seen are typical ‘‘rufo-

margimata’’, very similar to those from the Philippine Islands, whilst

males from the Solomon Islands are very similar toe some rather fuscous

reddish specimens amongst the Queensland Coast series,

The ground colour varies enormously. It is often black, with in

the case of the two specimens from Lombok, bright yellow lateral

margins to head, pronotum and corium, or in the case of the type

“rufomarginata’’ form a reddish head and wide reddish lateral margins

to pronotum and eorium. The black however may become very reduced

or even absent from above making the ground colour red or yellowish;

in a pair of ° specimens from Misitna Island in the Lonisiade

Archipelago the black on the pronotum is restricted to the collar and

depressed callous areas and a large quadrate patch in the hind part

of disc, the seutellam is black, but the clavus and inner corium are

merely infuseated; in most Micronesian specimens there are two

longitudinal black lines on the pronotum (rarely fused into one or

absent) and the clavug and inner corium are infuseated, In many

speciinens the only black above is the black antennae, and in others

the membrane, the depressed smooth areas on the pronotum, and the

antennae are econeclorous with the main reddish or yellow above,

Amongst the forms in which the black is more or less reduced or

absent the ground colour is very variable. In specimens from Penang

(also one from Siam), the Nicobar Islands, and Sumatra and the

Misima [sland temales it is a bright brick red. In most of the

Queensland Coast speeimens there is a tendency for a purplish red,

and this is very well developed in nearly all the specimens of the small

form from Fiji, Samoa and Tonga. From Sipankat there are three

specimens which are a yellowish eyelamen colour, one of these has the

central pronotnm longitudinally, the seutellum, clavus, and inner corium

vaguely infuseated, i.e., the pattern of the rufomarginata form, The two

males [ have seen fron) Misima Island and the Micronesian specimens

are reddish ochraceous and fairly small, one from Misima has two

elongate large longitudinal blackish spots on hind part of pronotum

and this is generally the case m the Micronesian specimens. The form

‘*snectabilis’’ Breddin is ochraceous above except for the black

membrane and brown antennae.

434 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. #: A-C Leptacorns abdominalia (ale), A—imale genital capsule from above, B—aame

from helow, C—right. paramere from ahove. J) Leptoooris eorntedtata (Stal), head

and pronotum, E-G Leptocoris rufemargmata (Mab), Be male genital vapeule [rom

above, F—same from beluw, G—right elaspor from right hand side. H-L Leptovoriv

tagatica Burmoister, —mnale genital eapeule from above, I—same from below, 4)

Leptocorts tsolata (Distant), male genital sapere from above.

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 435

Beneath the species is generally black except for the underside

of head and the lateral margins of proplenra (broadly), mesopleura

and metapleura (also upper hind margin of latter) and dorsal margins

of abdominal segments broadly (except the sixth which is completely

red or yellow) concolorous with pale colony of above surface. In the

Sipankat specimens the underside is yellowish cyelamen tinged with

only the merest suggestion of fuscous where there is black in most

of the other specimens of the species. The legs, antennae and rostrum

of the Sipankat specimens are a dark cyclamen colour. The two

specimens from Lombok with the narrow yellow margins above are

bright yellow beneath with black legs (except eoxae), antennae, and

rostrum, and a black spot on each of mesosterum, mesopleura, and

metaplenra. The Queensland Coast specimens tend to have little blaek

on the abdomen and a black patch on the widerside of head; or to be

infuseated only on the pleurae. his is also trne of one Sumatran and

one Luzon example. Many of the specimens have a white encrustation

over the black beneath. The abdomen of Polynesian specimens tends

to be a vaguely infuseated reddish beneath.

Strueturally the species is very similar in size and form to

abdominalis. Polynesian specimens tend to be vather smaller than

is usual for the species. The head is shorter and broader, there is ¢

central longitudinal soleus running back from the base of the tylus.

There are two grooves running down obliquely from midline to

insertion of antennae but they are very shallow and very broad. The

rostrum reaches base of second abdominal seement.

The pronotum igs narrow auteriorly, braad posteriorly as in

abdominalis but the dise 1s fairly raised posteriorly and the lateral

mareins are not so curved outwards. he anterior portion of the

pronotun) is rather depressed, thus the pronotum is not so nearly

coplanar as in some species, he central keel is fairly obsolete.

The species can easily be distingnished from all others on the

shape of the genital capsules. Through all this series of varied

coloured specimens [ have examined T have seen only the one type of

capsnle in each sex, I have had jo hesitation in lumping all these

forms together under this one species solely on this character alone.

lf is apparent in the other species of the genus that where specific

differences do oceur the variation in the genitalia, especially those of

the male are very marked. In fact in only two species is there even

a semblance of difficulty in separating them on male genital characters,

i.e,, tagalica Burmeister, and isolata (Distant). In rufomarginata the

genitalia of the male and female are very distinctive and very constant.

436 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The male genital capsule has the penultimate segment produced

into two broad latero-ventrally flattened pilose lobes. These lobes are

feebly convex on the ventero-lateral surfaces and almost flat on the

dorsal interior ones. Ventrally the penultimate segment is produced

between the claspers as a triangular shaped, short arched plate,

directed upwards at about 45°. The male claspers are quite elaborate,

they begin basally almost triangular in cross section, then become

almost flat, broadish, and sinuate and apically they turn ventrally and

have a lateral hook on the outer surface.

The female genital capsule has the upper valves produced as club

shaped, very pilose processes which are flat (or even slightly concave)

on their inner surfaces like most other species but these clubs are

completely devoid of spines. The lateral and ventral pairs of valves are

also quite distinct. The basal parts of the ventral valves are convex

only near their inner margins and beneath appear to give off

membraneous processes which protrude up under the lateral valves.

In both sexes the genital capsules are reddish or yellowish with

yellow pilosity.

As already referred to this species has often been confused with

the preceding, amongst the various collections before me there are

specimens, male and female, of both species labelled abdominalis Fabr.

Sometimes the similarity is very great indeed. Amongst the Rijks-

museum material are two specimens, both males, that look almost

identical from above and below, both are red and would in the past

have been put confidently as abdominalis. One of these (Cat. No. 33)

from Fort de Kock, Sumatra, is an abdominalis, the other (Cat. No.

27) from Pulu Pandjang, Sumatra, is a rufomargiata.

The two species can be separated at a glance by the genitalia,

and generally the essential genital characters can be seen without even

dissecting the genital capsule out. In the male of abdominalis the

lateral lobes of the penultimate segment are rounded and convergent

whilst in rufomarginata they are broad, flattish and somewhat

divergent. The claspers of abdominalis are a long sinuous spine

apically becoming a curved plate basally, the claspers of rufomargimata

are hooked apically and have a short spine on their outer surface, thence

they widen and become a sinuous plate and finally basally become almost

triangular in cross section.

The upper valves of the female capsule in both species are entirely

devoid of spines (unlike all other species of the genus from the region)

but have a long pilosity. But in abdominalis the upper valves are

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 437

in a primitive condition and are in the form of not particularly

prominent plates, in rufomarginata they are club shaped and very

prominent like all other species of the genus,

Length: 13-29 mm.

Loe.

Lower Siam; Trong, coll, Dr. W. L. Abbott, 12 (U.S.N.M.).

Nicobar Islands: No precise locality, 1903, coll. G, Rogers, 19

(B.M.).

Malay Peninsula: Penang, Rosenberg Collection, 14 (headless),

12? (U.S.N.M.).

Indonesia: Sumatra: Pulu Pandjang, Sim, Sumatra, V 1913,

coll, K. Jacobson, 12, Cat. No. 27: no precise locality, coll. Muller, 1¢,

Cat. No.2 (R.M.), Padang, no other data, 22 ¢ (Zool. Inst. Halle).

Java: Samarang, | 1910, coll. HK, Jacobson, 12, Cat. No. 41 (R.M.);

Bogor, I, coll A. M, Lea and wife, 12 (S.A.M.). No precise locality,

No. 538, P. R. Uhler collection, 14 (U.S.N.M.). No precise locality or

date, 12 (Zool. Inst. Halle),

Borneo: Labuan Island, coll. C. T. McNamara, 1?:; Sandakan,

eoll. C.'T. MeNamara, 12 (8.A.M.). Sandakan, coll, Baker, 62 4,42 2,

2 without abdomens, Mt. Kinabalu, North Borneo, coll. G. Haslam,

donated B.P. Clark, 43 ¢, 19 (U.S.N.M.,).

Celebes: Tondano, no other data, 1¢, Cat, No. 2 (R.M.), Toli-

Toli, North Celebes, XI-XIT 1895, coll, H. Fruhstorfer, 12, Reg. No.

40, Breddin coll. and Breddin’s type of Serinetha spectabilis (Deutsches

Entomologisches Institut Berlin-F'riedrichshagen), Same date, No.

4, C, F, Baker Collection 1927, 1@ (U.S.N.M.).

Lombok: Rindjani: Segard Anak, 2000 metres, TX 1936, coll.

R. van de Veen, 1? (R.M.).

Sumbawa;: Col. van Lansherge, no other data, 1%, Cat. No, 1

(R.M.).

Sipankat: 10-14 TX 1929, coll. Snellius Expedition, 246 4, 12

(R.M.).

Timor: Coll. Muller, no other data, 1¢, Cat. No. 3 (R.M.).

There are a further five specimens of this species in the collection

of Zool. Inst. Halle, 42 6, 12, 3 of them belonging to an interesting

yellow form very similar in appearance to L, abdominalis taprobanensis

which are utterly without label but I think probably come from

somewhere in the Indonesian Archipelago.

438 RECORDS OF THE 8A. MUSEUM

Philippines: Luzon: Mt. Makiling, coll. Baker, 1¢,29 9%. Manilla,

No, 18, P. R. Ubler collection 12 (U.S.N.M.).

Samar: Coll. Baker, 1° (U.S.N.M.,).

Mindanao; Surigao, coll. Baker, 3¢ 6,29 2? (U.S.N.M.). Surigao,

from Taeuber Collection, 13. Momungan, North Mindanao, coll. G.

Bottcher, 1¢ (B,M.).

Caroline Islands; Palau Islands: Koror L, limestone ridge S.

of Islet; 21 1 1948, coll, 1. 8S, Dybas,1¢. Koror I., [X 1952, coll. N. L.

H. Krauss, 12. Koror L., X11 1954, coll. J. W. Beardsley, 2 3,29 9,3

from Allophyllus sp. Koror IL, 18 LV 1957, coll. C. W. Sabrosky, 32 ¢.

Ngerkabesang I, 24 TV 1957, coll. C. W. Sabrosky, 12. Urukthapel

(Ngurukdabel) I., 16 VIII 1958, No, M. 455, 12 (B.P.B.M.).

Ponape: Kolonia-Jokaji, 24 VIL 1939, coll. Teiso Esaki, 12 (K.U.),

Nanue Islet, VI-IX 1950, coll, P. A, Adams, 1¢ (B.P.B.M.).

New Guinea: Mt, Lamington, North East Papua, 1,300-1,500 feet,

coll, GC. T. MeNamara, 1?; Misima I., Louisiade Archipelago, coll.

Rev. R. J. Andrew, 1¢,19 and coll. H. K, Bartlett 1¢, 19 (S.A.M.).

Normanby L, Papua, Wakaiuna, Sewa Bay, 8 I 1957, coll. W. W-

Brandt, 12 (B.P.B.M.),

Solomon Islands: No precise locality, VII-VIII 1909, coll, W, W.

Froggatt, 1¢, 12 (C.S.LR.O.). Guadaleanal, XIT 1920, coll. J. A.

Kusche, 63 ¢, 92 2. Ditto, I 1921, coll. J. A. Kusche, 248, 12

(B.P.B.M.).

Fiji Island Group: Suva, Viti Levu, 11 TX 1921, coll, Saunders,

12 (Fiji Dept. Agr,); Suva, Beach Road, 14 IT 1933, coll. C. H.

Wdmondson, 1¢. Moala L, ex coconut, 7 TX 1924, coll. R. H. Beek,

3144, 222%, Mothe-Lau, 14 VITT 1924, coll, E, H. Bryan Jr,, 19

(B.P.B.M.).

Tonga Islands; Kua L, § V 1928, coll. H. 8, Ladd, 24 4, 49 ¢

(B.P.B.M.),

Samoa Island Gronp: Savaii Island, coll, W. von Biilow, 12, Cat.

No. 1 (R.M.), Upolu Island, Afiamalu, 19 VI 1940, 2,200 feet, at light,

coll. Swezey & Zimmerman, 1%. Same data, except date 10 VI 1940,

284. Same data, except date 18 VI 1940,19%. Same data except date

24 VI 1940, 94 4, 12¢ 92. Same data, except date 30 VI 1940, 12,

322. Tapatapao, 17 VI 1940, 1,000 feet, at light, coll, Swezey &

Zimmerman, 2? 9 . Apia, TX 1926, coll. G, P. Wilder, 14 (B.P.B.M.).

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 439

Queensland: Rockhampton, no other data, 19: Kuranda, coll.

F. P. Dodd, 1? (S.A,M.); Ayr, 25 XI 1954, coll. G. Saunders, 12 ;

Lawes, 21 XII 1952, coll. KE. Jones, 12 ; Brisbane, 12 VI 1952, coll. M. W.,

14; Brisbane, V 1949, coll. Talbot, 12 (U.Q.).

Leptocoris tagalica Burmeister 1834

Vig. 3 H,J,4 J

Plate XLVIIT

Leptocoris tagalicus Burmeister, 1834: Nov, Act. Acad. Leop., 16:

Suppl., 299.

Serimetha tagalica Dallas, 1852. List Hem. Ins, Brit. Mus., 2: 460.

Serinetha lurtda Dallas 1852; loc. cil., 461. Dist., 1901; Ann. Mag. nat.

Hist., (7) 7: 429. (Type in British Museum checked by Mr. R. J.

Izzard.)

Leptocoris vulgaris Bergroth, 1916; Proe. R. Soe. Vic., 29: 32. (Type

presumed lost.)

Leptocoris taitensis Cleesman, 1926; Ann. Mag. nat. THist., (9) 18: 369,

fies, (nee Guérim), (Type in British Museum checked by Mr, R.

J. Izzard.)

Leptocoris ahnnet Cheesman, 1927: Trans. ent. Soe. Lond., 75: 156 (n.

name for faitensis Cheesman).

This, like the previous species, is one of the most wide spread of

the species of the genus in the region, ranging from Tahiti to the

Philippines and far into Central Australia. It is variable in size and

also in ground eolor and it is not surprising that it has been described

under such a variety of names.

It is far from certain that the correct name is tagalica,

Burmeister’s original type cannot be traced and it is completely unsafe

to try and place any Indo-Pacific species of Leptocorts of this size

and color without an examination of the genitalia, In Dallas’ descrip-

tion of vicina which follows immediately after his reference to tagalica

he mentions several differences between his vicina and what he has

listed as tagalica. This species fits Dallas’ concept of tagalica, but. we

cannot be sure Dallas’ tagalica is Burmeister’s tagaliva. Tf the type is

ever traced it could turn out it is what I have called vicina and will

replace that name, then the next available name for this species is

lurtda Dallas. Tagalica and vicina were both described from the

Philippines, hence the type localities are of little help.

440) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The ground colour is generally a purplish red, but it is often

brick red (this is usually the case with the small Central Australian

form deseribed as L. vulgaris by Bergroth) or searlet or even a

brownish yellow as is the ease in a series of specimens from Cloncurry,

Queensland, Two specimens in the Rijkstnuseum collections identified

by H. C, Bléte as lomgirostris Dallas have the pronotum brownish

yellow (except for the smooth depressed areas which are purplish red

and in one specimen the lateral margins behind the ealli are tinged with

red) whilst the rest of the body above (except antennae) is purplish

red, Specimens from Saipan and Tinian are a deep chocolate brown

with a black head,

The long hairs on the head, antennae, legs and sides of pronotum

are blackish brown, the fine pilosity of the hody is golden yellow.

The antennae are brownish black or black, generally the first

segment is paler near base, and with a moderate thickness of short

stiff blackish brown hairs. The head is as broad basally as in all the

other species but the region of the tylus and the jugae seems narrower

and more elongate, There are generally a few seattered stiff hairs on

the head and a fine golden pilosity. The eyes and ocelli are generally

purplish red but in the yellow Cloncurry specimens are bright red.

There is a short longitudinal impressed line just in front of the ocelli,

a tumescence behind each eye and an oblique curved ridge in front of

the eye leading down to insertion of antennae. The pronotum has the

anterior smooth areas convex and almost transverse, in most specimens

they are concolorous with, or only shghtly darker than the ground

colour (including the Cloncurry specimens where they are yellow) but

in the two Rijksmuseum specimens with the yellow pronota they are a

purplish red. In front of these calli the pronotum is elevated into a

narrow qnite raised shallowly triangular area which often has a few

sparse hairs. The lateral margins of the pronotum hehind the calli

are rather selvaged and almost straight ar very shallowly concave, The

posterior margin is very feebly convex and slightly depressed, The

disk of the pronotum behind the ealli is flat or almost so, becoming

depressed before the lateral margins and immediately before the hind

margin. There is a fine longitudinal keel running from the calli to

almost the hind margin. The lateral margins have a moderately dense

development of stiff black hairs.

The seutellum is elevated and flat or even slightly coneave on top,

the lateral margins are strongly depressed and the dise is depressed

before the apex.

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 441

The coriaceous parts of elytra, seutellum, pronotum and head are

covered with a fine golden pubescence. The membrane is black

becoming broadly browu near the apex. Specimens from the Mariana

Islands have a paler membrane.

Rostrum and legs (except ecoxae) concolorous with antennae,

brownish black or black. Thoracic pleurae in southern specimens

generally mainly blackish with a red or yellow spot (depending on the

ground colour) well ahove each coxa, also a thin line along apical

margin of several of the ventral abdominal segments blackish. In

Indonesian and Polynesian specimens these latter black areas beeome

very obsolete or absent altogether. The coxae are always reddish or

yellowish depending on the ground colour, The rostrum reaches to

or almost to base of the fourth abdominal segment, In specimens from

Saipan and Tinian the abdomen beneath is paler than the gronnd

colour.

The genital capsules of both the males and females are not such a

reliable guide to the idemtity of the species. They readily distinguish it

from all the preceding species, but the female is hardly distinguishable

from the next species, and in the male the characters are not as clear

eut as we have been encountering so far.

The male genital capsule has the penultimate segment produced

laterally into prominent pilose lobes which are convex on the ventero-

lateral surface and noticeahly concave and more pilose on the inner

dorsal surfaces. Ventrally the penultimate segment is produced

between the claspers as a prominent triangular process. The claspers

are fairly simple and are feebly hooked on their underside towards the

apex and tui somewhat though not markedly ventrad,. The claspers

lack the elaborate structure of the preceding species and the lateral

lobes of the penultimate segment are much longer in relation to the

leneth of the claspers than in either the preceding species or in the one

following. The expsule is generally the same general colour as the rest

of the inseet but in Saipan and Tinian specimens it is black.

The female genital capsule has the upper valves produced into

elub-like structures which are pilose and have a nomber (>20) of

strong spines. The clubs are flat on their inner surfaces. The lateral

valves are just perceptible as flat plates with a terminal pilosity

beneath the upper valves. Ventral valves fairly convex,

Length; 9-18 mm. Specimens from Central Australia are

consistently small and coul! he considered perhaps as a separate race

to which the name vulgaris Bergroth would have to apply. They are

442 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

also more uniformly reddish than the Queensland Coast specimens,

On the other hand specimens from Central New South Wales and

Central Queensland tend to bridge the gap between the typical vulgaris

type and the purplish red or yellow coastal forms in both colour and

size. It is perhaps best to leave this point to be clarified later in

the ight of additional material from inland New South Wales and

Queensland. Specimens from Saipan and Tinian are also very small

and could possibly also be regarded us a good subspecies, but again, it

would be desirable to see material from more Micronesian localities.

Loc.

Philippines: North Luzon: Pr. Bontoe Tinglayan, 1000 metres,

coll. G. Bottcher 1°: Los Banos, coll. G. Béttcher 1¢: Mt. Banahao,

2000, coll. G. Battcher, 12? (B.M.).

Mariana Islands: Saipan: Chalan Kanoa, Haw. 4061, 11 I 1949, No.

2951, on Physalis peruviana, 43 8. No precise locality, Haw. 4645,

25 TT 1949, No. 6818, 84 6, 3292 (U.S.N.M.). No precise locality,

1111949, coll. K. L. Maehler 244,49 ¢. Ditto, 2512 1949,4¢ 4,1¢.

As Lito, IL 1958, eoll, N. H. L, Krauss, 1? (B.P.B.M.).

Tinian: Tinian Harbour, 20 IL 1945, eoll. H. 8S. Dybas, 22 4

(C.LN.HLM.), 9 VI 1946, No, 498, coll. TI. Kk. Townes, 24 ¢ (B.P.B.M.),

Indonesia; Sumatra; Tanjong Morawa, Serdang, N.E. Sumatra,

coll, Dr. B. Hagen 14, Cat. No, 22 and 19, Cat. No, 8 (R.M.),

Celebes: Bankala, coll... CO. van Hasselt, 16 (B.M.),

Soembawa: Sima, 27 VI 1929, coll, I M, Macekerras, 24 4, 1%

(C.S.0.R.0.),

Polynesia: New Hebrides: Tanna, LX 1920, coll. L. E, Cheesman,

14 (B.M,).

Samoa; Utumapu, Upolu, 7 XT 1954, eoll, R. A. Cumber, 2¢ 4,

322 (U.Q.).

Society Ts.: Tahiti, 6 TIT 1925, coll. L. KE. Cheesman, 19 (B.M,)-

Australia: Queensland; Dunk Island, 25 VIIT 1927, coll, F. A.

Perkins, 1° (U.Q.); Magnetic Island, coll. G. F. Hill, 12 (B.M.):

same data, 126,12 (S.A.M.); Cloncurry, 8 TV 1947, eoll. H. Bell, 12,

5¢ 2,2nymphs: Julia Creek, 1 11946, coll. H. Bell, 12 (U.Q.); Powella,

Aramac, VIT 1920, coll. Ff. Bradshaw, 1¢, 29 9, Reg, No, K43437

(A.M.); Roekhampton to Yeppoon, 5-15 V 1956, coll. J. Baldwin, 14

(S.A.M.): Brisbane, on wild hop seed (? Dodonaea sp.), 11 XII 1927,

coll, MeLachlan, 14; Brisbane, Botanic Gardens, 3 XI 1952, coll. Dr.

T. BK, Woodward, 32 4,39 9°: Brishane, TTT 1955, coll. J. Thapa, 1¢ -

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 443

Brisbane, 3 TV 1955, coll, D. J. Woodlard, 12: Brisbane, VIT 1956,

coll. J, O’Donohue, 12; Stanthorpe, 10 XI 1922, coll, F, A, Perkins,

1¢ (U.Q.): Stanthorpe, 9 X 1922, 24 ¢ (B.M.). No precise locality

from (. French Junior collection presented 15 X1 1911,18,12 (N.M.);

Cunnamulla, 22 X 1988, coll, N. Geary (A.M.).

New South Wales: Gordon, 30 V 1948, coll. A. Musgrave, 1? :

Watercourse near Moree, XI 1933, coll. A. Musgrave 24 é (A.M.); 40

miles west of Wanaaring, 30 X 1949, coll. S.J. Paramonov, 28 ¢,22 9%;

Brewarrina, 1914, eoll, W. W, Froggatt, 12 (C.S.LR.0.); Yanda,

4 T 1954, coll. K. M. Moore, 14, 12 (A.M.); Belmont, 11 [X 1953,

eoll, A. W., 12 (U.Q.). Upper Williams River, X 1926, coll, A, M, Lea

& F. E, Wilson, 12 (N.M.,),

Northern Territory: McArthur Station, 6 IT 1912, coll, G. F.

Hill, 1¢ (N.M.): Murehison Range, 1932, coll. Basedow, 1¢, 19:

Coniston Station, coll, M, W. Mules, 5¢ ¢, 52 2 (S.A.M.); 59 miles

N.W. of Alice Springs, 7 V 1952, coll. N.W. Australian Party from

Aust. Mus.,1¢, 22 2 (A.M.); Undulya Gap, 6 VITT 1947, coll. C. W.

Brazenor, 13 (N.M.): 1 mile KH. of Simpsons Gap, 27 VI 1951, coll,

W. L. Brown, 22 @: Palm Valley, 30 VIII 1956, coll. N. B. Tindale,

14: Palm Valley, VITI-ITX 1957, coll, N, Mollett, 13, 29 @ ; Henbury

Station, 14 X 1953, coll. G. F. Gross, 14, 229 9, Reg. No, 1.8.0. 1181

(S.A.M.).

Western Australia: Beverley, 1918, coll. D. Bone (C.S.1,R.0.).

Leptocoris isolata (Distant) 1914

Fig. 34,44

Serinetha tisolata Distant, 1914: Ann. Mag. nat, Hist., (8) 18; 179,

1920: op. cif. (9) 6: 148. (Type in British Museum checked by

Mr. R. J. Tzzard.)

Leptocoris isolata Blote, 1984: Zool. Meded., 17: 267.

Leptocoris lariverst Usinger, 1952; Proc. Hawaii ent. Soe,, 14: 520,

fiz, (Paratyp. vid.) New synonymy,

This is a species of uniform (and m Leptocoris average) size and

pretty constant appearance occurring only so far as is known along

coastal New Guinea, the Solomon [slands, some islands between these

two (Louisiade Archipelago), and the Marshall Islands.

The ground colour is fuscous brown, reddish, or reddish ochraceous

above. Ininfuscated specimens the lateral regions of the head, anterior

and lateral margins of pronotum and the outer base of hemelytra are

Add RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ochraceous, reddish ochraceous, or reddish, Antennae, membrane and

legs black or blackish hrown. The calli on the pronotum, usually the

scutellum and sometimes a small quadrate area between eyes in

otherwise not infuseated specimens blackish or purplish,

The longer hairs of head, antennae, legs and sides of pronotum and

the overall very fine pilosity golden or whitish.

Antennae as in all other members of the genus with a short thiek

golden (or perhaps blackish) pilosity, The head is very similar in

appearance to the preceding species, the eyes and oeelli are bright

red,

The anterior smooth areas of the pronotum are not quite trans-

verse, convex, In infuscated specimens they are conevlourous with

the fuscous centre of the pronotum, in others they range trom red

through bright purple and black and all stages muy he seen im a series

of specimens {rom any one locality. in front of these the pronotum is

slightly raised into a narrow, shallowly triangular area which ter-

minates laterally as {wo feeble pilose tumeseenees. The lateral margin

of the pronotum behind the ealli is shaped like a selvage, almost straight

but with a feeble coneavity just behind the veelli, The hind margin is

convex, ovate and depressed. The dise of the pronotum behind the

eall is flat or almost so, becoming depressed before the lateral and hind

margins, there are five feeble tumesecences along the line where it dips

to meet the hind margin, There is an obsolete central longitudinal

keel,

The s¢utellum is elevated and flat or even slightly concave on

fop, the lateral margins are strongly depressed and the dise is depressed

hefore the apex,

Rostrum and legs (exeept eoxae) concolorous with antennae,

reddish or brownish black or blaek, Thoracie plenrae generally

blackish or infuseated with broad ochraceous or reddish hordera, sterna

ochraceous or reddish, Abdominal aterna and pleurae blackish with

upper half of plenrac ochraceous or reddish, last segment wholly

reddish or ochraceous. Rostrum reaching to middle of third true

(2nd visible) abdominal segment.

The male genital capsule is not very distinet from that of the

preceding species and I cannot find characters in the female venitalia

to distinguish the two,

The male genital eapsule has the penultimate segment produced

laterally into prominent pilose lobes which are convex on the ventero-

lateral surfaces and noticeably concave and more pilose on the inner

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 445

e AR

FT| SWAY 2

f Ree

Vy.

Pig. 4: A Leplocoris ixolota Distant, wale genital capsule from below. B Leptocoria augur

(Fab.), female capsule from below. C Leptocoris minuscule Blite, female genital capsule

from below. D Leptocoris commbatorensis sp, nov, female genital capsule from below.

E Leptocoris mitellata Bergroth, female ponital enpsule frog. bolow. F Leptocoris

vicina (Dallas), female genital capsule from helow, Ct Lepluceris subrufescens (Kirby)

female genital eapsule from below, GH Leplocoris abdominals (Fab), fomale genits

cupsule from below, IL Leptocoris rufomarginata (Fab,), fowele genital capsule from

below, | Leptocorix tagalioa Burmeister, fomule genital oapsole From below

446 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

dorsal surfaces. Ventrally the penultimate segment is produced

between the claspers as a fairly prominent (riangular process. The

claspers are more robust than those of fagalica and are strongly hooked

on their underside toward the apex, and somewhat excavated beneath

in the middle. They turn somewhat but not markedly ventrad at the

apex. The claspers are mucli louger in relation to the parandria than

those of tagalica and this is the one definite distinguishing feature

between the species. The genital capsule is also paler than tagalica and

in New Guinea and Louisiade Archipelago specimens the claspers are

a bright yellow.

The female capsule is to all intents and purposes the same as that

of tagalica,

Length; 11-16 mm.

Loe.

New Guinea: Toem, Dutch New Giinea, 10 1, 20 II and 20 IV

1945, coll. B. B. Vogtman, 3¢¢. Nadzab, Markham River Valley,

VI 1944, coll. K. V. Krombeim 12 (U.S.N.M.). Pt. Moresby, Papua,

LX 1949, coll, N. AL. Krauss, 12. Normanby Island, Papua, Waikuna,

Sewa Bay, 21-81 XIT 1956, coll, W. W, Brandt, 1¢@ (B.P.B.M.),

Louisiade Archipelago; Misima Island. coll. Rev. H. K. Bartlett,

444,422 (S.A.M.),

Solomon Islands: Guadaleanal, Tf 1921, coll. J, A. Kusehe, 4¢ ¢

49°92 (B.P.B.M.).

Marshall Islands: Kwajalein Atoll; Bwije Island, 30 | 1945, coll.

H. S. Wallace, No. 1247, 2¢ ¢, 29%. Berlin Island, 30 I 1945, coll.

H, 8. Wallace, No, 1256, 28 4, 222. Kwajalein Island, the airfield,

17 VII 1946, coll. R. G, Oakley, No. 1595, 12; no precise locality,

22 TV 1948, coll. K, L. Maehler,6¢ ¢, Namn Atoll; Majkon (Kaginen)

Tsland, 256 X 1953, on Allophyllus, coll. J. W. Beardsley, 75 8, 4% @

(B.P.B.M.), Jalnit Atoll; Imroj Island, 24 VIIT 1946, No, 1851, coll,

Townes, 1¢, Paratype of Leptocoris lariversi Usinger (U.S.N.M.).

Majuro Atoll; Uliga Island, 8 XL 1953, on Alophyllus, coll. J. W.

Beardsley, 54 ¢,12, Arno Atoll; Ine Island, 30 VIT 1950, eoll. Tra La

River, 16,69 2. No precise locality, 19 VIL 1950, coll. Ira La Rivers,

most of the specimens also bear the name Karl Stone on a single label,

7é 4,322, 1 nymph (B.P.B.M.). Ratak Island Chain; no precise

locality, coll, A. von Chamisso, 1° (R.M.). Ratak Island Chain; no

other data except one specimen (¢) bears the name indecorus Esch.

(= Eschscholz ?) which appears to be a nomen nudum as I cannot

trace its publication, 2¢ ¢ (Zool. Tnst., Halle).

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 447

Leptocoris marquesensis Cheesman 1926

Leptocoris marquesensis Cheesman, 1926: Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (9)

18; 368, figs. 1927: Trans. ent. Soc. Lond., 156.

I have not seen this species. From the original description it

is fairly close to isolata Distant, but differs in that the claspers have a

dorso-lateral tubercle on the outer sides. This point has been checked

for me by Mr. Izzard. The female is unknown.

Deep red, ocelli bright red; tylus, vertex, calli of pronotum, basal

two thirds of dise of pronotum, hemelytra (except basal balf of costal

margin) suffused with black and showing a dark purplish colour.

Antennae, rostrum, legs (except the red coxae and trochanters) and

hemelytral membrane black, Vertex with second to fifth segments

obscurely suffused with black.

Tylus arched, vertex strongly seultured, Rostrum reaches beyond

middle of third abdominal segment. Dise of pronotum densely but

finely rugosely punctate, calli transverse. Pronotal collar with

anterior margin lightly reflexed and sides tuberculate; dise slightly

rounded at the base. Hemelytra exceeding abdomen by one fifth of

their length.

Length: 12 mm,

Loe.

Marquesas Islands (Fatu-hiva).

REFERENCES

Amyot, C. J, B, and J. G. Audinet-Serville, 1843: Histoire Naturelle

des Insectes. Hémiptéres, |-Ixxvi, 1-675, 12 col, plates.

Bergroth, E. E., 1913: ‘‘Supplementum Catalogi Heteropterorum

Bruxellensis 2. Coreidae, Pyrrhocoridae, Colobathristi-

dae, Neididae.’". Mem, Soe. ent. Belg,, 22: 125-183.

1916: ‘*New Genera and Species of Australian Hemiptera’’.

Proc. R. Soe, Viet,, (N.S.) 29 (1): 19-89,

Blanchard, C. E., 1840: Histoire Naturelle des Insectes. Orthoptéres,

Neuroptéres, Hémiptéres, Hymenoptéres, Lepidoptéres

avec une introduction par M, Brullé, 3: 150 plates.

Blote, H. (., 1934: ‘‘Catalogue of the Coreidae in the Rijksmuseum

van natuurlijke Historie’. Part I, Corizinae, Alydinae.

Zool, Meded., 17: 253-285, 10 fig's,

448 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Burmeister, H. C. C., 1834: ‘‘Rhyngota seu Hemiptera, in Meyens

Beitrige zur Zoologie, gesammelt auf einer Reise um die

Erde’’. Nov. Acta Acad. Leopold. Carol., 16 (Suppl.),

299, 1 col. plate.

1835: Handbuch der Entomologie, 2: 12-400.

Cheesman, L. E., 1926: ‘‘Two new species of Coreidae from the South-

East Pacific’. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (9) 18: 368-370,

6 text figs.

1927: ‘‘A contribution towards the Insect Fauna of French

Oceania—lI’’. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 147-161. 2 plates.

China, W. E., 1930: ‘‘Hemiptera-Heteroptera’’. Insects of Samoa

2 (3): 1-162. 28 text figs.

Dallas, W. S., 1852: ‘‘List of the specimens of Hemipterous Insects

in the collection of the British Museum—2’’. 369-592.

4 plates.

Distant, W. L., 1880-1893: Biologia Centrali Americana. Insecta.

Rhynchota. Hemiptera-Heteroptera 1: I-xx, 1-462, 39

plates.

1901: ‘‘Rhynchotal Notes—IX. Heteroptera: Family

Coreidae’’. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (7) 7: 416-432.

1902: The Fauna of British India, including Ceylon and

Burma. Rhynchota, Vol. I, |-xxxviii, 1-438. 249 text

figs.

—____— 1908: Entomol., 41: 123 and 147.

1914: ‘‘Rhynchotal notes—XV’’. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (8)

13: 176-186.

1920: ‘‘Rhynchota from New Caledonia’’. Ann. Mag. nat.

Hist., (9) 6: 143-164.

Dohrn, F. E., 1860: ‘‘Zur Heteropteren-Fauna Ceylons’’. Stett. ent.

Ztg., 21: 399-409.

Esaki, T., 1926: ‘‘Verzeichnis der Hemiptera-Heteroptera der Insel

Formosa’’. Ann. Mus. nat. Hung., 24: 1386-189. Map.

Evans, J. W., 1928: ‘‘A Note on the Occurrence of the Coreid

Melanocanthus margineguttatus Distant in New Zealand’’.

Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (10) 2: 463-4.

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 449

Fabricius, J, C., 1781: Species Insectorum exhibentes eorum

Differentias Specificas, Synonyma auctorum, Loca Natalia,

Metamorphosin adietis Observationibus, Descriptionibus

2: 1-517.

—— 1787: Mantissa Isectorum sistens eorum species Nuper

Detectas adiectis Characteribus, Genericis, Differentiis

Specificis, Hmendationibus, Observationibus 2: 1-382.

1794: Entomologia Systematica, 4: 1-472,

———— 1803: Systema Rhyngotorum secundum Ordines, Genera,

Species, adiectis synonymis, Locis, Observationibus,

Deseriptionibus. 1-314.

Gmelin, J. F., 1790: Systema Naturae 1 (4): 1517-2224.

Guérin-Méneville, F. E., 1880 & 1838: Voyage autour du Monde sur.

La Coquille 1882-1825 ete. Zool. II, Div. 1, Chap. XTII.

Insectes 57-302. Atlas.

Hahn, C. W., 1881: Die wanzenartigen Insecten getreu nach der Natur

abgebildet und beschrieben, 1; 1-236, 36 plates.

lloffman, W. F., 1938: ‘*Life History Notes on some Kwantung,

China, Coreids (Hemiptera, Coreidae)’’. Lingnan Sei.

J., 12 (1): 97-127, 13 plates.

Kirby, W. F., 1888: ‘On the Inseets (exclusive of Coleoptera and

Lepidoptera) of Christmas Island’’, Proe. Zool. Soe.

Lond., 546-555.

1891: ‘‘Catalogue of the described Hemiptera Heteroptera

of Ceylon, based on the Collection formed (chiefly at

Pundaloya) by Mr. Ernest Green’’, J. Linn. Soe. Lond.

Zool., 24: 72-176, 3 plates.

1900: ‘‘Hemiptera’’ in Andrews ‘‘A Monograph of Christmas

Island (Indian Ocean), Physical Features and Geology

with descriptions of the Fauna and Flora by numerous

eontributors’’, 127-129, 1 plate.

Kirkaldy, G, W., 1899: ‘*Expedition to Soeotra, [X. Deseriptions of

ten new species of Hemiptera’’. Bull. Liverp. Mus., 2:

45-47.

———— 1905: ‘*Memoire on the Rhynchota collected by Dr. Arthur

Willey, F.R.S., chiefly in Birara (New Britain) and Lifw’’,

Trans. ent. Soe. Lond., 327-363, 1 plate.

450 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1908a; KntomolL, 41; 123.

19088: ‘A Catalogue of the Hemiptera of Fiji’’. Proe. Linn.

Soc. N.S.W., 33 (2): 345-81.

1910: ‘‘Further Notes on Hemiptera, chiefly Hawaiian’’.

Proc. Haw. ent. Soc, 2: 118-128.

Lethierry, L. & G. Severin, 1893: Catalogue géneral des Hémiptéres.

Bruxelles, 2: 1-277.

Maxwell-Lefroy, H. & F. M. Hewlett, 1909: Indian Insect Life. A

manual of the insects of the plains (Tropical India).

1-786, plates.

Matsumura, 8., 1913: Thousand Insects of Japan. Addition 1.

Spinola, M, M., 1840: ‘‘Hssai sur les Insectes Hemiptéeres, Rhyngotes

ou Héteroptéeres’’. Extr. Ann. Sei. nat. (2) 12: 1-295.

1850: ‘*Tavola sinottica dei generi spettanti alla classe

degli Insetti arthrodignati Hemiptera L. Latr., Rhyngota

F., Rhynchota Burm’’. Mem, Matem. Fis. Soe. Ital.

Modena, 25, 1-43.

Stal, C., 1852: ‘‘Hemiptera mexicatia enumeravit speciesque novas

deseripsit’’. Stett. ent. Ztg., 23: 81-118, 273-281, 289-320,

437-462.

1865: Hemiptera Africana, 2; 1-181.

1866-7: ‘*Analecta THemipterologica’’. Berl, ent. Zeits., 10:

151-172 (1866), 381-394 (1867).

1868: ‘‘Hemiptera Fabriciana. Fabricianska Hemipterarter,

efter de i Kopenhamm och Kiel forvarade typeexemplaren

eranskade och beskrifne’’. Kong. svensk, Vet. Akad.

Handl., 7 (11): 1-148.

1870: ‘‘Nnumeratio Hemipterorum. Bidrag till en fort-

neckning ofver alla hillills Kanda Hemiptera, jemte

systematiska meddelanden’’. Kong. svensk. Vet. Akad.

Handl, 9 (1): 1-282.

1878: ‘‘Enumeratio Hemipterorum 3'’. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.

Akad. Handl. 11 (2): 1-163.

Tryon, H., 1892: ‘‘Zoology of British New Guinea, Part I—

Hemiptera’, Ann. Qld. Mus., 2: 13-24.

Uhler, P. R., 1886: Check-list of Hemiptera-Heteroptera of North

America.

GROSS—THE GENUS LEPTOCORIS 451

Usinger, R. L., 1946: ‘‘ Hemiptera Heteroptera of Guam”? in ‘‘ Insects of

Guam IT’’. B. P. Bishop Mus., Bull, 189: 11-103.

1952: ‘‘New Species and Additional Records of Heteroptera

from the Marshall Islands’’. Proc. Haw. ent. Soc., 14

(3): 519-524, 1 textfig.

Van Duzee, HK. P., 1917: ‘‘Catalogue of the Hemiptera of America,

North of Mexico, excepting the Aphididae, Coccidae and

Aleurodidae’’. Univ. Cal, Publ. Tech, Bull. Coll. Agric.

Exp. Sta., 2: l-xiv, 1-902.

Villiers, A., 1952: ‘‘Hémipteres de l’Afriqnue noire (Punaises et

Cigales)’’. Intiations africaines, 9: 1-256, 358 textfigs.

Walker, F., 1872: Catalogue of the specimens of Heteropterous

Hemiptera in the Collection of the British Museum—5,

1-202.

Westwood, J. O., 1842: ‘*Catalogue of Hemiptera in the collection

of the Rev. F. W. Hope and descriptions of the new

Species of Scutelleridae—2’’, 1-26.

Woodward, T. E., 1951: ‘‘The Occurrence of Acantholybas brunneus

Breddin in New Zealand (Heteroptera: Coreidae)’’.

Trans. Roy. Soe. N.Z., 79 (2): 206-9, 3 text figs.

Tu juee

S.A) \MUseum

pee AA |

Vor, NUL, Phare NLVITI

from Central Australia,

fori

‘vulgaris *

stall pile +

Leplocoris milclatis Bergroth, Right, Leploearis fagatiea Burmeister,

Lott.

THE GENUS BLAENA WALKER (~MACRY MENUS SIGNORET)

WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF FOUR NEW SPECIES AND

A KEY TO THE KNOWN FORMS (HEMIPTERA: CYDNIDAE)

BY RICHARD C. FROESCHNER

Summary

In 1868 Walker described as new the genus Blaena with the inclusion of a single species, setosa,

from an unknown locality. In 1880 Signoret described Macrymenus membranaceus as a new genus

and species from Australia. Distant, in 1899, pointed out the synonymy of the two names and

reduced Signoret’s scientific name to synonymy — Blaena taking precedence over Macrymenus by

virtue of both being based on the same species and Walker’s generic name having twelve years

priority. This treatment is here confirmed.

THE GENUS BLAENA WALKER (—MACRYMENUS SIGNORET)

WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF FOUR NEW SPECIES AND A

KEY TO THE KNOWN FORMS (HEMIPTERA: CYDNIDAE)

By RICHARD ©, FROESCHNER"?

Plates xlix-l, fig, 1-13

In 1868 Walker described as new the genus Blaena with the

inclusion of a single species, setosa, from an unknown locality. In

1880 Signoret described Macrymenus membranaceus as a new genus

and species from Australia. Distant, in 1899, pointed out the synonymy

of the two names and reduced Signoret’s scientific name to synonymy—

Blaena taking precedence over Macrymenus by virtue of both being

based on the same species and Walker’s generic name having twelve

years priority. This treatment is here confirmed.

The present paper is based on specimens from two sources: from

the South Australian Museum, made available through the kindness of

The Museum Board and Dr, KE, T, Giles; and from the Museum of

Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, loaned by Drs. J. Bequaert

and P. J. Darlington. To the eurators of these institutions the author

is grateful. He also wishes to thank Dr. W. L. Brown, of the Museum

of Comparative Zoology, for aid in locating certain Australian localities

as they appeared on specimens. The illustrations are by my wife,

Elsie Herbold Froeschner,

The format used in this paper follows that of the author in his

Monograph of the Cydnidae of the Western Tlemisphere which is now

in press, Measurements are given in millimeters and are based on one

to five specimens of each sex. If less than five were used the number

is indicated.

(1) Dept. Zoology and Entomology, Montana State College, Bozeman, Montana, U.S.A.

Contribution from Montana State College Agricultural Experiment Station, M.S. 38,

paper No. 432 Journal Series,

(2) After this paper had been submitted for publication a grant from the National Science

Foundation (NSF G7118) made possible personal examination of the types concerned.

As above, the results supported Distant’s contentions and not Bergroth’s (1912, Amer,

Mus, Nat. Hist., Bull, $1: 343-348) belief that they were separate species.

454 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSBUM

Genus Blaena Walker

1868 Blaena Walker, Catal. Wemip.-Heterop. Brit. Mus., part 3, p. 537.

1880 Maers ymenas Signoret, Bull. Soe, Ent, France, ser, 3, vol. 10,

p. Xviil,

1899 Blaena Distant, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. 4, p. 224.

Diagnosis; The short coriam, which oceupies less than half (about

two-ilths) of the hemelytral length, plus the obliquely stylated eyes will

separate members of this genus from any other Cydnidae.

Description; Medium sized, elongate, sides subparallel; dorsum

flattened to weakly convex, Head: Little wider than long, dorsally flat

to weakly convex with coarse, crowded punctures; lateral margins

diverging from prevcular emarginations; juga meeting anterior to

elypeus, distinctly though narrowly reflexed marginally, apex rounded,

truncated or slightly produced; dorsally with several scattered or many

long bristles in addition to primary bristles; eyes small, higher than

long, prominent, oblique, moderately stylated ; ocelli very small, placed

far. behind line connecting hind margins of eyes, much closer to eyes

than to midline of head; anteniae five segmented, T and Tl shorter than

II, IV and V usually longer than latter and variable in relation to each

other; buceulae mueh higher than labial IT, equally elevated for

full length, abruptly terminated posteriorly af base of head; labinm

surpassing auterior coxae, sometimes reaching to bases of midcoxae,

L shortest, IT and JIL each longer than IV, LI compressed but not

dilated. Pronotwm: Length more than half of width; lateral margins

usually entire, narrowing from near base, sinnate or not at ends of

transverse impression; dorsal surlace of both lobes coarsely and closely

punetate nearly or quite to lateral edge; anterior margin strongly

concave; lateral snbmarein with a row of two, six or more setigerous

punetures, ouly one or two posterior to transverse impression; dise

usually with several to many scattered long hairs. Sevtellum; Width

distinetly greater than length, subtriangular, apex a broad, rounded,

obtuse angle; disc, except for oblique areas in basal angles, strongly

and vlosely punetate, Memelytra: Corial areas well-defined, mem-

branal suture oblique, strongly and angularly emarginate at end of

radial vein; costa sharp, weakly explanate, strongly incurved apically

so as to expose densely punctate connexivum, submarginally withont

or with five or fifteen setigerous punetures; membrane about twice

as long as basal width, nearly two-thirds of hemelytral length, dusky,

usually paler at base; veins darker, simple with few branches or

mostly reticulate. Propleuran: Shining, densely and strongly

FROESCHNER—THE GENUS BLAENA 455

punctate; prosternal carinae either low and indistinet or thiek and high

enclosing a labial trough deeper than height of labial II; anterior

margin nearly straight, slightly emarginate between prosternal carinae.

Mesopleuron: (fig, 6) Nearly flat, closely and distinetly puuctate,

including evaporatorium whieh follows posterior margin to lateral

margin of sclerite; posterior margin entire; medioventral line strongly

carinate. Metaplewron: (fig. 6) Nearly Hat, evaporatorium extensive,

but not reaching lateral margin, punctate; osteole opening prominently

and ventrally at base of elongate (length four to five times width),

partially suleate, polished and elevated peritreme, Legs: Moderately

long; anterior tibia (fig. 10) subterete to somewhat widened toward

apex, not prolonged beyond tarsal insertion, with six to eight distinet

to strong spines dorsally; tarsal IT shortest; middle and posterior

tibiae terete, latter in male simple or variously contorted, spined and

haired according to species: middle and posterior femora variously

armed ventrally according to species, Sternites: Convex, with

numerons prominent piinetures, with or without setigerons tubercles;

sometimes with a strong channel within lateral margins (fig, 9);

trichohothria typical of the subfamily Cydninae. Termimalia: Male

genital capsule opening dorsally or subdorsally; gonostyli uniformly

of one type in all species (fig. 8); female genital plates of type usually

found in pentatomoids.

Genotype: Blaena setosa Walker, monobasic, The genotype of

Macrymenus is M. membranaceus Signoret by virtue of the monobasic

original proposal of the genus, The present study confirms this

synonymy which was first pointed out by Distant in 1899 (Supra).

Disiribution: The range of this genns, from the more than fifty

specimens at hand, appears restricted to the continent of Anstralia,

Discussion: Members of this genus appear especially noteworthy

due to the stylated eyes and the strongly modified hind legs of the

males of some species. ‘The relatively simple anterior tibiae coupled

with such strongly contorted hind tibiae would suggest that these

forms are not adapted ta a burrowing habit. However, three of the

specimens examined were labelled from ‘‘soil at base of talus’’, ‘under

dead [?] log’. Observations on habits are needed.

The genus, as determined during the present study, may easily

he assiened to the subfamily Cydninac as redefined by Froeschner (in

press) since it possesses the necessary trichobothrial arrangement,

primary setigerons putietures on head and pronotum, venation of hind

wing and other features. The exposed ahdominal sternites in this as

456 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in other Cydnidae are actually segments III to VII, with I and II

reduced and hidden under the posterior lamellar expansion of the

metapleuron and VIII being telescoped into VII. This interpretation

is used in the descriptions in the present paper.

Considering the obvious clues to specific distinctions which are

furnished by the modifications of the hind tibiae of the males as well

as sculpturing and vestiture it is surprising that not more than one

species was described under each of the proposed generic names. In

this paper five species are considered. They may be separated by

the following key designed to work with both sexes :—

KEY TO THE SPECIES OF BLAENA WALKER

1. Lateral pronotal margins strongly

and broadly constricted between

lobes (fig. 4) .. .. 1... .... .. coarctata sp. nov.

Lateral margins straight or faintly

sinuate between lobes... ...... 2

2. Prosternal carinae high, forming

sides of a labial trough as deep as

height of labial II; abdominal

sternites without or with only a

vague sublateral groove... .. .. 3

Prosternal carinae vague, only

faintly elevated; abdominal stern-

ites sublaterally with a distinct,

broad, deep groove (fig. 9), the

punctures within it much finer

than those not in groove .... .. setosa Walker

3. Median line of pronotum and scutel-

lum with a prominent, calloused

earina; transverse impression of

pronotum deep, abruptly inter-

rupted sublaterally (fig. 5) .. .. mediocarinata sp. nov.

Median line of pronotum not or only

vaguely carinate; transverse pro-

notal impression neither deep nor

interrupted sublaterally .. .. .. 4

FROESCHNER—THE GENUS BLAENA 457

4. Sentellum weakly and broadly sul-

cate on midline of basal half; con-

nexivum with a single, subapical

setigerous pastor marginally on

each segment... .... ., .... ubsulcata sp. nov.

Scutellum not stikautte on thiedian line;

colnexivum with three or more

setigerous punctures marginally

on each segment... .. .... .. .. multitricha sp. nov.

Blaena coarctata sp. nov,

Fig. 4, 7, 12

Pragnosis: The strong, wide emargination of the lateral margin

of the pronotum opposite the ends of the transverse impression (fig.

4) marks both sexes of this species as distinet from others in the

genus, The strongly hooked apex of the hind tibia is also uniquely

distinctive of the male.

Description; Male: Parallel-sided, slencer for the genus, Head:

length little more than three-lourths width, 0.93 (0.85-1.04) ; 0,98 (0.93-

1.04); interocular width, 0.60 (0.58-0.63); anterior ontline parallel in

front of eyes, rounded at apex; jugum mostly flat, slightly elevated

marginally, with few long hairs submarginally and discally; clypeus

weakly convex, strongly and closely punetnred; antennals, I, 0.26

(0,24-0,29): IT, 0.87 (0,31-0,43):; ITI, 0.57 (0,53-0,66) + TV, 0.79 (0,75-

0.83); V (only one specimen with this segment), 0.88; labium reaching

bases of middle coxae, segments, I, 0.27 (0.24-0.29) : TT, 0.55 (0.54-0.56) :

TTT, 0.57 (0.55-0.60): TV, 0.42 (0.41-0.43). Pronotum: Length more

than half width, 1.80 (1.25-1.43) : 2.07 (1.90-2.82) ; diseally with ‘Scattered

hairs; side margins slightly expanded, broadly rounded on anterior

half, and broadly emarginate opposite ends of transverse impression

(fig. 4), with a submargin row of seven setigerons punctures; hind

margin broadly sinuate medially. Seutellwm: Distinctly broader than

long, 1,28 (1,17-1,36): 1.17 (1,10-1.80); somewhat convex, median line

usually vaguely carinate. Jlemelytron: Punctures of costal area

weaker and less distinet than those of clavas and dise; costal margins

without setigerons punctures but with seattered hairs similar to those

of disc; membrane reaching middle of last tergite, leavine genital

capsule exposed, veins straight and simple. Connexivum: Segments

IV, V, VI and VII each with a strong, subapical setigerous puncture on

margin. Proplewron; Densely and coarsely punctate except in lateral

458 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

submarginal line; prosternal carinae very low and indistinct; mid-

ventral line sharply carinate. Meso- and Metapleura: Virtually as

in fig. 6. Legs: Anterior tibiae subterete, slightly expanded on apical

third; anterior femur with a few low setigerous tubercles ventrally ;

middle femur with numerous smal] setigerous tubercles ventrally;

posterior femur with low blunt tubercles on anteroventral margin and

several more-prominent, acute tubercles on posteroventral margin;

hind tibia as in fig. 12, slender, coneavely curved on basal four-fifths,

abruptly decurved at apical fifth armed ventrally from base to

subapical bend with a series of tubercles increasing in length until

they form stout spines. Sternites: Densely and uniformly punctate

across full width except for a narrow strip laterally on II, IV and V;

surface with numerous minute, inconspicuous setigerous tubercles;

posterior margin finely denticulate. Terminalia: Genital capsule a

little finer and more densely punctate than sternites; posterior margin

deeply emarginate, with a prominent bluntly triangular projection

medially (fig. 7); gonostylus similar to fig. 8. Length of body, 5.46

(5.10-5.85).

Female (based on three specimens): Similar to males but hind

legs not modified as there. Head: Length: width:: 0.90 (0.85-0.93) :

0.97 (0.96-1.00); interocular width: 0.59 (0.58-0.60); antennals, I,

0.26 (0.26-0.27): TI, 0.31 ((0.381-0.32): TIT, 0.54 (0.53-0.55): IV, 0.75

(0.72-0.79): V, 0.82 (0.80-0.84); labials, I, 0.32 (0.30-0.36): II, 0.50

(0.50-0.51): III, 0.51 (0.50-0.53): IV, 0.42 (0.41-0.43). Pronotum:

Length: width:: 1.25 (1.20-1.85) : 2.05 (2.03-2.06). Scutellum: Length:

width:: 1.15 (1.11-1.18): 1.17 (1.16-1.20). Length of body, 5.18 (5.08-

5.17).

Type Data: Holotype male and allotype female, both in the

collection of the South Australian Museum, are labelled ‘‘Woodforde

Or., Andamooka Rgs., 31, Aug. 1948, G. F. Gross’’. Paratypes: same

data as types, two males (SAMus, RCF); ‘‘Mulwala, N.S.W., 1-16-53,

F. E. Wilson’’, one female; ‘‘Ultima [Victoria], 8-1915’’, two males

and one female (SAMus).

Distribution: So far this species is known only from the south-

eastern part of Australia as indicated by the data above.

Discussion: This is the most slender and shining of the species of

the genus. The distinctly emarginate lateral pronotal margins

suggested the specific name.

FROESCHNER—THE GENUS BLAEN«A 459

Blaena mediocarinata sp. nov.

Fig. 4

Diagnosis: The distinetly earinate midline of the pronotum coupled

with the abrupt and very deep triangular impression on either side of

the seutellum will separate this species from others in the genus, even

from subsulcata with which the male of this agrees in having the

straight, simple, hind tibia.

Description; (Based ou a single male.) Male: Elongate oval,

sides parallel, Head; Shorter than wide, 0.84: 1.10; interocular width,

0.73; anterior outlme parallel in frout of eyes, flatly rounded apically ;

jugum conyex above, forming « ridge paralleling elevated, punctate

clypeus, lateral margins broadly reeurved, submargin with a single

setigerous puncture in addition to the preocular one; antennals, 1,

0.23: 1, 0.14: LT, 0.56: TV, 0.538: V, 0.68; labium reaching between bases

of middle coxae, segments, [, 0.83: I, 0.54: TH, 0.53; IV, 0,44.

Pronotum: Vength more than half width, 143; 2.40; lateral margin

distinctly explanate with a single setigerous puneture on anterior lobe

and one on the strong prebasal angular projection; transverse

impression deep, abruptly interrupted by earinate midline and again

half way to lateral margins; punctures of anterior lobe rounded, of

posterior lobe (except umbones) with elongate, crowded punctures

making surface appear rugose; anterior lahe with a transverse row

of four setigerous punetures in front of frausverse impression;

posterior margin weakly bilobed, Seutellum; Width greater than

length, 1.47: 1.10; median line in part prominently carimate; decidedly

elevated basal third coupled with deep lateral impressions causing

apical two-thirds to appear abruptly depressed; punctures sparser on

apical part. Memelytron: Distinctly punetate to costal margin, with

no setigerous punctures; membrane with a whitish spot basally at

outer and inner angles; venation ivregnlarly branched, more distinetly

so marginally. Connexivwm; Segments V, Vi and VIT each with a

single subapical setigerons puncture on margin. Propleuron: Coarsely

and elosely punctate except in lateral submarginal line; prosternal

‘arinae thick and very much elevated, enclosing a labial groove deeper

than height of labial IT. Meso- and Metapleura: Virtually as in fig, 6.

Legs: Anterior tibia terete, weakly expanding toward apex; hind temnr

and tibia simple, not specially modified. Slernites: Not impressed

laterally; punetation laterally dense and coarse, absent from broad

Jateral band on V and VI, very widely scattered and much finer on broad

medioventral area; without setigerous tnhercles. Terminalia: Genital

460 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

capsule punctate to rngo-punctate, hind margin weakly concave, with

no medioapical prominence; gonostylus similar to fig, 8. Length of

body, 4.7 mm.

Female; Unknown.

Type Data: Holotype male, ‘‘Margaret River, 8S. W. A,, No. 5,

Haryard Anstr, Exp,, P. J. Darlington’, in Museum of Comparative

Zoology at Harvard University.

Distribution; The-species is known only [rom the type locality in

the southwestern corner of Australia in the State of Western Australia,

Discussion: As usual, there is considerable risk in deseribing a

new species from a single specimen, but if that specimen contains more

than one superficial difference from its nearest relatives such risk is

greatly reduced. Here characters of the antenna (IT mueh shorter

than I, 14:23), pronotum (carinate median line, lateral sub-basal angle

bearing a single setigerous puncture, transverse impression deep,

punetation of posterior lobe greatly elongate), and sentellum (trans-

verse, elevated basal third, very deep triangular impressions laterally,

broad low median carina, two arrangements of punctures), are all

anique with this species and any one of them will separate it from the

others in the genus. Ina group as poorly known as the Cydnidae there

is more advantage to ealling such a form to the attention of other

workers than there is in burying it among the unplaced specimens in

one’s collection.

Blaena multitricha sp. nov,

Fig, 13

Diagnosis: As the species name suggests, one of the outstanding

features is the abundance of long hairs on dorsal (except membrane)

and ventral surfaces and legs. The hind leg of the male has the ventral

femoral armature ineluding several large teeth on apical half and the

tibia distinetly bisinnate (fig. 13).

Description: Male (one specimen): Elongate oval, sides sub-

parallel. Head: Length: width;; 0,98:1.13; interoenlar width 0,70;

surface with numerous long hairs; anterior outline subparallel in front

of eyes, broadly rounded apically; juga flat with lateral margins slightly

raised; clypens subeconvex, punctate; antennals, [, 0,23: II, 0.30: ITT,

0.50; TV, 0.66; labium surpassing front coxae but not reaching middle

ones, segments, I, 0.36; 11, 0,58; TIT, 0,54; TY, 0.38. Pronotum: Length

more than half width, 1.36; 2.60; diseally with many long hairs, these

FROESCHNER—THE GENUS BLAENA 461

more abundant anteriorly and laterally where they completely confuse

the snbmarginal row of setigerous punctures; lateral margin entire,

straight at ends ol nearly obsolete transverse impression; punctation

on posterior lobe weakly longate; posterior margin broadly and very

weakly emarginate. Seutellum: Length: width:: 1.30; 1.49; diseally

with numerous seattered long hairs. Iemelytron; Clavus and corium

with numerous loug easily abraded hairs, eostally these much longer

and about six to fifteen in number; membrane reaching onto genital cap-

sule, venation moderately distinet, reticulate, Cownerwum: Margin of

each segment with several strong setigerous punctnres making the edge

appear denticulate. Propleuron: Densely and coarsely punefate except

in lateral submarginal line; prosternal earinae thick, high, enclosing

a labial groove about as deep as height of labial LL Meso- and Meta-

pleura: Virtually as im fig. 6, metapleural evaporatorium a little less

expanded. Legs: All with several to numerous long hairs, of which

many sre as long as or longer than the spines; anterior tibia not

markedly widened; posterior femur with three or four (variable on two

femora of lone specimen) long, strong teeth (fig, 13); posterior tibia

bowed, thiekened medially and apieally and with tubercles and hairs

as illustrated (fig, 13). Sternites; Punctation coarse and dense except

for impunetate lateral margin of TV and antero-lateral angle of V;

withont setigerous tubereles but with numerous short, ereet or nearly

erect hairs; hind margins finely denticeulate, with a small but strong

spine near ends. Terminalia: Genital capsule coarsely and closely

punctate, apical margin with broad, median emargination which js

convex medially; gonastylus similar to fig, 8,

Female (two specimens): Similar to male except that it usnally

has more hairs, posterior legs are not modified as there, sternites TV and

V punctate to margin, and sublateral spine on posterior margin of

sternites less distinct or absent. Mead: Length: widths: 0.97 (0.88-

1.06): 1,16 (1.12-1.20); interoeular width, 0.70 (0.70-0.70); autennals,

I, 0.25 (0.25-0.26): TT, 0.88 (0.83-0.24); TH, 0.50 (0.50-0.51): TV, 0.68

(0.66-0,71): V, 0.65 (missing on one); labials, I, 0.37 (0.53-0,.41): 1,

0.51 (0.50-0.53); TIT, 0.39 (0.87-0.41). Pronetwn; Length: width::

1.43 (1,80-1,56); 2.62 (2472.77). Sentellam: Length: widths: L47:

1.69 (other damaged), Length of body, 5.48 (5.12-5,84),

Type Data: Holotype male and allotype female, both in collection

of the Sonth Australian Museum, are labelled ‘Cunnamulla, Q.,

H. Hardeastle’’, the allotype having been damaged by dermestids.

Paratypes: Woodforde Ck. Andamooka Res,, South Australia, 1,

Sept., 1948. G. F. Gross, two females (SAMns, RCP). .

462 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Distribution: To date this species is known only from South

Australia and Queensland in Australia.

Discussion: The species name was suggested by the abundant

long hairs on the dorsal (except membrane) and ventral surfaces as well

as on all legs.

Blaena setosa Walker

Fig. 1, 2, 3, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11

1868 Blaena setosa Walker, Cat. Hemip. Brit. Mus., 3: 537.

1880 Macrymenus membranaceus Signoret, Ann. Soc. Ent. France,

1880: xviii.

Diagnosis: The virtual absence of prosternal carinae coupled

with the lack of an emargination in the lateral margins of the pronotum

easily separate this species from others in the genus. The male may

be readily recognized by the strong curvature of the basal two-thirds of

the hind tibiae (fig. 11).

Description: Male (fig. 1): Klongate oval, parallel-sided. Head:

Length: more than four-fifths width, 1.10 (1.07-1.14): 1.26 (1.23-1.28) ;

interocular width, 0.78 (0.76-0.80); anterior outline diverging from

preocular emargination, rounded at apex; jugum flat, margins narrowly

reflexed, mesoapical angles produced, submarginally with two setigerous

punctures anterior to preocular one; clypeus convex, punctate;

antennals, I, 0.26 (0.24-0.28) : I, 0.41 (0.37-0.43) : TIT, 0.51 (0.50-0.54) :

IV, 0.65 (0.64-0.66) : V, 0.62 (0.60-0.66) ; labium surpassing front coxae

but not reaching base of middle coxae, segment, I, 0.30 (0.30-0.31) : I,

0.58 (0.53-0.54) : IIT, 0.51 (0.48-0.53) : TV, 0.40 (0.38-0.43). Pronotum:

Length about half of width, 1.54 (1.49-1.59): 3.00 (2.86-3.09) ; lateral

margins not emarginate; lateral submargin with a row of a dozen

setigerous punctures; anterior lobe with numerous seattered long hairs;

posterior lobe with a transverse row of similar vestiture; hind margin

broadly and shallowly concave medially. Scutellum: Length less than

width, 1.49 (1.49-1.51): 1.71 (1.69-1.75); median line weakly or

obsoletely carinate. Hemelytron: Punctures of costal area weaker and

finer than on rest of corium; subcostal row of five setigerous punctures ;

membrane reaching onto genital capsule, veins simple or furcate, some-

times with a few closed cells. Conneatvum: Lateral margins of each

segment with three or four prominent setigerous punctures. Pro-

pleuron: Coarsely punctate; prosternal carinae absent; medioventral

line distinetly earinate. Meso- and Metapleurae: As in fig. 6. Legs:

FROESCHNER—THE GENUS BSLAENA 463

Anterior femur with setizerous punctures ventrally; anterior tibia

(fig. 10) weakly expanding; middle femur with setigerous punctures

and with one or two movable spines apically on both ventral margins

and two or three stout spines medioventrally on basal half; posterior

femur (fig. 11) ventrally with five stout spines, the median one distinetly

stouter and longer; posterior tibia (fig. 11) with basal two-thirds

strongly bowed outward, apical third straight, ventral margin of basal

two-thirds with a double row of strong tubercles whieh become finer

toward distal end of curvature and numerous long hairs which become

sparser toward base; distal end of curvature marked by a strong,

trianyvular tooth direeted hasad. Abdomen: Sublaterally with a strong,

continuous trough reaching from base to base of genital capsule (fig.

9), punetures in this furrow mach finer than elsewhere on stermites;

sternites ventrad of lurrow with seattered coarse punctures inter-

spersed with numerous setigerous tubercles, these more abundant along

moderate median band. Terminalia: Genital capsule coarsely and

closely punctate, apical margin slightly concave and without median

prominence; yonostylns as illustrated (fig, 8). Length of body, 6.46

(6.21-677).

Female: Mostly similar to male but with unmodified hind legs and

no setigerous tuhercles on abdominal sternites. Head: Length: 1.02

(1.01-1.03); 1.48 (1.15-1.24); interocular width, 0.75 (0.73-0.80) ;

antennals, I, 0.24 (0.23-0.26); LI, 0.35 (0,381-0,40) : ITT, 0.43 (0.41-0,47) :

LV, 0.55 (0.53-0.61) : V, 0.55 (0.53-0.58) ; labials, I, 0.29 (0.28-0.81) + IT,

0,44 (0.42-0.50) + ITI, 0.49 (0.46-0.52); TY, 0.41 (0.40-0.44), Pronotum

Length: width:; 1,58 (1.40-1.69) > 2.69 (2.55-2.94). Scutellum: Length:

width:: 1.37 (1.81-1.55): 1.52 (1.48-1.69). Length of body, 5,80

(5.28-6.28).

Type Data: Walker's type of Blaena setosa was described from

a female whose place of origin was indicated by a question mark as

being unknown; it is now in the British Museum of Natural History,

Signoret’s types ‘‘provient del’Anstralie’’, and are in the Signoret

collection in the Natnrhistoriseches Maseum in Vierma. The male now

labelled type is hereby designated the lectotype and the associated

female leetoallotype.

Distribution: The more than thirty specimens examined had all

been taken on the continent of Australia from the States of Western

Australia. South Australia, Queensland and Victoria.

Discussion: Since this species is the genotype its accurate fixation

was imperative. Notes and sketches kindly furnished hy Dr. W. E.

464 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

China of the British Museum and Dr. Max Beier of the Natur-

historisches Museum confirmed without doubt Distant’s earlier report

that Walker’s and Signoret’s generie and species names were based

on the same species,

A comparison of the full-tigure illustration in the present paper

and Signoret’s habitus and head drawings on plate 15, fig. 204 in his

“Revision”? (Ann, Soc. ent. France, ser. 6, vol, 3) reveals that his

figures are erroneous in several !eatures including the generically

important stylated eyes and the uniquely modified hind legs of the male.

Notes on three specimens from Victoria indicated that they had

been taken ‘‘in goil’’ and ‘‘under dead logs’’. Collection records were

for the months of September, October, December and January.

Specimens Examined; 18 tales, 11 females. Australia: Queens-

land: Bluff, Lmale (SAMus). Sonth Australia; Lake Eyre, Dee. 1951,

G. F. Gross, one female (SAMus); Mt. Remarkable, Oct, 1925, F. EB,

Wilson, one male (SAMus); Pt. Lineolm, one male (SAMnus);

Woodforde Ck., Andamooka Rgs,, 1, Sept. 1948, G, F. Gross, eight

males, three females (SAMus, RCI), Victoria: Carumley, 13 Jan.,

1887, ‘Tepper, one male, two females (SAMus), Western Australia:

Beverley, E. F. Boulay, two males, three females (SAMus) ; Geraldton,

Oct. 11, P. J. Darlington, four males, one female (MOZ); Munllewa, W,

D. Dodd, one male, one female (SAMas).

Blaena subsuleata sp, nov,

Diagnosis: The broad, shallowly suleate median line of the

scutellum gives a ready means for separating this species from the

others in the genus, The males of this and mediocarinalus are the

only ones within the genus with straight, unmodified hind tibiae,

Description: Male (one speeimen): Wlongate oval, sides sub-

parallel, Mead: Slightly wider than lone, 1.16:1.10; interoeular width

0.74; anterior outline weakly diverging from preocular emargination,

broadly rounded at apex and with mesoapical angles usually slightly

predneed; juga convex, lorming a strong but irregular ridge either

side of prominent, punctate elypens, lateral margin distinctly reflexed,

with submarginal preapical setigeronus puneture in addition to preocular

one; antennals, I, 0.23; LI, 0.23; TL, 0.64, TV, 0.76; V, 0.76; labium

reaching bases of middle coxae, segments, I, 0.33: II, 0.53: TI, 0.73:

IV, 0438. Pronotum: Length more than half width, 1.51; 2.70; lateral

margins weakly explanate, virtaally straight opposite ends of

transverse impression, with submarginal row of five or six setigerous

Rec. S.A Mesecm Vow NID Pouare NEIN

Pig, 1. Blaena setosa, gemerul libitis, dorsal view.

Pa fue ptate he]

Rec. 8.A Museum Vou. XII, Puate L

Fig. 2. Blaena setosa, head in dorsal view, X 14. Fig. 3. Blaena

setosa, head in lateral view, X 14. Fig. 4. Blaena coarctata,

pronotum in dorsal view, X 10. Fig. 5. Blaena mediocarinata,

pronotum and scutellum in dorsal view, X 10, Fig. 6. Blaena

setosa, meso- and metapleura in ventral view, X 10. Fig. 7.

Blaena coarctata, male genital capsule in posterior view, X 25,

Fig. 8. Blaena setosa, gonostylus in mesal view, X 32. Fig. 9.

Blaena setosa, abdomen in lateral view, X 8. Fig. 10. Blaena

setosa, anterior leg in anterior view, X 10. Fig. 11. Blaena setosa,

posterior leg in anterior view, X 10, Fig. 12. Blaena coarctata,

posterior leg in anterior view, X 12. Fig. 13. Blaena multitricha,

posterior leg in anterior view, X 12.

466 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

punctures, including a single one on posterior lobe; anterior lobe

obsoletely elevated laterally, with a transverse row of four setigerous

punetures just peeron to transverse impression; hind margin almost

straight. Seutellun.: Length equal to width, 1.388: 1.38; disc somewhat

convex with midline broadly but weakly suleate Srotn hase to past

middle. Hemelytron: Costal area explanate, broadly and weakly

recurved, without setigerous punctures; membrane reaching on to base

of genital capsule, venation strongly reticulate. Connexivum: Seg-

ments V, VE and VIT only each with subapical setigerous punctures on

margins. Propleuron: Densely and coarsely punctate except in lateral

submarvinal line; prosternal carinae thick and very prominent,

enelosing a labial groove deeper than height of labial 11; midventral

line not earinate, Meso- and Metapleura: Virtually as in fig. 6. Legs:

Anterior tibia subterete; posterior femur and tibia unmodified.

Sterniles: Weakly impressed sublaterally; punctation just mesad of

spiracnlar row most dense and deepest, becoming weaker and sparser

laterally and toward midline; [TY with a broad, marginal, impunctate

line laterally ; without setigerous tubereles. Terminalia: Genital

capsule more densely punctate than sternites, apical margin flared,

entire; gonostylus similar to fig. 8 Length of body 5.87.

Female (three specimens): Generally similar to male but lacking

impunctate lateral oe on sternite TV, Head: Length less than

width, 1.07 (1.02-1.16); 1.22 (1.20-1.26); interoewlar width, 0.80 (0.77-

0.83); antennals, [, 0.25 (0,24-0,29): TL, 0,26 (0,24-0,28); ITT, 0.62

(0,61-0.66): IV, 0.73 (0.71-0.76): V, 0.79 (0,75-0,86); labials, 1, 0.35

(0.31-0.39): II, 0.61 (0.58-0.64): TIT, 0.69 (0,64-0.78): TV, 0.44 (0.43-

0.46). Pronotwm; Length; width:: 1.57 (1.49-1.62): 2.87 (2.79-2.93),

Scutellum: Length: width:: 1.44 (1.48-1.48)+ 1.58 (1,51-1.71). Length

of body, 6.05 (6.00-6.14).

Type Datu: Holotype male and allotype female are labelled ‘Coen,

C.fape] York, VII-6 '32, ().|/ueensland|, Australia, Harvard Exp.,

Darlington’? and are in the collection of the Mnsenm of Comparative

Zoolowy at Uarvard University. Paratypes: Four females with same

data as types (MOZ, RCP).

Distribution; The type series cones from the large peninsula at

the northeast corner of Anstralia; this is the only known locality of

occurrence,

Piscussion: The unmodified hind leg of the male is noteworthy

in that it oceurs on only one other species in the genus, mediocarinatus.

CAVE PAINTINGS IN THE MOUNT LOFTY RANGES,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, (DIP, ANTHRO., CANTAB.),

HONORARY ASSOCIATE IN ETHNOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

During this century, a number of examples of aboriginal cave paintings, all of which are in shallow

caves or rock shelters, have been found in the Mount Lofty Ranges of South Australia.

Stirling (1902, pp. 205-211), illustrated a few of the aboriginal paintings which he had found in a

cave on the banks of the South Para River, near Gawler. Tindale and Sheard (1927, pp. 14-17), later

revisited this cave, publishing a complete record of the designs at the site as well as others they had

found in some smaller shelters further downstream.

CAVE PAINTINGS IN THE MOUNT LOFTY RANGES,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD (Dre. AnrHro., Cantas.), Honorary

Associate IN E}tTHNoLocy, Sours AustrRaLIAN Museum

Plate li and text fig, 1-2

During this century, a number of examples of aboriginal cave

paintings, all of which are in shallow caves or rock shelters, have been

found in the Mount Lofty Ranges of South Australia.

Stirling (1902, pp. 205-211), illustrated a few of the aboriginal

paintings which he had found in a cave on the banks of the South

Para River, near Gawler. Tindale and Sheard (1927, pp. 14-17),

later revisited this cave, publishing a complete record of the designs

at the site as well as others they had found in some smaller shelters

further downstream.

Fig. 1, Cave paintings in the Mount Lofty Ranges, 1/10th full size. Photograph—

C, P. Mountford,

Hossfeld (1926, pp. 287-297), described a group of cave paintings

ou the River Marne, in the Eden Valley district. Many of these

paintings, like those described in the present paper, show human beings

in strong movement.

No further examples of cave paintings were recorded from the

Mount Lofty Ranges until Mountford (1957, pp. 102-115), drew

468 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 2. Cave paintings in the Mount Lofty Ranges. 1/6th full size.

Photograph—C. P. Mountford.

MOUNTFORD—CAVE. PAINTINGS 469

attention to three additional localities where cave paintings had been

tound, i.e., Native Valley, Kanmantoo, Harrisons Creek, Tungkillo, and

Cooks Hill,

The present paper records a number of faded cave paintings,

recently found by Mr. Colin Griffiths, in a low rock shelter (Pl. li, A),

un section 2639, Hiindred of Macelesfield. ‘These paintings (illustrated

on PL. li, B and fig. 1 and 2), are entirely in red, and so faint that the

outlines of some of them could not be traced until they were sprayed

with water,

On the right wall of the shelter (Pl. li, A), which is less than

three feet high, are four human figures (fig 1, B), legs outstretched and

hands joined, who appear to be performing a dance. At their feet is a

line of six people walking. A, is an incomplete figure of a man with

a shield in his hand and C, a group of five parallel marks,

Shown on fig, 2, are drawings of the remainder of the paintings,

which are seattered around the wall of the cave, A and K are

representations of mien carrying shields in their hands, B and D,

simple ‘‘stick"’ gures, and C, a dancer, associated with an incomplete

circle. Fis probably a woman, with a digging stick in her hand and

a carrying bag over her shoulder. J, is a similar design, except for

a small cirele near the knee. This painting is also illustrated at Pl, li, B.

At Ei are two daucers, which somewhat resemble those on fig. 1, B;

G, a sumple dancing figure, H, another dancer associated with some

kangaroo-like creature, and at L, two human beings, the taller with

a shield in his hand, ard the smaller in the position of dancing.

DISCUSSION

These cave paintings have several] unusual characteristics; they

are painted entirely in red, all, with the exception of the kangaroo at

I, picture human beings, and most of them show action. In fact, with

the possible exception of those recorded by Hossfeld on the River

Marne (1926, fig. 1-4), they are the most spirited cave paintings that

| know of in South Australia.

It is not possible to estimate the age, nor to define the function of

these cave paintings, but the fact that there is no overpainting, except,

perhaps, the walking figures at fig. 1, B, and that the figures have been

painted entirely in red, suggests that they may have depicted some

inythical story helonging to the eeremonial life of the tribe.

470 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SUMMARY

This paper records an unusual group of cave paintings in the

Mount Lofty Ranges of South Australia. The designs are figured,

described and their possible function discussed.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I wish to acknowledge the assistance of both Dr. T. D. Campbell

and Mr. H. Bowshall, who motored me to the site and assisted in

tracing the cave paintings in situ.

REFERENCES

Hossfeld, Paul, 1926: ‘‘The Aborigines of South Australia. The

Occupation of the Eden Valley and Angaston Districts’’.

Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Aust., 50.

Mountford, Charles P., 1957: ‘‘ Aboriginal Cave Paintings in South

Australia’’, Ree. S. Austr. Mus., xiii.

Stirling, Edward C., 1902: ‘‘Aboriginal Rock Paintings on the South

Para River, Barossa Ranges’’. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

26.

Tindale, Norman B., and Sheard, Harold L., 1927: ‘‘Aboriginal Rock

Paintings, South Para River, South Australia’. Trans.

Roy. Soc., S. Aust., 51.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE

PLATE LI

A—Rock Shelter in which paintings were located, B—Faint cave painting of woman with

carrying bag on back, Photographs—C. P. Mountford.

Vou. NET Phare dl

Ta feteo pute ATIe |

A NEW COPROPHILOUS UROPODID MITE,

CILLIBA COPROPHILA SP. NOV. FROM A BAT CAVE

IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA (ACARINA-CILLIBIDAE)

BY H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

A new Uropodid mite, Cilliba coprophila sp. nov. living in the damp guano of a bat cave at

Naracoorte, South Australia, is described and figured from the adults of both sexes, as well as from

the larval, proto-, deuto-, and tritonymphal stages. It is shown to be strongly negatively phototropic

in behaviour.

A NEW COPROPHILOUS UROPODID MITE, CILLIBA COPRO-

PHILA SP. NOV. FROM A BAT CAVE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(ACARINA-CILLIBIDAE)

H. Womerstey, Sourn Austrauian Muszum

Fig. 1-3

SYNOPSIS

A new Uropodid mite, Cilliba coprophila sp. nov. living in the

damp guano of a bat cave at Naracoorte, South Australia, is described

and figured from the adults of both sexes, as well as from the larval,

proto-, deuto-, and tritonymphal stages. It is shown to he strongly

negatively phototropic in behaviour.

Family Cillibidae Tragardh.

Tragardh, 1, 1944. Zur Systematik der Uropodiden—Ent. Tidsk.,

65: 171.

Genus Cilliba v. Heyden

von Heyden, 1896. Isis Oken., 19: 613.

Cilliba coprophila sp. nov.

Fig. 1 A-L, 2 A-G, 3 A-D

Types. The holotype female, allotype male and morphotypes of

the larval and nymphal stages as well as numerous paratypes in the

collection of the South Australian Museum.

Locality and Biotope. Found in very large numbers in the damp

guano on the floor of a bat cave at Naracoorte, South Australia, August

26th to September 2nd, 1956 and collected by members of the Cave

Exploration Group of South Australia led by Mr. E. Hamilton-Smith.

Description.

Holotype female. Fig. 1 A-K, M-N. A dark brown, strongly

sclerotised and broadly oval species with convex dorsum and somewhat

flatter venter: length of idiosoma 930»,width 670».

472 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 1. Cilliba coprophila sp. nov, A-K, M-N Female. A—venter, B—dorsum, C—

gnathosoma, D—dorsal seta, E—ventral seta, f—chelicerae, G—tritosternum, H—leg 1,

I—leg o, J—leg m1, K—leg rv, M—camerostome, N—tectum, L—male, intercoxal shield.

WOMERSLEY—A NEW UROPODID MITE 473

Fig. 2. Cilliba coprophila sp. nov. A-B, tritonymph, A—venter, B—dorsum,

C-G deutonymph, C—venter, D—dorsum, E—posterior dorsal seta, F—posterior

ventral seta, G—dorso-lateral and marginal setae in lateral and dorsal view.

474 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 8. Cilliba coprophila sp. nov. A-B protonymph, A—venter, B—dorsum. C€-D

larva, C—venter, D—dorsim,

WOMERSLEY—A NEW UROPODID MITE ATS

Dorsum tig. 1 B; smooth and shming, idiosoma almost completely

covered by an entire dorsal shield which is only separated by a narrow

strip of cuticle from the narrow marginal shields, anteriorly the

marginal shields coalesce with the dorsal shield while posteriorly they

are only separated therefrom at the most by a thin suture line, anterior

of the dorsal shield is the cone-shaped ‘‘vertex’’ shield which is

somewhat less sclerotised and bears a pair of long 96. vertical setae,

the dorsal shield is furnished with ca. 20 pairs of long 180, setae,

fig. 1 D, which are slightly swollen at the base and distally barbed, the

marginal shields carry a donble row of about 20 pairs of similar setae

on each side, in addition both dorsal aud marginal shields are furnished

with a number of small pores.

Venter fig, | A; anteriorly with a large camerostome, fig. 1 M,

in which are situated the enathosoma, ecoxae of legs JT and the

tritosternum; the ftritosternum, fig. 1 G, is exposed between coxae

I and consists of a {wo-segmented basal part and a single ciliated

lacinia which is trifid distally; the ventral shields consist of a sterno

venital shield extending from the posterior margin of the camerostome

to the posterior edee of acetabula IV where it is separated from the

large and expanded ventri-anal shield hy a strong suture line, the

anterior margin of the sterno-genital shield is lightly curved and 192.

wide and forms the posterior margin ol the camerostoime, in the

middle of the shield and extending from the anterior margin of

acetabula I to the middle of aeetabula IV is a large oval perigenital ring

in which lies the close fitting similarly shaped epigynial shield, laterad

of the perigenital ring the sterno-genital shield carries 7 pairs of

simple setae and one pair of small anterior lyriform pores, the anterior

three pairs of setae are small and le between coxae [1], the other

pairs are longer and lie between coxae TI and 1V with the last pair

posterior of the perigenital ring, the perigenital ring is 240» long by

150» and anteriorly has a small conical projection which divides the

anterior margin of the shield; the ventri-anal shield oeeupies the

whole of the venter posterior of acetabula [V where it is marked off by

a posteriorly eurved ‘‘metapodal line’’, the shield carries 6 pairs of

medium to long setae which are distinetly swollen basally, fiz. 1 KE, and

to 154» long, as well as a pair of paranal setac; the endopodal shields

are coalesced with the sterno-genital shield while the exopodals are

strongly sclerotised to form the edges of the ‘tfovealae pedales’’; the

stigma is situated between coxae IT and IT with a convoluted peritreme

as figured.

476 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Gnathosoma fig. 1 C; ventrally with four pairs of long, strong

setae of which the capitular and both pairs vf post-rostral setae are

ciliated, the rostral nude; the tectum, fig. 1 N, is a long dentate hyaline

spike; palpt 5-segmented, the basal seyment carries two ciliated setae

af which the inner is short and blunt, the tarsus is supplied with a

nmimber of long setae and its basal specialised seta is 2-tined; chelicerae

as in fig, 1 F, strongly sclerotised, the fixed digit with only one strong

tooth and an apical blunt hyaline lobe within which ean be seen a canal

which rons back through the digit, movable digit with two strong

teeth,

Legs fig. 1 H-K; all short and six-seymented, the basal segments

of Tl-IV lying within distinct loveae, leg 1 is the slenderest and

furnished with coxal and femoral laminae as figured, legs 11 and III

also with femoral laminae, all tarsi with long carnnele and paired

elaws and on [I-IV with some strong spines: leg T 560. long, Il 468,

TI] 468, TV 526)»,

Allotype male. Ol! the same general lacies and size as in the

female, differing ouly in the stertio-genital shield in the centre of which

between coxae [1] lies the rounded genital orifiee and shield (fig. 1 L).

The chelicerae are similar to those of the female,

Morphotype tritonymph. Fig. 2 A-B; of the same general facies

as in the female, but much less sclerotised and lighter in colour; length

of idjosome 725p, width 550p.

Dorsum; dorsal and marginal shields as m adults, the dorsal

setae plain or only indistinctly barbed distally, and to 80, long, the

tnarginal setae slightly shorter.

Venter fig. 24; sternal shield extending from posterior margin

of eamerostome to slightly beyond acetatnla TV with a lightly concave

posterior margin well separated from anterior margin of the ventri-anal

shield, the anterior margin is 144» wide, the lateral margins closely

contour the eoxae but are separated from the endopodal shields by a

very narrow strip of enticle, the shield carries 8 pairs of setae and

two pairs of pores, the third and fourth pairs of setae are in a

transverse row, the anterior pores are lyriform and near fhe anterior

margin, the other pair are small and round and lie between the sixth

pair of setae, the shield is 326» long and its setae from 30, to 48, long:

the ventri-anal shield is as figured, 3602 wide and 182» long and

furnished with long 80 setae as in the female.

Gnathosoma as in female.

Legs as in female, | 292u long, TT-TTT 351e, TV 374u,

WOMERSLEY—A NEW UROPODID MITE. AT]

Morphotype deutonymph fig. 2 C-G; smaller and less selerotised

than the tritonymph; length of idiosoma 655p, width 468p.

Dorsum fig. 2 D; with four dorsal shields; a large median shield

410» long, rounded anteriorly then widening gradually to 222 in a line

with coxae IL] and then contracting sharply to a rounded end just in

front of the posterior shield, it is furnished with 5 pairs of simple

setae 244, and one pair of lyriform pores anterior of the first pair of

setae which are much nearer together than the other pairs; the posterior

shield is transverse with coneave anterior margin 1764 wide by 23,

long and without setae; laterad on each side of the posterior constricted

portion of the median shield is an elongate widely oval shield 117»

long by 59u wide and between the posterior end of these shields and the

median shield is a long strong blunt barbed seta 59»; the marginal

shields are not demarcated, only being indicated by two Jongitu:linal

rows of very peculiarly shaped setae, these setae are on papillae with

a very short peduncle and then a pickaxe-head shaped seta with an

expanse to 90a, owing to the short pedunele or halt these setae are

closely adpressed to the body surface, dorsally each seta is lightly

convex and in dorsal view is a long narrow pointed ellipse (fig. 2 G),

two other pairs of these setae lie clase to the posterior tip of the median

shield and in front of the posterior shield.

Venter fig, 20; sternal shield small, 164. long by 1054 wide,

extending from anterior of acetabula TL to posterior of acetabula II

with the posterior margin tapering to a blunt angle, with 3 pairs of

setae 35» long; anal shield trapezoidal, anterior margin straight 100p,

lateral margins divergent and posterior margin lightly convex 175z,

with only the paranal setae 35 long and the anus posterior, its length

is 105»; a pair of oval shields just posterior of acetabula TV 82u long

hy 35. wide; a posteriorly curved suture line, in which is a pair of

small rounded pores, runs between acetabula IV, between this line and

the anterior margin of the anal shield are two pairs of fine setae and

on each side laterad of the anal shield is a stronger seta with a pair

of rounded shieldlets close by.

Gnathosoma as in tritonymph.

Legs as in tritonymph, T 2355p long, If 3514, TO 3381, TV 346,,

Morphotype protonymph fig. 3 A-B; very similar to the deuto-

nymph but of smaller size; length of idiosoma 5144, width 3386p,

Dorsum fig. 3 B; with the shields of the same conformation as m

the dentonymph, median shield 418» lang by 884« wide, with 5 pairs

478 RECORDS OF THE 5.4. MUSEUM

of fine setae 20, long, posterior shield 2742 wide by 14, long, lateral

shields 125,» long by 64» wide; setae between lateral and median shields

61» long, the pickaxe-head shaped setae to 91p in expanse.

Venter fig. 3 A; much as in deutonymph, as figured; sternal shield

168 long by 1114 wide reaching posteriorly to level of anterior of

acetabula TV, only demarcated by discontinuity of cuticular striations,

with 3 pairs of setae 342 long; anal shield more rounded than in

deutonymph, 173 wide by 122, long with only the paranal setae; the

postero-lateral shields of the deutonymph are wanting; stigma and

peritreme much as in the deutonymph,

Gnathosoma including palpi and chelicerae as in the deutonymph.

Legs as in dentonymph, I 360,h long, IT 360n, ILL 345, IV 384p,

Morphotype larva fig, 3 C-D: small, length of idiosoma 480,, width

288, with only 3 pairs of legs.

Dorsum fig. 3 D; without any definite shields except the posterior

which is 125» wide hy 22. long; with a media! double row of 5 pickaxe-

head shaped setae which are very thin with an expanse to 67»,

marginally or submarginally with longitudinal row of 10 similar setae

on each side, of which the first 4 are thin, the others thicker and shaped

as in the deutonyimpb, just in {vont of the posterior shield is a pair of

similar setae with an expanse of 125y; the dorsal surface is irregularly

ornamented by pitting as figured,

Venter fig. 3 C; as in protonymph, but the sternal shield is only

indicated by the break in the cuticular striations, it is 1604 long by

102» wide with 3 pairs of setae 23p long; the anal shield is even more

rounded than in the protonymph, 91 wide by 63» long; between the

aternal and the anal shield is a single pair of fine normal setae and

laterad of these a very fine pickaxe-head shaped seta; the peritreme

is only shghtly developed and the stigma is just posterior of coxae IT,

Gnathosoma, pal and chelicerae much as in protonymph.

Legs as tigured, 1 356 long, I] 336, ITL 3124, TV 326,.

Remarks. This is an interesting and remarkable species in the

sudden and extreme morphological change in the form of the dorsal and

marginal setae from the pickaxe-head shape in the larva, protonymph

and deutonymph, to the normal type of seta found in the tritonymph

and adults. The pickaxe-head setae in the earlier stages may possibly

he of assistance in enabling the mites to traverse the pellets of guano

in which the mites live.

WOMERSLEY—A NEW UROPODID MITE 479

The collection of these mites, many thousands, was from a 2 lb.

treacle tin of moist guano collected from the bat cave and sent to the

Museum. When first opened the surface of the guano was a seething

mass of living mites, but within seconds of being exposed to the light,

they had all disappeared below the surface. This negative response to

light was repeated many times.

THE ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. M. COOPER, ASSOCIATE IN ANTHROPOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper refers to the archaeological stone implements of Kangaroo Island, an uninhabited land at

the time of its discovery by Captain Matthew Flinders, R.N., H.M.S. Investigator in March 1802.

The various groups, including some smaller types hitherto unnoticed, are described and compared,

where applicable, with similar material found upon the adjacent mainland. It is suggested that the

smaller implements may have been used concurrently with the dominant large pebble implement

industry of Kangaroo Island termed Kartan.

The diverse problems relating to the islanders’ time and direction of arrival and, in addition, their

departure or local extinction are referred to and some conjectural solutions discussed.

THE ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By H. M. COOPER, Hon. Associare In ANTHROPOLOGY,

SovurH Avstrauian Muspum, ADELAIDE

Map and text fig. 1-48

SUMMARY

This paper refers to the archaeological stone implements of

Kangaroo Island, an uninhabited land at the time of its discovery

by Captain Matthew Flinders, R.N., H.M.S. Investigator in March

1802.

The various groups, including some smaller types hitherto

unnoticed, are described andl compared, where applicable, with similar

material found upon the adjacent mainland. It is suggested that the

smaller implements may have been used concurrently with the dominant

large pebble implement industry of Kangaroo Island termed Kartan.

The diverse problems relating to the islanders’ time and direction

of arrival and, in addition, their departure or local extinetion are

referred to and some conjectural solutions discussed.

PHYSICAL FEATURES OF KANGAROO ISLAND

Kangaroo Island, which extends more than 90 miles in an east-

west direction and has a maximum width of 30 miles, is separated from

the mainland to the north-east by Backstairs Passage with a minimum

width of nine miles and in a northerly direction by Investigator Strait

which is about 25 miles wide. The ocean to the south of the island

deepens rapidly offshore with the exeeption of a few outlying reefs

and rocks, the 100 fathom line approaching the coast in one area to

within a distance of 30 miles. The interior of Kangaroo Island, shortly

after Captain Flinders’ discovery, was found to be covered in many

places with dense, sometimes impenetrable scrub and in others with

forests of Kuealyptus trees. The rainfall varies between 17 and 30

inches, the climate of the island, due to its position being cool, temperate

and equable. Fish, birds, kangaroos, wallabies, opossums and seals

abound. The highest official physical feature is Mount Macdonnell—

984 feet,

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

482

AqubnojiM >.

ubgiy 3S "D

J9ys

Tbotig, o1D104, :

SI0UIT “25

~ pUNnDaYyWDS “D

[= Syosses Apsinyw

ro i"

(vi uv) anvis!

3alyl VOONVYYN

VIASNINSd 3xHOA

ooUuvONV

21paned np 'D

ppiog 'D

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND 483

DISCOVERY AND FIRST TRACES OF PRIMITIVE MAN

‘aptain Flinders, when running along the north coast of the island

in J.M.S. Investigator during March 1802, wrote thus in his journal:—

‘Neither smoke nor other marks of inhabitants has as yet been

perceived upon the southern land,”’

This observant officer, deseribing the kangaroos seen feeding,

continued :—

‘Our landing gave them no disturbance . . . The poor animals

suffered themselves . . . in some instances to be knoeked on the head

with sticks . . , There was little doubt, however, that this extensive

piece of land was separated from ihe continent for the extraordinary

tameness of the kangaroo . . . concurred with the absence of all

traces of inen to show that it was not inhabited . . . That the natives

of the continent did not visit it was demonstrated if not by the want of

all signs of such visit yet by the tameness of the kangnroo, an animal

which ou the continent resembles the wild deer in timidity.’’

Captain Flinders revisited Kangaroo Island a week later and after

going ashore near lis former landing wrote :—

‘A party was sent to shoot kanguroos . . . The kanguroos were

found to be less numerous than at the first anchoring place, and

they had become shy so that very few were killed.’’ Early settlers

subsequently confirmed the soundness of Captain Flinders’ deductions

—that his discovery was an wninhalited land.

Definite evidence of an archacological native occupation, however,

was established with the discovery by Howehin (1903) of some hammer-

stones at Hawk's Nest Station adjoming Murray’s Lagoon. ‘Tindale

and Maegraith (1931) found !yrther examples at the same locality in

association with some massive trimmed pebble implements and Cooper

(1942) made an extensive examination during the period 1954-9 which

disclosed the existence of numerons camping places distributed widely

thronghout most of the island, 1,400 pebble choppers and **horsehoof”’

shaped trimmed cores were collected during the course of this survey

and, in addition, more than 150 lammerstones,

This preliminary inspection appeared to indicate that the massive

trimmed pebble chopper/core implement. industry was a completely

pure one with the exception of one or two small flakes with secondary

trimming which appeared to be merely fortuitous. A careful

examination of these and additional sites during a further survey,

however, disclosed the existence of a former well established small

484 RECORDS OF THE 3.A, MUSEUM

and medium sized implement industry with the finding of more than

160 implements and, furthermore, a large number of smal] discarded

workshop cores which confirmed their origin, This material, which

has never been deseribed, is referred to in a later section of this paper.

THE LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS OF KANGAROO ISLAND

The large trimmed pebble chopper/core block implement industry

has been deseribed as previously stated and a brief allusion to it will

suffice in this place, for comparison, before proceeding with a

description of the small and intermediate forms which constitutes a

principal section of this paper.

The large implements are prepared by hammer flaking most or

nearly all of one side of water-worn fine grained quartzite pebbles,

usnally oval in shape. The lower periphery of this side, after bemg

roughly flaked {o the desired shape, is secondarily trimmed with

vonsiderable skill to produce # fairly thin and often stepped working

edve. Treatment of the upper portions of this prepared side is

confined to rough flaking and only to such an extent that the pebble could

be held eouveniently im the hand during use,

The typical pebble chopper implement of Kangaroo Island,

therefore (fig, 1), is a semi-uniface core implement whose massive

form when completed is attained by primary and secondary hammer

flaking and trimming as described above, A fully unifaee pebble

chopper type exists ut sparingly,

The lower or working edge of pebble choppers, as indicated by the

existence ol numerous well ysed examples, gradually retreats backwards

from its original form owing to wear and retrimming antil it becomes

vertical and probably too blunt and obtnse to carry ont its original

frnetions. The heavily erushed and bruised edges of many, however,

appear to indicate their conversion for some other purpose in the

concluding stages of their nseful life.

An interesting feature of many of these pebble choppers is the

existence of well defined pitting and bruising upon the nether surfaces

suggesting their reversal when required lor hammers, The exercise of

this function is also evident wpon massive trimmed angular blocks

from Hallett Cove, Cooper (1959), and also on similar material which

the writer has recently collected upon campsites extending along the

banks of the River Wakefield.

Large core-like implements with stepped secondary trimming,

made chiefly from angular blocks, are relatively common upon

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND 485

Kangaroo Island, They are, with) few exceptions, of ‘horsehoof’’

shape as in fig 2. Their working edges, when reduced by wear and

retrimming, hecome obtuse similarly to the pebble choppers, or even

concave im extreme cases, when the upex overliangs the trimmed

working base. (Cooper, 1943, fig. 2 and 3.) The Kangaroo Island

industry is practically devoid of millstones both upper and lower.

The existence of large assemblages of implements around many

lagoons and upon the banks of creeks, mostly inland, indicates that

such localities were favoured when seleeting the sites for important

camps. Primitive man upon Kangaroo Island, however, inhabited

many parts of the tableland country, espeeially in places where there

exist saucer shaped depressions or pans of various diameters and a few

feet deep with a tenacious clayey bottom often overlain by a thin layer

of sand. At examination of these places reveals the oceurrence, here

and there, of a depression around the margin of which two or three

stone implements may be found. ‘The ehoice of any particular pan

appears to have been related to its siperior capacity for retaining

water, The comparative fewness of implements in these surroundings

appears to associate them with the wanderings und temporary presence

of a small group or single family moving about from place to place

in seareh of food and water.

The existence of implements in almost iupenetrable sernb country

is diffenlt to explain, They may have been lost or discarded by hunters

during or after setling fire to the surrounding country—a favourite

means of rounding np animals and reptiles for food—or they could be

relics of a more rigorous climatic period and less vegetation if their

age were sufficiently remote.

The beauty and syminetry of many pebble implements indicate that

at some period af least the Nangaroo Islanders possessed craftsmen

capable of producing work of no mean order,

COMPARISON OF KANGAROO ISLAND AND MAINLAND

LARGE TYPHS

{t appears probable, from material gathered during the last 25

years, despite the existence of relatively few small implements, that

the dominant feature of the Kangaroo Island material culture was

the large trimmed pebble industry and that the ‘‘horsehoof’? shaped

trimmed core may have been a contemporary, The relative ratios of

these types collected at two localities—Hog Bay (Willson) River and

Discovery Lagoon near Mmn Bay—are interesting owing to their

486 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

similarity. There are no means of estimating, however, whether this

affinity is merely coincidental or presents some unknown significant

factor :—

Trimmed Pebble “‘Horsehoof”’

Choppers Trimmed Cores

Discovery Lagoon... .. 363 29

Hog Bay (Willson) River 337 23

The aggregates of pebble choppers and ‘‘horsehoof’’ cores collected

from all island campsites by the writer—1,277 and 118 respectively—

and the total absence of the latter from many sites, appear to indicate

that these were too few in number to represent a separate culture

period.

It is an interesting feature, but one difficult to explain, that none of

the camping grounds known upon the neighbouring main, many of

which are within visible distance of the island, show any trace whatever

of a dominant pebble implement culture although large numbers of

pebbles exist, at least at present, along its shores, including the

vicinity of Cape Jervis, near which place the writer discovered over

90 ‘‘horsehoof’’ trimmed cores, fashioned from angular, irregular

blocks, upon one spot alone. No dominant pebble implement industry,

moreover, has yet been discovered elsewhere in South Australia

although scattered examples have been found, apparently as a

subsidiary type, in association with many large implements such as at

Artipena water, Cooper (1943) and elsewhere.

The existence of the ‘‘horsehoof’’? upon Kangaroo Island, in

limited numbers upon some sites and its complete absence from others,

may indicate that it was a type already known to the islanders before

their arrival there and that its use was relatively unimportant in

comparison with the pebble implement culture which, owing to the

scarcity of other large forms, appears to have been evolved and

developed as a conventional type shortly afterwards.

SMALL KANGAROO ISLAND IMPLEMENTS

The writer, during extensive field work in the early thirties, found

a few small well defined implements of quartzite in association with

the large pebble implement industry. Others, derived from milky

quartz, with unmistakable secondary trimming were also discovered

but the relative scarcity of the latter did not account for the presence

of many small discarded working cores in that material, of which over

200 were collected. A more thorough examination at a later date of

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND A8T

many flakes scattered about clearly indicated that there existed amongst

them, primitive endserapers and other types, with crude secondary

trimming, which had been overlooked by the very nature of their

extreme primitiveness, The presence, moreover, of a number of

simple but keen edged flakes, devoid of any secondary trimming, many

of whieh bore chipping upon iheir nether sides, indicating wear from

use, suggests their definite employment as knives, The existence of

so many discarded milky quartz cores and simple flakes, often showing

their bulbs of percussion, together with the scarcity of well worked

small implements upon numerous campsites reveals that many of these

simple flakes must have been deliberately made to serve as cutting

tools.

This small implement assemblage includes trimmed end and

‘nosed’? serapers, discoidal and irregular shaped adzestones, knives/

saws, awls, prepared cores and some solitary types which are included

in the accompaitying drawings. All those diseovered by the wriler are

derived from milky quartz and quartzite with a few exceptions which are

referred to in their proper place,

The number of small Kangaroo [sland implements available,

although rather cirenmseribed, is sufficiently large to enable a tentative

comparison to he made with those existing elsewhere in South Australia,

This incieates that they are comparable in some cases with, bat seantily

representative of, some types to be found upon the nearby main

although the island examples as a whole exhibit eruder workmanship.

Some allowance should he made, however, for those deriyed from milky

quartz, Which constitute the majority, because accurate primary and

secondary flaking of this material is most, diffienlt to control. The finish

npon those produced from quartzite is somewhat better,

Most of the small Kangaroo Island implements, the majority of

which retain their bulbs of perctission, have been strick from prepared

eores but a few are merely random nulky quartz natural blocks or

fragments which have received rough secondary trimming to provide

fhe necessary working edge. The preference for milly quartz appears

to be due to its prevalence upon the surface at or near many campsites

whereas quartzite had to be transported inland from restrieted spots

situated upon the coast. The seareity of small quartzite working cores

appears to mdicate that some implements in this material had their

origin in flakes of suitable size and shape disearded during the

manufacture of large trimmed pebble choppers. A tmmber of types

widespread upon the mainland, however, such as the beautifully

488 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

executed Pirri and Woakwine points, feometric and other microliths,

slate scrapers and polished axeheads have not been found upon the

island,

It is most difficult to determine whether the smaller implements of

Kangaroo Island were employed coneurrently with the large pebble

implement industry or whether they represent some other period in

its ocenpation by primeval man. Stratified deposits throughout the

world, generally, disclose the existence of the larger and progressively

improved stone implements in the lower (earlier) layers which in

turn were displaced, at least prince ipally, by smaller, lighter and hetter

designed forms—the result of experience and the demand for them

in the manufacture of a wider range of domestic, hunting and fighting

equipment,

The large and massive stone implements, improvised by primitive

man in earlier periods were eminently suitable for carrying out heavy

work such as eutting boughs lor shelters and the shaping of his rndely

designed cluhs and spears. ‘There would be other purposes, however,

which would need some small simple or trimmed flakes even at that

period such as making skin cloaks, for ceremomes and cutting in

general. In the absence of any well defined or established small

implement types, which upon the mainland are indicative of later

cultural periods, representatives of which oceur there in vast numbers,

it is possible that the somewhat limited and ill defined small forms

of Kangaroo Island, suitable for the performance of lighter duties such

as those just referred to, were contemporaries of the large pebble

implements of that aren,

THE CAPE CASSINT HOARD

This interesting and perplexing series was found in a little

shallow rocky hollow upon the top of the coastal cliffs at Cape Cassini

and within a few feet of their seaward edge, It ineludes several

mieroliths, some of whieh appear to possess pressure flaking, and also

several discarded working cores of microlithie form from which they

have heen struck. A smal! quartzite hammerstone was found nearby

aud may have heen used to fashion them, The importance of the find

justified the collection of all the discarded flakes for future reference—

82 in number, The material, identified by the late Sir Douglas Mawson

as a eherty flint, was considerably weathered and from the general

deposition of the assemblage it is apparent that the implements were

made where they Iuy and not transported, although the cherty flint

itself may have been derived from elsewhere,

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND 489

The construction of the individual specimens, which constitute the

Cape Cassini hoard, makes it difficult or even impossible to associate

them with other Kangaroo Island implements. They appear to

resemble, in many respects, forms which exist in South East South

Australia and also in rock type, but their appearance in such an

isolated situation, if this be true, is surprising. There is convenient

access, however, to the cliff top where they lay, from an extensive flat

rocky platform a few feet above sea level. It is possible that they nay

be relics of a forced or chance landing from seawards in pre-historic

times, or, on the other hand, disclose the presence of a workshop site

made by a mainland native several of whom were known to have been

captured at the commencement of the Huropean occupation by roving

undesirables and forced to accompany them,

CONSTITUTION OF THE CAPE CASSINTI HOARD

Discarded flakes .. 2. 2. 2. 1. oe. 82

Discarded working cores .. .. .. -. i

Microlith endscraper .. .. .. .. .. 1

Irregular shaped knives .. .. .. ., 2

Microlith knives .. .. .. .. we es 2

Mndscrapers.., -. -- 2, -- 44 «+ 8: 3

Worn adze .. -. 6. we i ee ee 1

Concave adzes .. ,. .. 6. 2 ee ee 4

Irregular shaped adves fo kay “ele ls 2

Total. ce we tee et) LO

A TASMANIAN POST-HUROPEAN STONE IMPLEMENT

INDUSTRY

During historic times—shortly after Captain Flinders’ diseovery

in 1802—sealers, whalers and adventnrers [rom Bass’ Strait. and

elsewhere established camps at Antechamber Bay and Cape Hart

bringing Tasmanian women with them, Small well trimmed flint

implements, similar to those found in Tasmania, have been collected

at both sites associated with fragments of iron, glass and European

wun flints. Those discovered by the writer at the ¢ Cape Hart campsite

comprised more than 70 trimmed implements chiefly ‘‘nosed’’ scrapers,

adzestones and cores. Water-worn flint nodules upon ‘the adjoining

beach indicate the source of material, It is interesting to observe that

in contrast with the island’s early inhabitants the Tasmanian women

ignored the quartzite pebbles amongst the flint nodules. This Stone

490 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Age-Kuropean phase was of brief duration and ceased to exist with the

advent of permanent settlement and a stabilised administration. These

two sites were described by Tindale (1937), Alison Harvey (1941) and

Cooper (1948).

FOOD REMAINS

Cooper (1943) referred to the existence of sea shells upon three

eroded campsites in association with large pebble implements, hammer-

stones and, in one case, burnt hearth stones. A more recent examination

of two of these sites by the writer revealed additional extensive erosion

exposing, in one locality, a mound of burnt earth containing many

mussel shells and in the other a partly exposed stratum of further

mussel shells, two inches below which a simple quartzite flake was

embedded im situ. Both these species are living forms in the nearby

waters of Pelican Lagoon.

The sole surviving proof of primitive man’s occupation of

Kangaroo Island rests upon the existence of many stone implements

which is indisputable evidence but the significance of the shell food

remains in association with them upon three scattered campsites

continues unsolved until it is determined later by a Carbon 14 dating.

There is just a possibility that they may represent the feasts of the

Tasmanian women already referred to or other wanderers in the early

1800s. The association of these shells with pebble choppers in the

situations stated above suggests their contemporaneity and if confirmed

by a dating would be invaluable in providing a firm foundation upon

which to base investigations so necessary in the solution of the problems

still remaining.

ARRIVAL OF THE KANGAROO ISLANDERS

The date and direction of the Kangaroo Islanders’ arrival, the

duration of their occupation and, in addition, their departure—or

extinction in situ—are all at present unknown and impossible of solution

with the meagre details available. Some possibilities, all of them

purely hyopthetical however, may be advanced and discussed.

Their arrival at what is now Kangaroo Island could have been

accomplished in various ways three of which may be mentioned as

possible :—

(1) Via an unbroken landbridge when it was still part of the

main.

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND 49)

(2) By means of a crossing which included a series of deep

water chanuels, shoals and dry land, involving walking,

swimming, wading and the use of canoes or rafts.

(3) By crossing the water in canoes or rafts by one of the

channels somewhat similar to those in existence today

such as Backstairs Passage or Investigator Strait. (Vide

accompanying map.)

The ocenpation of the island or its equivalent at that time would

present no difficulties if the conditions referred to in (1) prevailed but

if those in (2) or (3) existed a crossing in such circumstances would

have been difficult although not impracticable in the former but well

nigh impossible in the latter with the facilties which it may be supposed

{he natives of that period would have at their disposal, There is

nothing to indicate that they were better equipped than at the time of

the Huropean occupation but before proceeding further it may be useful

in this place to deseribe the two stretches of water which separate the

island from the main,

Investigator Strait has a minimum width of about 22 sea miles.

Its bed is rermarkably uniform in contour, a line of soundings drawn

from shore to shore in the vieinity of Point Marsden and Troubridge

Point giving the following successive depths in fathoms :—3, 17, 16, 17,

17, 18, 18, 18, 17, 18, 17, 16, 16, 15, 15, 14, 13, 10,9 and 5. Investigator

Strait is free of offshore dangers with the exception of those fairly

close in under the land snch as the Althorpe Isles,

The soundings in Backstairs Passage with a minimum width of

only nine miles, however, are very irregular deepening and shoaling

rapidly as for example from 17 fath. to 31, 7 to 31 and 4 to 18, They

range between 44 fath. off Cape St. Albans and 3 on the Yatala Shoal.

An examination of charts of Backstairs Passage indicates that deeps,

shallow banks and the Yatala Shoal lie, generally, in a northwest-

southeast direction and if this be due to seour, the tide which sets

through the passage in much the same direction, may be a contributing

fuctor.

The narrowness of Backstairs Passage, the irregular soundings

and the strength of the tidal stream, more especially when opposed

by contrary winds, all combine to cause rips, races and a steep breaking

sea which are dangerous even for a small well found boat. These are

the prevailing conditions with which the native would have had to

contend frequently when attempting a crossing.

492 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The Kaurna (Adelaide) Tribe, whose territory extended south-

wards to Cape Jervis, possessed neither canoes nor rafts at the time

of the European occupation nor did the Narangga of Yorke Peninsula.

The natives of the lower River Murray used primitive bark canoes and

those living around the lakes, just above its outlet to the sea, had frail

and flimsy rafts of reeds in addition. Both types of craft were believed

to have been propelled solely by means of poles before the advent of

the European which would restrict navigation to waters no more than

a few feet deep. Any successful crossing of Investigator Strait or

Backstairs Passage as they exist today, their most convenient directions

of approach, either in a frail bark canoe with a few inches of freeboard

or upon a crazy reed raft, would need skill and much good fortune

even in tolerably fine weather and if propelled by poling, apparently

their only means of propulsion, an obvious impossibility. There is

the chance, however, of an isolated enforced crossing or two due to

being driven over before the wind.

A NATIVE LEGEND OF KANGAROO ISLAND

The former inhabitants of Kangaroo Island having disappeared

before its discovery in 1802 no local legends are available and it is

necessary to depend solely upon information secured from tribes who

lived upon the adjacent mainland such as the Kaurna (Adelaide), the

Jarildekald and other peoples of the Encounter Bay area. Both the

Kaurna and Jarildekald natives believed Kangaroo Island to be the

home of the spirits of departed ancestors, Pindi in the former’s

language meaning the spirit of departed humans, hence one of their

names for Kangaroo Island—Pindingga—the abode of spirits. Several

variations survive of an interesting legend relating the wanderings and

feats of Ngurunderi, a great ancestral spirit of the Jarildekald. His

field of activities included Kangaroo Island and as it is rather

applicable, at least in theory, to certain references in this paper, the

legend, as recorded by Berndt (1941) is referred to briefly as follows.

Ngurunderi, during one of his epic achievements, having travelled

down the River Murray along which he made many features of the

country as he proceeded upon his way, arrived on the shores of

Encounter Bay, where he caused Granite Island and other islets to

emerge from the sea. He hastened thence westward in search of his

two fleeing wives whom he perceived at last hastening ahead of him

near Tjirbuk (Blowhole Creek) where Ngurungaui, the land of spirits

(Kangaroo Island), is clearly visible. Ngurungaui, at that time, was

almost connected with the main so that it could be reached by walking

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND 493

and wading and this the fugitives attempted to do, Ngurunderi, in

very bad humour, had arrived meantime at Tjirbuk and pausing until

his unfaithful wives had reached mid-channel he called with thunderous

voice for the sea to rise and overwhelm them.

Cawthorne (1846), surveying from the neighbouring cliffs the

scene of Ngurunderi’s revenge as enacted in the native legend, wrote

as follows in his diary :—

“Away upon the breeze is borne

From setting sun to rising morn

Bounding from crag to reedy pool

The voice of great Ooroondool.”’

(Ooroondool is a variant spelling of Ngurunderi.)

Great waves, Berndt's aecount continues, rapidly arose and falling

upon his wives they were overwhelmed and swept away. Ngurunderi

thereupon transformed them into two little rocky islets called Meralang

(Muralang) now The Pages and a reed basket carried by the younger

hecame a nearby reef,

Neurunderi continued his journey to Kangaroo Island where after

proceeding westward he created a great Casuarina tree and rested in

its shade. He then walked to the end of the island where he hurled

his last remaining spear into the ocean whence rocks appeared from

which he dived into the sea after which he rose up into the sky where

he vesides until this day in the spirit world. Ngurunderi, before bidding

his Jaralde people farewell, told them that after death they would

follow his tracks to Kangaroo Island, the spirit world, and there they

would reside with him,

It may be observed in relation to the above legend that as The

Pages are to the east of Tjirbuk, Ngurunderi’s irresistible advance of

the sea would have entered Backstairs Passage from the westward, that

is through Investigator Strait and thus isolated the island from the

north.

Neuruuderi’s achievements, as related in this piece of interesting

folklore survival, cannot, of course, have any direct bearing upon the

eause of Kangaroo [sland’s insularity but if its severance by natural

changes oceurred after the first arrival of primitive man upon the

neighbouring main, there may be just a possibility that the event, for

which the great Neuronderi might quite naturally have been given full

credit, has survived in folklore as related above, The legend, upon

the other hand, may be totally imaginary and not a highly coloured

version of an actual happening in which ease it is devoid of significance.

494 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The following is a list of names, some mere variants, which have

heen attached to Kangaroo Island by the natives of adjoining mainland

tribes:—Karta, Kukakun, Kukakungar, Narnnggawi, Ngurungaui,

Peendeka, Peendingga, Pindeka and Pindingga.

DURATION OF THE OCCUPATION—DISAPPHARANCE

It is impossible to suggest, with the information available, even an

approximate date for the first of Nanwaroo Island’s settlers arrival

there nor is it possible, in the absence o! skeletal remains, to identify

them as of Tasmanoid, Australoid or other origin, The implements

themselves, the only unassailable proof of man’s former presence there,

do not offer sufficient evidence which could indicate whether these

people comprised a small community whose stay was prolonged over

a considerable period of time or whether they are due to a large group

and a brief occupation, In the event of the island having become

insulated from the tnain, perhaps after their arrival by way of a partial

or complete land bridge, the relative searcity of the implements and the

widely seattered nature of their ocenrrence might suggest the presener

of a small group who wandered far and wide over the island for some

considerable time. Tf this be true, the absence of any well defined small

culture types such as the beatifully fashioned pirris, microliths, scrapers

and adzes whose members occur in large quantities wpon the main.

might indieate that the island dwellers’ isolation from outside inter-

ference and the continuation of their own relatively pure and dominant

large pebble implement enlture persisted over a prolonged period. The

development in the local fauna and flora of many sub-species and

variants in comparison with comparable forms upon the adjacent

main, and the total absence of others, favour a considerable period of

insularity,

There appear to be at least two logical alternatives for the ultimate

disappearance of the Kangaroo [slanders—their deparfirre or extinetion

in. sttu—but any theories relating to them are purely hypothetical

and precariously based.

The natives, after an occupation of unknown duration, may have

been forced to retreat northward owing to the advent ol rigorous

climatic conditions—assuming their arrival was early enough—nusing,

perhaps, the same land bridge as before if it still existed or oven because

the same land bridge itself was threatened with extinction. It is

possible, therefore, that their former home, subsequent to its conversion

to an island, may have remained deserted until historic times although

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND 495

in the event of such an evacuation it is strange that no traces exist

upon the adjacent main of their pebble implement industry with its

characteristic trimming.

he only alternative to the disappearance of the Kangaroo Island

people, if it were not due to their departure elsewhere, appears to be

that they fmally sueeumbed in the country wherein they had dwelt.

The loeal native community, more especially if it were small from the

ouiset, and isolated from contact with the outside world over a long

period, may have deteriorated to such a degree from reasons now

unkuown including, possibly, disease, intermarriage, climatic conditions

and internecine tribal fights as to finally lead to their extinction, There

is no evidence, unfortunately, to confirm the likelihood of any of these

causes being responsible or even contributory. The reference in the

preeeding paragraph to the total absence of the Kangaroo Tsland pebble

choppers upon the nearby mainland strengthens the possibility of the

islanders succumbing in the land where they lived and that their pebble

implement culture died with them,

LATER VISITORS TO KANGAROO ISLAND.

The question naturally arises whether Kangaroo Island was

visited subsequently by parties from the mainland, more especially

after the waters which now sirround it attaimed their present form.

The vision of Kangaroo Island, an unknown land, to a venturesome

Kuropean, laid out as it were almost at his feet and separated by

a sleyder thread of sea, would arouse lis curiosity when viewed from

the main.

It is reasonable to suspect, however, that the neighbouring tribes-

men may have had very good reasons of their own for avoiding its

shores, They were men of the stone age in its most primitive form

whose minds were inextvieably steeped im superstition and possessed, in

addition, an woshakable belief in the workings of magic as inherited

from theiy forefathers. The knowledge imparted by their ancestral

legends, that the island was the dwelling place of departed souls and,

in addition, the total absence of smokes arising from this mysterious

land—a familiar indication to them of the presence ol primitive man—

would tend to strengthen their belief that the place was truly a land

ol the dead,

There may be reasonable grounds for supposing, therefore, that

no planned visits may have been made to Kangaroo Island dnring

recent years, although the possibility of casual torced landings due

496 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

to stress of weather, as already mentioned, should not be overlooked if

water transport by frail canoe or clumsy raft were available. Such

an adventure could explain the presence of the Cape Cassini hoard,

CONCLUSION

It can be said without fear of contradiction—and the writer readily

agrees—that the portion of this paper dealing with the arrival and

departure or disappearance of the old inhabitants of what is now

Kangaroo Island offers nothing indisputable enough to determine,

free from doubt, the perplexities involved or, indeed, any salient feature

relating to them. The purpose of the possibilities proffered herein—

and they are purely hypothetical and tentative in their conceptiou—

is that they may assist in evolving sounder and more logical ones with

which to at least lessen the obstacles standing in the way of solving

the problem of the Kangaroo Islanders.

The writer, meanwhile, offers with some hesitation, a final

problematical succession of events but with the proviso that it is as

hypothetical and unconfirmed as those in this paper which precede it.

There is a possibility that :—

(1) The old Kangaroo Islanders were Tasmanoids.

(2) They arrived by way of a land bridge, partial or complete.

(3) They were a small party.

(4) Their home subsequently became an island.

(5) They thenceforth pursued a life of isolation and solitude.

(6) They died where they had lived.

REFERENCES

Berndt, R. M., 1940; ‘‘Some aspects of Jaralde Culture, South

Australia’’, Oceania, Sydney, 11 (2), pp. 164-185.

Cawthorne, W, A., 1846: ‘Unpublished journal’’, Arehives Depart-

ment, Adelaide, South Australia (No. A558).

Cooper, H. M., 1943: ‘‘Large stone implements from South Australia’’.

Rec. 8. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 7, pp. 343-369.

— 1948: ‘‘Examples of Native Material Culture from South

Australia’. South Australian Naturalist, Adelaide, 25

(1), pp. 1-8.

1959: ‘‘Large archaeological stone implements from Hallett

Cove, South Australia’’. Trans. Roy, Soc, 8S. Anst.,

Adelaide, 82, pp. 55-59.

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND 497

Nat. Size Sv2 Nat. Size

RECORDS OF THE $,A. MUSEUM

498

Size

All 2/3 Nat.

499

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND

All 2/3 Nat. Size

500

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

All 2/3 Nat. Size

All 1/2

Nat. Size

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND

501

502 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Harvey, A., 1941: ‘‘F lint implements of Tasmanian manufacture fonnd

at Cape Hart, Kangaroo Island’’, Ree. S. Aust. Mus.,

Adelaide, 6 (4), pp. 363-368.

Howchin, W., 1903: ‘‘Aboriginal occupation of Kangaroo Island’’,

Trans. Roy, Soe. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 27, p. 90.

Tindale, N. B., 1987: ‘Tasmanian aborigines on Kangaroo Island,

South Australia’. Ree. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 6 (1),

pp. 29-37.

Tindale, N. B., and Maegraith, B. G., 1931: ‘‘Traces of an extinet

aboriginal population on Kangaroo Island’’. Ree. 8,

Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4 (3), pp. 275-289.

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURED SPECIMENS

Fig. 1. A typical Kangaroo Island semi-uniface trimmed chopper. Made from a rounded

pebble.

Fig, 2. A ‘‘Horsehoot*? shaped core with stepped trimming; showing overhang due to wear

and consequent retrimming,

Fig. 3 and 4, Small semi-uniface pebble choppers; a reversed view of Pig. 4 shows pitting

due to its use as a hammerstone,

Fig. 5. Rectangular uniface chopping or scraping implement; made from a rounded pebble.

Fig, 6. A small ‘‘Horsehoof’’ shaped core with well defined stepped trimming.

Fig. 7, This specimen, with heavily battered surface, appears to be a throwing ball.

Fig. 8. Adzestone derived from a small natural angular block.

Fig. 9. Adzestone made from a flat pebble.

Fig, 10, 11 and 12. Three working cores from which flakes have been deliberately struck

to manufacture small implements.

Fig. 18, 14 and 15, Fairly thick adzestones derived from flakes.

Fig, 16. Small trimmed core; ‘‘Horsehoof’’ type.

Fig. 17-23. Flake endserapers. An examination of these seven implements and many other

examples indicates that there was no preconceived attempt at uniformity in striking

off flakes even faintly similar in shape. The utilisation of any piece of stone, which

could be roughly fashioned into an implement with a secondary trimmed scraping end,

shows the primitiveness of the industry. This erudity in manufacture and yagueness

in shape refer also to Fig. 32-37 and, indeed, to many other of the figured specimens.

Fig. 24 and 25, Adzestones roughly discoidal in shape. Mlake implements.

Fig. 26. Adzestone made from a thin ovate flake,

Fig. 27. Roughly trimmed adzestone made from « flint flake,

Fir, 28. <Adzestone flake derived from 4 piece of clear quartz erystal,

Fig. 29. Awl made from a flat flake,

Fig. 20. Semi-biface adze flake.

Fig. 81. ‘‘Slug'’ shaped trimmed flake.

Fig. 32-37. Knives or saws. All are flake implements except Fig. 37 which has been mado

from a small natural block.

Fig. 88. Abrupt trimmed point which may have been pressure trimmed.

Fig. 39,40 and 41. Small trimmed knives.

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGY OF KANGAROO ISLAND 503

CAPE CASSINI HOARD

Fig. 42. Microlith endscraper with pressure flaked trimming.

Fig, 48. Small endseraper.

Fig. 44. Coneaye adzestone,

Fig. 45. Adzestone of irregular shape.

Fig. 46. Discoidal adzestone.

Fig. 47. Appears to be a worn and retrimmed adzestone.

A LARGE STONE POUNDER

Fig. 48. This massive implement, 6$1b. in weight, has been made from a large water-worn

quartzite pebble. The battered condition of its working edge indicates use as a

pounder for some type of very heavy work, <A definite groove upon each of its

narrow edges suggests that it was mounted in some form of wooden handle or

withy which would increase its effectiveness. It was found by the writer recently in

association with pebble choppers near a fresh-water swamp inland from American

River.

ROCK TYPES OF WHICH FIGURED SPECIMENS ARE

COMPOSED

Fig. 1 and 2 were drawn by the late Miss G. Walsh and the remainder by Miss V.

Richardson, South Australian Museum, whose assistance is acknowledged with appreciation.

Miss Richardson also prepared the excellent sketch plan of Kangaroo Island.

Milky quartz: 7, 10, 11, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 29, 33, 35, 86, 37, 38, 39, 41

and 46.

Quartzite: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 12, 18, 14, 15, 25, 26, 30, 31, 32 and 34.

Clear quartz crystal: 28.

Cherty flint: 42, 43, 44, 45 and 47.

Flint: 27,

Smoky quartz: 40.

Dr. B. Daily, Curator of Fossils and Minerals, South Australian Museum, kindly

identified the various rocks selected generally by the natives in the manufacture of their

implements.

LOCALITIES OF FIGURED SPECIMENS

Near Muston, Pelican Lagoon: 3, 5, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 14, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 28,

34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 and 41.

Diseovery Lagoon, Emu Bay: 4, 6 and 9.

Bay of Shoals: 13 and 15.

Hog Bay (Willson) River: 2, 16, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31 and 35,

East of Pennington Bay: 24 and 33.

Near Kingscote: 30.

Cape Cassini: 32.

Point Morrison: 1,

Cape Cassini Hoard: 42, 43, 44, 46 and 47.

DECORATED ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS

BY CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD (DIP. ANTHRO., CANTAB.),

HONORARY ASSOCIATE IN ETHNOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The aborigines of Southern Australia and Tasmania used rugs, made from the skins of animals, to

keep themselves warm at night and during the inclement weather. The inside surface of some of

these rugs was plain; others were decorated with a series of elaborate patterns which had been

scratched on the skin with sharp mussel shells and darkened by an application of charcoal and

grease. Dawson (1881, facing p. 8), illustrated an aboriginal woman from Victoria wearing one of

these decorated skin rugs (PI. Iti, A).

DECORATED ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD (Dir, Anraro., Cantas.), Honorary

Associate tn Eranonrocy, Sourm Avustratian Museum

Plate lii and text fig. 1

The aborigines of Southern Australia and Tasmania used rugs,

made from the skins of animals, to keep themselves warm at night and

during the inclement weather. The inside surface of some of these

rugs was plain; others were decorated with a series of elaborate

patterns which had been scratched on the skin with sharp mussel

shells and darkened by an application of charcoal and grease. Dawson

(1881, facing p. 8), illustrated an aboriginal woman from Victoria

wearing one of these decorated skin rugs (PL. lii, A).

A number of Australian authors, Dawson (1881, p. 8), Smyth (1878,

p. 294), Worsnop (1897, p. 51), Howitt (1904, p. 742) and Parker (1905,

p. 121), have deseribed both the methods of manufacture and the

decorations on aboriginal skin rugs, while Continental authors, Ratzel

(1896, p. 364), and Van Gennep (1905) illustrated examples of these

skin rugs.

Yet, in spite of the interest shown in these rugs by the early

ethnologists, and the fact that many thousands of these rugs were in

use during the early days of the colonisation of Australia, remarkably

few examples have been preserved. The rug deseribed by Van Gennep

was destroyed at Leiden, and that of Ratzel, at present in Berlin, is

in an exceedingly bad state of repair.

Within the last year or so, however, the author has been able to

locate several additional examples of decorated skin rugs; one (No,

5803) at the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, which was brought

from South Australia by the 1838 Wilkes’ expedition, and two in the

ethnological collection of the National Museum of Victoria, One (No.

1627), collected at the aboriginal station of Condah during 1872, and

the other (No. 16724), from the aborigines at Eehuea during 1853,

Two single decorated skins have also been located, one from South

Australia, in the collection of the National Museum of Vicioria (No,

9248), and the other (No. 4571), from New South Wales, in the

collection of the British Museum.

506 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

This paper deals briefly with the Victorian rug from Condah.

A more extensive paper, in the course of preparation, will describe the

remaining examples of rugs and single skins, and discuss more fully

the methods of manufacture, the decorations and the uses of these

aboriginal skin rugs,

The Condah rug, still in an excellent state of preservation, and

made up of forty-nine decorated and one undecorated skin, is seventy-

five inches in length, and fifty-six inches in width. The following note

is attached to the rug.

‘Aboriginal possum rug, obtained about 1872 by Mr.

Begg, Principal of the Academy of Hamilton, from the maker

and wearer, a black living at the aboriginal mission station at

Condah. The decorations on the back of the skins are of

genuine native design and the rng is a fair example of those

worn as cloaks hefore Victoria was colonised by Huropeans.

It is sewn with the sinews of the tail of a kangaroo."’

A number of writers, Howitt (1904, p. 742); Parker (1905, p. 121);

Smyth (1878, p. 288); Frazer (1893, p. 201) and Greenway (1901, p.

198), have either stated or inferred that the marks on the decorated

skin rngs, or at least some of them, are the totemie marks of the owners,

The statement that the aborigines marked belongings with their totemic

marks is more or less supported by the ‘'signatures’’ of the nine

aborigines who signed the infamous document (PI. li, B), by which

Batman claimed a large area of aboriginal land adjacent to Geelong

(Dawson, 1881, facing p. 111). Dawson (1881, p. 111), commenting

on these signatures states, ‘‘the marks of the nine chiefs are the

genuine and usual signatures which they were in the habit of carving

in the barks of trees and their message sticks.’’ No doubt, these

aborigines would have used similar marks on their skin rugs.

An examination of the Condah rug shows a wide range of abstract

designs. It is possible however, that the oft-repeated lozenge-shaped

motil's are the totemic marks of the owner.

SUMMARY

This paper describes a decorated aboriginal skin rug from Condah,

Victoria. The rug is illustrated and the method of mannfacture,

function and the designs are briefly disenssed.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS

Aboriginal skin rig from Condah, Vietorin,

Fig, 1.

508 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author wishes to acknowledge his indebtedness to the Trustees

and Director of the National Museum of Victoria for permission to

photograph this and other specimens in their ethnological collection,

and to Mr. A. Massola for his willing assistance on this and all

occasions.

REFERENCES

Dunbar, G. K., 1943: ‘‘Notes on the Ngemba Tribe of the Central

Darling’’. Mankind, Vol. 3, No. 5,

Dawson, J., 1881: Australian Aborigines, Sydney.

Frazer, J., 1893: ‘‘Aborigines of New South Wales’’. Journ. Roy. Soe.,

N.S.Wales, Vol. 16.

Greenway, C., 1910: ‘The Kamilaroi Tribe’’. Science of Man, Vol. 11,

No. 10.

Howitt, A. W., 1904: The Native Tribes of South-Kastern Australia.

London.

Parker, K. L., 1905: The Kuahlayi Tribe. London.

Ratzel, F., 1896: The History of Mankind. 3 Vols. London.

Smyth, R. B., 1878: The Aborigines of Victoria. 2 Vols. Melbourne.

Van Gennep, A., 1905: ‘‘Dessins sur peaux d’opossum Australiennes’’,

Verlag Rijks Ethnographisch Museum.

Prare LI

XIU,

Von.

S.A) Musmew

Rec.

“PUR FO OL RA

LOf Fon VOC, URURE HO SOULSMOGMy JO seu RUdig

NL tee) 2° FG

ape led isi?

hinge

i ee is, A

Gruen wseniyy* tipay-o2 oe,

forreyer SEBS 1§ Be lee Z 2 sa anes

le aalaas ee ol Wee LO Pi PY A

| aap pre Payosereyy, 7G Jory rt

| i ge neh ruby poe ry. ry

W- Q5OG CDI PP? PY he

SF tig ee Pts te GOR ag cade fF

“ awe

FY ak ate i

OAD pt PTY Peesaed Se 4 ati e Ary

“SNY MUYS

minssody POPRLOsdC) TLE AS WO \Y [RIED LEO yy WED A

ceva

THE PIRRI-— AN INTERESTING AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL

IMPLEMENT

BY T. D. CAMPBELL, HONORARY ANTHROPOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This study consisted of an examination of a large number of pirris in order to give a more concise

typological account of the implement than provided hitherto.

Measurements of length, breadth and thickness and detailed data of other features have been

recorded on over eight hundred specimens.

THE PIRRI—AN INTERESTING AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL

IMPLEMENT

By T. D. CAMPBELL, Honorary AnTHRopoLocist, Sours

AustraLiAn Museum

Fig. 1

SUMMARY

This study consisted of an examination of a large number of

pirris in order to give a more concise typological account of the

implement than provided hitherto.

Measurements of length, breadth and thickness and detailed data

of other features have heen recorded on over eight hundred specimens.

Mathematical analysis of the data confirms the general observation

that two forms of the pirri occurred; a northern and a southern type

to which the names Hyrean and Fulham are applied.

Examination of available collections shows that the distribution of

the typical pirris had fairly definite geographical limits; these tend to

distinguish the pirri as what might be termed a South Australian type

of stone implement.

Several minor variations in form and the types of raw material

used are described.

Suggested possible uses ot the implement are discussed.

The interest and importance of the pirri give ample seope for

further research.

INTRODUCTION

In the manufacture of his stone implements, the Australian

aboriginal was a highly efficient craftsman. The biface pressure

trimmed, symmetrical point, sometimes called the Kimberley Point,

and the widely distributed microlithie forms in the shape of small

eeometrics and segments, are fine examples of lithoclastie art. The

uniface trimmed point known as the Pirri, is another example of skilled

technique in producing an attractive, shapely implement.

Apparently the first record of recognition of the pirri as a native

artifact, was that of the specimens received by the South Australian

Museum from H. Y. [., Brown, then South Australian Government

510 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Geologist. He collected them in the latter part of last century in the

region of Kucolo Creek, north-west of Port Augusta; but no aecouut

was made of these specimens at that time. The pirri was first deseribed,

illustrated, and so named, hy Horne and Aiston (1924). Later is

was discussed by Hale and Tindale (1930) and by Howehin (1934).

Campbell and Noone (1943) illustrated and deseribed the pirri,

ineluding a more concise typological account than had hitherto been pre-

sented, In a memoir on the stone implements of Australia, McCarthy,

Bramell and Noone (1946) provided a comprehensive list of previous

publications which referred to this implement; they also described

some of its special typological features. More recently, Mitchell (1949),

Tindale (1957) and MeCarthy (1958) have discussed the pirri at some

length. Mitchell added useful factual data; the observations of the

other two authors dealt mainly with their views on its so-called

cultural significance,

The object of the present paper is to present results of a further

study on the typology and distribution of the typical pirri, Tt secins

obvious that until information on these aspects of this implement is

clarified, its significance in relation to the development and sequence

of other implements in Australian material culture eannot be properly

assessed.

Regarding the work of Horne and Aiston, it should be mentioned

that for the name ‘‘pirrie’’, nsed in their original account of the

implement, the more desirable spelling ‘pirri’? has sinee become

generally adopted, And although their work did not provide a detailed

typological account of the pirri, there is no doubt to which particular

implement they gave this vame—their illustrations (H&A, fie. 57)

adequately confirm this-

TYPOLOGY

The pirri is a uniface trimmed, symmetrical point; produced from

a narrow lanceolate flake of trigonal eross section, with its median

ridge on the onter surface. The onter surface is trimmed by removal

of small flakes from the lateral margins np to the median ridge; with

subseqnent finer edge trimming. The flaking of the two faces of the

outer surface is continuous from the point to the butt end, Tt is

considered that this secondary trimming was done by pressure. The

implement varies in size and shape; but occurs mainly in a somewhat

narrow leaf-shaped form, in whieh the maximum width is about one

third of the length of the implement, Tts length ranges from occasional

large examples reaching up to 60 to 70 mm., down to many of micro-

lithic dimensions (30 mm. and under). Its maximum thickness is

CAMPBELL—THE PIRRI Sl

about one third af its maximum breadth, (See fig 1 a, b,c.) More

precise and detailed data on its dimensions are provided in Table I

of the statistical analysis. In the more completely trimmed examples

—over 50 per cent of those examined in detail—the butt end was shaped

to a thin rounded margin, by removal of the striking platform and the

adjacent part of the median ridge, In these, near the butt end, the

implement is of a thin plano-convex cross section whieh then becomes

of an isosceles outline and tapering to a small equilateral triangle

towards the point end, The best examples of these completely trimmed

piri are fine specimens of symmetry and delicate workmanship. This

account deseribes the particular type of implement first presented and

illustrated by Horne and Aiston as the pirri (pirrie),

A similar, but smaller implement although differing in some

features from the above typical account, must be included as a form

of pirri. This implement was called the ‘* Fulham Poiut’’ by Campbell

and Noone (1943). A number of them were among the material

collected from eampsites in that loeality near Adelaide, and were in

the South Australian Museum collection at the time of their survey.

As it is desirable that some specific names be given to the original

and to the southern, smaller form of pirri, they are herein referred to

as ‘*Ryrean’’ and ‘‘Fulham’’ types respectively. The term Kyrean

seems suitable as the first deseribed and illustrated pirris came from

an area just to the east of Lake Eyre. Large numbers of this typical

form have been collected frem sites in other areas which are part

of, or adjacent to, the “Myrean Basin’’; and most of them were made

from materials which are geologically typical of that large region,

The term ‘‘lulham’’ is retained for the southern type of this imple-

ment; and on aceount of some significant differences from the typical

northern pirri, it is deseribed in the following section.

Tae Funwxam Prreri

This unplement is a small form of pirri and occurs fairly often

among the various pointed types collected trom areas—many of them

coastal sites—near to, and sonth of Adelaide. Moreover it is the

prevailing form of the pirri from all districts to the immediate north;

to which must be added Yorke and the southern part of Byre

Peninsulas.

A survey of available collections shows that there are several

features in which the Fulham type differes from the typical Eyrean

form. Most significant is the fact that with few exceptions, the

former tends to be of microlithic size. In relative dimensions, it is

512 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

much thicker than the northern form (see Table 1), and it was made

from different materials. Larger sizes tend to increase in numbers

going northwards, towards the region of the Hyrean pirri. The

statistical analysis of the measurements shows definitely that the

Fulham pirri is of distinetly different form (see fig. 1 d).

Somewhat similar in form is the ‘‘ Adelaide point’? (Campbell and

Noone) the shaping of which was limited to only abrupt trimming

of the lateral margins. This southern form has heen subjected to the

same details of examination as the Hyrean pirri.

The measurements of these implements were made with vernier

eallipers in millimetres; other features are recorded by descriptive

data,

It is hoped that the results of the present observations will provide

some useful data to supplement what has already been written on this

implement. Certain features have been examined and recorded in

greater detail than hitherto, in order to increase our knowledge of

this fine example of our aboriginal stone implements.

TABLE I

Approximately

75 per cent of

Standard population lies

Mean Vurinnee Devintion Range bet ween—

Length—

Groups 1—6§ .. .. 40.60 70.73 8.41 24.6—77.5 311—48,5

7—8 4, . “0,01 33,40 7.23 21.1—48.5 24.1—34.0

Breadth—

Groups 1—6 ., . 16,73 4,00 2.00 9.6—26.5 14.6—19,0

78 .. ws WU 5.20 2.30 9,1—19.5 10.6—15.0

Thickness—

Groups 1—6 .. ., 6.01 1.07 1.04 3.4—10.6 4.5— 6.9

7—8 ows 6,09 1.29 1.14 3.6— 9.6 4.8— 7.2

(Groups 1—6, Eyrean; Groups 7—8, Fulham.)

STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF DATA

The relationship and differences between the Eyrean and Fulham

form raise some points of interest. The following notes have been

derived from an analysis carried out at the C.S.LR.0, Division of

Mathematical Statistics. This involved a consideration of the three

measurements made on the pirris examined in this study, from which a

compound linear index has been derived.

If the length, breadth and thickness are represented by a, 2x2

and wa respectively, the method has been applied to derive the linear

function of these three measurements: X = ),z, + Aor, + Ag®s which

will best discriminate between the Eyrean and Fulham groups, on

the basis of measurements alone.

CAMPBELL—THE PIRRI S13

The discriminate function X is:

X = 0.000167a1 + 0.000963x2 — 0,0001058a:

Since only the ratios of the coefficients are required, for greater

convenience, the coefficient of length may be taken as 1; then the

coefficients for breadth and thickness are 5.76 and —6.32, so that the

frnetion now takes the form:

X = wi + 5.76x2 — 6.322%

The average value of X for the two groups is: Hyrean form 99,91

and Fulham form 65.89. The mean difference is 34.02 with a standard

deviation of 1.38; and this being 23 times its standard deviation, is

very strongly significant. The linear function thus calculated, there-

fore definitely discriminates between the two groups.

The general summarising statistics individually show that the

groups are quite distinct, but it is of considerable importance that

after allowing for the correlations which exists between the measure-

ments, the compound measurement also yields this clear distinction.

The general difference in form between the two groups may be

due to several factors. It seems likely that the difference mainly arose

from the differences in the nature of the raw material available in the

two regions concerned. The aboriginal workman in both regions

deliberately aimed at making pirris; probably by the same _ basic

technical procedures; but in each region he recognised the working

properties of his raw material, the result being two different forms

of the one kind of implemeut—the pirri.

In any ecuse, on the basis of the measurements alone, a clear

distinction in form exists. A second use of the linear compound is to

classify a specimen of unknown origin, by using only its length, breadth

and thickness. The following table shows values of the compound X

in the region where the two groups overlap, along with the probability

of misclassification-

Value of X Probability

BO i ed pede re 1m a ve 2 Ag

10 << Sep Sate Seth ee chee EE 37

BOo-2 ., of oF As een Bal se 10

GD ols Ae Ger, ba 17

LOD Eo bce et heh hPa tata tefl soled of 70

xs SA errs rr, On 435

120.92 559. 8. 25-8 32 3333

$14 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Examples: A specimen giving a value for X of 60 would, if it

were a northern form, be wrongly classified as a southern type only

once in 192 trials. Similarly, for values of 70 and 80, with correspond-

ing probabilities of 1 in 87 and 1 in 10. As the value 90 exceeds the

point midway between the two means (65,89 and 99.91) the form of

statement changes—thus a specimen giving a value of X — 90 would

if it were really a southern form, be wrongly classified as a northern

form 1 in 10 times. Similarly for values of 100, 110 and 120. Beyond

60 and 120 there would be no difficulties at all. It will be seen

therefore, that only in a small region from 80 to 95 (where the two

groups principally overlap) the odds against misclassification are rather

weak.

(f) (h)

Big. 1 (a), (b) und (ec) are drawn to mean measurements of Table 1.

CAMPBELL—THE PIRRI S15

DISTRIBUTION

On the basis of its known distribution the pirri, might, with some

justification, be considered as, almost exclusively, a South Australian

implemeut.

From assessment of available collections and data, the typical

Eyrean pirri occurs as follows. It belongs to an area, the northerly

limit of which approximates to the latitude of the southern margin of

the Simpson Desert. Occasional specimens have been collected in

areas which might be geographically termed central Australia; bnt

these are obviously adventitious occurrences, The southern boundary

of the northern type would roughly correspond with the latitude of the

northern end of Spencer Gulf. In its easterly distribution, it occurs

in areas reaching into south-west Queensland and north-west New

South Wales and to the south along the Darling River. These State

borders are based on certain lines of longtitude and latitude and bear

no velatiou to so-called ‘‘natural regions’’, Mitchell, writing of certain

areas adjacent to the River Darling, states ‘‘Although searce, pirris

oceur; Lake Kyre, their provenance, is 500 miles away to the west, and

these two areas are apparently near the limit of their eastern

distribution.** Tindale (1957) has stated that ‘‘The Pirrian culture

hus now been reported from almost all parts of Australia excepting

only Cape Yorke Peninsula, coastal Queensland and parts of eastern

New South Wales; in these three places insufficient collecting has been

done to regard their eutire absence as established beyond doubt."

McCarthy (1958) stated that lis examination of ‘‘many thonsands of

knapped implements in the Australian Museum amassed by a number

of collectors over a period of over forty years from surface sites on the

south coast of New South Wales failed to reveal a pirti industry,”

Black (1949) who collected extensively in the north-west of New South

Wales, stated concerning the pirri: ‘‘1 have never fond any pirris

south of the Broken Hill—Menindee railway and verv few east of the

Paroo River in the Darling River Valley,”*

As yet, it has not been established hew far the pirri occurs west-

wards; but examples have been collected near Coober Pedy in the

north-west of South Australia and some rather poor specimens from

Ooldea. The southern limit of the pirri appears fo correspond very

definitely with the River Murray, Although a few specimens haye been

collected from campsites on what might conveniently be termed the

southern hank of that stream, the typical pirri does not oceur in regions

to the south of the Murray in South Australia, where large collections

of implements have been made over the last thirty years. Mitchell who

516 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

has collected extensively over Victoria for many years considers the

pirri was unknown in that State; the present writer also is acquainted

with many Victorian sites, but nothing resembling a pirri hag ever been

obtained there.

Like its northern counterpart, the Fulham pirri appears to have

had a fairly definite range of distribution. In the south, it extends to

the River Murray wltich, as stated above, is the southerly limit for all

pirris. Its northerly boundary corresponds with the southerly limit

of the Hyreean type; although occasional instances of overlapping of

the two kinds have been noted. As a general observation, it seems that

as one goes away from the main areas of the northern pirri, that is to

the south, south-west, and south-east o! pirri distribution, the Fulham

type tends to become scarcer and with increasing percentage of the

smaller sizes. ‘he peripheral south-eastern sites apparently produce

mainly the smaller implements; for example, regarding the Darling

River region and up towards south-west Queensland, Mitehell states

‘FAs one proceeds westward, pirris increase in numbers; but they are

small compared to those at Lake Kyre and are seldom longer than

30mm, In size and shape many are similar to the Fulham pirri of South

Australia deseribed by Canrpbell and Noone (1943).’’

To the west, this smaller type predominates on sites on Yorke and

on the southern part of Myre Peninsnla, An interesting fact is that

on the Kyre Peninsula area especially, this Fulham pirri mingles

with a small triangular type of trimmed point, some of which show,

complete biface trimming—the latter type of implement has not as yet

heen described in detail.

There have been reports of the occurrence of the pirri on sites well

removed from the regions outlined above. It is likely that some of these

have been mistakedly deseribed as pirri. But where the technique of

pirri manufacture was obviously an established part of aboriginal

stone industry, the implements oceur in relatively large numbers; and

as stated above, these particular regions are somewhat cireumseribed.

MATERIALS USED

The major proportion of the Eyrean specimens eoncerned in this

study came from two main areas. First; the region from which the

originally described pirris were obtained—an area in the vicinity of,

and north of, Cooper Creek, where the Birdsville Track traverses the

far north-east of Sonth Australia, east from Lake Eyre. Second;

large numbers from the region to the immediate west of Lake Torrens.

CAMPBELI—THE PIRRI 517

With these regions—which might be considered part of the Kyrean

Basin in its broadest. sense—are associated the so-called desert sand-

stones and those materials which come under the general eategory of

the chaleedonised, fine-grained sandstones and clays; the porcellanites,

jasper, opal and agate, In addition, many implements were made from

line-grained quartzites which abound in the abovementioned areas

in the form of the well-known ‘‘gibbers’’; although exceedingly tough

in texture, it was obviously a favoured material from which many

well finished examples were made. These materials are part of the

so-called duricrust formation, attributed to the late Cretaceous and

subsequent periods. All of these materials are noted for their

conchoidal (fracture and are awenable to smooth primary and secondary

flaking. The finer grained the material, generally the better and more

delicately finished are the implements.

As with most other implements of the Adelaide area, the vast

majority of the Fulham pirris were made from varieties of quartzite

derived from local rocks of the Mount Lofty Ranges, The fine-grained

chaleedonised materials, characteristic of the northern pirri, were not

readily available; the small numbers of implements made from the

latter materials are examples most likely acquired from further north,

or made from imported materials.

It is interesting to note that proceeding uorth from the Adelaide

districts, an increasing nutaber were made from a better type of

material—inostly in the form of smooth cherts,

When the available material was mainly the coarse, tough textured

quartzites, the preparation of a core, and knapping of long, lanceolate

or leaf shaped flakes was not an easily controlled procedure, While

the craftsmen no doubt strived for, and utilised, primary flakes of

suitable shape, some of the smaller type of pirri give the impression

that possibly the median ridge of the finished implement was formed

mainly during the secondary flaking process, rather than that it was

an essential part of a primary flake with a trigonal cross section, The

statistical results show that the thickness of these small implements is

greater, relative to their general dimensions, than with the northern

pirri. This tends to bear out the idea of the difficulty in securing the

longer, more shapely primary flake. It is a remarkable tribute to

the skill of the southern workers that so many well made implements

were fashioned from these tough, intractable materials.

518 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

BUTT END

Apart from the excellent shaping of the pirri, by flaking from the

lateral margins up to the mid-ridge, its further development was

effected by trimming the butt end.

Trimming of the butt was apparently carried out in several fairly

definite stages—as revealed by the conditions seen in the collection of

pirris examined in this study.

First: those specimens showing the neat lateral flaking, but with

the butt end intact, its striking platform practically untouched. An

important feature in this stage is that the surface of the platform

slopes downwards to the inner surface of the implement (see fig. le).

Second: in this stage, the platform had been partly trimmed away

—on the outer surface—this being readily effected owing to the acute

angle at the platform outer margin. This partial removal of the

platform resulted in only a limited shaping of the butt end.

Third: here the striking platform had been completely trimmed

away by further flake removal on the outer surface, which also reduced

the butt end of the mid ridge; and so this end of the implement was

shaped to a neat rounded margin.

Fourth: this stage seems to have been a supplemental treatment

of the butt end of some implements where further reduction of butt

end thickness was desired. At the third stage, the platform had been

completely eliminated, so that it was then possible to detach flakes

from the inner surface of the butt end. In effect, this reduced the

convexity of the bulb of percussion and resulted in a thin, sharp edge

to the rounded butt margin (see fig. 1 ¢).

This last mentioned treatment of the butt end involved some

trimming of the inner surface of the implement; but it affected only

a small area and served the special purpose of reducing some of the

bulb convexity, by detaching a few small flakes. The slight inner face

trimming gives no justification for considering the pirri a biface

trimmed implement—term which has a definite and accepted connota-

tion; as for example, the Kimberley point.

A likely variant of this butt treatment is seen in some specimens,

the inner surface of which is quite flat. This may have been the result

of deliberately striking off the butt end of the partly formed implement,

to remove extra thickness due to a marked bulb convexity; after which

the usual thin rounded margin was completed. In these examples,

nothing remains of the bulb curvature.

CAMPBELL—THE PIRRI 519

The following figures have been derived from records made on

this particular feature in the specimens examined,

Recorded on 650 implements.

Butt end not trimmed .... .. .. ........ Ba

Butt end partly trimmed .. . .. .. 2. 2... .. 193

Butt end fully trimmed... .. .. ., 2. 2... .. 378

Mitchell states that of 235 pirris he collected at Mulka—in the area

ol the originally deseribed pirri—36.1 per cent showed either trimming

or thinning on the butt; the striking platform being intact on the

remainder,

From the above figures in this study, it is seen that 57 per cent

of the implements so examined, show complete peripheral trimming;

that is, with finished butt end as well as lateral trimming.

Included in the ‘fully trimmed” records are the variations of the

rounded butt margin.

Also in this examination of butt trimming, 43 per cent showed some

flaking of the inner surface, This inner flaking was somewhat irregular;

often only a partial reduetion of the bulb convexity was effected, but

generally sufficient to attam the apparently desired thin margin.

Some attention was directed to ascertaining what might have been

the main factor which facilitated the forming of the thin rounded

margin of the butt. The type of material was observed, Finer grained,

more tractable material should have made it easier to obtain the neat

butt margin; but if was found that among the best finished implements,

a wide variety in texture of material was evident. he robustness or

thickness of the primary flake might have affected the reduction of the

butt end; but this approach showed that many thick implements have

a thin, rounded butt margin. Perhaps this neat finish to the butt end of

so many of the implements may have been—as Howchin suggested—

a matter of the artistry and pride of the worker at the time of making

any particular implement.

Whatever was the purpose of this thin, rounded margin—functional

or otherwise—the varions conditions in the implements examined

showed that the aboriginal craftsman carried out a definite sequence

in their shaping. When all these stages of pirri manufacture were

carried out to finality, exceedingly beautiful implements were produced,

SOME VARIATIONS IN FORM

There are a few variations in form which eall for comment. The

number of specimens showing features by which they differed from

520 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the typical pirri, were few in number out of the large total examined.

They are good evidence that the skilled aboriginal workman knew

exactly what he was doing—when circumstances called for some

departure from customary procedures, he nevertheless produced the

desired result.

Cross Section. The vast majority of pirri were fashioned from a

primary flake, trigonal in cross section, The inner surface being the

base of the triangle; its apex represented by the outer midrib, which in

the finished tool is trimmed away at the butt end. Some of the primary

flakes used, had a midrib which bifurcated into two ridges, ending at

the lateral margins of the platform. The lateral trimming reaches

the single median ridge for part of the length of the implement; and

then up to the two separated ridges, leaving an untrimmed triangular

portion of the outer surface, towards the butt end. Less than 3 per cent

of the hundreds of specimens examined showed this variation (see fig.

1, f and g).

Unilateral trimming. Another variant is the specimen made from

a primary flake the cross section of which must have been scalene,

rather than the outline of an equilateral or isosceles triangle (fig. 1, h).

This is another example of convenient adaptability in technique. By

trimming the wider of the two outer faces of the unworked flake, the

removal of material ultimately increased the angle of that margin,

to correspond with that of the untrimmed side. Thus producing the

customary symmetrical form with a cross section being brought more

to the equilateral form (see fig 1.i). In the total of over 800 implements

for which details were recorded, less than 3 per cent were of this

unilateral trimmed form. But apart from having one face untrimmed,

in other respects this variant has the main features of the typical pirri;

the flaking of the trimmed face is continuous from point to butt end

and involved the whole face up to the mid ridge; and generally with

the butt trimmed and rounded. The final result gave the outline of

the typical trimmed symmetrical point.

Dentate margins. In a few rare examples, a final trimming of

the flaked margins of the implement produced a dentate effect to the

borders, not unlike that seen in many of the Kimberley Points.

USE OF THE PIRRI

Regarding the question of the use of the pirri, no satisfactory

answer has yet been provided. On account of its general shape, the

possibility of its use as a spear point has been the customary suggestion

but other uses have been submitted.

CAMPBELL—THE PIRRI S21

Horne and Aiston (1924) wrote of its use‘, . . as a graving

ool to make decorative marks on wooden weapons, and occasionally

it is used as a drill for ight boring work.’’ In the South Australian

Museum collection ave a number of specirnens purported to be wood-

working tools, with pirri mounted in gum. These came from the district

where Aiston lived for many years and were made by aborigines there.

In their volume, they state that these natives were not conversant with

the making of pirri; furthermore, the mounting of these pirri on the

wood handles varies—on some, the inner surface of the stone tool

faces one way, and on other handles in the opposite direction, Such

ineconsistancy in mounting these stone tools rather suggests that these

natives really knew nothing about the main use of the pirri and mounted

them according to.a use suggested to them.

Hale and Tindale (1930) stated ‘It seems possible that this

artifact nay have been a spearhead.”

Howehin (1984) expressed doubt as to their use as a spearhead.

He also discussed its possible use as a tool for seribing fine, decorative

lines on wooden objects, THe wrote *‘Among the more highly fmished

examples were some that possessed exceedingly sharp points that could

not bear the pressure used with a graving too) withont fracture; it is,

therefore, possible that these beautifully finished and delicately pointed

specimens were held as a matter of pride as to exeeution rather than

as tools.’’

Tindale (1957) stated ‘‘that the pressure flaked biface blade culture

of North Western Australia is likely 10 have been a direct development

from the pirrian,’’ Ue further stated ‘The most characteristic imple-

ment, the pirri itself . . . was # spearpoint.’’ Fis illustration

(fig. 4) in support of this contention and on examination of the partly

trimmed point concerned, show that this isolated example is obviously

not a typical pirri point.

The stone headed spears in the South Australian Museum were

earelnlly examined by the late H. V. V. Noone who considered the

few odd specimens with small trimmed points were not typical pirri

and quite fortuitous among the touch larger, untrimmed trigonal stone

flakes on Central Australian spears,

The resemblauce in some respects of the pirri fo the Kimberley

point spearhead has been cited in favour of the pirri having been so

nsed, But typologically there are several obvious differences between

the typical pirri and the Kimberley point; espeeially when regarding

them both as spearheads. Both are symmetrical trimmed points and

the pirri is also regarded to have been produced by pressure flaking.

522 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A parallel examination of collections of both types of point does not

give the impression of a strikingly close resemblance. Tn general, the

Kimberley point is a much larger implement; it is nmeh broader and

thinner relative to its length; it is a biface trimmed point; its lateral

margins are consistently serrated or dentate, Above all, the Kimberley

point has the appearance of being a spearhead of marked potential for

penetration and wounding for which purposes the pirri would be

almost completely ineffective, both in size and form, The writer has

subjected a range of over one hundred Kimberley points of various

shapes and sizes to the same measurements as made on the pirri, There

are obvious differences in size and form; only four Kimberley

specimens out of the lotal are of microlithie size.

Tt has been shown that the pirri is often of microlithie size:

predominantly so with the Fulham type. With the customary

Australian practice of mounting a stone spearhead in gum, very little

of most of these implements would be exposed for such a functional

purpose, On account of their size, it might be more fittingly suggested

that it would have heen suitable as an arrow head; but there is no record

of the Australian aboriginal having known the use of the bow and arrow.

Moreover, the pirri bears no resemblance tu the typical stone arrow

heads which are so well known from many parts of the world, Or

again, on the score of size, it would have heen more suited for the head

of something in the form of a small hand lance; but here again its

mounting and fitting to a shalt wonld leave it a very ineffective point

for serious, much less lethal, damage. However, this is another aspect

of the pirri ealling for continued research,

DISCUSSION

A study of a large collection shows the fine craltsmanship involved

in the production of the completed form of the typical pirri, Tt presents

features which clearly reveal that those responsible lor its making

had a clear idea of the kind of implement they set out to produce, and

also had the teehnieal skill to make it.

The figures given above show that the pirri, in both its northern

au southern forms, is a relatively amall point. The former was

sometimes made in microlithie size and veeasional specimens are

“outsize”? in length—Mitchell has recorded specimens up to 90 om.

But in general, the standard deviation for the dimensions of both types

is fairly low in value; some variation in length, but consistently low

for breadth and thickness. The prevalence of microlithic forms among

the southern type is interesting.

CAMPBELL—THE PIRRI 523

From present knowledge, the occurrence of the pirri appears to

have had fairly definite geographical limits which make it almost

exclusively a South Australian implement.

The northern form was made from materials well suited for the

skilled technique applied to its manufacture; they are characteristic

of certain geological formations of the region and thus constitute a

factor in the distribution of this particular form of the implement.

The finest examples are always associated with the availability of the

fine grained chaleedonised materials. For many of the Adelaide region

the available materials were mainly tough, coarse grained quartzites

which seems to have been the important factor in the predominant

occurrence of those of microlithic size,

‘The use of the pirri is a question for which, as far as present

knowledge goes, no satisfactory answer las arisen, Its use as a

spearhead has been suggested on somewhat superficial morphological

grounds. But the occurrence of so many implements of small and

of microlithie dimensions seems rather against it having been an

effective and useful kind of spearhead.

It is unfortunate that the term pirri has, by some writers, been

applied to a variety of implements which bear little or no resemblance

tothe pirri. As stated above, itisa symmetrical, uniface trimmed point

with certaim definite typological features, There are many kinds of

‘‘noints’’ of symmetric and asymmetric form, showing varied degrees

of secondary trimming. These range from the slightly retouched leaf-

shaped flake, to more fully worked types, like the bilateral abrupt

trimmed points. Beeause these may have the general shape of the

pirri, there is no justification whatever for them being classified as

such. Varions types of trimmed points were prodneed by the aboriginal

craftsman, but for most of them very little or nothing is known of

their funetion: therefore their classification must rest mainly upon

morphology. Unless the typology of the various forms be based on

clearly definable specific features, confusion must prevail in their

classification. Many leaf shaped points of more or less symmetrical

form oceur, with indications of secondary trimming which may or may

not have been abortive or discarded attempts at prodneing a pirri; but

the typical pirri has been collected in such large numbers and shows

definite features in the stages of its production, that indiscriminate

application of the term pirri to partly and irregularly chipped flakes

is not warranted.

524 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The present study shows that the pirri is an intriguing Australian

stone implement. Its skilful manufacture and meticulous finish make

it an object for admiration; its limited distribution and its own specific

features of interest provide ample scope for further research.

In addition to that of the writer, these observations were made

on the following collections: South Australian Museum and the private

collections of Messrs. E. M, Mudie, 8S. R. Mitchell, H. M. Cooper and

Dr. Ian North.

The writer’s thanks are due to the following for generous assistance

in the preparation of this paper. Mr. H. M, Hale, Director, S.A,

Statistics for analysis of the dimensional data; Dr. H. Marston and

Mr. Murray C. Childs of the C.S.1.R.0. Nutrition Laboratories for the

preparation of illustrations; Drs. P. 8. Hossfeld and B. Daily for

advice on geological notes; Mr. H. M. Cooper and Miss B. Pearce in

the preparation of the notes.

REFERENCES

Black, R. L., 1949: ‘*Notes on the material culture of the aborigines

of the Darling River Valley’’, Mankind, 4 (38).

Campbell, T. D., and Noon, II. V. V., 1948: ‘‘South Australian

microlithic stone implements’’. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 7 (3).

Hale, H. M., and Tindale, N. B., 1980: Ree. 8. Aust. Mas., 4 (2).

Horne, G., and Aiston, G., 1924: ‘‘Savage life in Central Anstralia’’,

MaeMillan, London.

Howchin, W., 1984: ‘Stone implements of the Adelaide tribe'’.

Gillingham & Co., Adelaide.

McCarthy, F. D., 1958: Mankind, 5 (5).

McCarthy, F. D., Bramell, E., and Noone, H. V. V., 1946: ‘The stone

implements of Australia’. Mem. Aust. Mus., IX.

Mitchell, S. R., 1949: ‘Stone age eraftsmen’’. Melbourne.

1955: ‘*Stone tools of the Tasmanian and Australian

aborigines’’. Jour. Roy, Anthrop. Inst., 85, pt. 1 and 2.

Tindale, N. B., 1957: ‘‘Culture succession in South-Kastern Australia

from Late Pleistocene to the present’’. Rec. S. Aust.

Mus., 18 (1).

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

INDEX to GENERA Anp SPECIES

Pace PAGE

abdominalis abdominalis, Leptoeoris . 429 | Asternolaelaps .. 345, 888 (reference)

aubdominalis blotei, Leptocoris .. ., 429 astercides, ‘*M?? . th tee BBL

abdominalis, Leptocoris 427 Auneellina 2... -. +. +. es +. 201, 208

abdominalis tuprobanensis, Leptocori is 428 augur, Eulima .. .. Howe te ye TEE

abesulus, Isoudon .. aioe ee A Qapl augur, Leptocorig -. .. 4... .. +. 411

aboe, Nevina -« $181 aurantia, Iredalina .. 6... 6. 5. ++ 128

Acatia, .. 6. ea se we gee th ede LS surantiagum, Latirus .. - -. 122

Acanthocerss Filet Be ac CBR aurata, Mndoclita . 161, “179, 186, 181

Acanthotelson .. .. 144 nuricula, Stomatella —~ .. 127

acuminata, Euearya 244 aurifer, Bndoclita 160, 173, ‘174, 175, 179

acuminata, Myocara . . re 71!) australiensis, Strombiformis .. .. .. "124

acutissima, Leiostraca ., a es TSS australis; Asternolaclaps .. 355, 356, 357

aemulus, Phissus .. +. Thd, 165 australis, Capulus .. s+ +s 2+ ee ee 127

Acpyprymnus .. 246, 249, 251, 254, 256, australis, Qrius 2. 2. 6. 2. ee ae ee 1G

258, 272, 277, 204, 297, 295 australis, Ostrea 129

africanum, Pargneiunig 3 8: oe B98 australis, Rotularia .. 2... 6. 64 223

ahinei, Leptovoris .. 439 australis, Suxostrea “ 130

aikasuma, Endoelita .. “470, 171, 182, 193 Avieula 203

Alathyria .. 6. 2... . ab

aldwini, Pleuromys 210 Baluvstium .. 2. -: -- pono BF

Allocorhynehus .. one, ABT bahram, Leptocoris .. .. 2. 2... 64 428

alophora, Beata. . =. -. 349, 350 berretta, sateen -s ae ee «128, 124

Altivasum .. +. st Leee” aztie doe Belemnites TE te iat AWE, 1 ee BBD

alumnus, Nautilus” sp ah ei ss <5 oe 08 Sergauerin .. ~ oy 3 et 598

ambiguus, Unio .. .. -- -. -- 4: +. 80 bernardus, Osphiranter rs -. 152

Ambonychia .. .. 2. )- 5+ re = 374 Bettanclla ... a ee 378, 03, 394

amiesi, Platydyptes . - dent, ue OF Rettongian .. +. +. 985, 248, 297, 298

Anadara, .. 2. 4. -- 28 bicolor, Oxyearenus 369, 360, 361,

Ancyloreeras .. .- 217 362, 3863

aneura, Acacia .. -. 1 bifrons, Chlamys .. foe yee ( 1aT

angasianas, Bulimus fF icteus si “bes hifrons, Eqniechlamys .. .- .. +. .. 127

angasit, Ostrea .. ae ae Se ye, “WF bilineata, Eulima .. Pa ct 126

annae, Wndoclita 162, 185 biplagiatus, Carabocoris .. .. .. 228, 232

amae, Hypophaseus .. 162, 185 bivittata, Leiostraca .. 6... 4. ee 186

annulata, Madigania .. ws ass Blaena .. .. ee. 6458, 454

antaretieus, Palaeeudyptes .- ‘52, 5A, 55, blandfordi, Parahibolites .. .. -. 2. 201

46, 57, 65, 67 Hliona ew a ee, de FL ee 202

Anthocoris 300, AO8 Boerhaavin oe lel ot eet

Anthracocaris . - Y44, 145 Boises Vi ed Peng | SOF

Anthropornis i) £+ .. 67, 67 hoissieri, Subthurmannia .. .. .. .. 200

antipodes, Melania .. fi2 borealis, Plouromyw ., .. -. +. -- +. 210

Aptenodytes .. «. ale “58, G0, tt Bothriembryou ve ee os, 123, OR4

arborea, Ranges 85, 384, 386, 387 Brachy chiton .. vp efote oa ode

Arca .. +. sis +> 1288 brazivri, Stylifer . 2, 325, 136

Archaeosphenisens + 57, 61, 67 brevieeps, Kogia . .. 384, 830, 388

aretatus, Anthocoris -: ie ‘860 lirevieristatum, Myrmicotrombium .. 91,

aretatas, Gardiatethus. ., os 363 is 94, 95, 6

arctatus, Oxyearenus . 360, 361, 362, brevior, Rangeal P. de , oa» =68B5

23, B64 broadbenti, Strombitormis ca pe! plat ele, LDF.

argo, Argonanta 119 Broderipia. ~ se OY,

Argonauta .. , 119 hroma, Bndoclita .. 174, 175

aridimpressna, Cardiastethus fee ate tte Ad AD) brunea, Stylifer ., ape ee ke Te

armatus, Orius .. . .. 16 Buchananiella .. ett ; 131, 133

avoura, Endoclita "160, 177 Buebotrigonia ole t ote : 208

Arthrodytes .. .. .. 4. 66, 68 bueullaea ts £3 4 oe vee 202

articulata, Eulima .. .. |. rapes eS bnihosus, Cyperus . - . B44

asperrimus, Mimachlamys .. .. .. -. 127 | Bulimus .. =e -+ 128

asomatus, Lagorchestes . 251, 252, 269 Bulinns -- 34, 38

526 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Pat

Calandrinia .. ov cs ve «ta. 1. 1. 248

Callidosoma -. .. -. .. 2.2. 2. wg 98

Callitris .. .. . 16

Caloprymnus 241, 246, 247, 249, 251, 258,

268, 279, 204, 296, 297, 298

campestris, Caloprymnus 0 ve ae oe, 293

camphoraec, Endoclita . 160, 166, 167,

168, 169, 170

eamphorae, Phassus ., ,, . «. 161, 169

candida, Emarginula ., .. ., .... 127

canhami, Belemnites .. ., .. .. .. 281

Capulus -. -. - -. . -. 127

Carahoeoris ., .. “227, 228, 241, 232

Cardiastethus .. . 431, 140, 363

Cardium .. .5 «. eT 202

carnivorus, Leptocoris . ve re pe fe ce S84

carphoides, aApiigapermn cree et te O74

Casuarina’ ar ve we as us ot en ty 135

eaucasica, Av ioula poe sein ce 30 5. BOS

Cellana ., .. - sees oes 210

chaleoceptralus, Lygaeus #4 het erieens “Sah

chalybeata, Phaysus -. .. -. .. _. 186

chapmani, Pseudorpilema ic be ex (382

CHarnIG re. ion 4s ot oe oe ee ae ce -ORT

Charniodiseus .. 0, 4. 4, 5 ee ey) BOT

Chimbuitos .. -2 4. 22 4. 2.) 190, 218

Chlamys -. Ro. ie Se At .. 127

Olirysoulima .. o.oo oe ole ee es SBE

Cilliba ., «4: as be 1 471

eladocalyx, Euealyptus . ste. 3, te OT

elymenioides, Rotularia .. ,, ., , 8238

coarctata, Blaena ., .. 2. .. 2. y. 457

coimbatorensis, Leptocoris | “) 417

Coleovoris .. 14 ae | ant 8 298, 299, 932

eommensalis, Evlima -. .. 125

comméreialis, Ostrea .. 2. 22, w. TRO

communis, Puzosia ee 4... 4) ee ae 816

concentricus, Charniodiseus .. .. ,, 397

coniferns, Conolaelaps .. .. .. 845, 346

339, 340, 847

coniferns, Laelaps .

389, 340, 344

Conolaelaps ~. -- +. 4-

continua, Buchananiella ee 143

Conularia .: .. wioee - s. B82

coprophila, Cilliba 2. at

coquandi, Inoceramus .. .. . - .. 205

Corbicula .. .. .. cet cc utr ae OS

eorniculata, Leptocoris , veee os ve we 8416

eornuta, Curveulima . .. ,. ,. .. 225

Cosmetolaclaps .. .. .. 4. ~. 339, 340

costata, Dickinsonia .. ~~ -- cs 30

eoxalis, Leptocoris .. .. -. .. -- 427

eoxi, Hypermastus . :- -p oe am 196

.. 338, 338

161, 162, 166,

183, 184, 185, 187

erassidens, Pseudorca

erenilimbata, Endoclita

erenilimbata, Hiypophiamas os 161, 188

Crinum .. .. os ps ot te ve B84

Crivceraa ,. .. Apr ed Oc 217, 218

erista, Casuarina. fie wae ied ele eM eee LAO

eunaeformis, Eulima .. .. -: 124

euneata, Plenromya .- “499, 209. 210

PAGE

254, 256, 272, 277,

euniculus, Bettongia

280, 284, 285, 298

Cunningtonceeras _ __ .. 224 (references)

Curveulima .. -- .- 2. ce ee ame ue) 185

Cuspeulima . , - 125

Cyclomedusa . 378, 379, 388, “392, 393, 394

Cymahoplites 1, 4... 2. e, 213, 214

Cymatoceras .- .. -, ., .. 201, 211, 213

Cyperus: ,5 v4 ve ae pccek as ee av 244

Cypra@a 005 ce es oe ne ea ee ce IDI

dallasi, Serinetha -. .. .. .. 6... 411

damor, Endoclita .. ., 178, 189, 190

Danilia .. 6. . tects Bales os 127

dannevigi, Scaphella ~ ame 2s QeE

Dusyeereus .- .- 5. ys ue ae oe oe 280

davidi, Cyclomedusa th bel we ese as Jt8

dayidi, Endoclita .. .. 161, 186, 188

davidi, Myloceras .. . », 801, 217

deeresensis, Bulimas ,. .. .. .. .. 124

Delphinornis .. 6. 6. ee ee ee ke 67

deltoides, Plebidonax .. .. .- . 25

Dentalium .. .. coer ry «0 ge S07

derricki, Lasiochilus se em te me 0+ 188

Dashayesites . 200

Dickinsonia .. 370, ‘380, “392, 393, 394

diffisa, Boerhaavia .. . . , a. 244

Dimitobelus (Tetrabelus) | 201, 207, 219,

220, 221

Dinassoviea ., 6. 2. 22 wo. we 109

Dindymus .- 1... -. .- 22 44 a; 359

Diprotodon .. , ee se no ae 1B

diptychus, Dimitobelus ., .. 221, 222

dirsehi, Phassus .. .. .. 162, 197

discoideum, Tubulostium ,. . ,. ., 223

Distoeechurus .. .. 23> +} 282

divaricata, Leschenaultia Dat m4 16

dolabrata, Pinna .. .. + =. 129

dolicacanthus, Cosmetolaelaps. 341, 342, 343

dolicacanthus, Laelaps . 339, 340, 341

Dorgopsis.,. 2 41 +2 as te ae cp 952

Dryandra, 2. 4. we ise ey wg ee BIS

dufresnii, Melanella .- .- \ er oe 1294

Duntroonornis .. . ‘ ve lee OF

dymenioides, Rotularia.. ., .. |. 2238

Ediacaria . .. .. 378, 379, 380, 388, 394

edwardsi, Enlima .. . ve ve 1284

edwardsi, Melanella .. .; tT ews 125

elsa, Molanella .. ., : oe ue ue a. =

Emarginula ,: .. -, 127

Endoelita 157, 158, 159, “781, 1 187, 190

Entomella . - 127

Eosphaeniseus se Re oo lot af ty 58, 67

Equiehlamiys 1... 66 ee bs 2) ve ae «BT

eremos, Belemnites . -, .. .. .. 220, 22

Erythraens .. .. re-ut -. «- 98

etherid poi, Micrometra (Paterina) «. 374

Eucalyptus .. .- on oe 44 OT, 315

Eucarya -, 6. 20 oy ee ee ee en ee) D4

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES 527

Enehelus w= si oy ¥

euclia, Charonia .,

Eudyptula .. .:

eugenii, Thylogale .,

englypha, Avicula ,

Euliamaustra

Bulimia «

ERulimea .. 6... -.

Euomphaloceras

Eutrephoceras ..

Eutriton ae 2G we LO Se 23 he

ovansi, Unio ,. .. -.

exerascens, Endoclita ,.

exerascens, Hepialus ~.

exerescens, Hypophassus ,

oxerescens, Pliussus .. .

exoptauda, Voluta

oxpunsilabra. ..

oxplecta, Trigonia

eyrei, Pupilionata ,

Fulda .. .. .

fallax, Tubulostiun ,

fecundus, Asternolaelups

fomoralis, Oplobates .

Fossonia . . a

filamentus uM" +o 4

fimbriata, Leptocoris +s

flavolimbatus, Alloorhynehus .

flavomarginutus, Lygaeus . .

flindersi, Altivasum .. .

flindersi, Ancyloceras .

flindersi, Crioceras .

flindersi, Ediacaria, -

flindersi, Flindersites

flindersi, Myloceray

Hindersi, Ouustus -.

flindersi, Xcnophors

Flindersites .. 0. .

floundersi, Spriggina ,.

forsteri, Aptenodytes ..

frenchi, Oxycarenus

fricata, Eulima .. .) ..

funeralis, Rhophatus . -

fusca, Melanitta ~.

Fusceulima. ..

gaimardi, Bettongia . ,

gawleri, Strangesta .. ,

gawleri, (Zonites) Helix .,

Gene os. net) -1 ne owe

Gen nyornis oe

gaorglirogia, Rulima ..

gigantea, Cyclomedusa

giganteus, Macropus ae

gigantens, melanops, Magropus vy ee 296

gigaunteus, Varanus ., ,

gilesi, Bettanella 2.

glaberrima, Lasiellidea

‘I94, 125, 136

160, 164, 105,

168, 185, 187

Paar

». 127

120, 121

61, 62

a 970

rere 805

124

125

222

211

164

186

165

121

125

208

BRO

137

a 223

355, 357

.. 188

381

432

137

452

122

217

m4 oF

47H, 479

» B17, 218

» 2801, 217

oon 18

ve =» 138

. 217, 218

t 288

60, 62

360

126

ahs

555

126

Pact

Globicephalus .. 0. | cf hae 6h SES

glomerata, Ostren —. .. ve ae ee 130

Glyeymeris eee oe be ye ov 0 oa. 208

gmelina, Endoclita. 173, 174, 176

Gorgopis .. ve ae ree he ve ADT

gracilis, Iehthyopteryx .. ode ee te OF

#radata, Bulima .. .. , owe ae 184

grandis, Arthrodytes -. .. -. .. 2. 66

pregaria, Spirulaea -. .. ,. .. ,. .. 288

gregorii, Brachiton .. .. .. .. .. .. 318

gryphacoides, Aucellina . .. 201, 203, 204

gryphaeoides, Avicula . 203, 204, 205, 212

gryphaeoides, hughendenensis 203, 204, 205

gunneri, Eosphaeniseus . .. 1. .. 67

gurgitis, Panopea .. .. . . .. .. 210

hanetiana, Trigonia os wet ce oe 208

Haplophyllocerag ., -. .. .. .. .. 200

Hebeulima .. .. .. |. te ee oe 196

helena, Melanella .. .. . a eye ee as 195

Helix .. as. oa ws et on 123

hendersoni, Cymatoceras | ---- 3. 801, 212

hendersoni, Hutrephoceras ~ , 211

hendersoni, (Cymatoceras?) Nautilus 211

Hepialus .. .. eevee 164, 187

heraldicum, Tribrac hidiom . "381, 388, 392

Herpetopoma .. .. .. .. 127

herzi, Phassus .. “184, 166, 168

hesitata, beddomei ., .. 6, 5. o. 122

hillieri, Dasycereus .. 2, i> .. 289

Hirstiosoma .. . ae : ar OF

hirsutus, Lagorchestes cr ye ee =6243, 269

Holaster .... » 205

holtkeri, Cunningtoncieras 204 (reference)

hosei, Endoelita -. 158, 162, 193, 195

Hypernastus tF ai ae de ne Mee, RG

Wypophassus .. .. 6... » «: 158, 183

Hypsiprymnodon .. .. .. 2. -. 282, 297

Ichthyopteryx , . ree ae)

Ichthyostomatogaster eb de eihiny, 1 5@ 000

ijerija, Phassus , . 162, 191, 192, 195

immaculata, Stylifer .. .. .. .. .. 124

immersa, Zeacrypta -. .. 6. -. -. 127

ineurva, Avicula .. .. .. 9, 2. .. 205

indisereta, Buling tos wn ar ve ree) 188

inflata, Eulima .. cme tte ate ac ad

inflata, Tateana .. . 0 .- .. .. 378, 388

Tnoceramus .. .. be wt be ete 205

insunlaris, Leptocoris wel tet mefe stpace = = Ae

instructa, Charonia .. .. .. ,... ., 190

insta, Leiostracea 1 nT bo Ustenar Lee

Tredalina .. .. . ot A yhs bet 128

isolata, Leptocoris , wtoak on ae ee t 443

Tyoodon wi sz. ee a be de -. 261

jacksonensis, Fusecenlima .. .. .. ,, 126

Javaensis, Endoclita ., 160, 164, 173, 174

joshuana, Leiostrnea .. .. .. .. 125, 126

jourdani, Dinassovien ~ 2 .. -. .. W198

528

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

PAGE

kara, Endoclita 2, 194, 195

Katelysia .. .. - +. 128

kleini, Tetrabelus 219, 221

Kogia a 334, 335

Korora .. .. * atte OF

kosemponis, Endoclita ., 168, 188

kreuslerae, Voluta .. 121

Labeceras .. .. be 201, 218

lactarius, Stylapex ee : 126

Laelaps . se ae .. 889, 344

Lagorchestes ate ‘241, 244, 269, 270

laminatus, Onthophagus os ee ee 6839, B44

laqueus, Crioceras .. .. 218

larsenii, Delphinornis .. 67

laseroni, Stylapex .. 126

Lasiellidea .. ‘ 139

Lasiochilus .. .. 138

laticostata, Gellana 119

Latirus .. . se 122

layardii, Mesoplodon +a " 334, 337

Leiostraca .. 3 125, 126

Lemuroceras .. 213) 214

Lepidosperma wir Kt 274

leporoides, Lagorchestes tees es 270, 275

Leptocoris .. 359, 405

Leptus .. .. Fe Ave 98

lesbia, Leiostracea. +3 ‘ 125

Leschenaultia c yes 16

“‘Jesueur, Bettongia’? eV be Bes . 248

lesueuri, Bettongia 235, 238, 241, 243, 252,

254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260,

264, 265, 267, 268, 270, 273, 275,

276, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 297,

298, 299

lesueuri, grayi, Bettongia

lesueuri harveyi, Bettongia .

lesueuri lesueuri,

Bettongia .

leucoxylon, Eucalyptus .. .. ..

lifuanus, Oxycarenus .

lima (Oistotrigonia) Linotrigonia

limbatipennis, Oxycarenus .,

lincolnensis, Cardiastethus

Linotrigonia (Oistotrigonia)

lineatus, Coleocoris

Listronius .. ..

lodderae, Leiostracea ree

longicornis,

longirostris,

lopdelli,

lowei, Archaeospheniscus

luctuosa, Dorcopsis

Serinetha,

Parapsyllus ..

Archaeospheniscus

luctuosus, Magroplax .. ate

luctuosus, Oxycarenus .

lugubris, Stenogaster ..

lunata, Onychogale

lurida, Serinetha ..

Lygaeomorphus ..

359,

362,

264, 265

238, 260,

264, 265

239, 249

1. O74

360, 364

201, 205

363

.. 140

201, 222

221, 230

360, 361,

363, 364

363

326

405

PAGE

macgregori, Dimitobelus .. .. .. 201, 219

macroptera, Ambonychia .. 374

Macropus .. .. . 6s 4. ee ae ‘12, 296

Macrymenus PE eee So) en AOR

Madigania .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 380, 388

Maecoyella .. ..... fete ee ee 1200

magellanicus, Parapsyllus ta me “4 €- 68

magnus, Sahyadrassus .. =% 197

Magroplax ae tee nc) Oe ay ys ele 360

mamilla, Mamillana 121

mamilla, Voluta .. .. 122

Mamillana ia, 121

“Manchuriophycus’? 395, 400° (reference)

Mantelliceras .. .. .. 209, 213, 222, 224

Margarites .. .. 7 127

marginata, Leptocoris | “p seek og FEB

marginenotatus, Endoclita .. 159, 162

marquesensis, Leptocoris se ee 447

masoni, Charnia .. .. 4. «. «6 +. 397

mastesi, Bulimus .. - 123, 124

mawsoni, ‘‘M’? .. .. 381

mayi, Eulima bo ioe oe ote 124

mediocarinata, Blaena . anes he 459

Medusina .. " 380, 381

Melanella .. A 124, 125

Melania .. .. 34, 38, 62

Melaniella .. 225 24 sata ce ote ae 124

Melamitta: 0. 6 vo ace ere ap ae BOE

Melo . pvp tte Erbe afte Bede gaa” “HTG

Mesoplodon .. .. .. .. 2... .. 384, 337

Micromitra .. fuser 374

miltonis, Melo .. .. .. .. 2... 119

Mimachlamys sv 127

minchami, Parvancorina nf -- .. 880

minor, Eudyptula . 61, 62

minuscula, Leptocoris . .. 413

mitellata, Leptocoris 418

mitellatus, PeErAgOE pa ee 2% ge (359

Moceramus . .. geek ce et § 208,9217

modesta, Melanella. 125

Moloch 319

montageuna, Eulima 124

montebelloensis, Eulima 124

morgani, Potorous ‘ 295

mucronatus, Hulima 126

multitricha, Blaena . 460

munita, Eulima . 125

Murex .. .. 120

murrayae, Eulima s 124

Myloceras .. 201, “217, 218, 222

Myoeara fae + oe ’ 297° 22

Myrmecia, gulosa “ht 349

Myrmicotrombium emai’ 91, 92, ‘93, "95, 96,

97, 98

Nassaria .. -. 122

Nautilus . .. és "117, 118, 120

nebulosus, Hepialus . =i we ove 186

Nerinea .. ool. 200

Nevina ..

niger, Endoclita

. -. 181

162, 171, 181, 182, 183

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

PAGE

niger, Phassus .. . Sah 181

nigricornis, Leptocoris. +¢ wo. 424

niphonica, Gorgopis .. oe eter 162,59 197

nitida, Urodiscella .. . 3849, 850, 352

nobilis, Dryandra .. vy) te oat QTE

nodosa, Argonauta .. ate dea 119

nordenskjoldi, Anthropornis .. 67

Notomys .. eer cane 244

Notovola .. aig 127

novaczealandiae, Platydyptes “4 "63, 67

nyhleni, Ichthyostomatogaster . .. 355, "358

( ref.)

obtusa, Trigonia . .. .. ..

ocellatus, Coleocoris . .. ..

208

"298, 229, 231

Oecosmaris .. Saf et chp et te OE

Oenetus .. .. .. ee ee ee ee e- «6157, 158

Oestotrigonia .. .. .. 206, 207

oliqua, Euealyptus .. .. 274

oliveri, Korora .. .. 67

Onustus .. 6. -1 ee ee 123

Onthophagus .. .. .. 339

Onychogale .. oot tae: hie Gg 319

Oplobates .. 2. 6. 21 ee ee ee 137

Orius .. . ein ace 136

ornatum, Tubulostium ae, § 223

Ornithodorus .. .. 69

Osphranter .. . 152

Ostrea .. és 129, 130

Oxycarenus .. " 359, 360, 367 (ref.)

Pachydesmoceras .. 213, 214

Pachydyptes .. .. a 67

pachyrhynchus, Budyptula 4 62

Pacitrigonia .. .. .. «. : 208

Palaeeudyptes Wo) 51, 5 52, 53, 54, 56, 57,

65, 67

Palaeocrangon . 148, 144

Palaeospheniscus . . .. 59, 62, 63

palankarinnica, Perikoala .. +. 71, 72, 78

Papilionata .. . aD ye Lies 8s 380

papua, Platydyptes nse The BES dang 02

papuana, Trigonia .. .... .. .. 201, 207

papyracea, Oseudavieula .. .. .. 201, 217

Parahibolites . iW + Jets tess 201

paraja, Endoelita . .. 160, 162, 163, 164,

176, 177, 180

parallelus, Scoloposcelis n 140

Paramedusium .. 396

Parapsyllus .. 68

Pariopea .. .. +. +. 210

parva, Avicula .. ; » +. 205

Parvancorina . .. .- 4. +: 380, 393, re

parvus, Duntroonornis .. .. ..

patagonicus, Aptenodytes .. 58, 60, é2

penicillata, Bettongia .. . 235, 254, 255,

256, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 273,

275, 276, 279, 282, 285, 287, 288,

289, 290, 292” 293, 294, 295, 297,

298, 299

529

PAGE

Pennatula .. . 885, 386, 387, 398

Peratobelus .. nae See . .. 200

perexiguus, Rissoa .. .. 126

Perikoala .. ’ 71, 72, 73, “78, 80, 81

Petaurus ., .. «+ «- .» 282

petterdi, Bubivid 25 eee ie senor 198

petterdi, Stylifer .. .. 6... 6. ee. 126

pfitzneri, Endoclita . ‘ 171

pfitzneri, Phassus .. .. .. “181, 182, 183

Phascolaretes .. 71, 73, 74, 79, 80, 81

Phassus .. . AE are cal 164, 165

philoctena, Uropoda is 349, 350

Phreatoicus .. . 145

Phyllitica trigonia ‘(Acanthotrigonia) 206

Pinna .. .. 129

planicincta, Bulitha: «co, an (a eewed, 194

planulata, Puzosia .. .. 216

planulata, Stomatella .. 127

Platydyptes .. . a “62, +:

Plebidonax, deltoides en als

Pleuromya .. . 199, 201, 210, 209

pompilius, Nautilus .. rcs 117, 118

ponderosus, Pachydyptes .. .. .. -. 67

Poronotellus .. ee ee 131

Poronotus .. etree 131

Portulaca .. 2. 2. 00 es ee ae oe es 248

Potorous .. .. .. .. 246, 251, 294, 296

potschefstroomensis, Uropoda 350, 351

powelli, Charonia . .. .. 4+ 120, 121

problematicus, Palaeocrangon 148, 144

Procoptodon . .. -. -. .. es ee o) 612

profuga, Alathyria .. .. .. 2... .. 36

Prosoponiscus .. 2. +. ee eee 143

Protodipleurosoma .. .. ee " 380, 394

Protolyella . ‘380, 381, 393, 394

Protoniobia .. .. .. .. .. 381

protovittatus, Unio .. “9, 35

proxima, Bulima .. «. 124

Pseudavicula .. .. .. 2. oe. 201, 217

Pseudocheirus .. .. ” 1, Mm, 19 80, 81

Pseudorca .. -. +. + we ee 884

Pseudorhilema .. .. .. . +. 881, 382

Pseudorhizostomites 381, 382, 393, 394

Pseudostomatella .. .. .» 127

Pteridinium 382, 383, 386, 3887,

394, 396

Pterotrigonia 206

Ptychomya .. ei eu bfe -. 200

Puzosigella .. .. .. 213, 214

Pyrrhotes .. 405

queenslandica, Falda .. 137

raapi, Endoclita . 160, 162, 179

radiata, Cyclomedusa .. 378, 379, 380,

381, 388

radiatoshialata, Avicula .. .. we ee 205

Rangea .. 383, 385, 386, 387, 392,

393, 394, 396, 397

Rattus .. .. “4 wee ee 289

530 RECORDS OF

Paay

Redia .. .. ,. -. 358 (ref.)

redunca var. elata, Euealyptus bacevus “O74

Renilla... -. cc ce ye es -- 888, 387

repertus, Nautilus . ., ,. _. 117, 118

Rhizostomites .. 2. 2 2... yy. 881

Rhophalus -. -. ., -) 6, 4... 2. B68

ricasoliana, Uripoda vn ee 348, 350

Rissoa .. 2. Ve et sp ley wr ue aS

roegerae, Eulima se tt Gees ce ee ty 184

robertsianus, Listronius .. .. 2... -. 69

Rotularia ,. .. .. 199, 201, 222, “323, 224

Roya .. .. 4; a) sa o> EDF

rubicunda, Charonia ., 1s ees Jae 380

rufescens, Aepyprymnus .., 273, 294, 297

rufomarginata, Leptocoris., ., ,. ., 432

tufus, Leptocoris .. .. .. .. .. .. 428

rustica, Endoclita .. .. .. .. ., .. 178

Sahyadrassus .. 2.0 2 ww 2

salyazi, Endoclita . .. ,. 160, 162, 177

Banton ye nd civ fleherys oe Fen 1. 16

Sarcophilus .. ,. :. 4... +. -- ,- 12

Saxostrea .. .. . ~2 tr: es oe o- 180

sealarina, Katelysia _ Fes a ose: t= «198

Seaphella .. 2. 2... . 121

schneiderhohni, forma turgida, Rangea, 385,

386

383, 385, 397

71, 76, 79, 80, 81

schneiderhéhni, Rangea .

Schoinobates , .. .,

Scleromaris .. 1. .. 2 .. 5, 2...) 97

Beoloposcelis ,, 1... 6. ws we ts ae MO

acotica, Anthracocaris .. .. .. ., -. 144

seclusus, Tetrabelus .. . 219, 221

sericeus, Endoclita . .. 160, 163, 171, 172,

174, 181, 195

sericus, Phassus .. ., .. .. «\ of 172

Serinetha .. 2. 2.2 6. ey. 4. 405, 418

setosa, Blaena ., .. 2. 4. 4. yy ve 462

sibelae, Endoclita .. .. .. "157, 162, 196

sibelae, Phassus .. .. .. .. + on 196

signata, Uropoda .. .. .. ,. .. 349, 350

signifer, Hypophassus .. .. .. .. .. 196

signifer, Phassus . .. .. .. 186, 188, 196

simplex, Pteridinium .. .. .. .. .. 383

sinensis, Phassus .. .. 160, 162, 167, 168

Rinuata, Ostrea .. ., re 5 129

sinuosocostatus, Chimbuites ; "199, 210,

213, 214, , 215

Smaris .. .. . ee eee

sodalis, Buchananiella . oho ey :- 131

sodalis, Cardiastethnus .. ., 2. 2...) 181

sodalis, Porontellus .. .. .. ,... .. 131

apectabilis, Leptocoris .. .. ., . .. 432

Spirulaea .. oe as ot ek es we ee BBB

spirulacoides, Dimitobelus .. .. ,, ., 201

spirulaeoides, Eotularia ~ 76 201, 299, 223

Spriggina ., .. .. .. 388, 393, 304. 395

Stenogaster .. ., .. .. 368

Stomatella ,. .. 6. 1. 1. 2. w. 187

Stomatia .. 2. 0. ee ee ee ee uy ee 987

THE S.A. MUSEUM

PAGE

Straugesta .. ae b-|

strigile, Haplophylioceran 4- ih ck ba “B08

Strombiformis .. . «+ ee 184, 125

Stronglylocentrosus at netedarf/ sig. 326

BtyApEr ol aye Se OEMS od oy RS

Stylifer .. on 4. 2. 2. 4. 124, 185, 126

Stylimella .. . se eke mel et 126

subglobosus, Holaster 2.” ips -- 206

subruteyeens, Leptocoris -. .. .. .. 426

subsuleata, Blaona .. ,. 0, 2.) .,) 484

Subthurmannia ., .. 6... 4. 2. .. 200

sylvesteri, Pow. 2. ok, » Seep? BOR.

Syntharella 2... 0. 02) wy uk ee 188

Syrotrigonia .. 6. =. we yy, 208

tugalica, Leptocoris . . Pe 439

taitense, Lygaeus .. 6.) y, ye ABB

faitensis, Leptocoris . sheen = 489

talaje, Ornithodorus .. .. .. 2. 2. 69

taprobanenis abdomenalis, Leptovoria . 428

larunu, Endoclita ... -. -. 162, 191, 192

Tateana a. 2... -. , 378, 379, 380, 388

tatei, Xenophorn. teen ab de we, LBS

tenisoni Holima ,. 2...) oe 1

Tetrabolus.. 2... 0. 0. 0, 219, 281

Thalucomys., .) 0... 4) 0... 41, 262

Thylogale .. 6. ys 2. 2. ee, 270

Vibia .. 4. 4. ey tle chelsea ote “BOB

topaziaea, Enlima .,,, ey «+ «- 136

topeza, Endoclita . .. ,, 161, 144, 185

torri, Nassaria .. 2. 2. 2, . 122

tosa, Mndoelita ., 160, 164, 162, 166, 167,

168, 170, 176, 177, 179, 150

trapezia, Anadara .. ., r+ +» 188

trapezia, Area 2. 1... seiner eo 498

Tribrachidium 381, 489, 390, 392,

393, 895

Triehosurns . 71, 74, 74, 78, 79,

80, 41, 250

fridactylus, Potorous , 251, 252, 275, 279,

204, 295

triggi, Melanella .. ~. .- 2... 0. 2.) 1285

Trigonin . .. -. 2. ,. 301, 202, 206, 207

Triodia .. .. -- eevetees Ga Ad, 16

tripidum, Lahecurus . 2... 201, 218, "229

triplageatas, Coleocoris , ,. 221, 229) 230

Tritoniden ., .. -, 2. -. 2. y, 2, 120

tritonis, Murex .. .. 2. -- 0. 0. 4, 120

Trochus. ve pe ce ey nd ae ye ee es) 186

tryoni, Mulima .. 2... , 124

Tubulostium . ,. 2 0. 0. "923, ‘p24 ‘(ref,)

Turrilites ., ,. 2... 2). re ee 218

Tynotoma oe oe ee ee ee ee 408

Uhligella , sale oe es 3: 2. BEB B94

Umbilia .. .. - =. .. 122

ambilicuta armeniacia . Cyprac -- 121, 122

Unie saw oe ot". . 9, 17, 35, 37

Urodiseella De, Bete te 849

Wropoda -. 2. 2. 6. 6. 2. 2. B49